JP7839775B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, in this type of gaming machine, when a game ball enters a starting prize slot in the game area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game can be played, and a special symbol indicating the result of the lottery is determined. At the same time, the special symbol is displayed as it changes, and a specific symbol (jackpot symbol) is displayed as it stops, indicating that the result of the lottery is to play the special game (a jackpot has been won), thereby playing a special game in which a large number of prize balls can be won.
In such gaming machines, in order to enhance the player's enjoyment, multiple game states with varying degrees of advantage are provided, and when a predetermined specific symbol is determined, the game state after the special game ends is set to a game state with a different degree of advantage (for example, a time-saving game state).
Furthermore, in recent years, in order to enhance the interest of players, in addition to the lottery result indicating that a special game will be performed, a specific lottery result has been devised that allows for the setting of a game state with a different degree of advantage (a time-saving game state) without going through the special game, as a different game benefit from performing the special game. By stopping a special symbol (a time-saving symbol) that indicates the specific lottery result, a game state with a different degree of advantage from a predetermined game state is set without going through the special game (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-78994

While the aforementioned gaming machines can enhance player interest, in recent years, with the increasing diversification of gaming, there has been a desire for gaming machines that can offer even more engaging gameplay.

Therefore, this invention was made in light of the circumstances described above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of the player.

To achieve the above-mentioned objectives, the present invention is configured as follows.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a variable means that can be displaced to a first operating state in which it is relatively easy for a game ball to enter a predetermined starting area, or a second operating state in which it is relatively difficult for a game ball to enter the predetermined starting area; a determination means that can derive either a first determination result associated with the execution of a game in which a predetermined large prize opening is opened, or a second determination result associated with the non-execution of a game in which the large prize opening is not executed, based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined starting area; an execution means that executes a game in which the large prize opening is opened, based on the derivation of the first determination result; and a setting means that can execute a setting related to an easy-to-win state in which the variable means is more likely to be in the first operating state than a predetermined normal state , and the easy-to-win state ends when the number of derivations by the determination means reaches a time reduction number determined for each easy-to-win state, and the winning capacity The easy state includes a first easy-to-win state, a second easy-to-win state which is more advantageous than the first easy-to-win state because it has more time-saving rounds than the first easy-to-win state, a third easy-to-win state in which the conditions for becoming the second easy-to-win state can be met, and a fourth easy-to-win state, wherein the fourth easy-to-win state is essentially an easy-to-win state that can continue until the first determination result is derived by the determination means, and the setting means is characterized in that if the second determination result is derived in the first easy-to-win state, the third easy-to-win state can be set, if the second determination result is derived in the third easy-to-win state, the first easy-to-win state can be set, and if the first determination result is derived in the third easy-to-win state, the second easy-to-win state can be set via the fourth easy-to-win state based on the execution of the big prize opening game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of the players.

This is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine according to the first form. This is a perspective view of the first form of the pachinko machine with the front door open. This is a schematic front view of the game board of a pachinko machine according to the first form. This is an external perspective view of the internal rail of a pachinko machine according to the first form. This is an exploded perspective view of the backflow prevention section of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a schematic front view of the backflow prevention unit when the rotating base of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment is in a non-rotating state. This is a schematic front view of the backflow prevention section when the rotating base of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment is in a rotating state. This is a schematic front view of the backflow prevention section when the rotating base of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment is in a rotating state. This is a front view enlarged of the rotating valve in the backflow prevention section when the rotating base of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment is in a rotating state. This is a schematic diagram of the back of a pachinko machine according to the first form. This is an external perspective view of the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is an enlarged view of the second starting prize entry point and movable piece of the pachinko machine according to the first form. This is a schematic front view of the inside of the attacker device of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to the first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the win/loss random number determination table for a pachinko machine in its first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the special symbol random number determination table for the first form of a pachinko machine. This is an explanatory diagram of the special electric mechanism operation table for a pachinko machine in its first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the game state setting table for a pachinko machine in its first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern table for a pachinko machine in its first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern table for a pachinko machine in its first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the stop display time table for a pachinko machine according to the first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the random number determination table for determining the winning combination of a pachinko machine in its first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for a pachinko machine in its first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the movable piece operation control table for a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the control state set when a pachinko machine of the first form recovers from an electrical outage. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the control state set when a pachinko machine of the first form recovers from an electrical outage. This flowchart shows an overview of the power interruption and retraction process in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the main processing steps in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the power interruption recovery process in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the ball difference control reset process in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the timer interrupt processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the sensor detection processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the gate detection processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the processing performed when the first start prize entry point is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the processing performed when the second start prize entry point is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the pre-determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the processing performed when a large prize winning slot is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the general processing when a general prize winning slot is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the processing performed when an out is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the processing performed when a specific area is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the general flow of special feature-related control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the process for initiating special symbol variation in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the win/loss determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the general process for determining the variation pattern in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the process for stopping the special symbol variation in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the outline of the post-stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the special game control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the outline of the special game termination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the general control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the general process for initiating normal symbol variation in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the general process of drawing ordinary symbols on the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the general process for stopping the normal symbol variation in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the post-stop processing of normal symbols in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the outline of the movable piece control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the solenoid control process in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the general processing of the ball difference-related command set in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the ball difference determination control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the general settings-related processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is a state transition diagram showing the transitions between each game state of a pachinko machine in its first form. This is a state transition diagram showing the transitions between the various performance states of a pachinko machine in its first form. This figure shows an example of the variation in the pachinko machine according to the first form. This figure shows an example of the variation in the pachinko machine according to the first form. This figure shows an example of the variation in the pachinko machine according to the first form. This figure shows an example of the variation in the pachinko machine according to the first form. This figure shows an example of the variation in the pachinko machine according to the first form. This figure shows an example of the variation in the pachinko machine according to the first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the variable performance determination table for a pachinko machine in its first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the variable performance determination table for a pachinko machine in its first form. This figure shows an example of various effects and suggestions for a pachinko machine in its first form. This is a flowchart illustrating the main processing steps in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the timer interrupt processing in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the process of receiving game state setting-related commands in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the power interruption recovery command reception process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the process for receiving a stop display termination command in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the process of receiving variable pattern commands in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the process of receiving ball difference-related commands in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This flowchart outlines the process of receiving a prize ball designation command in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram of the win/loss random number determination table in other setting examples of a pachinko machine relating to the first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the special symbol random number determination table in other setting examples of a pachinko machine relating to the first form. This is an explanatory diagram of the win/loss random number determination table for the second form of pachinko machine. This is an explanatory diagram of the special symbol random number determination table for the second form of the pachinko machine. This is an explanatory diagram of the special electric mechanism operation table for a pachinko machine of the second form. This is an explanatory diagram of the game state setting table for a pachinko machine in its second form. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern table for a pachinko machine of the second form. This is an explanatory diagram of the stop display time table for a pachinko machine of the second form. This flowchart outlines the processing performed when a special area is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the outline of the special symbol variation start process in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the second form. This flowchart shows an overview of the win/loss determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. This is a flowchart illustrating the process of stopping the special symbol variation in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the second form. This flowchart outlines the process for setting the game state when a stop is displayed in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the second form. This flowchart outlines the post-stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the second form. This flowchart shows an overview of the small win game control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the second form. This is a flowchart illustrating the outline of the special game termination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the second form. This figure shows an example of the variation effects of a pachinko machine according to the second form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine in its third form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine in its third form. This flowchart outlines the process for stopping the special symbol variation in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the third form. This flowchart outlines the process for updating the remaining number of spins in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the third form. This flowchart outlines the process for updating the remaining number of small wins in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the third form. This flowchart outlines the game state control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the third form. This flowchart outlines the special game termination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine in the third form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine in its fourth form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine in its fourth form. This diagram illustrates the variation pattern table for a pachinko machine in its fourth form. This is a state transition diagram showing the transitions between each game state of a pachinko machine in its fourth form. This flowchart outlines the process for stopping the special symbol variation in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the fourth form. This flowchart outlines the game state control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the fourth form. This flowchart outlines the special game termination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the fourth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the fourth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the fourth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the fourth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the fourth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the fourth form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine in its fifth form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine in its fifth form. This diagram illustrates the variation pattern table for a pachinko machine of the fifth form. This is a state transition diagram showing the transitions between each game state of a pachinko machine in its fifth form. This diagram illustrates the various settings of a pachinko machine according to the fifth modified form, part 1. This diagram illustrates the various settings of a pachinko machine according to the fifth modified form, part 1. This is a state transition diagram showing the transitions between each game state of a pachinko machine according to the fifth modified form 1. This diagram illustrates the various settings of a pachinko machine according to a modified example 2 of the fifth form. This diagram illustrates the various settings of a pachinko machine according to a modified example 2 of the fifth form. This is a state transition diagram showing the transitions between each game state of a pachinko machine according to a modified example 2 of the fifth form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine in its sixth form. This diagram illustrates the variation pattern table for a pachinko machine of the sixth form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine in its sixth form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine in its sixth form. This is a state transition diagram showing the transitions between each game state of a pachinko machine in its sixth form. This flowchart outlines the process for stopping the special symbol variation in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the sixth form. This flowchart shows an overview of the remaining spin count update process in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the sixth form. This flowchart shows an overview of the game state control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the sixth form. This is a flowchart illustrating the general process for initiating normal symbol variation in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the sixth form. This flowchart outlines the post-stop processing of normal symbols in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the sixth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the sixth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the sixth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the sixth form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine related to the seventh form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine related to the seventh form. This is a state transition diagram showing the transitions between each game state of a pachinko machine in its seventh form. This flowchart outlines the process for stopping the special symbol variation in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the seventh form. This flowchart outlines the process for updating the remaining special symbol variation count in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the seventh form. This flowchart outlines the process for updating the remaining number of small wins in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the seventh form. This flowchart outlines the process for updating the remaining number of bonus round wins in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the seventh form. This flowchart shows an overview of the game state control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine according to the seventh form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the seventh form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the seventh form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the seventh form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the seventh form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the seventh form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine in its eighth form. This diagram illustrates the various settings for a pachinko machine in its eighth form. This is a state transition diagram showing the transitions between each game state of a pachinko machine in its eighth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the eighth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the eighth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the eighth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the eighth form. This figure shows an example of the variation and other effects of a pachinko machine according to the eighth form.

(First form)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
(External configuration of pachinko machine P)
The gaming machine in this configuration is a pachinko machine P that uses game balls as the game medium. Although not specifically shown in the diagram, in a gaming parlor where pachinko machines P are installed, multiple pachinko machines P are arranged in a row in an area called an island, and a game ball dispensing device for dispensing game balls is installed adjacent to each pachinko machine P. In addition, each pachinko machine P is connected to a corresponding game ball dispensing device R.
The game ball dispensing device R allows for the insertion of banknotes and a storage medium (card) that stores value information necessary for dispensing game balls. By inserting banknotes (or a card) into the game ball dispensing device R and then performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine P, game balls can be dispensed from the game ball dispensing device R.

The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Figure 1 or Figure 2, comprises: a machine frame 1, a rectangular frame fixed to an island and having a hollow section (not shown); a main body frame 2, a rectangular frame attached to the machine frame 1 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown), and having a hollow section (not shown); and a front door 3 attached to the main body frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown), with an opening (not shown) formed on its front.

As shown in Figure 1, a speaker serving as an audio output device 10 is provided in the lower left part of the machine frame 1. A game board 11 for forming a game area 12 is housed in the hollow part of the main body frame 2. The front door 3 is provided with a transparent plate 4 that covers the opening, an upper tray 6 and a receiving tray 7 located below the transparent plate 4 that can receive game balls, an operating handle 5 attached to the right of the receiving tray 7 for launching game balls, and speakers serving as audio output devices 10, one each attached to the upper left and right sides of the transparent plate 4.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 1, the outer perimeter of the front door 3 is provided with a front door effect lamp DL that emits light in various colors and patterns to create a visual effect, and the upper left of the outer perimeter of the front door 3 is provided with a status notification lamp EL that emits light in various colors to indicate various states that occur when predetermined conditions are met. Both the front door effect lamp DL and the status notification lamp EL are composed of LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors.

In this pachinko machine P, when the main frame 2 is closed to the machine frame 1, and then the front door 3 is closed, the transparent plate 4 is positioned in front of the game board 11, with a gap in between. This allows the game board 11, located behind the machine, to be seen through the transparent plate 4.

Furthermore, the upper tray 6 is designed to receive game balls dispensed by the game ball dispensing device R and prize balls dispensed from the pachinko machine P. The upper tray 6 can hold a predetermined amount of game balls, but when it becomes full, any subsequent game balls dispensed or dispensed are guided to the receiving tray 7. The bottom of the receiving tray 7, although not specifically shown in the diagram, is provided with a discharge hole for discharging the stored game balls and an opening/closing plate that can open and close the discharge hole. Normally, the discharge hole is closed by the opening/closing plate, but by moving the opening/closing lever 8 (see Figure 1), which is integrally attached to the opening/closing plate, in a lateral direction, the opening/closing plate also moves in the same direction, opening the discharge hole. This allows the game balls to fall out of the receiving tray 7 through the discharge hole.

Furthermore, the operating handle 5 is designed to allow the player to rotate it in a predetermined direction. When the player rotates the operating handle 5, the game balls held in the upper tray 6 are sent to a launching device (not specifically shown), and the launching device fires the game balls toward the game area 12 with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the operating handle 5. The launched game balls are then guided upwards by a pair of rails 13a and 13b fixed to the game board 11, and reach the game area 12.

The game area 12 is a portion of the space formed between the game board 11 and the transparent plate 4 when the main frame 2 and the front door 3 are closed relative to the machine frame 1, which is partitioned in a roughly circular shape by a pair of rails 13a and 13b fixed to the game board 11, and is an area in which game balls can flow down.
As shown in Figure 3A, the game area 12 consists of a first game area 12a, which is the area on the left side as viewed from the player facing the pachinko machine P, and a second game area 12b, which is the area on the right side as viewed from the player facing the pachinko machine P. The possibility of game balls entering these two game areas 12 differs depending on the firing intensity of the launching device. Specifically, if the firing intensity of the launching device is less than a predetermined intensity (an intensity such that the game ball launched by the launching device does not reach the highest point of the game area 12), the game ball enters the first game area 12a. On the other hand, if the firing intensity of the launching device is equal to or greater than a predetermined intensity (an intensity such that the game ball launched by the launching device can reach the highest point of the game area 12), the game ball enters the second game area 12b.

Here, we will describe rails 13a and 13b in detail.
The game board 11 is a plate-shaped member with a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front (see Figure 3A), and as described above, a pair of rails 13a and 13b are provided on the surface of the game board 11. In the following, the outer rail 13a (the rail closer to the outer circumference of the game board 11) will be referred to as the outer rail 13a, and the inner rail 13b (the rail further from the outer circumference of the game board 11) will be referred to as the inner rail 13b.

The outer rail 13a is a long, thin metal plate-like member with a width greater than the diameter of the game ball (see Figure 3A), and is mounted (supported) along the base surface of the rail base (not specifically shown) installed on the game board 11. The rail base is a plate-like member with a roughly C-shape in front view, and when installed on the game board 11, it opens downwards to the right and is notched to form an arc shape centered on the approximate center of the game area 12 (game board 11) (i.e., an arc shape that convex to the left). The notched surface formed by this notch becomes the base surface. When mounted on the base surface, the outer rail 13a starts to the left of the lower center of the game board 11 and is arranged in an arc shape that convex to the left, extending to the left edge, top edge, and upper right edge of the game board 11 (see Figure 2).

The inner rail 13b is a long, thin, plate-like member made of synthetic resin, having approximately the same width as the outer rail 13a. It is erected on the surface of the game board 11 so as to face the outer rail 13a with a gap larger than the diameter of the game balls. It is positioned in an arc shape that is convex to the left, starting slightly to the left of the lower center of the game board 11, and extending towards the left edge and upper left edge of the game board 11.
Then, the front of the space sandwiched between the outer rail 13a and the inner rail 13b faces the back of the transparent plate 4b, forming a guide passage 640 through which the game balls launched by the launching device can pass (see Figures 3D to 3G). This guide passage 640 is connected to the game area 12 and guides the game balls launched by the launching device into the game area 12.
Furthermore, a backflow prevention unit 700 is provided at the upper end of the inner rail 13b (the tip of the inner rail 13b, in other words, the boundary between the guide passage 640 and the game area 12) to prevent game balls that have entered the game area 12 from returning to the guide passage 640.

As shown in Figures 3B and 3C, the backflow prevention unit 700 comprises a rotating part 710, a case part 730 in which the rotating part 710 is arranged, and a cover plate 750 that covers the case part 730 with the rotating part 710 in place. The rotating part 710 is attached to the case part 730 and the cover plate 750 so that it can rotate while being sandwiched between them.

The case portion 730 comprises a thin synthetic resin base plate 731 fixed to the game board 11, and a thin synthetic resin side plate 732 erected from a portion corresponding to approximately the right half of the outer edge of the base plate 731 (approximately the right half of the base plate 731 when fixed to the game board 11). The base plate 731 and the side plate 732 form a space S that opens in the direction of the front of the game board 11 and the direction of the guide passage 640 (see Figure 3C).
The base plate 731 is provided with a cylindrical boss 731a located at its upper end (the upper end of the base plate 731 when it is fixed to the game board 11) and extending upright from the base plate 731, a cylindrical base-side bearing portion 731b located below the boss 731a (slightly above the center of the base plate 731) and extending upright from the base plate 731, a roughly fan-shaped guide groove 731c located below the base-side bearing portion 731b (slightly below the center of the base plate 731) and penetrating the base plate 731, and a slender rod-shaped engaging pin 731d located below the guide groove 731c (the lower end of the base plate 731) and extending upright from the base plate 731 (see Figure 3C).

The cover plate 750 is a thin, plate-like member made of synthetic resin that covers the opening in the case portion 730 facing the front of the game board 11. The cover plate 750 is provided with a screw hole 750a positioned to correspond to the boss 731a of the base plate 731 while covering the aforementioned opening, and which penetrates the cover plate 750; a cylindrical cover-side bearing portion 750b positioned to correspond to the base-side bearing portion 731b of the base plate 731 on the back surface of the cover plate 750 (the surface facing the base plate 731 while covering the aforementioned opening), and which rises from the back surface of the cover plate 750; and an engagement hole 750c positioned to correspond to the engagement pin 731d of the base plate 731 while covering the aforementioned opening, and which penetrates the cover plate 750 (see Figure 3C).

The rotating section 710 is a component with a "V"-shaped outer form and comprises a roughly elliptical cylindrical rotating base 711 made of synthetic resin, which is rotatably attached to the base plate 731 and the cover plate 750, and a thin plate-shaped rotating valve 712 made of synthetic resin that protrudes from near the upper end of the rotating base 711 (near the upper end of the rotating base 711 when attached to the case section 730) (see Figure 3C). When the rotating section 710 is attached to the case section 730, the rotating base 711 is located within the space S of the case section 730 and is rotatable within this space S while being sandwiched between the base plate 731 and the cover plate 750. The rotating valve 712 protrudes outside the space S through an opening in the direction of the guide passage 640 in the case section 730 and is rotatable together with the rotating base 711.

The rotating base 711 includes a substantially elliptical base bottom surface 711a that faces the base plate 731 when attached to the case portion 730, a base side surface 711b that rises from the outer peripheral edge of the base bottom surface 711a, and a substantially elliptical base top surface 711c located at the rising end of the base side surface 711b and facing the base bottom surface 711a across the base side surface 711b (see Figure 3C).
Furthermore, in the rotating base portion 711 when attached to the case portion 730, an axial hole 711d is provided that penetrates from the top surface 711c to the bottom surface 711a of the base portion at a position corresponding to the base-side bearing portion 731b of the base plate 731 and the cover-side bearing portion 750b of the cover plate 750, and a guide pin (not specifically shown) is provided that protrudes from the bottom surface 711a toward the base plate 731 at a position corresponding to the guide groove 731c of the base plate 731.
Furthermore, the length from the base bottom surface 711a to the base top surface 711c is slightly shorter than the length from the surface of the base plate 731 of the case portion 730 to the upright end of the side plate 732. As a result, when the rotating portion 710 is attached to the case portion 730, the rotating base portion 711 is housed in the space S, sandwiched between the base plate 731 and the cover plate 750.

The rotating valve 712 is a substantially rectangular thin plate-shaped member that extends vertically upward from the upper left end of the base side surface 711b of the rotating base 711 when it is attached to the case portion 730, and comprises a guide passage side surface 712a facing the direction of the guide passage 640 (facing the guide passage 640), a game area side surface 712b facing the direction of the game area 12 (facing the game area 12) opposite the guide passage side surface 712a, an upper end surface 712c that slopes downward from the upper end edge of the guide passage side surface 712a toward the upper end edge of the game area side surface 712b, and a protruding piece 712d that protrudes toward the game area 12 from the substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the game area side surface 712b (see Figure 3C).
The length from the base side surface 711b to the upper edge of the guide passage side surface 712a is longer than the length from the base side surface 711b to the upper edge of the game area side surface 712b.
Furthermore, when the rotating base 711 is attached to the case portion 730, the rotating valve 712 protrudes from the space S into the guide passage 640 through an opening in the case portion 730 in the direction of the guide passage 640. Under normal conditions, it extends vertically upward within the guide passage 640, with the tip of the rotating valve 712 positioned slightly below the outer rail 13a (see Figure 3D). In other words, the length from the base side surface 711b of the rotating base 711 to the tip of the rotating valve 712 is such that, under normal conditions when the rotating base 711 is attached to the case portion 730, it can almost completely shield the guide passage 640.

When attaching the above-mentioned rotating part 710 to the case part 730 and cover plate 750, first, the base-side bearing part 731b of the base plate 731 is aligned with the shaft hole 711d of the rotating base part 711, and the rotating part 710 is positioned on the case part 730 so that the guide pin of the rotating base part 711 is inserted into the guide groove 731c of the base plate 731. Next, a slender rod-shaped shaft pin 760, with a length extending from the base-side bearing portion 731b to the cover-side bearing portion 750b of the cover plate 750, is inserted through the shaft hole 711d of the rotating base portion 711. Then, the boss 731a of the base plate 731 is aligned with the screw hole 750a of the cover plate 750, and the cover-side bearing portion 750b is aligned with the tip of the shaft pin 760 protruding from the shaft hole 711d of the rotating base portion 711. Furthermore, the cover plate 750 is positioned such that the engagement pin 731d of the base plate 731 is inserted through the engagement hole 750c of the cover plate 750. Finally, by screwing the screw 764 into the boss 731a and screw hole 750a from the surface side of the cover plate 750 (the side facing the back of the cover plate 750), the rotating base 711 is sandwiched between the base plate 731 and the cover plate 750 (with the cover plate 750 covering the opening in the case portion 730 facing the front of the game board 11), and the rotating portion 710 is attached to the case portion 730 and the cover plate 750 (see Figures 3C and 3D, etc.).

Then, as described above, when the rotating part 710 is attached to the case part 730 and the cover plate 750, one end of the shaft pin 760 is locked to the base side bearing part 731b and the other end is locked to the cover side bearing part 750b, so that the rotating base part 711 is supported sandwiched between the base plate 731 and the cover plate 750 so that it can rotate around the shaft pin 760 as its axis.
As described above, the rotating base 711 is a substantially elliptical columnar member, the rotating valve 712 extending from the rotating base 711 is a thin plate-like member, and the rotating base 711 is a heavier member than the rotating valve 712.
As a result, when the rotating part 710 is attached to the case part 730 and the cover plate 750, under normal conditions, the rotating base part 711 is biased to rotate counterclockwise around the shaft pin 760 by its own weight, but the guide pin inserted through the guide groove 731c of the base plate 731 is stationary in contact with the left end of the guide groove 731c. At this time, the rotating valve 712 extends vertically upward within the guide passage 640, and the guide passage 640 is almost completely shielded by the rotating valve 712 (see Figure 3D).
In response to this, when a game ball launched by the launcher and rising through the guided passage 640 comes into contact with the guided passage side surface 712a of the rotating piece 712, the rotating base 711 rotates clockwise around the axis pin 760 against its own weight until the game area side surface 712b of the rotating piece 712 comes into contact with the side surface of the boss 731a on the base plate 731. Furthermore, when the game area side surface 712b comes into contact with the side surface of the boss 731a, the rotating valve 712 extends upward and to the right (towards the upper end of the game area 12), and the guided passage 640 is opened (see Figure 3E).

Next, the rotation of the rotating valve 712 and the prevention of backflow by the rotating valve 712 into the guide passage 640 for game balls that have entered the game area 12 will be described in detail. In the following, the normal state when the rotating part 710 is attached to the case part 730 and cover plate 750 (when the rotating valve 712 extends vertically upward) may be referred to as the "non-rotating state," the state when the rotating base 711 rotates and the game area 712b contacts the side surface of the boss 731a may be referred to as the "rotating state," and the state between the non-rotating state and the rotating state (when the rotating base 711 is rotating) may be referred to as the "rotating state."

As described above, in the non-rotating state, the rotating valve 712 extends vertically upward within the guide passage 640. At this time, the distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 (the upper edge of the guide passage side surface 712a) to the outer rail 13a is shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, it is the shortest distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a during the transition from the non-rotating state to the rotating state.
Furthermore, as described above, in the rotating state, the rotating valve 712 extends upward and to the right, and the distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a at this time is longer than the diameter of the game ball, and moreover, it is the longest distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a during the transition from the non-rotating state to the rotating state.

In the non-rotating state, when a game ball launched by the launcher and rising within the guide passage 640 comes into contact with the guide passage side surface 712a of the rotating piece 712, the rotating base 711 rotates until it reaches the rotating state. As described above, in this rotating state, the distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a is longer than the diameter of the game ball, and the guide passage 640 is opened. As a result, the game ball that has come into contact with the guide passage side surface 712a enters the game area 12.
After the game ball enters the game area 12, the force generated by the game ball contacting the guide passage side surface 712a is released, causing the rotating base 711 to quickly rotate counterclockwise under its own weight and become non-rotating. In this non-rotating state, the guide pin is in contact with the left end of the guide groove 731c, so the rotating base 711 cannot rotate any further counterclockwise. Also, the distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a is shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and the guide passage 640 is almost completely shielded by the rotating valve 712. As a result, even if a game ball that has entered the game area 12 comes into contact with, for example, a windmill or a nail and moves from the game area 12 towards the guide passage 640, it will come into contact with the game area side surface 712b of the rotating valve 712, preventing it from entering the guide passage 640. In this way, when the valve is not rotating, the rotating valve 712 prevents the game balls that have entered the game area 12 from returning to the guide passage 640.

Furthermore, during the rotational state, which is the transition from the rotational state to the non-rotating state, there are cases where a game ball BB that has entered the game area 12 but is attempting to return to the guide passage 640 (hereinafter also referred to as a returning game ball) and a game ball BG that has been launched by the launching device, is rising within the guide passage 640, and is attempting to enter the game area 12 (hereinafter also referred to as an entering game ball) come into contact (hereinafter also referred to as a rotational contact state) (see Figures 3F and 3G).

In this rotating contact state, the incoming game ball BG is in contact with the guide passage side surface 712a of the rotating valve 712, the outer rail 13a, and the returning game ball BB, while the returning game ball BB is in contact with the tip of the rotating valve 712, the outer rail 13a, and the incoming game ball BG (see Figures 3F and 3G).
Furthermore, in this rotating contact state, the distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a is longer than the distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a in the non-rotating state, and shorter than the distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a in the rotating state. Moreover, the distance D1 from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a is shorter than the distance D2 from the lowest point P of the returning game ball BB to the outer rail 13a (see Figure 3G).
Furthermore, in this rotating contact state, the tip of the rotating piece 712 is positioned to the upper left of the lowest point P of the returning game ball BB (i.e., above and to the left of the lowest point P of the returning game ball BB) (see Figure 3G).

In this rotating contact state, when the incoming game ball BG and the returning game ball BB come into contact, and the returning game ball BB attempts to return into the guide passage 640, the returning game ball BB will come into contact with the tip of the rotating valve 712 from the direction of the game area 12. As a result, the rotating valve 712, which has come into contact with the returning game ball BB, will rotate counterclockwise and attempt to displace to a non-rotating state. Consequently, as it displaces towards a non-rotating state, the distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a gradually shortens, and the guide passage 640 becomes shielded by the rotating valve 712. Therefore, in this case, although the incoming game ball BG, which is rising in the guide passage 640, will flow down (reverse flow) in the guide passage 640 from which it has risen, it becomes difficult for the returning game ball BB to return into the guide passage 640. In this manner, if contact occurs during rotation, and the incoming game ball BG and the returning game ball BB come into contact at the boundary between the guide passage 640 and the game area 112, it is possible to prevent the returning game ball BB from returning to the guide passage 640, thereby preventing both the incoming game ball BG and the returning game ball BB from flowing down the guide passage 640.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned rotating contact state, if the distance D1 from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a is longer than the distance D2 from the lowest point P of the returning game ball BB to the outer rail 13a, then after the entering game ball BG and the returning game ball BB come into contact, the returning game ball BB is more likely to get stuck in the gap between the tip of the rotating valve 712 and the outer guide rail 13a. If the returning game ball BB gets stuck in this gap, the rotating valve 712 will rotate clockwise due to the returning game ball BB, causing it to displace into a rotating state. As a result of this displacement towards a rotating state, the distance from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a gradually increases, and the guide passage 640 opens, causing the returning game ball BB to return into the guide passage 640.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in the aforementioned contact state during rotation, the distance D1 from the tip of the rotating valve 712 to the outer rail 13a is shorter than the distance D2 from the lowest point P of the returning game ball BB to the outer rail 13a, thus preventing the above-mentioned situation from occurring.

The explanation of game area 12 will now return.
Within the game area 12, as shown in Figures 2 and 3A, there is a windmill and numerous nails to make the direction of the flow of the game balls irregular, a general prize entry point 14 into which the game balls can enter, a first start prize entry point 15 and a second start prize entry point 16 as starting areas, a gate 20 through which the game balls can pass, an attacker device 17 that operates when predetermined conditions are met, an out entry point 19 that guides the game balls out of the game area 12, and a performance display device 21 that performs various effects and various suggestions (notifications) in accordance with the progress of the game, a game board performance lamp GL, a right-hand shooting notification lamp RL (not specifically shown), and a special effect performance device YS. Note that in Figure 3A, only some of the nails are shown, and the other nails are omitted.

As shown in Figure 3A, the general prize slot 14 is located slightly to the left of the lower center of the game area 12. When a game ball enters the general prize slot 14, a predetermined number of prize balls (5 in this configuration) are dispensed.
Furthermore, there are no particular restrictions on the number or location of the 14 general prize entry slots.

The first starting prize entry point 15 is located slightly below the center of the game area 12, as shown in Figure 3A. In this pachinko machine P, only game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize entry point 15; game balls flowing down the second game area 12b cannot enter.

As shown in Figure 3A, gate 20 is located at the top of the second game area 12b (slightly above the center of the right side of the game area 12). In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through gate 20, while game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through gate 20. Furthermore, the machine is configured so that almost all game balls that enter the second game area 12b pass through gate 20.
When a game ball passes through gate 20, a lottery for a regular symbol, as described later, is held. If the result of the lottery for the regular symbol is a win, the movable piece 16b, as described later, is made to protrude for a predetermined time.

Below the gate 20, as shown in Figure 3A, a second starting prize entry opening 16 and a flat, movable piece 16b (a standard electric mechanism) that can protrude from and retract into the game board 11 are arranged side by side.
The upper surface of the movable piece 16b is formed to slope downward from the right end to the left end when it is protruding from the game board 11. The right end of the movable piece 16b is located directly below the gate 20, and the second starting prize entry opening 16 is located to the left of the left end of the movable piece 16b. The second starting prize entry opening 16 is cup-shaped and opens upward, so that game balls that reach the opening enter the second starting prize entry opening 16. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the time it takes for a game ball at the upper right end of the movable piece 16b to reach the opening of the second starting prize entry opening 16 (hereinafter also referred to as the opening arrival time) is configured to be approximately 0.3 seconds.
When the movable piece 16b is protruding from the game board 11 (hereinafter also referred to as the protruding state), the upper surface of the movable piece 16b functions as a guide member that guides the game ball to the opening of the second starting prize entry hole 16 (see Figure 4(b)). In contrast, when the movable piece 16b is immersed in the game board 11 (hereinafter also referred to as the immersed state), the movable piece 16b is unable to guide the game ball to the opening of the second starting prize entry hole 16 (see Figure 4(a)).
Furthermore, only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the second starting prize entry point 16, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter it.

Furthermore, the second starting prize entry opening 16 and the movable piece 16b are not limited to the configuration described above.
For example, a movable piece 16b may be provided as a wing member that rotates left and right around an axis perpendicular to the game board 11 to open and close the second starting prize opening 16. Specifically, when the movable piece 16b (wing member) is closed, the second starting prize opening 16 is closed and it is not possible for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening 16. However, when the movable piece 16b is opened, the second starting prize opening 16 is opened and this movable piece 16b functions as a guide member that guides game balls toward the second starting prize opening 16, thereby making it possible for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening 16.
Furthermore, the movable piece 16b may be a lid member that rotates in the front-to-back direction around an axis horizontal to the game board 11 to open and close the second starting prize entry opening 16, or it may be a shutter member that slides in the up-and-down direction to open and close the second starting prize entry opening 16.

Furthermore, the installation locations of the first starting prize entry point 15 and the second starting prize entry point 16 are not particularly limited. For example, the first starting prize entry point 15 and the second starting prize entry point 16 may be positioned in a location that makes it easy for game balls flowing down either of the game areas 12 (first game area 12a, second game area 12b) to enter.

When a game ball enters the first starting prize slot 15 or the second starting prize slot 16, a predetermined number of prize balls are dispensed, and a draw is held to determine whether or not a jackpot is won (hereinafter also referred to as "jackpot win/failure") and whether or not a time-saving game state is granted (hereinafter also referred to as "time-saving granting win/failure"). Depending on the result of the draw, one special symbol is selected from a predetermined set of special symbols. There are multiple types of special symbols that can be selected, and depending on the type of special symbol selected, the player is granted game benefits such as the execution of a special game that is advantageous to them, or the granting of a time-saving game state (setting of time-saving game state JT1 or JT2, described later).
Furthermore, the number of prize balls dispensed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15 or the second starting prize slot 16 is not particularly limited as long as it is one or more, and may be any number. In addition, the number of prize balls dispensed from the first starting prize slot 15 (a starting prize slot without a movable piece 16b) and the second starting prize slot 16 (a starting prize slot with a movable piece 16b) may be the same or different. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the number of prize balls dispensed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15 is 3, and the number of prize balls dispensed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16 is 1.

As shown in Figure 3A, the attacker device 17 is located approximately in the center of the right side of the game area 12 (below the second starting prize entry opening 16 and the movable piece 16b). This attacker device 17 includes a large prize entry opening 18 into which game balls can be entered, and an opening/closing door 18b that opens and closes the large prize entry opening 18. Under normal conditions, the opening/closing door 18b is closed and the large prize entry opening 18 is closed, making it impossible for game balls to enter the large prize entry opening 18. However, when the special game described above is performed, the opening/closing door 18b opens and the large prize entry opening 18 is opened, making it possible for game balls to enter the large prize entry opening 18. Specifically, during the special game described above, a round game in which the large prize entry opening 18 is opened is performed multiple times. When one game ball enters the large prize entry opening 18, a predetermined number of prize balls (15 in this configuration) are dispensed.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 3A, game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the large prize opening 18, but game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot. In addition, although not specifically shown, nails and windmills are arranged so that almost all game balls flowing down the second game area 12b, except for those that enter the second starting prize opening 16, can reach the large prize opening 18. Therefore, as long as the large prize opening 18 is open and game balls are continuously launched, the game balls will enter the large prize opening 18.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 5(a) and (b), the attacker device 17 is provided with a rolling path 51 that allows game balls that have entered the large prize opening 18 to roll to the left. This rolling path 51 branches into an upper passage 52 and a lower passage 53 at predetermined positions in the rolling direction. A general area 58 is provided at the end of the upper passage 52, allowing game balls that have entered the large prize opening 18 to enter, while a specific area 57 is provided at the end of the lower passage 53, allowing game balls that have entered the large prize opening 18 to enter (see Figures 5(a) and (b)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 5(a) and (b), a distribution member 59 is provided at the point where the upper passage 52 and the lower passage 53 diverge, distributing the game balls to either the upper passage 52 or the lower passage 53. This distribution member 59 is rotatable around an axis perpendicular to the game board 11, and can be displaced between a first position that opens the path to the upper passage 52 and blocks the path to the lower passage 53, and a second position that blocks the path to the upper passage 52 and opens the path to the lower passage 53. When the distribution member 59 is in the first position, the game balls proceed to the upper passage 52 and enter the general area 58; when the distribution member 59 is in the second position, they proceed to the lower passage 53 and enter the specific area 57.

Furthermore, although not specifically shown in the diagram, the attacker device 17 is provided with a specific area discharge port for discharging game balls that have entered the specific area 57 to the outside of the large prize opening 18 (the back side of the game board 11), and a general area discharge port for discharging game balls that have entered the general area 58 to the outside of the large prize opening 18 (the back side of the game board 11).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the manner of opening and closing of the opening and closing door 18b and the manner of operation of the distribution member 59 during the round game performed during the special game described above are set for each type of special symbol determined when a jackpot is won.
In the pachinko machine P according to this form, if a predetermined number of game balls (one in this form) enter the specific area 57 during a specific round of gameplay, the game state after the special game ends is set to a high-probability time-saving game state, which is a game state that combines a high-probability game state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player, and a time-saving game state JT2 described later. On the other hand, if a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during a specific round of gameplay (i.e., if all the game balls that entered the large prize pocket 18 enter the general area 58), the game state after the special game ends is set to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which is a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2.
The opening and closing patterns of the opening and closing door 18b, the operation patterns of the distribution member 59, and the settings for the game state will be described in detail later.
Furthermore, as described above, instead of setting the game state after the special game to a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 based on whether a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 during the round game in the special game, the game state after the special game may be set to a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 depending on the type of special symbol determined when a jackpot is won. For example, when a jackpot is won and a specific special symbol is determined, the game state after the special game may be set to a high-probability time-saving game state, but when a special symbol other than the specific special symbol is determined, the game state after the special game may be set to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or a normal game state. In this way, when the game state after the special game is determined according to the type of special symbol, it is not necessary to provide the specific area 57 described above.

As shown in Figure 3A, the out-out opening 19 is located at the bottom of the game area 12 and receives game balls that did not enter any of the general prize-winning openings 14, the first starting prize-winning opening 15, the second starting prize-winning opening 16, or the large prize-winning opening 18. The game balls received in the out-out opening 19 are then guided to the back side of the game board 11 and collected.

As shown in Figure 3A, the performance display device 21 is located approximately in the center of the game area 12. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the performance display device 21. The performance display device 21 is provided with a display unit 21a for displaying images such as videos and still images. In addition to displaying a background image, the display unit 21a displays performance symbols 50 (dummy symbols) in a variable manner, and a variable performance is performed to inform the player of the result of the win or loss lottery based on the stopping display pattern of each performance symbol 50.
Furthermore, during the special game, the display unit 21a displays an opening sequence that is performed at the start of the special game, a round game sequence that is performed during the round game described later, and an ending sequence that is performed after all round games have finished (at the end of the special game) (hereinafter, the opening sequence, round game sequence, and ending sequence are collectively referred to as the special game sequence). The opening sequence displays an opening image, the round game sequence displays a round game image, and the ending sequence displays an ending image.
The display device 21 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device; for example, a drum-type display device that uses multiple drums with patterns on their outer edges to display various information may also be used.

As shown in Figure 2, the game board display lamp GL is located at the top of the game area 12 and is a device that provides effects and hints by emitting light in various colors and light patterns. The game board display lamp GL is composed of LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors. There are no particular limitations on the installation position or number of game board display lamps GL.
The right-hand hit notification lamp RL, although not specifically shown in the diagram, is located to the right of the performance display device 21 and is composed of an LED that can be turned on and off.

The YS special effect device is a device that performs effects by operating in a predetermined manner.
As shown in Figure 2, the YS mechanism in this configuration is a disc-shaped structure and is capable of vertical displacement (movement) by a drive motor M (not shown) within a range from an initial position corresponding to the upper center of the game area 12 to a movable position corresponding to a position above the center of the game area 12. Furthermore, at the movable position, the YS mechanism can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by a rotation motor RM (not shown). Normally, the YS mechanism remains stationary at the initial position, and at various timings (for example, during the execution of the reach development effect described later), it is displaced to the movable position, and at this movable position, a mechanism rotation effect is performed in which the YS rotates clockwise or counterclockwise (operates in a predetermined manner).
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the initial position described above is above the center upper end of the performance display device 21, and the movable position described above is at the center upper end of the performance display device 21. That is, the special effect device YS does not overlap with the performance display device 21 in its initial position where it is normally stationary, but in the movable position it overlaps with the performance display device 21 in front of it, with a predetermined gap in between. This prevents the variable effects performed by the performance display device 21 from being obstructed by the special effect device YS in normal conditions, and ensures the visibility of the variable effects. On the other hand, the special effect rotation effect is performed when the special effect device YS is displaced to the movable position, so the player's attention can be drawn to the special effect rotation effect. Also, when the special effect device YS is in the movable position, it overlaps with the activation warning character image, which will be described later, displayed on the display unit 21a, in front of it, and the activation warning character image becomes difficult or impossible to see due to the special effect device YS.
Furthermore, the effects performed by the YS mechanism are not limited to mechanism rotation effects. For example, the YS mechanism may be equipped with an LED or other lamp, and the device may be configured to perform effects in which this lamp lights up in a predetermined manner.
The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment is equipped with, as a performance device, a performance display device 21, a speaker as the aforementioned sound output device 10, and a lamp as a performance lighting device 23 (see Figure 1) that performs by emitting light in various colors and lighting patterns.
Furthermore, the performance devices are not limited to these, and may include, for example, performance props that move at various timings and in various manners.

In front of the upper tray 6, there is an effect control device 9 that allows the player to operate it to advance or switch between effects that are executed during gameplay or while waiting. The effect control device 9 consists of a circular ring-shaped frame with a rotatable operation dial 9a and an operation button 9b that is fitted into the operation dial 9a and can be pressed. When a predetermined effect is being executed by the effect display device 21, rotating the operation dial 9a or pressing the operation button 9b will advance various effects such as variable effects or switch to different displays.
Furthermore, the performance control device 9 is not limited to the operation dial 9a or operation buttons 9b, but may also include a directional pad that allows input in the up, down, left, and right directions. Alternatively, in addition to providing the performance control device 9 such as the operation dial 9a or operation buttons 9b, the aforementioned directional pad may also be provided separately.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 3A, a first special symbol display device 30, a second special symbol display device 31, a first special symbol hold display device 38, a second special symbol hold display device 39, a normal symbol display device 32, and a normal symbol hold display device 33 are provided in the lower right part of the game board 11 and outside the game area 12, as devices for displaying various statuses related to the game.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine P in this configuration is electrically connected to a game ball dispensing device R. However, the pachinko machine P is designed to accept operations on the game ball dispensing device R, such as dispensing game balls and ejecting cards. Therefore, as shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine P is equipped with a value information display device 35 that displays the value information (balance information) stored on the card, a pressable ball dispensing button 36, and a pressable card return button 37.

Furthermore, on the back side of the game board 11, as shown in Figure 3H, a main control board 100, which stores setting values and the control status of the pachinko machine P (described later) and controls the basic operation of the pachinko machine P, is mounted in a transparent box-shaped main control board case 150. A launch/dispensing control board 200, which controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls, is mounted in a transparent box-shaped launch/dispensing control board case 250. A sub-control board 300, which controls various effects, is mounted in a transparent box-shaped sub-control board case 350. A game ball dispensing control board 400, which relays operations to the game ball dispensing device R, is mounted in a transparent box-shaped game ball dispensing control board case 450.

Furthermore, a power supply board 600 for supplying power to each circuit board is provided on the back side of the game board 11, and a power switch 650 is provided on this power supply board 600.
The power switch 650 can be switched on or off. When the power switch 650 is turned on, power is supplied from the power supply board 600 to each board, and when the power switch 650 is turned off, the power supply from the power supply board 600 to each board is stopped.
In this specification, the act of turning on the power switch 650 and supplying power is also referred to as "the power being turned on," and the act of turning off the power switch 650 and ceasing to supply power is also referred to as "the power being turned off."

(Configuration of the control means for the pachinko machine P)
Next, we will describe the control means for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine P.
As shown in Figure 6, the control means described above consists of a main control board 100, a launch/dispensing control board 200, a sub-control board 300, a game ball dispensing control board 400, and a power supply board 600.
As shown in Figure 6, the main control board 100 is connected to the launch/dispensing control board 200 and the sub-control board 300, and the launch/dispensing control board 200 is connected to the game ball dispensing control board 400. The main control board 100 and the launch/dispensing control board 200 are also connected to an external information terminal board 500 for transmitting various external signals (hereinafter also referred to as external information) related to the progress of the game to an external device (for example, the hall computer of the amusement arcade) outside the pachinko machine P. A power supply board 600 is also connected to each board.

(Overview of the main control board 100)
As described above, the main control board 100 stores setting values and the control status of the pachinko machine P, and controls the games played in the pachinko machine P. Specifically, it controls special symbol games (winning/losing, determination of special symbols, display of special symbol variations (hereinafter also referred to as special symbol variations), etc.) that are started when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15 or the second starting prize entry point 16, regular symbol games (drawing for regular symbols, display of regular symbol variations (hereinafter also referred to as regular symbol variations), etc.) that are started when a game ball passes through the gate 20, and the special games mentioned above.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, only one setting value of 1 is defined for the setting of the number of balls dispensed, and the win/loss random number determination table 110 used in the win/loss lottery described later is provided to correspond to this setting value 1.
Regarding the settings for the number of balls dispensed, it is possible to define not only one level, but also multiple levels, such as six levels from setting value 1 to setting value 6. When multiple levels are defined for the settings for the number of balls dispensed, the probability of winning a jackpot in the win/loss lottery can be set to differ depending on the difference in these setting values. For example, the probability of winning a jackpot can be set to be higher at setting value 6 than at setting value 1, and if the probability of winning a jackpot is higher, the possibility of winning prize balls also increases, so by changing the setting value, the amount of prize balls expected to be dispensed in that pachinko machine P changes. The win/loss random number judgment table 110 used in the win/loss lottery is set up to correspond to each of the setting values from 1 to 6, and when the setting value is changed, the entire win/loss random number judgment table 110 set up for each setting value is changed.
As described later, the main control board 100 is provided with a RAM clear switch 109 and a setting switch 108. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the front door 3 is open and both the RAM clear switch 109 and the setting switch 108 are turned on, the machine transitions to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed. In this setting change state, the setting value can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 109. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, only one setting value of 1 is set for the setting related to the number of balls dispensed, so even if the RAM clear switch 109 is pressed in the setting change state, the setting value remains at 1 (i.e., the setting value is not changed).
In addition, whether a pachinko machine has only one setting for payouts or multiple settings for payouts, the same control and processing can be performed with respect to the setting value (i.e., a common processing program (module) is provided for the control and processing of the setting value). However, in a pachinko machine with only one setting for payouts, as in this embodiment, the setting value will not be changed even if the RAM clear switch 109 is pressed while the setting is being changed, as described above. In this specification, various controls and processes related to the setting value will be explained assuming a pachinko machine with multiple settings for payouts, and, where necessary, the differences in control and processing when only one setting for payouts is provided, as in this embodiment, will be explained as supplementary information.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the pachinko machine P in this form is configured to remain in one of four control states: a playable state in which the game can be played, a setting confirmation state in which the set setting values can be checked, a setting change state in which the set setting values can be changed, and a play stopped state in which the game cannot be played, nor can the setting values be checked or changed.
Furthermore, when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in the setting change state, the set setting value can be changed (switched) by pressing the RAM clear switch 109 described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, only one setting value of 1 is defined, so pressing the RAM clear switch 109 while in the setting change state will not change the setting value.
The storage and modification of settings, the control state set when the power is turned on, and other related details will be explained in detail later.

In this embodiment, the main control board 100 is a rectangular plate-shaped substrate, and is a single-sided substrate (one-layer substrate) with a wiring pattern provided on only one side, as shown in Figure 3I. Alternatively, the main control board 100 may be a double-sided substrate (two-layer substrate) with wiring patterns provided on both sides.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 3I, the surface of the main control board 100 is provided with a one-chip type main IC 104 that integrates the main CPU 101, main ROM 102, and main RAM 103, as well as several other ICs, a main information display device 105, a connector 106, a test-only output terminal 107, a setting switch 108, a RAM clear switch 109, and the like.

The main CPU 101 is a device that performs various calculations. The main ROM 102 is a device (Read Only Memory) equipped with a memory area that stores specification codes indicating the specifications of the pachinko machine P (types of high and low probability of winning a jackpot, method for determining the game state after the special game ends, etc.), control programs necessary for the game, tables, etc. (such as the win/fail random number determination table 110 and the special symbol random number determination table 111, which will be described later). The main RAM 103 is a device (Read Write Memory) equipped with a read/write memory area that can store the above-mentioned setting values, the control state of the pachinko machine P, various data related to the progress of the game, etc., and is used for storing temporary data during calculations performed by the main CPU 101.
The main CPU 101 reads control programs and tables stored in the main ROM 102 based on signals from various sensors and timers, which will be described later, and performs calculation processing. It also controls various devices connected to the main CPU 101 and performs processing such as sending commands to other boards (such as the sub-control board 300) based on the results of the calculation processing.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, the storage area of the main RAM 103 in this embodiment is broadly composed of a used area, which is the area from a predetermined starting address (for example, F00H (alphanumeric characters with "H" appended to the end are hexadecimal representations; the same applies hereinafter)) to a predetermined ending address (for example, F200H), and an unused area, which is the area from a specific starting address (for example, F300H) to a specific ending address (for example, F400H) that is at least a predetermined distance (for example, 16 bytes) from the ending address of the used area.

Although not specifically shown in the diagram, the usable area consists of four regions arranged sequentially from a predetermined starting address to a predetermined ending address: the first region, the second region, the third region, and the fourth region.
The first area stores the set value and a game machine status flag indicating the control state during use (game-ready state, setting confirmation state, setting change state, game-stopped state). The second area stores the checksum of the main RAM 103 calculated when the power is turned off, and a backup flag to determine whether there was an abnormality in the backup process of the main RAM 103 performed when the power is turned off. The third area stores information such as errors that occurred in the pachinko machine P.
Furthermore, the fourth area stores various data related to the progress of the game (information on the special symbols during the variation described later, the launch position of the game balls (the game area 12 from which the game balls are launched), the number of reserved special symbols for the first time, the number of reserved special symbols for the second time, the number of high probability rounds, the number of time-saving rounds, execution phase data indicating the progress of the special symbol game, the number of reserved regular symbols, regular symbol execution phase data indicating the progress of the regular symbol game, information indicating that the special symbols are not variation, etc.). Note that the data stored in the fourth area is not limited to these, and for example, in a pachinko machine P that is set so that a special variation pattern is determined when the number of variations after the special game ends reaches a certain number, the information on the aforementioned specific number of variations may also be stored.

Furthermore, unused areas store data such as the number of balls launched and the number of prize balls dispensed since the start of gameplay in the initial state after factory shipment. Specifically, the total number of prize balls based on game balls entering the general prize slot 14, the first start prize slot 15, the second start prize slot 16, and the large prize slot 18 (hereinafter referred to as the total number of prize balls), the total number of prize balls based on game balls entering the large prize slot 18 (hereinafter referred to as the total number of prize balls for special electric prizes), and the total number of prize balls based on game balls entering the first start prize slot 15, the second start prize slot 16, and the large prize slot 18 (hereinafter referred to as the total number of prize balls for prizes).
In this unused area, information related to the game, such as the payout rate, special electric prize ratio, and prize ratio, is calculated based on the aforementioned data such as the number of balls launched and the number of prize balls awarded.
Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of balls launched, and is calculated as total prize balls / number of balls launched. The special electric prize ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls from the special electric prize to the total number of prize balls, and is calculated as total number of prize balls from the special electric prize / total number of prize balls. The prize ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls from the prize to the total number of prize balls, and is calculated as total number of prize balls from the prize / total number of prize balls.

The data stored in the unused area is not limited to these; for example, the total number of prize balls based on the number of game balls entering the general prize slot 14 may also be stored.
Furthermore, in this specification, data such as the number of balls launched and the number of prize balls dispensed, which are stored in the unused area mentioned above, are also referred to as "game performance data," and information related to the game, such as the payout rate mentioned above, is also referred to as "game performance display information."

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the ball count value used for the ball count-based operation stop control (hereinafter also referred to as ball difference operation stop control) described later, ball difference operation stop control phase data for setting various states related to the ball difference operation stop control (described later as the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notification state, and activation state), test signal information described later, and activation security information described later are stored in a specific area in the unused area. Note that the ball count value, ball difference operation stop control phase data, test signal information, and activation security information may be stored in the first or fourth area of the used area, for example, instead of in the unused area.
The control mechanism for stopping the ball difference operation will be explained in detail later.

The main information display device 105 is a device that displays various types of information and is composed of four 7-segment displays with decimal points arranged side by side. In this embodiment, the main information display device 105 does not have a built-in processing unit such as a CPU that independently performs calculations on the received data, and only displays data based on the data received from the main IC 104.
Specifically, during the settings confirmation state or the settings change state, the setting values stored in the used area (first area) of the main RAM 103 are displayed. Furthermore, during the playable state, game performance display information stored in the unused area of the main RAM 103 is displayed. Additionally, during the game stopped state or if an error occurs in the pachinko machine P, a code indicating this is displayed.
The main information display device 105 may be configured not only as a 7-segment display, but also as a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, or the like. Furthermore, the main information display device 105 may incorporate other devices as long as it does not have a built-in device for independently processing data received from the main IC 104. For example, it may incorporate a driver circuit for controlling the operation of the main information display device 105.

The connectors 106 are used to connect various harnesses, cables, etc., and multiple connectors are provided on the surface of the main control board 100.
Furthermore, the dedicated test output terminal 107 is a terminal for outputting test signals used during type approval testing, and is provided on the surface of the main control board 100. Here, type approval testing is a test to determine whether the pachinko machine P conforms to predetermined rules, and the test signals are signals used during type approval testing. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, various test signals are generated by the main CPU 101 at various timings, and the generated test signals can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine P from the dedicated test output terminal 107. Specifically, a test computer (not shown in particular) is used for type approval testing, and this test computer is provided with a dedicated receiving terminal (not shown in particular) that can be connected to the dedicated test output terminal 107. When the above-mentioned receiving terminal is connected to the dedicated test output terminal 107, the test signals generated by the main CPU 101 and output from the dedicated test output terminal 107 are input to the test computer outside the pachinko machine P via this receiving terminal.
The output of the test signal will be described in detail later.

Furthermore, the setting switch 108 is referenced when the power is turned on to set the control state (game-ready state, setting confirmation state, setting change state, game-stopped state). The setting switch 108 is provided with an operating part (not shown in the figure) that has a keyhole, and is designed to be rotated when a predetermined key is inserted into the keyhole. Under normal conditions, the setting switch 108 is off, but when the rotation operation is performed, the setting switch 108 turns on.
Furthermore, the RAM clear switch 109 is used to clear various data stored in the main RAM 103 and to change setting values. The RAM clear switch 109 is equipped with a push button 109a (see Figure 3I) that can be pressed. When the push button 109a is not pressed, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, but when the push button 109a is pressed, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the power is turned on from off (when power is restored from an interruption), one of the control states is set according to the control state that was in place before the power was turned off (immediately before the interruption occurred), whether the setting switch 108 is on or off at the time the power is turned on (when power is restored from an interruption), whether the RAM clear switch 109 is on or off, whether the main frame open detection sensor 2a (described later) is on or off (i.e., whether the main frame 2 is open or closed), whether or not an abnormality occurred in the backup process of the main RAM 103 that is performed at the time the power is turned off, and whether or not an abnormality occurred in the main RAM 103.
Furthermore, by operating the push button 109a while the settings are being changed (the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on), the setting value can be changed (switched). As described above, the setting value is stored in the usage area of the main RAM 103, and when the setting value is changed, the setting value stored in this usage area of the main RAM 103 is changed.

In this configuration, the main RAM 103 stores various data related to the progress of the game, in addition to the game performance data and setting values mentioned above (such as the number of first special symbol reserves, the number of second special symbol reserves, execution phase data indicating the progress of special symbol games, the number of regular symbol reserves, and regular symbol execution phase data indicating the progress of regular symbol games, as described later).
The devices and electronic components provided on the surface of the main control board 100 are not limited to those described above. For example, switches for displaying various types of information on the main information display device 105 and switching the displayed content may also be provided.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, both clearing the data stored in the main RAM 103 and changing the setting value are performed by operating the RAM clear switch 109, but this is not limited to this. For example, a separate and independent setting change switch may be provided, with the RAM clear switch 109 set to be used to clear the data stored in the main RAM 103, and the setting change switch set to be used to change the setting value.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 6, the main control board 100 includes a general prize entry sensor 14a that detects when a game ball enters the general prize entry 14, a first start prize entry sensor 15a that detects when a game ball enters the first start prize entry 15, a second start prize entry sensor 16a that detects when a game ball enters the second start prize entry 16, a large prize entry sensor 18a that detects when a game ball enters the large prize entry 18, and a gate detection sensor that detects when a game ball passes through the gate 20. 20a is connected to a setting switch 108, a RAM clear switch 109, a magnetic detection sensor 70a that detects magnetic fields directed towards the game board 11, a radio wave detection sensor 71a that detects radio waves irradiated onto specific locations on the game board 11 (first starting prize entry 15, second starting prize entry 16, big prize entry 18, etc.), a vibration detection sensor 72 that detects vibrations caused by fraudulent activities such as shaking the pachinko machine P, and a specific area detection sensor 57a that detects when a game ball enters a specific area 57.
The detection signals output from each of these detection sensors, as well as signals indicating whether each switch is on or off, are input to the main control board 100.
The sensors connected to the main control board 100 are not limited to these; for example, a general area detection sensor that detects when a game ball enters the general area 58 may also be provided.

The magnetic detection sensor 70a turns on when it detects a magnetism and outputs a magnetic detection signal to the main control board 100. The magnetic detection signal is continuously output while a magnetism is being detected. When the magnetic detection sensor 70a no longer detects a magnetism, it turns off and stops outputting the magnetic detection signal to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 also determines that a main control magnetic error has occurred when it receives a magnetic detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 70a.
Furthermore, the radio wave detection sensor 71a turns on when it detects radio waves and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the main control board 100, and the radio wave detection signal is continuously output while radio waves are being detected. When the radio wave detection sensor 71a no longer detects radio waves, it turns off and stops outputting the radio wave detection signal to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 also determines that a main control radio wave error has occurred when it receives a radio wave detection signal from the radio wave detection sensor 71a.
Furthermore, the vibration detection sensor 72 turns on when it detects that the pachinko machine P is vibrating and outputs a vibration detection signal to the main control board 100, and the vibration detection signal is continuously output while vibration is being detected. When the vibration detection sensor 72 no longer detects vibration from the pachinko machine P, it turns off and stops outputting the vibration detection signal to the main control board 100. Also, when the main control board 100 receives a vibration detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 72, it determines that a main control vibration error has occurred.

Furthermore, the large prize slot detection sensor 18a is installed along the path from the large prize slot 18 to the large prize slot discharge port. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the time from when a game ball enters the large prize slot 18 until the game ball is detected by the large prize slot detection sensor 18a is approximately 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is connected to the following devices as devices to be controlled: a movable piece solenoid 16c that drives the movable piece 16b attached to the second starting prize pocket 16 to extend and retract; a large prize pocket solenoid 18c that drives the opening and closing door 18b of the large prize pocket 18 to open and close; a distribution member solenoid 59c that displaces the distribution member 59; a first special symbol display device 30; a second special symbol display device 31; a normal symbol display device 32; a first special symbol hold display device 38; a second special symbol hold display device 39; a normal symbol hold display device 33; and a main information display device 105.
The main control board 100 drives each solenoid to control the protrusion and retraction of the movable piece 16b attached to the second starting prize opening 16, the opening and closing of the large prize opening 18, the displacement control of the distribution member 59, and the display control of each display device.

(Overview of the launch/dispensing control board 200)
The launch and payout control board 200 primarily controls the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into various prize slots, the dispensing of game balls based on predetermined operations by the player, and the launch of game balls.
As shown in Figure 6, the launch/dispensing control board 200 includes a dispensing CPU 201, a dispensing ROM 202, and a dispensing RAM 203, and is connected to the main control board 100 so as to enable bidirectional communication.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 6, the launch/dispensing control board 200 is connected to the following devices for controlling the launch of game balls: a touch sensor 5a that detects when a player touches the operating handle 5; an operating volume 5b that detects the operating angle (rotation angle) of the operating handle 5; a launch stop switch 5c that stops the launch of game balls; a ball feeding solenoid 60 that sends the game balls received in the upper tray 6 to the launching device (not shown); a launch motor 61 that launches the game balls; and a launch ball detection sensor 64 that detects when a game ball has been launched by the launch motor 61. Control signals output from the touch sensor 5a, operating volume 5b, and launch stop switch 5c are input to the launch/dispensing control board 200.

When the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a playable state, and the state related to the ball difference operation stop control described later is in the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, or activation notification state, if the player touches the operation handle 5 and rotates it, control signals from the touch sensor 5a and operation volume 5b (hereinafter also called rotation operation signals) are input to the launch payout control board 200, and control is performed to energize the ball feed solenoid 60 and launch motor 61 to launch game balls. While the ball feed solenoid 60 and launch motor 61 are energized, game balls are launched continuously at 0.6-second intervals (i.e., a launch pace of 100 balls per minute). When the player releases contact with the operation handle 5 or stops rotating the operation handle 5, the input of the rotation operation signal to the launch payout control board 200 stops, and the control to launch game balls also stops.
Furthermore, even when a rotation operation signal is input to the launch/dispensing control board 200, if a control signal from the launch stop switch 5c (hereinafter also referred to as the launch stop control signal) is input to the launch/dispensing control board 200, the power supply to the ball feeding solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 is stopped, and control is performed to stop the launch of game balls.
Furthermore, when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a game-stopped state, or when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a playable state and the state related to the ball difference operation stop control is activated, even if a rotation operation signal is input to the launch payout control board 200, the ball feeding solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 are not energized, and no control is performed to launch game balls.
Furthermore, when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a game-stopped state, or when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a game-ready state, regardless of the state related to the ball difference operation stop control (i.e., whether the state related to the ball difference operation stop control is in a pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notification state, or activation state), the launch payout control board 200 transmits a handle operation command to the main control board 100 when a rotation operation signal is input, and stops transmitting handle operation commands to the main control board 100 when the input of the rotation operation signal stops. In other words, as long as a rotation operation signal is input (while the player is touching the operation handle 5 and performing a rotation operation), handle operation commands are continuously transmitted to the main control board 100.
Furthermore, instead of the launching motor 61, a rotary solenoid may be used as the device for launching the game balls.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 6, the launch/dispensing control board 200 is connected to a dispensing motor 62 that dispenses game balls stored in a game ball storage unit (not shown in particular) and a dispensing counting switch 63 that detects and counts the dispensed game balls, as devices for controlling the dispensing of game balls. Although not shown in particular, the dispensing counting switch 63 also has a built-in dispensing radio wave detection sensor that detects radio waves irradiated onto the switch.
When the launch and payout control board 200 receives a prize ball designation command transmitted from the main control board 100, the launch and payout control board 200 controls the payout motor 62 to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) based on this prize ball designation command. At this time, the number of game balls dispensed is counted by the payout counting switch 63, making it possible to determine whether or not the predetermined number of game balls has been dispensed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the launch and payout control board 200 transmits a payout prize ball signal to the external information terminal board 500 as an external signal to be transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine P. This signal is based on the fact that game balls have actually been dispensed by the payout motor 62 (game balls have been counted by the payout counting switch 63). As a result, the payout prize ball signal is transmitted to an external device (such as an external information display device or hall computer that displays information such as the number of spins and the number of jackpots) via the external information terminal board 500, allowing the external device to determine the actual number of game balls dispensed.
Furthermore, external signals related to the payout of game balls (prize balls) are not limited to payout prize ball signals. For example, instead of a signal based on the actual payout of game balls, a received prize ball signal based on the receipt of a prize ball designation command from the main control board 100 may be transmitted to the external information terminal board 500. This allows an external device of the pachinko machine P to also know the number of game balls that are scheduled to be paid out based on the received prize ball designation command.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 6, the launch/dispensing control board 200 is connected to the following sensors: a main frame open detection sensor 2a for detecting the open state of the main frame 2; a front door open detection sensor 3a for detecting the open state of the front door 3; a tray full detection sensor 7a for detecting the full state of the tray 7; an out sensor 19a for detecting game balls received into the out port 19 or entering each prize port and being guided to the back side of the game board 11 via the out passage; and an out port radio wave detection sensor 71b for detecting radio waves irradiated onto the out port 19.

The main frame open detection sensor 2a turns on when it detects that the main frame 2 is open and outputs a main frame open detection signal to the launch/dispensing control board 200. The main frame open detection signal is continuously output while the main frame 2 is open. When the launch/dispensing control board 200 receives the main frame open detection signal, it sends a main frame open command to the main control board 100.
In response, the main frame open detection sensor 2a turns off when it no longer detects that the main frame 2 is open, and stops outputting the main frame open detection signal. When the input of the main frame open detection signal stops, the launch and discharge control board 200 determines that the main frame 2 has been closed and stops sending the main frame open command to the main control board 100.

The front door open detection sensor 3a turns on when it detects that the front door 3 is open and outputs a door open detection signal to the firing/dispensing control board 200. The door open detection signal is continuously output while the front door 3 is open. When the firing/dispensing control board 200 receives the door open detection signal, it sends a door open command to the main control board 100.
In response, the front door open detection sensor 3a turns off when it no longer detects that the front door 3 is open, and stops outputting the door open detection signal. When the input of the door open detection signal stops, the launch and discharge control board 200 determines that the front door 3 has been closed and stops sending the door open command to the main control board 100.

The tray full detection sensor 7a is installed at a predetermined position on the tray 7. When the amount of game balls dispensed as prize balls exceeds a predetermined amount and the tray becomes full, the stored game balls will reach the predetermined position mentioned above.
The tray full detection sensor 7a turns on when it detects that the game balls have reached the predetermined position described above, and outputs a tray detection signal to the launch/dispensing control board 200. The tray detection signal is continuously output as long as the stored game balls are at the predetermined position described above. When the launch/dispensing control board 200 receives the tray detection signal, it sends a tray full command to the main control board 100.
In response, the tray full detection sensor 7a turns off when it no longer detects that the game ball has reached the predetermined position mentioned above, and stops outputting a tray detection signal to the launch/dispensing control board 200. When the input of the tray detection signal stops, the launch/dispensing control board 200 determines that the tray 7 is no longer full and stops sending a tray full command to the main control board 100.

The out sensor 19a is located in the out passage. The out sensor 19a turns on each time it detects a game ball being received at the out opening 19 or entering each prize entry point and passing through the out passage, and outputs an out signal to the launch/dispensing control board 200. The launch/dispensing control board 200 then transmits an out command to the main control board 100 each time an out signal is received.

The output port radio wave detection sensor 71b is installed at a predetermined position around the output port 19.
Furthermore, the output port radio wave detection sensor 71b turns on when it detects radio waves and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the transmission/dispensing control board 200. As long as it is detecting radio waves, the radio wave detection signal is continuously output. Conversely, when the output port radio wave detection sensor 71b no longer detects radio waves, it turns off and stops outputting the radio wave detection signal to the transmission/dispensing control board 200.

As described above, the payout radio wave detection sensor is built into the payout counting switch 63.
Furthermore, the dispensing radio wave detection sensor turns on when it detects radio waves and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the transmission/dispensing control board 200. As long as it is detecting radio waves, the radio wave detection signal is continuously output. Conversely, when the dispensing radio wave detection sensor no longer detects radio waves, it turns off and stops outputting the radio wave detection signal to the transmission/dispensing control board 200.

Furthermore, as described above, the launch and payout control board 200 is connected to a game ball dispensing control board 400, which relays operations to the game ball dispensing device R. As shown in Figure 6, the launch and payout control board 200 is connected to a value information display device 35, a game ball dispensing switch 36a that detects the pressing operation of the game ball dispensing button 36, and a card return switch 37a that detects the pressing operation of the card return button 37, via the game ball dispensing control board 400.
These devices may be connected directly to the launch/dispensing control board 200, rather than being connected to the launch/dispensing control board 200 via the game ball dispensing control board 400.

Then, when a card containing value information for which game balls can be dispensed (i.e., a card with a balance) is inserted into and recognized by the game ball dispensing device R, a value information signal indicating that value information is transmitted from the game ball dispensing device R to the value information display device 35 via the launch/dispensing control board 200 and the game ball dispensing control board 400. As a result, the value information display device 35 displays the value information corresponding to the received value information signal.

Furthermore, when a card containing value information that allows for the lending of game balls is inserted into the game ball lending device R and recognized, and the ball lending button 36 is pressed, a detection signal output from the ball lending switch 36a is transmitted to the game ball lending device R via the game ball lending control board 400 and the launch/dispensing control board 200.
Upon receiving the above-mentioned detection signal, the game ball dispensing device R performs a process of subtracting predetermined value information from the stored value information, and sends a game ball dispensing command to the launch/dispensing control board 200 to dispense a number of game balls (for example, 125) corresponding to the subtracted value information as game balls. Simultaneously, it sends a subtraction command corresponding to the subtracted value information to the value information display device 35 via the launch/dispensing control board 200 and the game ball dispensing control board 400.
When a ball dispensing command is received, the launch/dispensing control board 200 controls the dispensing of a number of game balls corresponding to the deducted value information (for example, 125 balls). Also, when a deduction command is received, the value information display device 35 updates the value information to reflect the deduction.

Furthermore, when the card return button 37 is pressed, a detection signal output from the card return switch 37a is input to the launch/dispensing control board 200. The launch/dispensing control board 200 then transmits a return request signal to the game ball dispensing device R, requesting the return of the card. Upon receiving the return request signal, the game ball dispensing device R performs a control operation to eject the card.

Furthermore, if a card that does not contain value information for dispensing game balls (i.e., a card with no balance) is inserted into the game ball dispensing device R, or if all value information stored on the card is depleted as a result of pressing the ball dispensing button 36 (i.e., the card balance is depleted), the game ball dispensing device R may also be controlled to eject the card.

As described above, the launch/dispensing control board 200 controls both the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into various prize slots (general prize slot 14, first start prize slot 15, second start prize slot 16, and large prize slot 18), and the payout of game balls (loaned balls) based on the player's operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, errors related to the equipment connected to the launch/payout control board 200 (hereinafter also referred to as payout-related errors) may occur, such as ball out errors, full tank errors, payout counting switch errors, ball jam errors, excessive prize ball errors, payout radio wave errors, payout motor errors, and door open errors.
Furthermore, the launch/dispensing control board 200 determines (detects the occurrence of) the occurrence of dispensing-related errors, including ball failure errors, full tank errors, dispensing count switch errors, ball jam errors, excessive prize ball errors, dispensing radio wave errors, and dispensing motor errors, based on the operating status of the switches connected to the launch/dispensing control board 200 and various signals output to the launch/dispensing control board 200 from the sensors connected to the launch/dispensing control board 200.
In this specification, the determination of the occurrence of an error means not only specifically determining the occurrence of an error based on the operating status of the switch and detection by various sensors (for example, a dispensing radio wave detection sensor, a main frame opening detection sensor 2a, etc.), but also that the operating status of the switch and detection by various sensors have been performed.

A ball depletion error occurs when no game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit. The launch/dispensing control board 200 determines that a ball depletion error has occurred if, despite the dispensing motor 62 operating to dispense game balls, the game ball counting switch 63 does not perform counting for a predetermined period. When a ball depletion error occurs, a ball depletion error command is transmitted from the launch/dispensing control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to recognize the occurrence of the error.

A full tank error occurs when the receiving tray 7 is full. The launch/dispensing control board 200 determines that a full tank error has occurred when it receives a receiving tray detection signal. When a full tank error occurs, a full tank error command is sent from the launch/dispensing control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to recognize the occurrence of the full tank error.

The payout counting switch error occurs when the payout counting switch 63 fails to operate due to a broken wire in the harness or other reasons. The launch/payout control board 200 determines that a payout counting switch error has occurred when it can no longer confirm the operation of the payout counting switch 63. When a payout counting switch error occurs, a payout counting switch error command is sent from the launch/payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to recognize the occurrence of the payout counting switch error.

A ball jam error occurs when the dispensing motor 62 malfunctions. The launch/dispensing control board 200 determines that a ball jam error has occurred if the dispensing motor 62 receives an operation signal but fails to operate. When a ball jam error occurs, a ball jam error command is transmitted from the launch/dispensing control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to recognize the occurrence of the error.

An over-payout error occurs when game balls are dispensed without receiving a prize ball specification command, or when more game balls are dispensed than the number scheduled to be dispensed based on a received prize ball specification command. The launch/dispensing control board 200 determines that an over-payout error has occurred when the number of game balls dispensed unscheduled reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). When an over-payout error occurs, an over-payout error command is transmitted from the launch/dispensing control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to recognize the occurrence of the over-payout error.

A discharge radio wave error occurs when radio wave irradiation is detected. The launch/discharge control board 200 determines that a discharge radio wave error has occurred when a radio wave detection signal is input from the output port radio wave detection sensor 71b or the discharge radio wave detection sensor. When a discharge radio wave error occurs, a discharge radio wave error command indicating this is transmitted from the launch/discharge control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to recognize the occurrence of the error.

A dispensing motor error occurs when the dispensing motor 62 fails to operate due to a broken wire in the harness or other reasons. The launch/dispensing control board 200 determines that a dispensing motor error has occurred when it can no longer confirm the operation of the dispensing motor 62. When a dispensing motor error occurs, a dispensing motor error command is transmitted from the launch/dispensing control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to recognize the occurrence of the dispensing motor error.

Furthermore, among the dispensing-related errors, the door open error occurs when the main frame 2 or the front door 3 is open.
Here, as described above, both the main frame opening detection sensor 2a, which detects the opening of the main frame 2, and the front door opening detection sensor 3a, which detects the opening of the front door 3, are connected to the launch/dispensing control board 200. However, the determination of whether a door opening error has occurred is made by the main control board 100, not by the launch/dispensing control board 200.
Specifically, when the main control board 100 receives at least one of the following: a main frame open command transmitted from the launch and discharge control board 200 when a main frame open detection signal is input to the launch and discharge control board 200, or a front door open command transmitted from the launch and discharge control board 200 when a front door open detection signal is input to the launch and discharge control board 200, the main control board 100 determines that a door open error has occurred.
If the main control board 100 determines that a door opening error has occurred, it sends a payout stop command to the launch/payout control board 200 to stop the control of the game ball payout operation. As a result, while the door opening error is occurring, the launch/payout control board 200 performs control to stop the game ball payout operation.

Furthermore, among the dispensing-related errors, the errors detected by the main control board 100 are not limited to door open errors; other errors may also be detected by the main control board 100.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is also configured to detect errors related to equipment connected to the main control board 100 (such as the main control radio wave error, main control magnetic error, main control vibration error, abnormal entry error that occurs when an excessive number of game balls enter the first starting entry slot 15, the second starting entry slot 16, and the large entry slot 18, and fraudulent entry error that occurs when game balls enter the large entry slot 18 when a special game is not being played, hereinafter also referred to as main control-related errors).
Then, if the main control board 100 detects the occurrence of a payout-related error other than a door-opening error, or if it determines that a door-opening error or a main control-related error has occurred, the main CPU 101 sends an error indication command to the sub-control board 300 indicating the error that occurred. As a result, the sub-control board 300 can also detect the occurrence of various errors, and the error that occurred is indicated by displaying an error indication image corresponding to the error on the performance display device 21, lighting up various lamps (panel performance lamp GL, front door performance lamp DL, status notification lamp EL) in a manner corresponding to the error, or outputting an error indication sound corresponding to the error from the audio output device 10.
Furthermore, when the cause of the error is eliminated and the error is cleared, the main control board 100 recognizes or determines that the error has been cleared, for example, by ceasing to receive commands used for error detection. When the clearing of the error is recognized or determined to have been cleared, the main CPU 101 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 300 to indicate that the error has been cleared. As a result, the sub-control board 300 can also recognize that the error has been cleared and can terminate the indication of the error.

(Overview of the sub-control board 300)
The sub-control board 300 controls the effects that are executed during gameplay, standby mode, etc.
As shown in Figure 6, the sub-control board 300 includes a sub-CPU 301 that performs various calculations, a sub-ROM 302 that stores a control program for executing the performance, data and tables necessary for executing the performance, and a sub-RAM 303 that is used as a temporary storage area during calculations, and is connected to the main control board 100 so that it can communicate in one direction.

Furthermore, the sub-CPU 301 reads the control program stored in the sub-ROM 302 and performs calculations based on commands transmitted from the main control board 100 and signals from the timer, and also sends commands for executing the effects to an image control board (not shown) for controlling image display, an audio control board (not shown) for controlling audio output, an illumination control board (not shown) for controlling the lighting of various lamps, etc., and an operation control board (not shown) for controlling the displacement of the special effect device YS and the rotation of the special effect device.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, a separate sound control board and an illumination control board are provided. However, a single board (sound and illumination control board) that integrates the functions of these boards may be provided, and this board may control both the sound output and the illumination.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 300 is connected to the display device 21 via the image control board, and to the audio output device 10 and the directional key detection sensor 25a which detects the pressing operation of the directional key 25 via the audio control board. The sub-control board 300 is also connected to various lamps (front door display lamp DL, status notification lamp EL, panel display lamp GL, right-hand shooting notification lamp RL), a rotation operation detection sensor 9c which detects the rotation operation of the operation dial 9a, and a press operation detection sensor 9d which detects the pressing operation of the operation button 9b via the lighting control board. Finally, the sub-control board 300 is connected to the drive motor M and the rotary motor RM via the operation control board.

The image control board, although not specifically shown, includes an image CPU, image ROM, and image RAM. The image ROM of this image control board stores image data such as patterns and backgrounds to be displayed on the display device 21. Based on commands transmitted from the sub-control board 300, the image CPU controls the image display by the display device 21 by storing the image data read from the image ROM in the image RAM.

The audio control board, although not specifically shown in the diagram, includes a sound chip (CPU), sound ROM, and sound RAM. The sound ROM stores sound data such as voice and background music output from the audio output device 10. Based on commands transmitted from the sub-control board 300, the audio output from the audio output device 10 is controlled by storing the sound data read from the sound ROM in the sound RAM.

The lighting control board controls the illumination and extinguishing of various lamps (front door effect lamp DL, status indicator lamp EL, panel effect lamp GL, right-hand play indicator lamp RL) based on commands from the sub-control board 300 (commands related to the execution of various effects and indications). Furthermore, when the lighting control board receives a rotation operation detection signal output from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c based on the rotation operation of the operation dial 9a, or a press operation detection signal output from the press operation detection sensor 9d based on the press operation of the operation button 9b, it transmits a predetermined command to the sub-control board 300.

The operation control board controls the driving of the drive motor M and the rotary motor RM based on commands from the sub-control board 300. When the drive motor M is driven, the performance device YS is displaced vertically within the range between its initial position and its movable position. When the rotary motor RM is driven, the performance device YS performs a rotational effect (clockwise or counterclockwise rotation) at the movable position.

(Overview of power supply board 600)
The power supply board 600 supplies power to each board, including the main control board 100, the launch/dispensing control board 200, and the sub-control board 300. A backup power supply is provided for this power supply board 600. In addition, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment is provided with a power outage detection circuit for detecting the voltage value of the power supplied from the power supply board 600. When the voltage value of the supplied power falls below a predetermined value (for example, when the power switch 650 is turned off or an unexpected power outage occurs), this power supply detection circuit determines that a power outage has occurred and transmits a power outage signal to the main control board 100. Furthermore, when the voltage value becomes greater than the predetermined value (for example, when the power switch 650 is turned on or power is restored from an unexpected power outage), it determines that power has been restored and stops transmitting the power outage signal to the main control board 100.

Then, when the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 detects a power outage signal (a power outage has occurred), it prohibits access to the main RAM 103, calculates the checksum of the main RAM 103 (used area and unused area), sets a backup flag, and performs backup processing to retain various data stored in the storage area of the main RAM 103 (setting values, game machine status flags indicating the control status, test signal information, checksum, backup flag, error information, various data related to the progress of the game (number of first special symbols held, number of second special symbols held, execution phase data indicating the progress of special symbol games, number of normal symbols held, normal symbol execution phase data indicating the progress of normal symbol games), and game performance data). When the power outage signal is no longer detected (power restored), a comparison is made between the checksum calculated at the time of the power outage and the checksum calculated at the time of restoration. A check of the backup flag set at the time of the power outage is also performed to determine whether there is an inconsistency between the data stored in the main RAM 103 at the time of the power outage and the data stored in the main RAM 103 at the time of restoration (i.e., whether an abnormality occurred in the backup process described above). After this, the processing for power restoration is executed.

To prevent the processing in the event of a power outage from becoming complicated, the sub-control board 300 in this embodiment is not equipped with a power outage detection circuit, and the backup processing described above is not performed on the sub-control board 300. Therefore, when power is restored after a power outage, the sub-CPU 301 controls the performance based on the various commands transmitted from the main CPU 101, so that the appropriate performance can be executed at that time.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 stops detecting the power outage signal (i.e., has recovered from the power outage), it sends an initial processing execution signal to the sub-control board 300 to execute the initial processing to stop the special effect device YS in its initial position. This signal is sent at the time the playable state or setting change state described later is set, or when the setting confirmation state described later is completed. When this initial processing execution signal is received, the sub-control board 300 executes the initial processing of the special effect device YS.
Specifically, when this initial processing is executed, the special effect device YS moves to its movable position and then moves back to its initial position. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the time from the start to the end of the initial processing is 25 seconds.

(Overview of Pachinko Machine P gameplay)
Next, the gameplay in this form of pachinko machine P will be explained based on the various tables stored in the main ROM 102.
As described above, in this form of pachinko machine P, special symbol games and regular symbol games proceed in parallel. Furthermore, the game state during the progression of these two games is set to one of the game states that is a combination of either a low probability game state (so-called non-probability state) or a high probability game state (so-called probability state) and either a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state. In addition, in this form of pachinko machine P, there are two time-saving game states, time-saving game state JT1 and time-saving game state JT2, and either time-saving game state can be set.
Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, one of the following game states is set: a normal game state which is a combination of a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state; a low probability time-saving game state LJT1 which is a combination of a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT1; a low probability time-saving game state LJT2 which is a combination of a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2; or a high probability time-saving game state which is a combination of a high probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2.

Here, the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state are game states in which the probability of winning a jackpot through the lottery (described later) is set to be different. In the high-probability game state, the probability of winning a jackpot through the lottery is set to a higher value than in the low-probability game state. In other words, it is easier to win a jackpot through the lottery in the high-probability game state than in the low-probability game state.

In the non-shortened play state, shortened play state JT1, and shortened play state JT2, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting prize entry point 16 (the difficulty of entry, in other words, the frequency of win/loss draws based on game balls entering the second starting prize entry point 16) is set to a predetermined value.
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the time-saving game state JT2 is set to make it easier for the movable piece 16b to remain in a protruding state (i.e., it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry point 16) than the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state JT1. Furthermore, although there are slight differences as will be described later, both the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state JT1 are set to make it almost impossible for the movable piece 16b to remain in a protruding state (i.e., it is almost impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry point 16).
Furthermore, immediately after factory shipment, and in the initial state after the abnormal initialization process or normal initialization process described later, the normal gameplay state is set.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched by a launching device (not shown) and flowing down the game area 12 enters the first starting prize entry 15 or the second starting prize entry 16, a win/loss lottery is held, and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the win/loss lottery is determined. In the win/loss lottery in this embodiment, first, a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has been won, and if the determination result is that a jackpot has not been won (hereinafter also referred to as not winning a jackpot), then a determination is made as to whether or not a time-saving mode is granted (whether or not a time-saving game state is granted, in other words, whether or not a time-saving game state is set), and if the determination result is that a time-saving game state is not granted (hereinafter also referred to as not winning a time-saving mode), it is a loss.
Then, if the draw results in a jackpot win (i.e., if a jackpot is won), a special game is executed in which the large prize slot 18 is opened and game balls can be entered into the large prize slot 18. Furthermore, the game state after the special game ends is set to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or the high-probability time-saving game state. In other words, after the special game ends, the game transitions to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or the high-probability time-saving game state.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned lottery results in a determination that the time-saving game state will be granted (hereinafter also referred to as winning the time-saving state), then, as described later, either the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 will be determined as the special symbol associated with the winning time-saving state (hereinafter also referred to as the time-saving symbol).
In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined in the normal game state, the low probability game state remains unchanged, and the time-saving game state JT1 is set. That is, when the time-saving bonus is awarded by the aforementioned draw in the normal game state and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the low probability game state remains unchanged, and the non-time-saving game state is changed to the time-saving game state JT1, thereby transitioning to the low probability time-saving game state LJT1. Also, when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined in the normal game state, the low probability game state remains unchanged, and the time-saving game state JT2 is set. That is, when the time-saving bonus is awarded by the aforementioned draw in the normal game state and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the low probability game state remains unchanged, and the non-time-saving game state is changed to the time-saving game state JT2, thereby transitioning to the low probability time-saving game state LJT2.
In contrast, if the aforementioned draw results in a loss during normal gameplay (i.e., neither a big win nor a bonus time-saving feature is awarded), the gameplay state remains the normal gameplay state.
Thus, in the pachinko machine according to this form, in the normal game state, a time-saving game state (time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1) or time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2)) can be set without going through the process of winning a jackpot or performing a special game. In other words, the game state can be changed without going through the process of winning a jackpot or performing a special game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, even during game states other than the normal game state (i.e., during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and the high-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)), the above-mentioned win/fail lottery determines whether or not time-saving is granted, and it is possible to win time-saving, and if time-saving is granted, time-saving symbols J1 or J2 may be determined.
However, in the pachinko machine P of this form, even if a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined during a game state other than the normal game state, a new time-saving game state based on that determination is not set, and the game state that was set at the time of the determination is maintained. In other words, even if a time-saving bonus is awarded during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, or the high-probability time-saving game state, a new time-saving game state based on that win is not set, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, or the high-probability time-saving game state that is currently set continues.
Thus, in pachinko machines of this form, in game states other than the normal game state, unlike the normal game state, a new time-saving game state is not set without winning a jackpot or executing a special game.

Furthermore, the determination of whether or not a time-saving bonus is granted may be made not in all game states, but only in the normal game state. In other words, it may be possible to win a time-saving bonus in the normal game state, but not in game states other than the normal game state. In this case, since a time-saving bonus cannot be won in game states other than the normal game state, a new time-saving game state will not be set without winning a jackpot or executing a special game.

In this pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize entry opening 15. In addition, the game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting prize entry opening 16, and enter the large prize entry opening 18.
During normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay (LJT1), players are instructed to shoot the game balls towards the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed shooting) so that the game balls enter the first starting prize entry point 15. During low-probability time-saving gameplay (LJT2), high-probability time-saving gameplay, and special gameplay, players are instructed to shoot the game balls towards the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed shooting) so that the game balls enter the large prize entry point 18, or pass through the gate 20 and enter the second starting prize entry point 16. In other words, during normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay (LJT1), players are primarily instructed to play in the first game area 12a, while during low-probability time-saving gameplay (LJT2) and high-probability time-saving gameplay, players are primarily instructed to play in the second game area 12b.
Specifically, when a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or a high-probability time-saving game state is set, or when a special game is started, a right-hand shot prompt is given to encourage the player to shoot the game ball towards the second game area 12b (for example, the display of a right-hand shot prompt image "→→→ Right Shot" on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, the right-hand shot notification lamp RL which indicates that the player should shoot the game ball towards the second game area 12b, etc.). Also, when a normal game state is set, a left-hand shot prompt is given to encourage the player to shoot the game ball towards the first game area 12a (for example, the display of a left-hand shot prompt image "←←← Left Shot" on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, the right-hand shot notification lamp RL which indicates that the player should shoot the game ball towards the first game area 12a, etc.). In the pachinko machine P of this form, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined during normal gameplay, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set. However, when the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, the aforementioned left-hand shooting suggestion is not made.

The draw for winning or losing is conducted based on various random numbers obtained when a game ball enters the first starting prize slot 15 or the second starting prize slot 16, and various tables stored in the main ROM 102 for determining said random numbers.
In this form, the pachinko machine P has, as random numbers related to the lottery for winning or losing and the determination of special symbols, a win/loss random number used to determine the result of the lottery (winning a jackpot, winning or losing a time-saving bonus), a special symbol random number used to determine the type of special symbol, and a variable pattern random number used to determine the variable pattern command described later.
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the aforementioned win/loss random number uses a hardware random number generator built into the main control board 100. This win/loss random number generator is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed each time the sequence completes a cycle, and the starting value is changed each time the system is reset.
Furthermore, the variation pattern command is used to determine the variation pattern (variation time, manner) that can notify the result of the win/loss lottery. The random numbers used to determine the variation pattern command are not limited to those mentioned above; for example, other random numbers may be used in addition to these random numbers.

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15 or the second starting prize entry opening 16, the random values are obtained for the aforementioned random numbers, and each random value is stored in the reserve memory area of the main RAM 103.
This reserved memory area consists of a first reserved memory area for storing random numbers related to the win/loss lottery and the determination of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as the first special symbol random number), which are acquired when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, and a second reserved memory area for storing random numbers related to the win/loss lottery and the determination of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as the second special symbol random number), which are acquired when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16. These reserved memory areas are each composed of a total of four memory units, from the first to the fourth memory unit, and can store a total of four sets of the first special symbol random numbers and a total of four sets of the second special symbol random numbers.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, the first special symbol random number is stored sequentially from the first memory unit of the first reserve memory area. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15 when the first special symbol random number is not stored in any of the memory units of the first reserve memory area, the first special symbol random number acquired as a result is stored in the first memory unit of the first reserve memory area. Also, if a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15 when the first special symbol random number is already stored in the first memory unit of the first reserve memory area, the first special symbol random number acquired as a result is stored in the second memory unit of the first reserve memory area. Furthermore, when the first special symbol random number is stored in the first and second memory units of the first reserved memory area, and a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, the first special symbol random number acquired as a result of this is stored in the third memory unit of the first reserved memory area. Also, when the first special symbol random number is stored in the first to third memory units of the first reserved memory area, and a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, the first special symbol random number acquired as a result of this is stored in the fourth memory unit of the first reserved memory area. Finally, when the first special symbol random number is stored in the first to fourth memory units of the first reserved memory area, and a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, the first special symbol random number related to this entry is not stored.

Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16, the second special symbol random number is stored sequentially in the first memory section of the second reserve memory area. The specific storage process is the same as the storage of the first special symbol random number described above, so the explanation is omitted.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the number of sets of first special symbol random numbers (hereinafter also referred to as the first reserved number) stored in the first reserved memory area is stored in the first reserved number counter (not specifically shown), and the number of sets of second special symbol random numbers (hereinafter also referred to as the second reserved number) stored in the second reserved memory area is stored in the second reserved number counter (not specifically shown).
In this specification, as described above, the storage of the first special random number and the second special random number in the reserved memory area is also referred to as "reserved" or "reserved memory," and the first reserved number and the second reserved number are simply referred to as "reserved numbers."

Furthermore, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes a win/loss random number determination table 110 for determining the result of the win/loss lottery, a special symbol random number determination table 111 for determining the type of special symbol, a special electric mechanism operation table 112 for controlling the special game that is executed when a big win is achieved, a game state setting table 113 for setting the game state after winning a time-saving bonus (after the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined) or after the special game has ended, a variation pattern table 114 for determining the variation pattern command, and a stop display time table 115 for determining the stop display time for the special symbol after the variation display of the special symbol has ended.
Furthermore, the tables used for determining winners and losers are not limited to those mentioned above. If it is necessary to perform random number-based judgments or decisions, tables may be created as appropriate.

The win/loss random number determination table 110 is used to determine the result of the win/loss lottery (winning a jackpot, winning a time-saving bonus, or losing), and is broadly divided into a low probability determination table 110a, which is referenced in low probability game states (normal game state, low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2), and a high probability determination table 110b, which is referenced in high probability game states (high probability time-saving game state). In this pachinko machine P, as described above, only one setting value of 1 is defined for the payout setting, and only one type of low probability determination table 110a and high probability determination table 110b is provided, corresponding to setting value 1.

In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, when a game ball enters the first starting entry point 15 or the second starting entry point 16, one random number for winning or losing is obtained within the numerical range of 0 to 65535. Then, depending on the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery, either the low probability determination table 110a or the high probability determination table 110b is selected, and the win/loss lottery is conducted based on the obtained random number for winning or losing and the selected random number determination table 110.

As shown in Figure 7(a), according to the low probability determination table 110a, a win is determined when the random number is between 1000 and 1217, a time-saving bonus is determined when the random number is between 3000 and 6275, and a loss is determined when the random number is anywhere other than these (0 to 999, 1218 to 2999, 6276 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning a win in this low probability determination table 110a is approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is approximately 1/20.

As shown in Figure 7(b), according to the high probability determination table 110b, a win is determined when the random number is between 1000 and 2309, a time-saving bonus is determined when the random number is between 3000 and 6275, and a loss is determined when the random number is anywhere other than these (0 to 999, 2310 to 2999, 6276 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning a win in this high probability determination table 110b is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is approximately 1/20.
In other words, the high-probability determination table 110b is set so that the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately six times higher than that of the low-probability determination table 110a. Furthermore, the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is set to be the same regardless of whether the low-probability determination table 110a or the high-probability determination table 110b is selected.

Furthermore, the range of winning/losing random numbers that are determined to result in a jackpot in the low probability determination table 110a is set to be included in the range of winning/losing random numbers that are determined to result in a jackpot in the high probability determination table 110b (specifically, the lower limit of the range of numbers determined to result in a jackpot is the same, but the upper limit is different). In other words, the winning/losing random numbers that are determined to result in a jackpot in the low probability determination table 110a will also be determined to result in a jackpot in the high probability determination table 110b.
In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, as described above, the lower limit of the numerical range of the random numbers used to determine whether a jackpot is won is set to be the same, while the upper limit is set to be different. However, it is not limited to this, and the upper limit may be set to be the same, while the lower limit is different.

Furthermore, the numerical range of the random numbers that determine whether a time-saving bonus is awarded in the low-probability determination table 110a, and the numerical range of the random numbers that determine whether a time-saving bonus is awarded in the high-probability determination table 110b, are outside the numerical range of the random numbers that determine whether a jackpot is awarded. The upper and lower limits of these numerical ranges are set to be the same. As a result, the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is the same in both the low-probability determination table 110a and the high-probability determination table 110b.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, the numerical range determined to result in a jackpot and the numerical range determined to result in a time-saving bonus were both composed of consecutive numerical ranges. However, this is not limited to this, and they may also be composed of discontinuous numerical ranges that include numbers that result in a loss.

Furthermore, if multiple settings are defined for the payout, the high-probability judgment table may be set to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the low-probability judgment table when comparing the high-probability judgment table and the low-probability judgment table corresponding to the same setting value.
Similarly, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may be set to be the same in both the high-probability judgment table and the low-probability judgment table corresponding to the same setting value.

The special symbol random number determination table 111 is for determining the type of special symbol, and as shown in Figures 8(a) and (b), it comprises a first starting prize entry determination table 111a which is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted using a first special symbol random number, and a second starting prize entry determination table 111b which is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted using a second special symbol random number.
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15 or the second starting prize entry point 16, one special symbol random number is obtained within the numerical range of 0 to 199. Then, when the above-mentioned win/loss lottery is performed, either the first starting prize entry point determination table 111a or the second starting prize entry point determination table 111b is selected from the special symbol random number determination table 111, depending on the starting prize entry point into which the game ball entered. Based on the obtained special symbol random number and the selected special symbol random number determination table 111, the type of special symbol is determined.

In this form of pachinko machine P, there are six types of special symbols (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6) that are determined when a jackpot is won (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot symbols), two types of special symbols (J1, J2) that are determined when a time-saving bonus is awarded (time-saving symbols), and two types of special symbols (Z1, Z2) that are determined when a loss occurs (hereinafter also referred to as losing symbols).

As shown in Figure 8(a), according to the first starting prize entry determination table 111a, when a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 99, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 100 and 193, and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 194 and 199. In other words, in this first starting prize entry determination table 111a, when a jackpot is won, the probability of the jackpot symbol X1 being determined is 50%, the probability of the jackpot symbol X2 being determined is 47%, and the probability of the jackpot symbol X3 being determined is 3%.
Furthermore, if a time-saving bonus is awarded, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 169, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 170 and 199. In other words, in this first starting prize entry determination table 111a, the probability of the time-saving symbol J1 being determined when a time-saving bonus is awarded is 85%, and the probability of the time-saving symbol J2 being determined is 15%.

As shown in Figure 8(b), according to the second starting prize entry determination table 111b, when a jackpot is won, if the special symbol random number is between 0 and 39, the jackpot symbol X4 is determined; if the special symbol random number is between 40 and 139, the jackpot symbol X5 is determined; and if the special symbol random number is between 140 and 199, the jackpot symbol X6 is determined. In other words, in this second starting prize entry determination table 111b, when a jackpot is won, the probability of the jackpot symbol X4 being determined is 20%, the probability of the jackpot symbol X5 being determined is 50%, and the probability of the jackpot symbol X5 being determined is 30%.
Furthermore, if a time-saving bonus is awarded, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 169, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 170 and 199. In other words, in this second starting entry point determination table 111b, similar to the first starting entry point determination table 111a, the probability of the time-saving symbol J1 being determined when a time-saving bonus is awarded is 85%, and the probability of the time-saving symbol J2 being determined is 15%.

Furthermore, if the draw based on the first special symbol random number results in a loss, the aforementioned draw based on the special symbol random number is not performed, and the losing symbol Z1 is determined. Also, if the draw based on the second special symbol random number results in a loss, the aforementioned draw based on the special symbol random number is not performed, and the losing symbol Z2 is determined.
In other words, the special symbol random number determination table 111 is referenced when a big win is achieved or when a time-saving bonus is awarded, but it is not referenced when there is a loss.

The special electric mechanism activation table 112 controls the special game that is executed when a jackpot is won. During the execution of the special game, it is referenced to activate the jackpot solenoid 18c and the distribution member solenoid 59c. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Figures 9(a) to (c), the special electric mechanism activation table 112 includes a first activation table 112a, referenced when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbols X1 or X4 are determined; a second activation table 112b, referenced when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbols X2 or X5 are determined; and a third activation table 112c, referenced when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbols X3 or X6 are determined.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined, a special game is executed by referring to the first operation table 112a shown in Figure 9(a). According to this first operation table 112a, a round game is executed a total of three times, from round 1 to round 3, which ends when either of the following conditions is met: the large prize slot 18 is open for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the large prize slot 18. In addition, during the execution of each round game, the opening/closing door 18b is opened only once by operating in a manner (opening/closing pattern) in which it moves from the closed position to the open position and remains in the open position for 29.0 seconds, and then moves from the open position to the closed position, and the time during which the large prize slot 18 is closed between each round game (i.e., the interval time) is set to 2.0 seconds.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9(a), when a winning symbol X1 or X4 is determined, the distribution member 59 operates in a manner (operation pattern) where it remains stationary (positioned) in the first position during each of the 1st and 3rd rounds of gameplay, and also operates in a manner where the distribution member 59 remains stationary in the first position during the 2nd round of gameplay.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbols X2 or X5 are determined, a special game is executed by referring to the second operation table 112b shown in Figure 9(b). According to this second operation table 112b, a round game that ends under the same conditions as the first operation table 112a is executed a total of three times, from round 1 to round 3. The opening and closing pattern and interval time of the opening and closing door 18b are also set to the same content as the first operation table 112a.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9(b), when a winning symbol X2 or X5 is determined, the distribution member 59 operates in a manner in which it remains in the first position during each round of gameplay (rounds 1 and 3), similar to when a winning symbol X1 or X4 is determined. In contrast, during round 2 of gameplay, the distribution member 59 operates in a manner in which it remains in the second position.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbols X3 or X6 are determined, a special game is executed by referring to the third operation table 112c shown in Figure 9(c). According to this third operation table 112c, a total of 10 rounds of games are executed, from round 1 to round 10, which end under the same conditions as the first operation table 112a and the second operation table 112b described above. The opening and closing pattern and interval time of the opening and closing door 18b are set to the same content as the first operation table 112a and the second operation table 112b.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9(c), when a winning symbol X3 or X6 is determined, the distribution member 59 operates in a manner in which it remains in the first position during each round of gameplay (rounds 1, 3, 4 through 10), similar to when a winning symbol X1, X2, X4, or X5 is determined. In addition, during round 2, the distribution member 59 operates in a manner in which it remains in the second position, similar to when a winning symbol X2 or X5 is determined.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a jackpot symbol X2, X3, X5, or X6 is determined, the large prize opening 18 is opened continuously for 29.0 seconds during the two-round game (specific round game), and the distribution member 59 remains in the second position. As long as the game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b, the game balls will enter the large prize opening 18, and a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this embodiment) will be reliably brought into the specific area 57.
In contrast, when the winning symbol X1 or X4 is determined, in the two rounds of gameplay, the large prize opening 18 remains open for 29.0 seconds, but the distribution member 59 stays in the first position. As a result, even if a game ball enters the large prize opening 18, all of the game balls enter the general area 58, making it impossible to get any game balls into the specific area 57.

The game state setting table 113 is for setting the game state after a special game has finished when a special game is played, and the game state after a time-saving bonus is awarded in the normal game state and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined.
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, when a special game is played, the game state after the special game ends is set according to whether or not a predetermined number of game balls entered a specific area 57 during the special game. Also, if a time-saving bonus is awarded during the normal game state and a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, the game state corresponding to the determined time-saving symbol is set. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, as will be described later, whether or not game balls can enter the specific area 57 is set according to the type of jackpot symbol determined, and in effect, whether or not the game transitions to a high-probability time-saving game state after the special game based on that determination ends is determined by the jackpot symbol.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Figures 10(a) to (d), the following game state setting tables 113 are provided: a first game state setting table 113a, which is referenced when a predetermined number of game balls enter a specific area 57 during special gameplay; a second game state setting table 113b, which is referenced when a predetermined number of game balls do not enter a specific area 57 during special gameplay; a third game state setting table 113c, which is referenced when a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined during normal gameplay; and a fourth game state setting table 113d, which is referenced when a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined during normal gameplay.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10(a), if a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the special game ends is set to a low-probability game state and also to a time-saving game state JT2. In other words, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game ends. The number of times the time-saving game state continues (hereinafter also referred to as the number of time-saving rounds) is set to 100 rounds.
In this case, after the special game ends, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 continues until the result of the win/loss lottery is drawn 100 times without a jackpot being won (until the number of special symbol variations reaches 100). If the result of the win/loss lottery during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is anything other than a jackpot win (i.e., a win or loss of time-saving bonus), the low-probability game state remains, but the time-saving game state JT2 is changed to a non-time-saving game state, and the game state changes to the normal game state.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this form, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state is approximately 1/300 (see Figure 7(a)), so a jackpot is not guaranteed during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2.

As shown in Figure 10(b), if a predetermined number of game balls enter a specific area 57 during a special game, the game state after the special game ends is set to a high-probability time-saving game state and also to a time-saving game state JT2. In other words, the high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game ends. Furthermore, the number of consecutive high-probability game states (hereinafter also referred to as high-probability counts) and the number of time-saving counts are both set to 10,000.
In this case, after the special game ends, the high-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/loss lottery is drawn 10,000 times without a jackpot being won (until the number of special symbol variations reaches 10,000). If the result of the win/loss lottery is anything other than a jackpot for all 10,000 times during the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability game state is changed to the low-probability game state, and the time-saving game state JT2 is changed to the non-time-saving game state, thereby changing the game state back to the normal game state.
In this form of pachinko machine P, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state is approximately 1/50 (see Figure 7(b)), and in effect, the high-probability time-saving game state described above continues until a jackpot is won again.

In this pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbols X2, X3, X5, or X6 are determined, the distribution member 59 remains in the second position during the two rounds of special game based on that determination. Therefore, as long as game balls are being launched into the second game area 12b to enter the jackpot opening 18, a predetermined number of game balls will always enter the specific area 57. In other words, in this pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the jackpot symbols X2, X3, X5, or X6 are determined, as long as game balls are being launched into the second game area 12b, a high-probability time-saving game state is set in principle.
However, even if a winning symbol X2, X3, X5, or X6 is determined, if, for example, an abnormality occurs such as the large prize slot 18 not opening, and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game based on that determination, the game state after the end of the special game will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2.

Furthermore, as described above, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined, the distribution member 59 remains in the first position during any round of the special game based on that determination. Therefore, even if game balls are entered into the large prize pocket 18, a predetermined number of game balls will not enter the specific area 57. In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set as a rule.
However, even if a winning symbol X1 or X4 is determined, if an abnormality occurs, such as the distribution member 59 becoming stuck in the second position, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 during the special game based on that determination, the game state after the end of the special game will be set to a high-probability time-saving game state.

As shown in Figure 10(c), if a time-saving bonus is awarded during normal gameplay and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the non-time-saving game state is changed to the time-saving game state JT1 while the low-probability game state remains unchanged when the variable display of the time-saving symbol J1 as a special symbol ends and the stop display time described later for the special symbol to stop has elapsed. In other words, when the variable display of the time-saving symbol J1 ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set. The number of time-saving rounds is also set to 10,000.
In this case, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 continues until the result of the win/loss lottery is drawn 10,000 times without winning a jackpot (until the number of special symbol variations reaches 10,000). If the result of the win/loss lottery is anything other than a jackpot for all 10,000 times during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low-probability game state remains the same, but the time-saving game state JT1 is changed to a non-time-saving game state, and the game state changes to the normal game state.
In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, as mentioned above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state is approximately 1/300 (see Figure 7(a)), and in effect, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 described above will continue until a jackpot is won again.

As shown in Figure 10(d), if a time-saving bonus is awarded during normal gameplay and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the non-time-saving game state is changed to the time-saving game state JT2 while the low-probability game state remains the same once the fluctuation display of the time-saving symbol J2 as a special symbol ends and the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed. In other words, once the fluctuation display of the time-saving symbol J2 ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set. The number of time-saving rounds is also set to 10,000.
In this case, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 continues until the result of the win/loss lottery is drawn 10,000 times without a jackpot being won (until the number of special symbol variations reaches 10,000). If the result of the win/loss lottery is anything other than a jackpot for all 10,000 times during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the low-probability game state remains, but the time-saving game state JT2 is changed to a non-time-saving game state, and the game state changes to the normal game state.
In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, as mentioned above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state is approximately 1/300 (see Figure 7(a)), and in effect, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 described above will continue until a jackpot is won again.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P of this configuration, even in game states other than the normal game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2, high probability time-saving game state), a time-saving bonus may be awarded, and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 may be determined. In this case, the currently set game state will continue as is.

Furthermore, when a time-saving bonus is awarded during normal gameplay, the timing for setting the game state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 is not limited to the time after the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed. It may be at any point between the start and end of the time-saving symbol fluctuation display (for example, the start time, any point during the fluctuation display, or the end time).

As described above, the variation pattern table 114 is used to determine the variation pattern command.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, once a special symbol is determined as described above, a variation pattern command is determined based on the result of that determination. The variation pattern command, as described above, is for determining the variation pattern of the variation effect, and the variation pattern command determines the manner of the variation effect and the variation time (the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol). In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the variation effect is divided into a first half and a second half, and both the manner of the first half of the variation effect and the variation time of the second half of the variation effect are determined by the variation pattern command.
Specifically, the determined variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 determines the specific form of the variation effect (for example, the image to be displayed on the display unit 21a) based on the received variation pattern command.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, multiple types of variation pattern commands are provided, and each variation pattern command is associated with a variation pattern table 114. For each variation pattern table 114, the type of variation pattern command to be determined and the determination rate are set.

The pachinko machine P in this embodiment includes, as a variation pattern table 114, table MP1 which is referenced during normal gameplay, table MP2 which is referenced during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, table MP3 which is referenced during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2, and table MP4 which is referenced during high-probability time-saving gameplay state (see Figures 11 and 12).

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting prize slot 15 or the second starting prize slot 16, one random variation pattern number is obtained within the numerical range of 0 to 249. Based on this obtained random variation pattern number, the special symbol determined as described above, the current number of reserved balls (first reserved ball number or second reserved ball number), and the variation pattern table 114 corresponding to the current game state, a variation pattern command is determined.

Here, during normal gameplay or low-probability time-saving gameplay (LJT1), the player is instructed to play in the first game area (12a). As a general rule, game balls enter the first starting entry point (15), and game balls entering the second starting entry point (16) are irregular. However, regardless of whether a game ball enters the first or second starting entry point (15 or 16), the same variation pattern table (114) corresponding to the current gameplay state is used to determine the variation pattern command. When low-probability time-saving gameplay (LJT2) ends and the normal gameplay state is set, a second special symbol random number obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting entry point (16) during low-probability time-saving gameplay (LJT2) may be stored. For this second special symbol random number, the variation pattern command is determined using the variation pattern table (114) corresponding to the normal gameplay state.
Similarly, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 and the high-probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to play in the second game area 12b. As a general rule, the game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16, and the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize entry point 15 is irregular. However, regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15 or the second starting prize entry point 16, the same variation pattern table 114 corresponding to the current game state is used to determine the variation pattern command.
Furthermore, when determining the variation pattern command based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15, the first number of reserved balls at that time is referenced, and when determining the variation pattern command based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16, the second number of reserved balls at that time is referenced.

Furthermore, the variation pattern table 114 may include separate tables for each current game state and the type of starting entry point into which the game ball entered (first starting entry point 15 (first special symbol random number), second starting entry point 16 (second special symbol random number)). In other words, the variation pattern command may be determined by referring to the variation pattern table 114 corresponding to the current game state and the starting entry point into which the game ball entered.

As shown in Figure 11(a), according to Table MP1, which is referenced during normal gameplay, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined (i.e., the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss), and the current number of reserved symbols (first reserved symbol, second reserved symbol) is 0 or 1, the following variable pattern command "00H" is determined, which is associated with a variable pattern called "13-second variation" (a variable pattern in which the variation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the variation time for the second half is set to 13 seconds), when the variable pattern random number is between 0 and 219, the variable pattern command "02H" is determined, which is associated with a variable pattern called "20-second variation" (a variable pattern in which the variation time for the first half is set to 13 seconds and the variation time for the second half is set to 7 seconds), and the variable pattern command "03H" is determined, which is associated with a variable pattern called "60-second variation" (a variable pattern in which the variation time for the first half is set to 13 seconds and the variation time for the second half is set to 47 seconds).

Furthermore, if a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, and the current number of reserved symbols is 2 or more, then if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 219, the variation pattern command "01H" is determined, which corresponds to the variation pattern "3-second variation" (a variation pattern where the variation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the variation time for the second half is set to 3 seconds). If the random number for the variation pattern is between 220 and 239, the variation pattern command "02H" is determined, which corresponds to the variation pattern "20-second variation". If the random number for the variation pattern is between 240 and 249, the variation pattern command "03H" is determined, which corresponds to the variation pattern "60-second variation".

Furthermore, when the winning symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6 are determined (i.e., the result of the win/loss lottery is a win), regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 24, the variation pattern command "0AH" associated with the "20-second variation" variation pattern is determined, and if the random number for the variation pattern is between 25 and 249, the variation pattern command "0BH" associated with the "60-second variation" variation pattern is determined.

Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 249 (i.e., regardless of the value of the random number for the variation pattern), the variation pattern command "0EH" associated with the "13-second variation" variation pattern is determined.
Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 249, the variation pattern command "0FH" is determined, which is associated with the variation pattern of "13 seconds variation".

As shown in Figure 11(b), according to table MP2 referenced during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current number of reserved symbols is 0 or 1, the following command is determined: when the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 219, the variation pattern command "10H" is associated with the "13-second variation" variation pattern; when the random number for the variation pattern is between 220 and 239, the variation pattern command "12H" is associated with the "20-second variation" variation pattern; and when the random number for the variation pattern is between 240 and 249, the variation pattern command "13H" is associated with the "60-second variation" variation pattern.

Furthermore, if a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current number of reserved symbols is 2 or more, then if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 219, the variation pattern command "11H" associated with the "3-second variation" variation pattern is determined; if the random number for the variation pattern is between 220 and 239, the variation pattern command "12H" associated with the "20-second variation" variation pattern is determined; and if the random number for the variation pattern is between 240 and 249, the variation pattern command "13H" associated with the "60-second variation" variation pattern is determined.

Furthermore, when a winning symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 24, the variation pattern command "1AH" associated with the "20-second variation" pattern is determined, and if the random number for the variation pattern is between 25 and 249, the variation pattern command "1BH" associated with the "60-second variation" pattern is determined.

Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 249, the variation pattern command "1CH" associated with the "13-second variation" pattern is determined.

As shown in Figure 12(a), according to Table MP3, which is referenced during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current number of reserved symbols is 0 or 1, the following is determined: If the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 219, the variation pattern command "20H" associated with the "13-second variation" variation pattern is determined; if the random number for the variation pattern is between 220 and 239, the variation pattern command "22H" associated with the "20-second variation" variation pattern is determined; and if the random number for the variation pattern is between 240 and 249, the variation pattern command "23H" associated with the "45-second variation" variation pattern (the first half of the variation time is 13 seconds, and the second half of the variation time is 32 seconds) is determined.

Furthermore, if a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, and the current number of reserved symbols is 2 or more, then if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 219, the variation pattern command "21H" is determined, which corresponds to the variation pattern "2-second variation" (a variation pattern where the variation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the variation time for the second half is set to 2 seconds). If the random number for the variation pattern is between 220 and 239, the variation pattern command "22H" is determined, which corresponds to the variation pattern "20-second variation". If the random number for the variation pattern is between 240 and 249, the variation pattern command "23H" is determined, which corresponds to the variation pattern "45-second variation".

Furthermore, when a winning symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 24, the variation pattern command "2AH" associated with the "20-second variation" pattern is determined, and if the random number for the variation pattern is between 25 and 249, the variation pattern command "2BH" associated with the "45-second variation" pattern is determined.

Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined and the current number of reserved symbols is 0 or 1, if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 219, the variation pattern command "2CH" associated with the "13-second variation" variation pattern is determined; if the random number for the variation pattern is between 220 and 239, the variation pattern command "2EH" associated with the "20-second variation" variation pattern is determined; and if the random number for the variation pattern is between 240 and 249, the variation pattern command "2FH" associated with the "45-second variation" variation pattern is determined.
Furthermore, if the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined and the current number of reserved symbols is 2 or more, the following variable pattern command "2DH" is determined when the variable pattern random number is between 0 and 219, the variable pattern command "2DH" associated with the "2-second variable" variable pattern is determined when the variable pattern random number is between 220 and 239, the variable pattern command "2EH" associated with the "20-second variable" variable pattern is determined when the variable pattern random number is between 240 and 249, the variable pattern command "2FH" associated with the "45-second variable" variable pattern is determined.

As shown in Figure 12(b), according to Table MP4, which is referenced during the high-probability time-saving game state, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current number of reserved symbols is 0 or 1, the following command is determined: If the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 219, the variation pattern command "30H" associated with the "13-second variation" variation pattern is determined; if the random number for the variation pattern is between 220 and 239, the variation pattern command "32H" associated with the "20-second variation" variation pattern is determined; and if the random number for the variation pattern is between 240 and 249, the variation pattern command "33H" associated with the "45-second variation" variation pattern is determined.

Furthermore, if a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, and the current number of reserved symbols is 2 or more, then if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 219, the variation pattern command "31H" is determined, which corresponds to the variation pattern "1-second variation" (a variation pattern where the variation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the variation time for the second half is set to 1 second). If the random number for the variation pattern is between 220 and 239, the variation pattern command "32H" is determined, which corresponds to the variation pattern "20-second variation". If the random number for the variation pattern is between 240 and 249, the variation pattern command "33H" is determined, which corresponds to the variation pattern "45-second variation".

Furthermore, when a winning symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 24, the variation pattern command "3AH" associated with the "20-second variation" pattern is determined, and if the random number for the variation pattern is between 25 and 249, the variation pattern command "3BH" associated with the "45-second variation" pattern is determined.

Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined and the current number of reserved symbols is 0 or 1, the variation pattern command "3CH" associated with the "13-second variation" variation pattern is determined when the variation pattern random number is between 0 and 219, the variation pattern command "3EH" associated with the "20-second variation" variation pattern is determined when the variation pattern random number is between 220 and 239, and the variation pattern command "3FH" associated with the "45-second variation" variation pattern is determined when the variation pattern random number is between 240 and 249.
Furthermore, if the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined and the current number of reserved symbols is 2 or more, the following command is determined: if the random number for the variation pattern is between 0 and 219, the variation pattern command "3DH" associated with the "1-second variation" variation pattern is determined; if the random number for the variation pattern is between 220 and 239, the variation pattern command "3EH" associated with the "20-second variation" variation pattern is determined; and if the random number for the variation pattern is between 240 and 249, the variation pattern command "3FH" associated with the "45-second variation" variation pattern is determined.

The variable pattern command determined as described above is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and based on the variable pattern command, the specific form of the first half of the variable performance and the specific form of the second half of the variable performance are determined. The variable performance is then executed according to the specific form determined in this way, and the sum of the variable time of the first half and the variable time of the second half set in the variable pattern command becomes the time from the start to the end of the variable performance (variation display of special symbols).
For example, if the selected variation pattern command is "02H" (the variation time for the first half is 13 seconds, and the variation time for the second half is 7 seconds), then the sum of the variation times for the first and second halves, 20 seconds (= 13 seconds + 7 seconds), will be the total variation time for the entire variation animation (the entire variation display of the special symbols).
Furthermore, for the following variation pattern commands, "00H", "01H", "0EH", "0FH", "10H", "11H", "1CH", "20H", "21H", "2CH", "2DH", "30H", "31H", "3CH", and "3DH", "0 seconds" is set as the variation time for the first half. When these variation pattern commands are selected, the entire variation effect is executed in the manner determined according to the variation pattern command for the duration of the corresponding second half of the variation time.

Furthermore, based on the aforementioned variation time, the performance display device 21 performs variation effects, and the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 30 or second special symbol display device 31) displays variations of special symbols.
Specifically, if the starting entry point into which the game ball enters is the first starting entry point 15, the first special symbol display device 30 will flash during the aforementioned variation time. If the starting entry point into which the game ball enters is the second starting entry point 16, the second special symbol display device 31 will flash during the aforementioned variation time. After the variation time has elapsed, the determined special symbol will be displayed in a stopped state until the stop display time described later has elapsed.

Furthermore, regarding the manner of the variation effect, instead of determining both the manner of the first half and the manner of the second half of the variation effect based on the variation pattern command, it is also possible to determine other commands in addition to the variation pattern command, and then determine the manner of the first half of the variation effect based on one of the commands, and the manner of the second half of the variation effect based on the other commands.
Furthermore, instead of dividing the variable animation into a first and second half, it may be divided into more parts, and the behavior of each part may be determined based on the corresponding command.

As described above, the stop display time table 115 is for determining the stop display time for the special symbol to be stopped after the variation display of the special symbol has finished.
This stop display time table 115 specifies the stop display time according to the current game state (the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery) and the type of special symbol determined as described above. The main CPU 101 refers to this stop display time table 115 to determine the stop display time according to the current game state and the determined special symbol. Then, when the display of the special symbol ends (stops), the special symbol will remain displayed in a stopped state until the determined stop display time has elapsed.
As shown in Figure 13, according to the stop display time table 115, if the current game state is the normal game state, a stop display time of 0.5 seconds is determined when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, a stop display time of 0.5 seconds is determined when a winning symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 or X6 is determined, and a stop display time of 20 seconds is determined when a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined.
Furthermore, if the current game state is low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, or high-probability time-saving game state, a 0.5-second stop display time is determined when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, when a winning symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 or X6 is determined, or when a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined.

Next, we will explain the processing related to general gameplay.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched by a launching device (not shown) and flowing down the game area 12 passes through the gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable piece 16b and make the movable piece 16b protrude. If the lottery for a normal symbol is successful, the movable piece 16b will be in a protruding state for a predetermined operating time, and the game ball that has flowed down to the upper right end of the movable piece 16b will be guided to the second starting prize entry opening 16, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry opening 16.
The lottery for this standard pattern is conducted based on a winning random number obtained when the game ball passes through gate 20, and a winning random number determination table 116 stored in the main ROM 102 for determining the random number.

When a game ball passes through gate 20, the aforementioned winning random number is acquired, and this random number is stored in the general-purpose reserve memory area of the main RAM 103, up to a maximum of four. Specifically, this general-purpose reserve memory area consists of a total of four memory units, from the first to the fourth, and the random numbers are stored starting from the first memory unit in the order in which the balls pass through gate 20. If several winning random numbers are already stored in the memory units, the winning random number is stored in the memory unit with the smallest number among the available memory units. Furthermore, if four winning random numbers are already stored in the general-purpose reserve memory area, even if a game ball passes through gate 20, the winning random number related to this passage is not stored in the general-purpose reserve memory area.
In this pachinko machine P, the winning random number is a hardware random number built into the main control board 100. This winning random number is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed each time the sequence completes a cycle, and the starting value is changed each time the system is reset.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the number of random numbers that determine a win (hereinafter also referred to as the number of random numbers held) stored in the random number hold memory area is stored in a random number hold counter (not specifically shown in the diagram).

The winning random number determination table 116 is used to determine whether or not a win has occurred based on the drawing of ordinary symbols, and as shown in Figures 14(a) to (c), it comprises a first determination table 116a that is referenced during non-time-saving game states (i.e., during normal game states), a second determination table 116b that is referenced during time-saving game states JT1 (i.e., during low-probability time-saving game states LJT1), and a third determination table 116c that is referenced during time-saving game states JT2 (i.e., during low-probability time-saving game states LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game states). Although not specifically shown in the figures, the first determination table 116a is also referenced during special games.
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, when a game ball passes through gate 20, one winning random number is obtained within the numerical range of 0 to 65535. If the game state at the time of the drawing of ordinary symbols is a non-time-saving game state, the first judgment table 116a is selected, and the drawing of ordinary symbols is performed based on the obtained winning random number and the selected first judgment table 116a. If the game state at the time of the drawing of ordinary symbols is a time-saving game state JT1, the second judgment table 116b is selected, and the drawing of ordinary symbols is performed based on the obtained winning random number and the selected second judgment table 116b. If the game state at the time of the drawing of ordinary symbols is a time-saving game state JT2, the third judgment table 116c is selected, and the drawing of ordinary symbols is performed based on the obtained winning random number and the selected third judgment table 116c.

As shown in Figure 14(a), according to the first determination table 116a, a win is determined if the winning random number is between 1 and 65500, and a loss is determined if the winning random number is any other (0, 65501 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning according to this first determination table 116a is approximately 99/100.
As shown in Figure 14(b), according to the second determination table 116b, similar to the first determination table 116a, a win is determined if the winning random number is between 1 and 65500, and a loss is determined if the winning random number is any other (0, 65501 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning in this second determination table 116b is also approximately 99/100, similar to the first determination table 116a.
As shown in Figure 14(c), according to the third determination table 116c, similar to the first determination table 116a and the second determination table 116b, a win is determined if the winning random number is between 1 and 65500, and a loss is determined if the winning random number is any other (0, 65501 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning in this third determination table 116c is also approximately 99/100, similar to the first determination table 116a and the second determination table 116b.
As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this form, the probability of winning by drawing a regular symbol is set to be the same regardless of the game state.
If a winning combination is drawn using a regular symbol, the winning symbol will be determined; if a losing combination is drawn, the losing symbol will be determined.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes a normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117 and a movable piece operation control table 118, which are tables for determining the variation patterns of the normal symbols and controlling the operation of the movable piece 16b.

The regular symbol variation pattern determination table 117 is used to determine the variation pattern of the regular symbols. As described above, when a regular symbol is drawn by a game ball passing through gate 20, the variation pattern of the regular symbols is determined based on this regular symbol variation pattern determination table 117.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Figure 15, when the game state is a non-time-saving game state, a variation pattern for normal symbols with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined; when the game state is a time-saving game state JT1, a variation pattern for normal symbols with a variation time of 9.5 seconds, slightly shorter than the non-time-saving game state, is determined; and when the game state is a time-saving game state JT2, a variation pattern for normal symbols with a variation time of 1 second, which is significantly shorter than the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state JT1, is determined. Although not specifically shown in the figures, during special games, a variation pattern for normal symbols with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined, similar to the non-time-saving game state.
Then, once the pattern for the regular symbols is determined, the regular symbol display device 32 (see Figure 3A) flashes for the duration of the variation set for that pattern. If the regular symbol draw results in a win and a winning symbol is determined, the regular symbol display device 32 lights up; if it results in a loss and a losing symbol is determined, the regular symbol display device 32 turns off.
In this specification, the flashing of the normal symbol display device 32 is referred to as "normal symbol variation," and the lighting or extinguishing of the normal symbol display device 32 is referred to as "normal symbol stop indication,""stop of normal symbol variation,""stop of normal symbol variation," etc.

Furthermore, the movable piece operation control table 118 is referenced to control the operation of the movable piece 16b, which is attached to the second starting prize entry opening 16.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the normal symbol display device 32 lights up, the movable piece 16b operates in a manner specified in the movable piece operation control table 118. Specifically, when the game state is a non-time-saving game state, as shown in Figure 16, the movable piece solenoid 16c is energized for 0.05 seconds (= 0.05 seconds x 1 time), so the movable piece 16b is in a protruding state for 0.05 seconds. Also, when the game state is a time-saving game state JT1, as shown in Figure 16, the movable piece solenoid 16c is energized for 0.08 seconds (= 0.08 seconds x 1 time), so the movable piece 16b is in a protruding state for 0.08 seconds, which is slightly longer than in the non-time-saving game state. Furthermore, when the game state is the time-saving game state JT2, as shown in Figure 16, the movable piece solenoid 16c is energized for 3 seconds (= 3 seconds x 1 time), so the movable piece 16b remains in a protruding state for 3 seconds, which is longer than in the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state JT1. Although not specifically shown in the figures, during special games, the movable piece 16b remains in a protruding state for 0.05 seconds, similar to the non-time-saving game state.

As described above, during non-time-saving gameplay (normal gameplay), when a game ball passes through gate 20, the probability of winning is extremely high in the lottery for ordinary symbols, and there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to be in a protruding state. However, since the variation time for ordinary symbols is 10 seconds and the operation time of the movable piece 16b is 0.05 seconds, the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to go from the retracted state to the protruding state is long (the interval between protruding states is long), and the time the movable piece 16b is maintained in the protruding state is extremely short. Furthermore, the time it is maintained in this protruding state is shorter than the opening arrival time (the time it takes for the game ball at the upper right end of the movable piece 16b to reach the opening of the second starting prize entry 16), which is approximately 0.3 seconds. Therefore, during non-time-saving gameplay, the movable piece 16b is almost entirely retracted. Even if it protrudes, the game ball at the upper right end of the movable piece 16b will retract before reaching the opening of the second starting prize entry point 16. Thus, in principle, it is impossible for a game ball that enters the second game area 12b to enter the second starting prize entry point 16.

Furthermore, during the shortened play state JT1 (low-probability shortened play state LJT1), the probability of winning in the lottery for regular symbols is the same as during the non-shortened play state. Therefore, similar to the non-shortened play state, there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to be in the protruding state. However, since the variation time for regular symbols is 9.5 seconds and the operation time for the movable piece 16b is 0.08 seconds, similar to the non-shortened play state, the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to go from the retracted state to the protruding state is long, and the time the movable piece 16b is maintained in the protruding state is extremely short. Moreover, this time maintained in the protruding state is shorter than the opening arrival time (approximately 0.3 seconds) mentioned above. Therefore, although there are some differences in the variation time of the normal symbols and the operating time of the movable piece 16b compared to the non-time-saving game state, even in time-saving game state JT1, the movable piece 16b is almost always in a retracted state. Even if it is in a protruding state, it will retract before the game ball at the upper right end of the movable piece 16b reaches the opening of the second starting prize entry point 16. Therefore, in principle, it is impossible for a game ball that has entered the second game area 12b to enter the second starting prize entry point 16.

In contrast, during the time-saving game state JT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, high-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is the same as during the non-time-saving game state and time-saving game state JT1. Therefore, similar to the non-time-saving game state and time-saving game state JT1, there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to be in a protruding state. Furthermore, the variation time of the normal symbols is 1 second, which is shorter than during the non-time-saving game state and time-saving game state JT1, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 3 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-saving game state and time-saving game state JT1. Therefore, the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to go from the retracted state to the protruding state is shorter than during the non-time-saving game state and time-saving game state JT1, and the time for the movable piece 16b to be maintained in the protruding state is longer. Moreover, the time for which it is maintained in the protruding state is longer than the opening arrival time (approximately 0.3 seconds) mentioned above. Therefore, during the shortened play state JT2, the period during which the movable piece 16b is in a protruding state is extended, allowing the game ball located at the upper right end of the movable piece 16b to be guided to the opening of the second starting prize entry port 16. As a result, game balls that enter the second play area 12b can enter the second starting prize entry port 16 with a high frequency.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, the probability of winning by drawing a regular symbol is generally set to be extremely high in all of the following states: non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1, and time-saving game state JT2. However, by making the variation time of the regular symbols and the operation time of the movable piece 16b different, the possibility of a game ball entering the second starting prize entry opening 16 is changed.
In the pachinko machine P according to this form, it is not possible to enter the second starting prize slot 16 during both the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state JT1. However, during the time-saving game state JT2, it is possible to enter the second starting prize slot 16 with a high frequency. Therefore, during the time-saving game state JT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, high-probability time-saving game state), it is possible to frequently acquire prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize slot 16. As a result, it is possible to acquire more opportunities for winning or losing per predetermined time while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses, compared to the non-time-saving game state (normal game state) and the time-saving game state JT1 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, during the time-saving game state JT2, control is implemented to shorten the average duration of the special symbol's variation (the so-called special symbol variation shortening function) compared to the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state JT1 (see Figures 11 and 12). This, combined with the change in the frequency of game balls entering the second starting prize entry point 16, makes the win/loss lottery and the display of special symbol variations more likely to occur during the time-saving game state JT2 compared to the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state JT1. In other words, the frequency of the win/loss lottery (or, to put it another way, the frequency of the display of special symbol variations) changes.

Furthermore, in order to change the probability of game balls entering the second starting prize entry point 16, the frequency of the win/loss lottery, and the display of special symbol variations for each game state, one or more of the elements that determine the performance of the regular symbol game (the probability of winning in the regular symbol lottery, the variation time of the regular symbols, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b) may be set to be different for each game state, or all of the elements may be set to be different. Alternatively, all elements that determine the performance of the regular symbol game may be set to be the same regardless of the game state, while the average variation time of the special symbols may be set to differ for each game state.

(Overview of the processing in the main control board 100 when power is restored after an interruption)
As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine P is turned on from off (when power is restored), the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 sets one of the control states depending on the control state it was in before the power was turned off (immediately before the power was restored), whether the setting switch 108 is on or off at the time the power is turned on (when power is restored), whether the RAM clear switch 109 is on or off, whether the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on or off (open or closed of the main frame 2), whether or not an abnormality occurred in the backup process of the main RAM 103 that was performed when the power was turned off (hereinafter referred to as a backup abnormality), and whether or not an abnormality occurred in the main RAM 103 (hereinafter referred to as a RAM abnormality).

(Occurrence and resolution of backup and RAM errors in the main control board 100)
Here, we will explain the occurrence and resolution of backup and RAM errors in the main control board 100.
When power is restored after an outage, if there is an inconsistency between the data stored in the main RAM 103 at the time of the outage and the data stored in the main RAM 103 at the time of restoration, it is determined that a backup error has occurred. If no such inconsistency occurs, it is determined that no backup error has occurred.
This backup anomaly is highly likely to occur due to a transient cause (for example, a temporary malfunction in one of the devices that causes a failure to read or retain data). Also, if a new main ROM 102 or main RAM 103 is installed and the power to the pachinko machine P is turned on, a backup anomaly will inevitably occur because the backup process has not been performed beforehand.

Furthermore, if it becomes impossible to read or write data within the usage area of the main RAM 103, it is determined that a RAM malfunction has occurred.
In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, the determination of a RAM abnormality is limited to the area being used, and if data cannot be read or written to an area outside of use, it is not determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred. However, it is also possible to determine the occurrence of a RAM abnormality by considering both the area being used and the area outside of use. When set in this way, if data cannot be read or written to at least one of the areas being used or outside of use, it may be determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred, and the following processes (initialization process in case of abnormality, setting of game stop state) may be performed.
This RAM anomaly is highly likely to occur due to a hardware malfunction, such as chip damage, and will require replacement or repair of main RAM 103.

Furthermore, if a backup error occurs when the power is restored, unless the setting change conditions described later are met, the error initialization process will be executed, and a game stop state based on the backup error will be set. Also, if a RAM error occurs when the power is restored, the error initialization process will be executed, and a game stop state based on the RAM error will be set. If both a backup error and a RAM error occur simultaneously, the error initialization process will be executed, and the game stop state based on the RAM error will take precedence over the backup error.
As will be described later, in the abnormal initialization process that is executed when a game stop state is set, all data stored in the main RAM 103 (i.e., all data stored in the used area and the unused area, specifically, setting values, game machine status flags, test signal information, checksums, backup flags, error information, various data related to the progress of the game, and game performance data) is cleared.

If a game stop state is set due to a backup error, the system will be set to the change state when the power is restored, by fulfilling the setting change conditions (specifically, setting switch 108 is ON, RAM clear switch 109 is ON, and main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is ON). Subsequently, the system will be set to the playable state when setting switch 108 is turned OFF. On the other hand, if the setting change conditions are not met, the system will remain in the game stop state.
Furthermore, if a game-stopped state is set due to a RAM malfunction, the setting change state is set when the RAM malfunction is resolved upon power restoration (main RAM 103 is replaced or repaired and there is no RAM malfunction) and the setting change conditions are met. Subsequently, the game-playable state is set when the setting switch 108 is turned off. On the other hand, if the RAM malfunction is not resolved upon power restoration, or if the setting change conditions are not met, the game remains in the game-stopped state.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P of this form, if a game stop state is set due to a backup error or RAM error, the game-playable state will not be set directly even if the power is turned on again. Instead, the game-playable state is set (transitions to the game-playable state) after going through a setting change state which is set by turning on the power while the setting change conditions are met.

(Setting the control state when power is restored after an interruption)
The control states set when power is restored after an interruption will be explained in detail below with reference to Figures 17 and 18.
(1) When the power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is off, there is no backup abnormality, and there is no RAM abnormality. In this case, as shown in Figure 17, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable, setting changed, setting confirmed, or play stopped, the control state immediately before the power outage will be set when the power is restored. That is, the control state when the power is restored will be the same as the control state that was in place immediately before the power outage.
Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in a playable state and a special game was in progress, the special game will resume when the power is restored.
In this form of pachinko machine P, as a general rule, the machine remains in the setting change state or setting confirmation state only while the setting switch 108 is ON. In the above case, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the setting change state, the setting change state is set when the power is restored, and if the control state immediately before the power outage was the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is set when the power is restored. However, since the setting switch 108 is OFF, the playable state is set (changed to the playable state) immediately after the setting change state or setting confirmation state is set.

(2) When the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is ON, the RAM clear switch 109 is OFF, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is OFF, there is no backup abnormality, and there is no RAM abnormality, in this case as well, as shown in Figure 17, when the power is restored, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was in the playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, or play stopped state, the control state immediately before the power outage will be set.
Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in a playable state and a special game was in progress, the special game will resume when the power is restored.
Furthermore, in this case, if the setting change state or setting confirmation state is set when the power is restored after an outage, the game-ready state will not be set immediately afterward.

(3) When the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is off, there is no backup abnormality, and there is no RAM abnormality, then as shown in Figure 17, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the playable state or the setting confirmation state, then the normal initialization process is performed when the power is restored based on the fact that the RAM clear switch 109 is on, and the playable state is set. If the control state immediately before the power outage was the setting change state, then the normal initialization process is performed when the power is restored, and the setting change state is set. If the control state immediately before the power outage was the game stopped state, then the game stopped state is set when the power is restored.
As will be described later, in the normal initialization process that is performed based on the RAM clear switch 109 being ON, the data stored in the second to fourth areas of the main RAM 103's usage area (i.e., checksums, backup flags, error information, and various data related to the progress of the game) is cleared. Therefore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in a playable state, and there were held symbols stored or special symbols or regular symbols were being displayed, the stored held symbols will be cleared and the special symbols or regular symbols will be reset. If a special game was in progress, this special game will also be reset.
Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the setting change state and the setting value was being changed, the setting value is not cleared by the normal initialization process described above. Therefore, even in the setting change state set after the power is restored, the setting value being changed immediately before the power outage (the setting value stored in the main RAM 103) is maintained. Then, immediately after the setting change state is set, the playable state is set. As a result, the setting change state ends, and the setting value being changed becomes finalized, as will be described later.

(4) When the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is ON, the RAM clear switch 109 is ON, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is OFF, there is no backup abnormality, and there is no RAM abnormality, in this case as well, as shown in Figure 17, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the playable state or the setting confirmation state, the normal initialization process is performed when the power is restored and the playable state is set. Also, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the setting change state, the normal initialization process is performed when the power is restored and the setting change state is set. Also, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the game stopped state, the game stopped state is set when the power is restored.
Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in a playable state, and there were reserved balls stored or special or regular symbols were being displayed, the stored reserved balls will be cleared, and the special or regular symbol displays will be reset. If a special game was in progress, this special game will also be reset.
Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the setting change state and the setting value was being changed, the setting value being changed immediately before the power outage will be maintained even in the setting change state set after the power is restored. And since the playable state is not set immediately after the setting change state is set and the setting change state does not end, the setting value being changed is not finalized at this point.

(5) When the power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is on, there is no backup abnormality, and there is no RAM abnormality. In this case, as shown in Figure 17, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable, setting changed, setting confirmed, or game stopped, the control state immediately before the power outage will be set when the power is restored.
Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in a playable state and a special game was in progress, the special game will resume when the power is restored.
Furthermore, the "playable" state is set immediately after the "settings changed" or "settings confirmed" state is set.

(6) When the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is ON, the RAM clear switch 109 is OFF, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is ON, there is no backup abnormality, and there is no RAM abnormality, then as shown in Figure 17, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the playable state or the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state will be set when the power is restored. Also, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the setting change state, the setting change state will be set when the power is restored. Also, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the game stopped state, the game stopped state will be set when the power is restored.
Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in a playable state and special game was in progress, the setting confirmation state will be set when the power is restored, and then the special game will resume when the setting switch 108 is turned off.
Furthermore, the game-playable state is not set immediately after the settings change state is set.

(7) When the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is on, there is no backup abnormality, and there is no RAM abnormality, then as shown in Figure 17, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the playable state or the setting confirmation state, then the normal initialization process is performed when the power is restored and the playable state is set. Also, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the setting change state, then the normal initialization process is performed when the power is restored and the setting change state is set. Also, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the game stopped state, then the game stopped state is set when the power is restored.
Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in a playable state, and there were reserved balls stored or special or regular symbols were being displayed, the stored reserved balls will be cleared, and the special or regular symbol displays will be reset. If a special game was in progress, this special game will also be reset.
Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the setting change state and the setting value was being changed, the setting value being changed immediately before the power outage will be maintained even in the setting change state set after the power is restored. Then, immediately after the setting change state is set, the playable state is set. As a result, the setting change state ends, and the setting value being changed becomes final.

(8) When the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is ON, the RAM clear switch 109 is ON, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is ON, there is no backup abnormality, and there is no RAM abnormality, then as shown in Figure 17, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable, setting confirmed, or play stopped, the normal initialization process is executed when the power is restored and the setting change state is set.
Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in a playable state, and there were reserved balls stored or special or regular symbols were being displayed, the stored reserved balls will be cleared, and the special or regular symbol displays will be reset. If a special game was in progress, this special game will also be reset.
Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the setting change state and the setting value was being changed, the setting value being changed immediately before the power outage will be maintained even in the setting change state set after the power is restored. And since the playable state is not set immediately after the setting change state is set and the setting change state does not end, the setting value being changed is not finalized at this point.

(9) When power is restored after an interruption, if a backup error occurs but no RAM error occurs (excluding cases where the setting switch 108, RAM clear switch 109, and main unit frame open detection sensor 2a are all ON)
In other words, when the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup error has occurred, but no RAM error has occurred, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup error has occurred, but no RAM error has occurred, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup error has occurred, but no RAM error has occurred, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup error has occurred, but no RAM error has occurred, the setting switch 108 is off If the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup error has occurred, but no RAM error has occurred, if the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup error has occurred, but no RAM error has occurred, or if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup error has occurred, but no RAM error has occurred, in all cases, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable, setting changed, setting confirmed, or game stopped, when the power is restored, the error initialization process is executed and the game stopped state based on the occurrence of a backup error is set (see Figure 17).

(10) When the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is ON, the RAM clear switch 109 is ON, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is ON, a backup error has occurred, and no RAM error has occurred, then as shown in Figure 17, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable, setting changed, setting confirmed, or play stopped, when the power is restored, the error initialization process is executed and the setting changed state is set.
Furthermore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was in a playable state, and there were reserved balls stored or special or regular symbols were being displayed, the stored reserved balls will be cleared, and the special or regular symbol displays will be reset. If a special game was in progress, this special game will also be reset.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this configuration, in this case (when a backup abnormality occurs when the power is restored), the setting value is also cleared during the abnormal initialization process executed when the power is restored. Therefore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was the setting change state and the setting value was being changed, the setting value being changed immediately before the power outage (the setting value stored in the main RAM 103) is not maintained in the setting change state set after the power is restored, and the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is changed to a predetermined initial setting value ("1" in this configuration). Note that the playable state is not set immediately after the setting change state is set, and the setting change state does not end, so the setting value is not finalized at this point.

(11) When the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is off, there is no backup abnormality, but there is a RAM abnormality, then as shown in Figure 18, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable, setting changed, setting confirmed, or game stopped, when the power is restored, the abnormality initialization process is executed and the game stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, if no backup failure occurs, it may not be possible to detect a RAM failure even if one has occurred. Furthermore, the determination of a RAM failure is limited to the used area; if data cannot be read or written to an unused area, it is not determined that a RAM failure has occurred. Thus, if a RAM failure is not detected or determined not to have occurred, the control state at the time of power recovery is set as in the case of (1) above, assuming that no RAM failure occurred.

(12) When the power is restored, the setting switch 108 is ON, the RAM clear switch 109 is OFF, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is OFF, there is no backup abnormality, but there is a RAM abnormality. In this case as well, as shown in Figure 18, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable, setting changed, setting confirmed, or game stopped, when the power is restored, the abnormality initialization process is executed and the game stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if no RAM abnormality is detected, or if it is not determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred, the control state upon power recovery will be set in the same manner as in case (2) above, assuming that no RAM abnormality occurred.

(13) When the power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is off, no backup abnormality occurred, but a RAM abnormality occurred. In this case as well, as shown in Figure 18, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable, setting changed, setting confirmed, or game stopped, when the power is restored, the abnormality initialization process is executed and the game stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if no RAM abnormality is detected, or if it is not determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred, the control state upon power recovery will be set in the same manner as in case (3) above, assuming that no RAM abnormality occurred.

(14) When the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is ON, the RAM clear switch 109 is ON, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is OFF, no backup abnormality occurred, but a RAM abnormality occurred, in this case as well, as shown in Figure 18, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, or game stopped state, when the power is restored, the abnormality initialization process is executed and the game stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if no RAM abnormality is detected, or if it is not determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred, the control state upon power recovery will be set in the same manner as in case (4) above, assuming that no RAM abnormality occurred.

(15) When the power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is on, there is no backup abnormality, but there is a RAM abnormality. In this case as well, as shown in Figure 18, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable, setting changed, setting confirmed, or game stopped, when the power is restored, the abnormality initialization process is executed and the game stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if no RAM abnormality is detected, or if it is not determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred, the control state upon power recovery will be set in the same manner as in case (5) above, assuming that no RAM abnormality occurred.

(16) When the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is ON, the RAM clear switch 109 is OFF, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is ON, there is no backup abnormality, but there is a RAM abnormality, in this case as well, as shown in Figure 18, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, or play stopped state, when the power is restored, the abnormality initialization process is executed and the play stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if no RAM abnormality is detected, or if it is not determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred, the control state upon power recovery will be set in the same manner as in case (6) above, assuming that no RAM abnormality occurred.

(17) When the power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is on, there is no backup abnormality, but there is a RAM abnormality. In this case as well, as shown in Figure 18, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable, setting changed, setting confirmed, or game stopped, when the power is restored, the abnormality initialization process is executed and the game stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if no RAM abnormality is detected, or if it is not determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred, the control state upon power recovery will be set in the same manner as in case (7) above, assuming that no RAM abnormality occurred.

(18) When the power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is ON, the RAM clear switch 109 is ON, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is ON, there is no backup abnormality, but there is a RAM abnormality, in this case as well, as shown in Figure 18, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, or play stopped state, when the power is restored, the abnormality initialization process is executed and the play stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if no RAM abnormality is detected, or if it is not determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred, the control state upon power recovery will be set in the same manner as in case (8) above, assuming that no RAM abnormality occurred.
Thus, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, if a RAM abnormality occurs, even if the setting change conditions are met, the game stop state will be set in priority over the setting change state.

(19) When power is restored, if a backup error or a RAM error occurs, that is, when power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup error occurs, but no RAM error occurs, if the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup error occurs, but no RAM error occurs, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup error occurs, but no RAM error occurs, if the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup error occurs, but no RAM error occurs, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is on, and a backup error occurs If a backup error occurs and no RAM error occurs, the setting switch 108 is ON, the RAM clear switch 109 is OFF, and the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is ON. If a backup error occurs and no RAM error occurs, the setting switch 108 is OFF, the RAM clear switch 109 is ON, and the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is ON. If a backup error occurs and no RAM error occurs, the setting switch 108 is ON, the RAM clear switch 109 is ON, and the main unit frame open detection sensor 2a is ON. In all cases, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was playable, setting confirmed, or game stopped, when the power is restored, the error initialization process is executed, and the game stopped state based on the RAM error takes precedence over the game stopped state based on the backup error (see Figure 18).

Then, when the above processes (1) to (19) are executed, if a setting confirmation state or a setting change state is set, the main information display device 105 will display the setting value stored in the main RAM 103. Also, when a playable state is set, the main information display device 105 will display game performance display information based on the game performance data stored in the main RAM 103. Also, when a game stopped state is set, the main information display device 105 will display a code indicating that the game stopped state has been set.
Furthermore, if the playable state is set immediately after the setting confirmation state or setting change state is set, the setting value will be displayed on the main information display device 105 for a moment, and then the game performance display information will be displayed in accordance with the setting of the playable state.

Furthermore, if a setting confirmation state or a setting change state is set based on the setting switch 108 being ON, then when the setting switch 108 is turned OFF, a process is executed to switch the currently set setting confirmation state or setting change state to a playable state, and the playable state is set. Upon setting the playable state, the display on the main information display device 105 also switches to the corresponding content.

Furthermore, in pachinko machines with multiple setting levels, during the setting change state, provided that the main frame opening detection sensor 2a detects the opening of the main frame 2, each time the push button 109a is pressed and the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is changed by one level. Specifically, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is changed to a value incremented by 1.
For example, in a pachinko machine P with setting values from "1" to "6" (six setting levels), if the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is "2", and the push button 109a is pressed while the main frame 2 is open, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 will change to "3". Then, each time the push button 109a is pressed while the main frame 2 is open, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 will change from "4" to "5" to "6", and after "6" it will change to "1". In addition, each time the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is changed, the display of the setting value on the main information display device 105 will also change.
When the setting switch 108 is turned off, it becomes impossible to change the setting value stored in the main RAM 103. In other words, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 at this point becomes the final setting value.
Furthermore, in this form of pachinko machine P, only one setting level is provided, so the setting value will not be changed even if the push button 109a is pressed. Also, the display of the setting value on the main information display device 105 will not be changed.

(Handling of abnormal setting values)
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, if noise or other issues occur, the setting values stored in the usage area of the main RAM 103 may be overwritten with abnormal values (for example, values other than "1"). In such a situation where the stored setting values become abnormal (hereinafter also referred to as setting value abnormality), it may not be possible to conduct a jackpot lottery based on the appropriate setting values, which could have a serious impact on the progress of the game.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the main CPU 101 performs a setting value abnormality determination process to determine whether or not a setting value abnormality has occurred at the time when the above-mentioned jackpot lottery or regular symbol lottery is performed while the game is playable. If it is determined in this setting value abnormality determination process that a setting value abnormality has occurred, the above-mentioned abnormality initialization process is executed, and a game stop state based on the occurrence of a setting value abnormality is set.
In this form of pachinko machine P, the next jackpot lottery and the display of special symbol variations are not performed while the special game is in progress. Therefore, the setting value abnormality detection process based on the jackpot lottery can only be performed when the special game is not in progress. In contrast, the lottery for regular symbols is performed both when the special game is not in progress and when it is in progress. Therefore, the setting value abnormality detection process based on the regular symbol lottery can be performed both when the special game is not in progress and when it is in progress.

If a game stop state is set due to an abnormal setting value, when the power is restored, the setting change state is set if the setting change conditions are met, and then the game can be played when the setting switch 108 is turned off. On the other hand, if the setting change conditions are not met, the game will remain in the game stop state.
In other words, if a game stop state is set due to an abnormal setting, just as with a game stop state set due to a backup or RAM abnormality, the game will not be directly set to playable state even if the power is turned off and on again. Instead, the game will be set to playable state only after the setting change state is set by turning on the power while the setting change conditions are met.

(Normal initialization process, abnormal initialization process, clear process)
In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, if a game stop state is set based on the occurrence of a backup error, RAM error, or setting value error, an error initialization process is executed. In addition, if a backup error occurs when the power is restored and the setting change conditions are met, an error initialization process is also executed when the setting change state is set.
In this abnormal initialization process, as described above, all data stored in the main RAM 103 (all data stored in the used and unused areas, specifically setting values, game machine status flags, test signal information, checksums, backup flags, error information, various data related to the progress of the game, game performance data, etc.) is cleared.
Furthermore, if a game stop state is set due to a backup error, RAM error, or setting value error, the default setting value "1" may be automatically stored in the main RAM 103's usage area after a setting change state is set.

Furthermore, when power is restored after an interruption, if the RAM clear switch 109 is ON and a control state other than the game stop state (game-ready state, setting change state, setting confirmation state) is set, the normal initialization process is executed, except in the case where the abnormal initialization process is executed as described above (when a backup abnormality occurs when power is restored after an interruption, and the setting change state is set because the setting change conditions are met). In this normal initialization process, as described above, the data stored in the second to fourth areas of the main RAM 103's usage area (checksum, backup flag, error information, various data related to the progress of the game) is cleared.
Furthermore, when power is restored after an interruption, if the RAM clear switch 109 is off and a playable state or a settings confirmation state is set, a clear process is executed to clear a portion of the main RAM 103. In this clear process, data stored in the second and third areas of the main RAM 103's usage area (i.e., checksums, backup flags, and error information) is cleared.
In the following, the abnormal initialization process and the normal initialization process may be collectively referred to simply as "RAM clear."

(Overview of various controls when a game stop state is set due to setting errors, backup errors, or RAM errors)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, when the machine is in a playable state and special symbol game, regular symbol game, or special game is being played, noise or the like may occur, causing a setting value anomaly, which may result in the machine being set to a play stop state based on the setting value anomaly. In addition, in the above case, for example, if a momentary power outage (i.e., a momentary interruption) occurs, and when the power is restored (when the power is restored), a backup anomaly or RAM anomaly may occur in the main control board 100, which may result in the machine being set to a play stop state based on the backup anomaly or RAM anomaly.
In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, when the machine is in a stopped state due to the above-mentioned settings being made based on the occurrence of setting value abnormalities, backup abnormalities, or RAM abnormalities, the special symbol games, regular symbol games, and special games that were being played during the playable state before the stopped state was set will not be played, and the game will not progress.

Specifically, when the game is playable and the state related to the ball difference operation stop control described later is the pre-activation warning state, the activation warning state, or the activation notification state, when the operating handle 5 is rotated, the launch payout control board 200 performs control to launch game balls. On the other hand, when the game is stopped, even if the operating handle 5 is rotated, the launch payout control board 200 does not perform control to launch game balls.
In other words, when the game is playable and the state related to the ball difference operation stop control described later is the pre-activation warning state, the activation warning state, or the activation notification state, the game balls will be launched when the operating handle 5 is rotated. However, when the game is stopped, the game balls will not be launched even if the operating handle 5 is rotated.
In this pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when each control state (playable state, setting confirmation state, setting change state, play stopped state) is set, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 sends a state setting command to the launch/payout control board 200 and the sub-control board 300 indicating that each control state has been set. This allows the launch/payout control board 200 and the sub-control board 300 to also be aware of the set control state.

Furthermore, when the game is stopped, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 does not detect when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15 or the second starting prize entry point 16, or when a game ball passes through the gate 20. As a result, even if a game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15 or the second starting prize entry point 16, a lottery for a jackpot based on that entry is not performed, and even if a game ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery for a regular symbol based on that passage is not performed. In addition, no new prize balls, no new special symbol random numbers are stored in the reserve memory, and no new regular symbol random numbers are stored in the reserve memory.
Furthermore, if the special symbol variation display, the regular symbol variation display, or special game is being executed while the game is playable, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 will stop the special symbol variation display, the regular symbol variation display, and the execution of the special game when the game stop state is set.
Thus, in the game-stopped state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 performs the above-mentioned control, preventing the game from progressing.

Furthermore, when the machine is in a playable state and is in the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, or activation notification state, when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry 15 or the second starting prize entry 16, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 performs control to transmit a prize entry signal as an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P via the external information terminal board 500, from a predetermined start time after the ball enters (for example, the start time of the special symbol variation display) to a predetermined end time (for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3000 ms) has elapsed from the predetermined start time). Furthermore, when the machine is in a playable state and is in the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, or activation notification state, if a jackpot is won, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 will perform control to transmit a jackpot signal as an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P via the external information terminal board 500 from a predetermined start time after the jackpot is won (for example, the start time of the special game based on the jackpot) to a predetermined end time (for example, the end time of the special game based on the jackpot).
As a result, external devices to the pachinko machine P can also track changes in special symbols and the winning of jackpots based on balls entering the first starting entry point 15 and the second starting entry point 16.

In contrast, when the game is stopped, as described above, the game does not proceed, and therefore the control by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 to send external signals such as the winning signal and jackpot signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P is also restricted.
For example, if the game stops while the aforementioned winning signal is being transmitted, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 stops the display of the special symbols, and the main CPU 101 is unable to stop transmitting the winning signal that is currently being transmitted, so the winning signal remains transmitted. Also, if the game stops when the aforementioned winning signal is not being transmitted, even if a game ball enters the first starting winning slot 15 or the second starting winning slot 16 afterward, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 does not detect the ball, and the main CPU 101 is unable to start transmitting the aforementioned winning signal.
Furthermore, if the game stops while the aforementioned jackpot signal is being transmitted, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 will stop executing the special game, and the main CPU 101 will not be able to stop transmitting the jackpot signal that is currently being transmitted, so the jackpot signal will remain transmitted. Also, if the game stops when the aforementioned jackpot signal is not being transmitted, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 will not start the special game thereafter, and therefore the main CPU 101 will not start transmitting the aforementioned jackpot signal.

Furthermore, when the game stop state is set, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 displays an error code on the main information display device 105, sends a state setting command (hereinafter also called a game stop command) to the sub-control board 300 indicating that the game stop state has been set, generates a security signal as an external signal indicating that the game stop state has been set, and outputs the security signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P via the external information terminal board 500.
When the sub-control board 300 receives a game stop command, a predetermined image suggesting the game stop state is displayed on the performance display device 21, a predetermined sound suggesting the game stop state is output from the sound output device 10, and the front door performance lamp DL, the status notification lamp EL, and the panel performance lamp GL light up or turn off in a predetermined lighting pattern, indicating that the game stop state has been set. Furthermore, the security signal output to the outside of the pachinko machine P can be received by the hall computer and external display devices for displaying various information, so that the hall computer can understand that the game stop state has been set, and the external display devices can indicate that the game stop state has been set.

(Overview of the control of the movable piece 16b and the opening/closing door 18b while the game is stopped)
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the game is stopped, the operation of the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize entry point 16 and the opening/closing door 18b of the large prize entry point 18 is restricted.
Specifically, when the game is stopped, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls the movable piece solenoid 16c that drives the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize entry opening 16 to not activate, and also controls the large prize entry opening solenoid 18c that drives the opening and closing door 18b of the large prize entry opening 18 to not activate.

As a result, for example, if the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize entry opening 16 is protruding while the game is playable, the movable piece 16b will retract when the game stop state is set, and the retracted state will be maintained while the game stop state is in effect. Also, for example, if the opening/closing door 18b of the large prize entry opening 18 is open while the game is playable, the opening/closing door 18b will close when the game stop state is set, and the closed state will be maintained while the game stop state is in effect.
Furthermore, for example, if a win occurs in a normal symbol draw while the game is playable, but the game stop state is set before the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize slot 16 protrudes, the movable piece 16b will not protrude, and the movable piece 16b will remain retracted while the game stop state is in effect. Also, for example, if a special game is being played while the game is playable, and after a predetermined round of gameplay has ended and the opening/closing door 18b of the large prize slot 18 has closed, but the next round of gameplay has started and the game stop state is set before the opening/closing door 18b opens, the opening/closing door 18b will not open, and the opening/closing door 18b will remain closed while the game stop state is in effect.

(Overview of control related to the payout of game balls while the game is stopped)
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, when the game is stopped, the main CPU 101 performs the control described above to prevent the game from progressing.
On the other hand, while the game is stopped, the launch and payout control board 200 stops launching game balls, but the launch and payout control board 200 does not stop paying out game balls.

Specifically, after the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 sends a prize ball specification command to the launch/dispensing control board 200 indicating that a corresponding number of prize balls should be dispensed based on the entry of game balls into the general prize slot 14, the first start prize slot 15, the second start prize slot 16, or the large prize slot 18 (i.e., after the launch/dispensing control board 200 receives the prize ball specification command), even if a game stop state is set, the launch/dispensing control board 200 will continue to control the dispensing of game balls.

As a result, for example, even if a game stop state is set while a game ball is being played (i.e., in a playable state) and prize balls are being dispensed sequentially due to a game ball entering the large prize slot 18, all prize balls based on the aforementioned ball entry will be dispensed. In other words, all prize balls that were acquired by a game ball entering the large prize slot 18 before the game stop state was set, but which had not yet been dispensed at the time the game stop state was set, will also be dispensed.
Thus, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a game ball enters any of the prize winning slots while the game is playable, and the game stop state is set while prize balls are being paid out based on that ball, the progress of the game by the main control board 100 and the firing and payout control board 200 will stop, but the payout of prize balls by the firing and payout control board 200 will continue without stopping even while the game is stopped.

Similarly, even if a game stop state is set after the player presses the ball dispensing button 36 and the game ball dispensing device R sends a ball dispensing command to the launch/dispensing control board 200 to dispense a predetermined number of game balls as dispensing balls, the launch/dispensing control board 200 will continue to control the dispensing of game balls.
As a result, even if a game stop state is set while a predetermined number of game balls (loaned balls) are being dispensed by pressing the ball dispensing button 36, all predetermined number of game balls will be dispensed. In other words, even if the ball dispensing button 36 is pressed and the dispensing of game balls has started before the game stop state is set, all game balls that have not yet been dispensed at the time the game stop state is set will be dispensed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, even when the game is stopped, the operation of the game ball dispensing device R, the value information display device 35, the ball dispensing switch 36a, and the card return switch 37a is not restricted, nor is the transmission of signals and commands from these devices, nor the reception of signals and commands by these devices, restricted.
As a result, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, even if the ball dispensing button 36 is pressed while the game is stopped, all predetermined number of game balls will be dispensed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the value information display device 35 continues to display value information even when the game is stopped. Also, if the ball dispensing button 36 is pressed while the game is stopped, the game ball dispensing device R sends a subtraction command to the value information display device 35, so that the value information display device 35 updates and displays value information even when the game is stopped.
Furthermore, if the card return button 37 is pressed while the game is stopped, the card return switch 37a sends a return request signal to the game ball dispensing device R, so that even while the game is stopped, the game ball dispensing device R will perform the action of ejecting the card.

(Summary of error detection related to payouts while the game is stopped)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, among the payout-related errors, the ball depletion error, full tank error, payout counting switch error, ball jam error, excessive prize ball error, radio wave error, and payout motor error are detected by the launch/payout control board 200. In addition, among the payout-related errors, the door open error is detected by the main control board 100.

Here, when the game is playable and the state related to the ball difference operation stop control, described later, is the pre-activation warning state, the activation warning state, or the activation notification state, both the main control board 100 and the launch/payout control board 200 are configured to determine the occurrence of the corresponding error.
In contrast, during the game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 only determines whether a door open error has occurred, and does not determine whether any other errors (the main control-related errors mentioned above) have occurred on the main control board 100.
Specifically, even when the game is stopped, if the main frame 2 or the front door 3 is opened, a main frame opening detection signal or a front door opening detection signal is input to the launch/payout control board 200, and a main frame opening command or a front door opening command is transmitted from the launch/payout control board 200 to the main control board 100. When the main control board 100 receives the main frame opening command or the front door opening command, the main CPU 101 determines that a door opening error has occurred.
On the other hand, even when the game is stopped, for example, if a magnetic field is directed at the game board 11, the magnetic detection sensor 70a detects the magnetic field and outputs a magnetic detection signal to the main control board 100. However, even if a magnetic detection signal is input to the main control board 100, the main CPU 101 does not determine that a main control magnetic error has occurred. Therefore, when the game is stopped, a main control magnetic error will not occur even if a magnetic field is directed at the game board 11.
Similarly, for example, when radio waves are shone on the game board 11, the radio wave detection sensor 71a detects the radio waves and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the main control board 100. However, even if a radio wave detection signal is input to the main control board 100, the main CPU 101 does not determine that a main control radio wave error has occurred. Therefore, when the game is stopped, even if radio waves are shone on the game board 11, a main control radio wave error does not occur.
In other words, while the game is stopped, even if an event that causes a main control-related error occurs, the main CPU 101 does not determine that a main control-related error has occurred, and therefore no main control-related error occurs.

Furthermore, as described above, even when the game is stopped, if a door opening error is detected, the main CPU 101 sends an error indication command corresponding to the door opening error to the sub-control board 300. Therefore, even when the game is stopped, if the main frame 2 or the front door 3 opens, a door opening error is detected, and the display device 21, various lamps, and audio output device 10 indicate that a door opening error has occurred.

Furthermore, while the game is stopped, the payout CPU 201 of the launch/payout control board 200 does not perform any error detection. Therefore, while the game is stopped, the occurrence of ball out errors, full tank errors, payout counting switch errors, ball jam errors, excessive prize ball errors, payout radio wave errors, and payout motor errors is not detected.
Specifically, even if, for example, the payout motor 62 is operating while the game is stopped, and the game balls are not counted by the payout counting switch 63 for a predetermined period, the payout CPU 201 will not determine that a ball depletion error has occurred. Therefore, while the game is stopped, a ball depletion error will not occur even if the game balls are not counted for a predetermined period. Furthermore, since the payout CPU 201 does not determine that a ball depletion error has occurred, a ball depletion error command is not transmitted from the launch/payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 does not recognize that a ball depletion error has occurred.
Similarly, while the game is stopped, for example, if radio waves are irradiated to the out-out port 19, the out-out port radio wave detection sensor 71b detects the radio waves and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the emission/payout control board 200. However, even if a radio wave detection signal is input to the emission/payout control board 200, the payout CPU 201 does not determine that a payout radio wave error has occurred. Therefore, while the game is stopped, even if radio waves are irradiated to the out-out port 19, no payout radio wave error occurs. Furthermore, since the payout CPU 201 does not determine that a payout radio wave error has occurred, no payout radio wave error command is transmitted from the emission/payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 does not recognize that a payout radio wave error has occurred.
In other words, while the game is stopped, even if events that cause ball out errors, full tank errors, payout counting switch errors, ball jam errors, excessive prize ball errors, payout radio wave errors, or payout motor errors occur, the payout CPU 201 will not detect the occurrence of these errors, and therefore these errors will not occur. Furthermore, the main control board 100 will not be aware of the occurrence of these errors.

Furthermore, even when the game is stopped, the payout CPU 201 of the launch/payout control board 200 may continue to detect the occurrence of ball out errors, full-capacity errors, payout counting switch errors, ball jam errors, excessive prize ball errors, payout radio wave errors, and payout motor errors.

(Overview of external signal transmission to the outside of the pachinko machine P while the game is stopped)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls the transmission of external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P, and the payout CPU 201 of the launch payout control board 200 controls the transmission of external signals such as payout ball signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
Here, when the game is playable and in the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, or activation notification state, both the control by the main CPU 101 to transmit external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals, and the control by the payout CPU 201 to transmit external signals such as payout ball signals are performed.
On the other hand, when the game is stopped, as described above, the control of the main control board 100 to transmit external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals is restricted.

Furthermore, during periods when the game is stopped, the control of the launch/payout control board 200 to transmit external signals such as payout prize ball signals is not restricted and continues uninterrupted.
Specifically, for example, even if a game stop state is set while the payout CPU 201 is transmitting an external signal such as a payout prize ball signal, the transmission of the external signal by the payout CPU 201 will end after a predetermined time has elapsed. Also, for example, if game balls are dispensed after the game stop state is set and the number of dispensed game balls reaches a predetermined number, the payout CPU 201 will transmit a payout prize ball signal, and the transmission of the payout prize ball signal by the payout CPU 201 will end after a predetermined time has elapsed.

(Overview of control when the setting change state or setting confirmation state is set)
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, when the setting change state or setting confirmation state is set, even if the operating handle 5 is rotated, no game balls are launched, and the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 does not detect the entry of game balls into the first starting prize entry 15 or the second starting prize entry 16 or the passage of game balls through the gate 20, and stops the display of special symbol variations, the display of normal symbol variations, and the execution of special games. As a result, just as in the game stop state, the game does not proceed in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls the movable piece solenoid 16c that drives the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize pocket 16 to move in and out, and also controls the large prize pocket solenoid 18c that drives the opening and closing door 18b of the large prize pocket 18 to open and close. As a result, similar to the game stop state, the movable piece 16b remains retracted and the opening and closing door 18b remains closed during the setting change state or setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, similar to the game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 only determines whether a door open error has occurred, and does not determine whether any other errors (the main control-related errors mentioned above) have occurred, which are determined by the main control board 100.

Furthermore, while the settings are being changed or the settings are being confirmed, the payout of game balls by the launch/payout control board 200 continues, similar to the game stop state. However, the occurrence of ball out errors, full errors, payout counting switch errors, ball jam errors, excessive prize ball errors, payout radio wave errors, and payout motor errors is not detected, and the control of transmitting external signals such as payout prize ball signals from the pachinko machine P to the outside is not restricted.
Furthermore, during the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the dispensing of game balls by the launch/dispensing control board 200 may be stopped, or the detection of ball out errors, full tank errors, dispensing counting switch errors, ball jam errors, excessive prize ball errors, dispensing radio wave errors, and dispensing motor errors may be continuously performed, or the transmission of external signals such as the payout prize ball signal from the pachinko machine P to the outside may be restricted.

(Overview of ball difference control (control based on the number of ball differences))
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in order to prevent a situation in which the number of game balls acquired by the player during gameplay becomes excessive and the gambling aspect becomes too high, the main CPU 101 is configured to execute an operation stop control (difference in game balls operation stop control) that stops the operation of the pachinko machine P when the difference in the number of balls from a predetermined calculation start point reaches a predetermined number of operation stop units (95,000 in this embodiment) while the machine is in a playable state.

The difference in the number of balls refers to the difference between the number of prize balls dispensed based on the entry of game balls into each prize slot (general prize slot 14, first start prize slot 15, second start prize slot 16, and large prize slot 18) (prize balls dispensed based on the detection of game balls by the general prize slot detection sensor 14a, first start prize slot detection sensor 15a, second start prize slot detection sensor 16a, and large prize slot detection sensor 18a) and the number of game balls launched by the player and entered into each prize slot or received in the out slot 19 (game balls detected by the out sensor 19a, in other words, game balls used in the game).

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a difference ball count value used to determine the difference in the number of balls is stored in a specific area of the unused area provided in the main RAM 103.
The ball count value stored in this specific area is reset when power is restored (when the power is turned off and on) without a specific error occurring, in states other than the activation notification state and the activation state (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state), as described later. However, it is not reset when power is restored while a specific error has occurred. In other words, in the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state, if power is restored while a specific error has occurred, the ball count value stored at the time of the power outage is maintained. Furthermore, in the activation notification state and the activation state, the ball count value is reset by the initialization process (normal initialization process) associated with the setting change state. When reset, the ball count value is set to an initial value (100000 in this configuration).
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, specific errors are defined that have a significant impact on the progress of the game (for example, a main control radio wave error that may induce a malfunction of the main CPU 101, or an illegal entry error that may cause a malfunction of the large prize winning slot 18). The specific errors are not limited to these, and may also include errors that, when they occur, cause the game to stop.

The ball difference count value is incremented by the number of prize balls that are scheduled to be dispensed based on the ball entering each prize slot (each time a game ball is detected by the general prize slot detection sensor 14a, the first start prize slot detection sensor 15a, the second start prize slot detection sensor 16a, or the large prize slot detection sensor 18a), and decremented by 1 each time a game ball is detected by the out sensor 19a. When the ball difference count value is 0, even if it is detected by the out sensor 19a, the ball difference count value will not be decremented and will remain 0.
Then, when the ball difference count reaches the second reference value (195,000 in this configuration), which will be described later, the number of ball differences will have reached the predetermined number of balls that will cause the system to shut down (95,000 balls).

In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, as described above, the number of prize balls that are scheduled to be paid out based on each ball entering the prize slot is added to the difference ball count value each time a game ball enters the prize slot. However, the system is not limited to this, and the number of prize balls that are actually paid out based on each game ball entering the prize slot is added to the difference ball count value each time a prize ball is paid out.
Furthermore, as described above, the ball difference count value is decremented by 1 each time a game ball is detected by the out sensor 19a, but this is not the only option. The ball difference count value may also be decremented by 1 each time a launched game ball reaches the game area 12. In other words, the ball difference count value may be decremented by 1 each time a game ball is used in the game.
Furthermore, as described above, in the activation notification state and the activation state, the ball count value is reset by an initialization process (normal initialization process) associated with the setting change state. However, it is not limited to this, and the value may also be reset by an initialization process (i.e., a normal initialization process performed without setting the setting change state) that is executed when the RAM clear switch 109 is ON and the playable state is set upon power recovery, or by an abnormality initialization process.
Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the pre-activation warning state and the activation warning state, the ball difference count value was reset upon power outage and recovery. However, it is not limited to this, and it may also be reset by an initialization process (normal initialization process) associated with setting a setting change state, similar to the activation notification state and the activation state. Alternatively, it may be reset by an initialization process (normal initialization process performed without setting a setting change state) that is executed when the RAM clear switch 109 is ON and the playable state is set upon power outage and recovery, or it may be reset by an abnormality initialization process.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this configuration, four types of states are provided for the control of stopping the ball difference operation: pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notification state, and activation state. While the machine is playable, it remains in one of these four states.

(State before activation warning)
The pre-warning state is set when the ball difference count value is reset, and it is the state the player remains in when the ball difference count value has not reached the first reference value (190,000 in this configuration). The player primarily remains in this pre-warning state while the game is playable. When the ball difference count value reaches the first reference value, the pre-warning state ends, and the warning state is set.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the machine remains in a pre-warning state from the time the ball count value is reset until it reaches the first reference value.

(Activation warning state)
As described above, the activation warning state is set when the ball difference count value reaches the first reference value. When the ball difference count value reaches the second reference value (195,000), the activation warning state ends, and if a special game was being played at the time of this achievement, the activation notification state is set; if a special game was not being played, the activation state is set.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the machine remains in an activated warning state from the time the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value until it reaches the second reference value.

Furthermore, when the activation warning state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits a first ball difference operation stop control specification command to the sub-control board 300 to indicate that state. When the sub-control board 300 receives the first ball difference operation stop control specification command, until an interruption occurs, the activation warning state ends, or a predetermined time (600 seconds in this embodiment) is met, the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 displays an activation warning indication (for example, an activation warning text image such as "Approximately 5000 balls remaining until the limit is reached") that indicates that the first reference value has been reached and the second reference value will be reached soon (see Figures 61(c) to (e)), and the front door performance lamp DL, the status notification lamp EL, and the panel performance lamp GL light up or turn off according to a predetermined lighting pattern (for example, only the front door performance lamp DL lights up in blue). Furthermore, when the first ball-operation stop control specification command is received, an activation warning voice (for example, "There are approximately 5,000 balls remaining until the limit is reached") is output from that point (i.e., the point at which the activation warning state is set) until a predetermined activation warning voice output time (5 seconds in this configuration) has elapsed. These actions indicate that the activation warning state has been set.
Furthermore, the output of the activation warning voice may be continued until a power outage occurs, or it may be continued until the activation warning state ends.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, once the activation warning state is set, unless the power is restored, the activation warning state will not end and the pre-activation warning state will not be set even if the difference ball count value falls below the first reference value. However, if the difference ball count value falls below the first reference value after the activation warning state has been set, the activation warning state may be terminated and the pre-activation warning state may be set.

(Activation warning state)
As described above, the activation notification state is set when the ball difference count value reaches the second reference value and a special game is being played at the time of this achievement. When this special game ends, the activation notification state ends and the activation state is set. Also, if the initialization process (normal initialization process) associated with the setting change state described above is performed while the activation notification state is in effect, the activation notification state ends and the pre-activation warning state is set.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, if a special game is being played when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, the machine will remain in the activation notification state from the time the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value until the special game being played ends or until the initialization process associated with the setting change state is performed.

Furthermore, the activation notification state may not terminate upon the initialization process associated with the setting change state, but rather upon the initialization process (a normal initialization process performed without setting the setting change state) that is executed when the RAM clear switch 109 is ON upon power restoration and the playable state is set, or upon the execution of an abnormality initialization process.

Furthermore, when the activation notification state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits a second ball difference operation stop control specification command to the sub-control board 300 to indicate that state. When the sub-control board 300 receives the second ball difference operation stop control specification command, until an interruption occurs or the activation notification state ends, the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 displays an activation notification indication (for example, an activation notification text image that says "The game will stop after the big win ends") that suggests that the operation of the pachinko machine P will stop after the special game ends (see Figure 61(f)), and the front door performance lamp DL, the status notification lamp EL, and the panel performance lamp GL light up or turn off according to a predetermined lighting pattern (for example, only the front door performance lamp DL lights up in blue). Furthermore, when the second ball stop operation control designation command is received, an activation notification sound (for example, "The game will stop after the jackpot ends") is output from that point (i.e., the time when the activation notification state is set) until a predetermined activation notification sound output time (7 seconds in this configuration) has elapsed. These actions indicate that the activation notification state has been set.
Furthermore, the indication of activation and the illumination or extinguishing of various lamps according to predetermined lighting patterns may be performed within a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds). In addition, the output of the activation warning sound may be continued until a power outage occurs, or until the activation warning state ends.

In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, as described later, when the ball difference count reaches the second reference value, the game stops when the activation state is set. However, as mentioned above, if a special game is being played when the ball difference count reaches the second reference value, an activation notification state is set instead of the activation state. When the special game being played ends, the activation notification state ends and the activation state is set. In other words, if the ball difference count reaches the second reference value while a special game is being played, the game does not stop immediately and the special game being played does not end forcibly based on that achievement. Instead, the game continues until the final round of the special game being played ends. This allows the player's enjoyment to be maintained even if the ball difference count reaches the second reference value while a special game is being played.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, even if the activation notification state is set, and the difference ball count value decreases during the activation notification state, and falls below the second reference value when the special game being played ends, the activation notification state will end and the activation state will be set. However, if the difference ball count value falls below the second reference value when the special game ends, the activation state may be prevented from being set.

(Activated state)
The activation state is set as described above when the ball difference count reaches the second reference value and no special game is being played, or when a special game is being played when the ball difference count reaches the second reference value and that special game has finished. Then, when the initialization process (normal initialization process) associated with the setting change state described above is performed, the activation state ends and the pre-activation warning state is set.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, if a special game is not being played when the ball difference count reaches the second reference value, the machine will remain in the activated state from the time the ball difference count reaches the second reference value until the initialization process associated with the setting change is performed. Also, if a special game is being played when the ball difference count reaches the second reference value, the machine will remain in the activated state from the time the special game is finished until the initialization process associated with the setting change is performed.
In other words, once the activation state is set, it will continue without terminating unless an initialization process is performed to change the setting state.

Furthermore, the activated state may not terminate upon the initialization process associated with the setting change, but rather upon the initialization process (a normal initialization process performed without setting the setting change state) that is executed when the RAM clear switch 109 is ON upon power restoration and the playable state is set, or upon the execution of an abnormal initialization process.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when an activation state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits an activation state setting command to the launch/payout control board 200 indicating that the activation state has been set. This allows the launch/payout control board 200 to also be aware that an activation state has been set.
Furthermore, in the activated state, similar to the game stop state described above, no game balls are launched even if the operating handle 5 is rotated. In addition, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 does not detect the entry of game balls into the first starting prize slot 15 or the second starting prize slot 16, or the passage of game balls through the gate 20. As a result, even if a game ball enters the first starting prize slot 15 or the second starting prize slot 16, a lottery for a jackpot based on that entry is not performed, and even if a game ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery for a regular symbol based on that passage is not performed. Moreover, no new prize balls, new special symbol random numbers, or new regular symbol random numbers are stored in reserve. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation display or the regular symbol variation display was being performed, when the activated state is set, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 stops the special symbol variation display or the regular symbol variation display.
Thus, in the activated state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 performs the above-mentioned control, so that the game does not proceed (the game stops), just as in the game stopped state.
As mentioned above, if the operating handle 5 is rotated while the system is activated, no game balls are launched, but a handle operation command is sent from the launch/dispensing control board 200 to the main control board 100. Upon receiving the handle operation command, the main CPU 101 sends a rotation operation command to the sub-control board 300. Therefore, even while the system is activated, the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 300 can be aware that the operating handle 5 has been rotated.

Furthermore, in the activated state, as described above, the game does not proceed, and similar to the game stop state, the control by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 to transmit external signals such as winning signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P is also restricted.
For example, if the activation state is set while a winning signal is being transmitted, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 stops the display of the special symbols, so the main CPU 101 is unable to stop transmitting the winning signal that is currently being transmitted, and the winning signal remains transmitted. Also, if the activation state is set when no winning signal is being transmitted, even if a game ball enters the first starting winning slot 15 or the second starting winning slot 16 afterward, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 will not detect the ball, and therefore the main CPU 101 will be unable to start transmitting the winning signal.

Furthermore, in the activated state, the operation of the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize entry point 16 and the opening/closing door 18b of the large prize entry point 18 is restricted, similar to the game stop state.
Specifically, in the activated state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls the movable piece solenoid 16c that drives the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize pocket 16 to move in and out, and also controls the large prize pocket solenoid 18c that drives the opening and closing door 18b of the large prize pocket 18 to open and close, and also controls the large prize pocket solenoid 18c that drives the opening and closing door 18b of the large prize pocket 18 to open and close.
As a result, for example, if the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize slot 16 is protruding, when the activation state is set, the movable piece 16b will retract, and the retracted state of the movable piece 16b will be maintained while the activation state is active. Also, while the activation state is active, the opening/closing door 18b will remain closed. Furthermore, for example, if the activation state is set after a win in the lottery for a normal symbol but before the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize slot 16 protrudes, the movable piece 16b will not protrude, and the movable piece 16b will remain retracted while the activation state is active.

Furthermore, in the activated state, similar to the game stop state, the control of launching game balls by the launch/dispensing control board 200 is stopped, but the control of dispensing game balls by the launch/dispensing control board 200 is not stopped.

Specifically, even if the activation state is set after the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 sends a prize ball specification command to the launch/dispensing control board 200 indicating that a corresponding number of prize balls should be dispensed based on the entry of game balls into the general prize slot 14, the first start prize slot 15, the second start prize slot 16, or the large prize slot 18 (i.e., after the launch/dispensing control board 200 receives the prize ball specification command), the launch/dispensing control board 200 will still execute its control of game ball dispensing.

This means that, for example, even if the activation state is set while prize balls are being paid out based on game balls entering any of the winning slots, all prize balls based on those entries will be paid out. In other words, all prize balls that were acquired by game balls entering any of the winning slots before the activation state was set, but which have not yet been paid out at the time the activation state was set, will also be paid out.
Thus, if a game ball enters one of the prize slots before the activation state is set, and the activation state is set while prize balls are being paid out based on that ball, the game progression by the main control board 100 and the launching/paying control board 200 will stop, but the payout of prize balls by the launching/paying control board 200 will continue without stopping even while the activation state is active.

Similarly, even if the activation state is set after the player presses the ball dispensing button 36 and the game ball dispensing device R sends a ball dispensing command to the launch/dispensing control board 200 to dispense a predetermined number of game balls as dispensed balls, the launch/dispensing control board 200 will still perform control of dispensing game balls.
As a result, even if the activation state is set while a predetermined number of game balls (loaned balls) are being dispensed by pressing the ball dispensing button 36, all predetermined number of game balls will be dispensed. In other words, even if the ball dispensing button 36 is pressed before the activation state is set and the dispensing of game balls has started, all game balls that have not yet been dispensed by the time the activation state is set will be dispensed.

Furthermore, even when the system is activated, the operation of the game ball dispensing device R, the value information display device 35, the ball dispensing switch 36a, and the card return switch 37a is not restricted, nor is the transmission of signals and commands from these devices, nor the reception of signals and commands by these devices, restricted.
As a result, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, even if the ball dispensing button 36 is pressed while the machine is activated, all of the predetermined number of game balls will be dispensed.

Furthermore, even while the system is activated, the value information display device 35 continues to display value information. Also, if the ball dispensing button 36 is pressed while the system is activated, the game ball dispensing device R sends a subtraction command to the value information display device 35, so even while the system is activated, the value information display device 35 updates and displays value information. In addition, if the card return button 37 is pressed while the system is activated, the card return switch 37a sends a return request signal to the game ball dispensing device R, so even while the system is activated, the game ball dispensing device R controls the ejection of the card.
Furthermore, if the ball dispensing button 36 is pressed while the system is activated, the game balls may not be dispensed, and the value information display device 35 may not update or display the value information. Also, if the card return button 37 is pressed while the system is activated, the game ball dispensing device R may not eject the card.

Furthermore, in the activated state, similar to the game stopped state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 only determines whether a door opening error has occurred, and does not determine whether other errors (main control-related errors as described above) have occurred. Even in the activated state, if it is determined that a door opening error has occurred, the main CPU 101 sends an error indication command corresponding to the door opening error to the sub-control board 300. Thus, even in the activated state, if the main frame 2 or the front door 3 is opened, it is determined that a door opening error has occurred, and the performance display device 21, various lamps, and sound output device 10 indicate that a door opening error has occurred.
Furthermore, in the activated state, similar to the game stopped state, the payout CPU 201 of the launch payout control board 200 does not perform any error detection. Therefore, during the game stopped state, the occurrence of ball out errors, full tank errors, payout counting switch errors, ball jam errors, excessive prize ball errors, payout radio wave errors, and payout motor errors is not detected.
Furthermore, even while the system is activated, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 may also be configured to detect errors other than the door-opening error (main control-related errors) that the main control board 100 determines. This ensures that even while the system is activated, if the conditions for an error other than the door-opening error are met, that error will be detected.
Furthermore, while the system is activated, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 may choose not to detect the occurrence of a door opening error.
Furthermore, even while the system is activated, the payout CPU 201 of the launch/payout control board 200 may continue to determine the occurrence of a ball out error, a full tank error, a payout count switch error, a ball jam error, an over-prized ball error, a payout radio wave error, and a payout motor error.

Furthermore, in the activated state, similar to the game stop state, the control by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 that transmits external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P is restricted, but the control by the launch and payout control board 200 that transmits external signals such as payout ball signals is not restricted and continues to be performed.
Furthermore, when the system is activated, the control by the launch/dispensing control board 200 to transmit the payout prize ball signal may also be restricted.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the activation state is reached, the game does not proceed and the control for launching the game balls is stopped, preventing the launch of game balls. However, this is not the only limitation. For example, when the activation state is reached, the game may not proceed, but the control for launching the game balls by the launch/payout control board 200 may not be stopped. In other words, when the activation state is reached, the game may not proceed, but the launch of game balls may still be possible.

Furthermore, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 clears the displays in the first special symbol display device 30, the second special symbol display device 31, the normal symbol display device 32, the first special symbol hold display device 38, the second special symbol hold display device 39, and the normal symbol hold display device 33. Specifically, these display devices are composed of LEDs that can be turned on or off, but the LEDs that make up each display device are turned off. As a result, all special symbols that were being displayed in a variable state or stopped state in the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 32, normal symbols that were being displayed in a variable state or stopped state in the normal symbol display device 32, the number of first special symbol holds displayed by the first special symbol hold display device 38, the number of second special symbol holds displayed by the second special symbol hold display device 39, and the number of normal symbol holds displayed by the normal symbol hold display device 33 are all cleared.
In contrast, if the right-hand shooting notification lamp RL connected to the sub-control board 300 is lit when the activation state is set, the right-hand shooting notification lamp RL will continue to be lit even after the activation state is set.
In addition to the right-hand shooting notification lamp RL, if, for example, a reserve count lamp that indicates the number of reserved first and second special symbols by lighting up in a predetermined manner is connected to the sub-control board 300, this reserve count lamp may also be configured to continue lighting up in a predetermined manner that indicates the number of reserved first and second special symbols even after the activation state has been set. In other words, a display device connected to the sub-control board 300 that provides indications related to the progress of the game may continue to provide such indications even after the activation state has been set.

Furthermore, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 sends a third ball difference operation stop control specification command to the sub-control board 300 to indicate that state. When the sub-control board 300 receives the third ball difference operation stop control specification command, the various performance images that were displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 at this point, such as the performance symbols 50, the hold image (not shown in particular) that suggests that hold memory is being performed, the background image, and the right-hand play suggestion image, are cleared. Then, until the power is cut off, the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 displays an activation indication (for example, "Ball difference operation stop function activated. Play will stop because the ball difference limit has been reached") that indicates that the operation of the pachinko machine P has stopped. An activation message such as "Please call an attendant" is displayed (see Figure 61(g)), a predetermined activation voice is output from the voice output device 10 (for example, "The ball limit has been reached and play will be stopped"), and the front door effect lamp DL, status notification lamp EL, and play surface effect lamp GL light up or turn off according to a predetermined lighting pattern (for example, the front door effect lamp DL lights up blue, the status notification lamp EL lights up red, and the play surface effect lamp GL turns off), indicating that the activation state has been set.
Furthermore, the indication that the system has been activated, the output of an activation sound, and the illumination or extinguishing of various lamps may be limited to a predetermined period of time (longer than the time for which the indication that the system has been activated is given, for example, 10 minutes) rather than continuing until an electrical outage occurs.
Furthermore, instead of clearing the various visual effects that were displayed when the activation state was set, they may continue to be displayed. In addition, the aforementioned activation indication (display of activation text image) may be superimposed on these various visual effects.

Furthermore, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 displays a code indicating the activation state on the main information display device 105. This allows the main information display device 105 to recognize that the activation state has been set.
Furthermore, when the activation state is set, the main information display device 105 may not display anything. In other words, the display on the main information display device 105 may be cleared.

Furthermore, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 generates a security signal as an external signal indicating that the activation state has been set, and outputs this security signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P (such as a hall computer or external display device) via the external information terminal board 500. This security signal can be received by the hall computer and the aforementioned external display device, thereby allowing the hall computer to understand that the activation state has been set, and enabling the external display device to indicate that the activation state has been set. In addition, while the security signal based on the activation state is being generated and output, activation security information indicating that the security signal is being generated and output is stored in a specific area of the unused area of the main RAM 103.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, if a power outage occurs (power off and on) while the activation state is active, without the initialization process that would terminate the activation state (i.e., the initialization process associated with setting a setting change state) being executed, the generation and output of the security signal described above will be resumed. As a result, even if a power outage occurs while the activation state is active, the hall computer can recognize that the system is in the activation state again after the power is restored, and the external display device can again indicate that the system is in the activation state.
Furthermore, even when the activation notification state is set, the same security signals as when the activation state is set will be generated and output. In addition, if the power is restored during the activation notification state without the initialization process that would terminate the activation notification state (i.e., the initialization process associated with setting the setting change state) being executed, the generation and output of the security signals may be resumed.

Furthermore, in the activated state, the game does not progress and no game balls are launched. Therefore, no game balls enter the first starting prize slot 15 or the second starting prize slot 16, and the special symbol variation display, special game, and normal symbol game are not executed. Consequently, various commands associated with these executions (progress of the game) (for example, a starting prize command based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15 or the second starting prize slot 16, a variation mode command or variation pattern command based on the start of the variation of the special symbols, an opening command based on the start of the special game, etc.) are not transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300.
Furthermore, a press detection sensor 9d is connected to the sub-control board 300 to detect the press operation of the operation button 9b, and detection by this sensor is performed even when the system is activated. As a result, the sub-control board 300 can detect the press operation of the operation button 9b even when the system is activated.

(Overview of various state settings related to ball differential operation stop control)
Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a specific area in the unused area of the main RAM 103 stores ball difference operation stop control phase data for setting various states related to the ball difference operation stop control (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notification state, activation state). By storing state values corresponding to the above-mentioned various states in this ball difference operation stop control phase data, one of the following states will be set: pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notification state, or activation state.

Specifically, if a power interruption is restored in the pre-warning state or the warning state, or if initialization processing is performed in the notification state or the activated state in conjunction with setting a setting change state, the main CPU 101 clears the ball difference operation stop control phase data and stores a state value corresponding to the pre-warning state in this ball difference operation stop control phase data. This sets the pre-warning state.
In other words, if the power is restored during the pre-warning state or the warning state, the ball difference count value is reset as described above, setting the pre-warning state. Also, if initialization processing is performed in the notification state or the activated state in conjunction with setting a setting change state, these states end and the ball difference count value is reset, setting the pre-warning state.

Furthermore, when the ball difference count value reaches the first reference value, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation warning state in the ball difference operation stop control phase data. In other words, the ball difference operation stop control phase data is updated to a state value corresponding to the activation warning state. This sets the activation warning state.
Furthermore, when the ball difference count reaches the second reference value, and a special game was being played at that time, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation notification state in the ball difference operation stop control phase data. In other words, the ball difference operation stop control phase data is updated to a state value corresponding to the activation notification state. This sets the activation notification state.
Furthermore, when the ball difference count reaches the second reference value, and no special game was being played at that time, or when the special game that was being played when the ball difference count reached the second reference value has ended, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation state in the ball difference operation stop control phase data. In other words, the ball difference operation stop control phase data is updated to a state value corresponding to the activation state. This sets the activation state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in control states where the game does not progress, such as the game stop state, the setting change state, or the setting confirmation state, the operation of the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize entry point 16 and the opening/closing door 18b of the large prize entry point 18 is restricted, and the movable piece 16b remains retracted and the large prize entry point 18 remains closed while the game does not progress.
This prevents situations where the movable piece solenoid 16c and the large prize opening solenoid 18c continue to operate even when the game is not in progress, such as overheating and causing malfunction or damage to these components. In addition, by keeping the large prize opening 18 open, it prevents fraudulent acts such as inserting illegal parts into the prize opening to win prize balls while the game is not in progress.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in the game stop state, which is a control state in which the game does not proceed, no game balls are launched, but the launch and payout control board 200 continues to dispense game balls (both prize balls and loaned balls), and the value information display device 35 displays value information, and the game ball loan device R dispenses cards, etc.
This prevents disadvantages such as the player missing out on some of the prize balls due to the game stopping state being set, even though a game ball entered one of the prize slots before the game stop state was set, because the payout of prize balls stopped. It also prevents the player missing out on some of the dispensed balls due to the game stopping state being set, even though the player pressed the ball dispenser switch 36 before the game stop state was set, because the payout of dispensed balls stopped. Furthermore, even when the game stop state is set, the main CPU 101 does not need to perform any special processing such as sending signals or commands to the launch/dispensing control board 200 to stop operation or stop the payout of game balls, thus preventing an increase in the load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, during the game stop state, which is a control state in which the game does not proceed, the main control board 100 only checks for the occurrence of the door open error among the errors that can be determined to occur.
This makes it possible to prevent situations where the main frame 2 or front door 3 is opened while the game is stopped, thereby preventing fraudulent activity against the main control board 100.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, during the game stop state, which is a control state in which the game does not proceed, the control of the transmission of external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals from the main control board 100 to the outside of the pachinko machine P is restricted, but the control of the transmission of external signals such as payout ball signals from the launch and payout control board 200 to the outside of the pachinko machine P is not restricted.
As a result, even during a game-stopped state in which the launch/dispensing control board 200 continues to control the dispensing of game balls, information regarding the dispensing of game balls can be reliably obtained by devices outside the pachinko machine P. Furthermore, even when a game-stopped state is set, the main CPU 101 does not need to perform any special processing, such as sending a command to the launch/dispensing control board 200 to stop transmitting signals from the pachinko machine P to the outside. Also, since the control of the transmission of external signals such as winning signals and jackpot signals by the main control board 100 is restricted, it is possible to prevent an increase in the load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the time for the main control board 100 to transmit an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P is set to be longer than the time for the launch/payout control board 200 to transmit an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
As a result, external signals transmitted from the main control board 100 to the outside of the pachinko machine P are more reliably transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine P than external signals transmitted from the launch/dispensing control board 200 to the outside of the pachinko machine P.

Please note that the above-mentioned settings for transmission time are not limited to those specified.
For example, the time it takes for the launch/dispensing control board 200 to transmit an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P may be set to be longer than the time it takes for the main control board 100 to transmit an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
When configured in this way, the external signals transmitted from the launch/payout control board 200 to the outside of the pachinko machine P are more reliably transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine P than the external signals transmitted from the main control board 100 to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
Alternatively, the time it takes for the launch/dispensing control board 200 to transmit an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P may be set to be the same as the time it takes for the main control board 100 to transmit an external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, an activation state is set in which the game does not proceed and no game balls are launched, based on the difference ball count value reaching a second reference value (the difference ball count reaching a predetermined number of operation stop units).
This prevents situations where the number of game balls acquired by a player during gameplay becomes excessive, leading to excessive gambling, and also produces the same effect as when the game is stopped, as described above.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, during the activation state, the main control board 100 determines the occurrence of only the door opening error among the errors that are determined to occur, similar to the state when the game is stopped.
This prevents situations where the main frame 2 or front door 3 is opened while the system is activated, thereby preventing unauthorized actions against the main control board 100.

(Overview of test signal generation and output)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the main CPU 101 generates test signals used during type approval testing at various timings and can output them to the outside of the pachinko machine P from a dedicated test output terminal 107.
The main CPU 101, in principle, continues to output the test signal being generated to the dedicated test output terminal 107 from the time the test signal generation starts until it finishes (from the time the output start condition is met until the output end condition is met). At this time, by connecting a dedicated receiving terminal to the dedicated test output terminal 107, the above-mentioned test signal is input to a test computer equipped with the receiving terminal. In other words, the test signal being generated is output to the outside of the pachinko machine P (the test computer) via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal when the dedicated receiving terminal is connected to the dedicated test output terminal 107. On the other hand, if the dedicated receiving terminal is not connected to the dedicated test output terminal 107, the test signal being generated is output to the dedicated test output terminal 107, but it is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, while each test signal is being generated and output, test signal information indicating the test signal being generated and output (indicating that each test signal is being generated and output) is stored in a specific area of the unused area of the main RAM 103.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the main CPU 101 generates and outputs test signals to a test computer, including test signals related to the progress of the game, test signals related to the game state, and test signals related to the state based on the ball difference operation stop control.
Test signals related to the progress of the game include a normal diagram change test signal, a normal diagram win test signal, a movable piece open test signal, a first special diagram change test signal, a first special diagram jackpot test signal, a second special diagram change test signal, a second special diagram jackpot test signal, and a round game test signal. Test signals related to the game state include a normal diagram high probability state test signal, a normal diagram shortened state test signal, a movable piece extended operation state test signal, a special diagram high probability state test signal, and a special diagram shortened state test signal. A test signal related to the state based on the difference ball operation stop control is provided as a pre-activation setting state test signal.

The regular symbol variation test signal is a test signal generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from when the regular symbol variation display starts until it ends (i.e., while the regular symbol variation is occurring) and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In other words, the main CPU 101 starts generating a normal symbol variation test signal and outputting it to the dedicated test output terminal 107 based on the start of the normal symbol variation display (fulfillment of the output start condition), and stops generating and outputting the signal based on the end of the normal symbol variation display (fulfillment of the output end condition). This normal symbol variation test signal is input to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, so that the test computer (i.e., outside the pachinko machine P) can determine that the pachinko machine P that output the normal symbol variation test signal is displaying normal symbols.

The regular symbol win test signal is a test signal that is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from when a win is determined by the regular symbol draw until the operation of the movable piece 16b is completed (i.e., from when a win is determined by the regular symbol draw until all operation of the movable piece 16b based on that win is completed), and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In other words, the main CPU 101 starts generating a normal symbol win test signal and outputting it to the dedicated test output terminal 107 based on the fact that a win has occurred due to the lottery of normal symbols and the operation of the movable piece 16b based on that win has started (fulfillment of the output start condition), and stops generating and outputting the signal based on the fact that the operation of the movable piece 16b has finished (fulfillment of the output end condition). This normal symbol win test signal is input to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, so that the test computer can determine that the operation of the movable piece 16b based on a win due to the lottery of normal symbols is taking place in the pachinko machine P that output the normal symbol win test signal.

The movable piece opening test signal is a test signal generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end (until closing) of one opening of the movable piece 16b, and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In other words, the main CPU 101 starts generating a movable piece opening test signal and outputting it to the dedicated test output terminal 107 based on the start of one opening of the movable piece 16b (fulfillment of the output start condition), and stops generating and outputting the signal based on the completion of one opening of the movable piece 16b (fulfillment of the output end condition). This movable piece opening test signal is input to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, so that the test computer can determine that one opening of the movable piece 16b has occurred in the pachinko machine P that output the movable piece opening test signal.

The first special symbol variation test signal is a test signal generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of the variation display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number, and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In other words, the main CPU 101 starts generating a first special symbol variation test signal and outputting it to the dedicated test output terminal 107 based on the start of the variation display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number (fulfillment of the output start condition), and stops generating and outputting the signal based on the end of the variation display (fulfillment of the output end condition). This first special symbol variation test signal is input to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, so that the test computer can determine that the pachinko machine P that output the first special symbol variation test signal is displaying a variation of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number.

The first special symbol jackpot test signal is a test signal generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of the special game based on the winning of a jackpot by the first special symbol random number, and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In other words, the main CPU 101 starts generating a test signal for the first special symbol jackpot and outputting it to the dedicated test output terminal 107 based on the start of a special game based on the winning of a jackpot by the first special symbol random number (fulfillment of the output start condition), and stops generating and outputting the signal based on the end of the special game (fulfillment of the output end condition). This test signal for the first special symbol jackpot is input to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, so that the test computer can determine that a special game based on the winning of a jackpot by the first special symbol random number is being played in the pachinko machine P that output the test signal for the first special symbol jackpot.

The second special symbol variation test signal is a test signal generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of the variation display of the special symbol based on the second special symbol random number, and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In other words, the main CPU 101 starts generating a second special symbol variation test signal and outputting it to the dedicated test output terminal 107 based on the start of the variation display of the special symbols based on the second special symbol random number (fulfillment of the output start condition), and stops generating and outputting the signal based on the end of the variation display (fulfillment of the output end condition). This second special symbol variation test signal is input to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, so that the test computer can determine that the pachinko machine P that output the second special symbol variation test signal is displaying a variation of the special symbols based on the second special symbol random number.

The second special symbol jackpot test signal is a test signal that is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of the special game based on the winning of a jackpot by the second special symbol random number, and can be output to a test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107.
In other words, the main CPU 101 starts generating a test signal for the second special symbol jackpot and outputting it to the dedicated test output terminal 107 based on the start of a special game based on the winning of a jackpot by the second special symbol random number (fulfillment of the output start condition), and stops generating and outputting the signal based on the end of the special game (fulfillment of the output end condition). This test signal for the second special symbol jackpot is input to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, so that the test computer can determine that a special game based on the winning of a jackpot by the second special symbol random number is being played in the pachinko machine P that output the test signal for the second special symbol jackpot.

The round game test signal is a test signal generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of a round game in a special game, and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In other words, the main CPU 101 starts generating a round-game test signal and outputting it to the dedicated test output terminal 107 based on the start of a round game (fulfillment of the output start condition), and stops generating and outputting the signal based on the end of the round game (fulfillment of the output end condition). This round-game test signal is input to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, so that the test computer can determine that a round game is being played in the pachinko machine P that output the round-game test signal.

The normal symbol high probability state test signal is a test signal that is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of a game state in which the probability of winning by drawing normal symbols is relatively high, and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the probability of winning by drawing a regular symbol is set to be the same during the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2, and high probability time-saving game state) and during the non-time-saving game state (normal game state) (see Figure 14). Therefore, although a high probability state test signal is provided, it is not generated or output.

The normal symbol variation shortening state test signal is a test signal generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of a game state in which the variation time of normal symbols is relatively short, and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the time it takes for the regular symbols to change is set to be shorter during the time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and the high-probability time-saving game state) than during the non-time-saving game state (during the normal game state) (see Figure 15). Therefore, the main CPU 101 starts generating a regular symbol change shortening state test signal and outputting it to the dedicated test output terminal 107 based on the setting of the time-saving game state (fulfillment of the output start condition), and stops generating and outputting the signal based on the end of the time-saving game state (fulfillment of the output end condition). This regular symbol change shortening state test signal is input to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, so that the test computer can determine that a game state in which the regular symbol change time is relatively short is set in the pachinko machine P that output the regular symbol change shortening state test signal.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, the variation time of the normal symbols is set to be almost the same during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 and during the normal game state. Therefore, the normal symbol variation shortening state test signal may be generated and output only during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 and the high probability time-saving game state, and the normal symbol variation shortening state test signal may not be generated and output during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1.

The movable piece operation extension test signal is a test signal that is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of a game state in which the operation time of the movable piece 16b is relatively long when a win is achieved by drawing a normal symbol, and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the operating time of the movable piece 16b is set to be longer during the time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and the high-probability time-saving game state) than during the non-time-saving game state (during the normal game state) (see Figure 16). Therefore, the main CPU 101 starts generating a movable piece operation extension state test signal and outputting it to the dedicated test output terminal 107 based on the setting of the time-saving game state (fulfillment of the output start condition), and stops generating and outputting the signal based on the end of the time-saving game state (fulfillment of the output end condition). This movable piece operation extension state test signal is input to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, so that the test computer can determine that a game state in which the operating time of the movable piece 16b is relatively long is set in the pachinko machine P that output the movable piece operation extension state test signal.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the operating time of the movable piece 16b is set to be approximately the same during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 and during the normal game state. Therefore, the generation and output of the movable piece operation extension state test signal may be performed only during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 and the high-probability time-saving game state, and the generation and output of the movable piece operation extension state test signal may be performed not during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

The special high-probability state test signal is a test signal that is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high, and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be higher during high-probability game states (high-probability time-saving game states) than during low-probability game states (normal game states) (see Figure 7). Therefore, the main CPU 101 starts generating a special high-probability state test signal and outputting it to the dedicated test output terminal 107 based on the setting of the high-probability game state (fulfillment of the output start condition), and stops generating and outputting the signal based on the end of the high-probability game state (fulfillment of the output end condition). This special high-probability state test signal is input to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, so that the test computer can determine that a game state with a relatively high probability of winning a jackpot is set in the pachinko machine P that output the special high-probability state test signal.

The special symbol variation shortening state test signal is a test signal generated by the main CPU 101 during the period from the start to the end of a game state in which the variation time of the special symbols is relatively short, and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the special symbol variation time is set to be shorter during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 and the high probability time-saving game state than during the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (see Figures 11 to 12). Therefore, the main CPU 101 starts generating a special symbol variation shortened state test signal and outputting it to the dedicated test output terminal 107 based on the setting of the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 or the high probability time-saving game state (fulfillment of the output start condition), and stops generating and outputting based on the end of the game state (fulfillment of the output end condition). This special symbol variation shortened state test signal is input to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal, so that the test computer can determine that a game state in which the special symbol variation time is relatively short is set in the pachinko machine P that output the special symbol variation shortened state test signal.

The pre-activation setting state test signal is a test signal that is generated by the main CPU 101 during the period when the difference ball count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined pre-activation setting judgment value (175,000 in this embodiment), and can be output to a test computer via the dedicated test output terminal 107.
In other words, when the ball difference count value is less than the pre-activation setting judgment value, the main CPU 101 does not generate a pre-activation setting state test signal or output to the dedicated test output terminal 107. However, when the ball difference count value becomes equal to or greater than the pre-activation setting judgment value (the output start condition is met), the main CPU 101 starts generating a pre-activation setting state test signal and outputting to the dedicated test output terminal 107. Furthermore, after the generation of the pre-activation setting state test signal and outputting to the dedicated test output terminal 107 has started, if the ball difference count value falls below the pre-activation setting judgment value again (the output end condition is met) before the activation state or activation notification state is set (before the ball difference count value reaches the second reference value (195000)), the main CPU 101 stops generating the pre-activation setting state test signal and outputting to the dedicated test output terminal 107.
This pre-activation state test signal is input to a test computer via the test-dedicated output terminal 107 and the receiving terminal. The test computer can then determine that the ball count value in the pachinko machine P that output the pre-activation state test signal is equal to or greater than the pre-activation determination value, and consequently, it can determine that the activation state is about to be set.

(Overview of test signal generation and output control when the activation state is set)
In this pachinko machine P, the activation state is set when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, preventing the game from progressing. However, if the activation state is set while the above-mentioned test signal is being generated or output, the generation and output of the test signal will continue even after the activation state is set.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if, while the activation state is being set, test signals related to the progress of the game (normal diagram variation test signal, normal diagram hit test signal, movable piece open test signal, first special diagram variation test signal, first special diagram jackpot test signal, second special diagram variation test signal, second special diagram jackpot test signal, round game test signal) and test signals related to the game state (normal diagram high probability state test signal, normal diagram variation shortened state test signal, movable piece operation extended state test signal, special diagram high probability state test signal, special diagram variation shortened state test signal) are generated and output, then when an interruption occurs, the generation and output of these test signals will temporarily stop, but will resume after the power is restored and the activation state is re-established (i.e., after the power is restored without the initialization process (normal initialization process) that would terminate the activation state being performed). The output of these test signals will continue until the activation state ends (i.e., until the initialization process described above is performed).
In other words, the test signals related to the progress of the game and the test signals related to the game state, which are generated and output while the activation state is being set, will continue to be generated and output until the activation state (excluding when the power is cut off) ends.

In contrast, if a pre-activation state test signal (a test signal related to the state based on the ball operation stop control) is generated and output while the activation state is being set, and an electrical outage occurs, the generation and output of the test signal will stop, and will remain stopped even after the system recovers from the outage and the activation state is restored, without being restarted.
In other words, the pre-activation state test signal, which is generated and output during the activation state setting process, will continue to be generated and output until the activation state ends if no power outage occurs during the activation state. However, if a power outage occurs during the activation state, the generation and output will stop at that point.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a power outage occurs while the pre-activation setting state test signal is being generated and output, and while the machine is in the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state (when the difference ball count value is less than the second reference value), the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal will be temporarily stopped, similar to the state during activation.
Furthermore, if, after the above-mentioned temporary stop, the power is restored while a specific error (an error that significantly affects the progress of the game) has occurred, and the system returns to the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state, the ball difference count value stored at the time of the power outage is maintained. Since this ball difference count value is greater than or equal to the pre-activation setting judgment value, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal are resumed after the power is restored. On the other hand, if the power is restored without any specific error occurring, the ball difference count value is reset, and since this ball difference count value is less than the pre-activation setting judgment value, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal are not resumed after the power is restored.
Furthermore, although not specifically shown in the diagram, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, during the startup preparation period from the time of power restoration until a predetermined startup time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 displays a preparation image (for example, a text image that says "Screen Restoring. Please continue playing.") indicating that it is a preparation period until various effects such as background image display and variation effects become available. If the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal resumes after the above-mentioned temporary stop, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal will occur during the startup preparation period described above.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a power outage occurs while the pre-activation setting state test signal is being generated and output, and during the activation notification state, the generation and output of the test signal will stop, similar to the activation state, and will remain stopped even after the power is restored and the activation notification state is re-entered. In other words, if a power outage occurs during the activation notification state, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal, which was being generated and output during that state, will cease at that point. However, if a power outage occurs during the activation notification state, and the system recovers from the power outage without performing the initialization process that would terminate the activation notification state, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal may be restarted.

(Specific example)
Next, we will explain, with specific examples, the generation of test signals and the control of output when the activation state is set.
For example, the regular symbol variation test signal (a test signal related to the progress of the game) is generated and output while the regular symbols are being displayed. When the activation state is set while the regular symbols are being displayed, the display of the regular symbols stops, but the generation and output of the regular symbol variation test signal continues. If a power outage occurs while this activation state is active, the generation and output of the regular symbol variation test signal will stop temporarily, but without any initialization process that would terminate the activation state, the generation and output of the regular symbol variation test signal will resume when power is restored. When the currently set activation state ends, the generation and output of the regular symbol variation test signal will also end.
Furthermore, for example, the first special symbol variation test signal (a test signal related to the progress of the game) is generated and output during the variation display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number. If the activation state is set during the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the special symbol that is currently running stops, while the generation and output of the first special symbol variation test signal continue. Also, if a power outage occurs during this activation state, the generation and output of the first special symbol variation test signal will stop temporarily, but if power is restored from the power outage without an initialization process that would terminate the activation state, the generation and output of the first special symbol variation test signal will resume. And when the currently set activation state ends, the generation and output of the first special symbol variation test signal also end.
Furthermore, for example, the second special symbol jackpot test signal (a test signal related to the progress of the game) is generated and output during the execution of a special game based on the winning of a jackpot by the second special symbol random number. If the activation state is set during the execution of the special game, the special game stops, and if the large prize slot 18 was open, the large prize slot 18 closes, while the generation and output of the second special symbol jackpot test signal continues. Also, if a power outage occurs during this activation state, the generation and output of the second special symbol jackpot test signal will stop temporarily, but if power is restored from the power outage without an initialization process that would terminate the activation state, the generation and output of the second special symbol jackpot test signal will resume. When the currently set activation state ends, the generation and output of the second special symbol jackpot test signal also ends.

Furthermore, for example, the special high-probability state test signal (a test signal related to the game state) is generated and output during the high-probability time-saving game state (while in the high-probability game state). If the activation state is set during this high-probability time-saving game state, the game progresses, but the generation and output of the special high-probability state test signal continue. Also, if a power outage occurs during this activation state, the generation and output of the special high-probability state test signal temporarily stops. However, without an initialization process that would terminate the activation state, the generation and output of the special high-probability state test signal resumes upon recovery from the power outage. Finally, when the currently set activation state ends, the generation and output of the special high-probability state test signal also terminate.

Furthermore, the pre-activation state signal (a test signal related to the state based on the ball difference operation stop control) is generated and output while the ball difference count value is equal to or greater than the pre-activation state determination value. If the activation state is set during this time, the game progresses, but the generation and output of the pre-activation state signal continue. If a power outage occurs during this activation state, the generation and output of the pre-activation state signal terminates accordingly, and even after power is restored, the generation and output of the pre-activation state signal will not resume. If no power outage occurs during this activation state, the generation and output of the pre-activation state signal continue during the activation state, and when the activation state ends, the generation and output of the pre-activation state signal also terminate.

As described above, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment is capable of generating and outputting test signals that can be used during type approval testing and output to an external computer (test computer) of the pachinko machine P, including test signals related to the progress of the game, test signals related to the game state, and pre-activation setting state test signals (test signals related to the state based on the ball difference operation stop control).
If the game is stopped and the type approval test is interrupted when the activation state is set, the final test results cannot be obtained, and data such as the payout rate accumulated over a long period of time may be wasted. In the pachinko machine P of this form, a pre-activation setting test signal can be generated and output, so it is possible to know that the activation state is about to be set by this test signal. Therefore, measures such as resetting the difference ball count value in advance can be taken to prevent the activation state from being set, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned situation can be appropriately prevented.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, if an activation state is set while a test signal regarding the progress of the game, a test signal regarding the game state, or a pre-activation setting state test signal is being generated or output, the generation and output of these test signals will continue even after the activation state has been set.
This eliminates the need to generate and stop the output of test signals based on the activation state setting, thereby reducing the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101. Furthermore, even after the activation state is set, the test computer can understand the progress of the game and the game state before the activation state was set, improving the convenience of the test signals and enabling efficient type testing.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a power outage occurs while the activation state is being set, and test signals related to the progress of the game and test signals related to the game state are being generated and output, the generation and output of these test signals will resume after the power outage is restored, without performing an initialization process that would terminate the activation state.
This allows the test computer to understand the progress and state of the game before the activation state was set, even if a power outage occurs while the system is activated. This further enhances the convenience of the test signal and enables more efficient type testing.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a pre-activation setting state test signal is generated and output while the activation state is being set, and an interruption occurs, the generation and output of the test signal will not resume even if the power is restored from the interruption without performing an initialization process that would terminate the activation state.
Once the activation state is set, the game does not proceed, and as will be described later, the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 indicates that the activation state is being set. Therefore, it is possible to understand from the appearance of the pachinko machine P that the activation state is being set without generating and outputting a pre-activation setting state test signal. In this pachinko machine P, if a power outage occurs while the activation state is being set, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal are not resumed even after the power is restored, thereby reducing the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 when a power outage occurs while the activation state is in progress.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when an activation state is set, a security signal indicating that the activation state has been set is generated and output. If a power outage occurs while the activation state is being set, the generation and output of the security signal resume after the power is restored, without performing an initialization process that would terminate the activation state.
As a result, even in cases where, for example, the activation suggestion is not executed due to a malfunction of the performance display device 21, or the game does not stop due to a malfunction of the main CPU 101, and it is not possible to determine from the appearance of the pachinko machine P that the activation state is being set, it becomes possible to determine that the activation state is being set by checking whether or not the above security signal is generated (output).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a power outage occurs while the pre-activation setting state test signal is being generated and output, and while the machine is in the pre-activation warning state or activation warning state, and the machine recovers power while a specific error (an error that has a significant impact on the progress of the game) has occurred, and the machine returns to the pre-activation warning state or activation warning state, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal will be resumed. This generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal is performed during the startup preparation period from the time the power is recovered until a predetermined startup time has elapsed.
As a result, even if a preparation image is displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 because it is in the startup preparation period, it is possible to determine that the activation state is about to be set by checking whether or not the output of the pre-activation setting state test signal is available.

(Variations regarding the generation and output of test signals)
The test signals related to the progress of the game and the test signals related to the game state that the main CPU 101 can generate and output are not limited to those described above. Depending on the game specifications, other test signals may be generated and output, or only a portion of the above test signals may be generated and output. In such cases, the same control as that of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment (such as control after the activation state is set) may be performed on the test signals.
For example, in a pachinko machine P set up so that a special game with a different number of rounds is executed depending on the type of special symbol determined when a jackpot is won, a different special symbol jackpot test signal may be provided for each special game as a test signal regarding the progress of the game. Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won by a first special symbol random number and it is set up so that a special game with 3 rounds is executed when special symbol A is determined, and a special game with 8 rounds is executed when special symbol B is determined, then a first special symbol jackpot signal A that can be generated and output during the special game based on the determination of special symbol A, and a first special symbol jackpot signal B that can be generated and output during the special game based on the determination of special symbol B may be provided.
Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P, for example, which is set up so that not only big wins but also small wins can be achieved through a big win lottery, a small win test signal may be provided as a test signal related to the progress of the game, which can be generated and output between the time a small win is achieved and the end of the small win game based on that win.
Furthermore, in a pachinko machine P, for example, which is set up so that a special game starts when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage area after a jackpot is won, a game ball passage waiting test signal may be provided as a test signal regarding the progress of the game, which can be generated and output during the period from when a jackpot is won until the game ball passes through the passage area.
Furthermore, for example, in a pachinko machine P that has a high-probability non-time-saving game state which is a combination of a high-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, and in this high-probability non-time-saving game state the variation time of special symbols is set to be shorter than in the normal game state, a special symbol variation shortening test signal may be generated and output as a test signal related to the game state during this high-probability non-time-saving game state.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in order to ensure that the performance of the regular symbol game is higher in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning by drawing regular symbols, the time of variation of the regular symbols, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b were made different from the three elements: the probability of winning by drawing regular symbols, the time of variation of the regular symbols, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b. However, it is not limited to this, and at least one of these elements may be made different, or all of the elements may be made different. In addition, test signals related to the game state may be generated and output according to the elements that have been made different.
For example, in the time-saving game state, the probability of winning by drawing regular symbols is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. However, if the fluctuation time of the regular symbols and the operating time of the movable piece 16b are both set to be the same in the game state, then during the time-saving game state, only the regular symbol high probability state test signal may be output as a test signal related to the game state, and the regular symbol fluctuation shortened state test signal and the movable piece operation extended state test signal may not be output.
Even in the manner described above, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the difference ball count value is equal to or greater than the pre-activation setting judgment value (170,000), it is possible to generate and output a pre-activation setting state test signal, which is a signal related to the state based on the difference ball operation stop control. The pre-activation setting judgment value is defined as a value smaller than the first reference value (190,000) for which the activation warning state is set, and the second reference value (195,000) for which the activation state is set, but it is not limited to a value smaller than the second reference value.
For example, the pre-activation setting judgment value may be the same as the first reference value, or it may be a value that is greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value.
Even in the manner described above, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

Furthermore, the test signals related to the state based on the ball difference operation stop control that can be generated and output by the main CPU 101 are not limited to the pre-activation setting state test signals.
For example, in addition to this pre-activation setting state test signal, it may be possible to generate and output a pre-activation setting state test signal indicating that the ball count value is greater than the pre-activation setting judgment value and less than the second reference value, or greater than or equal to the pre-activation setting judgment value (for example, 190,000, the same as the first reference value). Also, for example, it may be possible to generate and output an activation setting proximity test signal indicating that the ball count value is greater than or equal to the pre-activation setting proximity judgment value (for example, 160,000, the same as the pre-activation setting judgment value). Furthermore, these test signals may be controlled in the same way as the pre-activation setting state test signal of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment.
Even in the above configuration, the same effects and advantages as the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved, and the test computer will be able to more accurately determine how long it takes for the activation state to be set.

Furthermore, a test signal that can be generated and output by the main CPU 101 may be provided, which can be generated and output during the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and activation state, and which indicates that the game is not progressing. In addition, if a power outage occurs while the game cannot proceed test signal is being generated and output, and the system remains in the state it was in before the power outage after recovery, the generation and output of the game cannot proceed test signal may be prevented from resuming.
Even in the manner described above, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment are achieved, and the test computer can determine that the game is not progressing simply by checking whether or not the above-mentioned test signal is output.
Furthermore, by generating and outputting the same game progression impossible test signal in any of the following states—game stop, setting change, setting confirmation, and activation—it may be possible to understand that the game is not progressing, but not be able to understand the type of state that is set. Alternatively, by generating and outputting different game progression impossible test signals for each set state, it may be possible to understand both that the game is not progressing and the type of state that is set.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if an activation state is set while a test signal related to the progress of the game or a test signal related to the game state is being generated or output, the generation and output of the test signals will continue even after the activation state is set. If a power outage occurs during this activation state, the generation and output of the test signals will resume when the power is restored without performing an initialization process that would terminate the activation state. However, this control may be applied not to all test signals, but only to some of the test signals.
For example, among the test signals related to the progress of the game and the test signals related to the game state, the above-mentioned control may be applied to the test signals related to special feature games and special games (test signal during first special feature variation, test signal during first special feature jackpot, test signal during second special feature variation, test signal during second special feature jackpot, test signal during round game, special feature high probability state test signal, special feature variation shortened state test signal), but the above-mentioned control may not be applied to the test signals related to regular feature games (test signal during regular feature variation, test signal during regular feature jackpot, test signal during movable piece opening, regular feature high probability state test signal, regular feature variation shortened state test signal, movable piece operation extended state test signal).
Furthermore, while the test signals for special games and regular games mentioned above will continue to be generated and output even after the activation state is set, if an interruption occurs while the system is activated, the test signals for special games and regular games will resume generation and output after the power is restored, but the test signals for regular games may not resume generation and output after the power is restored.
In this manner, various controls related to the output of the test signal can be implemented according to the game specifications of the pachinko machine P, further enhancing the convenience of the test signal.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the activation state is set while the pre-activation setting state test signal is being generated and output, the generation and output of the test signal will continue even after the activation state is set. If a power outage occurs during this activation state, the generation and output of the test signal will not resume after the power is restored. However, the control of the pre-activation setting state test signal is not limited to this.
For example, if the activation state is set while the pre-activation state test signal is being generated and output, the generation and output of the test signal may be terminated after the activation state is set. Also, if the system is configured to continue generating and outputting the test signal as described above even after the activation state is set, if a power outage occurs during this activation state, the generation and output of the test signal may be resumed when the power is restored without performing the initialization process that would terminate the activation state.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a power outage occurs while the pre-activation setting state test signal is being generated and output, and while the pre-activation warning state or activation warning state is active, and a specific error occurs, and the power is restored, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal are resumed. However, this control may be carried out as follows.
For example, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal may always be resumed when the power is restored after an interruption as described above. Alternatively, when the power is restored after an interruption as described above, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal may be resumed if the difference ball count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined restart judgment value (for example, 180000), but the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal may not be resumed if the difference ball count value is less than the restart judgment value. Furthermore, if the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal are not resumed when the difference ball count value is less than the restart judgment value, the generation and output of the pre-activation setting state test signal may be resumed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was restored (for example, after the start-up preparation period described above has elapsed).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, when a game stop state is set, a security signal indicating that state is generated and output, and when an activation state is set, a security signal indicating that state is generated and output. In other words, different security signals are generated and output when a game stop state is set and when an activation state is set, and it is possible to determine whether a game stop state or an activation state is set according to the generated and outputted security signals, however, the generation and output of security signals are not limited to the above.
For example, the same security signal may be generated and output in both cases: when the game is stopped and when the activation state is set. This allows the system to understand that the game is not progressing, but it may not be possible to determine whether the game is stopped or activated.
Furthermore, regarding security signals based on the activation state setting, if a power outage occurs while the activation state is active and the system recovers from the power outage without performing the initialization process that would terminate the activation state, generation and output were previously resumed. However, it is now possible to prevent generation and output from being resumed.

(Overview of processing in pachinko machine P)
Next, an overview of the processes executed by the main control board 100 in accordance with the progress of the special game, regular game, and special game described above will be explained using a flowchart.
First, I will explain the power cut-off and retraction process of the main control board 100.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the voltage of the supplied power supply falls below a predetermined value, the main processing of the main control board 100, which will be described later, is interrupted and the power cut-off and recovery process shown in the flowchart of Figure 19 is executed.

In step 100, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it has detected a power outage signal. If it determines that it has not detected a power outage signal, it terminates the power outage recovery process. On the other hand, if it determines that it has detected a power outage signal, it proceeds to step 101.
In step 101, the main CPU 101 performs a process to calculate the checksums of the used and unused areas in the main RAM 103, and stores the calculated checksums in the second area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 102.

In step 102, the main CPU 101 performs a backup process to retain various data stored in the memory area of the main RAM 103 (setting values, game machine status flags indicating the control status, test signal information, checksums, backup flags, error information, various data related to the progress of the game, and game performance data), and stores the backup flags indicating the result of this backup process in the second area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 103.
In step 103, the main CPU 101 prohibits access to the main RAM 103. As a result, it becomes impossible to store various data in the main RAM 103 or read (load) various data from the main RAM 103 from this point onward. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 104.

In step 104, the main CPU 101 stops transmitting various signals to the launch/dispensing control board 200 (such as a main command permission signal indicating that bidirectional communication with the main control board 100 has been established and commands can be sent to the main control board 100, and a launch permission signal that permits the launch of game balls). Also, if one or more test signals have been generated and output, the main CPU 101 stops generating and outputting all test signals. Also, if a security signal based on the activation state has been generated and outputted, the main CPU 101 stops generating and outputting the security signal. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 105.
In step 105, the main CPU 101 sets the power outage monitoring time (3000 ms) in the power outage monitoring time timer counter. Then, it proceeds to the next step 106.

In step 106, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it has detected a power outage signal. If it determines that it has detected a power outage signal, it returns to step 105. On the other hand, if it determines that it has not detected a power outage signal, it proceeds to the next step 107.
In step 107, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power outage monitoring time set in step 105 has elapsed. If it determines that the time has not elapsed, it returns to step 106. On the other hand, if it determines that the time has elapsed, it terminates the power outage recovery process and executes the power outage recovery process described later. A subtraction timer is used for the power outage monitoring time timer counter, and the timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the detection of the power outage signal is performed, and when it reaches 0, it is determined that the power outage monitoring time has elapsed. When a power outage occurs, the operation of the pachinko machine P is stopped while the loop from step 105 to step 107 is running.

Next, the main processing of the main control board 100 will be explained.
When power is supplied by the power supply board 600 (when power is restored after an interruption), a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101, and the main CPU 101 executes the main process shown in the flowchart of Figure 20.

In step 110, the main CPU 101 executes the power recovery process. Then, it proceeds to the next step 111.
In step 111, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value update random number for special symbol random numbers, which is referenced when updating the special symbol random number. This initial value update random number for special symbol random numbers is used to determine the initial value of the special symbol random number. That is, the special symbol random number is updated using the initial value update random number for special symbol random number at the time the update starts as the initial value. After completing one cycle of this random number range, the update of the special symbol random number continues, using the initial value update random number for special symbol random number at that point as the initial value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 112.
In step 112, the main CPU 101 updates the random number for determining the variation pattern. After the processing in step 112 is completed, the processes in steps 111 and 112 are repeatedly executed until the timer interrupt processing described later takes place.

Next, the power outage recovery process described in step 110 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 21.
In step 130, the main CPU 101 reads the startup program from the main ROM 102 and performs initial setup processing necessary to execute various processes when power is restored after an interruption (when the power switch 650 is turned on, or when power is restored after an unexpected power interruption). The main CPU 101 also starts transmitting various signals (launch permission signal, main command permission signal, etc.) to the launch/dispensing control board 200. This enables the launch/dispensing control board 200 to launch game balls based on the rotation operation of the operating handle 5, and also enables the launch/dispensing control board 200 to transmit commands to the main control board 100. In addition, although not specifically shown, the main CPU 101 grants access to the main RAM 103. This enables the storage of various data in the main RAM 103 and the reading (loading) of various data from the main RAM 103 from this point onward. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 analyzes various commands used to execute special feature games and regular feature games. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 131.
In step 131, the main CPU 101 calculates the checksum of the main RAM 103 at this point in time, and determines whether a backup error has occurred based on the calculated checksum, the checksum stored in the second area of the main RAM 103 (the checksum calculated immediately before the power outage in step 101), and the backup flag stored in the second area. If it determines that a backup error has occurred, it proceeds to step 136. On the other hand, if it determines that no backup error has occurred, it proceeds to the next step 132.

In step 132, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 109 is on or off. If it determines that the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the process proceeds to step 136. On the other hand, if it determines that the RAM clear switch 109 is not on (i.e., off), the process proceeds to the next step 133.
In step 133, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state during the stay (control state before the power outage) is in a playable state and whether the conditions for ending the playable state and setting the setting confirmation state are met (i.e., whether the control state during the stay (control state before the power outage) is in a playable state, the setting switch 108 is ON, and the main frame opening detection sensor 2a is ON). If it determines that the conditions are not met, the process proceeds to step 135. On the other hand, if it determines that the conditions are met, the process proceeds to the next step 134.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, a game machine state flag indicating the control state during play is stored in the first area of the main RAM 103's usage area, and the control state during play can be determined by referring to this game machine state flag.

In step 134, the main CPU 101 sets the setting confirmation state and stores a game machine state flag indicating this in the first area. Then, it proceeds to the next step 135.
In step 135, if the setting confirmation state was set in step 134, the main CPU 101 performs a clear process. If a RAM abnormality occurs, the main CPU 101 also performs the setting of the game stop state based on the RAM abnormality, as described later, and the stop-related processing based on the setting of the game stop state, and further performs the abnormality initialization process. However, if no RAM abnormality occurred, it sets the control state before the power outage. Then, the process proceeds to step 144.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step 131 that a backup error has occurred, or if it is determined in step 132 that the RAM clear switch 109 is ON, then in step 136, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a RAM error has occurred. If it is determined that no RAM error has occurred, the process proceeds to step 138. On the other hand, if it is determined that a RAM error has occurred, the process proceeds to the next step 137.
In step 137, the main CPU 101 sets a game stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality and stores a game machine state flag in the first area indicating that a game stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality has been set. The main CPU 101 also executes stop-related processing based on the setting of the game stop state. Specifically, as stop-related processing, the following are executed: stopping the transmission of a launch permission signal to the launch payout control board 200; stopping the display of special symbols, the display of normal symbols, and special games if they were being executed before the setting of the game stop state; stopping the determination of main control-related errors; stopping (restricting) the control to transmit winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P; displaying an error code on the main information display device 105; generating a security signal based on the setting of the game stop state and outputting it to the outside of the pachinko machine P; and stopping (terminating) the generation and output of test signals that were being generated and output. As a result, even if the operating handle 5 is rotated, the launch and payout control board 200 will be unable to execute the control to launch the game balls, and the game will stop. Furthermore, the main control board 100 will no longer detect errors other than the door open error, and the control to output external signals such as the winning signal and the jackpot signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P will be restricted. On the other hand, the launch and payout control board 200 will continue to control the dispensing of game balls and transmit external signals such as the payout ball signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P, but it will no longer detect ball out errors, full errors, payout counting switch errors, ball jam errors, excessive payout ball errors, and payout radio wave errors. Then, the process proceeds to step 143.

Furthermore, in step 138, which is proceeded to if it is determined in step 136 that no RAM abnormality has occurred, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change conditions (i.e., setting switch 108 is ON, RAM clear switch 109 is ON, and main frame opening detection sensor 2a is ON) are met. If it is determined that the setting change conditions are not met, the process proceeds to step 140. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting change conditions are met, the process proceeds to the next step 139.
In step 139, the main CPU 101 sets the configuration change state and stores a game machine status flag indicating this in the first area. Then, the process proceeds to step 143.

Furthermore, in step 140, which is proceeded to if it is determined in step 138 above that the setting change conditions are not met, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a backup error has occurred. If it is determined that a backup error has occurred, the process proceeds to step 142. On the other hand, if it is determined that no backup error has occurred, the process proceeds to the next step 141.
In step 141, the main CPU 101 sets the game-ready state and stores a game machine state flag indicating this in the first memory area. Then, the process proceeds to step 143.

Furthermore, in step 142, which is followed if it is determined in step 140 that a backup error has occurred, the main CPU 101 sets a game stop state based on the occurrence of the backup error and stores a game machine state flag indicating this in the first area. The main CPU 101 also executes stop-related processing based on the setting of the game stop state. This stop-related processing is the same as the processing performed when a game stop state is set due to a RAM error (the processing performed in step 137 above), so it will not be explained here. Then, the process proceeds to step 143.
In step 143, the main CPU 101 executes an abnormal initialization process if a game stop state is set due to a RAM abnormality or a backup abnormality, or if a backup abnormality has occurred but the setting change conditions are met and the setting change state is set. The main CPU 101 also executes a normal initialization process if no backup abnormality has occurred, the setting change conditions are met and the setting change state is set, or if the RAM clear switch 109 is ON and the game-ready state is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 144.

In step 144, the main CPU 101 sends various commands to the sub-control board 300 corresponding to the processing performed when the power was restored. These commands include a RAM clear command indicating that a RAM clear (abnormal initialization process, normal initialization process) has been performed, a power restoration command indicating that the power was restored from a power outage without a RAM clear being performed, a state setting command indicating the control state when the power was restored (such as a game stop command indicating that the game stop state has been set), a first reserve number specification command indicating the first reserve number, a second reserve number specification command indicating the second reserve number, a game state specification command indicating the game state when the power was restored, and a launch position specification command indicating the direction of launch of the game balls (either right-handed or left-handed). Upon receiving the aforementioned RAM clear command and power restoration command, the sub-control board 300 can understand that the main control board 100 has restored power, and upon restoration, the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 can display the background image and the aforementioned preparation image. The process then proceeds to the next step 145.
In step 145, the main CPU 101 sends various commands (for example, the power-off recovery command, RAM clear command, state setting command, etc.) corresponding to the processing performed when the power was restored to the launch/dispensing control board 200. This allows the launch/dispensing control board 200 to understand that the main control board 100 has recovered from a power outage. The process then proceeds to step 146.

In step 146, the main CPU 101 executes the ball control reset process based on the power outage recovery. Then, it terminates the power outage recovery process.

Next, the ball difference control reset process described in step 146 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 22.
In step 150, the main CPU 101 determines whether a state value corresponding to the activation notification state or the activation state is stored in the ball difference operation stop phase data. If it determines that a state value corresponding to the activation notification state or the activation state is not stored (i.e., a state value corresponding to the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state is stored), it proceeds to step 156. On the other hand, if it determines that a state value corresponding to the activation notification state or the activation state is stored, it proceeds to the next step 151.
In step 151, the main CPU 101 determines whether the initialization process (normal initialization process) associated with the setting change state was executed during the power interruption recovery process described above. If it determines that the initialization process associated with the setting change state was not executed, it proceeds to step 155. On the other hand, if it determines that the initialization process associated with the setting change state was executed, it proceeds to the next step 152.

In step 152, the main CPU 101 clears the ball difference operation stop control phase data and stores a state value corresponding to the pre-activation warning state in the ball difference operation stop control phase data. As a result, the currently set activation state or activation notification state ends, and the pre-activation warning state is set. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 153.
In step 153, the main CPU 101 resets the ball difference count value. Then, it proceeds to the next step 154.

In step 154, the main CPU 101 clears all test signal information if one or more test signal information is stored in a specific area of the main RAM 103 (i.e., if one or more test signals were generated and output before the power outage), and clears the activation security information if activation security information is stored in a specific area of the main RAM 103 (i.e., if an activation state was set before the power outage). As a result, if one or more test signals were generated and output before the power outage, the generation and output of all test signals are completed, and if an activation state was set before the power outage, the generation and output of security signals based on that activation state are completed. Then the ball difference control reset process is completed.
Furthermore, in step 155, which is followed if it is determined in step 151 above that the initialization process associated with the setting change state has not been performed, the main CPU 101 clears the test signal information for the pre-activation setting state test signal if it is stored in a specific area of the main RAM 103 (i.e., if the pre-activation setting state test signal was being generated and output). As a result, if the pre-activation setting state test signal was being generated and output before the power outage occurred, the generation and output will be terminated. On the other hand, if the specific area contains test signal information for the test signal related to the progress of the game, test signal information for the test signal related to the game state, and activation security information, the main CPU 101 does not clear this test signal information and activation security information. As a result, if the test signal related to the progress of the game and the test signal related to the game state were being generated and output before the power outage occurred, the generation and output will be resumed. Also, if the security signal based on the activation state setting was being generated and output before the power outage occurred, the generation and output will be resumed. Then, the ball difference control reset process is terminated.

Furthermore, in step 156, which is followed if it is determined in step 150 above that no state value corresponding to the activation notification state or the activation state is stored, the main CPU 101 clears the ball difference operation stop control phase data and stores the state value corresponding to the pre-activation warning state in the ball difference operation stop control phase data. As a result, if the pre-activation warning state was present before the power outage occurred, the pre-activation warning state ends and the pre-activation warning state is set again. Also, if the activation warning state was present before the power outage occurred, the activation warning state ends and the pre-activation warning state is set again. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 157.
In step 157, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a specific error has occurred. If it determines that a specific error has occurred, it terminates the ball control reset process. On the other hand, if it determines that a specific error has not occurred, it proceeds to the next step 158.

In step 158, the main CPU 101 resets the ball difference count value stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the ball difference control reset process is terminated.
Furthermore, if the activation notification state or the state value corresponding to the activation state is not stored (i.e., the pre-activation warning state or activation warning state is set), regardless of whether a specific error has occurred, the test signal information for the test signal related to the progress of the game, the test signal information for the test signal related to the game state, and the test signal information for the pre-activation setting state signal will not be cleared, even if such information is stored. As a result, if the test signal related to the progress of the game, the test signal related to the game state, and the pre-activation setting state signal were generated and output before the power outage occurred, such generation and output will be resumed.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be explained.
A reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 100 generates a clock pulse at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment), which executes the timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 23.

In step 200, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current control state is a playable state and whether the state related to the ball difference operation stop control is other than the activated state (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notification state). If it determines that the state is not playable (i.e., play stopped state, setting change state, or setting confirmation state) or that the state is playable but not other than the activated state (i.e., activated state), it proceeds to step 218. On the other hand, if it determines that the state is playable and other than the activated state, it proceeds to the next step 201.
In step 201, the main CPU 101 executes a timer update process to update various timer counters. Then, it proceeds to the next step 202. In this pachinko machine P, a subtraction timer is used, and each time the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 is executed, the timer counter is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the subtraction stops.

In step 202, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol random number. Specifically, it updates the random number counter by incrementing it by "1". If the result of the increment exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, it resets the random number counter to "0". When the random number counter completes one cycle, it updates the random number from the value of the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at that point. Then, it proceeds to the next step 203.
In step 203, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is input to the gate detection sensor 20a, the first start prize entry sensor 15a, the second start prize entry sensor 16a, the large prize entry sensor 18a, the specific area detection sensor 57a, the general prize entry sensor 14a, and the out sensor 19a, and executes sensor detection processing that performs predetermined processing based on this. Note that this sensor detection processing is not executed when the game is stopped, when the settings are changed, when the settings are confirmed, or when the game is activated. As a result, during these states, even if a game ball enters the general prize entry 14, the first start prize entry 15, the second start prize entry 16, or the large prize entry 18, or even if a game ball passes through the gate 20, no new prize balls, new special symbol random numbers are stored in reserve, and no new general symbol random numbers are stored in reserve. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 204.

In step 204, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol-related control processing to control special symbol games and special games. Note that this special symbol-related control processing is not executed when the game is stopped, when the settings are changed, when the settings are confirmed, or when the game is activated. As a result, during these states, the lottery for big wins, the display of special symbol variations, and special games are not executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 205.
In step 205, the main CPU 101 executes a control process related to the regular symbol game. Note that this regular symbol control process is not executed when the game is stopped, when the settings are changed, when the settings are confirmed, or when the game is activated. As a result, the drawing of regular symbols is not performed during these states. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 206.

In step 206, the main CPU 101 executes launch position control processing to control the game area (first game area 12a, second game area 12b) from which the game balls are launched, according to the game state (normal game state, low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2, high probability time-saving game state). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 207.
In step 207, the main CPU 101 executes state control processing to perform various error-related operations.
Specifically, when the main CPU 101 is in a playable state and is not in an activated state (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notification state), it determines whether a door opening error or a main control-related error has occurred, and also determines whether the launch/payout control board 200 has determined that a payout-related error other than a door opening error has occurred. If it determines that a door opening error or a main control-related error has occurred, or if it determines that the launch/payout control board 200 has determined that a payout-related error other than a door opening error has occurred (i.e., if it has detected the occurrence of a payout-related error other than a door opening error), the main CPU 101 sends an error indication command indicating the error that occurred to the sub-control board 300 or the external information terminal board 500. This allows the system to display an error indication image corresponding to the error that occurred on the display device 21, light up various lamps (panel display lamp GL, front door display lamp DL, status notification lamp EL) in a manner corresponding to the error that occurred, and output an error indication sound corresponding to the error that occurred from the sound output device 10, thereby indicating the error that occurred and notifying the hall computer, etc., that the above-mentioned error has occurred.
Furthermore, when the game is stopped, the settings have been changed, or the settings have been confirmed, or when the game is playable and activated, the main CPU 101 only determines whether or not a door opening error has occurred. If it determines that a door opening error has occurred, the main CPU 101 sends an error indication command to the sub-control board 300 or the external information terminal board 500, as described above. This indicates the occurrence of a door opening error by displaying an error indication image corresponding to the door opening error on the performance display device 21, lighting up various lamps (play panel performance lamp GL, front door performance lamp DL, status notification lamp EL) in a manner corresponding to the door opening error, or outputting an error indication sound corresponding to the door opening error from the audio output device 10, thereby indicating the occurrence of a door opening error and notifying the hall computer, etc., that a door opening error has occurred.
Furthermore, if the system detects that an error has been resolved, or determines that an error has been resolved, the main CPU 101 sends an error resolution command to the sub-control board 300 or the external information terminal board 500. This terminates the error prompting process and notifies the hall computer and other systems that the error has been resolved.
Then, proceed to the next step, 208.

In step 208, the main CPU 101 executes payout control processing on the launch/payout control board 200, which performs various processes necessary for dispensing game balls.
Specifically, when detection signals from the general prize entry sensor 14a, the first start prize entry sensor 15a, the second start prize entry sensor 16a, and the large prize entry sensor 18a are input to the main CPU 101, the main CPU 101 updates the prize ball counters provided in accordance with each detection signal and transmits prize ball specification commands corresponding to each detection signal to the launch/dispensing control board 200 and the sub-control board 300. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 increments the difference ball count value by the number of prize balls corresponding to the above-mentioned detection signals (the number of prize balls that are scheduled to be dispensed based on the number of game balls entering each prize entry).
As described above, even if a game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, or activation state is set after a prize ball designation command is transmitted to the launch/dispensing control board 200, the launch/dispensing control board 200 will continue to control the payout of prize balls based on the prize ball designation command.
Furthermore, as described above, during the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and activation state, the game does not progress, and therefore, the general prize entry detection sensor 14a, the first start prize entry detection sensor 15a, the second start prize entry detection sensor 16a, and the large prize entry detection sensor 18a do not detect game balls. Consequently, during the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and activation state, no new payout control processing is initiated.
Then, we proceed to the next step, 209.

In step 209, the main CPU 101 executes external information control processing to control the output of various external signals to the external information terminal board 500. When the machine is in a playable state and not in an activated state, this external information control processing controls the transmission of external signals such as the winning signal and jackpot signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P. However, when the machine is stopped, the settings are changed, the settings are confirmed, or the machine is activated, the game does not proceed, so the control to output external signals such as the winning signal and jackpot signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P is restricted. Furthermore, when the machine is stopped, control is performed to generate a security signal based on the setting of the machine and output it to the outside of the pachinko machine P. Furthermore, when the machine is activated, control is performed to generate a security signal based on the setting of the activated state and output it to the outside of the pachinko machine P, and control is performed to store the activated security information in a specific area of the main RAM 103.
For example, if the game stops, settings are changed, settings are confirmed, or the system is activated while an external signal, such as a winning signal, is being output, the winning signal will continue to be output. Also, even if a game ball enters the first starting winning slot 15 or the second starting winning slot 16 after the game stops, settings are changed, settings are confirmed, or the system is activated, the main CPU 101 will not detect the ball, and therefore, the output of a new winning signal will not begin.
Furthermore, if the game stops, the settings are changed, or the settings are checked while the jackpot signal, which is an external signal, is being output, the jackpot signal will remain output. Also, after the game stops, the settings are changed, the settings are checked, or the activation state is entered, the main CPU 101 will not start a special game, so the output of a new jackpot signal will not begin.
Then, we move on to the next step, 210.

In step 210, the main CPU 101 performs solenoid control processing to set movable piece solenoid data for controlling the protrusion and retraction of the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize winning opening 16, and large prize winning opening solenoid data for controlling the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 18b of the large prize winning opening 18, into a predetermined solenoid storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 211.
In step 211, the main CPU 101 executes a display data creation process to create display data for various display devices (first special symbol display device 30, second special symbol display device 31, normal symbol display device 32, first special symbol hold display device 38, second special symbol hold display device 39, and normal symbol hold display device 33). Then, it proceeds to the next step 212.

In step 212, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing to output the movable piece solenoid data and the large prize opening solenoid data set in step 210, as well as the display data created in step 211, to the corresponding ports. Based on this data, the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 is extended and retracted, the opening and closing door 18b of the large prize opening 18 is opened and closed, and the display on various display devices is performed. The main CPU 101 also performs the processing of sending commands stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 213.
In step 213, the main CPU 101 executes a performance display control process that displays game performance information on the main information display device 105. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 214.

In step 214, the main CPU 101 executes the command set processing related to the difference in ball count. Then, it proceeds to the next step 215.
In step 215, the main CPU 101 executes the ball difference determination control process. Then, it proceeds to the next step 216.

In step 216, the main CPU 101 executes test signal control processing related to the generation of test signals and the control of the start and end of their output.
Specifically, when the conditions for starting the generation and output of each test signal (output start conditions) are met, the main CPU 101 starts generating and outputting the test signal and stores the test signal information corresponding to the test signal in a specific area of the main RAM 103. Furthermore, when each test signal is being generated and outputted, when the conditions for ending the generation and output (output end conditions) are met, the main CPU 101 ends the generation and output of the test signal and clears the test signal information corresponding to the test signal stored in the specific area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 217.

In step 217, the main CPU 101 executes a handle operation command control process based on the handle operation command transmitted from the launch/dispensing control means 200.
Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it has received a handle operation command from the launch/dispensing control board 200. If it determines that it has received a handle operation command, it stores a rotation operation command in the performance transmission data storage area, indicating that the operation handle 5 is being rotated. This allows the sub-control board 300 to be informed that the operation handle 5 is being rotated. On the other hand, if it determines that it has not received a handle operation command, the main CPU 101 does not perform any special processing.
As mentioned above, when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a game-stopped state, or when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a playable state regardless of the state related to the ball difference operation stop control, if the operating handle 5 is rotated, a handle operation command is transmitted from the launch/payout control board 200 to the main control board 100. Therefore, even in a game-stopped or activated state, if the operating handle 5 is rotated, a rotation operation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 can determine that the operating handle 5 is being rotated.
Then, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 is terminated.

Furthermore, in step 218, which is followed if step 200 determines that the game is not playable, or is playable but not in an activated state, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current control state is a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. If it determines that the state is neither a setting change state nor a setting confirmation state (i.e., game stopped state, or playable state and activated state), the process proceeds to step 207. On the other hand, if it determines that the state is a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the process proceeds to the next step 219.
In step 218, the main CPU 101 performs configuration-related processing. Then, the process proceeds to step 207.

Next, the sensor detection process described in step 203 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 24.
In step 300, the main CPU 101 executes gate detection processing to perform a lottery for a normal symbol based on the fact that the game ball has passed through gate 20. Then, it proceeds to the next step 301.
In step 301, the main CPU 101 executes a first start prize entry detection process to determine whether a game ball has entered the first start prize entry 15. Then, it proceeds to the next step 302.

In step 302, the main CPU 101 executes a second start prize entry detection process to determine whether a game ball has entered the second start prize entry 16. Then, it proceeds to the next step 303.
In step 303, the main CPU 101 executes a process to detect the large prize slot 18, which is necessary to perform predetermined processing based on the fact that a game ball has entered the large prize slot 18. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 304.

In step 304, the main CPU 101 executes a general prize entry detection process to perform predetermined processing based on the fact that a game ball has entered the general prize entry 14. Then, it proceeds to the next step 305.
In step 305, the main CPU 101 executes an out detection process to perform predetermined processing based on the detection of a game ball by the out sensor 19a. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 306.

In step 303, the main CPU 101 executes a specific area detection process to perform predetermined processing based on the game ball entering the specific area 57. Then, it terminates the sensor detection process.

Next, the gate detection process in step 300 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 25.
In step 400, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a detection signal has been received from the gate detection sensor 20a. If it determines that no detection signal has been received from the gate detection sensor 20a, it terminates the gate detection process. On the other hand, if it determines that a detection signal has been received from the gate detection sensor 20a, it proceeds to the next step 401.
In step 401, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the regular drawing hold counter (i.e., the current number of regular drawing holds) is less than "4". If it determines that the value is not less than "4" (i.e., "4"), it terminates the gate detection process. On the other hand, if it determines that the value is less than 4, it proceeds to the next step 402.

In step 402, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the regular hold counter by "1". Then, it proceeds to the next step 403.
In step 403, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number for determining the winning outcome, stores it in the general diagram holding memory area, and terminates the gate detection process.

Next, the process for detecting the first starting prize slot in step 301 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 26.
In step 500, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a detection signal has been received from the first start prize slot detection sensor 15a. If it determines that no detection signal has been received from the first start prize slot detection sensor 15a, the first start prize slot detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that a detection signal has been received from the first start prize slot detection sensor 15a, the process proceeds to the next step 501.
In step 501, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the first reserve counter (i.e., the current number of first reserves) is less than "4". If it determines that the value is not less than "4" (i.e., "4"), it terminates the first start prize entry detection process. On the other hand, if it determines that the value is less than "4", it proceeds to the next step 502.

In step 502, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the first hold counter by "1". Then, it proceeds to the next step 503.
In step 503, the main CPU 101 obtains a correct/incorrect random number and stores it in the memory unit of the first reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 504.

In step 504, the main CPU 101 obtains the special symbol random number updated in step 201 and stores it in the memory unit of the first reserved memory area where the win/loss random number was stored in step 503. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 505.
In step 505, the main CPU 101 acquires the variable pattern random number updated in step 102 and stores it in the memory unit of the first reserved memory area where the win/loss random number was stored in step 503. Thus, the acquired win/loss random number, special symbol random number, and variable pattern random number are all stored in the same memory unit of the first reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 506.

In step 506, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the first start prize entry counter, which counts the number of game balls that have entered the first start prize entry 15, by 1. Then, the program proceeds to the next step 507.
In step 507, the main CPU 101 generates a start-up prize command indicating that the first special random number has been stored and stores it in the data storage area for performance transmission. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 508.

In step 508, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state JT1. If it determines that the state is neither a non-time-saving game state nor a time-saving game state JT1 (i.e., it is a time-saving game state JT2), it terminates the first start prize entry detection process. On the other hand, if it determines that the state is either a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state JT1, it proceeds to the next step 509.
In step 509, the main CPU 101 performs a pre-determination process for the stored first special symbol random number, making various judgments regarding the win/loss lottery before the special symbol variation based on the first special symbol random number begins (at the time the first special symbol random number is acquired (stored as pending)). Then, it terminates the first start prize entry detection process.

Next, the process for detecting the second starting prize slot in step 302 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 27.
In step 600, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a detection signal has been received from the second start prize slot detection sensor 16a. If it determines that no detection signal has been received from the second start prize slot detection sensor 16a, the second start prize slot detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that a detection signal has been received from the second start prize slot detection sensor 16a, the process proceeds to the next step 601.
In step 601, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the second reserve counter (i.e., the current number of reserves in the second reserve) is less than "4". If it determines that the value is not less than "4" (i.e., "4"), it terminates the second start prize entry detection process. On the other hand, if it determines that the value is less than "4", it proceeds to the next step 602.

In step 602, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the second hold counter by "1". Then, it proceeds to the next step 603.
In step 603, the main CPU 101 obtains a correct/incorrect random number and stores it in the memory unit of the second reserved memory area. Then, it proceeds to the next step 604.

In step 604, the main CPU 101 obtains the special symbol random number updated in step 201 and stores it in the memory unit of the second reserved memory area where the win/loss random number was stored in step 603. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 605.
In step 605, the main CPU 101 acquires the variable pattern random number updated in step 102 and stores it in the memory unit of the second reserved memory area where the win/loss random number was stored in step 603. Thus, the acquired win/loss random number, special symbol random number, and variable pattern random number are all stored in the same memory unit of the second reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 606.

In step 606, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the second start prize entry counter, which counts the number of game balls that have entered the second start prize entry 16, by 1. Then, the program proceeds to the next step 607.
In step 607, the main CPU 101 generates a start-up prize command indicating that the second special random number has been stored and stores it in the data storage area for performance transmission. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 608.

In step 608, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is the time-saving game state JT2. If it determines that the game state is not the time-saving game state JT2 (i.e., it is either a non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state JT1), it terminates the second start prize entry detection process. On the other hand, if it determines that the game state is the time-saving game state JT2, it proceeds to the next step 609.
In step 609, the main CPU 101 performs a pre-determination process for the stored second special symbol random number, making various judgments regarding the win/loss lottery before the special symbol variation based on the second special symbol random number begins (at the time the second special symbol random number is acquired (stored as pending)). Then, it terminates the second start prize entry detection process.

Next, the pre-determination processes of steps 509 and 609 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 28. In the pre-determination process of step 509 described above, the following processes are executed based on the win/fail random numbers, special symbol random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers stored in the memory unit of the first reserved memory area, as well as the first reserved number. In the pre-determination process of step 609 described above, the following processes are executed based on the win/fail random numbers, special symbol random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers stored in the memory unit of the second reserved memory area, as well as the second reserved number.
In step 650, the main CPU 101 confirms the type of starting entry point into which the game ball entered (first starting entry point 15, second starting entry point 16), the number of reserved balls (first reserved balls, second reserved balls), and the game state (normal game state, low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2, high probability time-saving game state). Then, it proceeds to the next step 651.

In step 651, the main CPU 101 obtains one of the win/loss random number determination tables 110 that corresponds to the game state confirmed in step 650 (low probability determination table 110a, high probability determination table 110b), and performs a win/loss determination process to determine the result of the win/loss lottery based on the obtained table and the stored win/loss random numbers. After that, data related to the result of the determination (winning a jackpot, winning a time-saving bonus, or losing) is stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 652.
In step 652, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination process to determine the type of special symbol. Specifically, if the starting entry point into which the game ball entered was the first starting entry point 15 (first special symbol random number), the first starting entry point determination table 111a is obtained, and based on this table, the result of the win/loss lottery determined in step 651 above, and the stored special symbol random number, the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3), the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbols J1, J2), or the type of losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) is determined. Furthermore, if the starting prize entry point into which the game ball entered was the second starting prize entry point 16 (second special symbol random number), the second starting prize entry point determination table 111b is obtained, and based on this table, the result of the win/loss lottery determined in step 651 above, and the stored special symbol random number, the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbols X4, X5, X6), the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbols J1, J2), or the type of losing symbol (losing symbol Z2) is determined. The main CPU 101 stores the data related to the result of this determination (type of special symbol) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 653.

In step 653, the main CPU 101 obtains the variable pattern table 114 corresponding to the game state confirmed in step 650 above. Then, it proceeds to the next step 654.
In step 654, the main CPU 101 executes a variable pattern command determination process to determine a variable pattern command based on the type of special symbol and the number of reserved symbols determined in step 652, the variable pattern table 114 obtained in step 653, and the stored variable pattern random numbers. Then, it proceeds to the next step 655.

In step 655, the main CPU 101 stores the result of the win/loss lottery determined in step 651, the type of special symbol determined in step 652, and a pre-determination command including the variation pattern command determined in step 654 in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, it terminates the pre-determination process.
Through the above process, the result of the win/loss lottery determined at the start of the special symbol variation, the type of special symbol, and the variation pattern command for the first or second special symbol random number stored as pending are transmitted to the sub-control board 300 in advance (i.e., before the variation starts) at the time the random number is acquired by the pre-determination command.

In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the pre-determination process described above determines the first special symbol random number, which is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize entry point 15 and stored in the reserved memory area (first reserved memory area), or the second special symbol random number, which is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize entry point 16 and stored in the reserved memory area (second reserved memory area). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the pre-determination process, instead of directly determining the random number stored in the reserved memory area, the random number stored in another memory area (for example, a register, etc.) may be determined.

Next, the process for detecting the grand prize winning slot in step 303 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 29.
In step 660, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a detection signal has been received from the large prize slot detection sensor 18a. If it determines that no detection signal has been received from the large prize slot detection sensor 18a, the large prize slot detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that a detection signal has been received from the large prize slot detection sensor 18a, the process proceeds to the next step 661.
In step 661, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the large prize slot ball counter, which counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize slot 18, by 1. Then, it terminates the large prize slot detection process.

Next, the general prize entry detection process described in step 304 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 30.
In step 663, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a detection signal has been received from the general prize slot detection sensor 14a. If it determines that no detection signal has been received from the general prize slot detection sensor 14a, the general prize slot detection process ends. On the other hand, if it determines that a detection signal has been received from the general prize slot detection sensor 14a, the process proceeds to the next step 664.
In step 664, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the general prize slot ball counter, which counts the number of game balls that have entered the general prize slot 14, by 1. Then, it terminates the general prize slot detection process.

Next, the process for detecting an out in step 305 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 31.
In step 667, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it has received an out command (a command sent each time a game ball passes through the out passage) transmitted from the launch/dispensing control board 200. If it determines that it has not received an out command, it terminates the out detection process. On the other hand, if it determines that it has received an out command, it proceeds to the next step 668.
In step 668, the main CPU 101 decrements the ball difference count value by 1. Then, it terminates the out detection process.

Next, the process for detecting a specific area in step 306 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 32.
In step 670, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a special game is in progress. If it determines that a special game is not in progress, it terminates the specific area detection process. On the other hand, if it determines that a special game is in progress, it proceeds to the next step 671.
In step 671, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once). If it determines that the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has not been input a predetermined number of times, the specific area detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input a predetermined number of times, the process proceeds to the next step 672.
In step 672, the main CPU 101 turns on an entry flag indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the specific area 57. Then, it terminates the processing when the specific area is detected.

Next, the special drawing-related control processing of step 204 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 33.
In step 700, the main CPU 101 loads the execution phase data. This execution phase data indicates which of the multiple functional modules (subroutines) that constitute the special symbol-related control processing will be executed. Specifically, this execution phase data includes data "00" indicating the execution of the special symbol variation start processing described later, data "01" indicating the execution of the special symbol variation stop processing described later, data "02" indicating the execution of the post-stop processing described later, data "03" indicating the execution of the special game control processing described later, and data "04" indicating the execution of the special game end processing described later.
Then, based on the value of the execution phase data loaded in step 700 described above, the main CPU 101 executes one of the following: special symbol variation start processing (step 701), special symbol variation stop processing (step 702), post-stop processing (step 703), special game control processing (step 704), or special game end processing (step 705). Then, it terminates the special symbol-related control processing.

Next, the special symbol variation initiation process described in step 701 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 34.
In step 800, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "00", which indicates the execution of the special symbol variation start process. If it determines that the execution phase data is "00", it proceeds to the next step 801. On the other hand, if it determines that the execution phase data is not "00", it terminates the special symbol variation start process.
In step 801, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a second special random number is stored in the storage unit of the second reserved memory area, that is, whether or not the second reserved counter is "1" or greater. If it determines that a second special random number is stored, it proceeds to step 804. On the other hand, if it determines that a second special random number is not stored, it proceeds to the next step 802.

In step 802, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first special random number is stored in the storage unit of the first reserved memory area, that is, whether the first reserved counter is "1" or greater. If it determines that the first special random number is not stored, it proceeds to step 812. On the other hand, if it determines that the first special random number is stored, it proceeds to the next step 803.
In step 803, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the first reserved counter by "1" and performs a shift operation in the first reserved memory area. Specifically, it stores each random number stored in the first memory section of the first reserved memory area in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and shifts each random number stored in the second to fourth memory sections of the first reserved memory area to a memory section with a smaller number. As a result, each random number stored in the first reserved memory area is used in the success/failure determination process described later, in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process proceeds to step 805.

Furthermore, in step 804, which is followed if it is determined in step 801 that a second special random number is stored, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the second reserved number counter by "1" and performs a shift process in the second reserved storage area. Specifically, it stores each random number stored in the first storage unit of the second reserved storage area in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and shifts each random number stored in the second to fourth storage units of the second reserved storage area to a storage unit with a smaller number. As a result, each random number stored in the second reserved storage area is used in the success/failure determination process described later in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process proceeds to step 805.
In step 805, the main CPU 101 increments the count value of the spin count counter, which is used to count the number of times the win/loss lottery is performed (the number of times the special symbols change), by "1". The main CPU 101 also stores the spin count command, which includes the count value of the spin count counter, in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the spin count command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 is able to grasp the current count value of the spin count counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 806.

In step 806, the main CPU 101 executes a win/fail determination process to derive the result of the win/fail lottery. Then, it proceeds to the next step 807.
In step 807, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination process to determine the type of special symbol. Specifically, if the starting entry point into which the game ball entered was the first starting entry point 15 (first special symbol random number), the first starting entry point determination table 111a is obtained, and based on this table, the result of the win/loss lottery determined in step 806 (winning a jackpot, winning a time-saving bonus, or losing), and the special symbol random number stored in a predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804, the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3), the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbols J1, J2), or the type of losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) is determined. Furthermore, if the starting prize entry point into which the game ball entered was the second starting prize entry point 16 (second special symbol random number), the second starting prize entry point determination table 111b is obtained, and based on this table, the result of the win/loss lottery determined in step 806 above (winning a jackpot, winning a time-saving bonus, or losing), and the special symbol random number stored in a predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 above, the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbols X4, X5, X6), the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbols J1, J2), or the type of losing symbol (losing symbol Z2) is determined. Then, the data corresponding to the determined special symbol is stored in a predetermined temporary storage area of the main RAM 103. In addition, in this special symbol determination process, the current game state, that is, the game state at the time the special symbol was determined, is stored in the game state buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 808.
In the special symbol variation start processing of the pachinko machine P according to this form, if both the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are stored, the second special symbol random number is processed in priority over the first special symbol random number. However, this is not limited to this, and the symbols may be processed in the order they are stored in the reserved memory area.

In step 808, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol determination command indicating the type of special symbol determined in step 807 in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, information related to the determined type of special symbol is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 when the variation starts. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 809.
In step 809, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process to determine a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random numbers stored in the processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Then, it proceeds to the next step 810.

In step 810, the main CPU 101 sets the variable display data for starting the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, if the variable display of special symbols is performed based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol display device 30 starts flashing, and if the variable display of special symbols is performed based on the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol display device 31 starts flashing. Here, flashing means that the "-" on each display device flashes at a predetermined interval.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the first special symbol random number is stored in the first reserve memory area, the first special symbol reserve display device 38 is displayed in a manner that allows the first reserve number to be recognized, and when the second special symbol random number is stored in the second reserve memory area, the second special symbol reserve display device 39 is displayed in a manner that allows the second reserve number to be recognized. When the above-mentioned special symbol variation display is performed based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol reserve display device 38 is displayed in a manner that indicates that the first reserve number decreases by one at the same time as the variation display begins, and when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display is performed based on the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol reserve display device 39 is displayed in a manner that indicates that the second reserve number decreases by one at the same time as the variation display begins.
Then, we proceed to the next step, 811.

In step 811, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "01" so that the special symbol variation stop process is executed in the special symbol related control process, and then terminates the special symbol variation start process.
Furthermore, in step 812, which is followed if step 802 determines that the first special symbol random number is not stored in the first reserved memory area, the main CPU 101 performs a customer waiting determination process to display a customer waiting screen on the performance display device 21, based on the fact that no variation display is being performed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 measures the time during which no variation display of the special symbols is being performed, and if a predetermined customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any variation display of the special symbols being performed, it determines that the system is in a customer waiting state and stores a customer waiting command in the performance transmission data storage area to display a customer waiting screen on the performance display device 21. Then, it terminates the special symbol variation start process.

Next, the correct/failure determination process in step 806 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 35.
In step 850, the main CPU 101 loads the setting value stored in the first area of the main RAM 103 and determines whether this setting value is a normal value (i.e., "1"). If it determines that this setting value is not a normal value (i.e., something other than "1"), it proceeds to step 858. On the other hand, if it determines that this setting value is a normal value, it proceeds to the next step 851.
In step 851, the main CPU 101 selects one of the win/loss random number determination tables 110 that corresponds to the current game state (low probability game state, high probability game state) (low probability determination table 110a, high probability determination table 110b), and executes a jackpot win/loss determination process that determines whether or not a jackpot has been won (i.e., determines whether or not a jackpot has been won) based on the selected table and the win/loss random number stored in the predetermined processing area of step 803 or step 804. Specifically, the main CPU 101 obtains information on the numerical range in which a jackpot is won from the table and determines whether or not the win/loss random number falls within this obtained numerical range. If the win/loss random number falls within the numerical range, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and if the win/loss random number does not fall within the numerical range, it is determined that a jackpot has not been won. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 852.

In step 852, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the jackpot determination process performed in step 851 was a jackpot win (i.e., whether a jackpot was won). If it determines that a jackpot was not won (no jackpot), it proceeds to step 854. On the other hand, if it determines that a jackpot was won, it proceeds to the next step 853.
In step 853, the main unit 101 stores in a predetermined memory area of the main RAM 103 that a jackpot has been won. Then, the win/loss determination process ends.

Furthermore, in step 854, which is followed if it is determined in step 852 that the jackpot has not been won, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving bonus determination process to determine whether or not a time-saving bonus has been awarded, based on the table selected in step 851 and the random number of wins or losses stored in the predetermined processing area of step 803 or step 804 (i.e., the same random number of wins or losses that was the subject of determination in step 851). Specifically, the main CPU 101 obtains information on the range of numerical values that result in a time-saving bonus from the table and determines whether or not the random number of wins or losses falls within this obtained range. If the random number of wins or losses falls within this range, it is determined that a time-saving bonus has been awarded, and if the random number of wins or losses does not fall within this range, it is determined that a time-saving bonus has not been awarded. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 855.
In step 855, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the time-saving grant determination process performed in step 854 was a win for the time-saving grant (i.e., whether the time-saving grant was awarded or not). If it determines that the time-saving grant was not awarded (not awarded), the process proceeds to step 857. On the other hand, if it determines that the time-saving grant was awarded, the process proceeds to the next step 856.

In step 856, the main unit 101 stores in a predetermined memory area of the main RAM 103 that the time reduction has been awarded. Then, the win/failure determination process ends.
Furthermore, in step 856, which is the step to which the user proceeds if it is determined in step 855 that they have not won the time-saving bonus, the main CPU 101 stores the fact that they did not win in a predetermined memory area of the main RAM 103. Then, the win/failure determination process ends.

Furthermore, in step 858, which is followed if it is determined in step 850 that the set value is not a normal value, the main CPU 101 sets a game stop state based on the occurrence of a set value abnormality and stores a game machine state flag indicating this in the first area. The main CPU 101 also executes stop-related processing based on the setting of the game stop state. This stop-related processing is the same as the processing performed when a game stop state is set due to a RAM abnormality (the processing performed in step 137 above), so it will not be explained here. Then, the process proceeds to step 859.
In step 859, the main CPU 101 executes an abnormal initialization process. The main CPU 101 also sends a RAM clear command to the launch/dispensing control board 200. Then, the process proceeds to step 200 of the timer interrupt processing.

In this form of pachinko machine P, both the jackpot determination process and the time-saving bonus determination process are executed by a common processing program (the same module) that selects a win/loss random number determination table 110 corresponding to the game state, obtains information on the numerical range to be determined, and determines whether or not the win/loss random number belongs to that numerical range.

Next, the variation pattern determination process in step 809 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 36.
In step 900, the main CPU 101 checks the type of starting entry point into which the game ball entered (first starting entry point 15, second starting entry point 16), the number of reserved balls (first reserved balls, second reserved balls), and the game state (normal game state, low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2, high probability time-saving game state). Then, it proceeds to the next step 901.
In step 901, the main CPU 101 obtains the variable pattern table 114 corresponding to the game state confirmed in step 900 above. Then, it proceeds to the next step 902.

In step 902, the main CPU 101 determines a variable pattern command based on the variable pattern table 114 obtained in step 901, the type of special symbol determined in step 807, the number of reserved symbols confirmed in step 900, and the variable pattern random number stored in the processing area in step 803 or 804. The determined variable pattern command is then stored in a predetermined processing area. The process then proceeds to the next step 903.
In step 903, the main CPU 101 stores the variable pattern command determined in step 902 in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, it proceeds to the next step 904.

In step 904, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time associated with the variation pattern command based on the variation pattern table 114. It then sets the determined variation time in the variation time timer counter. Finally, the variation pattern determination process ends.

Next, the special symbol variation stop process described in step 702 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 37.
In step 1000, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "01", which indicates the execution of the special symbol variation stop process. If it determines that the execution phase data is not "01", it terminates the special symbol variation stop process. On the other hand, if it determines that the execution phase data is "01", it proceeds to the next step 1001.

In step 1001, the main CPU 101 determines whether the variation time set in the variation time timer counter in step 904 has elapsed. If it determines that the variation time has not elapsed, it terminates the special symbol variation stop process. On the other hand, if it determines that the variation time has elapsed, it proceeds to the next step 1002.
In step 1002, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for displaying the special symbol determined in step 807 on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, and executes the stop display of the special symbol. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1003.

In step 1003, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol confirmation command in the performance transmission data storage area, indicating that a special symbol has been determined. Then, the program proceeds to the next step 1004.
In step 1004, the main CPU 101 refers to the stop display time table 115 to determine the current game state and the stop display time corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in step 807 above, and sets this determined stop display time in the stop display time timer counter. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, when the current game state is the normal game state, a stop display time of 0.5 seconds is set when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, and when a jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 or X6 is determined, and a stop display time of 20 seconds is set when a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined (see Figure 13). Furthermore, if the current game state is anything other than the normal game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2, high probability time-saving game state), a 0.5-second stop display time is set when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, when a winning symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 or X6 is determined, and when a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined (see Figure 13). Then, the game proceeds to the next step 1005.

In step 1005, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "02" so that post-stop processing is executed in the special symbol-related control processing. Then, it terminates the special symbol variation stop processing.

Next, the post-stop processing described in step 703 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 38.
In step 1100, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "02", which indicates the execution of post-stop processing. If it determines that the execution phase data is not "02", it terminates the post-stop processing. On the other hand, if it determines that the execution phase data is "02", it proceeds to the next step 1101.
In step 1101, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop display time set in the stop display time timer counter in step 1004 has elapsed. If it determines that the stop display time has not elapsed, it terminates the post-stop processing. On the other hand, if it determines that the stop display time has elapsed, it proceeds to the next step 1102.

In step 1102, the main CPU 101 stores a stop display termination command in the performance transmission data storage area, indicating that the stop display time has elapsed. This transmits the fact that the stop display time has elapsed to the sub-control board 300. The main CPU 101 also stores the current game state in the game state buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1103.
In step 1103, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving game count update process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether either the first time-saving game flag, which indicates that the current game state is time-saving game state JT1, or the second time-saving game flag, which indicates that the current game state is time-saving game state JT2, is turned on. If it determines that either the first time-saving game flag or the second time-saving game flag is turned on, it updates the time-saving game count storage area in the main RAM 103. This time-saving game count storage area stores the remaining number of spins until the currently set time-saving game state ends. The main CPU 101 then decrements this stored remaining number of spins by "1". If it determines that neither the first time-saving game flag nor the second time-saving game flag is turned on, the main CPU 101 does nothing. Then it proceeds to the next step 1104.

In step 1104, the main CPU 101 performs a high probability count update process. Here, the main CPU 101 determines whether the high probability game flag, which indicates the current game state is a high probability game state, is turned on. If it determines that the high probability game flag is on, it updates the high probability count memory area in the main RAM 103. This high probability count memory area stores the remaining number of spins until the high probability game state ends. The main CPU 101 then decrements this stored remaining spin count by "1". If it determines that the high probability game flag is not on, the main CPU 101 performs no processing. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1105.

In step 1105, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol displayed is a jackpot symbol. If it determines that the special symbol displayed is not a jackpot symbol (i.e., it is a time-saving symbol or a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1111. On the other hand, if it determines that the special symbol displayed is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1106.
In step 1106, the main CPU 101 sets a jackpot win command to transmit the game state at the time of the jackpot win and the type of jackpot symbol displayed (jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6) to the sub-control board 300. Then, the program proceeds to the next step 1107.

In step 1107, the main CPU 101 resets the current game state. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1108.
In step 1108, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores an opening command indicating that the opening process is to begin in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1109.

In step 1109, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of jackpot symbol displayed. Specifically, if the displayed jackpot symbol is X1, X2, X4, or X5, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds to "3", and if the displayed jackpot symbol is X3 or X6, it sets the number of rounds to "10". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1110.
In step 1110, the main CPU 101 sets "03" in the execution phase data so that the special game control processing is executed in the special feature-related control processing. Then, it terminates the post-stop processing.

Furthermore, in step 1111, which is followed if it is determined in step 1105 above that the special symbol displayed is not a winning symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether the displayed special symbol is a time-saving symbol or not. If it is determined that the displayed special symbol is not a time-saving symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1115. On the other hand, if it is determined that the displayed special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1112.
In step 1112, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state (i.e., the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery, or the game state at the start of the special symbol variation) is a normal game state. If it determines that it is not a normal game state (i.e., it is a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, or a high-probability time-saving game state), it proceeds to step 1114. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a normal game state, it proceeds to the next step 1113.

In step 1113, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving game state setting process that sets the game state according to the time-saving symbol that is stopped. Specifically, if the time-saving symbol that is stopped is J1, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time-saving game flag and sets the number of time-saving rounds to "10000". This sets the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 with 10000 time-saving rounds (the normal game state is changed to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving rounds are 10000)). If the time-saving symbol that is stopped is J2, the main CPU 101 turns on the second time-saving game flag and sets the number of time-saving rounds to "10000". This sets the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10000 time-saving rounds (the normal game state is changed to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving rounds are 10000)). Then, proceed to step 1115.
Furthermore, in step 1114, which is proceeded to if it is determined in step 1112 above that the game is not in a normal game state, the main CPU 101 executes a normal game state setting process to set the game state based on the remaining number of spins until the currently set time-saving game state ends and the remaining number of spins until the high-probability game state ends. Specifically, if the remaining number of spins stored in the time-saving spin count memory area updated in step 1103 above becomes "0", the first time-saving game flag or the second time-saving game flag, which was on, is turned off. Also, if the remaining number of spins stored in the high-probability spin count memory area updated in step 1104 above becomes "0", the high-probability game flag, which was on, is turned off. As a result, the game state is set (the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, or high-probability time-saving game state that was set is changed to the normal game state). If the remaining number of fluctuations stored in the time-saving count memory area after the update is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 does nothing. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1115.

In step 1115, the main CPU 101 checks the game state set after the execution of the process in step 1113 or step 1114 described above, and stores the game state command indicating the game state in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1116.
In step 1116, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "00" so that the special symbol variation start process is executed in the special symbol-related control process. Then, it terminates the post-stop processing.

Next, the special game control process described in step 704 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 39.
In step 1200, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "03", which indicates the execution of the special game control process. If it determines that the execution phase data is not "03", it terminates the special game control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the execution phase data is "03", it proceeds to the next step 1201.
In step 1201, the main CPU 101 determines whether the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in step 1108 has elapsed. If it determines that the opening time has not elapsed, it terminates the special game control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the opening time has elapsed, it proceeds to the next step 1202.

In step 1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game is in the ending process, which is a waiting process that takes place after all rounds of the game have finished in this special game control process. If it determines that the game is in the ending process, it proceeds to step 1210. On the other hand, if it determines that the game is not in the ending process, it proceeds to the next step 1203.
In step 1203, the main CPU 101 executes a big prize opening/closing control process to set control data for opening and closing the big prize opening 18 and operating the distribution member 59, based on a special electric mechanism operation table 112 corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol displayed. As a result, control is performed for opening and closing the big prize opening 18 and operating the distribution member 59 in each round of gameplay based on the set control data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1204.

In step 1204, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the time when each round of game has started. If it determines that it is not the time when each round of game has started, it proceeds to step 1206. On the other hand, if it determines that it is the time when each round of game has started, it proceeds to the next step 1205.
In this pachinko machine P, at the start of each round of play, the opening time (29.0 seconds) for the opening of the large prize slot 18 in each round of play is set in the large prize slot opening timer counter based on a special electric mechanism operation table 112 corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol displayed. The main CPU 101 can determine whether or not it is the start of each round of play by checking the value of this large prize slot opening timer counter.

In step 1205, the main CPU 101 stores a round game start command, indicating the start of a round game, in the performance transmission data storage area. The main CPU 101 also turns on a large prize gate flag, indicating that the large prize gate 18 is open. This large prize gate flag is turned off at the start of the special game. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1206.
Furthermore, a round game start command is provided for each round of gameplay, which allows the sub-control board 300 to be informed of which round of gameplay has started.

In step 1206, the main CPU 101 determines whether the round game has ended or not. If it determines that the round game has not ended, it terminates the special game control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the round game has ended, it proceeds to the next step 1207.
The main CPU 101 can determine whether a round of play has ended by checking whether the opening time set in the large prize opening opening timer counter has elapsed or whether 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 18.

In step 1207, the main CPU 101 decrements the number of rounds stored in the main RAM 103 by "1". The main CPU 101 also turns off the big prize flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1208.

In step 1208, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of rounds decremented in step 1207 is "0". If it determines that the number of rounds is not "0", it terminates the special game control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the number of rounds is "0", it proceeds to the next step 1209.
In step 1209, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the special game, in the ending time timer counter, and stores an ending command indicating that the ending process has started in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, it terminates the special game control process.

Furthermore, in step 1210, which is followed if it is determined in step 1202 that the ending process is underway, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1209 has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1211.
In step 1211, the main CPU 101 stores a special game termination command in the performance transmission data storage area, indicating that the special game has ended. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1212.

In step 1212, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "04" so that the special game termination process is executed in the special feature-related control processing. Then, it terminates the special game control processing.

Next, the special game termination process described in step 705 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 40.
In step 1300, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "04", which indicates the execution of the special game termination process. If it determines that the execution phase data is not "04", it terminates the special game termination process. On the other hand, if it determines that the execution phase data is "04", it proceeds to the next step 1301.
In step 1301, the main CPU 101 determines whether the entry flag is on or off. If it determines that the entry flag is not on (i.e., off), the process proceeds to step 1303. On the other hand, if it determines that the entry flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 1302.

In step 1302, the main CPU 101 executes a high-probability game state setting process to set the game state to a high-probability game state. Specifically, it turns on the high-probability game flag and sets the number of high-probability rounds to "10000". Then, it proceeds to step 1304.
Furthermore, in step 1303, which is followed if it is determined in step 1301 that the entry flag is not on, the main CPU 101 executes a low-probability game state setting process to set the game state to a low-probability game state. Specifically, it turns off the high-probability game flag. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1304.

In step 1304, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving game state JT2 setting process to set the game state to time-saving game state JT2. Specifically, it turns on the second time-saving game flag and sets the number of time-saving rounds to "100". Then, it proceeds to step 1305.
In step 1305, the main CPU 101 turns off the entry flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1306.

In step 1306, the main CPU 101 sets a game state specification command in the performance transmission data storage area according to the game state set as described above. This game state specification command includes information on whether the high probability game flag is on or off, information on whether the second time-saving game flag is on or off, the number of high probability rounds, and the number of time-saving rounds, as set as described above. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1307.
In step 1307, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "00" so that the variation start process is executed in the special feature-related control processing. Then, it terminates the special game end process.

Next, the control processing related to the diagram in step 205 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 41.
In step 1400, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the normal pattern execution phase data. This normal pattern execution phase data indicates which of the multiple functional modules (subroutines) that constitute the normal pattern-related control processing will be executed. Specifically, this normal pattern execution phase data includes data "10" indicating the execution of the normal pattern variation start processing described later, data "11" indicating the execution of the normal pattern variation stop processing described later, data "12" indicating the execution of the normal pattern stop post-processing described later, and data "13" indicating the execution of the movable piece control processing described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 executes one of the following based on the value of the normal pattern execution phase data loaded in step 1400 above: normal pattern variation start processing (step 1401), normal pattern variation stop processing (step 1402), normal pattern stop post-processing (step 1403), or movable piece control processing (step 1404). Then, it terminates the normal pattern-related control processing.

Next, the normal symbol variation start process described in step 1401 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 42.
In step 1500, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is "10", which indicates the execution of the normal symbol variation start process. If it determines that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "10", it terminates the normal symbol variation start process. On the other hand, if it determines that the normal symbol execution phase data is "10", it proceeds to the next step 1501.
In step 1501, the main CPU 101 determines whether a random number has been determined and stored in the normal symbol hold memory area, that is, whether the normal symbol hold counter is "1" or greater. If it determines that the normal symbol hold counter is not "1" or greater (i.e., "0"), it terminates the normal symbol variation start process. On the other hand, if it determines that the normal symbol hold counter is "1" or greater, it proceeds to the next step 1502.

In step 1502, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the regular hold counter by "1". Then, it proceeds to the next step 1503.
In step 1503, the main CPU 101 performs a shift operation in the general symbol hold memory area. Specifically, it stores the winning random number stored in the first memory unit in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and shifts the winning random numbers stored in the second to fourth memory units to the memory unit with the smaller number. As a result, the winning random numbers stored in the general symbol hold memory area are used in the winning determination process described later in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) order. Then, the process proceeds to step 1504.

In step 1504, the main CPU 101 performs the normal symbol lottery process. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1505.
In step 1505, the main CPU 101 checks whether the current game state is a non-time-saving game state, a time-saving game state JT1, or a time-saving game state JT2, and refers to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117 to set the normal symbol variation time timer counter according to the current game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol variation time timer counter to "10 seconds" if the game is in a non-time-saving game state, sets the normal symbol variation time timer counter to "9.5 seconds" if the game is in a time-saving game state JT1, and sets the normal symbol variation time timer counter to "1 second" if the game is in a time-saving game state JT2. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1506.

In step 1506, the main CPU 101 sets the variation display data to start the variation display of the normal symbols. As a result, when the variation display of the normal symbols is to be performed, the normal symbol display device 32 starts flashing. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the winning determination random number is stored in the normal symbol reserve storage area, the normal symbol reserve display device 33 is displayed in a manner that allows the number of normal symbols to be recognized. When the variation display of the normal symbols is to be performed, the normal symbol reserve display device 33 is displayed in a manner that indicates that the number of normal symbols to be reserved decreases by one at the same time as the start of the variation display. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1507.
In step 1507, the main CPU 101 stores the current game state in the game machine state buffer as the game state at the start of the variation. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1508.

In step 1508, the main CPU 101 sets "11" to the normal symbol execution phase data so that the normal symbol variation stop process is executed in the normal symbol related control processing. Then, it terminates the normal symbol variation start process.

Next, the normal symbol lottery process described in step 1504 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 43.
In step 1550, the main CPU 101 loads the setting value stored in the first area of the main RAM 103 and determines whether this setting value is a normal value (i.e., "1"). If it determines that this setting value is a normal value, it proceeds to step 1553. On the other hand, if it determines that this setting value is not a normal value (i.e., anything other than "1"), it proceeds to the next step 1551.
In step 1551, the main CPU 101 sets a game stop state based on the occurrence of a setting value abnormality and stores a game machine state flag indicating this in the first area. The main CPU 101 also executes stop-related processing based on the setting of the game stop state. This stop-related processing is the same as the processing performed when a game stop state is set due to a RAM abnormality (the processing performed in step 137 above), so it will not be explained here. Then, the process proceeds to step 1552.

In step 1552, the main CPU 101 executes an abnormal initialization process. The main CPU 101 also sends a RAM clear command to the launch/dispensing control board 200. Then, the process proceeds to step 200 of the timer interrupt processing.
Furthermore, in step 1553, which is followed if the setting value is determined to be a normal value in step 1550 described above, the main CPU 101 selects a winning random number determination table 116 (either the first determination table 116a, the second determination table 116b, or the third determination table 116c) corresponding to the current game state (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1, time-saving game state JT2), and executes a winning determination process to derive the result of the drawing of normal symbols based on the selected table and the winning random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 1503 described above. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the first determination table 116a if it is in the non-time-saving game state, the second determination table 116b if it is in the time-saving game state JT1, and the third determination table 116c if it is in the time-saving game state JT2, and determines the winning random number stored in the processing area. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1554.

In step 1554, the main CPU 101 stores the data of the regular symbols based on the result of the winning determination process in step 1553 in a predetermined regular symbol storage area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, if the result of the winning determination process is a win, the winning symbol data is stored in the predetermined regular symbol storage area; if the result of the winning determination process is a loss, the losing symbol data is stored in the predetermined regular symbol storage area. Then, the regular symbol lottery process ends.

Next, the normal symbol variation stop process described in step 1402 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 44.
In step 1600, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is data "11" indicating the execution of the normal symbol variation stop process. If it determines that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "11", it terminates the normal symbol variation stop process. On the other hand, if it determines that the normal symbol execution phase data is "11", it proceeds to the next step 1601.
In step 1601, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol variation time set in the normal symbol variation time timer counter in step 1505 has elapsed. If it determines that the variation time has not elapsed, it terminates the normal symbol variation stop process. On the other hand, if it determines that the variation time has elapsed, it proceeds to the next step 1602.

In step 1602, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data (winning symbol data or losing symbol data stored in the symbol memory area in step 1554 above) for stopping and displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 32, and executes the stop display of the normal symbols. Then, the program proceeds to the next step 1603.
In step 1603, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol stop display time in the normal symbol stop display time timer counter. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1604.

In step 1604, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "12" so that the normal symbol stop processing is executed in the normal symbol-related control processing. Then, it terminates the normal symbol variation stop processing.

Next, the post-stop processing of the normal symbols in step 1403 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 45.
In step 1700, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is data "12" indicating the execution of post-processing after the normal symbol stops. If it determines that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "12", it terminates the post-processing after the normal symbol stops. On the other hand, if it determines that the normal symbol execution phase data is "12", it proceeds to the next step 1701.
In step 1701, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol stop display time set in the normal symbol stop display time timer counter in step 1603 has elapsed. If it determines that the normal symbol stop display time has not elapsed, it terminates the normal symbol stop post-processing. On the other hand, if it determines that the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed, it proceeds to the next step 1702.

In step 1702, the main CPU 101 determines whether the displayed ordinary symbol is a winning symbol. If it determines that the displayed ordinary symbol is not a winning symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1704. On the other hand, if it determines that the displayed ordinary symbol is a winning symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1703.
In step 1703, the main CPU 101 sets "13" to the normal drawing execution phase data so that the movable piece control processing is executed in the normal drawing-related control processing. Then, it terminates the normal drawing stop post-processing.

Furthermore, in step 1704, which proceeds if the system determines in step 1702 that the displayed regular symbol is not a winning symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the main CPU 101 sets the regular symbol execution phase data to "10" so that the regular symbol variation start process is executed in the regular symbol-related control processing. Then, the regular symbol stop processing is terminated.

Next, the movable piece control process of step 1404 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 46.
In step 1800, the main CPU 101 determines whether the general execution phase data is data "13" indicating the execution of the movable piece control process. If it determines that the general execution phase data is not "13", it terminates the movable piece control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the general execution phase data is "13", it proceeds to the next step 1801.
In step 1801, the main CPU 101 determines whether the movable piece 16b is under operation control, that is, whether the movable piece solenoid 16c is energized. If it determines that the movable piece 16b is under operation control, the process proceeds to step 1804. On the other hand, if it determines that the movable piece 16b is not under operation control, the process proceeds to the next step 1802.

In step 1802, the main CPU 101 checks whether the game state at the start of the normal symbol variation was in a non-time-saving game state, a time-saving game state JT1, or a time-saving game state JT2. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1803.
In step 1803, the main CPU 101 refers to the movable piece operation control table 118 and sets the number of operations (number of energizations) and operation time (energy supply time) as operation control data (energy supply control data) for the movable piece solenoid 16c, according to the game state confirmed in step 1802 above. As a result, the movable piece 16b is in the protruding state. The main CPU 101 also turns on the movable piece flag to indicate that the movable piece 16b is in the protruding state. Then, the movable piece control process is terminated.

Furthermore, in step 1804, which is followed if step 1801 determines that the movable piece 16b is under operation control, the main CPU 101 determines whether the operating time (power-on time) set in step 1803 has elapsed. If it determines that the operating time (power-on time) has not elapsed, the movable piece control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that the operating time (power-on time) has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1805.
In step 1805, the main CPU 101 stops the operation of the movable piece 16b, that is, it stops the power supply to the movable piece solenoid 16c. This causes the movable piece 16b to become immersed. It also turns off the movable piece flag. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1806.

In step 1806, the main CPU 101 sets the normal pattern execution phase data to "10" so that the normal pattern variation start process is executed in the normal pattern-related control processing. Then, it terminates the movable piece control processing.

Next, the solenoid control process of step 210 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 47.
In step 1850, the main CPU 101 sets immersion data for immersing the movable piece 16b (not energizing the movable piece solenoid 16c) as movable piece solenoid data in a predetermined solenoid data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1851.
In step 1851, the main CPU 101 sets closing data for closing the large prize opening 18 (closing the opening/closing door 18b and not energizing the large prize opening solenoid 18c) as large prize opening solenoid data in a predetermined solenoid data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1852.

In step 1852, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current control state is a playable state and whether the state related to the ball difference operation stop control is other than the activated state (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notification state). If it determines that the state is not playable (i.e., play stopped state, setting change state, or setting confirmation state) or that the state is playable but not other than the activated state (i.e., activated state), the solenoid control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that the state is playable and other than the activated state, the process proceeds to the next step 1853.
In step 1853, the main CPU 101 determines whether the movable piece flag is on or off. If it determines that the movable piece flag is not on (i.e., off), it terminates the solenoid control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the movable piece flag is on, it proceeds to the next step 1854.

In step 1854, the main CPU 101 sets the protrusion data for protruding the movable piece 16b (to energize the movable piece solenoid 16c) as movable piece solenoid data in a predetermined solenoid data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1855.
In step 1855, the main CPU 101 determines whether the big prize gate flag is on or off. If it determines that the big prize gate flag is not on (i.e., off), it terminates the solenoid control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the big prize gate flag is on, it proceeds to the next step 1856.

In step 1856, the main CPU 101 sets opening data for opening the large prize slot 18 (opening the opening/closing door 18b and energizing the large prize slot solenoid 18c) as large prize slot solenoid data in a predetermined solenoid data storage area. Then, it terminates the solenoid control process.
As a result of the above processing, when immersion data is set, the movable piece 16b immerses, and when closure data is set, the opening/closing door 18b closes and the large prize opening 18 closes. On the other hand, when protrusion data is set, the movable piece 16b protrudes, and when opening data is set, the opening/closing door 18b opens and the large prize opening 18 opens. Furthermore, when the machine is not in a playable state, and when it is in a playable state but in an activated state, both immersion data and closure data are set. Therefore, in the play stopped state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and activated state, the movable piece 16 is always immersed and the large prize opening 18 is always closed.
This solenoid control process is performed in a timer interrupt process that is executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). In other words, the process of restricting the operation of the movable piece 16b and the opening/closing door 18b is performed at predetermined timings in the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and activation state.

Next, the command set processing related to the difference ball in step 214 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 48.
In step 1870, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current control state is a playable state. If it determines that the state is not playable, it terminates the ball difference related command set processing. On the other hand, if it determines that the state is playable, it proceeds to the next step 1871.
In step 1871, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ball difference operation stop control phase data has been changed. If it determines that the ball difference operation stop control phase data has not been changed, it terminates the ball difference-related command set processing. On the other hand, if it determines that the ball difference operation stop control phase data has been changed, it proceeds to the next step 1872.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment has a management buffer composed of a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When the ball difference operation stop control phase data is cleared and a state value corresponding to the pre-warning state is stored in this ball difference operation stop control phase data, the state value corresponding to the pre-warning state is also stored in the management buffer. Subsequently, when the state related to the ball difference operation stop control is changed, first, only the ball difference operation stop control phase data stores a state value corresponding to the changed state. Then, in this step 1871, it is determined whether the state value stored in the ball difference operation stop control phase data matches the state value stored in the management buffer. If they match, it is determined that the ball difference operation stop control phase data has not been changed. On the other hand, if they do not match, it is determined that the ball difference operation stop control phase data has been changed, and the state value stored in the ball difference operation stop control phase data is also stored in the management buffer.

In step 1872, the main CPU 101 stores one of the following commands in the performance transmission data storage area: the first ball stop operation control specification command, the second ball stop operation control specification command, or the third ball stop operation control specification command, depending on the state value stored in the ball stop operation control phase data.
Specifically, if a state value corresponding to the activation warning state is stored in the ball difference operation stop control phase data (i.e., if the activation warning state is set), the first ball difference operation stop control specification command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first ball difference operation stop control specification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 is also able to understand that the activation warning state has been set.
If a state value corresponding to the activation notification state is stored in the ball difference operation stop control phase data (i.e., if the activation notification state is set), the second ball difference operation stop control specification command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the second ball difference operation stop control specification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 is also able to understand that the activation notification state has been set.
If a state value corresponding to the activation state is stored in the ball difference operation stop control phase data (i.e., the activation state is set), the third ball difference operation stop control specification command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the third ball difference operation stop control specification command is sent to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 can also be aware that the activation state has been set. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sends an activation state setting command to the launch/dispensing control board 200 indicating that the activation state has been set. As a result, the launch/dispensing control board 200 can also be aware that the activation state has been set.
Then, the command set processing related to the difference in ball count is terminated.

Next, the ball difference determination control process of step 215 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 49.
In step 1880, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current control state is a playable state. If it determines that the state is not playable, it terminates the ball difference determination control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the state is playable, it proceeds to the next step 1881.
In step 1881, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first reference value arrival flag (a flag provided on the main control board 100) which indicates that the difference ball count value has reached the first reference value is off. If it determines that the first reference value arrival flag is not off (i.e., on), the process proceeds to step 1884. On the other hand, if it determines that the first reference value arrival flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 1882.
Furthermore, the flag indicating that the first reference value has been reached is set to be turned off when the ball difference count value is reset.

In step 1882, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ball count value has reached the first reference value. If it determines that the ball count value has not reached the first reference value, it proceeds to step 1884. On the other hand, if it determines that the ball count value has reached the first reference value, it proceeds to the next step 1883.
In step 1883, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation warning state in the ball difference operation stop control phase data. This sets the activation warning state. The main CPU 101 also turns on the first reference value reached flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1884.

In step 1884, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second reference value arrival flag (a flag provided on the main control board 100), which indicates that the difference ball count value has reached the second reference value, is off. If the main CPU 101 determines that the second reference value arrival flag is not off (i.e., on), the process proceeds to step 1889. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the second reference value arrival flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 1885.
Furthermore, the flag indicating that the second reference value has been reached is set to be turned off when the ball difference count value is reset.
In step 1885, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ball count value has reached the second reference value. If it determines that the second reference value has not been reached, it proceeds to step 1889. On the other hand, if it determines that the second reference value has been reached, it proceeds to the next step 1886.

In step 1886, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a special game is in progress. If it determines that a special game is not in progress, it proceeds to step 1888. On the other hand, if it determines that a special game is in progress, it proceeds to the next step 1887.
In step 1887, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation notification state in the ball difference operation stop control phase data. This sets the activation notification state. The main CPU 101 also turns on the second reference value arrival flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 1889.

Furthermore, in step 1888, which is followed if it is determined in step 1886 that the special game is not in progress, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation state in the ball difference operation stop control phase data. This sets the activation state. The main CPU 101 also turns on the second reference value reach flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1889.
In step 1889, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a state value corresponding to the activation notification state is stored in the ball difference operation stop control phase data (i.e., whether or not the activation notification state is in progress). If it determines that a state value corresponding to the activation notification state is not stored, it terminates the ball difference determination control process. On the other hand, if it determines that a state value corresponding to the activation notification state is stored, it proceeds to step 1890.

In step 1890, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special game has ended or not. If it determines that the special game has not ended, it terminates the ball difference determination control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the special game has ended, it proceeds to the next step 1891.
In step 1891, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation state in the ball difference operation stop control phase data. This sets the activation state. Then, the ball difference determination control process ends.

Next, the setting-related processing described in step 219 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 50.
In step 1900, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current control state is a setting change state. If it determines that it is not a setting change state, it proceeds to step 1908. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a setting change state, it proceeds to the next step 1901.
In step 1901, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting switch 108 is off or not. If it determines that the setting switch 108 is off, it proceeds to step 1905. On the other hand, if it determines that the setting switch 108 is not off (i.e., on), it proceeds to the next step 1902.

In step 1902, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 109 is on or off. If it determines that the RAM clear switch 109 is not on (i.e., off), it terminates the setting-related processing. On the other hand, if it determines that the RAM clear switch 109 is on, it proceeds to the next step 1903.
In step 1903, the main CPU 101 determines whether the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on or not (i.e., whether the main frame 2 is open or not). Specifically, if it has received a main frame open command transmitted from the launch/dispensing control board 200, the main CPU 101 determines that the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on. If it determines that the main frame open detection sensor 2a is not on (i.e., off), it terminates the setting-related processing. On the other hand, if it determines that the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, it proceeds to the next step 1904.

In step 1904, the main CPU 101 changes the setting value stored in the main RAM 103. Specifically, if there are multiple setting levels, the currently stored setting value is changed to a setting value that is incremented by 1. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, no processing is performed at this point. The setting change process then ends.
Furthermore, in step 1905, which is followed if it is determined in step 1901 that the setting switch 108 is off, the main CPU 101 stores a setting change state termination command in the performance transmission data storage area, indicating that the setting change state has ended and the playable state has been set. The command stored here is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 in step 114 above. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1906.

In step 1906, the main CPU 101 stores various commands to be sent to the sub-control board 300 (for example, commands indicating the stored setting values at the end of the setting change state or setting confirmation state) in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1907.
In step 1907, the main CPU 101 sets the game-ready state and stores a game machine state flag indicating this in the first memory area. Then, it terminates the setting-related processing.

Furthermore, in step 1908, which is followed if the control state during the stay is determined in step 1900 to be not a setting change state, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting switch 108 is off or not. If it determines that the setting switch 108 is not off, the setting change process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that the setting switch 108 is off, the process proceeds to the next step 1909.
In step 1909, the main CPU 101 stores a setting confirmation state termination command in the performance transmission data storage area, indicating that the setting confirmation state has ended and the game-ready state has been set. Then, the process proceeds to step 1906.

(Gameplay of the pachinko machine P in this form)
In the pachinko machine P according to this form, as described above, the game proceeds with one of the following states set: normal game state (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state), low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT1), low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2), or high probability time-saving game state (a game state that combines a high probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2).

As mentioned above, in the initial state after a RAM clear (initialization process in case of abnormality, initialization process in normal state), the normal game state is set.
During normal gameplay, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and even if a game ball is launched towards the second game area 12b, the game ball will not enter the second starting prize entry point 16 (see Figures 7(a), 14(a), 15, and 16).
Furthermore, during normal gameplay, as described above, the player is instructed to play in the first game area 12a, and as long as the game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a, the game ball has the potential to enter the first starting prize entry point 15. If a game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15 during normal gameplay, the player can win a jackpot or a time-saving bonus in the draw based on that entry. If a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined, and if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined (see Figures 7(a) and 8(a)).

If a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls will not enter the specific area 57 during the special game based on that determination. Therefore, the game state after the special game ends is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and the number of time-saving rounds is set to 100 (see Figure 10(a)). If a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls can enter the specific area 57 during the special game based on that determination. If a predetermined number of game balls enter, the game state after the special game ends is set to the high-probability time-saving game state, and both the number of high-probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds are set to 10,000 (see Figure 10(b)).
Furthermore, if a time-saving bonus is awarded during normal gameplay and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the game state after the display of the time-saving symbol J1 has finished moving and the stop display time has elapsed will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and the number of time-saving rounds will be set to 10,000 (see Figure 10(c)). If a time-saving bonus is awarded during normal gameplay and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the game state after the display of the time-saving symbol J2 has finished moving and the stop display time has elapsed will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and the number of time-saving rounds will be set to 10,000 (see Figure 10(d)).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a during normal gameplay, the player will transition to a low-probability time-saving state LJT1 (10,000 time-saving rounds), a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (10,000 time-saving rounds), a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (100 time-saving rounds), or a high-probability time-saving game state (10,000 high-probability rounds and 10,000 time-saving rounds) based on the win of a jackpot or the granting of time-saving rounds (see Figure 51).

Here, during normal gameplay (low probability gameplay), the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is approximately 1/20, making it easier to win a time-saving bonus. Furthermore, the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is significantly higher than the probability of winning a jackpot during normal gameplay (approximately 1/300), making it easier to win a time-saving bonus than a jackpot (see Figure 7(a)). Also, if a time-saving bonus is won, the probability of determining the time-saving symbol J1 is 85%, and the probability of determining the time-saving symbol J2 is 15%, so the time-saving symbol J1 is more likely to be determined than the time-saving symbol J2 (see Figures 8(a) and (b)).
Based on the above, in the pachinko machine P of this form, it is difficult to remain in the normal game state, and rather than transitioning to other game states through the execution of special games based on winning a jackpot or through the determination of the time-saving symbol J2 based on winning a time-saving grant, there is a higher probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving count of 10,000 times) by the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 based on winning a time-saving grant.

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as during normal gameplay, and just like during normal gameplay, even if a game ball is launched towards the second game area 12b, the game ball will not enter the second starting prize entry point 16 (see Figures 7(a), 14(b), 15, and 16).
Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the player is instructed to play in the first game area 12a, just as during the normal game state. As long as the game ball is launched towards the first game area 12a, the game ball has the potential to enter the first starting prize entry point 15. If a game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15 during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the player can win either a jackpot or a time-saving bonus in the draw based on that entry. If a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined, and if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbols J1 or J2 are determined (see Figures 7(a) and 8(a)).

If a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls will not enter the specific area 57 during the special game based on that determination. Therefore, the game state after the special game ends is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and the number of time-saving rounds is set to 100 (see Figure 10(a)). If a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls can enter the specific area 57 during the special game based on that determination. If a predetermined number of game balls enter, the game state after the special game ends is set to the high-probability time-saving game state, and both the number of high-probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds are set to 10,000 (see Figure 10(b)).
On the other hand, as described above, if a time-saving bonus is awarded during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, a new time-saving game state JT1 or JT2 is not set based on that determination, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 continues, so there is no transition to another game state (see Figures 10(c) and (d)).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, the game will transition to either the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (100 time-saving rounds) or the high probability time-saving game state (10,000 high probability rounds and 10,000 time-saving rounds) based on the winning of a jackpot (see Figure 51).

Here, if the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 during normal gameplay, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000. Since the probability of winning a jackpot during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (during the low-probability game state) is approximately 1/300, as mentioned above, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will effectively continue until a jackpot is won. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, as mentioned above, it is difficult to stay in the normal game state, and it is easy to transition from the normal game state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 based on the win of a time-saving bonus. Therefore, there is a higher possibility of staying in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 for a longer period than in the normal game state.
Furthermore, in both the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the player is made to play in the first game area 12a, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same, and the performance of the regular game is also almost the same (even if a game ball is launched into the second game area 12b, it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry point 16). Therefore, it is impossible to recognize whether the player is in the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 based on the manner of game operation (launching game balls into the first game area 12a) and the performance of the regular game.
As mentioned above, in order to change the probability of a game ball entering the second starting prize entry point 16 for each game state, one or more of the elements that determine the performance of the regular symbol game (the probability of winning in the regular symbol lottery, the variation time of the regular symbols, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b) can be set to be different.
Here, in order to make it impossible for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point 16 in both the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, for example, the operating time of the movable piece 16b may be set to be the same as the opening arrival time in both the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 and the normal game state, but at least one of the following settings may be made: the variation time of the normal symbols is shorter in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 than in the normal game state, and the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 than in the normal game state. Even in this case, if the second starting prize entry opening 16 and the movable piece 16b are configured as in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment (see Figure 4), as long as the operating time of the movable piece 16b is shorter than the opening arrival time, even if other factors (the variation time of the normal symbols, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery) are set to be more favorable in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 than in the normal game state, it will not be possible to enter the second starting prize entry opening 16 in any game state, and the performance of the normal symbol game will be the same as in the pachinko machine according to this embodiment.

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as during normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. However, when a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, it is possible to enter the second starting prize entry point 16 with a high frequency (see Figures 7(a), 14(c), 15, and 16). In other words, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, it is possible to frequently win prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize entry point 16, and the decrease in game balls as the game progresses is suppressed more than during normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. Therefore, it is a more advantageous game state than normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, as described above, the player is instructed to play in the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball will enter the second starting prize slot 16 at a high frequency. When a game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16 during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the player can win a jackpot or a time-saving bonus in the draw based on that entry. If a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbols X4, X5, or X6 are determined, and if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbols J1 or J2 are determined (see Figures 7(a) and 8(b)).

If a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls will not enter the specific area 57 during the special game based on that determination. Therefore, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and the number of time-saving rounds is set to 100 (see Figure 10(a)). If a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X5 or X6 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls can enter the specific area 57 during the special game based on that determination. If a predetermined number of game balls enter, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability time-saving game state, and both the number of high-probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds are set to 10,000 (see Figure 10(b)).
On the other hand, as mentioned above, if a time-saving bonus is awarded during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, a new time-saving game state JT1 or JT2 is not set based on that determination, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 that is currently set continues, so there is no transition to another game state (see Figures 10(c) and (d)).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2, the game will transition to either the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (100 time-saving rounds) or the high probability time-saving game state (10,000 high probability rounds and 10,000 time-saving rounds) based on the winning of a jackpot (see Figure 51).

During the high-probability time-saving game state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than during the normal game state, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. Similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, when a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, it is possible to enter the second starting prize entry point 16 with a high frequency (see Figures 7(b), 14(c), 15, and 16). In other words, during the high-probability time-saving game state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than during the normal game state, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. Furthermore, it is possible to frequently acquire prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize entry point 16. As a result, the decrease in game balls as the game progresses is suppressed more than during the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. Therefore, it is a more advantageous game state (the most advantageous game state) than during the normal game state, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2.
Furthermore, during the high-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the player is instructed to play in the second game area 12b, and as long as the game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b, the game balls will enter the second starting prize slot 16 at a high frequency. When a game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16 during the high-probability time-saving game state, the player can win either a jackpot or a time-saving bonus in the draw based on that entry. If a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbols X4, X5, or X6 are determined, and if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined (see Figures 7(b) and 8(b)).

If a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls will not enter the specific area 57 during the special game based on that determination. Therefore, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and the number of time-saving rounds is set to 100 (see Figure 10(a)). If a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X5 or X6 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls can enter the specific area 57 during the special game based on that determination. If a predetermined number of game balls enter, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability time-saving game state, and both the number of high-probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds are set to 10,000 (see Figure 10(b)).
On the other hand, as mentioned above, if a time-saving bonus is awarded during a high-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, a new time-saving game state JT1 or JT2 is not set based on that determination, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 that is currently set continues, so there is no transition to another game state (see Figures 10(c) and (d)).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b during the high-probability time-saving game state, the game will transition to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (100 time-saving rounds) or the high-probability time-saving game state (10,000 high-probability and time-saving rounds) based on the winning of a jackpot (see Figure 51).

In this form of pachinko machine P, during the normal game state, which is set after a RAM clear or after the end of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds, the probability of winning a time-saving bonus (approximately 1/20) is high, and if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 is more likely to be determined than the time-saving symbol J2. Therefore, there is a high possibility of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 before winning a jackpot in the normal game state.
In the normal game state, if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined by winning a time-saving bonus, the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which has 10,000 time-saving rounds. In contrast, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, which is transitioned from the normal game state as described above, even if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined by winning a time-saving bonus, the game does not transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which has 10,000 time-saving rounds. In other words, after transitioning from the normal game state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, unless the normal game state is set again, even if a time-saving bonus is won, the game will not transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which has 10,000 time-saving rounds.
As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this form, in the normal game state set after a RAM clear or after the end of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds, if a jackpot is won or if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined before the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds, which is advantageous to the player as they can reliably win a jackpot while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses. On the other hand, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, which is easy to transition to from the normal game state and tends to last longer than the normal game state, the game does not transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds mentioned above. Therefore, the normal gameplay state can be transformed into a chance zone where there is a possibility of transitioning to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins, which is advantageous for the player, thus adding a novel gameplay element and increasing the player's interest.
Furthermore, since the player is instructed to play in the first game area 12a during both the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay experience in which the player can switch from the normal game state to the different game state, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, without changing the player's game operation.

(Overview of the presentation in Pachinko machine P)
As described above, the special game, regular game, and special feature game proceed as various processes are executed on the main control board 100. During the progress of these games, the main control board 100 sends various commands to the sub-control board 300, and upon receiving these commands, the sub-control board 300 executes control of the effects that accompany the progress of the game.
The following describes the variation effects that are performed in conjunction with the display of special symbols and that can inform (suggest) the result of the winning or losing lottery.

(Summary of the production status)
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, there are multiple types of performance states that are referenced in order to execute the variable performance described later. The sub-CPU 301 sets one of the performance states based on the transition to the above-mentioned game state (normal game state, low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2, high probability time-saving game state), the occurrence of a power outage, the winning of a time-saving bonus, etc. Furthermore, each performance state has a defined execution method for the variable performance that can be selected, and the variable performance can be executed by one of the execution methods corresponding to the currently set performance state.
Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, the following performance states are provided: a normal performance state which is maintained during normal gameplay; low probability time-saving performance states A1 and A2 which are maintained during low probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1; low probability time-saving performance state B which is maintained during low probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds; low probability time-saving performance state C which is maintained during low probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds; and a high probability time-saving performance state which is maintained during high probability time-saving gameplay.

In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, as shown in Figure 52, when the normal game state is set (the game transitions to the normal game state), the performance state is set to the normal performance state (the normal performance state begins).
In the normal performance state based on the normal game state settings, if a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1. Furthermore, if a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state B. Furthermore, if a jackpot is won and the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state C. Furthermore, if a jackpot is won and the transition to the high-probability time-saving game state is set to the high-probability time-saving performance state (see Figure 52). Although not specifically illustrated, if a power outage occurs while the system is in the normal performance state (normal gameplay state), and the system recovers from the power outage without a RAM clear (abnormal initialization process, normal initialization process) being performed (i.e., the system recovers from the power outage without fulfilling the conditions for a RAM clear to be executed; hereinafter also referred to as normal power outage recovery), the performance state will remain in the normal performance state.

When the game is in the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, which is set based on the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, if a power outage occurs and normal power recovery is performed, the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 (see Figure 52). Also, when the game is in the low-probability time-saving performance state A2, if a time-saving bonus is awarded and time-saving symbols J1 or J2 are determined, the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 (see Figure 52). Although not specifically illustrated, if a power outage occurs and normal power recovery is performed while the game is in the low-probability time-saving performance state A2, the performance state remains in the low-probability time-saving performance state A2.
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, regardless of whether the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 or A2 is set, if the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds based on a jackpot win, the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state C. Also, if the game transitions to the high-probability time-saving game state based on a jackpot win, the performance state is set to the high-probability time-saving performance state. And if the game transitions to the normal game state by displaying the special symbols 10,000 times without a jackpot win, the performance state is set to the normal performance state (see Figure 52).

When in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (which has 10,000 time-saving spins), if a jackpot is won and the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (which has 100 time-saving spins), the game state is set to low-probability time-saving game state C. If a jackpot is won and the game transitions to the high-probability time-saving game state, the game state is set to the high-probability time-saving game state. Furthermore, if the game transitions to the normal game state after 10,000 special symbol display cycles without a jackpot, the game state is set to the normal game state (see Figure 52). Although not specifically illustrated, if a power outage occurs while in the low-probability time-saving game state B (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins) and a normal power-out recovery occurs, the game state remains in low-probability time-saving game state B.

When the game is in a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (with 100 time-saving spins), if a jackpot is won and the game returns to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (with 100 time-saving spins), the game state is reset to low-probability time-saving game state C. If a jackpot is won and the game returns to a high-probability time-saving game state, the game state is set to high-probability time-saving game state. Furthermore, if the game returns to normal gameplay after 100 special symbol display cycles without a jackpot, the game state is set to normal game state (see Figure 52). Although not specifically illustrated, if a power outage occurs while the game is in low-probability time-saving game state C (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving spins) and a normal power-out recovery occurs, the game state remains in low-probability time-saving game state C.

When the game is in a high-probability time-saving game state, and a jackpot is won, transitioning to a low-probability time-saving game state (LJT2) with 100 time-saving rounds will set the game state to low-probability time-saving game state (C). If the game then transitions back to the high-probability time-saving game state due to another jackpot win, the game state will be reset to the high-probability time-saving game state. Furthermore, if the game transitions back to the normal game state after 10,000 special symbol display cycles without a jackpot win, the game state will be set to the normal game state (see Figure 52). Although not specifically illustrated, if a power outage occurs during the high-probability time-saving game state and a normal power-off recovery is performed, the game state will remain in the high-probability time-saving game state.

(Overview of the variable animation)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, a variation effect is performed that, in conjunction with the variation display of special symbols, can inform (suggest) the result of the win or loss lottery based on the display pattern of the effect symbols 50. In this variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbols 50 (dummy symbols) is superimposed on the background image displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21. Then, the result of the win or loss lottery can be informed to the player based on the combination (stop display pattern) of the effect symbols 50 that are stopped after the variation display.

In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, as shown in Figures 53 to 57, the display symbols 50 are symbols that display the numbers "1" to "9" (hereinafter also referred to as number symbols).
Furthermore, the performance symbols 50 are not limited to numerical symbols, and special symbols (for example, pseudo-consecutive symbols indicating that a specific performance will be executed when the symbols stop) are provided (for example, pseudo-consecutive symbols indicating that a pseudo-consecutive performance will be executed, or pre-read symbols indicating that a pre-read performance will be executed). In addition, the performance symbols 50 may consist of a numerical display section that displays numbers and a non-numerical display section that displays images other than numbers (for example, images of characters).

In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, when the special symbol variation display starts, the variation display of all the performance symbols 50 starts from a state where all the performance symbols 50 are displayed in a stopped state (see Figures 53(a)-(b), 54(a)-(b), 55(a)-(b), 56(a)-(b), and 57(a)-(b)). The downward arrows in the figures indicate that the performance symbols 50 are displayed scrolling from top to bottom.
Subsequently, the symbols 50 located on the left (hereinafter also referred to as the first stop symbol), the symbols 50 located on the right (hereinafter also referred to as the second stop symbol), and the symbols 50 located in the center (hereinafter also referred to as the third stop symbol) are displayed in that order (see Figures 53(c) to (e)).

If the result of the draw is a jackpot win, the jackpot win is announced by the first, second, and third stop symbols all displaying the same number (for example, 222, 555, etc.) (see Figure 54(e)). Hereafter, this type of stop display will also be referred to as the "winning pattern."

In contrast, if the result of the draw is either a win or a loss for the time-saving bonus, the result is indicated by the stopping display of at least one of the first, second, and third stop symbols being a different number symbol (see Figures 53(e), 55(e), 56(f), and 57(f)). Hereafter, this stopping display pattern will also be referred to as the "non-winning pattern." Thus, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, the stopping display pattern of the performance symbol 50 is the non-winning pattern regardless of whether the result is a win or a loss for the time-saving bonus. Therefore, although the player can understand from the stopping display pattern of the performance symbol 50 that the result of the draw is not a win for the jackpot, they cannot understand whether the result is a win or a loss for the time-saving bonus.
Furthermore, if the player wins the time-saving bonus, the stopping display pattern of the performance symbols 50 may be set to a special pattern different from the winning and non-winning patterns described above (for example, a pattern in which all performance symbols 50 stop and are displayed as a special pattern corresponding to the time-saving bonus win (for example, the letter "J")). In this case, the stopping display pattern of the performance symbols 50 will allow the player to understand that they have won the time-saving bonus.

Furthermore, the types of variations in the game's performance can be broadly categorized into normal non-winning variations, variations with development into reach variations, variations without development into reach variations, special reach variations, and special non-winning variations.
The normal non-winning variation pattern is an execution mode in which the first and second stop symbols are displayed as different number symbols, the third stop symbol remains as is, and the stop display mode of the performance symbol 50 is a non-winning mode (see Figures 53(c) to (e)).
In the development-enabled reach variation pattern, a reach display is performed in which the first and second stop symbols are the same number symbols, followed by a reach development performance in which a predetermined development performance image is displayed on the display unit 21a along with the variation display of the third stop symbol, and then the third stop symbol is displayed, and the stop display mode of the performance symbol 50 becomes either a non-winning mode or a winning mode (see Figures 54(c) to (e)).
The non-development reach variation pattern, although not specifically illustrated, is an execution mode in which, after the reach is displayed, the third stop symbol is displayed without the aforementioned reach development animation being executed, and the stop display mode of the animation symbol 50 becomes either a non-winning mode or a winning mode.
The special reach variation pattern is an execution mode in which, after the start of the variation display of the performance symbol 50, along with the variation display of the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol, a special teasing effect is performed on the display unit 21a that teases whether or not to perform a special reach development effect, and after an indication that the special reach development effect will be performed, a reach is displayed, the above-mentioned special reach development effect is performed and the third stop symbol is displayed as stopped, and the stop display mode of the performance symbol 50 becomes a non-winning mode (see Figures 56(c) to (f) and 57(c) to (f)).
In the special non-winning variation pattern, after the start of the variation display of the performance symbol 50, the above-mentioned special teasing effect is executed on the display unit 21a along with the variation display of the first stop symbol, second stop symbol, and third stop symbol, but an indication is made that the special reach development effect will not be executed, and the first stop symbol, second stop symbol, and third stop symbol are displayed as stopped symbols without a reach display, and the stop display mode of the performance symbol 50 becomes a non-winning mode (see Figures 55(c) to (e)).

In this type of pachinko machine P, the reach variation pattern with development is set to have a higher probability of being executed when a jackpot is won compared to the reach variation pattern without development, thus increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, each execution mode has various settings for how the performance symbols 50 are displayed in a variable manner, and various images displayed during the variable display (for example, a video or still image different from the performance symbols 50, which is a preview image that increases the expectation of winning a jackpot, and the aforementioned development performance image).
For example, in the reach development animation of a reach variation pattern with development, there are development animation images that can be displayed in any case of a miss, a win of a time-saving bonus, or a win of a jackpot, but are set to have a relatively low probability of being displayed when a jackpot is won; high-expectation development animation images that can be displayed in any case of a miss, a win of a time-saving bonus, or a win of a jackpot, but are set to have a relatively high probability of being displayed when a jackpot is won; and jackpot-confirming development animation images that are not displayed in the case of a miss or a win of a time-saving bonus, but are displayed only when a jackpot is won.
As a result, in the reach development sequence, if a high-probability development sequence image is displayed, the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher than if a low-probability development sequence image is displayed. Furthermore, if a jackpot-confirming development sequence image is displayed, the player can recognize that they have won a jackpot, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described effects, in addition to displaying images, predetermined sounds may be output, and the effect lighting device 23 (lamp) may be illuminated in a predetermined lighting pattern or color.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the execution methods of the variable performance that can be performed are determined for each performance state and the result of the win/loss lottery, and the variable performance is executed according to one of the execution methods that can be performed corresponding to the performance state and the result of the win/loss lottery that are set.
The details of the variable effects performed during each performance state will be described in more detail later.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, in addition to the display of the performance symbols 50 as described above, a mini-symbol MD, which is extremely small in size and more difficult for the player to see than the performance symbols 50, is displayed in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a in conjunction with the display of the special symbols (see Figure 53(a), etc.). The result of the winning or losing lottery is also communicated (suggested) to the player based on the combination (stop display pattern) of the mini-symbol MD that is displayed after the variation.

The mini-symbols (MD) consist of the same number symbols "1" through "9" as the special effect symbols (50), as well as the number symbol "0" which is not used in the special effect symbols (50). As shown in Figure 53, three mini-symbols (MD) are displayed side by side. When the special effect symbol display begins, all mini-symbols (MD) start to display in a stopped state, then begin to display in a scrolling manner (scrolling from top to bottom). When the special effect symbol display ends (when the special effect symbol stops), the mini-symbols (MD) on the left, in the center, and on the right all stop simultaneously.

In this case, regardless of the performance state, if the result of the draw is a miss or a big win, and if the result is a time-saving bonus in low-probability time-saving performance state A1, low-probability time-saving performance state B, low-probability time-saving performance state C, or high-probability time-saving performance state, the mini symbol MD located on the left will stop and display with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50 (first stop symbol) located on the left, the mini symbol MD located in the center will stop and display with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50 (third stop symbol) located in the center, and the mini symbol MD located on the right will stop and display with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50 (second stop symbol) located on the right (see Figures 53(e), 54(e), and 55(e)). In other words, the performance symbols 50 and mini symbols MD at the corresponding positions will both stop and display with the same number symbol.
On the other hand, if the bonus is awarded in the normal performance state or the low-probability bonus performance state A2, the mini symbol MD located on the left will stop and display the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50 located on the left, and the mini symbol MD located on the right will stop and display the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50 located on the right, but the mini symbol MD located in the center will stop and display the number "0" (i.e., a different number symbol from the performance symbol 50 located in the center) (see Figures 56(f) and 57(f)).

(Overview of background image display)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 is provided with a first background image corresponding to the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 with 10,000 time-saving rounds (see Figures 53(a) to (e), 54(a) to (c), 55(a) to (b) and (e), 56(a) to (b), 57(a) to (b) and (g)), a second background image corresponding to the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds (see Figure 58(b)), and a third background image corresponding to the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds and the high probability time-saving game state (see Figure 56(g)). The background image is displayed on the display unit 21a during each game state.

Specifically, the first background image is displayed during the normal game state, which is set after a RAM clear (abnormal initialization process, normal initialization process), or after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (100 spins) has ended due to 100 spins of special symbol variation display without winning a jackpot, and also during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (10,000 spins) which is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 during the normal game state. In other words, the same background image is displayed during both the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. As a result, players cannot determine whether the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set from the displayed background image.
During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which is set to have 100 time-saving rounds after the special game has ended based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 (when a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57), a second background image is displayed.
The third background image is displayed during both the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2 during normal gameplay and has 10,000 time-saving rounds, and the high-probability time-saving game state, which is set after the special game ends based on the determination of the jackpot symbols X2, X3, X5, or X6 (when a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57). In other words, the same background image is displayed during both the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds and the high-probability time-saving game state. Although these are separate game states with different probabilities of winning a jackpot, they both continue until a jackpot is won and the performance of the normal game is the same, so in effect they can be said to be game states with the same degree of advantage. Therefore, by displaying the same background image, it is possible to give the player the impression that they are playing in the same game state without actively suggesting that they are different game states.
Furthermore, different background images may be displayed during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (with 10,000 time-saving spins) and the high-probability time-saving game state.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, during normal gameplay, low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2, and high-probability time-saving gameplay state, when the first special symbol random number or the second special symbol random number is acquired and stored as a reserve, or when the first special symbol random number or the second special symbol random number stored as a reserve is read out, a reserve display is performed, showing a reserve image in a predetermined display manner. This reserve display indicates the number of first special symbol reserves and the number of second special symbol reserves.
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, although not specifically shown in the illustration, during normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT1, when game balls are launched towards the first game area 12a (left-handed) and game balls mainly enter the first starting entry point 15, a reserve indicator suggesting the retention of the first special symbol random number is displayed. On the other hand, during low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT2 and high-probability time-saving gameplay, when game balls are launched towards the second game area 12b (right-handed) and game balls mainly enter the second starting entry point 16, a reserve indicator suggesting the retention of the second special symbol random number is displayed. Furthermore, although not specifically shown in the illustration, during special gameplay, neither the reserve indicator suggesting the retention of the first special symbol random number nor the reserve indicator suggesting the retention of the second special symbol random number is displayed.

(Outline of the effects that can be performed during each performance state)
The following provides a detailed explanation of the various effects that can be performed during each performance state.
(1) During normal gameplay (normal performance state)
As mentioned above, after the RAM is cleared, or after 100 special symbol variations are displayed without winning a jackpot, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which has 100 time-saving rounds, ends, the normal game state is set, and the performance state is set to the normal performance state.
Then, when the normal performance state (normal game state) is set, the display unit 21a displays the first background image and also displays a chance zone stay indication that there is a possibility of being in the normal game state, which is a chance zone (for example, displaying a chance zone stay indication image in which the words "Super Time with Character Appearance!?" scroll horizontally) (see Figures 53(a) to (e), 54(a) to (c), 55(a) to (e), 56(a) to (f), and 57(a) to (f)). The display of the first background image and the chance zone stay indication are continuously performed during the normal performance state (normal game state), except for certain periods. If a power outage occurs during the normal performance state (normal game state) and the power is restored, the normal performance state (normal game state) will remain, and the display of the first background image and the chance zone stay indication will continue even after the power is restored.
Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, when the normal game state is set, a left-handed shot suggestion is also made to indicate that the game ball should be shot toward the first game area 12a (for example, the display of a left-handed shot suggestion image such as "←←← left shot", the lighting of a left-handed shot lamp to indicate such a shot, etc.). This left-handed shot suggestion may be continuously executed during the normal performance state (normal game state), or it may be continuously executed from the time the normal performance state (normal game state) is set until a predetermined end point (for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds, etc.) has elapsed since the start of the first variation performance).

Then, a variation effect is executed in conjunction with the display of the special symbols.
(1-1) If the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss During the normal performance state (normal gameplay state), if the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss, the machine may perform a variation animation using one of the following patterns: a normal non-winning variation pattern, a reach variation pattern without development, a reach variation pattern with development, or a special non-winning variation pattern.

Specifically, in the variation animation using the normal non-winning variation pattern, when the display unit 21a continues to indicate that the player is in the chance zone as described above, and the variation display of the special symbols (losing symbols) begins, the variation display of all the animation symbols 50 begins in the center of the display unit 21a, and the variation display of all the mini symbols MD begins in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a (see Figures 53(a) to (b)).
In this normal non-winning variation pattern, as mentioned above, no reach display is shown (see Figures 53(c) to (d)).
Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed and a losing symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, all the performance symbols 50 are displayed in a non-winning pattern, and the mini symbols MD at the positions corresponding to each performance symbol 50 are displayed with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50 (see Figures 53(c) to (e)). After that, these performance symbols 50 and mini symbols MD are displayed in a stopped state until the stopped display time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In the variation animation using the no-development reach variation pattern, similar to the variation animation using the normal non-winning variation pattern described above, once the indication of being in the chance zone is displayed and the special symbol (losing symbol) begins to change, the variation display of the performance symbol 50 and the mini symbol MD begins (see Figures 54(a) to (b)). After that, a reach is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a (see Figure 54(c)).
In this variation pattern without further development, as mentioned above, no further development animation is performed after the reach is displayed.
Then, similar to the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern described above, when the variation time for the special symbols has elapsed and a losing symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, all the animation symbols 50 are displayed in a non-winning manner, and the mini symbols MD at the positions corresponding to each animation symbol 50 are displayed with the same number symbol as the animation symbol 50. After that, these animation symbols 50 and mini symbols MD are displayed in a stopped state until the stopped display time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In the variation animation using the development-enabled reach variation pattern, similar to the variation animation using the non-development-enabled reach variation pattern described above, once the indication of being in the chance zone is displayed and the special symbol (losing symbol) begins to change, the animation symbol 50 and the mini symbol MD begin to change, and then a reach is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a (see Figures 54(a) to (c)).
After the "Reach" indicator is displayed, a "Reach Development" animation is executed. In this "Reach Development" animation, various development images (such as the low-expectation development image and high-expectation development image mentioned above) are displayed on part or the entirety of the display unit 21a (see Figure 54(d)).
Furthermore, during the execution of the reach development animation, in order to prevent a decrease in the visibility of the development animation image, the display of the animation symbols 50 (reach display based on the first and second stop symbols, and the display of the third stop symbol) is performed in the upper right corner of the display unit 21a instead of the center, and no indication of being in the chance zone is provided (see Figure 54(d)).
Furthermore, during the execution of the reach development sequence, the display of the 50 symbols may be completely omitted, or the chance zone may be indicated even during the reach development sequence.
In this reach development sequence, a losing indication is made that the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss (for example, a losing indication image is displayed that the predetermined story shown in the development sequence image has failed), and the reach development sequence ends. This reach development sequence ends just before the special symbol variation time elapses (the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31).
Subsequently, similar to the variation animation for the non-developmental reach variation pattern described above, when the variation time for the special symbols has elapsed and a losing symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, all the animation symbols 50 are displayed in the center of the display unit 21a in a non-winning manner, and the mini symbols MD at the positions corresponding to each animation symbol 50 are displayed with the same number symbol as the animation symbol 50. These animation symbols 50 and mini symbols MD are displayed in this stopped state until the stopped display time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In the variation animation using the special non-winning variation pattern, similar to the variation animation using the non-development reach variation pattern described above, if the display of the special symbol (losing symbol) starts while the indication of being in the chance zone remains, the display of the animation symbol 50 and the mini symbol MD will start (see Figures 55(a) to (b)).
Subsequently, a special teasing sequence is performed to encourage the player to anticipate whether or not the special reach development sequence, which will be described later, will be executed. In this special teasing sequence, a special teasing image (for example, an image that encourages the player to anticipate whether or not a character used in the special reach development sequence will appear (an image that creates anticipation for the appearance of the character)) is displayed across the entire surface of the display unit 21a (see Figure 55(c)).
Furthermore, during the execution of the special hype sequence, in order to prevent a decrease in the visibility of the special hype image, the display of the changing symbols 50 (display of the changing first stop symbol, second stop symbol, and third stop symbol) is performed in the upper right corner of the display unit 21a instead of the center (see Figure 55(c)). In contrast, the indication of being in the chance zone continues even during the execution of the special hype sequence (see Figures 55(c) to (d)).
Furthermore, during the execution of the special hype sequence, the display of the 50-symbol variation may be completely suppressed, and indications of being in the chance zone may also be suppressed.
In this special build-up sequence, as described above, an indication is made that the special reach development sequence will not be performed (for example, by displaying an image indicating that the character used in the special reach development sequence did not appear) (see Figure 55(d)), and the special build-up sequence ends. This special build-up sequence ends just before the special symbol variation time elapses (when a losing symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31).
Subsequently, similar to the variation effects for the non-developmental reach variation pattern and the developmental reach variation pattern described above, when the variation time for the special symbols has elapsed and a losing symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, all the performance symbols 50 are displayed in the center of the display unit 21a in a non-winning manner, and the mini symbols MD at the positions corresponding to each performance symbol 50 are displayed with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50. After that, these performance symbols 50 and mini symbols MD are displayed in a stopped state until the stopped display time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

(1-2) If the result of the draw is a jackpot, during normal gameplay, if the result of the draw is a jackpot, the game can execute a variation animation using either a no-development reach variation pattern or a development-enabled reach variation pattern.

If the result of the draw is a jackpot, the variation animation using the non-developmental reach variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation using the non-developmental reach variation pattern in the case of a loss described above. When the variation time for the special symbols has elapsed and the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, all the animation symbols 50 are displayed in the center of the display unit 21a according to the winning pattern, and the mini symbols MD at the positions corresponding to each animation symbol 50 are displayed with the same number symbol as the animation symbol 50 (see Figure 54(e)). In addition, a winning notification image (for example, an image that says "BONUS!") is displayed on the display unit 21a to notify that a jackpot has been won (see Figure 54(f)). The animation symbols 50 and mini symbols MD are displayed in a stopped state until the stopped display time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, at which point the special game begins.

When the result of the draw is a jackpot, the variation animation using the development-enabled reach variation pattern is performed in the same manner as the variation animation using the development-enabled reach variation pattern when the result is a miss, but in the reach development animation, unlike in the case of a miss, a jackpot indication is made that the result of the draw is a jackpot (for example, the display of a jackpot indication image that shows that the result of the predetermined story shown in the development animation image was successful).
Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the winning symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, all the performance symbols 50 are displayed in the center of the display unit 21a according to the winning pattern, and the mini symbols MD at the positions corresponding to each performance symbol 50 are displayed with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50 (see Figure 54(e)). In addition, the winning notification image described above is displayed on the display unit 21a (see Figure 54(f)). The performance symbols 50 and mini symbols MD are displayed in a stopped state until the stopped display time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, and once the stopped display time has elapsed, the special game is started.

(1-3) If the result of the draw is a win for a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, during the normal performance state (normal gameplay state), if the result of the draw is a win for a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, a special reach variation pattern variation performance will be executed.

In the special reach variation pattern that is executed when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, similar to the variation pattern that is executed when the result of the above-mentioned win/loss lottery is a loss, the indication of being in the chance zone continues, and when the variation display of the special symbol (time-saving symbol J2) begins, the variation display of the performance symbol 50 and the mini symbol MD begins, and then the special tease performance is executed (see Figures 56(a) to (c)). Furthermore, the variation display of the performance symbol 50 and the indication of being in the chance zone during the execution of the special tease performance are the same as the variation performance that is executed when the result of the above-mentioned win/loss lottery is a loss (see Figure 56(c)).
In this special build-up sequence, as described above, an indication is made that a special reach development sequence will be performed (for example, an image suggesting the appearance of a character used in the special reach development sequence will be displayed) (see Figure 56(d)), and the special build-up sequence ends. This special build-up sequence ends just before the special symbol variation time elapses (the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31).
Subsequently, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, a reach display is made in the upper right corner of the display unit 21a, and a special reach development performance (for example, the display of an image of a confrontation between the appearing character and the enemy character) is started across the entire surface of the display unit 21a (see Figure 56(e)). At this time, the mini symbol MD at the position corresponding to the first stopped symbol is displayed stopped with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50, the mini symbol MD at the position corresponding to the second stopped symbol is displayed stopped with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50, and the mini symbol MD at the position corresponding to the third stopped symbol is displayed stopped with the number symbol "0" (see Figure 56(e)). Thus, although it is difficult to see, the manner in which the mini symbol MD is displayed stopped suggests that a time-saving bonus has been awarded.
In this special reach development sequence, a high-advantage result indication (for example, the display of an image saying "WIN!" indicating that the character that appeared won the battle) is shown, suggesting that the result of the win/fail lottery was a win that granted a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J2 was determined (i.e., that the game would transition to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds). At the same time, in the upper right corner of the display unit 21a, the third stop symbol is a number symbol different from the first and second stop symbols (for example, a number symbol that is 1 different from the first and second stop symbols), so that all the performance symbols 50 are displayed in a non-winning manner, and the special reach development sequence ends. This special reach development sequence ends just before the stop display time (20 seconds) expires. In other words, the special reach development sequence is executed from the time the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed until the stop display time (20 seconds) has expired.
After that, the performance symbols 50 and mini symbols MD are displayed as stopped until a stop display time (20 seconds) has elapsed. Once this stop display time has elapsed, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins is set, and the performance state is set to low-probability time-saving performance state B. At this time, the chance zone stay indication that was being displayed on the display unit 21a ends, and the third background image is displayed, a high-advantage state setting indication (for example, display of a high-advantage state setting indication image that says "Super Time Start!") is displayed to indicate that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins has been set, and a right-hand shooting indication (for example, display of a right-hand shooting indication image that says "→→→ Right Shoot", lighting of the right-hand shooting notification lamp RL, etc.) is also displayed (see Figure 46(g)).
Furthermore, this suggestion to hit to the right may be executed continuously during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (low-probability time-saving performance state B) as described above, or it may be executed continuously from the time the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (low-probability time-saving performance state B) is set until a predetermined end point (for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds, etc.) has elapsed since the start of the first variation performance).

(1-4) If the result of the draw is a win for a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, during the normal performance state (normal game state), if the result of the draw is a win for a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, a special reach variation pattern variation performance will be executed, just as if the time-saving symbol J2 had been determined.

In the variation performance using the special reach variation pattern that is executed when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the manner of indicating stay in the chance zone, the manner of displaying the variation of the performance symbol 50 and mini symbol MD that start when the variation display of the special symbol (time-saving symbol J1) begins, and the manner of the special teasing performance are all the same as the variation performance using the special reach variation pattern that is executed when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined (see Figures 57(a) to (d)). The special teasing performance ends just before the variation time of the special symbol expires (when the time-saving symbol J1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31).
Subsequently, similar to the variation performance by the special reach variation pattern executed when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and the time-saving symbol J1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, a reach is displayed in the upper right corner of the display unit 21a, and a special reach development performance is started across the entire surface of the display unit 21a (see Figure 57(e)). At this time, the mini symbol MD at the position corresponding to the first stopped symbol is stopped and displayed with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50, the mini symbol MD at the position corresponding to the second stopped symbol is stopped and displayed with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50, and the mini symbol MD at the position corresponding to the third stopped symbol is stopped and displayed with the number symbol "0" (see Figure 57(e)). Thus, although it is difficult to see, the manner in which the mini symbol MD is stopped and displayed suggests that a time-saving bonus has been awarded.
In this special reach development sequence, a low-advantage result indication is given (for example, an image such as "LOSE..." indicating that the character that appeared lost the battle) that the result of the win/loss lottery was a win that granted a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J1 was determined (i.e., that the game would transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1). At the same time, in the upper right corner of the display unit 21a, the third stop symbol is a number symbol different from the first and second stop symbols (for example, a number symbol that is 1 different from the first and second stop symbols), so that all the performance symbols 50 are stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner, and the special reach development sequence ends. This special reach development sequence ends just before the stop display time (20 seconds) expires. In other words, the special reach development sequence is executed from the time the time-saving symbol J1 is stopped and until the stop display time (20 seconds) has expired.
After that, the display of the performance symbols 50 and mini symbols MD will remain stopped until the stop display time (20 seconds) has elapsed. Once this stop display time has elapsed, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, and the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 (see Figure 52). At this time, the indication of being in the chance zone that was being displayed on the display unit 21a ends, but the first background image that was displayed during the normal performance state (normal game state) continues to be displayed (see Figure 57(g)).

(2) During low-probability time-saving performance state A1 (during low-probability time-saving game state LJT1)
As described above, if a time-saving bonus is awarded during normal gameplay and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1. Also, if a time-saving bonus is awarded during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 (a performance state set when the game recovers from a power outage without a RAM clear (abnormal initialization process, normal initialization process) being performed during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1) and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1.
Then, when the game transitions from the normal game state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, as described above, the indication of being in the chance zone that was performed during the normal performance state (normal game state) ends, while the display of the first background image continues (see Figure 57(g)). Also, as will be described later, in the low-probability time-saving performance state A2, the display of the first background image and the indication of being in the chance zone are performed in the same way as during the normal performance state, but when the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, the indication of being in the chance zone ends, while the display of the first background image continues.
In other words, during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, the same first background image as during the normal performance state and the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 is displayed, but there is no indication that the player is in a chance zone.
Furthermore, when the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, unlike when the performance state is set to the normal performance state (normal gameplay state), the left-hand shooting suggestion mentioned above will not be performed (see Figure 57(g)).

Then, a variation effect is executed in conjunction with the display of the special symbols.
(2-1) If the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss In the low probability time-saving performance state A1, if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss, unlike when the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss in the normal performance state, the special non-winning variation pattern variation performance will not be executed, and a variation performance using either the normal non-winning variation pattern, the no-development reach variation pattern, or the development-enabled reach variation pattern may be executed.
Furthermore, except for the fact that there is no indication of being in the chance zone, the variation performance for the normal non-winning variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation performance for the normal non-winning variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the normal performance state, the variation performance for the no-development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation performance for the no-development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the normal performance state, and the variation performance for the development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation performance for the development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the normal performance state.

(2-2) If the result of the draw is a jackpot win In the low probability time-saving performance state A1, if the result of the draw is a jackpot win, the performance can be changed to either a reach variation pattern without development or a reach variation pattern with development, just as in the normal performance state when the result of the draw is a jackpot win.
Furthermore, except for the fact that there is no indication of being in the chance zone, the variation animation for the variation pattern without development is performed in the same manner as the variation animation for the variation pattern without development when the result of the win/loss lottery in the normal performance state is a win, and the variation animation for the variation pattern with development is performed in the same manner as the variation animation for the variation pattern with development when the result of the win/loss lottery in the normal performance state is a win.

(2-3) If the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined In the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, if the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, unlike when the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined in the normal performance state, the special reach variation pattern variation performance will not be executed, and the normal non-winning variation pattern variation performance will be executed.
As mentioned above, during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, unlike during the normal performance state, no indication of being in the chance zone is given, and the display unit 21a does not show an image indicating being in the chance zone, while the variation performance is executed using the normal non-winning variation pattern.
In this normal non-winning variation pattern variation, just as in the normal performance state, when the special symbols (time-saving symbols J1 or J2) begin to change, the performance symbols 50 begin to change in the center of the display unit 21a, and the mini symbols MD begin to change in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a. In this normal non-winning variation pattern variation, no reach display is shown.
Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, all performance symbols 50 are displayed as stopped in the non-winning pattern, and the mini symbols MD at the positions corresponding to each performance symbol 50 are displayed as stopped with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50. After that, these performance symbols 50 and mini symbols MD are displayed as stopped until the stop display time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed.
Furthermore, since the game state during the setting is the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, even if the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, the game state does not change even after the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 continues. In addition, the performance state also continues as the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 (see Figure 52).

In the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, even if a time-saving bonus is awarded, the game state during the setting remains the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. Therefore, if a variation performance is executed using a special reach variation pattern, as in the case when a time-saving bonus is awarded during the normal performance state, and the determination of time-saving symbols J1 or J2 is suggested, it may give the player the impression that the game state has changed.
Therefore, in the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, if the result of the win/fail lottery is a win in granting time-saving, a variation performance using the normal non-winning variation pattern that can be executed if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss is performed, and the stopping display of the performance symbol 50 in the non-winning form and the stopping display of the mini symbol MD with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50 are performed.
As a result, in the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, even if the player wins the time-saving bonus, they cannot determine that they have won the time-saving bonus from the execution pattern of the variation performance, the stopping display pattern of the performance symbols 50, or the stopping display pattern of the mini symbols MD. This can give the player the impression that the result of the win/loss lottery was a loss, and consequently, it is possible to prevent giving the player the impression that the game state has been changed.

(3) During low-probability time-saving performance state A2 (during low-probability time-saving game state LJT1)
As mentioned above, if a power outage occurs during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, and the system recovers from the power outage without a RAM reset (i.e., a normal power outage recovery occurs), the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 remains unchanged, and the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A2.
When the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A2, the display unit 21a displays the first background image and indicates that the player is in the chance zone, just as in the normal performance state (see Figures 53(a) to (e), 54(a) to (c), 55(a) to (e), 56(a) to (f), and 57(a) to (f)). The display of the first background image and the indication of being in the chance zone continue to be performed during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2, except for certain periods. If a power outage occurs during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 (during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) and the power is restored as usual, the player will remain in the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1), and the display of the first background image and the indication of being in the chance zone will continue to be performed even after the power is restored.
Furthermore, if the power is restored after an outage and the game state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A2, the left-hand shooting suggestion may or may not be implemented.

Then, a variation effect is executed in conjunction with the display of the special symbols.
(3-1) If the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss In the low probability time-saving performance state A2, if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss, the performance can be changed to one of the following patterns: normal non-winning variation pattern, no development reach variation pattern, development reach variation pattern, or special non-winning variation pattern, just as in the normal performance state when the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss.
These variations in execution mode are performed while the indication of being in the chance zone remains, just as in the normal performance state. Furthermore, the variation in the normal non-winning variation pattern is performed in the same manner as the variation in the normal non-winning variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the normal performance state, the variation in the no-development variation pattern is performed in the same manner as the variation in the no-development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the normal performance state, the variation in the development variation pattern is performed in the same manner as the variation in the development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the normal performance state, the variation in the development variation pattern is performed in the same manner as the variation in the development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the normal performance state, and the variation in the special non-winning variation pattern is performed in the same manner as the variation in the special non-winning variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the normal performance state (see Figures 53, 55, etc.).

(3-2) If the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot win In the low probability time-saving performance state A2, if the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot win, the performance can be changed to either a reach variation pattern without development or a reach variation pattern with development, just as in the normal performance state when the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot win.
These variations in execution mode are performed while the indication of being in the chance zone remains, just as in the normal performance state. Furthermore, variations in the variation pattern without development are performed in the same manner as variations in the variation pattern without development when the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot in the normal performance state, and variations in the variation pattern with development are performed in the same manner as variations in the variation pattern with development when the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot in the normal performance state (see Figure 54, etc.).

(3-3) If the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for the granting of a time-saving feature and the time-saving feature symbol J1 or J2 is determined, in the low-probability time-saving feature state A2, if the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for the granting of a time-saving feature and the time-saving feature symbol J1 or J2 is determined, the indication of being in the chance zone will remain, and a special non-winning variation pattern variation will be executed.
The special non-winning variation pattern based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is executed in almost the same manner as the special non-winning variation pattern that occurs when a loss occurs in the normal performance state.
Specifically, when the special symbols (time-saving symbols J1 or J2) begin to change, the performance symbols 50 and mini symbols MD also begin to change, and then a special build-up animation is performed (see Figures 55(a) to (d)).
In this special build-up sequence, an indication is given that the special reach development sequence will not be performed (see Figure 55(d)), and the special build-up sequence ends. This special build-up sequence ends just before the special symbol variation time expires (when a losing symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31).
After that, once the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, all the performance symbols 50 are displayed stopped in the center of the display unit 21a in a non-winning pattern, and the mini symbols MD at the positions corresponding to each performance symbol 50 are displayed stopped with the same number symbol as the performance symbol 50. These performance symbols 50 and mini symbols MD are displayed stopped until the stop display time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed.
Here, the game state being set is the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. Therefore, even though the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, the game state does not change even after the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 continues. In contrast, the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 (see Figure 52). At this time, the indication of being in the chance zone that was being displayed on the display unit 21a ends, but the first background image that was displayed during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 (during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) continues to be displayed (see Figure 57(g)).

(4) During low-probability time-saving performance state B (during low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds)
As mentioned above, if you win a time-saving bonus during normal gameplay and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, you will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins, and the performance state will be set to the low-probability time-saving performance state B.
Then, the game transitions from the normal game state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds, and when the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state B, as described above, the indication of being in the chance zone that was performed during the normal performance state (normal game state) ends, and the third background image is displayed (see Figure 56(g)).

Then, a variation effect is executed in conjunction with the display of the special symbols.
(4-1) If the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss In the low probability time-saving performance state B (low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds), if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss, although not specifically shown in the diagram, the machine will be able to perform a variation animation using one of the following patterns: a normal non-winning variation pattern, a reach variation pattern without development, or a reach variation pattern with development, similar to the case where the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss in the low probability time-saving performance state A1.
Furthermore, the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the low probability time-saving performance state A1, the variation animation for the no-development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the no-development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the low probability time-saving performance state A1, and the variation animation for the development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the low probability time-saving performance state A1.

(4-2) If the result of the draw is a jackpot win During the low probability time-saving performance state B (low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds), if the result of the draw is a jackpot win, although not specifically shown in the diagram, the machine can perform a variation animation using either a reach variation pattern without development or a reach variation pattern with development, similar to when the result of the draw is a jackpot win in the low probability time-saving performance state A1.
Furthermore, the variation animation for the variation pattern without development is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the variation pattern without development when the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot win in the low probability time-saving animation state A1, and the variation animation for the variation pattern with development is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the variation pattern with development when the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot win in the low probability time-saving animation state A1.

(4-3) If the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for time reduction and time reduction symbol J1 or J2 is determined In low probability time reduction performance state B (low probability time reduction game state LJT2 with 10,000 time reductions), if the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for time reduction and time reduction symbol J1 or J2 is determined, although not specifically shown in the illustration, in the same way as when the result of the win/fail lottery in this low probability time reduction performance state B is a loss, a variation performance can be executed using one of the following: a normal non-winning variation pattern, a reach variation pattern without development, or a reach variation pattern with development.
Furthermore, the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in low-probability time-saving performance state B, the variation animation for the no-development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the no-development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in low-probability time-saving performance state B, and the variation animation for the development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in low-probability time-saving performance state B.
Furthermore, since the current game state is the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the game state will not change even if the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will continue.

Thus, in the low-probability time-saving performance state B, if the result of the win/fail lottery is a win of time-saving, a variation performance is performed using one of the following patterns that can be executed if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss: a normal non-winning variation pattern, a reach variation pattern without development, or a reach variation pattern with development. In addition, the performance symbol 50 is displayed as a non-winning pattern, and the mini symbol MD is displayed as a number symbol identical to the performance symbol 50.
As a result, in low-probability time-saving performance state B, even if the player wins the time-saving bonus, they cannot determine that they have won the time-saving bonus from the execution pattern of the variation performance, the stopping display pattern of the performance symbol 50, or the stopping display pattern of the mini symbol MD. This can give the player the impression that the result of the win/loss lottery was a loss, and in turn, prevent the player from being given the impression that the game state has been changed by winning the time-saving bonus.

(5) During low-probability time-saving performance state C (during low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds)
As described above, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game based on that determination, the game will transition to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds, and the performance state will be set to a low-probability time-saving performance state C.
When the special game described above ends, the special game effects that were being displayed during the special game (for example, the display of special game images to enhance the special game (see Figure 58(a))) also end. Then, the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds, and when the effect state is set to the low-probability time-saving effect state C, the second background image is displayed, a low-advantage state setting indication (for example, the display of a low-advantage state setting indication image that says "Revenge Time Start!") is shown, and a right-hand shooting indication is shown (see Figure 48(b)). Furthermore, in the lower left corner of the display unit 21a, a count indication is also shown, indicating the number of times the special symbols will be displayed until the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds ends (see Figure 58(b)).

Then, a variation effect is executed in conjunction with the display of the special symbols.
(5-1) If the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss In the low probability time-saving performance state C (low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds), if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss, although not specifically shown in the diagram, the machine will be able to execute a variation animation using one of the following patterns: a normal non-winning variation pattern, a reach variation pattern without development, or a reach variation pattern with development, similar to the case when the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss in the low probability time-saving performance state B (low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds).
Furthermore, the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in low-probability time-saving performance state B, the variation animation for the no-development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the no-development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in low-probability time-saving performance state B, and the variation animation for the development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in low-probability time-saving performance state B.

(5-2) If the result of the draw is a jackpot win In the low probability time-saving performance state C (low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds), if the result of the draw is a jackpot win, although not specifically shown in the diagram, the player can perform a variation animation using either a reach variation pattern without development or a reach variation pattern with development, similar to when the result of the draw is a jackpot win in the low probability time-saving performance state B (low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds).
Furthermore, the variation animation for the variation pattern without development is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the variation pattern without development when the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot win in low probability time-saving animation state B, and the variation animation for the variation pattern with development is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the variation pattern with development when the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot win in low probability time-saving animation state B.

(5-3) If the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for the granting of a time-saving feature and the time-saving feature symbol J1 or J2 is determined, In the low-probability time-saving feature state C (low-probability time-saving feature state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins), if the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for the granting of a time-saving feature and the time-saving feature symbol J1 or J2 is determined, although not specifically shown in the illustration, in the same way as when the result of the win/fail lottery in this low-probability time-saving feature state C is a loss, the feature can be executed using one of the following: a normal non-winning feature pattern, a reach feature pattern without development, or a reach feature pattern with development.
Furthermore, the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the low-probability time-saving performance state C, the variation animation for the no-development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the no-development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the low-probability time-saving performance state C, and the variation animation for the development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the low-probability time-saving performance state C.
Furthermore, since the current game state is the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the game state will not change even if the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will continue.

Thus, in the low-probability time-saving performance state C, if the result of the win/fail lottery is a win of time-saving, a variation performance is performed using one of the following patterns that can be executed if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss: a normal non-winning variation pattern, a reach variation pattern without development, or a reach variation pattern with development. In addition, the performance symbol 50 is displayed as a non-winning pattern, and the mini symbol MD is displayed as a number symbol identical to the performance symbol 50.
As a result, in low-probability time-saving performance state C, even if the player wins the time-saving bonus, they cannot determine that they have won the time-saving bonus from the execution pattern of the variation performance, the stopping display pattern of the performance symbols 50, or the stopping display pattern of the mini symbols MD, similar to low-probability time-saving performance state B, etc. This can give the player the impression that the result of the win/loss lottery was a loss, and in turn, it can prevent giving the player the impression that the game state has changed due to winning the time-saving bonus.

(6) During high-probability time-saving performance state (during high-probability time-saving game state)
As described above, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbols X2, X3, X5, or X6 are determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter a specific area 57 during the special game based on that determination, the game transitions to a high-probability time-saving game state, and the performance state is set to a high-probability time-saving performance state.
Then, when the special game described above ends, the special game effects that were being performed during the special game also end. The game then transitions to a high-probability time-saving game state, and when the effects state is set to a high-probability time-saving effects state, the third background image is displayed, a high-advantage state setting is indicated, and a right-hand shooting indication is shown, just as when low-probability time-saving effects state B (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins) is set (see Figure 56(g)).
In other words, when the performance state is set to the high-probability time-saving performance state, the same high-advantage state setting indication as when the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state B is given, and the same background image as when in the low-probability time-saving performance state B is displayed during the high-probability time-saving performance state. As a result, it is not possible to determine from the background image or the indication that the game has transitioned to the above-mentioned game state (high-advantage state setting indication) whether the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins or the high-probability time-saving game state has been set, giving the player the impression that the game has transitioned to the same game state.
Furthermore, the background image displayed may differ depending on whether the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (with 10,000 time-saving spins) or the high-probability time-saving game state is set. The indications that the player has transitioned to these game states may also differ. In this way, it is possible to make it clear whether the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (with 10,000 time-saving spins) or the high-probability time-saving game state has been set.

Then, a variation effect is executed in conjunction with the display of the special symbols.
(6-1) If the result of the draw is a loss During the high probability time-saving performance state (high probability time-saving game state), if the result of the draw is a loss, although not specifically shown in the diagram, the machine will be able to perform a variation animation using one of the following patterns: a normal non-winning variation pattern, a reach variation pattern without development, or a reach variation pattern with development, similar to the case when the result of the draw is a loss in the low probability time-saving performance state B (low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds).
Furthermore, the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in low-probability time-saving performance state B, the variation animation for the no-development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the no-development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in low-probability time-saving performance state B, and the variation animation for the development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in low-probability time-saving performance state B.

(6-2) If the result of the draw is a jackpot, during the high-probability time-saving performance state (high-probability time-saving game state), if the result of the draw is a jackpot, although not specifically shown in the diagram, the player can perform a variation animation using either a reach variation pattern without development or a reach variation pattern with development, similar to when the result of the draw is a jackpot in the low-probability time-saving performance state B (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins).
Furthermore, the variation animation for the variation pattern without development is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the variation pattern without development when the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot win in low probability time-saving animation state B, and the variation animation for the variation pattern with development is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the variation pattern with development when the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot win in low probability time-saving animation state B.

(6-3) When the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for the granting of a time-saving feature and the time-saving feature symbol J1 or J2 is determined, during the high-probability time-saving feature state (high-probability time-saving game state), if the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for the granting of a time-saving feature and the time-saving feature symbol J1 or J2 is determined, although not specifically shown in the illustration, the player can perform a variation animation using one of the following patterns: a normal non-winning variation pattern, a reach variation pattern without development, or a reach variation pattern with development, similar to when the result of the win/fail lottery in this high-probability time-saving feature state is a loss.
Furthermore, the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the normal non-winning variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the high-probability time-saving performance state, the variation animation for the no-development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the no-development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the high-probability time-saving performance state, and the variation animation for the development variation pattern is executed in the same manner as the variation animation for the development variation pattern when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss in the high-probability time-saving performance state.
Furthermore, since the game state during the setting is a high-probability time-saving game state, the game state will not change even if the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, and the high-probability time-saving game state will continue.

Thus, in the high-probability time-saving performance state, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a win of time-saving, a variation performance is performed using one of the following patterns that can be executed if the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss: a normal non-winning variation pattern, a reach variation pattern without development, or a reach variation pattern with development. In addition, the performance symbol 50 is displayed as a non-winning pattern, and the mini symbol MD is displayed as a number symbol identical to the performance symbol 50.
As a result, in the high-probability time-saving performance state, even if a time-saving bonus is awarded, it is not possible to determine that a time-saving bonus has been awarded from the execution pattern of the variation performance, the stopping display pattern of the performance symbol 50, or the stopping display pattern of the mini symbol MD, just as in the low-probability time-saving performance state B and low-probability time-saving performance state C. This gives the player the impression that the result of the win/loss lottery was a loss, and in turn prevents giving the player the impression that the game state has been changed by winning a time-saving bonus.

(Determination of the execution method of the variable effect)
Next, we will explain how to determine the execution method of the aforementioned variable effects.
The main ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 stores multiple variable animation determination tables 119 for determining the execution mode of the variable animation.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Figures 59 and 60, the variable performance determination table 119 is provided, which includes a first variable performance determination table 119a that is referenced in the normal performance state, a second variable performance determination table 119b that is referenced in the low probability time-saving performance state A1, a third variable performance determination table 119c that is referenced in the low probability time-saving performance state A2, a fourth variable performance determination table 119d that is referenced in the low probability time-saving performance state B or the low probability time-saving performance state C, and a fifth variable performance determination table 119e that is referenced in the high probability time-saving performance state.

Each variation performance determination table 119 has a defined execution mode for the variation performance, associated with each variation pattern command that can be determined by the main control board 100 and each variation performance random number acquired within a predetermined numerical range (0 to 249 in this embodiment). When the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 100, it acquires a variation performance random number of 1 from the predetermined numerical range (0 to 249). The sub-CPU 301 refers to the variation performance determination table 119 corresponding to the performance state currently set and determines the execution mode of the variation performance based on the received variation pattern command and the acquired variation performance random number.
Furthermore, the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 is provided with a performance data table, which stores performance data that defines the specific execution details of various performances. The sub-CPU 301 then acquires performance data corresponding to the execution mode of the determined variable performance, and based on the acquired performance data, the variable performance is executed according to the determined execution mode.

As shown in Figure 59(a), according to the first variation pattern determination table 119a, if the received variation pattern command is "00H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), either a normal non-winning variation pattern or a special non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "01H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "02H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a reach variation pattern without development is determined; and if the received variation pattern command is "03H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a reach variation pattern with development is determined.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "0AH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot), a reach variation pattern without development is determined, and if the received variation pattern command is "0BH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot), a reach variation pattern with development is determined.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "0EH" or "0FH" (meaning the result of the win/loss lottery is a win of time reduction), a special non-winning variation pattern is determined.

As shown in Figure 59(b), according to the second variation pattern determination table 119b, if the received variation pattern command is "10H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "11H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "12H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a reach variation pattern without development is determined; and if the received variation pattern command is "13H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a reach variation pattern with development is determined.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "1AH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot), a reach variation pattern without development is determined, and if the received variation pattern command is "1BH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot), a reach variation pattern with development is determined.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "1CH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a win of the time-saving bonus), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined.

As shown in Figure 59(c), according to the third variation performance determination table 119c, if the received variation pattern command is "10H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "11H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "12H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a reach variation pattern without development is determined; and if the received variation pattern command is "13H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a reach variation pattern with development is determined.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "1AH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot), a reach variation pattern without development is determined, and if the received variation pattern command is "1BH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot), a reach variation pattern with development is determined.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "1CH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a win of the time reduction), a special non-winning variation pattern is determined.

As shown in Figure 60(a), according to the fourth variation performance determination table 119d, if the received variation pattern command is "20H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "21H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "22H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a reach variation pattern without development is determined; and if the received variation pattern command is "23H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a reach variation pattern with development is determined.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "2AH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot), a reach variation pattern without development is determined, and if the received variation pattern command is "2BH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot), a reach variation pattern with development is determined.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "2CH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for a time-saving bonus), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "2DH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for a time-saving bonus), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "2EH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for a time-saving bonus), a reach variation pattern without development is determined; and if the received variation pattern command is "2FH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a win for a time-saving bonus), a reach variation pattern with development is determined.

As shown in Figure 60(b), according to the fifth variation performance determination table 119e, if the received variation pattern command is "30H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "31H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "32H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a reach variation pattern without development is determined; and if the received variation pattern command is "33H" (if the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss), a reach variation pattern with development is determined.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "3AH" (meaning the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot), a reach variation pattern without development is determined, and if the received variation pattern command is "3BH" (meaning the result of the win/loss lottery is a jackpot), a reach variation pattern with development is determined.
Furthermore, if the received variation pattern command is "3CH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a win of a time-saving bonus), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "3DH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a win of a time-saving bonus), a normal non-winning variation pattern is determined; if the received variation pattern command is "3EH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a win of a time-saving bonus), a reach variation pattern without development is determined; and if the received variation pattern command is "3FH" (meaning the result of the win/fail lottery is a win of a time-saving bonus), a reach variation pattern with development is determined.

In Figures 59 and 60, the numbers shown in each region corresponding to the variable pattern command and the execution method of the variable effect indicate the range of the variable effect random numbers assigned to that region, that is, the selection rate (decision rate) of that region.
In the pachinko machine P of this form, the selection ratio for the execution of the variation effect is set separately for cases where the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss, when a jackpot is won, and when a time-saving bonus is awarded.

Furthermore, the effects that can be performed in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment are not limited to the variation effects described above. For example, a pre-announcement effect that provides hints about the stored reserved balls before the variation effect related to the reserved balls stored in the reserved ball storage area is executed may also be provided.
Specifically, the pre-announcement effects may include: a pre-announcement effect for reserved balls that, when a new reserved ball is stored, displays the reserved ball in one of several modes, including the normal mode and a special mode that has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the normal mode; a pre-announcement effect for reserved ball changes at some point between the time a reserved ball is stored and the end of the variation mode based on that reserved ball, to a mode that has a higher probability of winning a jackpot or a time-saving bonus; and a pre-announcement zone effect that, when a new reserved ball is stored, displays a high-probability suggestion image (for example, a background image) that indicates a high probability of winning a jackpot, either during the variation mode based on that reserved ball, or across multiple variation modes from a variation mode based on a reserved ball stored before that reserved ball to the variation mode based on that reserved ball.

(Summary of special gameplay effects)
During special gameplay, special gameplay effects are executed. During these special gameplay effects, the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 displays special gameplay images to enhance the special gameplay being played (see Figures 58(a), 61(a), and 61(c) to (f)). In addition, during special gameplay, the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 also displays an image indicating the number of rounds being played (see Figures 61(a), (c) to (f)). The display of this image indicating the number of rounds being played can be used to indicate to the player which round of the game is currently being played.
Furthermore, during special gameplay sequences, not only are special gameplay images displayed, but predetermined background music and sounds are output from the audio output device 10 (speaker) in conjunction with the display of special gameplay images, and the performance lighting device 23 (lamps) illuminate in predetermined lighting patterns and colors.

(Overview of the display of the number of prize balls won)
When a jackpot is won in normal gameplay, low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, or low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds, and a special game based on that win is started, a display of the number of prize balls won is initiated, indicating the cumulative number of prize balls won from the start of the game (i.e., the cumulative number of prize balls won by the player based on the number of game balls entering each prize slot (general prize slot 14, first start prize slot 15, second start prize slot 16, big prize slot 18)). For example, if the cumulative number of prize balls reaches 700, a display of the text image "700pt" or the like (see Figures 61(a) to (d)) is initiated.
The display of the number of prize balls won is updated each time a game ball enters a prize slot. That is, it is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls that are scheduled to be paid out based on that entry. Alternatively, instead of updating the value by adding the number of prize balls that are scheduled to be paid out each time a game ball enters a prize slot, the value may be updated by adding the number of prize balls that have actually been paid out based on the entry of a game ball into each prize slot.
Furthermore, the display of the number of prize balls won continues during the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds, which is set after the end of the special game, and also during the special game that is executed based on the winning of a jackpot in the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds. The display ends when the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds ends without winning a jackpot.
In other words, when a special game is started based on a jackpot win during normal gameplay, low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, or low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds, the display of the number of prize balls won will continue as long as the setting of high-probability time-saving game state or low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds, and the execution of special games based on jackpot wins during high-probability time-saving game state or low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds are repeated.

Here, when the setting of a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds is repeated, and when a special game is executed based on a big win during the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds, the displayed number of acquired prize balls will gradually increase. However, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the number of acquired prize balls reaches a number equivalent to the difference in balls that will cause the game to stop (i.e., 95,000 balls, which is the number that will cause the game to stop), the number of acquired prize balls is not displayed, and the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 displays a difference ball reach indication (for example, a display of a difference ball reach image that says "COMPLETE!") instead of the number of acquired prize balls (see Figures 61(e) to (f)).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, even if the number of prize balls won reaches a number equivalent to the difference in the number of balls that would cause the game to stop, the number equivalent to that difference in the number of prize balls will not be displayed as the number of prize balls won.
During special gameplay, high-probability time-saving gameplay, and low-probability time-saving gameplay (LJT2) with 100 time-saving rounds, the number of prize balls won is displayed. However, if players or hall staff see this and perceive it as the difference in the number of balls, displaying the number of balls equivalent to the difference in the number of balls that would cause the game to stop (95,000 balls, which is the number of balls that would cause the game to stop) as the number of prize balls won could lead to the misunderstanding that the game stop function based on the activation state setting is not working properly. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, even if the number of prize balls won reaches the number of balls equivalent to the difference in the number of balls that would cause the game to stop, the number equivalent to that difference in the number of balls is not displayed as the number of prize balls won. This prevents the occurrence of the aforementioned misunderstanding.

The control mechanism that prevents the number of balls awarded from being displayed as the number of balls awarded, even when the number of balls awarded reaches a number equivalent to the difference in balls that would cause the game to stop, is not limited to the ball difference achievement display (display of the ball difference achievement image) described above.
For example, the number of acquired prize balls may be displayed up to a number one less than the difference in the number of balls that would cause the game to stop (94,999 balls), but the update of the number of acquired prize balls may be stopped (i.e., the count stops) after that number is displayed. Also, the image displayed when the difference in balls is reached may be an image displaying a predetermined character, rather than an image displaying text information as described above.

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds, the display of the number of acquired prize balls may be omitted. In this case, the display of the number of acquired prize balls will continue to be displayed during normal gameplay, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, or during special games based on a jackpot win during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds, during the high-probability time-saving game state set after the end of the special game, and during special games executed based on a jackpot win in the high-probability time-saving game state. The display will terminate when the high-probability time-saving game state ends without a jackpot win.

(Summary of implications regarding control of differential ball operation deactivation)
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, as described above, when the ball count value reaches the first reference value and the activation warning state is set, an activation warning indication (display of activation warning text image) and indication that the activation warning state has been set by lighting up or turning off various lamps are provided until the termination conditions are met, such as when the power is cut off, the activation warning state ends, or a predetermined time (600 seconds) has elapsed. In addition, an activation warning sound is output from the time the activation warning state is set until the activation warning sound output time (5 seconds) has elapsed.
If the activation warning state is set during special gameplay, the activation warning text image is displayed along with the special gameplay image and the right-hand play suggestion image. If the activation warning state is set outside of special gameplay, the activation warning text image is displayed along with the performance symbols 50, the reserved images (not specifically shown) displayed at the bottom of the display unit 21a, and the right-hand play suggestion image. This activation warning text image is displayed in a small size at the top center of the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 so as not to interfere with the visibility of the special gameplay image, the performance symbols 50, the reserved images, and the right-hand play suggestion images (see Figures 61(c) to (e)).

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the ball count value reaches the second reference value, and a special game is being played at the time of reaching that value, thus setting the activation notification state, an indication of the activation notification state being set will be made through the display of the activation notification text image and the lighting or extinguishing of various lamps, until the termination conditions are met, such as a power outage or the termination of the activation notification state. In addition, an activation notification sound will be output from the time the activation notification state is set until the activation notification sound output time (7 seconds) has elapsed.
Since the activation notification state is set during special gameplay, the activation notification text image is displayed along with the special gameplay image and the right-hand play suggestion image. Furthermore, similar to the activation warning text image, this activation notification text image is displayed in a small size at the top center of the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 so as not to interfere with the viewing of the special gameplay image and the right-hand play suggestion image (see Figure 61(f)).

Furthermore, as described above, when the ball difference count reaches the second reference value, and a special game was not being played at the time the value reached that reference value, or when a special game that was being played when the ball difference count reached the second reference value has ended, if the activation state is set, an indication that the activation state has been set will be given until the power cut-off occurs, through the display of activation text and images, the output of activation sounds, and the lighting or extinguishing of various lamps.
Normally, after the special game ends, the display of the changing symbols 50, the display of the held image (not specifically shown in the illustration), and the display of the number of prize balls won are shown (see Figure 61(b)). However, if the special game ends and the activation state is set, these displays are not shown, and instead, the activation text image is displayed.
Furthermore, even in modes other than special games (high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2, normal game state), normally the display of the fluctuation of the performance symbol 50, the display of the held image, the display of the number of prize balls won, the display of the image suggesting right-hand play, etc., are performed. However, if the activation state is set when it is not a special game, all of these displays will be cleared and the activation text image will be displayed. For example, even if the fluctuation of the performance symbol 50 was performed in conjunction with the fluctuation of the special symbol, the fluctuation display of the performance symbol 50 will be forcibly terminated and the fluctuation display will be cleared.
Thus, when the activation state is set, the performance symbols 50, the held image, the number of prize balls won, the right-hand shooting suggestion image, etc. are cleared, so there is no situation that would obstruct the visibility of these. Therefore, the activation text image is displayed on the entire surface of the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 at a larger size than the activation warning text image and the activation announcement text image (see Figure 61(g)).

Next, we will explain the control processing in the sub-control board 300 for executing the various processes described above.
First, the main processing of the sub-control board 300 will be explained with reference to the flowchart shown in Figure 62.
In step 10000, upon power-on, the main processing program is read from sub-ROM 302, and initialization and setting processes for flags and other elements stored in sub-RAM 303 are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 10001.
In step 10001, the sub-CPU 301 performs the process of updating each random number for the animation (variable random number for the animation), and thereafter repeatedly executes the process in step 10001 until an interrupt is performed. Here, each random number for the animation is updated asynchronously.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 300 will be explained with reference to the flowchart shown in Figure 63.
The sub-control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown in the figure) that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds). Upon generation of the clock pulse by this reset clock pulse generation circuit, the sub-CPU 301 reads the timer interrupt processing program and starts the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 63.

In step 10100, the sub-CPU 301 performs update processing for various timer counters used in the sub-control board 300. Then, it proceeds to the next step 10101.
In this form of pachinko machine P, a subtraction timer is employed, and each time the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 300 is executed, the timer counter is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the subtraction stops.
In step 10101, the sub-CPU 301 analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 303 and performs various processes according to the received command. Specifically, in the sub-control board 300, when a command is sent from the main control board 100, a command reception interrupt is performed, and the command sent from the main control board 100 is stored in the receive buffer. The sub-CPU 301 then analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer by the command reception interrupt. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10102.

In step 10102, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not to accept operation of the performance control device 9 according to the progress of the variable performance or other performance being executed, and also determines whether or not operation signals have been input from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c and the press operation detection sensor 9d. If an operation signal is input from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c or the press operation detection sensor 9d and the performance control device 9 was accepting operation, the sub-CPU 301 stores a command in the transmission buffer to transmit to various control boards such as the image control board (not shown), the sound control board (not shown), and the lighting control board (not shown) that the performance control device 9 has been operated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10103.
In step 10103, the sub-CPU 301 transmits the commands set in the transmit buffer of the sub-RAM 303 to various control boards such as the image control board, sound control board, and lighting control board. Then, the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 300 is terminated.

Next, the game state setting-related command reception processing, which is executed when various commands related to setting the game state are received among the command analysis processing of step 10101 described above, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 64. Specifically, when the main control board 100 receives a RAM clear command or a game state specification command stored in step 144 of the power cut-off and save processing and transmitted to the sub-control board 300, a game state command stored in step 1115 of the post-stop processing and transmitted to the sub-control board 300, or a game state specification command stored in step 1306 of the special game termination processing and transmitted to the sub-control board 300, the game state setting-related command reception processing is executed.
In step 10200, the sub-CPU 301 performs a game state storage process to store the game state indicated by the command received from the main control board 100 in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 303 as the current game state.
Specifically, when a RAM clear command is received, the normal game state is stored as the current game state. When a game state command is received, if the current game state stored in a predetermined memory area differs from the game state indicated by the game state command, the game state indicated by the game state command is stored as the current game state. If the current game state stored in the predetermined memory area and the game state indicated by the game state command are the same, no processing is performed. Furthermore, when a game state specification command is received, the game state indicated by that game state specification command is stored as the current game state.
Then, proceed to the next step 10201.

In step 10201, if the game state was stored in step 10200 described above, the sub-CPU 301 executes a performance state setting process to set the performance state by storing the performance state corresponding to the stored game state in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 303 as the current performance state.
Specifically, if the current game state is recorded as the normal game state, the current performance state will be recorded as the normal performance state, and the performance state will be set to the normal performance state. Also, if the current game state is recorded as the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, the current performance state will be recorded as the low probability time-saving performance state A1, and the performance state will be set to the low probability time-saving performance state A1. Also, if the current game state is recorded as the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins, the current performance state will be recorded as the low probability time-saving performance state B, and the performance state will be set to the low probability time-saving performance state B. Also, if the current game state is recorded as the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving spins, the current performance state will be recorded as the low probability time-saving performance state C, and the performance state will be set to the low probability time-saving performance state C. Furthermore, if the current game state is recorded as a high-probability time-saving game state, the current performance state will be recorded as a high-probability time-saving performance state, and the performance state will be set to the high-probability time-saving performance state.
Furthermore, when the performance state is set as described above, the sub-CPU 301 performs control to execute various performances according to the setting of this performance state. Specifically, when the performance state is set to the normal game performance state, the display unit 21a displays the first background image and performs control to suggest left-hand play and chance zone stay. When the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, control is performed to terminate the chance zone stay suggestion. When the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state B, the display unit 21a displays the third background image and performs control to suggest high-advantage state setting and right-hand play. When the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state C, the display unit 21a displays the second background image and performs control to suggest low-advantage state setting and right-hand play. When the performance state is set to the high-probability time-saving performance state, the display unit 21a displays the third background image and performs control to suggest high-advantage state setting and right-hand play.
Then, the process of receiving commands related to game state settings is terminated.

Next, the power outage recovery command reception process, which is executed when a power outage recovery command is received among the command analysis processes of step 10101 described above, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 65. As described above, the power outage recovery command is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300 by step 144 of the power outage recovery process.
In step 10300, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the set performance state (a performance state stored in a predetermined memory area) is the low-probability time-saving performance state A1. If it determines that it is not the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, it terminates the power-off recovery command reception process. On the other hand, if it determines that it is the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, it proceeds to the next step 10301.
In step 10301, the subCPU 301 sets the performance state to low probability time-saving performance state A2 by storing the low probability time-saving performance state A2 in a predetermined memory area as the current performance state, and controls the execution of various performances corresponding to this low probability time-saving performance state A2. Specifically, the display unit 21a displays the first background image, and if a left-handed shooting suggestion is given, controls are performed to give the left-handed shooting suggestion and a chance zone stay suggestion. Then, the power-off recovery command reception processing is terminated.

Next, the stop display termination command reception process, which is executed when a stop display termination command is received among the command analysis processes of step 10101 described above, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 66. As described above, the stop display termination command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 1102 of the post-stop processing, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the port output process in step 212.
In step 10400, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the set performance state (a performance state stored in a predetermined memory area) is the low-probability time-saving performance state A2. If it determines that it is not the low-probability time-saving performance state A2, it terminates the stop display termination command reception process. On the other hand, if it determines that it is the low-probability time-saving performance state A2, it proceeds to the next step 10401.
In step 10401, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the special symbol that was displayed before the display stop time elapsed was the time-saving symbol J1 or J2. If it determines that it was neither the time-saving symbol J1 nor J2, it terminates the display stop command reception process. On the other hand, if it determines that it was the time-saving symbol J1 or J2, it proceeds to the next step 10402.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the symbol determination command, which is stored in step 808 of the special symbol variation start processing and transmitted to the sub-control board 300, contains information on the special symbol determined based on the result of the win/loss lottery. Upon receiving the symbol determination command, the aforementioned special symbol is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 303. This allows the sub-CPU 301 to determine which special symbol was displayed as stopped.

In step 10402, the sub-CPU 301 stores the current performance state, low-probability time-saving performance state A1, in a predetermined memory area, thereby setting the performance state to low-probability time-saving performance state A1. It also controls the execution of various performances corresponding to this low-probability time-saving performance state A1. Specifically, it controls the termination of the chance zone stay indication. Finally, it terminates the stop display termination command reception process.

Next, the variable pattern command reception process, which is executed when a variable pattern command is received among the command analysis processes of step 10101 described above, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 67. As described above, the variable pattern command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 903 of the variable pattern determination process, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the port output process in step 212.
In step 10500, the sub-CPU 301 obtains the variable animation random number updated in step 10001 described above. Then, it proceeds to the next step 10501.
In step 10501, the sub-CPU 301 selects a variable performance determination table 119 that corresponds to the set performance state. Then, it proceeds to the next step 10502.

In step 10502, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the variable animation determination table 119 selected in step 10501 and determines the execution mode of the variable animation based on the variable animation random number obtained in step 10500 and the received variable pattern command. Then, it proceeds to the next step 10503.
In step 10503, the sub-CPU 301 sets a variable animation execution command corresponding to the determined variable animation execution mode in the transmission buffer. The variable animation execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards in step 10103 described above, and these control boards perform control to execute the variable animation based on the received variable animation execution command. Then the variable pattern command reception process ends.

Next, the ball-related command reception processing, which is executed when the first ball-related operation stop control specification command, the second ball-related operation stop control specification command, or the third ball-related operation stop control specification command is received among the command analysis processing of step 10101 described above, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 68. The first ball-related operation stop control specification command, the second ball-related operation stop control specification command, and the third ball-related operation stop control specification command are stored in the main control board 100 in step 1872 of the ball-related command set processing, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the port output processing in step 212.
In step 10700, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not it has received the first ball-control stop command. If it determines that it has not received the first ball-control stop command, it proceeds to step 10702. On the other hand, if it determines that it has received the first ball-control stop command, it proceeds to the next step 10701.
In step 10701, the sub-CPU 301 sets an execution command in the transmission buffer that indicates that an activation warning state has been set. The execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards perform control that indicates that an activation warning state has been set based on the received execution command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10702.

In step 10702, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not it has received a command to specify the stop operation of the second ball. If it determines that it has not received a command to specify the stop operation of the second ball, it proceeds to step 10704. On the other hand, if it determines that it has received a command to specify the stop operation of the second ball, it proceeds to the next step 10703.
In step 10703, the sub-CPU 301 sets an execution command in the transmission buffer that indicates that the activation notification state has been set. The execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards perform control that indicates that the activation notification state has been set based on the received execution command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10704.

In step 10704, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not it has received a command to specify the stop operation of the third ball difference. If it determines that it has not received the command to specify the stop operation of the third ball difference, it terminates the ball difference-related command reception process. On the other hand, if it determines that it has received the command to specify the stop operation of the third ball difference, it proceeds to the next step 10705.
In step 10705, the sub-CPU 301 sets an execution command in the transmission buffer that indicates that the activation state has been set. The execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards perform control that indicates that the activation state has been set based on the received execution command. The activation sound is output from the sound output device 10 at the maximum volume regardless of the currently set volume. Then the ball difference related command reception processing is terminated.

Next, the prize ball specification command reception process, which is part of the command analysis process in step 10101 described above, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 69. As described above, the prize ball specification command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 208 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the port output processing in step 212. Although not specifically shown in the figures, when a special game is started based on a jackpot win during normal gameplay or low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT1, the sub-CPU 301 performs an initial display (for example, displaying the text image "0pt") for the number of prize balls won in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21.
In step 10900, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the game is in a special game mode or a predetermined game state (high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds). If it determines that the game is neither in a special game mode nor a predetermined game state (i.e., in a normal game state, low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds, or low probability time-saving game state LJT1), it terminates the prize ball specification command reception process. On the other hand, if it determines that the game is in a special game mode or a predetermined game state, it proceeds to the next step 10901.

In step 10901, the subCPU 301 increments the value of a prize ball display counter, which is configured with a predetermined storage area of the subRAM 303 and accumulates the number of game balls acquired during special play and predetermined game states, by the number of prize balls corresponding to the received prize ball specification command. In other words, when a prize ball designation command corresponding to the general prize slot 14 is received, the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is incremented by the number of prize balls that are dispensed based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize slot 14; when a prize ball designation command corresponding to the first starting prize slot 15 is received, the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is incremented by the number of prize balls that are dispensed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15; when a prize ball designation command corresponding to the second starting prize slot 16 is received, the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is incremented by the number of prize balls that are dispensed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16; and when a prize ball designation command corresponding to the large prize slot 18 is received, the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is incremented by the number of prize balls that are dispensed based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize slot 18.
Furthermore, the value of this prize ball display counter is reset when the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds ends. During normal gameplay, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, or at the start of special gameplay based on a jackpot win during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds, the value will be 0.
Then, proceed to the next step, 10902.

In step 10902, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the ball difference reach display (display of the ball difference reach image) is currently being executed. If it determines that the ball difference reach display is currently being executed, it terminates the prize ball designation command reception process. On the other hand, if it determines that the ball difference reach display is not currently being executed, it proceeds to the next step 10903.
In step 10903, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is equal to or greater than the number of balls that would cause the game to stop (i.e., 95,000, which is the number of balls that would cause the system to stop). If it determines that the value is not equal to or less than the number of balls that would cause the system to stop (i.e., less than the number of balls that would cause the system to stop), it proceeds to step 10905. On the other hand, if it determines that the value is equal to or greater than the number of balls that would cause the system to stop, it proceeds to the next step 10904.

In step 10904, the sub-CPU 301 sets an execution command to perform the ball difference reach display in the transmission buffer. The execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards perform control to perform the ball difference reach display based on the received execution command. Then the prize ball designation command reception process ends.
Furthermore, in step 10905, which is advanced if it is determined in step 10903 above that the number of stopped units is not equal to or greater than the number of units that have been stopped, the subCPU 301 sets an execution command for updating the displayed number of acquired prize balls to the value of the current acquired prize ball display counter in the transmission buffer. The execution command set here is sent to various control boards in step 10110 above, and these control boards perform control to execute the update display based on the received execution command. Then the prize ball specification command reception process ends.
Although not specifically illustrated, if the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds ends without a big win, the sub-CPU 301 clears the display of the number of prize balls won.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, during the normal performance state (normal gameplay state), the first background image is displayed and the presence of a chance zone is indicated. If a time-saving bonus is awarded during the normal performance state (normal gameplay state) and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the machine transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, at which point the display of the first background image and the presence of a chance zone end. Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 or the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 (during the low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1) and the normal power outage is restored, the performance state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A2, at which point the display of the first background image and the presence of a chance zone are indicated.
In other words, when a RAM clear (abnormal initialization process, normal initialization process) is performed and the normal game state is set (when the performance state is set to the normal performance state), and when a normal power outage recovery occurs during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 and the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 continues (when the performance state is set to the low probability time-saving performance state A2), the same background image is displayed and the indication of being in the chance zone is shown. Therefore, it is not possible to determine from these effects whether the normal game state or the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set. This makes it possible to give the player the expectation that a RAM clear has been performed and the normal game state, which is more advantageous than the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, has been set, and in turn, the operation of the pachinko machine P can be improved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, in the normal performance state (normal gameplay state), the stop display time when a loss occurs and a losing symbol is determined, and the stop display time when a jackpot is won and a jackpot symbol is determined, are both 0.5 seconds. However, when a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, the stop display time is 20 seconds, which is longer than in the cases of a loss and a jackpot. During the time elapsed in the case of a loss, the display unit 21a displays the performance symbol 50 in a non-winning configuration, and during the time elapsed in the case of a jackpot, the display unit 21a displays the performance symbol 50 in a winning configuration. In contrast, when a time-saving bonus is awarded, during the time elapsed after the stop display period, the display unit 21a performs a special reach development animation that suggests the game state to be set after the stop display period has elapsed (low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins).
This prevents situations where, if the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined during normal gameplay, the game state switches immediately after the display of the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 finishes, thus preventing the player from feeling uneasy. Furthermore, since the stop display time is longer when the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined than when a losing symbol is determined, it becomes easier to confirm the stopped time-saving symbol J1 or J2, making it easier to grasp the subsequent change in game state. Moreover, since a special reach development animation that suggests the set game state is performed during the longer stop display time than when a losing symbol is determined, this special reach development animation also makes it easier to grasp the subsequent change in game state.

(Modified version of the pachinko machine P according to this form)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, it is possible to transition from the normal game state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds. However, it is not possible to transition from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, which is more likely to be entered from the normal game state and is more likely to be stayed in for a longer period than the normal game state, to the aforementioned low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds. Thus, the normal game state is set to be more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. However, the setting to make the normal game state more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is not limited to this.

For example, if a jackpot is won during normal gameplay, or if a jackpot is won during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, the system may be set so that it is possible to transition to low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 after the special game based on the win ends. Furthermore, the system may be set so that the number of time-saving rounds in low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 transitioned to after the special game based on a jackpot won during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1 ends is greater than the number of time-saving rounds in low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 transitioned to after the special game based on a jackpot won during normal gameplay ends.
Even in this case, the normal game state is more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

Furthermore, for example, the average of the variation time that can be determined in the game state set after the end of a special game based on a jackpot win during normal gameplay may be set to be shorter than the average of the variation time that can be determined in the game state set after the end of a special game based on a jackpot win during low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. In other words, in the game state set when a jackpot is won during normal gameplay, the proportion of selections of shorter variation times may be higher than in the game state set when a jackpot is won during low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
More specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won during normal gameplay, or if a jackpot is won during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, the system may be set so that it is possible to transition to low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving gameplay state. Furthermore, the average of the variation time that can be determined when a loss occurs in low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving gameplay state, which are set based on a jackpot win during normal gameplay (for example, 3.5 seconds), may be set to be shorter than the average of the variation time that can be determined when a loss occurs in low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving gameplay state, which are set based on a jackpot win during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1 (for example, 5.5 seconds). The variation time that can be determined when a jackpot is won may also be set in the same manner as described above.
In this case, the game state set when a jackpot is won during normal gameplay has more chances to be won or lost within the same time period than the game state set when a jackpot is won during low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, thus increasing the likelihood of winning a jackpot sooner. Therefore, the normal gameplay state is more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

Furthermore, for example, the opening time of a special game that is executed based on a jackpot being won during normal gameplay, or a special game that is executed based on a jackpot being won during a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or a high-probability time-saving game state transitioned from normal gameplay, may be set to be shorter than the opening time of a special game that is executed based on a jackpot being won during a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, or a special game that is executed based on a jackpot being won during a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or a high-probability time-saving game state transitioned from a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. Furthermore, the ending time of special games executed based on a jackpot win during normal gameplay, or special games executed based on a jackpot win during low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state transitioned from normal gameplay, may be set to be shorter than the ending time of special games executed based on a jackpot win during low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, or special games executed based on a jackpot win during low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state transitioned from low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
In this scenario, when a jackpot is won during normal gameplay, the time from the start to the end of the special game is shorter than when a jackpot is won during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. This allows for more chances to perform the win/loss lottery, thus increasing the likelihood of winning a jackpot sooner. Therefore, normal gameplay is more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, the same background image (first background image) is displayed during both the normal performance state and the low-probability time-saving performance state A1. However, by indicating the presence of a chance zone only during the normal performance state, it was possible to determine whether the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 was set based on the performance patterns in both states. However, this is not the only possible configuration.

For example, the same background image may be displayed during both the normal performance state and the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, but the aforementioned indication of being in the chance zone may not be provided during either performance state, so that it is not possible to determine from the performance patterns in both performance states whether the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set.
Furthermore, for example, the same background image may be displayed during both the normal performance state and the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, but the aforementioned indication of being in the chance zone may not be displayed during either performance state. In this way, a specific performance (for example, displaying an image of a shooting star) may be made available, with a higher execution probability during the normal performance state than during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1. In this manner, it becomes possible to infer whether the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set from the frequency of execution of the specific performance, while it is not possible to determine from the display of the background image or the presence or absence of the indication of being in the chance zone.

Furthermore, for example, the same background image may be displayed during both the normal performance state and the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, but the aforementioned indication of being in the chance zone may not be displayed during either performance state. However, a specific performance may be made possible that is not executed during the normal game state and is executed with a predetermined probability only during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. In this way, it becomes possible to determine whether the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set by the display of the background image or the presence or absence of the indication of being in the chance zone, while still being able to determine that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set by the execution of the specific performance.

In the pachinko machine P of this form, when the player transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a number of time-saving rounds (10,000 rounds) is set so that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will continue until a jackpot is won. However, the number of time-saving rounds when this game state is set is not limited to this.
For example, the number of time-saving rounds (e.g., 200 or 500) may be set so that a jackpot is not guaranteed during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. In other words, the number of time-saving rounds may be set so that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends and the normal game state is set when the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the number of time-saving rounds without a jackpot being won.
In this scenario, the number of times the special symbols are displayed changes without hitting a jackpot reaches the number of time-saving rounds, ending the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. After this, the game returns to the normal game state, which is positioned as a chance zone, thus increasing the player's enjoyment.
Furthermore, if the above is done, a countdown display of the remaining number of time-saving game rounds until the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends may be implemented. When the number of time-saving rounds is reached and the game returns to the normal game state, a celebratory animation (for example, displaying a celebratory image such as "Congratulations!! Chance Zone Revival!!") may be implemented.

In the pachinko machine P of this form, there was one type of time-saving symbol associated with the transition from the normal game state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and one type of time-saving symbol associated with the transition from the normal game state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins. However, the types of time-saving symbols are not limited to these.
For example, multiple types of time-saving symbols may be provided, each associated with a transition from the normal game state to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and multiple types of time-saving symbols may be provided with a transition from the normal game state to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins. Furthermore, different stop display times may be set according to each time-saving symbol.
In this case, a wide variety of stop display times become available, making it possible to perform special reach development sequences in various ways during the elapsed time of the stop display.

In the pachinko machine P according to this form, the special reach development performance in the special reach variation pattern is set to start from the moment the special symbol is displayed (the start of the elapsed time of the display), but it is not limited to this, and may be set to start from a predetermined point in time before the special symbol is displayed.
In this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment can be achieved, and the types of special reach development effects can be made more varied.

In the pachinko machine P of this form, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which is transitioned to from the normal game state based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X4, had different levels of advantage due to the difference in the number of time-saving rounds set (10,000 rounds for the former and 100 rounds for the latter). However, the same level of advantage may be achieved by setting the same number of time-saving rounds in any of these game states (for example, 100 rounds).
Furthermore, although the performance of the regular game was the same in all game states, it is also possible to set it so that the performance of one of the regular game states is higher than the other.

In the pachinko machine P of this form, it is possible to win a time-saving bonus through a win/fail lottery, and if a time-saving bonus is won, a time-saving symbol is determined and the time-saving game state can be set. However, it is also possible to make it so that the result of winning a time-saving bonus is not derived in the win/fail lottery, and if it is a loss, one of several losing symbols is determined, and depending on the type of losing symbol determined, it is possible to determine whether or not to set the time-saving game state. In other words, instead of setting the time-saving game state by winning a time-saving bonus and setting a time-saving symbol, a specific losing symbol that can be determined when it is a loss may be used as a substitute for a time-saving symbol, and the time-saving game state may be set when a specific losing symbol is determined.
Specifically, for example, when the draw for winning or losing based on the first special random number results in a loss, the losing symbols may be defined as losing symbol ZA1, losing symbol ZA2, losing symbol ZA3, etc., and when losing symbol ZA1 is determined, the time-saving game state JT1 is set, when losing symbol ZA2 is determined, the time-saving game state JT2 is set, and when losing symbol ZA3 is determined, none of the time-saving game states are set.
Furthermore, the timing for setting the time-saving game state may be any time between the moment a loss occurs (when a losing symbol is determined) and the end of the spin based on that loss (for example, the moment the losing lottery result is derived, the start of the spin of the losing symbol, the end of the spin of that losing symbol (the start of the spin of the next special symbol), etc.).
In this configuration, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment are achieved, and since data related to the time-saving symbols is not required, the load on hardware resources such as the main ROM 102 can be reduced.

In the pachinko machine P of this form, if a jackpot is won by a draw, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or a high-probability time-saving game state may be set after the special game based on the win has ended. However, it is not limited to this, and after the special game based on the jackpot has ended, the high-probability time-saving game state may not be set, and instead, the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 may be set.
Furthermore, the machine may be configured so that in addition to the big win, it is possible to win a minor win through a draw, and a special game may be executed not only when a big win is achieved, but also when a game ball enters a special area provided within the big prize entry point during a minor win game (configured as a so-called type 1 and type 2 mixed pachinko machine), and after the special game ends, the machine may be set to normal game mode or low probability time-saving game mode LJT2.
Furthermore, even in the case described above, similar to the pachinko machine P relating to this form, it may be possible to transition from the normal game state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 based on the winning of a time-saving bonus, and from the normal game state to the relatively advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (for example, 10,000 time-saving bonuses), but not from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 to the relatively advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, thereby providing a gameplay feature in which the normal game state set after a RAM clear, etc., is positioned as a chance zone.

Furthermore, in so-called Type 1 and Type 2 mixed pachinko machines, if a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery, the ball difference operation stop control, similar to that in the special game in this form, may be implemented for the minor win game based on that win.
Specifically, the system may be configured such that when the difference ball count reaches a first reference value, an activation warning state is set; when the difference ball count reaches a second reference value and a minor win game is being played, an activation notification state is set; when a minor win game is played but ends without any game balls entering the special area, an activation state is set when the minor win game ends; and when a game ball enters the special area during a minor win game and a special game is played after the minor win game ends, an activation state is set when the special game ends.
In this way, even if the ball count reaches the second reference value during a minor win game or a special game performed via a minor win game, the game will continue until these minor win games or special games end, thus maintaining the player's enjoyment.
Furthermore, if the activation notification state is set, the activation state may always be set when the ongoing minor win game ends, regardless of whether or not the game ball entered the special area during the minor win game.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the control to stop the operation based on the difference in the number of balls was performed, but it is not limited to this. For example, the control to stop the operation based on the difference in the number of balls may be performed based on the cumulative number of prize balls paid out (i.e., the number of prize balls acquired). For example, when the number of acquired prize balls reaches the number of balls for which a warning is triggered (the number of acquired prize balls that is a predetermined number (e.g., 5000 balls) less than the number of balls that will cause the game to stop), a warning state may be set. When the number of acquired prize balls reaches the number of balls that will cause the game to stop, and a special game is being played at the time, a notification state may be set. When the special game ends or when the number of acquired prize balls reaches the number of balls that will cause the game to stop, and the special game is not being played at that time, an activation state may be set. In addition, the number of acquired prize balls displayed during a special game or a high-probability time-saving game state may not display the number of balls that will cause the game to stop.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

In this embodiment, four control states are provided for the pachinko machine P: game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and playable state. An activation state, which is set based on the difference ball count value reaching the second reference value, is performed as one of the playable states and various controls are performed, but it is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the above four, an activation state may be provided as a control state for the pachinko machine P, and this activation state may be set separately from the playable state and various controls similar to those in this embodiment may be performed.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the main control board 100 is provided with external signals that can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine P (such as a hall computer or external display device), such as winning signals and jackpot signals, but it is not limited to these.
For example, a specific external signal may be provided that can be continuously output from the time a special game is started based on a jackpot win during normal gameplay, during a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds, or during a low-probability time-saving game state LTJ1, until the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds ends without a jackpot win and the normal game state is set.
Specifically, when the main CPU 101 wins a jackpot during normal gameplay, during a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins, or during a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and a special game based on that win is initiated, the main CPU 101 starts outputting a specific external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P. Subsequently, while the setting of a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving spins or a high-probability time-saving game state after the special game ends, and the execution of a special game based on a jackpot win during a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or a high-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving spins are repeatedly performed, the main CPU 101 continues to output a specific external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P. Furthermore, if the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state ends after 100 time-saving rounds without winning a jackpot (when the number of times the special symbols are displayed reaches the time-saving round (high probability round) without winning a jackpot), the main CPU 101 may terminate the output of a specific external signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
In this way, the hall computer and other systems can reliably recognize that the game is being played continuously through a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or a high-probability time-saving game state, which reduces the consumption of game balls, and that the number of prize balls won by the player is likely to increase (hereinafter also referred to as the continuous win state). Furthermore, for example, an external display device can display that the continuous win state is in effect, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment.

The point at which the output of the specific external signal terminates is not limited to the above. For example, the main CPU 101 may continue outputting the specific external signal even during the normal game state, which is set after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving rounds has ended. If the time-saving symbol J1 is determined during this normal game state and the normal game state ends (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set), the output of the specific external signal may be terminated. Furthermore, if a jackpot is won during this normal game state, or if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined and the normal game state ends (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set), the output of the specific external signal may be continued.
As mentioned above, the normal game state is positioned as a chance zone where there is a possibility of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which is advantageous to the player. As described above, even during the normal game state, which is set after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or the high-probability time-saving game state ends with 100 time-saving rounds without winning a jackpot, the output of a specific external signal is continued, allowing the hall computer and other systems to recognize that the game is in a continuous winning streak state even during this normal game state. Furthermore, the external display device can display that the game is in a continuous winning streak state even during the normal game state, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, even if the output of a specific external signal is to continue during the normal game state set after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state, which has ended without winning a jackpot, has ended without the output of a specific external signal during the normal game state set after a RAM clear. In other words, the specific external signal may be output during the normal game state set after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state, which has ended without winning a jackpot, has ended without the output of a specific external signal during the normal game state set after a RAM clear.
This prevents situations where players might be misled into believing that the winning streak is continuing even after the RAM has been cleared.

Furthermore, as described above, during normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT1, when game balls mainly enter the first starting prize entry point 15, a reserve indicator suggesting the retention of the first special symbol random number is displayed. During low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT2 and high-probability time-saving gameplay, when game balls mainly enter the second starting prize entry point 16, a reserve indicator suggesting the retention of the second special symbol random number is displayed. During special gameplay, neither a reserve indicator suggesting the retention of the first special symbol random number nor a reserve indicator suggesting the retention of the second special symbol random number is displayed.
In this case, if the output of a specific external signal is continued during the normal game state, which is set after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state, which has ended without winning a jackpot and has 100 time-saving rounds, then the display suggesting the retention of the first special symbol random number may not be shown during the normal game state.
In this way, it becomes difficult for the player to realize that they are in a normal game state, and it is possible to strongly impress upon the player that they are in a continuous winning streak state.

Furthermore, the output of a specific external signal may be initiated not only when a special game is started based on a jackpot win during normal gameplay, during a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds, or during a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, but also when a time-saving symbol J2 is determined during normal gameplay, and a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds is set based on that determination.
Specifically, when a time-saving symbol J2 is determined during normal gameplay, and a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds is set based on that determination, the main CPU 101 starts outputting specific external information. When this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 ends without a jackpot being won (when the number of times the special symbol is displayed reaches the time-saving round count without a jackpot being won), the main CPU 101 stops outputting the specific external signal. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 and a special game is executed based on that win, the main CPU 101 continues to output the specific external signal while the setting of a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving rounds or a high-probability time-saving game state, and the execution of a special game based on a jackpot being won during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving rounds are repeatedly performed. Furthermore, if the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or the high-probability time-saving game state ends after 100 rounds without winning a jackpot, the main CPU 101 may terminate the output of a specific external signal.

In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, the lottery is designed so that in both the low-probability game state (normal game state, low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) and the high-probability game state (high-probability time-saving game state), the lottery results in either a jackpot win, a time-saving bonus win, or a loss. The probability of winning a time-saving bonus was set to approximately 1/20, but this is not the only possible setting; other setting examples like those below are also acceptable.

(Other configuration examples)
The following details other configuration examples.
In other configuration examples, as shown in Figure 70, the win/loss random number determination table 110 includes: a first low probability determination table 110a1 which is referenced in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number (a random number obtained when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry 15) during the low probability game state; a second low probability determination table 110a2 which is referenced in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number (a random number obtained when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16) during the low probability game state; a first high probability determination table 110b1 which is referenced in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the high probability game state; and a second high probability determination table 110b2 which is referenced in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the high probability game state. Furthermore, in the first low probability determination table 110a1, all random numbers other than those determined to be a jackpot are set to be determined to be a time-saving bonus, and in the second low probability determination table 110a2, the first high probability determination table 110b1, and the second high probability determination table 110b2, all random numbers other than those determined to be a jackpot are set to be determined to be a miss.
In other words, in the other setting examples, the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the low-probability game state only yields the result of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving bonus. In other words, if you do not win a jackpot, you are guaranteed to win a time-saving bonus and will never lose.
Furthermore, in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state, and in the win/loss lottery based on the first or second special symbol random number during the high-probability game state, only the result of winning or losing the jackpot is derived. In other words, if you do not win the jackpot, it will always be a loss, and you will not win the time-saving bonus.

In other configuration examples, as shown in Figure 71, the special symbol random number determination table 111 includes a first starting prize entry determination table 111a1, which is referenced when the win/loss lottery is conducted using the first special symbol random number, and a second starting prize entry determination table 111b1, which is referenced when the win/loss lottery is conducted using the second special symbol random number.
As shown in Figure 71(a), the first starting prize entry determination table 111a1 is set to determine one of the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 if a jackpot is won, and one of the time-saving symbols J1 or J2 if a time-saving bonus is awarded.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 71(b), the second starting prize entry determination table 111b1 is set to determine one of the jackpot symbols X4, X5, or X6 if a jackpot is won, and to determine the losing symbol Z2 if a loss occurs, similar to the pachinko machine P described above.
Furthermore, the specifications of the special game that is executed when each of the above-mentioned jackpot symbols is determined, the types and specifications of the game state set after the special game ends, and the types and specifications of the game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbols are set in the same way as for the pachinko machine P of the above-mentioned form.

With the settings configured as described above, in other configuration examples, the transition of game states will occur in the same way as in the pachinko machine P described above, based on the determination of the jackpot symbols and time-saving symbols as described above.
As mentioned above, in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low probability game state, the granting of time-saving features is not guaranteed. Therefore, when the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 or the high probability time-saving game state ends without a win and the normal game state is set, even if the second special symbol random number acquired during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 or the high probability time-saving game state is stored, the time-saving symbols will not be determined based on this second special symbol random number, and consequently, the setting of the time-saving game state based on the determination of the time-saving symbols will not occur.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the low-probability game state, it is not a loss, but rather a win of either a big win or a time-saving bonus. Also, since the probability of winning a big win during the low-probability game state is approximately 1/300, there is an extremely high probability (approximately 299/300) of winning a time-saving bonus.
Therefore, when the normal game state is set after the RAM is cleared, the first win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number after the setting of this normal game state will almost certainly result in winning the time-saving bonus, and either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1, or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2.
Furthermore, when the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, if the second special symbol random number is not stored, the first win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number after the setting of this normal game state will almost certainly result in winning the time-saving bonus, and either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1, or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2. On the other hand, if the second special symbol random number is stored, after the win/fail lottery based on this second special symbol random number ends without winning a jackpot, the first win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number will almost certainly result in winning the time-saving bonus, and either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1, or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2.

In other setting examples, in the first win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number after the normal game state is set, unless a jackpot is won, the player will win a time-saving bonus, and either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set. In other words, when the win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number is performed after the normal game state is set, there is a very high probability that either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set.
Therefore, only in the first win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number after the normal game state has been set, there is a possibility of obtaining a lottery result that grants a time-saving bonus, which allows for the setting of the advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. This can increase the player's interest in the win/loss lottery and improve the gameplay.

Furthermore, in other configuration examples, a specific external signal may be output as an external signal, similar to the pachinko machine P described above.
For example, this specific external signal may be output continuously from the time a special game is started based on a jackpot win during normal gameplay, in low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins, or in low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, until the high-probability time-saving game state or low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving spins ends without a jackpot win and the normal game state is set, and until the first win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number after the normal game state is set is performed and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set.

Specifically, the main CPU 101 starts outputting a specific external signal when a jackpot is won during normal gameplay, in a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins, or in a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and a special game based on that win is initiated. Subsequently, while the setting of a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 100 time-saving spins or a high-probability time-saving game state after the special game ends, and the execution of a special game based on a jackpot won in a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or a high-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving spins are repeatedly performed, the main CPU 101 continues to output a specific external signal. Then, if the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state ends without a big win and the normal game state is set, and in the first win/fail lottery by the first special symbol random number after the setting of the normal game state, a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the normal game state ends and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, the main CPU 101 terminates the output of the specific external signal.
Furthermore, if the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving spins ends without a jackpot being won and the normal game state is set, the second special symbol random number is stored, and if a jackpot is won by this second special symbol random number, the main CPU 101 continues to output a specific external signal. Also, if, after the setting of the normal game state as described above, the first win/fail lottery using the first special symbol random number results in a time-saving bonus, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, causing the normal game state to end and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving spins to be set, the main CPU 101 also continues to output a specific external signal. Moreover, if, after the setting of the normal game state as described above, the first win/fail lottery using the first special symbol random number results in a jackpot, the main CPU 101 also continues to output a specific external signal.

In the manner described above, even during the normal game state that follows the end of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state (which ends without a jackpot) with 100 rounds of time-saving gameplay, the hall computer and other systems can recognize that the game is in a continuous winning streak state. Furthermore, external display devices can indicate that the game is in a continuous winning streak state even during the normal game state, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, as described above, even if the output of a specific external signal is to continue during the normal game state set after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state, which has ended without winning a jackpot, has ended without the output of a specific external signal during the normal game state set after a RAM clear. In other words, the specific external signal may be output during the normal game state set after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state, which has ended without winning a jackpot, has ended without the output of a specific external signal during the normal game state set after a RAM clear.
This prevents situations where players might be misled into believing that the winning streak is continuing even after the RAM has been cleared.

Furthermore, in other setting examples, similar to the pachinko machine P described above, during normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT1, when game balls mainly enter the first starting entry point 15, a reserve display indicating the retention of the first special symbol random number is shown. During low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT2 and high-probability time-saving gameplay, when game balls mainly enter the second starting entry point 16, a reserve display indicating the retention of the second special symbol random number is shown. In addition, during special gameplay, neither the reserve display indicating the retention of the first special symbol random number nor the reserve display indicating the retention of the second special symbol random number is shown.
In this case, if the output of a specific external signal is continued even during the normal game state which is set after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state, which has ended with 100 time-saving rounds, has ended without winning a jackpot, then during the normal game state, a display suggesting the retention of the first special symbol random number may not be shown. However, if the player wins the time-saving bonus in the first win/fail lottery using the first special symbol random number after the normal game state has been set, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, causing the normal game state to end and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 to be set, a display suggesting the retention of the first special symbol random number may be shown.
Furthermore, during normal gameplay after a RAM clear, a display indicating the retention of the first special symbol random number may be shown.
In this way, it becomes difficult for the player to realize that they are in the normal game state, which is set after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving rounds has ended, and it is possible to give the player the impression that they are in a continuous winning streak state.

Furthermore, in other setting examples as well, when the normal game state is set, a left-handed indication prompting the player to shoot the game ball towards the first game area 12a is made (display of a left-handed indication image "←←← left-handed" on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, and the right-handed notification lamp RL is turned off).
In this case, if the output of a specific external signal is continued even during the normal game state which is set after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state, which has ended without winning a jackpot, the right-hand shooting notification lamp RL is turned off when the normal game state is set. If the first special symbol random number is not stored when the normal game state is set, a left-hand shooting suggestion image is displayed at this point. If the first special symbol random number is stored when the normal game state is set, the left-hand shooting suggestion image is not displayed at this point. The left-hand shooting suggestion image is then displayed when the normal game state ends and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, due to the winning/losing lottery based on the first special symbol random number resulting in a time-saving bonus being awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 being determined.
Furthermore, if the normal gameplay state is set based on a RAM clear, an image suggesting left-handed play may be displayed at this point.
In this case, even if the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or the high-probability time-saving game state ends without a big win and the normal game state is set, if the first special symbol random number is stored, the left-shooting suggestion image will not be displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, which is the player's most important point of interest. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that they are in the normal game state, and can give the player the impression that they are in a continuous winning streak state.

Furthermore, if the output of a specific external signal is to continue even during the normal game state, which is set after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state, which has ended after 100 time-saving spins without winning a jackpot, it is desirable that during the variation performance based on the second special symbol random number stored when the normal game state was set, and during the first variation performance based on the first special symbol random number after the normal game state was set, a special background image different from the first background image, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the normal game state is set, is displayed instead of the first background image corresponding to the normal game state. In addition, it is desirable that all variation performances be performed in the same manner (for example, special pattern A in which the button-pressing operation performance described later is executed (see Figures 86(b) and (c), etc.)).
Even in this case, it is difficult for the player to realize that they are in the normal game state, which is set after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or high-probability time-saving game state has ended without winning a jackpot, and it is possible to give the player the impression that they are in a continuous winning streak state.

Furthermore, the point at which the output of the specific external signal terminates is not limited to the above. For example, the main CPU 101 may terminate the output of the specific external signal when the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or the high-probability time-saving game state (with 100 time-saving spins) ends and the normal game state is set.

Furthermore, in other configuration examples, similar to the pachinko machine P described above, the output of a specific external signal may be initiated not only when a special game is started based on a jackpot win during normal gameplay, in a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds, or in a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, but also when a time-saving symbol J2 is determined during normal gameplay, and a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 10,000 time-saving rounds is set based on that determination.

(Second form)
The second form will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this description, components similar to those in the first form described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.
The pachinko machine P in this form is a so-called type 1 and type 2 mixed pachinko machine, and is configured so that a special game is executed when a jackpot is won, or when a game ball enters a special area described later during a minor win game based on a minor win.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P in this embodiment, and the devices and components installed on the game board 11, are the same as in the first embodiment, except for the attacker device 17.
The attacker device 17 in this embodiment differs from the attacker device 17 in the first embodiment in that, instead of the specific area 57 in the first embodiment, it has a special area that is identical in structure and installation location to the specific area 57 but has a different function. Otherwise, it has the same structure as the attacker device 17 in the first embodiment (equipped with a turning path 51, an upper passage 52, a lower passage 53, a general area 58, a distribution member 59, etc.).

During special games based on a big win, or during minor win games based on a minor win, the large prize slot 18 opens, allowing game balls to enter the large prize slot 18. However, during special games, the distribution member 59 remains in the first position, and game balls that enter the large prize slot 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. Similarly, during minor win games based on the determination of minor win symbols other than the predetermined minor win symbols (Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, Y9 described later), the distribution member 59 remains in the first position, and game balls that enter the large prize slot 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. In contrast, during a minor win game based on the determination of a predetermined minor win pattern, the distribution member 59 remains in the second position, and the game balls that enter the major prize opening 18 do not enter the general area 58, but all enter the special area.
In other words, game balls can only enter the special area during a minor win game based on the determination of a predetermined minor win symbol. As a result, a predetermined number of game balls (one in this configuration) enter the special area during the minor win game. Based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special area during the minor win game, the special game is executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, the game state after the special game that is executed based on the determination of the jackpot symbols when a jackpot is won and the minor win symbols when a minor win is won is set.
In the pachinko machine P of this form, the following game states can be set: a normal game state which is a combination of a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state; a low probability time-saving game state LJT1 which is a combination of a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT1; and a low probability time-saving game state LJT2 which is a combination of a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2. The game proceeds with one of these game states set.
Thus, in the pachinko machine P of this form, a low-probability game state is always set regardless of the game state. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in the win/loss lottery does not change and remains the same regardless of the game state.
Furthermore, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting prize entry point 16 in the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1, and time-saving game state JT2 is the same as in the first form. That is, in the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1, and time-saving game state JT2, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols, the time of variation of normal symbols, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b are all set in the same way as in the first form (see Figures 14 to 16).
Furthermore, immediately after factory shipment, and after the execution of abnormal initialization processing or normal initialization processing, the system is set to the normal gameplay state.

Furthermore, during normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay (LJT1), players are instructed to shoot the game balls towards the first game area 12a (left-handed) so that the game balls enter the first starting prize entry point 15. During low-probability time-saving gameplay (LJT2), special gameplay, and minor win gameplay, players are instructed to shoot the game balls towards the second game area 12b (right-handed) so that the game balls enter the large prize entry point 18, or pass through gate 20 and enter the second starting prize entry point 16. In other words, during normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay (LJT1), players primarily play in the first game area 12a, while during low-probability time-saving gameplay (LJT2), players primarily play in the second game area 12b.

In this embodiment, the reserved memory area of the main RAM 103 consists of a total of eight memory units, from the first to the eighth memory unit, and is capable of storing a total of eight sets of first and second special random numbers.
The first and second special symbol random numbers are stored in the first memory unit in the order in which the balls enter each starting prize slot. For example, if no random numbers are stored in any of the memory units, and the game balls enter in the order of first starting prize slot 15 → first starting prize slot 15 → second starting prize slot 16, then the first special symbol random number related to the first ball entering the first starting prize slot 15 will be stored in the first memory unit, the first special symbol random number related to the second ball entering the first starting prize slot 15 will be stored in the second memory unit, and the second special symbol random number related to the third ball entering the second starting prize slot 16 will be stored in the third memory unit. If the above random numbers are already stored in some of the memory units, the above random numbers will be stored in the memory unit with the smallest number among the available memory units.
However, the number of sets of first special symbol random numbers and the number of sets of second special symbol random numbers that can be stored in the reserved memory area are limited to four sets each. Therefore, if four sets of first special symbol random numbers are already stored in the reserved memory area, even if a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, the first special symbol random numbers related to this entry will not be stored in the reserved memory area. Similarly, if four sets of second special symbol random numbers are already stored in the reserved memory area, even if a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, the second special symbol random numbers related to this entry will not be stored in the reserved memory area.

Furthermore, in this form of pachinko machine P, unlike the first form, if both the first and second special symbol random numbers are stored, they are processed in the order they were stored in the reserved memory area. For example, if both the first and second special symbol random numbers are stored when the special symbol variation display starts, and the first special symbol random number is stored in the reserved memory area before the second special symbol random number, then the win/loss lottery and special symbol variation display based on the first special symbol random number are performed first. After that variation display is completed, the win/loss lottery and special symbol variation display based on the second special symbol random number are then performed.

As shown in Figure 72, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes, as a win/loss random number determination table 110, a first low probability determination table 110c which is referenced in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number (a random number obtained when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15), and a second low probability determination table 110d which is referenced in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number (a random number obtained when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16).

As shown in Figure 72(a), according to the first low probability determination table 110c, a win is determined when the random number is between 1000 and 1328, a win is determined when the random number is between 2000 and 6368, a win is determined when the random number is between 12000 and 14183, and a win is determined when the random number is anywhere other than these (0 to 999, 1329 to 1999, 6369 to 11999, 14184 to 65535), resulting in a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a win is approximately 1/199, the probability of winning a win is approximately 1/15, and the probability of winning a win is approximately 1/30 according to this first low probability determination table 110c.

As shown in Figure 72(b), according to the second low probability determination table 110d, a win is determined when the random number is between 1000 and 1328, a win is determined when the random number is between 2000 and 11361, a win is determined when the random number is between 12000 and 14183, a win is determined when a time-saving bonus is granted, and a loss is determined when the random number is anywhere other than these (0 to 999, 1329 to 1999, 11362 to 11999, 14184 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning a win is approximately 1/199, the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/7, and the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is approximately 1/30 according to this second low probability determination table 110d.

In this version of the lottery, first, a determination is made regarding whether a jackpot has been won. If the result is that a jackpot has not been won, then a determination is made regarding whether a minor prize has been won. If the result is that a minor prize has not been won (hereinafter also referred to as "minor prize non-win"), then a determination is made regarding whether a time-saving bonus has been granted. If the result is that a time-saving bonus has not been granted, then it is a loss.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 73, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes a special symbol random number determination table 111, which includes a first starting prize entry determination table 111c that is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted using a first special symbol random number, and a second starting prize entry determination table 111d that is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted using a second special symbol random number.
In the pachinko machine P of this form, there are 12 types of jackpot symbols (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, X12), 9 types of special symbols (hereinafter also called minor win symbols) that are determined when a minor win occurs (Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, Y9), and 3 types of time-saving symbols (J1, J2, J3). Also, as in the first form, there are 2 types of losing symbols (Z1, Z2).

As shown in Figure 73(a), according to the first starting prize entry determination table 111c, when a jackpot is won by the above-mentioned draw, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 31, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined when the special symbol random number is 32 to 63, the jackpot symbol X3 is determined when the special symbol random number is 64 to 98, the jackpot symbol X4 is determined when the special symbol random number is 99 to 130, the jackpot symbol X5 is determined when the special symbol random number is 131 to 163, and the jackpot symbol X6 is determined when the special symbol random number is 164 to 199. In this first starting prize entry determination table 111c, when a jackpot is won, the probability of determining jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 is 49%, and the probability of determining jackpot symbols X4, X5, or X6 is 51%.
Furthermore, if a minor win is determined by the aforementioned draw, minor win symbol Y1 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 49, minor win symbol Y2 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 50 and 99, minor win symbol Y3 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 100 and 149, and minor win symbol Y4 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 150 and 199. In this first starting prize entry determination table 111c, when a minor win is determined, the probability of minor win symbol Y1 or Y2 being determined is 50%, and the probability of minor win symbol Y3 or Y4 being determined is 50%.
Furthermore, if the above-mentioned lottery results in a win or loss of a time-saving bonus, the time-saving bonus symbol J1 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 179, and the time-saving bonus symbol J2 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 180 and 199. In this first starting prize entry determination table 111c, the probability of the time-saving bonus symbol J1 being determined when the win of a time-saving bonus is achieved is 90%, and the probability of the time-saving bonus symbol J2 being determined is 10%.
Furthermore, if the aforementioned draw results in a loss, the losing symbol Z1 is determined.

As shown in Figure 73(b), according to the second starting prize entry determination table 111d, when a jackpot is won by the above-mentioned draw, the jackpot symbol X7 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 31, the jackpot symbol X8 is determined when the special symbol random number is 32 to 63, the jackpot symbol X9 is determined when the special symbol random number is 64 to 98, the jackpot symbol X10 is determined when the special symbol random number is 99 to 130, the jackpot symbol X11 is determined when the special symbol random number is 131 to 163, and the jackpot symbol X12 is determined when the special symbol random number is 164 to 199. In this second starting prize entry determination table 111d, when a jackpot is won, the probability of the jackpot symbols X7, X8, or X9 being determined is 49%, and the probability of the jackpot symbols X10, X11, or X12 being determined is 51%.
Furthermore, if a minor win is determined by the aforementioned draw, minor win symbol Y5 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 49, minor win symbol Y6 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 50 and 99, minor win symbol Y7 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 100 and 149, minor win symbol Y8 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 150 and 179, and minor win symbol Y9 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 180 and 199. In this second starting prize entry determination table 111d, when a minor win is determined, the probability of minor win symbol Y5 or Y6 being determined is 50%, and the probability of minor win symbol Y7, Y8, or Y9 being determined is 50%.
Furthermore, if the above-mentioned lottery results in a bonus time, and the special symbol random number is between 0 and 199, the bonus time symbol J3 is determined. In this second starting prize entry judgment table 111d, the probability of the bonus time symbol J3 being determined when the bonus time is awarded is 100%.
Furthermore, if the aforementioned draw results in a loss, the losing symbol Z2 is determined.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, similar to the first form, when a special symbol is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern, which defines the variation time and variation performance of the special symbol, is determined based on the result of that determination. At the same time, the stop display time (so-called symbol confirmation time), which is the time during which the special symbol remains stopped after the variation display of the special symbol has finished, is also determined.

As shown in Figure 74, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes, as a special electric mechanism operation table 112, a first operation table 112d referenced in special games based on the determination of jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6; a second operation table 112e referenced in special games executed via special games based on the determination of jackpot symbols X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, or X12, or via minor win games based on the determination of minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, or Y9; a third operation table 112f referenced in minor win games based on the determination of minor win symbols Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4; and a fourth operation table 112g referenced in minor win games based on the determination of minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, or Y9.

As shown in Figure 74(a), according to the first operation table 112d, in the special game executed when a jackpot is won in the first special random number draw and the jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6 are determined, a total of three round games are executed, each ending when either the large prize slot 18 is open for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the large prize slot 18. Furthermore, in each round game, the large prize slot 18 is opened only once (a 29.0-second opening is performed once), and the interval time between each round game is set to 2.0 seconds. In addition, the distribution member 59 remains in the first position throughout each round game.

As shown in Figure 74(b), according to the second operation table 112e, in special games executed when a jackpot is won in the second special random number draw and the jackpot symbols X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, or X12 are determined, or when a minor win is won in the second special random number draw and a predetermined number (1) of game balls enter the special area during a minor win game based on the determination of minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, or Y9, a total of 10 round games are executed, ending under the same conditions as the first operation table 112d described above. The opening and closing patterns of the opening and closing doors 18b, the operation modes of the distribution member 59, and the interval time during the round games are also set to be the same as those in the first operation table 112d.

As shown in Figure 74(c), according to the third operation table 112e, the mini-win game, which is executed when a mini-win is won in the first special random number draw and the mini-win symbols Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined, is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: the large prize opening 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds, or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open. Also, while the large prize opening 18 is open, the distribution member 59 remains in the first position.
In other words, if a minor win is achieved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15, the main prize slot 18 is only open for 0.05 seconds during the minor win game, regardless of which minor win symbol is determined. Therefore, even if the player performs what is known as "right-handed shooting" during this minor win game, it is extremely difficult to get the game ball into the main prize slot 18. Furthermore, since the distribution member 59 remains in the first position during this minor win game, even if a game ball enters the main prize slot 18, this game ball will not enter the special area.

As shown in Figure 74(d), according to the fourth operation table 112f, the small win game, which is executed when a small win is won in the second special random number drawing and the small win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, or Y9 are determined, is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: the large prize opening 18 is opened twice for 0.9 seconds each time, or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open. Furthermore, the closing time of the large prize opening 18 between the end of the first opening and the start of the second opening is set to 0.6 seconds. In addition, while the large prize opening 18 is open, the distribution member 59 remains in the second position.
In other words, if a minor win is achieved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16, the main prize slot 18 will be open for a total of 1.8 seconds during the minor win game, regardless of which minor win symbol is determined. Therefore, if the player is using the so-called right-hand shooting technique during this minor win game, the game ball can be sent into the main prize slot 18. Furthermore, since the distribution member 59 remains in the second position during this minor win game, any game ball that enters the main prize slot 18 will always enter the special area.
Therefore, if a minor win is achieved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize entry opening 16, and the player is shooting to the right, a predetermined number of game balls (1 ball) will enter the special area during the minor win game based on that win, and the special game described above (see Figure 74(b)) will be executed based on that entry.

(Summary of the game state to be set)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, if a special game is executed based on the determination of a jackpot symbol (winning a jackpot), the game state after the special game ends is set according to the type of jackpot symbol that was determined.

Furthermore, if a minor win game is executed based on the determination of a minor win symbol (winning a minor win), and a special game is executed based on the fact that a predetermined number (1 ball) of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game, the game state after the special game ends is set according to the type of minor win symbol that was determined. In the pachinko machine P according to this form, game balls can enter the special area during a minor win game based on the determination of minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, or Y9. If a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during these minor win games and a special game is executed, the game state after the special game ends is set according to the type of minor win symbol that was determined.
Furthermore, if a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the special area during a minor win game and the special game is not executed, the above processing will not be performed. In the pachinko machine P according to this form, during a minor win game based on the determination of minor win symbols Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4, game balls cannot enter the special area, and if a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the special area during these minor win games, the special game will not be executed. Also, during a minor win game based on the determination of minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, or Y9, if, for example, a right-handed shot is not performed and the game balls do not enter the big prize opening 18, a predetermined number of game balls will not enter the special area, and the special game will not be executed. In these cases, the above processing will not be performed.

Furthermore, in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), if a time-saving symbol is determined (winning the granting of time-saving) and that time-saving symbol is displayed as stopped, the game state after the display of the stopped time-saving symbol (after the display of the time-saving symbol's variation ends) is set according to the type of time-saving symbol determined. In contrast, in a time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2)), if a time-saving symbol is determined and that time-saving symbol is displayed as stopped, no new game state based on the determination of that time-saving symbol is set after the display of the stopped time-saving symbol. Instead, the game state that was set at the time the time-saving symbol was determined (when the win/loss lottery was executed) is maintained. In other words, even if a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbols stop during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2, the time-saving game state based on that win will not be reset; the current low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 will continue.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 75, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes a first game state setting table 113e which defines the game state settings after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot by a first special random number and determining jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3, or after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot by a second special random number and determining jackpot symbols X7, X8, or X9, and after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot by a first special random number and determining jackpot symbols X4, X5, or X6, after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot by a second special random number and determining jackpot symbols X10, X11, or X12, or after winning a minor win by a second special random number and determining minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, The system includes: a second game state setting table 113f which defines the settings for the game state after the completion of a special game executed via a minor win game based on the determination of Y8 or Y9; a third game state setting table 113g which defines the settings for the game state set when, in a non-time-saving game state, a time-saving bonus is awarded by the first special symbol random number, a time-saving symbol J1 is determined, and the time-saving symbol J1 is displayed as stopped; and a fourth game state setting table 113h which defines the settings for the game state set when, in a non-time-saving game state, a time-saving bonus is awarded by the first special symbol random number, a time-saving symbol J2 is determined, and the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed as stopped; or when, in a non-time-saving game state, a time-saving bonus is awarded by the second special symbol random number, a time-saving symbol J3 is determined, and the time-saving symbol J3 is displayed as stopped.

As shown in Figure 75(a), regardless of the current game state, if a jackpot is won through a draw based on the first special symbol random number and the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined, or if a jackpot is won through a draw based on the second special symbol random number and the jackpot symbols X7, X8, or X9 are determined, the game state after the special game based on that determination is set to a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state. In other words, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.

As shown in Figure 75(b), regardless of the game state being set, if a jackpot is won by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the jackpot symbols X4, X5, or X6 are determined, if a jackpot is won by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the jackpot symbols X10, X11, or X12 are determined, or if a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during a minor win game based on a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, or Y9 are determined, then the game state after the end of the special game based on these will be set to a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2. In other words, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the end of the special game.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, two types of time-saving rounds are set: the first time-saving round and the second time-saving round. When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set, the first time-saving round is set to 6 rounds and the second time-saving round is set to 11 rounds.
In the following, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 in which 6 rounds are set for the first time-saving round and 11 rounds for the second time-saving round) that is set after the end of the special game described above will also be referred to as low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A.

When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A is set, after the setting of the game state, (1) whether the number of times the special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as the second special symbol) changes based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize slot 16 without the special game being executed has reached the first time-saving round (6 times) (whether the result of the win/loss lottery by the second special symbol random number has been derived 6 times), or (2) whether the number of times the special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as the first special symbol) changes based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize slot 15 without the special game being executed The low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A continues until one of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (1) The sum of the number and the number of variations of the second special symbol reaches the second time-saving round (11 times) (i.e., the results of the win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number and the win/loss lottery using the second special symbol random number have been derived a total of 11 times); or (3) The number of times the small win symbol Y1 or Y2, which can be determined based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize entry opening 15, is determined without the special game being executed reaches the termination determination number. In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, the termination determination number is set to 5, which is more than the upper limit of the first reserve number (4).

In this pachinko machine P, the main RAM 103 is provided with a first time-saving count memory area and a second time-saving count memory area. The first time-saving count memory area stores the remaining number of special symbol variations until the first time-saving count reaches zero (hereinafter also referred to as the first remaining variation count), and the second time-saving count memory area stores the remaining number of special symbol variations until the second time-saving count reaches zero (hereinafter also referred to as the second remaining variation count).
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the main RAM 103 is provided with a termination decision count storage area, and this termination decision count storage area stores the remaining number of times minor winning symbols have been determined until the aforementioned termination decision count becomes 0 (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining minor winning decision count).
Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, when a special symbol variation is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16, both the first remaining variation count stored in the first time-saving count memory area and the first remaining variation count stored in the second time-saving count memory area are updated when the variation display of the special symbol ends. When a special symbol variation is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15, only the second remaining variation count stored in the second time-saving count memory area is updated when the variation display of the special symbol ends. Additionally, when a minor win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the remaining minor win determination count stored in the termination determination count memory area is updated when the variation display of the special symbol ends.
Then, as a result of these processes, if any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions are met, the low-probability game state remains the same, but the time-saving game state JT2 is changed to a non-time-saving game state, and the game state is changed to a normal game state.

As shown in Figure 75(c), in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), if a time-saving bonus is awarded through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined and stopped, the non-time-saving game state is changed to the time-saving game state JT1 while the low-probability game state remains the same, at the time the fluctuation display of the time-saving symbol J1 as a special symbol ends (the time the time-saving symbol J1 is stopped and displayed). In other words, when the fluctuation display of the time-saving symbol J1 ends, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set at the time of this end (i.e., before the stop display time has elapsed).
Furthermore, when the aforementioned low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, the first time-saving rounds are set to 300 and the second time-saving rounds to 305.

When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 continues until one of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (1) the number of spins of the first special symbol reaches the first time-saving round (300 spins) without the special game being played (the result of the win/fail lottery by the random number of the first special symbol is derived 300 times); (2) the sum of the number of spins of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the second time-saving round (305 spins) without the special game being played (the result of the win/fail lottery by the random number of the first special symbol and the result of the win/fail lottery by the random number of the second special symbol is derived a total of 305 times); or (3) the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2, which can be determined based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize slot 15, is determined reaches the termination determination number without the special game being played. Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 1, which is less than the maximum number of reserved balls (4).

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, when a special symbol variation is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15, both the first remaining variation count stored in the first time-saving count memory area and the second remaining variation count stored in the second time-saving count memory area are updated when the variation display of the special symbol ends. When a special symbol variation is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16, only the second remaining variation count stored in the second time-saving count memory area is updated when the variation display of the special symbol ends. Additionally, when a minor win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the remaining minor win determination count stored in the termination determination count memory area is updated when the variation display of the special symbol ends.
Then, as a result of these processes, if any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions are met, the low-probability game state remains the same, but the time-saving game state JT1 is changed to a non-time-saving game state, and the game state is changed to a normal game state.

As shown in Figure 75(d), in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), if a time-saving bonus is awarded by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined and the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed as stopped, or if a time-saving bonus is awarded by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the time-saving symbol J3 is determined and the time-saving symbol J3 is displayed as stopped, the non-time-saving game state is changed to time-saving game state JT2 while the low-probability game state remains the same, at the time the fluctuation display of the time-saving symbol J2 or J3 as a special symbol ends (at the time the time-saving symbol J2 or J3 is displayed as stopped). In other words, when the fluctuation display of the time-saving symbol J2 or J3 ends, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set at the time of this end (before the stop display time has elapsed).
Furthermore, when the aforementioned low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set, the first time-saving round is set to 1 and the second time-saving round is set to 6.
In the following, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 in which one time is set for the first time-saving round and six times for the second time-saving round) that is set after the time-saving symbols stop as described above will also be referred to as low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B.

When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B is set, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B continues until one of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (1) the number of spins of the second special symbol reaches the first time-saving round (1 time) without the special game being executed (the result of the win/fail lottery by the random number of the second special symbol is derived once); (2) the sum of the number of spins of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the second time-saving round (6 times) without the special game being executed (the result of the win/fail lottery by the random number of the first special symbol and the result of the win/fail lottery by the random number of the second special symbol is derived a total of 6 times); or (3) the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2, which can be determined based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize slot 15, is determined reaches the termination determination number without the special game being executed. Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 5, which is more than the maximum number of reserved balls (4).

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, when a special symbol variation is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16, both the first remaining variation count stored in the first time-saving count memory area and the second remaining variation count stored in the second time-saving count memory area are updated when the variation display of the special symbol ends. When a special symbol variation is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15, only the second remaining variation count stored in the second time-saving count memory area is updated when the variation display of the special symbol ends. Also, when a minor win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the remaining minor win determination count stored in the termination determination count memory area is updated when the variation display of the special symbol ends.
Then, as a result of these processes, if any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions are met, the low-probability game state remains the same, but the time-saving game state JT2 is changed to a non-time-saving game state, and the game state is changed to a normal game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this form, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 where left-handed play is performed, there is a chance that the time-saving bonus will be awarded in the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and although the possibility is low, there is also a chance that the time-saving bonus will be awarded in the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number.
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-A and LJT2-B where right-handed play is performed, there is a chance that the bonus time will be awarded in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and there is also a chance that the bonus time will be awarded in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number.
Thus, even in game states other than the normal game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B), if a win/loss lottery based on the first or second special symbol random number results in a time-saving bonus being awarded, time-saving symbols J1, J2, or J3 may be determined and these time-saving symbols may be displayed. In this case, the game state that was set will continue as is.

(Regarding the conditions for ending the shortened game mode)
In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same during both the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and even if a game ball is launched toward the second game state 12b, the game ball will not enter the second starting prize entry point 16. During these game states, the player is instructed to play in the first game area 12a, and there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the first starting prize entry point 15.
If a jackpot is won based on a win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number (a random number obtained when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15) during normal gameplay or low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, a special game consisting of three rounds will be executed, and after the completion of the special game, the low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2-A may be set.
Furthermore, if, during normal gameplay, the player wins a time-saving bonus based on a win/fail lottery using the first special symbol random number and the time-saving bonus symbol is displayed, the subsequent gameplay state will be set to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B. On the other hand, even if the player wins a time-saving bonus based on a win/fail lottery using the first special symbol random number and the time-saving bonus symbol is displayed while in the low-probability time-saving game state LTJ1, the gameplay state will not change and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will continue.

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as during the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. However, when a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, it is possible for the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry point 16 with a high frequency. During these game states, the player is instructed to play in the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the second starting prize entry point 16.
If a jackpot is won based on a win/loss lottery using a second special random number (a random number obtained when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16), a special game consisting of 10 rounds will be executed, and after the completion of this special game, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A may be set. Also, if a minor win is won, a special game consisting of 10 rounds will be executed via a minor win game, and after the completion of this special game, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A may be set.
In other words, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, the decrease in game balls as the game progresses can be suppressed more than during the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, due to the prize balls awarded based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize entry 16. Furthermore, special games can be played not only based on the winning of a big win but also based on the winning of a small win. Moreover, in these special games, more rounds of gameplay are played than in the special games that occur when a big win is won during the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, making it a more advantageous game state than the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
As mentioned above, if a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbols stop during normal gameplay, either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B will be set. However, after transitioning from the normal gameplay state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, even if a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbols stop during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B will not be set. Therefore, the normal gameplay state, in which the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B can be set by winning a time-saving bonus and the display of time-saving symbols, is a more advantageous gameplay state than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. As a result, similar to the first form, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay feature in which the normal gameplay state before transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 becomes a chance zone, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In this pachinko machine P, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B are terminated not only by the number of times the first special symbol is rotated or the second special symbol is rotated, but also by the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, which can be determined based on the number of times the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15. In other words, the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined is set as the termination condition for the time-saving game state (time-saving termination condition).
This increases the opportunities for the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1, LJT2-A, and LJT2-B to end and for the normal game state, which is positioned as a chance zone, to be set, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined (number of termination determinations: 1) that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends is set to be different from the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined (number of termination determinations: 5) that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B end. Specifically, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B do not end even if the time-saving termination condition related to the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined (number of termination determinations) that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends is met.
This allows the triggers for the termination of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, and low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B to differ based on the determination of the small win symbol Y1 or Y2, thereby improving gameplay and increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 that will terminate the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B is determined (number of termination determinations: 5 times) is set to be greater than the upper limit of the first reserve (4).
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, if both the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are stored, they are processed in the order in which they were stored in the reserve storage area. Therefore, for example, if a jackpot is won during normal gameplay where left-handed play is performed or during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, and low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2-A is set after the special game based on the win ends, or if a time-saving bonus is awarded during normal gameplay, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined and displayed as a stop, then when these game states are set, if the first special symbol random number acquired during the normal gameplay state or low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1 prior to the setting is stored, the stored first special symbol random number will be processed before the second special symbol random number newly acquired during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2-A or low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2-B. Then, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, there is a possibility of winning a minor prize through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the minor prize symbol Y1 or Y2 may be determined.

Here, for example, if the setting is such that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B ends when the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined only a number of times equal to or less than the upper limit of the first reserve (4 balls), then there is a possibility that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B will end before the player starts shooting game balls toward the second game area 12b. In that case, even though the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B, which are more advantageous than the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, are set, these advantageous game states will end without the player being able to enter the second starting prize entry point 16 (without being able to receive the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number), which may reduce the player's enjoyment.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, as described above, the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 that will terminate the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A and the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B is determined (termination determination number) is set to be greater than the upper limit of the first reserve (4). As a result, even if all of the first special symbol random numbers stored before the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B was set lead to the determination of the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B will not terminate. Therefore, even after all the win/loss draws based on the first special symbol random numbers described above have been completed, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B continue, allowing the player to enter the second starting prize entry point 16 and participate in the win/loss draw based on the second special symbol random numbers, thus preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment.

In the pachinko machine P of this form, the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B) ends based on the number of times a specific small win symbol (Y1 or Y2) is determined out of all possible small win symbols. However, it is not limited to this, and the time-saving game state may also end based on the number of times all small win symbols are determined (i.e., the number of times a small win is achieved).
Furthermore, various conditions can be adopted for ending the time-saving mode related to minor wins. For example, the time-saving game state may be terminated when the number of times each of multiple minor win symbols has been determined reaches a predetermined termination determination number (for example, when the number of determinations for minor win symbol Y1 reaches 2 (termination determination number) and the number of determinations for minor win symbol Y2 reaches 3 (termination determination number)). Alternatively, the time-saving game state may be terminated when the minor win symbols are determined in a predetermined order (for example, when the minor win symbols are determined in the order of minor win symbol Y1 → minor win symbol Y2 → minor win symbol Y1). Alternatively, the time-saving game state may be terminated when the number of determinations for minor win symbols reaches 3 (termination determination number) between the time-saving game state is set and the special symbol variation display occurs 30 times).
Furthermore, the time-saving game termination conditions related to minor wins may not be set for all time-saving game states, but only for some of them. For example, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 may terminate based on the conditions related to determining minor wins, while the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-A and LJT2-B may not terminate based on the conditions related to determining minor wins.
Even in the above case, the triggers for ending the shortened play state become more varied, improving the gameplay and increasing the player's interest.

(Regarding the handling of cases where a time-saving bonus is awarded when the time-saving game state ends)
As described above, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends when the number of remaining spins for the first special symbol reaches the first time-saving spin count, as a result of updating the number of remaining spins for the first and second special symbols when the display of the special symbol variation ends, and the normal game state is set. Similarly, the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-A and LJT2-B end when the number of remaining spins for the first and second special symbols reaches the first time-saving spin count, as a result of updating the number of remaining spins for the first and second special symbols when the display of the special symbol variation ends, and the normal game state is set. In the following, the process of updating the number of remaining spins for the first and second special symbols will also be referred to as the "remaining spin count update process".
On the other hand, in normal gameplay, if a time-saving bonus is awarded and a time-saving symbol is determined and that time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state, then at the time the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state (when the display of the time-saving symbol's movement ends), either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B is set according to the type of time-saving symbol determined.

Here, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, there are cases where the player wins the time-saving bonus in the draw when the number of spins of the first special symbol reaches the first time-saving round, and in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A and low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, there are cases where the player wins the time-saving bonus in the draw when the number of spins of the second special symbol reaches the first time-saving round.
The process for setting the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B based on the stop display of the time-saving symbols (the process for setting the time-saving game state based on the stop display of the time-saving symbols), and the process for updating the remaining number of spins are both performed when the display of the time-saving symbols ends (when the time-saving symbols stop). However, let's assume that the process for setting the time-saving game state based on the stop display of the time-saving symbols is performed after the process for updating the remaining number of spins has been performed.
In the above case, since the normal game state is set when the remaining spin count update process is performed, at the time the process for setting the time-saving game state based on the stop display of the time-saving symbols is executed, the time-saving symbols will have stopped and been displayed in the normal game state, and the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B) will be set again. In other words, if the process for setting the time-saving game state based on the stop display of the time-saving symbols is performed after the remaining spin count update process, in the above case, a situation will occur where multiple time-saving game states are set consecutively, making the boundaries and triggers for setting the time-saving game states ambiguous, which may cause discomfort during gameplay.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the system is configured to perform a process to update the remaining number of spins after performing a process related to setting the time-saving game state based on the stop display of the time-saving symbols.
As a result, in the above case, at the time the process for setting the time-saving game state based on the stop display of the time-saving symbols is executed, the remaining spin count update process has not been performed, and the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B) remains set, and the time-saving symbols are displayed as stopped in the time-saving game state. Therefore, no new time-saving game state is set based on the stop display of the time-saving symbols. Then, the normal game state is set when the remaining spin count update process is performed. Thus, it is possible to prevent situations where the boundaries and triggers for setting the time-saving game state become ambiguous, and it is possible to prevent the possibility of the game feeling unnatural.

Furthermore, as described above, the system may be configured to perform processing related to setting the time-saving game state based on the stop display of the time-saving symbols after the remaining number of spins update processing has been performed, so that multiple time-saving game states are set consecutively in the above case.

(Summary of variation pattern table 114)
As shown in Figure 76, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes a variable pattern table 114, which comprises a table MP11 referenced during normal gameplay, a table MP21 referenced during low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT1, and a table MP31 referenced during low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT2 (during low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT2-A and low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT2-B).
These variation pattern tables 114, as in the first form, define variation pattern commands corresponding to variation patterns for which a predetermined variation time is set, according to the determined special symbols (losing symbols Z1, Z2, winning symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, X12, minor winning symbols Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, Y9, time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3), the current number of reserved symbols (the first and second number of reserved symbols at the time the variation pattern command is determined (the time the win/loss lottery is executed)), and the variation pattern random number.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 76(a), in the table MP11 (the variable pattern table 114 referenced during normal gameplay), if the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number results in a loss and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the same variable pattern command (variation pattern) as when the losing symbol Z1 was determined during normal gameplay in the first form is determined.
Furthermore, if a jackpot is won through a draw based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6 are determined, the same variation pattern command as when jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined during normal gameplay in the first form is determined.
Furthermore, if a minor win is determined by the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number and minor win symbols Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "05H" associated with the variation pattern "13 seconds variation" will be determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if the lottery based on the first special symbol random number results in a win/loss of a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the same variation pattern command as when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined during normal gameplay in the first form will be determined. Similarly, if the lottery based on the first special symbol random number results in a win/loss of a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the same variation pattern command as when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined during normal gameplay in the first form will be determined.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 76(a), in table MP11, if the draw based on the second special symbol random number results in a loss and the losing symbol Z2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "04H" is determined, which is associated with the variation pattern "10-second variation" (a variation pattern in which the variation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the variation time for the second half is set to 10 seconds).
Furthermore, if a jackpot is won through a draw based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbols X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, or X12 are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "09H," which is associated with the "10-second variation" variation pattern, will be determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if a minor win is determined by the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, or Y9 are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "06H" associated with the "10-second variation" variation pattern will be determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if the bonus time is awarded based on the second special random number, and the bonus time symbol J3 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "0CH" associated with the "10-second variation" variation pattern will be determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.

As shown in Figure 76(b), in the table MP21 (variation pattern table 114 referenced during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1), if the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number results in a loss and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the same variation pattern command as when the losing symbol Z1 was determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 in the first form is determined.
Furthermore, if a jackpot is won through a draw based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6 are determined, the same variation pattern command as when jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 in the first form is determined.
Furthermore, if a minor win is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, when the minor win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "15H" is determined, which corresponds to the variation pattern "15-second variation" (a variation pattern in which the variation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the variation time for the second half is set to 15 seconds). When the minor win symbol Y3 or Y4 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "16H" is determined, which corresponds to the variation pattern "15-second variation".
Furthermore, if the lottery based on the first special symbol random number results in a win/loss of a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the same variation pattern command as when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 in the first form is determined. Similarly, if the lottery based on the first special symbol random number results in a win/loss of a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the same variation pattern command as when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 in the first form is determined.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 76(b), in table MP21, if the draw based on the second special symbol random number results in a loss and the losing symbol Z2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "14H" associated with the variation pattern "10 seconds variation" is determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if a jackpot is won through a draw based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbols X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, or X12 are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "19H," which is associated with the "10-second variation" variation pattern, will be determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if a minor win is determined by the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, or Y9 are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "17H," which corresponds to the "10-second variation" variation pattern, will be determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if the bonus time is awarded based on the second special random number, and the bonus time symbol J3 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variable pattern command "1DH" associated with the "10-second variable" variable pattern will be determined, regardless of the value of the variable pattern random number.

As shown in Figure 76(c), in table MP31 (variation pattern table 114 referenced during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2), if the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number results in a loss and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, then regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "50H" associated with the "2-second variation" variation pattern is determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if a jackpot is won through a draw based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6 are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "5AH" associated with the "2-second variation" variation pattern will be determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if a minor win is determined by the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number and minor win symbols Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "55H" associated with the variation pattern "2 seconds variation" will be determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if the lottery based on the first special symbol random number results in a win or loss for the time-saving feature being granted and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "5DH" associated with the "2-second variation" variation pattern will be determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if the draw based on the second special symbol random number results in a loss and the losing symbol Z2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "51H," which is associated with the "10-second variation" variation pattern, will be determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if a jackpot is won through a draw based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbols X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, or X12 are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "59H" associated with the "10-second variation" variation pattern will be determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if a minor win is determined by the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, or Y9 are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variation pattern command "56H" associated with the "10-second variation" variation pattern will be determined, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.
Furthermore, if the bonus time is awarded through a lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the bonus time symbol J3 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, the variable pattern command "5EH" associated with the "10-second variable" variable pattern will be determined, regardless of the value of the variable pattern random number.

(Summary of the display time of the stop)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, as in the first form, the stop display time table 115 specifies the current game state (the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery) and the type of special symbol to be displayed.
As shown in Figure 77, according to the stop display time table 115, when the current game state is the normal game state, a stop display time of 0.5 seconds is determined when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, a stop display time of 0.5 seconds is determined when a jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, X11 or X12 is determined, a stop display time of 0.5 seconds is determined when a minor jackpot symbol Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8 or Y9 is determined, a stop display time of 20 seconds is determined when a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, and a stop display time of 0.5 seconds is determined when a time-saving symbol J3 is determined.
Furthermore, if the current game state is the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, when a winning symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, X11 or X12 is determined, when a minor winning symbol Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8 or Y9 is determined, and when a time-saving symbol J1, J2 or J3 is determined, a stop display time of 0.5 seconds is determined in each case.

(Summary of special symbol stop display)
Although not specifically shown in the diagram, both the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31 are composed of multiple LEDs, and different lighting patterns for these LEDs are defined for each type of special symbol.
Then, when a special symbol (first special symbol) is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15, the LED of the first special symbol display device 30 starts flashing (i.e., the display of the special symbol variation starts), and after the variation time has elapsed, the flashing of the LED stops (i.e., the display of the special symbol variation ends), and the LED lights up according to the lighting pattern corresponding to the determined first special symbol. This indicates that the first special symbol has stopped.
Furthermore, when a special symbol (second special symbol) is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16, the aforementioned LED on the second special symbol display device 31 begins to flash. After a set time has elapsed, the flashing of the LED ends, and the LED lights up according to the lighting pattern corresponding to the determined second special symbol. This indicates that the second special symbol has stopped.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, when a special game is executed based on a big win, after the special game ends, a game state corresponding to the type of big win symbol determined based on the big win is set. Also, when a special game is executed via a minor win game based on a minor win, after the special game ends, a game state corresponding to the type of minor win symbol determined based on the minor win is set. Furthermore, when a time-saving bonus is awarded during normal gameplay, after the display of the special symbol variation based on that award ends, a game state corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the time-saving bonus is set.
Thus, based on the type of special symbol determined by the draw, a new game state may be set, and if a new game state is set, the type of this game state is determined. Therefore, players are highly interested in the type of special symbol that has been determined. For this reason, many players check the lighting patterns of the LEDs on the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31 to determine the type of special symbol that has stopped and been displayed.

By the way, the jackpot symbol, the minor jackpot symbol, and the time-saving symbol are all displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31 until the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed and the display of the next special symbol variation begins.
If a winning symbol (one of X1 to X12) is determined, a special game based on that determination will be played after the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed. If the first or second special symbol random number is stored when the special game ends, the display of the next special symbol will begin. Therefore, the winning symbol will remain displayed even after the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed until the aforementioned special game ends.
Similarly, for example, if a minor winning symbol (any of Y5 to Y9) is determined, the minor winning game based on that determination will be executed after the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed. Furthermore, if a special game is executed via the minor winning game, and if the first or second special symbol random number is stored when the special game ends, the display of the next special symbol variation will begin. Therefore, when a special game is executed via a minor winning game, the minor winning symbol will remain stopped and displayed even after the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed until the special game executed via the minor winning game ends.
In contrast, if a time-saving symbol (one of J1 to J3) is determined during normal gameplay, and the first or second special symbol random number is stored when the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed, the display of the next special symbol will begin. Here, since players often continue shooting game balls as long as the number of reserved balls (first reserved balls, second reserved balls) has not reached the upper limit, there is a high probability that the first or second special symbol random number will be stored when the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed. Therefore, if a time-saving symbol is determined during normal gameplay, it is highly likely that the said time-saving symbol will only be displayed until the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed.

If a time-saving bonus is awarded during normal gameplay and a time-saving symbol is determined, that time-saving symbol will be displayed for a period of 0.5 seconds or 20 seconds (see Figure 77), which is the display time for stopping the symbol.
On the other hand, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol is determined, the jackpot symbol will be displayed for a predetermined stop display time of 0.5 seconds (see Figure 77), in addition to the period from the start to the end of the special game (opening time (10 seconds in this form), execution time of all rounds (at least 30 seconds for 4 rounds, at least 80 seconds for 10 rounds), ending time (10 seconds in this form)). Also, if a minor win is won and one of the minor win symbols (Y5 to Y9) is determined, the minor win symbol will be displayed for a predetermined stop display time of 0.5 seconds (see Figure 77), in addition to the period from the start to the end of the minor win game (opening time (3 seconds in this form), execution time of the minor win game (approximately 2.5 seconds), ending time (0.5 seconds in this form)), and the period from the start to the end of the special game.
In other words, the period during which a time-saving symbol is displayed when a time-saving symbol is determined during normal gameplay is shorter than the period during which a jackpot symbol or the aforementioned minor jackpot symbol is displayed when a jackpot symbol or minor jackpot symbol is determined. Therefore, determining the type of time-saving symbol determined during normal gameplay by checking the lighting patterns of the LEDs in the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31 is more difficult than determining the type of jackpot symbol or minor jackpot symbol, and may reduce the player's enjoyment.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, the number of types of time-saving symbols that can be determined when a time-saving bonus is awarded (3 types of time-saving symbols J1 to J3) is set to be less than the number of types of jackpot symbols that can be determined when a jackpot is won (12 types of jackpot symbols X1 to X12) and the number of types of minor jackpot symbols that can be determined when a minor jackpot is won (9 types of minor jackpot symbols Y1 to Y9).
As a result, the number of LED lighting patterns displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31 when a time-saving bonus is awarded is fewer than the number of LED lighting patterns displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31 when a big win or a small win is awarded. Therefore, it becomes easier to determine the type of time-saving bonus symbol than to determine the type of big win or small win symbol by the LED lighting pattern, thus preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, the types of special symbols that can be stopped and displayed in each special symbol display device are set such that the types of jackpot symbols that can be determined when a jackpot is won are less than the types of minor jackpot symbols that can be determined when a minor jackpot is won.
Specifically, the first special symbol display device 30 can stop and display six types of jackpot symbols (X1 to X6) when a jackpot is won, four types of minor jackpot symbols (Y1 to Y4) can stop and display when a minor jackpot is won, and two types of time-saving symbols (J1, J2) can stop and display when a time-saving bonus is awarded. In addition, the second special symbol display device 31 can stop and display six types of jackpot symbols (X7 to X12) when a jackpot is won, five types of minor jackpot symbols (Y5 to Y9) can stop and display when a minor jackpot is won, and one type of time-saving symbol (J3) can stop and display when a time-saving bonus is awarded.
As a result, in both the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31, the number of LED lighting patterns that light up when a time-saving bonus is awarded is fewer than the number of LED lighting patterns that light up when a big win or a small win is awarded. Therefore, in both special symbol display devices, it becomes easier to determine the type of time-saving symbol by the LED lighting pattern than to determine the type of big win or small win symbol, thus preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, the types of special symbols associated with each setting (game state set) based on the determination of special symbols are set such that the types of time-saving symbols that can be determined when a time-saving bonus is awarded are fewer than the types of jackpot symbols that can be determined when a jackpot is won, and the types of minor jackpot symbols that can be determined when a minor jackpot is won.
Specifically, in the pachinko machine P of this form, there are six types of jackpot symbols (X1 to X3, X7 to X9) which are set to set the normal game state after the special game ends, six types of jackpot symbols (X4 to X6, X10 to X12) which are set to set the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A after the special game ends, and four types of minor win symbols (Y1 to Y4) which are set to prevent the execution of the special game via the minor win game. There are five types of small win symbols (Y5 to Y9) that are set to trigger a special game through gameplay, and after the special game ends, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A is set. There is one type of time-saving symbol (J1) that, when determined during normal gameplay, sets a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. There are two types of time-saving symbols (J2 and J3) that, when determined during normal gameplay, set a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B.
This makes it easier to identify the type of time-saving symbol than to identify the type of jackpot or minor win symbol based on the LED lighting pattern. Furthermore, it becomes easier to determine the settings based on the determination of special symbols using time-saving symbols compared to jackpot or minor win symbols, thus preventing a decline in player interest.

In the pachinko machine P according to this form, multiple types of jackpot symbols are provided for each game state set after the special game ends, and multiple types of minor jackpot symbols are provided depending on whether or not the special game is performed. For example, multiple types of jackpot symbols and minor jackpot symbols may be provided for each round game performed during the special game.
Specifically, multiple types of jackpot symbols may be provided that result in three rounds of gameplay during the special game, and multiple types of jackpot symbols may be provided that result in ten rounds of gameplay during the special game. Alternatively, multiple types of minor jackpot symbols may be provided that result in three rounds of gameplay during the special game accessed via a minor jackpot game, and multiple types of minor jackpot symbols may be provided that result in ten rounds of gameplay during the special game accessed via a minor jackpot game.
Furthermore, even with the settings described above, it is also possible to set the number of possible symbols for determining the time-saving bonus to be less than the number of possible symbols for determining the jackpot when a big win is achieved, or the number of possible symbols for determining the minor win when a minor win is achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, specific external information may also be output to an external device, similar to the first embodiment. For example, when the main CPU 101 wins a jackpot through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay or low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, it may start outputting specific external information to an external device. Subsequently, when normal gameplay is set, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined during the normal gameplay state and the low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1 is set, it may stop outputting specific external information to an external device.
Furthermore, other controls related to the output of specific external information may be set to the same content as in the first form or the other setting examples described above.

(Outline of processing in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
Next, we will explain the outline of the processes executed by the main control board 100 in accordance with the progress of the special game, regular game, minor win game, and special game as described above, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment, using a flowchart. Processes that are the same as those in the first embodiment, or processes that are nearly the same as those in the first embodiment and whose implementation method (application method to this embodiment) can be understood by a person skilled in the art, will be assigned the same step numbers as in the first embodiment, and explanations will be omitted in principle.

First, the special area detection process, which performs predetermined processing based on the game ball entering a special area, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 78. This special area detection process is executed in place of the first form of specific area detection process (see Figure 32).
In step 670-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a minor win game is in progress. If it determines that a minor win game is not in progress, it terminates the special area detection process. On the other hand, if it determines that a minor win game is in progress, it proceeds to the next step 671-1.
In step 671-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal has been input a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once) from a special area detection sensor (not shown) connected to the main control board 100, which detects the entry of a game ball into the special area. If it determines that the detection signal from the special area detection sensor has not been input a predetermined number of times, the special area detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that the detection signal from the special area detection sensor has been input a predetermined number of times, the process proceeds to the next step 672-2.
In step 672-2, the main CPU 101 turns on an entry flag indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special area. Then, it terminates the special area detection process.

Next, the special symbol variation start process (step 701 of the special symbol-related control process (see Figure 33)) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 79.
In step 801-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether a first special random number or a second special random number is stored in the reserved memory area, that is, whether the first reserved counter is "1" or greater, or whether the second reserved counter is "1" or greater. If it determines that either is stored, the process proceeds to step 803-1. On the other hand, if it determines that neither is stored, the process proceeds to step 812, which performs customer waiting determination processing.
In step 803-1, the main CPU 101 performs a shift operation of the reserved memory area. Specifically, it stores each random number stored in the first memory unit in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and shifts each random number stored in the second to eighth memory units to a memory unit with a smaller number. As a result, each random number stored in the reserved memory area is used in the success/failure determination process in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) manner. The process then proceeds to step 805, which performs processing related to the change count counter.

Next, the win/loss determination process (step 806 of the special symbol variation start process (see Figures 34 and 79)) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 80.
In the pachinko machine P of this form, if it is determined that a jackpot has not been won, a minor win determination process is performed to determine whether a minor win has been won, before executing a time-saving bonus award determination process (step 853) which determines whether a time-saving bonus has been awarded.

Specifically, if it is determined in step 851 that it is not a jackpot win, the process proceeds to step 852-1.
In step 852-1, the main CPU 101 executes a minor win/failure determination process to determine whether a minor win is awarded (i.e., to determine whether a minor win is awarded) based on the selected win/failure random number determination table 110 and the win/failure random number stored in a predetermined processing area in step 803-1 (the same win/failure random number that was the target of determination in the big win/failure determination process). Specifically, the main CPU 101 obtains information on the numerical range in which a minor win is awarded from the table mentioned above, and determines whether the aforementioned win/failure random number falls within this obtained numerical range. If the aforementioned win/failure random number falls within the aforementioned numerical range, it is determined that a minor win has been awarded, and if the aforementioned win/failure random number does not fall within the aforementioned numerical range, it is determined that a minor win has not been awarded. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 852-2.
In step 852-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the minor win determination process performed in step 852-1 was a minor win (i.e., whether a minor win was achieved). If it determines that it was not a minor win (minor win not achieved), it proceeds to step 853, which performs the time-saving bonus determination process. On the other hand, if it determines that it was a minor win, it proceeds to the next step 852-3.
In step 852-3, the main unit 101 stores in a predetermined memory area of the main RAM 103 that a minor win has been achieved. Then, the win/loss determination process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation stop process (step 702 of the special symbol-related control process (see Figure 33)) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 81.
In step 1003-1, the main CPU 101 executes a stop display game state setting process, which performs processing related to setting the game state. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1003-2.
In step 1003-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B) was set in step 1003-1. If it determines that the time-saving game state was set, it proceeds to step 1004. On the other hand, if it determines that the time-saving game state was not set, it proceeds to the next step 1003-3.

In step 1003-3, the main CPU 101 executes a remaining variation count update process to update the first remaining variation count and the second remaining variation count.
Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first time-saving game flag, which indicates that the current game state is time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1), or the second time-saving game flag, which indicates that the current game state is time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B), is turned on. If it is determined that the first time-saving game flag is turned on, when the first special symbol is displayed stopped, both the first remaining spin count and the second remaining spin count are decremented by 1, and when the second special symbol is displayed stopped, only the second remaining spin count is decremented by 1. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second time-saving game flag is turned on, when the second special symbol is displayed stopped, both the first remaining spin count and the second remaining spin count are decremented by 1, and when the first special symbol is displayed stopped, only the second remaining spin count is decremented by 1. Furthermore, if either the first remaining spin count or the second remaining spin count becomes "0" as a result of updating as described above (i.e., if the time-saving game state is terminated and the time-saving termination condition is met), the process of turning off the first time-saving game flag or the second time-saving game flag, which was turned on, is executed. As a result, the currently set time-saving game state JT1 or time-saving game state JT2 is terminated, and the non-time-saving game state (normal game state) is set. Note that if neither the first time-saving game flag nor the second time-saving game flag is turned on, the main CPU 101 does nothing at this point. Then, the process proceeds to step 1004, which determines and sets the stop display time.

Next, the game state setting process when the stop display is shown in step 1003-1 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 82.
In step 1050, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol displayed is a time-saving symbol. If it determines that the special symbol displayed is not a time-saving symbol (i.e., it is a jackpot symbol, a minor jackpot symbol, or a losing symbol), it proceeds to step 1053. On the other hand, if it determines that the special symbol displayed is a time-saving symbol, it proceeds to the next step 1051.
In step 1051, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is the normal game state. If it determines that the game state is not the normal game state (i.e., it is the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, or low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B), it terminates the game state setting process at the time of stop display. On the other hand, if it determines that the current game state is the normal game state, it proceeds to the next step 1052.

In step 1052, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving game state setting process that sets the game state according to the time-saving symbols that are displayed as stopped.
Specifically, if the displayed time-saving symbol is J1, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time-saving game flag, sets "300" (the first time-saving game count) in the first time-saving game count memory area, sets "305" (the second time-saving game count) in the second time-saving game count memory area, and sets "1" (the end-decision count) in the end-decision game count memory area. This sets the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Furthermore, if the displayed time-saving symbol is J2 or J3, the main CPU 101 turns on the second time-saving game flag, sets "1" (the first time-saving game count) in the first time-saving game count memory area, sets "6" (the second time-saving game count) in the second time-saving game count memory area, and sets "5" (the end-decision game count) in the end-decision game count memory area. This sets the low-probability game state LJT2-B.
Then, the game state setting process for when the stop display is terminated.

Furthermore, in step 1053, which is followed if it is determined in step 1050 above that the special symbol displayed in the stopped position is not a time-saving symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol displayed in the stopped position is a minor win symbol Y1 or Y2. If it is determined that the special symbol displayed in the stopped position is neither a minor win symbol Y1 nor Y2, the game state setting process at the time of display is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed in the stopped position is a minor win symbol Y1 or Y2, the process proceeds to the next step 1054.
In step 1054, the main CPU 101 executes a remaining small win count update process to update the remaining small win count. Specifically, if the remaining small win count is 1 or greater, the main CPU 101 decrements the remaining small win count by 1. On the other hand, if the remaining small win count is 0, the main CPU 101 does nothing at this point. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1055.

In step 1055, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, or low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B). If it determines that the game state is not a time-saving game state (i.e., it is a normal game state), it terminates the game state setting process at the time of stop display. On the other hand, if it determines that the current game state is a time-saving game state, it proceeds to the next step 1056.
In step 1056, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of remaining minor wins has become 0 (i.e., whether the number of times minor win symbols Y1 or Y2 have been determined has reached the number of final determinations) as a result of the number of remaining minor wins being decremented by 1 in step 1054. If it determines that the number of remaining minor wins has not become 0, it terminates the game state setting process at the time of stop display. On the other hand, if it determines that the number of remaining minor wins has become 0, it proceeds to the next step 1057.

In step 1057, the main CPU 101 executes a normal game state setting process to terminate the currently set time-saving game state and set the normal game state. Specifically, it turns off both the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag, and clears the first time-saving game count memory area, the second time-saving game count memory area, and the termination decision count memory area. As a result, the currently set low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, or low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B is terminated, and the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) is set. Then, the stop display game state setting process is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing (step 703 of the special-purpose related control processing (see Figure 33)) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 83.
In the pachinko machine P of this form, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed at the stop is not a jackpot symbol, a determination is made as to whether or not the special symbol displayed at the stop is a minor jackpot symbol.

Specifically, if it is determined in step 1105 that the special symbol displayed at the stop is not a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step 1111-1.
In step 1111-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol displayed is a minor win symbol. If it determines that the special symbol displayed is not a minor win symbol (i.e., it is a time-saving symbol or a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1115, in which the game state command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if it determines that the special symbol displayed is a minor win symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1111-2.
In step 1111-2, the main CPU 101 sets the mini-win opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of a mini-win game, in the mini-win opening time timer counter, and stores the mini-win opening command, which indicates that the opening process for the mini-win game has started, in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1111-3.

In step 111-3, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "05" so that the small win game control process is executed in the special symbol-related control process. Although not specifically shown in the diagram, in this pachinko machine P, the special symbol-related control process includes a small win game control process as a functional module, and the execution phase data indicating the execution of this small win game control process is "05". By setting the execution phase data to "05" as described above, the small win game control process is executed. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Next, the minor win game control processing (functional modules that constitute the special symbol-related control processing (not specifically shown)) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 84.
In step 1250, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "05", which indicates the execution of the mini-game control process. If it determines that the execution phase data is not "05", it terminates the mini-game control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the execution phase data is "05", it proceeds to the next step 1251.
In step 1251, the main CPU 101 determines whether the mini-win opening time set in the mini-win opening time timer counter in step 1111-2 above has elapsed. If it determines that the mini-win opening time has not elapsed, it terminates the mini-win game control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the mini-win opening time has elapsed, it proceeds to the next step 1252.

In step 1252, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the mini-win ending process, which is a waiting process performed after the opening and closing of the big prize slot 18 has finished in this mini-win game control process, is in progress. If it determines that the mini-win ending process is in progress, it proceeds to step 1256. On the other hand, if it determines that the mini-win ending process is not in progress, it proceeds to the next step 1253.
In step 1253, the main CPU 101 performs a big prize opening/closing control process to open and close the big prize opening 18 based on the special electric mechanism operation table 112 (third operation table 112f or fourth operation table 112g) corresponding to the type of small prize symbol that has been stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1254.

In step 1254, the main CPU 101 determines whether the opening and closing of the large prize slot 18 has finished. If it determines that the opening and closing of the large prize slot 18 has not finished, it terminates the small prize game control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the opening and closing of the large prize slot 18 has finished, it proceeds to the next step 1255.
In step 1255, the main CPU 101 sets the mini-win ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the mini-win game, in the mini-win ending time timer counter, and stores a mini-win ending command, which indicates that the mini-win ending process will start, in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, it terminates the mini-win game control process.

Furthermore, in step 1256, which is followed if it is determined in step 1252 that the minor win ending process is underway, the main CPU 101 determines whether the minor win ending time set in the minor win ending time timer counter in step 1255 has elapsed. If it is determined that the minor win ending time has not elapsed, the minor win game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the minor win ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1257.
In step 1257, the main CPU 101 determines whether the entry flag is on or off. If it determines that the entry flag is not on (i.e., off), the process proceeds to step 1264. On the other hand, if it determines that the entry flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 1259.

In step 1259, the main CPU 101 turns off the entry flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1260.
In step 1260, the main CPU 101 resets the current game state. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1261.

In step 1261, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores an opening command indicating that the opening process is to begin in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1262.
In step 1262, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of small win symbol that is displayed. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the displayed small win symbol is Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, or Y9, a predetermined number of game balls can enter the special area during the small win game, and the entry flag may be turned on. In this case, the main CPU 101 sets "10" as the number of rounds. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1263.
In step 1263, the main CPU 101 sets "03" in the execution phase data so that the special game control processing is executed in the special symbol-related control processing. Then, it terminates the minor win game control processing.

Furthermore, in step 1264, which is performed if the entry flag is determined not to be on in step 1258, the main CPU 101 checks the set game state and stores the game state command indicating that game state in the performance transmission data storage area. The main CPU 101 also sets "00" in the execution phase data so that the special symbol variation process is executed in the special symbol-related control processing. Finally, the minor win game control processing is terminated.

Next, the special game termination process (step 706 of the special symbol-related control process (see Figure 33)) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 85.
In step 1301-1, which is followed if the execution phase data in step 1300 is the data "04" indicating the execution of the special game termination process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped special symbol is a predetermined jackpot symbol (jackpot symbols X4, X5, X6, X10, X11, X12) or a predetermined minor jackpot symbol (minor jackpot symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, Y9). If it determines that the stopped special symbol is neither a predetermined jackpot symbol nor a predetermined minor jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step 1304-2. On the other hand, if it determines that the stopped special symbol is a predetermined jackpot symbol or minor jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1304-1.
In step 1304-1, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving game state setting process to set the time-saving game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns on the second time-saving game flag, sets "6" (the first time-saving game count) in the first time-saving game count storage area, sets "11" (the second time-saving game count) in the second time-saving game count storage area, and sets "5" (the end-decision count) in the end-decision game count storage area. This sets the low-probability game state LJT2-A. Then, the process proceeds to step 1306, in which the game state specification command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area.

Furthermore, in step 1304-2, which is performed when it is determined that the special symbol displayed in step 1301-1 is neither a predetermined jackpot symbol nor a predetermined minor jackpot symbol, the main CPU 101 executes a normal game state setting process to set the normal game state. Specifically, it turns off both the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag, and clears the first time-saving count storage area, the second time-saving count storage area, and the end-decision count storage area. This sets the normal game state (non-time-saving game state). Then, the process proceeds to step 1306, where the game state specification command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area.

(Overview of the variable animation in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
Next, we will explain the variable effects performed in the pachinko machine P according to this form, focusing on the differences from the first form.

(1) During normal gameplay In the pachinko machine P of this form, when a RAM clear is performed, or when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X7, X8 or X9 are determined and the special game based on that determination ends, or when the time-saving game state termination condition is met during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, the normal game state is set and the performance state is set to the same normal performance state as in the first form.

When a RAM clear is performed and the normal game state is set, and when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X7, X8, or X9 are determined and the special game based on that determination ends, the same performance control (display of the first background image, execution of the chance zone stay indication, execution of the left-hand shooting indication, etc.) as when the normal game state is set in the first form will be performed.

If the time-saving condition is met during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends and the normal game state is set, the first background image will be displayed during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, as described later, similar to the first form, and this first background image will continue to be displayed. Also, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the game balls are launched towards the first game area 12a, similar to the normal game state, so no left-handed shooting suggestion is made. Furthermore, similar to the first form, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, there are cases where the chance zone stay suggestion is made and cases where it is not. However, as mentioned above, when the normal game state is set, the chance zone stay suggestion is made.

By the way, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B, game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b and enter the second starting prize entry point 16 at a high frequency. Therefore, when the time-saving termination condition is met and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B ends and the normal game state is set, there is a high possibility that the second special symbol random number is held in reserve.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, if the time-saving end condition is met during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B ends and the normal game state is set, the same performance control (display of the third background image, etc.) as during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B before the normal game state was set is performed until the display of the special symbols based on the second special symbol random number (hereinafter also referred to as the second special symbol remaining reserve) that is held in reserve at the time of this setting is finished. Then, when the display of the special symbols based on the second special symbol remaining reserve is finished, the same performance control (display of the first background image, execution of the chance zone stay suggestion, execution of the left-hand shooting suggestion, etc.) as when the normal game state is set in the first form is performed.

Furthermore, if the losing symbol Z1 is determined during normal gameplay (i.e., the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a loss), the variation animation will be executed in the same control and manner as when the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss during normal gameplay in the first form. If the winning symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6 are determined during normal gameplay (i.e., the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a win), the variation animation will be executed in the same control and manner as when the result of the win/loss lottery is a win during normal gameplay in the first form. If the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined during normal gameplay (i.e., the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a win for time-saving), the variation animation will be executed in the same control and manner as when the result of the win/loss lottery is a win for time-saving and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined during normal gameplay in the first form.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, if a minor win symbol Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4 is determined during normal gameplay (i.e., a minor win is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number), a variation animation based on the normal non-winning variation pattern, which is executed in the first form when the win/fail lottery result is a loss during normal gameplay, will be performed.
In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the stopping display pattern of the performance symbols 50 when a minor win symbol is determined is set to be the non-winning pattern of the first form, but it is not limited to this, and a stopping display pattern different from the non-winning pattern and the winning pattern may be used.

Furthermore, if a win/loss lottery is conducted during normal gameplay based on the second special symbol random number (remaining second special symbol reserve) (i.e., if the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during normal gameplay results in a loss and the losing symbol Z2 is determined; if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbols X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, or X12 are determined by the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during normal gameplay; if a minor win is won and the minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y8, or Y9 are determined by the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during normal gameplay; and if a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving bonus symbol J3 is determined by the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during normal gameplay), a special pattern A variation effect will be performed in all of these cases.

This special pattern A is characterized by the start of the special symbol's variation display, simultaneously with the start of the variation display of all the performance symbols 50. Once the variation time has elapsed, the variation display of all the performance symbols 50 simultaneously ends (all the performance symbols 50 are displayed stopped simultaneously). In this variation display using special pattern A, in conjunction with the variation display of the performance symbols 50, a button-press operation animation is executed across the entire surface of the display unit 21a, indicating the result of the win/loss lottery based on the player's press of the operation button 9b.

Specifically, in the button-press operation animation, when the animation symbol 50 starts to change, an image indicating that the button-press operation animation will be performed (for example, an image with the text "One-Shot Chance") and an image explaining the content of the button-press operation animation (for example, an image with the text "Press the button and finish it in one hit!!") are displayed (see Figure 86(b)). Subsequently, an image prompting the user to press the operation button 9b is displayed (see Figure 86(c)). Then, if the operation button 9b is pressed before the effective time for pressing the operation button 9b (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, or if the effective time for pressing the operation button 9b has elapsed without the operation button 9b being pressed, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a big win or a small win, a special medium win indication (for example, displaying a special medium win indication image such as "BONUS!!") will be displayed to suggest that fact; if the result of the win/loss lottery is a time-saving bonus, a special medium time-saving bonus indication (for example, displaying a special medium time-saving bonus winning indication image such as "Super Time!!") will be displayed to suggest that fact; and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss, a special loss indication (for example, displaying a special loss indication image such as "LOSE...") will be displayed to suggest that fact (see Figures 86(d) to (f)).
In addition, while the button-pressing animation is set to display the same type of special medium-prize indication regardless of whether the result of the draw is a big win or a small win, it is not limited to this, and different types of special medium-prize indications may be displayed depending on whether a small win or a big win is achieved.

(2) During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 In the pachinko machine P according to this form, if the time-saving bonus is awarded by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, and the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, which is the same as in the first form. Also, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, if the power is restored from an outage without a RAM clear being performed during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A2, which is the same as in the first form. Then, during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2, if the time-saving bonus is awarded by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, or if the time-saving bonus is awarded by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1.
In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, even if a game ball is launched towards the second game area 12b, the game ball will not enter the second starting prize entry point 16. Therefore, basically, no win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is performed during this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. However, for example, if a game ball enters the first starting entry point 15 and the first special symbol random number is stored in reserve during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B, and then a game ball enters the second starting entry point 16 and the second special symbol random number is stored in reserve, and after the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B ends and the normal game state is set, a win/loss lottery is held based on the first special symbol random number that was stored in reserve, and if the time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, then the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, and a win/loss lottery is held based on the second special symbol random number that was stored in reserve during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B during the set low probability time-saving game state LJT1.

(2-1) During Low Probability Short Time Performance State A1 As described above, when the Short Time Symbol J1 is determined during normal gameplay, the Low Probability Short Time Game State LJT1 is set, and the performance state is set to the same Low Probability Short Time Performance State A1 as in the first form, the same performance control (end of indication of staying in the chance zone, continuation of display of the first background image, non-execution of left-hand shooting indication, etc.) is performed.

Furthermore, if the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 (i.e., the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a loss), the variation performance will be executed in the same manner and with the same control as when the result of the win/loss lottery during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 in the first form was a loss. If the winning symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6 are determined during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 (i.e., the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a win), the variation performance will be executed in the same manner and with the same control as when the result of the win/loss lottery during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 in the first form was a win. If the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 (i.e., if the time-saving bonus is awarded based on the random number generator of the first special symbol), the variation performance will be executed in the same manner and with the same control as when the random number generator resulted in a time-saving bonus being awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 was determined during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 in the first form.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, if a minor win symbol Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4 is determined during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 (i.e., a minor win is determined by the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number), the variation performance using the normal non-winning variation pattern, which is executed during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 in the first form, will be performed.

Furthermore, if a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number (second special symbol remaining reserve) during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 (i.e., if the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 results in a loss and the losing symbol Z2 is determined, if a big win is achieved through the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 and the big win symbols X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, or X12 are determined, if a small win is achieved through the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 and the small win symbols Y5, Y6, Y8, or Y9 are determined, and if a time-saving bonus is awarded through the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 and the time-saving symbol J3 is determined), then a variation performance by special pattern A will be performed, just as during normal gameplay.
Furthermore, as in normal gameplay, during button-pressing animations, if the result is a miss, a special medium-level miss indication is shown, and if a big win or a small win is achieved, a special medium-level win indication is shown. In contrast, even if a time-saving bonus is awarded during the low-probability time-saving animation state A1 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1), a new time-saving game state is not set. Therefore, if a time-saving bonus is awarded, a special medium-level time-saving bonus indication is not shown, and instead, a special medium-level miss indication is shown.

(2-2) During Low Probability Short Time Performance State A2 If a power outage occurs during Low Probability Short Time Performance State A1, and the system recovers from the power outage without a RAM clear process (a normal power outage recovery occurs), and the Low Probability Short Time Game State LJT1 remains unchanged, and the performance state is set to Low Probability Short Time Performance State A2, then the same performance control (execution of indication of being in the chance zone, display of the first background image, etc.) as when the performance state is set to Low Probability Short Time Performance State A2 in the first form will be performed.

Furthermore, if the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 (i.e., the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a loss), the variation performance will be executed in the same manner and with the same control as when the result of the win/loss lottery during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 in the first form was a loss. If the winning symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6 are determined during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 (i.e., the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a win), the variation performance will be executed in the same manner and with the same control as when the result of the win/loss lottery during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 in the first form was a win. If the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 (i.e., if the time-saving bonus is awarded based on the random number generator for the first special symbol), the variation performance will be executed in the same manner and with the same control as when the result of the random number generator for the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 in the first form resulted in a time-saving bonus and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 was determined.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, if a minor win symbol Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4 is determined during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 (i.e., a minor win is determined by the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number), the variation performance using the normal non-winning variation pattern, which is executed during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 in the first form, will be performed.

Furthermore, if a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number (second special symbol remaining reserve) during the low probability time-saving performance state A2 (i.e., if the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low probability time-saving performance state A2 results in a loss and the losing symbol Z2 is determined, if a big win is achieved through the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low probability time-saving performance state A2 and the big win symbols X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, or X12 are determined, if a small win is achieved through the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low probability time-saving performance state A2 and the small win symbols Y5, Y6, Y8, or Y9 are determined, and if a time-saving bonus is awarded through the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low probability time-saving performance state A2 and the time-saving symbol J3 is determined), then in all cases, a variation performance by special pattern A will be performed, just as during normal gameplay and low probability time-saving performance state A1.
Furthermore, similar to the normal gameplay state and the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, in the button-pressing operation performance, if the result is a miss, a special medium-level miss indication is given, and if a big win or a small win is achieved, a special medium-level win indication is given. In contrast, even if time-saving is awarded during the low-probability time-saving performance state A2 (low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1), a new time-saving gameplay state is not set. Therefore, if time-saving is awarded, similar to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1, a special medium-level time-saving is not awarded, and instead, a special medium-level miss indication is given.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, although not specifically shown in the diagram, when the variable animation that is executed when the condition for ending the time-saving mode is met during the low-probability time-saving mode LJT1 ends, a normal game state setting indication animation (for example, the display of a specific character image) is executed to indicate that the normal game state will be set.
This allows the player to understand that, for example, even if they are in a low-probability time-saving mode A2 and therefore cannot determine whether they are in a normal game state or a low-probability time-saving mode LJT1, the low-probability time-saving mode LJT1 has ended and the normal game state has been set.

(3) During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B)
In the pachinko machine P according to this form, if the player wins a time-saving bonus through a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay and the time-saving bonus symbol J2 is determined, or if the player wins a time-saving bonus through a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during normal gameplay and the time-saving bonus symbol J3 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B is set and the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state B-1. Furthermore, if the player wins a jackpot and the jackpot symbols X4, X5, X6, X10, X11, or X12 are determined and the special game based on that determination ends, or if the player wins a minor jackpot and the minor jackpot symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, or Y8 are determined and the special game executed via the minor jackpot game based on that determination ends, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A is set and the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state B-1, which is the same as when the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B is set.

As described above, when either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B is set, and the performance state is set to the low-probability time-saving performance state B-1, the same performance control as when the low-probability time-saving performance state B is set in the first form is performed (if a chance zone stay indication was given, the indication of being in the chance zone is terminated, the third background image is displayed, a high-advantage state setting indication is executed, a right-hand shooting indication is executed, etc.) (see Figure 86(a)).

Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, the first special symbol random number that was held and stored before the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B was set may be processed after the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B was set (winning/losing lottery and display of the first special symbol variation are performed).
Furthermore, if the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B (if the result is a loss based on the win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number), if the winning symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, or X6 are determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B (if the result is a win/loss based on the win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number), the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 - If a minor win symbol Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B (when a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number), and if a time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B (when a time-saving bonus is awarded by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number), a variation effect using special pattern B will be performed in both cases.

Special Pattern B, like Special Pattern A, begins with the display of the special symbols and simultaneously begins the display of all 50 performance symbols. After the display time has elapsed, the display of all 50 performance symbols ends simultaneously (all 50 performance symbols stop simultaneously). However, in the variation animation of Special Pattern B, the button press animation is not performed. If the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss without the button press animation being performed, the above-mentioned special middle-game loss indication is given, and if a big win is achieved, the special middle-game win indication is given. In contrast, even if a time-saving bonus is awarded during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B, a new time-saving game state is not set. Therefore, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a win of a time-saving bonus, the special middle-game time-saving bonus indication is not given, and the special middle-game loss indication is given. Also, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a win of a small win, the special middle-game win indication is not given, and the special middle-game loss indication is given.

Furthermore, if a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B (i.e., if the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B results in a loss and the losing symbol Z2 is determined, or if the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B results in a jackpot and the jackpot symbols X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, or X12 are determined), In the case where, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y8, or Y9 are determined, and in the case where, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, a time-saving bonus is awarded by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, a special pattern A variation effect will be performed, just as in the normal game state, the low-probability time-saving effect state A1, and the low-probability time-saving effect state A2.
Furthermore, during normal gameplay, similar to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 and low-probability time-saving performance state A2, if the button press operation results in a miss, a special medium-time miss indication is displayed, and if a big win or a small win is achieved, a special medium-time win indication is displayed. In contrast, if a time-saving bonus is awarded, similar to the low-probability time-saving performance state A1 and low-probability time-saving performance state A2, a special medium-time bonus indication is not displayed, and instead, a special medium-time miss indication is displayed.

(Modified version of the pachinko machine P according to this form)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, the conditions for ending the time-saving game state were defined as conditions related to special symbols, such as the number of times special symbols are displayed (number of special symbol variations) and the number of times small winning symbols are determined. However, the conditions are not limited to these, and conditions for ending the time-saving state related to ordinary symbols, such as the number of times ordinary symbols are displayed (number of ordinary symbol variations), may also be defined.

Specifically, for example, the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-A, LJT2-B, and LJT2-B may be set to terminate not only when the time-saving termination condition for the number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described above is met, but also when the time-saving termination condition is met, such as when the number of variations of the normal symbols reaches a predetermined normal symbol time-saving number (for example, 5 times). Furthermore, if set in this way, not only the second game area 12b but also the first game area 12a may be provided with a gate through which a game ball can pass, and when a game ball passes through, a normal symbol lottery and a normal symbol variation display are executed. In addition, the first game area 12a may be provided with a normal symbol start prize entry point instead of the gate, through which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, a normal symbol lottery and a normal symbol variation display are executed.
In this way, in the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-A and LJT2-B, in which the player mainly plays in the second game area 12b, the time-saving termination condition is met not only when the time-saving termination condition related to the number of times the special symbols (second special symbols) are displayed, which is mainly done by the entry of game balls into the second starting prize slot 16 is met, but also when the time-saving termination condition related to the number of times the normal symbols are displayed, which is mainly done by the passing of game balls through the gate 20 provided in the second game area 12b is met, the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-A and LJT2-B, which are currently set, terminate and the normal game state is set.
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, in which the player mainly plays in the first game area 12a, the time-saving end condition is met not only when the time-saving end condition related to the number of times the special symbols (first special symbols) are displayed, which is mainly done by the entry of game balls into the first starting prize slot 15, but also when the time-saving end condition related to the number of times the normal symbols are displayed, which is mainly done when game balls pass through the gate provided in the first game area 12a (or when game balls enter the normal symbol starting prize slot), the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends and the normal game state is set.
As a result of the above, the variety of triggers for ending the time-saving game mode increases, improving gameplay and enhancing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if time-saving termination conditions are set not only for the number of special symbol variations but also for the number of regular symbol variations, the system may indicate the remaining number of special symbol variations until the set time-saving game state ends (first remaining variations, second remaining variations, etc.), and indicate that the set time-saving game state has ended and the normal game state has been set when the remaining number of special symbol variations reaches zero. However, it may not indicate the remaining number of regular symbol variations until the set time-saving game state ends, nor indicate that the set time-saving game state has ended and the normal game state has been set when the remaining number of regular symbol variations reaches zero.
In other words, while the success or failure of the time-saving termination conditions for special symbols and the termination of the time-saving game state based on those conditions will not be kept secret, the success or failure of the time-saving termination conditions for regular symbols and the termination of the time-saving game state based on those conditions may be kept secret.
In this way, it becomes difficult for players to know when the time-saving game mode will end, or when it has ended, thus improving gameplay and increasing player interest.

Furthermore, in the above case, the system may choose not to indicate the remaining number of special symbol variations until the set time-saving game state ends, nor to indicate that the set time-saving game state has ended and the normal game state has been set when the number of remaining special symbol variations reaches zero. In addition, the system may choose not to indicate the remaining number of normal symbol variations until the set time-saving game state ends, nor to indicate that the set time-saving game state has ended and the normal game state has been set when the number of remaining normal symbol variations reaches zero.
In other words, the success or failure of the time-saving termination conditions for special symbols and the termination of the time-saving game state based on those conditions, as well as the success or failure of the time-saving termination conditions for regular symbols and the termination of the time-saving game state based on those conditions, may be kept secret.

Furthermore, instead of defining both the time-saving termination conditions for special symbols and the time-saving termination conditions for regular symbols in all possible time-saving game states, it is also possible to define both the time-saving termination conditions for special symbols and the time-saving termination conditions for regular symbols in only some time-saving game states, and define only the time-saving termination conditions for special symbols in other time-saving game states.
For example, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, both the time-saving termination condition related to the number of times the special symbols are displayed and the time-saving termination condition related to the number of times the normal symbols are displayed may be defined, while in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, only the time-saving termination condition related to the number of times the special symbols are displayed may be defined.
Furthermore, for example, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, both time-saving termination conditions related to the number of times special symbols are displayed and time-saving termination conditions related to the number of times normal symbols are displayed may be defined, while in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, only the time-saving termination condition related to the number of times special symbols are displayed may be defined.
In this way, the trigger for ending the time-saving game state differs depending on the type of time-saving game state, which improves the gameplay and enhances the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, multiple conditions for ending the time-saving mode related to regular symbols may be defined within the same time-saving game state.
For example, the time-saving symbols J1-1 and J1-2 are provided as time-saving symbols that will set the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. The low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, which is set based on the determination of time-saving symbol J1-1 in the normal game state, may be set to end when the number of normal symbol spins reaches a first normal symbol time-saving spin count (for example, 5 spins), and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, which is set based on the determination of time-saving symbol J1-2 in the normal game state, may be set to end when the number of normal symbol spins reaches a second normal symbol time-saving spin count (for example, 10 spins).
In this case, the same time-saving game state will end depending on the time-saving termination conditions related to different regular symbols, thus improving gameplay and increasing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, even when both time-saving termination conditions for special symbols and time-saving termination conditions for regular symbols are defined, the time-saving termination conditions for special symbols may include not only the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable state, but also the number of times the minor winning symbols are determined, similar to the second form.
Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time-saving feature for regular symbols may include not only the number of times the regular symbols are displayed in a variation, but also the number of times the regular symbols result in a win reaches a predetermined number of times, the number of times the regular symbols result in a loss reaches a predetermined number of times, or, if the system is set to select one of several regular symbols when the regular symbols result in a loss, the number of times a predetermined regular symbol is selected reaches a predetermined number of times.

In the pachinko machine P of this form, the lottery for winning or losing based on the first special random number is designed to produce one of the following results: winning a big win, winning a small win, winning a time-saving bonus, or losing. The probability of winning a time-saving bonus was set to approximately 1/30, but it is not limited to this.
For example, the system could be configured so that a lottery result of either a big win, a small win, or a time-saving bonus is generated without any losing results being derived, and then all random numbers other than those that result in a big win or a small win are determined to result in a time-saving bonus. In other words, the system could be configured so that if a big win or a small win is not achieved, a time-saving bonus is always awarded.
In this case, there is an extremely high probability of winning the time-saving bonus, so when the normal game state is set, the first win/fail lottery by the first special symbol random number after the setting of the normal game state will almost certainly result in winning the time-saving bonus, and either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1, or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B will be set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2. In other words, the expectation of drawing a lottery result that allows for the setting of the advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B is increased only in the first win/fail lottery after the setting of the normal game state, thus improving the gameplay.

Furthermore, the same settings may be applied to the win/loss lottery based on the second special random number.
Furthermore, in the winning/losing lottery of a pachinko machine in which the results of the winning/losing of a minor prize are not derived, and only the results of the winning of a major prize and the winning of a time-saving bonus are derived, the settings may be made in the same manner as described above. Specifically, in the winning/losing lottery, the results of the losing lottery may not be derived, and only the results of winning a major prize or winning a time-saving bonus may be derived, and all random numbers other than those determined to be a major prize may be determined to be a time-saving bonus. In other words, if a major prize is not won, it may be set to always result in a time-saving bonus.
Even if the settings are configured as described above, the machine may still output a specific external signal, similar to the first form and the pachinko machine P described above. For example, the main CPU 101 may start outputting a specific external signal when it wins a jackpot through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay or low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1. Subsequently, when normal gameplay is set, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined during that normal gameplay state and the low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1 is set, the output of the specific external signal may be terminated. Furthermore, other controls related to the output of the specific external signal may be set to the same content as in the first form and the other setting examples described above.

In the pachinko machine P of this form, after the display of the special symbols has finished, processing is performed to set the time-saving game state based on the display of the time-saving symbols, and then the remaining number of spins is updated, so that the time-saving symbols are displayed as stopped in the time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this.
For example, at the start of the special symbol variation display, information such as the game state set at that start time, the first remaining number of variations, and the second remaining number of variations is stored in a predetermined reserve area of the main RAM 103. When the special symbol variation display ends, the information stored in this reserve area is stored in a predetermined storage area. If the special symbol that is stopped is a time-saving symbol, the information of the game state set at the start of the special symbol variation display is referenced from the information stored in this predetermined storage area. If the game state is a time-saving game state, the system may process it so that the time-saving symbol is stopped in a time-saving game state.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

In the pachinko machine P of this form, processing related to setting the time-saving game state based on the stop display of the time-saving symbols, and processing to update the remaining number of spins were performed when the display of the special symbols' fluctuations ended (when the special symbols stopped), but this is not limited to this.
For example, when the special symbol's fluctuation display ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the system may perform processing related to setting the time-saving game state based on the stop display of the time-saving symbol, as well as processing to update the remaining number of fluctuations. In this case as well, when the aforementioned stop display time has elapsed, the system may perform processing related to setting the time-saving game state based on the stop display of the time-saving symbol, and then perform processing to update the remaining number of fluctuations, so that the time-saving symbol is displayed as stopped in the time-saving game state.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(Third form)
The third form will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this description, components similar to those in the first and second forms described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.
The pachinko machine P in this form is a so-called type 1 and type 2 mixed pachinko machine, similar to the second form, and is configured so that a special game is executed when a jackpot is won or when a game ball enters a special area during a minor win game based on a minor win.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P in this embodiment, as well as the devices and components installed on the game board 11, are the same as those in the second embodiment.
Furthermore, similar to the second form, during special gameplay based on a big win, or during minor win gameplay based on a minor win, the large prize opening 18 opens, allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening 18. During special gameplay, the distribution member 59 is stationary in the first position, and game balls that enter the large prize opening 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. In contrast, during minor win gameplay based on the determination of minor win symbols, the distribution member 59 is stationary in the second position, and game balls that enter the large prize opening 18 do not enter the general area 58, but all enter the special area.
In other words, game balls can only enter the special area during a minor win game based on the determination of a minor win symbol. As a result, a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this form) enter the special area during a minor win game. Based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special area during a minor win game, the special game is executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, similar to the second form, the game state after the special game that is executed based on the determination of the jackpot symbols when a jackpot is won or the minor win symbols when a minor win is won is set.
Furthermore, similar to the second form, the following game states can be set: a normal game state which combines a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state; a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 which combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state JT1; and a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 which combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2. The game proceeds with one of these game states set.
Thus, as with the second form, a low-probability game state is always set regardless of the game state. Therefore, regardless of the game state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the win/loss lottery remains constant at 1/300 (see Figure 87).

Furthermore, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting prize entry point 16 in the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1, and time-saving game state JT2 is the same as in the second form. That is, in the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1, and time-saving game state JT2, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol variation time, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b are all set in the same way as in the second form (first form) (see Figures 14-16 and 87(c)).

Furthermore, in the initial state immediately after factory shipment or after a RAM reset (initialization process in case of abnormality, initialization process in normal operation), the normal gameplay state is set.

During normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT1, players are instructed to shoot (left-handed) the game balls towards the first game area 12a so that they enter the first starting prize entry point 15. During low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT2, special gameplay, and minor win gameplay, players are instructed to shoot (right-handed) the game balls towards the second game area 12b so that they enter the large prize entry point 18, or pass through the gate 20 and enter the second starting prize entry point 16.
In other words, during normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, players are primarily instructed to play in the first game area 12a, and as long as gameplay is taking place in the first game area 12a, game balls can enter the first starting prize entry point 15. Furthermore, during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2, players are primarily instructed to play in the second game area 12b, and as long as gameplay is taking place in the second game area 12b, game balls can pass through gate 20 and enter the second starting prize entry point 16.
Then, a draw is performed to determine whether a player wins or loses based on the number of game balls that enter the first starting prize slot 15 and the number of game balls that enter the second starting prize slot 16.

Here, the reserved memory area of the main RAM 103 in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment (unlike the second embodiment), consists of a first reserved memory area for storing the first special symbol random number and a second reserved memory area for storing the second special symbol random number. Furthermore, these reserved memory areas each consist of a total of four memory units, from the first to the fourth memory unit, and are capable of storing a total of four sets of the first special symbol random number and a total of four sets of the second special symbol random number. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, the first special symbol random number is stored sequentially from the first memory unit of the first reserved memory area, and when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, the second special symbol random number is stored sequentially from the first memory unit of the second reserved memory area.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, similar to the first form (unlike the second form), if both the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are stored, the second special symbol random number is processed in priority over the first special symbol random number. For example, when both the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are stored when the display of the special symbols starts, the win/loss lottery and the display of the special symbols are performed first based on the second special symbol random number, and once that display is finished, the win/loss lottery and the display of the special symbols are then performed based on the first special symbol random number.
In this embodiment as well, the configuration of the reserved memory area may be the same as in the second embodiment, and if both the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are stored, they may be processed in the order in which they were stored in the reserved memory area.

As shown in Figure 87(a), in the draw for winning or losing when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, it is possible to win a jackpot, a minor prize, or a time-saving bonus. If a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined; if a minor prize is won, the minor prize symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined; and if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined.
Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X1 when a jackpot is won is set to 100/100 (100%). The probability of winning a minor prize is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of determining the minor prize symbols Y1 and Y2 when a minor prize is won is set to 50/100 (50%). The probability of winning a time-saving bonus is set to approximately 298/300, and the probability of determining the time-saving bonus symbol J1 when a time-saving bonus is won is set to 90/100 (90%), and the probability of determining the time-saving bonus symbol J2 is set to 10/100 (10%).
Thus, the lottery based on the first special random number is designed to produce one of the following results: a big win, a small win, or a time-saving bonus. In other words, if you do not win a big win or a small win, you will always win a time-saving bonus and will not lose.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 87(a), when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, the winner can win either a big win or a small win. If a big win is achieved, the big win symbol X2 is determined, and if a small win is achieved, the small win symbol Y3 or Y4 is determined.
Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 when a jackpot is won is set to 100/100 (100%). The probability of winning a minor prize is set to approximately 50/300 (approximately 1/6), and the probability of determining the minor prize symbol Y3 when a minor prize is won is set to 30/100 (30%), and the probability of determining the minor prize symbol Y4 is set to 70/100 (70%). In addition, if the above-mentioned draw results in a loss, the losing symbol Z2 is determined.
Thus, the lottery based on the second special random number is designed to produce one of the following results: a big win, a small win, or a loss. In other words, if you do not win a big win or a small win, you will always lose, and you will not win the time-saving bonus.

Furthermore, in the lottery for winning or losing in this form, just like in the second form, first, a determination is made as to whether or not a big win is achieved. If the result is that a big win is not achieved, then a determination is made as to whether or not a small win is achieved. If the result is that a small win is not achieved, then a determination is made as to whether or not a time-saving bonus is granted, and if the result is that a time-saving bonus is not granted, then it is a loss.
Furthermore, similar to the second form, once a special symbol is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern is determined based on the result of that determination, which includes the variation time and variation performance of the special symbol.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, unlike the first and second forms, the stop display time (so-called symbol confirmation time), which is the time it takes for the special symbol to stop displaying after the display of the special symbol's variation has finished, is the same (0.5 seconds in this form) regardless of the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery or the type of special symbol determined. The stop display time may be determined based on the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery or the type of special symbol determined, as in the first and second forms.

As shown in Figure 87(b), the mini-win game, which is executed when a mini-win is won and the mini-win symbols Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined, is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: the large prize opening 18 is opened for 0.45 seconds four times, or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open. The closing time (interval time) of the large prize opening 18 between the end of one opening and the start of the next is set to 0.6 seconds. Furthermore, while the large prize opening 18 is open, the distribution member 59 remains in the second position.
In other words, if a minor win is achieved, regardless of which minor win symbol is determined, the large prize opening 18 is open for a total of 1.8 seconds during the minor win game. Therefore, if the player is shooting to the right during this minor win game, the game ball can be sent into the large prize opening 18. Also, since the distribution member 59 remains in the second position during this minor win game, any game ball that enters the large prize opening 18 will always enter the special area.
Therefore, if a minor win is achieved, and the player is shooting to the right, a predetermined number of game balls (1 ball) will enter the special area during the minor win game based on that win, and a special game will be executed based on that entry.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, if a jackpot symbol X1 is determined, or if a minor jackpot symbol Y1, Y2, or Y3 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this example) enter the special area during the minor jackpot game based on that determination, the game is set to execute a total of three round games that end when either the large prize opening 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18. In addition, in each round game, the large prize opening 18 is opened only once (opened for 29.0 seconds once), and the interval time between each round game is set to 2.0 seconds. Moreover, the distribution member 59 remains stationary in the first position during each round game.
Furthermore, if a jackpot symbol X2 is determined, or if a minor jackpot symbol Y4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor jackpot game based on that determination, a special game consisting of 10 rounds of gameplay is executed. The opening and closing patterns of the opening and closing doors 18b, the operation of the distribution member 59, and the interval time during the rounds of gameplay are set to be the same as those for the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, or the determination of the minor jackpot symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 described above.

(Summary of the game state to be set)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, when a special game is executed based on the determination of a jackpot symbol (winning a jackpot), the game state after the special game ends is set according to the type of jackpot symbol determined and the game state at a predetermined reference point (hereinafter also referred to as the game state at the reference point).
Furthermore, if a minor win game is executed based on the determination of a minor win symbol (winning a minor win), and a special game is executed based on the fact that a predetermined number (1 ball) of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game, the game state after the special game ends will be set according to the type of minor win symbol determined and the game state at the time of reference.
Furthermore, if a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the special area during a minor win game (for example, if no game balls enter the big prize slot 18 because the player did not shoot to the right during a minor win game), the special game will not be executed, and the above-mentioned game state settings will not be applied. Specifically, if a minor win is achieved during a non-time-saving game state and the minor win game is executed, the state will revert to the non-time-saving game state that was in place before the minor win game after the minor win game ends. Also, in the pachinko machine P of this form, as will be described later, if a minor win is achieved during a time-saving game state, the time-saving game state ends, and the state will revert to the non-time-saving game state after the minor win game ends.

In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, as will be described later, if the number of small wins reaches a predetermined termination count during the time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2), or if the number of special symbol variations reaches the time-saving count, the time-saving game state that was set will end and the non-time-saving game state will be set.
Furthermore, during the time-saving game state, the special symbol variation stop process, which is executed when the special symbol variation display ends, updates the remaining number of special symbol variations until the time-saving round is reached. If a minor win is achieved, the special symbol variation stop process described above updates the remaining number of minor wins until the round of termination is reached.
Then, if the main CPU 101 determines that the number of special symbol variations has reached the time-saving limit based on the update of the remaining number of special symbol variations, or if it determines that the number of minor wins has reached the time-ending limit based on the update of the remaining number of minor wins, it terminates the time-saving game state currently set and sets a non-time-saving game state. If it determines that neither of these conditions has been reached, it maintains the time-saving game state currently set (i.e., does nothing with respect to the time-saving game state currently set).
In the pachinko machine P of this form, the point in time when the process is completed is defined as the reference point mentioned above. When a big win or a small win is achieved, the game state after the special game ends is set by referring to the game state at that point in time (game state at the time of reference).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, if the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery is a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), and a time-saving bonus is awarded and a time-saving symbol is determined, the game state after the time-saving symbol stops (after the display of the time-saving symbol's movement ends) is set according to the type of time-saving symbol.
In contrast, if the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery is a time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2), and the player wins the time-saving bonus and a time-saving symbol is determined, after the time-saving symbol stops and is displayed, no new game state based on the determination of the time-saving symbol is set, and the current time-saving game state continues.
Furthermore, the decision on whether or not to set a time-saving game state may be made based on the game state at the time the time-saving symbols stop and are displayed, or the game state at the reference point mentioned above, rather than the game state at the time the draw for winning or losing is executed. For example, if a time-saving bonus is awarded and a time-saving symbol is determined, and the game state at the time the time-saving symbol stops and is displayed is not a time-saving game state, a game state corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol may be set. If the game state at the time the time-saving symbol stops and is displayed is a time-saving game state, the currently set time-saving game state may be continued.

The following provides a more detailed explanation of how to set the game state.
(When the winning symbol X1 or X2, or the winning symbols Y1, Y3, or Y4 are determined)
As shown in Figure 88(a), regardless of whether the reference game state is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 (time-saving game state), if a jackpot is won by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a minor win is won by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination. If the balls enter the special area, and a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number determines a jackpot and the jackpot symbol X2 is selected, or if a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number determines a minor win and the minor win symbol Y3 or Y4 is selected, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that selection, the game state after the end of the special game based on these will be set to the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, two types of time-saving rounds are defined: the first time-saving round and the second time-saving round. In addition, the number of times a small win occurs that will end the time-saving game state is defined as the number of times the game ends.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which is set when the reference game state is not a time-saving game state, the first time-saving rounds are set to 1, the second time-saving rounds to 6, and the number of times the game ends is determined to 100. In contrast, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which is set when the reference game state is a time-saving game state, the first time-saving rounds are set to 6, the second time-saving rounds to 11, and the number of times the game ends is determined to 100.
In the following, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 in which the first time-saving rounds are set to 1, the second time-saving rounds to 6, and the number of rounds to determine the end of the game is set to 100 will also be referred to as low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, and a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 in which the first time-saving rounds to 6, the second time-saving rounds to 11, and the number of rounds to determine the end of the game is set to 100 will also be referred to as low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-D.

The low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C or LJT2-D ends when any of the following time-saving termination conditions are met: (1) the number of spins of the second special symbol (a special symbol that changes and is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16) reaches the first time-saving round without any special game being played (one win/loss lottery is performed using the random number generator for the second special symbol); (2) the total number of spins of the first special symbol (a special symbol that changes and is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15) and the second special symbol reaches the second time-saving round without any special game being played (a total of six win/loss lotteries are performed using the random number generator for the first special symbol and the random number generator for the second special symbol); (3) the number of minor wins reaches the termination determination round; (4) a minor win is achieved; or (5) a major win is achieved.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine P, similar to the second embodiment, the main RAM 103 is equipped with a first time-saving count memory area and a second time-saving count memory area. The first time-saving count memory area stores the first remaining number of spins (the remaining number of spins of special symbols until the first time-saving count is reached), and the second time-saving count memory area stores the second remaining number of spins (the remaining number of spins of special symbols until the second time-saving count is reached).
Furthermore, similar to the second form, the main RAM 103 is equipped with a termination decision count storage area, which stores the remaining number of minor wins until the termination decision count becomes 0 (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining minor win count).

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C or LJT2-D, when a special symbol variation is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16, in the special symbol variation stop process executed when the special symbol variation display ends, both the first remaining variation count stored in the first time-saving count memory area and the second remaining variation count stored in the second time-saving count memory area are decremented by 1. When a special symbol variation is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15, in the special symbol variation stop process described above, only the second remaining variation count stored in the second time-saving count memory area is decremented by 1. Also, when a minor win is achieved, in the special symbol variation stop process described above, the remaining minor win count stored in the termination determination count memory area is decremented by 1.
Then, as a result of updating the first remaining spin count, second remaining spin count, and remaining small win count performed in the special symbol variation stop processing described above, if any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (1) to (3) are met, the time-saving game state JT2 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (3) are met, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C or LJT2-D.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, in the special symbol variation stop processing described above, after the various counts described above have been updated, a determination is made as to whether or not the time-saving termination condition in (4) has been met (i.e., whether or not a minor win has been achieved).
If a minor win occurs in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C or LJT2-D, the number of times to determine the end is set to 100. Therefore, depending on the result of updating the remaining number of minor wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process, the time-saving end condition in (3) may not be met. However, in the special symbol variation stop process, after the above update is performed, it is determined that the time-saving end condition in (4) has been met.
Therefore, if a minor win is achieved in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C or LJT2-D, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C or LJT2-D when the remaining number of minor wins is updated. However, if it is determined that a minor win has been achieved thereafter, the time-saving game state JT2 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set at the time of that determination, and the game state changes to the normal game state.

(If the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined)
As shown in Figure 88(a), if the reference game state is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on this determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on this is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1).
Furthermore, in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the number of first time-saving rounds is set to 10,000, the number of second time-saving rounds is set to 1, and the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 1.

This low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends when any of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (5) described above are met, similar to the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-C and LJT2-D.
Furthermore, during this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, similar to the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-C and LJT2-D described above, the first remaining spin count, the second remaining spin count, and the remaining small win count are updated during the special symbol variation stop process.
Then, as a result of updating the first remaining spin count, second remaining spin count, and remaining small win count performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, if any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (1) to (3) are met, the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (3) are met, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

During this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the win/loss lottery is performed in principle based on the first special symbol random number, and since the number of first and second time-saving rounds is 10,000, and the probability of winning a big win and the probability of winning a small win are both 1/300 (see Figure 87(a)), the time-saving termination conditions in (1) and (2) are not actually met, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 continues until a big win or a small win is achieved.
Furthermore, as mentioned above, in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 1. If a minor win occurs in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the remaining number of minor wins is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, and as a result of this update, the time-saving termination condition in (3) (i.e., the time-saving termination condition where the number of minor wins reaches the number of times the game ends) is met. Therefore, if a minor win occurs in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the time-saving game state JT1 ends when the number of minor wins reaches the number of times the game ends, the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 88(a), if the reference game state is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the completion of the special game based on this is set to the normal game state (non-time-saving game state).

(If the time-saving symbol J1 is determined)
As shown in Figure 88(b), if the game state at the time of the win/fail lottery is the normal game state, and the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number results in the awarding of a time-saving bonus, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined and the time-saving symbol J1 is displayed, then at the time of the display, the non-time-saving game state is changed to the time-saving game state JT1, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set.
Furthermore, even in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the number of first time-saving rounds is set to 10,000, the number of second time-saving rounds is set to 1, and the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 1.

This low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 also ends when any of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (5) described above are met, similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 which is set based on the winning of a big or small prize. At the same time, the first remaining spin count, the second remaining spin count, and the remaining small prize count are updated during the special symbol variation stop processing.
Then, as a result of updating the first remaining spin count, second remaining spin count, and remaining small win count performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, if any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (1) to (3) are met, the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (3) are met, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Furthermore, in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the time-saving termination conditions of (1) and (2) are not actually met, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 continues until a big win or a small win is achieved.
Furthermore, even if a minor win is achieved in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, when the remaining number of minor wins is updated, the number of minor wins reaches the number required to determine termination (the time-saving termination condition in (3) is met), at which point the time-saving game state JT1 ends, the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 88(b), if the game state at the time of the win/fail lottery is a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 (or time-saving game state JT1 or JT2), and the time-saving bonus is awarded through the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined and displayed as stopped, then the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 that was set will continue.

(If the time-saving symbol J2 is determined)
As shown in Figure 88(b), if the game state at the time of the win/fail lottery is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), and the time-saving bonus is awarded by the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined and the time-saving symbol J2 is stopped and displayed, then at the time of the stop and display, the non-time-saving game state is changed to the time-saving game state JT2, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C) is set.
In this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, the number of first time-saving rounds is set to 1, the number of second time-saving rounds to 6, and the number of rounds to determine the end is set to 100.

This low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C also ends when any of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (5) are met, similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C which is set based on the winning of a big or small prize as described above. At the same time, the first remaining spin count, the second remaining spin count, and the remaining small prize count are updated during the special symbol variation stop processing.
Then, as a result of updating the first remaining spin count, second remaining spin count, and remaining small win count performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, if any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (1) to (3) are met, the time-saving game state JT2 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state is changed to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (3) are met, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C.
Furthermore, even if a minor win is achieved in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, the time-saving termination condition (3) has not been met at the time the remaining number of minor wins is updated, and the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C. However, if it is determined that a minor win has been achieved thereafter (the time-saving termination condition (4) has been met), the time-saving game state JT2 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set at the time this determination is made, and the game state is changed to the normal game state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 88(b), if the game state at the time of the win/fail lottery is a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 (or time-saving game state JT1 or JT2), and the time-saving bonus is awarded through the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined and displayed as stopped, then the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 that was set will continue.

(Regarding the processing when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2)
In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same during both the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and even if a game ball is launched toward the second game state 12b, the game ball will not enter the second starting prize entry point 16. During these game states, the player is instructed to play in the first game area 12a, and there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the first starting prize entry point 15.
During normal gameplay or low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, if a jackpot is won based on a win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number, a special game consisting of three rounds is executed, and after the completion of this special game, the low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 (LJT2-C) is set (see Figures 87(a) and 88(a)). Also, if a minor win is won based on a win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number, a special game consisting of three rounds becomes playable via the minor win game, and after the completion of this special game, the state is set to either the low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 (LJT2-C) or the low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1 (see Figures 87(a) and 88(a)).
Furthermore, during normal gameplay, if the player wins a time-saving bonus based on a win/fail lottery using the first special symbol random number and the time-saving bonus symbol is displayed, the subsequent game state will be set to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (LJT2-C) or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (see Figure 88(b)). On the other hand, even if the player wins a time-saving bonus based on a win/fail lottery using the first special symbol random number and the time-saving bonus symbol is displayed during the low-probability time-saving game state LTJ1, the game state will not change and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will continue.

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as during normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. However, when a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, it is possible to enter the second starting prize slot 16 with a high frequency. During this game state, the player is instructed to play in the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the second starting prize slot 16.
If a jackpot is won based on the win/loss lottery using the second special symbol random number, a special game consisting of 10 rounds of gameplay will be executed, and after the completion of this special game, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (LJT2-D) will be set again (see Figures 87(a) and 88(a)). Also, if a minor win is won based on the win/loss lottery using the second special symbol random number, a special game consisting of 3 or 10 rounds of gameplay will be made playable via the minor win game, and after the completion of this special game, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (LJT2-D) will be set again (see Figures 87(a) and 88(a)).
In other words, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the decrease in game balls as the game progresses can be suppressed more than during the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, due to the prize balls awarded based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize entry point 16. Furthermore, in the special game that is executed after winning a jackpot or a minor prize, there is a possibility of more rounds of gameplay than in the special game that is executed after winning a jackpot or a minor prize during the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. Moreover, after the special game ends, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (LJT2-D) is always set again, making it a more advantageous game state than the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Furthermore, as mentioned above, if, during normal gameplay, the player wins a time-saving bonus based on a win/fail lottery using the first special symbol random number and the time-saving bonus symbol is displayed, either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (LJT2-C) will be set. However, after transitioning from normal gameplay to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, even if the player wins a time-saving bonus based on a win/fail lottery using the first special symbol random number and the time-saving bonus symbol is displayed during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will not be set. Therefore, the normal gameplay state, in which the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (LJT2-C) can be set by winning a time-saving bonus and the display of the time-saving bonus symbol, is a more advantageous gameplay state than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. This allows for a novel gameplay experience, similar to the second form, where the normal game state before transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 becomes a chance zone, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, the win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay is performed mainly after a RAM clear (abnormal initialization process, normal initialization process) is executed, or after the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 ends without winning a big or small prize, and a win/loss lottery and special symbol variation display are performed for all second special symbol random numbers (second special symbol remaining reserves) that were stored at the time of the termination. In this win/loss lottery, a time-saving bonus is almost always awarded, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined with an extremely high probability (see Figure 87(a)). Therefore, when this win/loss lottery is performed and the special symbol variation display ends, there is a high possibility that the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be set. Also, as mentioned above, the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 will continue until a big or small prize is won.
Therefore, during gameplay in this configuration, the player will generally remain in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

As mentioned above, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 1, and in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2), the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 100. If a minor win occurs during these game states, the remaining number of minor wins is updated (incremented by 1) during the special symbol variation stop process. Then, the game state is processed based on the result of this update, and the game state after the special game executed via the minor win is set by referring to the game state at the time the said process is completed.
Then, if a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the remaining number of minor wins is updated to 0, and the number of minor wins reaches the number of times the game is terminated. This sets the non-time-saving game state. In other words, since the game state at the time of reference becomes the non-time-saving game state, the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y2 becomes the low-probability time-saving game state JT1 (time-saving game state JT1) (see Figure 88(a)).
In contrast, if a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the remaining number of minor wins is updated to 99, and the number of minor wins does not reach the number of wins required to determine the end of the game. Therefore, the game state remains unchanged, remaining in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. In other words, the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state, and the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y2 becomes the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) (see Figure 88(a)).

Thus, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the time-saving game state can be terminated based on the number of minor wins, and the number of minor wins required to terminate the time-saving game state differs for each of the multiple types of time-saving game states. This controls the game state at the aforementioned reference point to be either a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state. As a result, the game state after the termination of the special game based on the minor win symbol Y2 can be different depending on whether the minor win symbol Y2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

For example, when the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set, before the game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16 and the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is started, a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number that was acquired and stored before the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is performed, and although the probability is low, there are cases in which a minor win is achieved through this win/loss lottery and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined.
As a general rule, when setting a time-saving game state after the end of a special game based on the determination of a special symbol, the content must be in accordance with the type of special symbol determined, and the same time-saving game state must be set when the same special symbol is determined. However, if the game state at the reference point is different (either a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state), it is possible to set whether or not a time-saving game state is set differently depending on the game state at the reference point, even when the same special symbol is determined.
Here, for example, suppose it is stipulated that when a minor win symbol Y2 is determined, a time-saving game state JT1 will be set after the special game based on that determination ends. In this case, if a minor win symbol Y2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, or if a minor win symbol Y2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, then in both cases, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) will be set after the special game based on that determination ends. In the above case, even though the advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 has been set, the less advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be set after the special game ends, which may cause the player to feel a great sense of loss.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, if a small win symbol Y2 is determined during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, the reference time game state becomes a non-time-saving game state, and after the special game based on that determination ends, the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set again. However, as in the case described above, if a small win symbol Y2 is determined during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2, the reference time game state becomes a time-saving game state, and after the special game based on that determination ends, the non-time-saving game state is set. As described above, the non-time-saving game state is positioned as a chance zone where the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 can be set, so even if the above case unfortunately occurs, the sense of loss given to the player can be reduced.

Furthermore, although not specifically shown in the illustrations, the pachinko machine P in this embodiment, like the second embodiment, includes a variation pattern table 114 for determining the variation pattern, which is a table referenced during normal gameplay, a table referenced during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, and a table referenced during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2.
These variation pattern tables 114, similar to the second form, define variation pattern commands corresponding to variation patterns for which a predetermined variation time is set, according to the determined special symbols (losing symbols Z2, winning symbols X1, X2, minor winning symbols Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, time-saving symbols J1, J2), the current number of reserved symbols (the first and second number of reserved symbols at the time the variation pattern command is determined (the time the win/loss lottery is executed)), and the variation pattern random number.
Then, after the draw for winning or losing is performed and the special symbol is determined, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern command based on the variation pattern table 114 corresponding to the game state at the time the draw was performed, according to the determined special symbol, the current number of reserved balls, and the variation pattern random number. The determined variation pattern command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-CPU 301 determines the execution mode of the variation effect based on the received variation pattern command.

(Outline of processing in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
Next, we will explain the outline of the processes executed by the main control board 100 in accordance with the progress of the special game, regular game, minor win game, and special game described above, focusing on the differences from the first and second forms, using a flowchart. Processes that are the same as those in the first and second forms, or processes that are nearly the same as those in the first and second forms and whose implementation method (application method to this form) can be understood by a person skilled in the art, will be assigned the same step numbers as in the first and second forms, and explanations will be omitted in principle.

The special symbol variation initiation process (step 701 of the special symbol-related control process (see Figure 27)) in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment differs from that of the second embodiment, but is the same process as that of the first embodiment (see Figure 28), therefore, the explanation is omitted.

Next, the special symbol variation stop process (step 702 of the special symbol-related control process (see Figure 27)) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 89.
In step 1003-11, the main CPU 101 executes a remaining variation count update process related to updating the first remaining variation count and the second remaining variation count. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1003-12.
In step 1003-12, the main CPU 101 executes a remaining small win count update process related to updating the remaining small win count. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1003-13.

In step 1003-13, the main CPU 101 executes game state control processing related to setting the game state. Then, it proceeds to step 1004, which executes the process of setting the stop display time.

Next, the remaining variation count update process in step 1003-11 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 90.
In step 1010, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state (at the time of the win/loss lottery) is a time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2), that is, whether a time-saving game state is being set. If it determines that the game is not in a time-saving game state (i.e., it is in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state)), it terminates the remaining spin count update process. On the other hand, if it determines that the game is in a time-saving game state, it proceeds to the next step 1011.
In step 1011, the main CPU 101 updates the first remaining spin count and the second remaining spin count. Specifically, when the second special symbol is displayed as stopped, the main CPU 101 decrements both the first and second remaining spin counts by 1, and when the first special symbol is displayed as stopped, it decrements only the second remaining spin count by 1. Then, the remaining spin count update process ends.

Next, the remaining number of small wins update process in step 1003-12 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 91.
In step 1020, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol displayed is a minor win symbol. If it determines that the special symbol displayed is not a minor win symbol (i.e., it is a big win symbol, a time-saving symbol, or a losing symbol), it terminates the remaining minor win count update process. On the other hand, if it determines that the special symbol displayed is a minor win symbol, it proceeds to the next step 1021.
In step 1021, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state or not. If it determines that it is not a time-saving game state, it terminates the remaining small win count update process. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a time-saving game state, it proceeds to the next step 1022.

In step 1022, the main CPU 101 updates the remaining number of small wins. Specifically, if the remaining number of small wins is 1 or greater, the main CPU 101 decrements it by 1. On the other hand, if the remaining number of small wins is 0, no processing is performed. Then, the remaining number of wins update process ends.

Next, the game state control process described in step 1003-13 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 92.
In step 1030, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state or not. If it determines that it is not a time-saving game state, it proceeds to step 1036. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a time-saving game state, it proceeds to the next step 1031.
In step 1031, the main CPU 101 determines whether any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (1) to (3) (i.e., time-saving termination conditions related to the number of time-saving rounds and the number of minor wins) have been met. If it determines that none of them have been met, it proceeds to step 1033. On the other hand, if it determines that one of them has been met, it proceeds to the next step 1032.

In step 1032, the main CPU 101 executes a normal game state setting process to terminate the currently set time-saving game state and set the normal game state. Specifically, it turns off both the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag, and clears the first time-saving count memory area, the second time-saving count memory area, and the termination decision count memory area. As a result, the currently set low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 is terminated, and the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) is set. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1033.
In step 1033, the main CPU 101 stores the game state at that time as the reference game state in a predetermined memory area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, if the normal game state is set in step 1032, which is the step to which the CPU 101 proceeds if it is determined in step 1031 that any of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (3) have been met, the non-time-saving game state is stored as the reference game state. Also, if it is determined in step 1031 that none of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (3) have been met, the time-saving game state is stored as the reference game state. Then, the CPU proceeds to the next step 1034.

In step 1034, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time-saving termination condition (i.e., winning a minor prize) described in (4) above has been met. If it determines that the condition has not been met, it terminates the game state control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the condition has been met, it proceeds to the next step 1035.
In step 1035, the main CPU 101 executes the normal game state setting process. This process is the same as in step 1032 described above, so the explanation is omitted. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a minor win occurs while the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set, depending on the result of the remaining minor win count update process described above, the time-saving termination condition (3), which is that the number of minor wins has reached the termination count, is not met, and the process in step 1032 described above is not executed. However, in step 1034 described above, it is determined that the time-saving termination condition (4) has been met, and the normal game state is set here. In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a minor win occurs in either the time-saving game state JT1 or JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2), the time-saving game state that was set ends and the normal game state is set. The game state control process then ends.

Furthermore, in step 1036, which is proceeded to if it is determined in step 1030 above that the game is not in a time-saving state, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol that has stopped to display is a time-saving symbol. If it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped to display is not a time-saving symbol (i.e., it is a jackpot symbol, a minor jackpot symbol, or a losing symbol), the game state control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped to display is a time-saving symbol, the game proceeds to the next step 1037.
In step 1037, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving game state setting process that sets the game state according to the time-saving symbols that are displayed as stopped.
Specifically, if the displayed time-saving symbol is J1, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time-saving game flag, sets "10000" corresponding to the first time-saving game count as the first remaining spin count in the first time-saving game count memory area, sets "10000" corresponding to the second time-saving game count as the second remaining spin count in the second time-saving game count memory area, and sets "1" corresponding to the number of times the game is decided as the remaining small win count in the termination decision count memory area. This sets the low probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Furthermore, if the displayed time-saving symbol is J2, the main CPU 101 turns on the second time-saving game flag, sets "1" corresponding to the first time-saving count as the first remaining spin count in the first time-saving count memory area, sets "6" corresponding to the second time-saving count as the second remaining spin count in the second time-saving count memory area, and sets "100" corresponding to the number of times the game is decided as the remaining small win count in the end-decision count memory area. This sets the low probability game state LJT2 (LJT2-C).
Then, the game state control process ends.

Next, the special game termination process (step 706 of the special symbol-related control process (see Figure 27)) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 93.
In step 1304-11, which proceeds if the execution phase data in step 1300 is data "04" indicating the execution of the special game termination process, the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process that sets the game state based on the reference game state stored in the main RAM 103 and the type of special symbol that was displayed when stopped.
Specifically, if the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state, and the special symbols displayed after stopping are the jackpot symbols X1 or X2, or the minor jackpot symbols Y1, Y3, or Y4, the main CPU 101 turns on the second time-saving game flag, sets "1" corresponding to the first time-saving game count as the first remaining spin count in the first time-saving game count memory area, sets "6" corresponding to the second time-saving game count as the second remaining spin count in the second time-saving game count memory area, and sets "100" corresponding to the number of times the game is decided as the remaining minor jackpot spin count in the termination decision count memory area. This sets the low probability game state LJT2 (LJT2-C).
Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state, and the special symbols that are stopped and displayed are the jackpot symbols X1 or X2, or the minor jackpot symbols Y1, Y3, or Y4, the main CPU 101 turns on the second time-saving game flag, sets "6" corresponding to the first time-saving game count as the first remaining spin count in the first time-saving game count memory area, sets "11" corresponding to the second time-saving game count as the second remaining spin count in the second time-saving game count memory area, and sets "100" corresponding to the number of times the game is decided as the remaining minor jackpot spin count in the termination decision count memory area. This sets the low probability game state LJT2 (LJT2-D).
Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state and the special symbol displayed at the stop is the minor win symbol Y2, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time-saving game flag, sets "10000" corresponding to the first time-saving count as the first remaining spin count in the first time-saving count memory area, sets "10000" corresponding to the second time-saving count as the second remaining spin count in the second time-saving count memory area, and sets "1" corresponding to the number of times the game is decided as the remaining minor win count in the termination decision count memory area. This sets the low probability game state LJT1.
Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference is a time-saving game state and the special symbol displayed after stopping is the minor win symbol Y2, the main CPU 101 turns off both the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag, and clears the first time-saving count memory area, the second time-saving count memory area, and the end-decision count memory area. This sets the game to a normal game state (non-time-saving game state).
Then, the process proceeds to step 1306, in which the game state specification command is stored in the data storage area for performance transmission.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, the reference game state differs depending on whether the small win symbol Y2 is determined during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2. As a result, after the special game executed via the small win symbol Y2 ends, a different game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or normal game state) is set according to the reference game state.
According to this type of pachinko machine P, the variety of game state settings becomes richer, which enhances the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, if a minor win occurs in either the time-saving game state JT1 or JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2), the time-saving termination condition in (4) above is met, and the time-saving game state that was set ends and the normal game state is set.
If the game is set so that the time-saving game state does not end when a minor win is achieved, then the time-saving game state will continue during the minor win game resulting from that win. In that case, the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the large prize slot 18 during the minor win game will increase the payout rate during the time-saving game state, which could lead to a situation where the gambling aspect of the time-saving game state becomes too high.
In the pachinko machine P of this form, as configured as described above, the game enters a normal game state (non-time-saving game state) during small wins, which effectively prevents situations where the gambling element becomes too high during time-saving game states.

(Overview of various effects in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
Next, we will explain the outlines of the various effects performed in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, for each game state.
(1) Low probability time-saving game state LJT1
As described above, during gameplay in this form, the player primarily stays in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, left-hand play prompts for the first and second forms are given, and a background image corresponding to the game state LJT1 is displayed. This background image allows the player to understand that they are in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a win/loss lottery is performed in principle based on the first special symbol random number, and in the variation performance when a big win or a small win is achieved in this lottery, the performance symbols 50 are stopped according to the winning pattern of the first form or second form (see Figure 54(e), etc.), in the variation performance when time-saving is achieved in this lottery, the performance symbols 50 are stopped according to the non-winning pattern of the first form or second form (see Figure 54(a), etc.), and in the variation performance when the win/loss lottery is a loss, the performance symbols 50 are stopped according to the non-winning pattern described above.
Furthermore, during minor win games based on minor wins, and during special games executed via minor wins or major wins, the first and second forms of right-hand shooting suggestions (see Figure 56, etc.) are displayed. In addition, during minor win games, the corresponding minor win game effects are executed, and during special games, special game effects (see Figure 58(a), etc.) are executed.

(2) Low probability time-saving game state LJT2
When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set, the above-mentioned suggestion to shoot to the right will be made, and during this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, a background image corresponding to the game state will be displayed. This background image makes it possible to understand that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is active.
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, a win/loss lottery is generally performed based on the second special symbol random number. If a big win or a small win is achieved in this lottery, the reel spinning animation will display the reel symbols 50 in the winning pattern described above. If the reel spinning animation is a loss, the reel symbols 50 will display in the non-winning pattern. In addition, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, a reel spinning animation using special pattern A is performed (see Figure 86, etc.).

(3) Normal game state If the normal game state is set because the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 ends without winning a big or small win, the background image corresponding to the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 will continue to be displayed until the display of the second special symbol variation based on the remaining second special symbol variation ends. When this display of the second special symbol variation ends, the left-hand shooting suggestion mentioned above will be made, and the background image corresponding to the normal game state will be displayed. This background image will allow the player to understand that they are in the normal game state.
Furthermore, during normal gameplay, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the remaining reserves of the second special symbol. If a big win or a small win is achieved through this lottery, the reel spinning animation will display the stop of the animation symbol 50 according to the winning pattern described above. If the win/loss lottery is unsuccessful, the reel spinning animation will display the stop of the animation symbol 50 according to the non-winning pattern.
Furthermore, during normal gameplay, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the first special symbol random number. If a big win or a small win is achieved through this lottery, the performance symbols 50 are displayed to stop according to the winning pattern described above. If a time-saving bonus is awarded through this lottery, the performance symbols 50 are displayed to stop according to the non-winning pattern. In addition, if a time-saving bonus is awarded, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, an indication is given that a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be set afterward (see Figure 86(f), etc.). If the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, an indication is given that a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set afterward (see Figure 86(e), etc.).
Furthermore, even during normal gameplay, special pattern A variations in the game's animations are performed.

Furthermore, the performance effects that can be implemented in the pachinko machine P relating to this form are not limited to those described above; performance effects from the first and second forms may also be applied to the extent that they do not create contradictions.

(Modified version of the pachinko machine P according to this form)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, the result of winning a jackpot is derived in both the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, but it is not limited to this, and the result of winning a jackpot may not be derived.
Specifically, for example, in the first special random number drawing, a result of either winning a minor prize or receiving a time-saving bonus may be derived, and in the second special random number drawing, a result of either winning a minor prize or losing may be derived. Furthermore, if a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during a minor prize game based on a minor prize win, a special game may be executed.
Even in the manner described above, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, if a minor win occurs during the time-saving game state, even if the time-saving termination condition in (3) above is not met due to the update of the remaining number of minor wins, the time-saving game state will terminate based on the subsequent minor win (i.e., the condition for terminating the time-saving game was set to be the winning of a minor win), but it is not limited to this.
For example, by not setting a condition for ending the time-saving mode as the winning of a minor prize, if a minor prize is won during the time-saving mode, and the time-saving mode ending condition in (3) above is not met due to the update of the remaining number of minor prizes, the time-saving mode currently in operation may not end.

In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the remaining number of small wins is updated and the game state is processed based on the update after the display of the special symbols has finished and before the display period of the special symbols has started, and the time when the processing is performed is set as the reference time, but it is not limited to this.
For example, during the display of the special symbols, the remaining number of small wins may be updated, and the game state processing based on that update may be performed, with the time when this processing is performed being the reference point. Alternatively, during the period when the special symbols are stopped, the remaining number of small wins may be updated, and the game state processing based on that update may be performed, with the time when this processing is performed being the reference point.
Even in the manner described above, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

In the pachinko machine P according to this form, the time-saving game state can be terminated depending on the number of minor wins, and the number of minor wins required to terminate the time-saving game state differs for each of the multiple types of time-saving game states, so that the game state at the reference point differs (either a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state). However, the machine is not limited to this, and similar control may be performed depending on the number of major wins.
For example, the time-saving game state JT1 is set to end when the number of jackpot wins reaches 1, and the time-saving game state JT2 is set to end when the number of jackpot wins reaches 100. In addition, in the special symbol variation termination process, the reference point is set to the time when the number of jackpot wins is updated and the game state processing based on that update is executed. Furthermore, when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the game state at the time of reference was a non-time-saving game state, the time-saving game state JT1 may be set after the special game based on that determination ends, and if the game state at the time of reference was a time-saving game state, the non-time-saving game state may be set after the special game based on that determination ends.
In this manner, it becomes possible to perform the same control as that of the pachinko machine P in this embodiment based on the winning of a jackpot.

(4th form)
The fourth form will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this description, components similar to those in the first, second, and third forms described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.
The pachinko machine P in this form, like the second and third forms, is a so-called type 1 and type 2 mixed pachinko machine, and is configured so that a special game is executed when a jackpot is won or when a game ball enters a special area during a minor win game based on a minor win.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P in this embodiment, as well as the devices and components installed on the game board 11, are the same as those in the second and third embodiments.
Furthermore, similar to the second and third forms, during special games based on a big win, or during minor win games based on a minor win, the large prize slot 18 opens, allowing game balls to enter the large prize slot 18. During special games, the distribution member 59 is stationary in the first position, and game balls that enter the large prize slot 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. In contrast, during minor win games based on the determination of minor win symbols, the distribution member 59 is stationary in the second position, and game balls that enter the large prize slot 18 do not enter the general area 58, but all enter the special area.
In other words, game balls can only enter the special area during a minor win game based on the determination of a minor win symbol. As a result, a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this form) enter the special area during a minor win game. Based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special area during a minor win game, the special game is executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, similar to the second form, the game state after the special game that is executed based on the determination of the jackpot symbols when a jackpot is won or the minor win symbols when a minor win is won is set.
Furthermore, similar to the second and third forms, the following game states can be set: a normal game state which combines a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state; a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 which combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state JT1; and a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 which combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2. The game proceeds with one of these game states set.
Furthermore, as with the second and third forms, a low-probability game state is always set in all game states. Therefore, regardless of the game state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the draw remains constant and is always the same (approximately 1/200) (see Figure 94(a)).

Furthermore, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting prize entry point 16 in the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1, and time-saving game state JT2 is the same as in the second and third forms. That is, in the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1, and time-saving game state JT2, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol variation time, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b are all set in the same way as in the second and third forms (see Figures 14-16, 87(c), and 94(c)).

Furthermore, in the initial state immediately after factory shipment or after a RAM reset (initialization process in case of abnormality, initialization process in normal operation), the normal gameplay state is set.

During normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT1, players are instructed to shoot (left-handed) the game balls towards the first game area 12a so that they enter the first starting prize entry point 15. During low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT2, special gameplay, and minor win gameplay, players are instructed to shoot (right-handed) the game balls towards the second game area 12b so that they enter the large prize entry point 18, or pass through the gate 20 and enter the second starting prize entry point 16.
In other words, during normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, players are primarily instructed to play in the first game area 12a, and as long as gameplay is taking place in the first game area 12a, game balls can enter the first starting prize entry point 15. Furthermore, during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2, players are primarily instructed to play in the second game area 12b, and as long as gameplay is taking place in the second game area 12b, game balls can pass through gate 20 and enter the second starting prize entry point 16.
Then, a draw is performed to determine whether a player wins or loses based on the number of game balls that enter the first starting prize slot 15 and the number of game balls that enter the second starting prize slot 16.

In this embodiment, the reserved memory area of the main RAM 103 consists of a first reserved memory area for storing the first special symbol random number and a second reserved memory area for storing the second special symbol random number. Each of these reserved memory areas consists of only one memory unit (first memory unit), and is capable of storing one set of the first special symbol random number and one set of the second special symbol random number. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, the first special symbol random number is stored in the first memory unit of the first reserved memory area, and when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, the second special symbol random number is stored in the first memory unit of the second reserved memory area. Furthermore, even if a game ball enters the first starting prize entry 15 while the first special symbol random number is stored in the first memory unit of the first reserved memory area, the first special symbol random number acquired based on that entry will not be stored. Similarly, even if a game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16 while the second special symbol random number is stored in the first memory unit of the second reserved memory area, the second special symbol random number acquired based on that entry will not be stored.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, as with the first and third forms, if both the first and second special symbol random numbers are stored, the second special symbol random number is processed in priority over the first special symbol random number. For example, when both the first and second special symbol random numbers are stored when the display of special symbol variations begins, the win/loss lottery and the display of special symbol variations are performed first based on the second special symbol random number, and once that display is finished, the win/loss lottery and the display of special symbol variations are then performed based on the first special symbol random number.
In this embodiment, as in the second embodiment, if both the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are stored, they may be processed in the order in which they were stored in the reserved memory area. Furthermore, multiple storage units may be provided in each reserved memory area to store multiple first special symbol random numbers and second special symbol random numbers.

As shown in Figure 94(a), in the draw for winning or losing when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, it is possible to win either a jackpot or a time-saving bonus. If a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, and if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined.
Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/200, and the probability of determining the jackpot symbols X1 and X2 when a jackpot is won is set to 50/100 (50%). The probability of winning a time-saving bonus is set to approximately 1/200, and the probability of determining the time-saving bonus symbol J1 when a time-saving bonus is won is set to 100/100 (100%). In addition, if the above-mentioned draw results in a loss, the losing symbol Z1 is determined.
Thus, the win/loss lottery based on the first special random number is designed to produce one of the following results: a big win, a time-saving bonus, or a loss. In other words, the win/loss lottery based on the first special random number is designed so that a small win is not possible, and if a big win or a time-saving bonus is not achieved, the result is a loss.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 94(a), when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, the winner can win either a big win or a small win. If a big win is achieved, the big win symbol X3 or X4 is determined, and if a small win is achieved, the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined.
Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/200, and the probability of determining jackpot symbols X3 and X4 when a jackpot is won is set to 50/100 (50%). The probability of winning a minor prize is set to approximately 20/200 (approximately 1/10), and the probability of determining minor prize symbols Y1 and Y2 when a minor prize is won is set to 50/100 (50%). In addition, if the above-mentioned draw results in a loss, the losing symbol Z2 is determined.
Thus, the draw based on the second special random number is designed to produce one of the following results: a big win, a small win, or a loss. In other words, the draw based on the second special random number is designed so that you will not win a time-saving bonus, and if you do not win a big win or a small win, the result will be a loss.

Furthermore, in the lottery for winning or losing in this form, just like in the second and third forms, first, a determination is made as to whether or not a big win is achieved. If the result is that a big win is not achieved, then a determination is made as to whether or not a small win is achieved. If the result is that a small win is not achieved, then a determination is made as to whether or not a time-saving bonus is granted, and if the result is that a time-saving bonus is not granted, then it is a loss.
Furthermore, once a special symbol is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern is determined based on the result of that determination, which includes the variation time and variation performance of the special symbol.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, similar to the third form, the stop display time (symbol confirmation time), which is the time it takes for the special symbol to stop displaying after the display of the special symbol's variation has finished, is the same (0.5 seconds) regardless of the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery or the type of special symbol determined. The stop display time may also be determined based on the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery or the type of special symbol determined, similar to the first and second forms.

Furthermore, similar to the third form, the mini-win game, which is executed when a mini-win is won and either the mini-win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: the large prize opening 18 is opened for 0.45 seconds four times, or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open (see Figure 94(b)). In addition, the closing time (interval time) of the large prize opening 18 between the end of one opening and the start of the next is set to 0.6 seconds (see Figure 94(b)). Moreover, while the large prize opening 18 is open, the distribution member 59 remains in the second position (see Figure 94(b)).
In other words, if a minor win is achieved, regardless of which minor win symbol is determined, the large prize opening 18 is open for a total of 1.8 seconds during the minor win game. Therefore, if the player is shooting to the right during this minor win game, the game ball can be sent into the large prize opening 18. Also, since the distribution member 59 remains in the second position during this minor win game, any game ball that enters the large prize opening 18 will always enter the special area.
Therefore, if a minor win is achieved, and the player is shooting to the right, a predetermined number of game balls (1 ball) will enter the special area during the minor win game based on that win, and a special game will be executed based on that entry.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, if a jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X4 is determined, or if a minor jackpot symbol Y2 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this embodiment) enter the special area during the minor jackpot game based on that determination, a round game is executed a total of three times, ending when either the large prize opening 18 is open for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18. In addition, in each round game, the large prize opening 18 is opened only once (opened for 29.0 seconds once), and the interval time between each round game is set to 2.0 seconds. Moreover, the distribution member 59 remains stationary in the first position during each round game.
Furthermore, if a jackpot symbol X3 is determined, or if a minor jackpot symbol Y1 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor jackpot game based on that determination, a special game is executed in which a round game in the same manner as described above is played a total of 10 times. The opening and closing patterns of the opening and closing doors 18b, the operation patterns of the distribution member 59, and the interval time during the round game are also set to be the same as those of the special game described above.

(Summary of the game state to be set)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, if a special game is executed based on the winning of a jackpot, the game state after the special game ends is set according to the type of jackpot symbol determined and the game state at the time of the jackpot (the game state when the win/loss lottery is executed).

Furthermore, if a minor win is achieved and a minor win game is executed, and a special game is executed when a predetermined number (1 ball) of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game, the game state after the special game ends will be set according to the type of minor win symbol determined and the game state at the time of the minor win (the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery).
In contrast, if, for example, the player does not hit the ball to the right, and therefore the predetermined number of game balls do not enter the special area during a minor win game, the special game will not be executed and the game state described above will not be set. Consequently, even after the minor win game ends, the game state from before the start of the minor win game will continue.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, if a time-saving bonus is awarded while in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), the time-saving game state corresponding to the determined time-saving symbol is not set, and the non-time-saving game state continues even after the time-saving symbol is displayed.
In contrast, if a time-saving bonus is awarded during a time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2)), the current time-saving game state ends after the determined time-saving symbols are displayed, and a new time-saving game state corresponding to the determined time-saving symbols is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, the main RAM 103 is equipped with a time-saving count memory area, similar to the first form, and this time-saving count memory area stores the remaining number of spins until the time-saving game state that is currently set ends.
Specifically, when a time-saving game state is set, a predetermined number of time-saving spins is set (stored) in the time-saving spin count memory area as an initial value indicating the remaining number of spins until the time-saving game state ends. Then, each time a special symbol variation is displayed, the value stored in the time-saving spin count memory area is updated. As a result, the value stored in the time-saving spin count memory area becomes the remaining number of spins until the set time-saving game state ends.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 95(a), if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, or if a minor win is won and the minor win symbol Y1 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then regardless of whether the game state at the time of the jackpot win or minor win was a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2), and the number of time-saving rounds is set to 200.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, or if a minor win is won and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then, if the game state at the time of the jackpot win or minor win is a non-time-saving game state, the game state after the end of the special game will be set to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2), and the number of time-saving rounds will be set to 200.
As will be explained later, if a jackpot symbol X4 or a minor jackpot symbol Y2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2), and a special game is executed as a result of that determination, the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) will be set after the special game ends. When this normal game state is set, there may be a second special symbol random number (second remaining reserve) that was acquired and stored in reserve during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 before the start of the special game. The win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is mainly performed during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, but in this case, the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number will be performed in the normal game state. Then, when the winning or losing lottery determines the jackpot symbol X4 or the minor prize symbol Y2, the game state at the time of the jackpot or minor prize is a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, as described above, after the special game executed through this determination ends, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set.

The aforementioned low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 continues until the result of the win/loss lottery is drawn 200 times without the special game being executed (until the number of special symbol variations reaches 200). Then, when the result of the win/loss lottery is drawn 200 times without the special game being executed during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the time-saving game state JT2 is changed to a non-time-saving game state, and the game state is changed to a normal game state.
Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, as long as you continue to shoot to the right as instructed, a win/loss lottery will be held based on the second special symbol random number, and in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, it is possible to win either a big win or a small win, with the probability of winning a big win being approximately 1/200 and the probability of winning a small win being approximately 20/200 (see Figure 94(a)). Therefore, in practice, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will continue until you win a big win or a small win and the special game is executed through that win.

As shown in Figure 95(a), if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, or if a minor win is won and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then, if the game state at the time of the jackpot win or minor win was a time-saving game state, the game state after the end of the special game will be set to a normal game state (non-time-saving game state).

As shown in Figure 95(a), if a jackpot is won through a draw based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the jackpot win was a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state, the game state after the special game ends will be set to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), and the number of time-saving rounds will be set to 20.

This low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 continues until the result of the win/loss lottery is drawn 20 times without the special game being executed (until the number of special symbol variations reaches 20). Then, when the result of the win/loss lottery is drawn 20 times without the special game being executed during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the time-saving game state JT1 is changed to a non-time-saving game state, and the game state is changed to a normal game state.
Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, as long as you are shooting to the left as instructed, a win/loss lottery will be held based on the first special symbol random number, and it is possible to win a jackpot in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, with the probability of winning a jackpot being approximately 1/200 (see Figure 94(a)). Therefore, it is not guaranteed that you will win a jackpot during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

As shown in Figure 95(a), in a time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2)), if a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number (i.e., if a time-saving bonus is awarded and the game state at the time of this time-saving bonus award is a time-saving game state), the time-saving game state that was set ends when the time-saving symbol J1 stops and a new low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) is set, and the number of time-saving rounds is set to 200.
In contrast, if, in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), the player wins a time-saving bonus through a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the time-saving bonus symbol J1 is determined (i.e., the player wins a time-saving bonus and the game state at the time of this time-saving bonus win was a non-time-saving game state), the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) based on the determination of the time-saving bonus symbol J1 is not set, and the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) continues even after the time-saving bonus symbol J1 is displayed.

The draw for winning or losing based on the first special symbol random number during the time-saving game state is mainly performed during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) in which left-handed shooting is instructed. Therefore, the game state when time-saving is granted is generally the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. However, even in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, if the player does not follow the instruction to shoot to the right and shoots to the left, and the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15, a draw for winning or losing based on the first special symbol random number will be performed, and the game state when time-saving is granted may be the low-probability time-saving game state JT2.
Then, if a time-saving bonus is awarded in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, LJT1 ends, LJT2 is set, and the number of time-saving rounds is set to 200. On the other hand, if a time-saving bonus is awarded in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, LJT2 ends, a new low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set, and the number of time-saving rounds is reset to 200.

Furthermore, the timing for setting the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 when a time-saving bonus is awarded is not limited to the moment the time-saving symbol J1 stops. For example, it may be set at any point between the start and end of the time-saving symbol J1's display time (the time the symbol is confirmed), or at the start, or at any point during the display.

(Summary of variation pattern table 114)
The pachinko machine P according to this configuration also includes multiple types of variation pattern tables 114. Here, as shown in Figures 96(a) to (d), we will explain the following tables: Table MP51, which is referenced when a win/loss lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay (excluding the period until the display of special symbol variations based on the second remaining reserve is completed in normal gameplay after the end of a special game triggered by winning a jackpot or minor win in low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2); Table MP52, which is referenced when a win/loss lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1; Table MP53, which is referenced when a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2; and Table MP54, which is referenced when a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number (second remaining reserve) during normal gameplay after the end of a special game triggered by winning a jackpot or minor win in low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2. We will omit the explanation of the other variation pattern tables 114.

As shown in Figure 96(a), according to table MP51, if a losing symbol Z1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, one of the following will be selected: variation pattern command "00H" associated with a "13-second variation" variation pattern (selection rate 85%), variation pattern command "03H" associated with a "20-second variation" variation pattern (selection rate 10%), or variation pattern command "04H" associated with a "60-second variation" variation pattern (selection rate 5%).
If the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "05H" (with a 100% selection rate) associated with the "13-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.
If the winning symbol X1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, either the variation pattern command "0AH" (5% selection rate) associated with the "20-second variation" variation pattern, or the variation pattern command "0BH" (95% selection rate) associated with the "60-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.
If two winning symbols are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, either the variation pattern command "0CH" (5% selection rate) associated with the "20-second variation" variation pattern, or the variation pattern command "0DH" (95% selection rate) associated with the "60-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.

As shown in Figure 96(b), according to table MP52, if a losing symbol Z1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, either the variation pattern command "10H" (selection rate 70%), which is associated with a variation pattern of "10 seconds", or the variation pattern command "14H" (selection rate 30%), which is associated with a variation pattern of "45 seconds", will be determined.
If the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "15H" (with a 100% selection rate) associated with the "45-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.
If the winning symbol X1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "1AH" (with a 100% selection rate) associated with the "45-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.
If two winning symbols are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "1CH" (with a 100% selection rate) associated with the "45-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.

As shown in Figure 96(c), according to table MP53, if a losing symbol Z2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved symbols, either the variation pattern command "20H" (85% selection rate) associated with a "3-second variation" variation pattern, or the variation pattern command "24H" (15% selection rate) associated with an "8-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.
If three winning symbols are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "2AH" (with a 100% selection rate) associated with the "8-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.
If four winning symbols are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "2CH" (with a 100% selection rate) associated with the "8-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.
If the minor winning symbol Y1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "2EH" (with a 100% selection rate) associated with the "8-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.
If the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "2FH" (with a 100% selection rate) associated with the "8-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.

As shown in Figure 96(d), according to table MP54, if a losing symbol Z2 is determined, the variation pattern command "34H" (selection rate is 100%), which is associated with the variation pattern "15-second variation", is determined regardless of the current value of the number of reserved symbols.
If three winning symbols are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "3AH" (with a 100% selection rate) associated with the "15-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.
If four winning symbols are determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "3CH" (with a 100% selection rate) associated with the "15-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.
If the minor winning symbol Y1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "3EH" (with a 100% selection rate) associated with the "15-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.
If the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "3FH" (with a 100% selection rate) associated with the "15-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.

(Gameplay of the pachinko machine P in this form)
In the pachinko machine P according to this form, as described above, the game proceeds with one of the following game states set: normal game state (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state), low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT1), or low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2).

When a player starts playing, the game is generally set to the normal game state.
In normal gameplay, the player is instructed to launch the game ball towards the first game area 12a, and even if the game ball is launched towards the second game area 12b, the game ball will not enter the second starting prize slot 16. Therefore, in normal gameplay, if the game ball is launched towards the first game area 12a, the game ball will enter the first starting prize slot 15, and a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number will be performed.
In normal gameplay, if a jackpot is won through a draw based on the first special symbol random number, either jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined (see Figure 94(a)). If jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a special game consisting of three rounds is executed, and after this special game ends, the game state is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 95(a)). If jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a special game consisting of three rounds is executed, and after this special game ends, the game state is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (see Figure 95(a)).
Furthermore, in normal gameplay, if the player wins a time-saving bonus through a lottery based on the first special symbol random number (i.e., the time-saving symbol J1 is determined), the normal gameplay state continues even after the special symbol stops (see Figure 95(b)).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, if the player follows the instructions and shoots to the left during normal gameplay, they will win a jackpot, which will trigger a special game consisting of three rounds of gameplay, and then transition to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 (see Figure 97).

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as during normal gameplay. Also, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, just like in normal gameplay, players are instructed to shoot game balls toward the first game area 12a, and even if game balls are shot toward the second game area 12b, those game balls will not enter the second starting prize entry point 16. Therefore, even during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, if game balls are shot toward the first game area 12a, the game balls will enter the first starting prize entry point 15, and a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number will be performed.
Even in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, if a jackpot is won through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, either jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined (see Figure 94(a)). When jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a special game consisting of three rounds is executed, and the game state after the completion of this special game is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 95(a)). If jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a special game consisting of three rounds is executed, and the game state after the completion of this special game is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (see Figure 95(a)).
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, if the player wins the time-saving bonus through a draw based on the first special symbol random number, the game state after the special symbol stops will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 95(b)).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, if the player follows the instructions and shoots to the left during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, winning a jackpot will result in a special game consisting of three rounds of gameplay, after which the player will transition to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2. If the player wins a time-saving bonus, the player will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 without going through the special game (see Figure 97). If the special symbols are displayed 20 times without the special game being executed, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends and the player transitions to the normal game state (see Figure 97).

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as during normal gameplay and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. However, when a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball can enter the second starting prize slot 16 with a high frequency. Furthermore, in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b. If the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number will be performed when the game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, if a jackpot is won through a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, either jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined (see Figure 94(a)). If jackpot symbol X3 is determined, a special game consisting of 10 rounds is executed, and the game state after the completion of this special game is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 95(a)). If jackpot symbol X4 is determined, a special game consisting of 3 rounds is executed, and the game state after the completion of this special game is set to the normal game state (see Figure 95(a)).
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, if a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, either minor win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined (see Figure 94(a)). When minor win symbol Y1 is determined, a special game consisting of 10 rounds is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, and the game state after the completion of this special game is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 95(a)). When minor win symbol Y2 is determined, a special game consisting of 3 rounds is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, and the game state after the completion of this special game is set to the normal game state (see Figure 95(a)).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the player follows the instructions and shoots to the right during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, a big win or a small win will result in a special game consisting of 3 or 10 rounds of gameplay, after which the player will transition to either the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 97).

Furthermore, when transitioning to the normal game state after a special game based on the determination of the big win symbol X4 or the small win symbol Y2 during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, if there is a second special symbol random number (second remaining reserve) that was acquired and stored during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, then in the normal game state, the win/loss lottery based on this second special symbol random number will be executed before the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is executed.
In normal gameplay, if a jackpot is won through a draw based on the second special symbol random number, either jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined (see Figure 94(a)). If jackpot symbol X3 is determined, a special game consisting of 10 rounds is executed, and the game state after this special game ends is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 95(a)). If jackpot symbol X4 is determined, a special game consisting of 3 rounds is executed, and the game state after this special game ends is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 95(a)).
Furthermore, in normal gameplay, if a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, either minor win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined (see Figure 94(a)). When minor win symbol Y1 is determined, a special game consisting of 10 rounds is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, and the game state after the completion of this special game is set to the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 95(a)). When minor win symbol Y2 is determined, a special game consisting of 3 rounds is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, and the game state after the completion of this special game is set to the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 95(a)).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the normal game state is set after a special game based on the determination of a jackpot symbol X4 or a minor jackpot symbol Y2 during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2, if the second special symbol random number is stored, a jackpot or minor jackpot will result in the execution of a special game in which 3 or 10 rounds of gameplay are performed, and the machine will always transition to the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 97).

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the decrease in game balls as the game progresses can be suppressed more than during the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, due to the prize balls awarded based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize entry 16. Furthermore, in the special game that is executed through the winning of a jackpot or a minor win, it is possible to execute a larger number of rounds of gameplay than in the special game that occurs when a jackpot is won during the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. Moreover, as mentioned above, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 200, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/200, and the probability of winning a minor win is approximately 20/200, so in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, a jackpot or minor win is almost guaranteed. In other words, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

Here, transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is possible from either the normal game state or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. However, transitioning from the normal game state requires winning a jackpot (determining the jackpot symbol X1), whereas transitioning from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 requires winning a jackpot (determining the jackpot symbol X1) or winning a time-saving bonus (determining the time-saving symbol J1). In other words, the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is higher during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 than during the normal game state. This allows for a novel gameplay experience where the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 becomes a chance zone with a high probability of transitioning to the advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, thereby increasing player interest.

Furthermore, even if the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 ends and the normal game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4 or the minor jackpot symbol Y2, the second remaining reserve is stored. If a jackpot or minor jackpot is won through the win/loss lottery based on this second remaining reserve (second special symbol random number), the game will transition back to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. This allows the player to maintain a sense of anticipation for a return to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, even after it has ended.

(Outline of processing in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
Next, we will explain the outline of the processes executed by the main control board 100 in accordance with the progress of the special game, regular game, minor win game, and special game as described above, using a flowchart, focusing on the differences from the first to third forms. Note that processes identical to those in the first to third forms, or processes that are nearly identical to those in the first to third forms and whose implementation method (application method to this form) can be understood by a person skilled in the art, will be assigned the same step numbers as in the first to third forms, and explanations will be omitted in principle.

The special symbol variation initiation process (step 701 of the special symbol-related control process (see Figure 33)) in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment differs from that of the second embodiment, but is the same process as that of the first and third embodiments (see Figure 34), therefore, its explanation is omitted.

Next, the special symbol variation stop process (step 702 of the special symbol-related control process (see Figure 33)) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 98.
In step 1003-21, the main CPU 101 performs a remaining spin count update process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state, that is, whether either the first time-saving game flag, which indicates that the current game state is time-saving game state JT1, or the second time-saving game flag, which indicates that the current game state is time-saving game state JT2, is turned on. If it is determined that the game state is a time-saving game state (either the first time-saving game flag or the second time-saving game flag is turned on), the value stored in the time-saving spin count memory area (the remaining spin count until the set time-saving game state ends) is decremented by 1. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not a time-saving game state (neither the first time-saving game flag nor the second time-saving game flag is turned on), the main CPU 101 does nothing. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1003-22.
In step 1003-22, the main CPU 101 executes game state control processing related to setting the game state. Then, the process proceeds to step 1004, which executes the process of setting the stop display time.

Next, the game state control process described in step 1003-22 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 99.
In step 1030-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state. If it determines that it is not a time-saving game state, it terminates the game state control process. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a time-saving game state, it proceeds to the next step 1031-1.
In step 1031-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol that has stopped is a time-saving symbol. If it determines that the special symbol that has stopped is not a time-saving symbol (i.e., it is a jackpot symbol, a minor jackpot symbol, or a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1033-1. On the other hand, if it determines that the special symbol that has stopped is a time-saving symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1032-1.

In step 1032-1, the main CPU 101 terminates the currently set time-saving game state and executes a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 setting process to set a new low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2).
Specifically, when the game state is the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), the first time-saving game flag is turned off, the second time-saving game flag is turned on, and the time-saving count memory area is set to "200". As a result, the currently set low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends, and a new low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set.
On the other hand, if the game state is the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2), the first time-saving game flag is turned off, and the second time-saving game flag is turned off and then turned back on, and the time-saving game count is reset to "200" in the time-saving game count memory area. As a result, the currently set low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 ends, and a new low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set. Alternatively, the second time-saving game flag may be left on, and only the time-saving game count may be reset.
Then, the game state control process ends.

Furthermore, in step 1033-1, which is followed if it is determined that the special symbol displayed in step 1031-1 is not a time-saving symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value stored in the time-saving count memory area has reached 0, that is, whether the remaining number of spins until the time-saving game state ends has reached 0. If it is determined that it has not reached 0, the game state control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has reached 0, the process proceeds to the next step 1034-1.
In step 1034-1, the main CPU 101 executes a normal game state setting process to terminate the currently set time-saving game state and set the normal game state. Specifically, it turns off both the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag, and clears the time-saving count memory area. As a result, the currently set low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 ends, and the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) is set. Note that if the special symbol displayed at stop is a jackpot symbol, the currently set game state will be reset in step 1107 of the post-stop processing (see Figure 83) that is executed afterward, so the normal game state setting process may not be executed here. Then, the game state control process is terminated.

Next, the special game termination process (step 705 of the special symbol-related control process (see Figure 33)) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 100.
In step 1304-21, which proceeds if the execution phase data in step 1300 is data "04" indicating the execution of the special game termination process, the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process that sets the game state based on the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery and the type of special symbol that was displayed when stopped.
Specifically, if the special symbols displayed during stopping are the jackpot symbols X1 or X3, or the minor jackpot symbol Y1, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the win/loss draw is a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 turns off the first time-saving game flag and turns on the second time-saving game flag, and sets the time-saving count to "200" in the time-saving count memory area. This sets the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2.
Furthermore, if the special symbols displayed during stopping are the jackpot symbols X2, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery is a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time-saving game flag and turns off the second time-saving game flag, and sets the time-saving count to "20" in the time-saving count memory area. This sets the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Furthermore, if the special symbols displayed when stopped are the jackpot symbols X4 and the minor jackpot symbols Y2, and the game state at the time of the win/loss draw was a non-time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 turns off the first time-saving game flag and turns on the second time-saving game flag, and sets the time-saving count to "200" in the time-saving count memory area. Also, if the game state at the time of the win/loss draw was a time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 turns off both the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag, and clears the time-saving count memory area. As a result, if the special symbols displayed when stopped are the jackpot symbols X4 and the minor jackpot symbols Y2, and the game state at the time of the win/loss draw was a non-time-saving game state, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set, and if the game state at the time of the win/loss draw was a time-saving game state, the normal game state is set.
Then, the process proceeds to step 1306, in which the game state specification command is stored in the data storage area for performance transmission.

In addition, the pachinko machine P of this embodiment also performs the special area detection processing (see Figure 78), win/loss determination processing (see Figure 80), post-stop processing (see Figure 83), and minor win game control processing (see Figure 84) of the second embodiment. However, since these are the same as those of the second embodiment, their explanation is omitted here.

(Overview of various effects in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
Next, an overview of the various effects performed by the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to the drawings in Figures 101 to 105. Note that these drawings only show the components necessary for explaining the effects in this embodiment, and other components (hold images, mini symbols, etc.) are omitted.

(1) Normal gameplay state (excluding the display of the second special symbol related to the second remaining reserve)
During normal gameplay, except when the second special symbol related to the second remaining reserve is being displayed, the display unit 21a displays a first background image corresponding to the gameplay state (see Figures 101(a) to (e), 102(a) to (c), etc.).

Then, in conjunction with the display of the special symbols, a variation effect is executed in the display unit 21a.
In normal gameplay, excluding the display of the second special symbol related to the second remaining reserve, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a loss, a variation effect will be executed using one of the following: a normal non-winning variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "00H" (13-second variation)), a reach variation pattern without development (corresponding to the variation pattern command "03H" (20-second variation)), or a reach variation pattern with development (corresponding to the variation pattern command "04H" (60-second variation)), and the effect symbol 50 will be displayed stopped in the non-winning manner (see Figures 101(a) to (e), etc.).

Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a jackpot win and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a variation performance will be executed using either a non-development reach variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "0AH" (20-second variation)) or a development reach variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "0BH" (60-second variation)). As the final result of the variation performance, an LJT2 determination indication (for example, displaying an LJT2 determination indication image that says "RUSH confirmed!!") will be executed, the effect symbol 50 will be stopped according to the winning pattern, and a special game execution indication (for example, displaying a special game execution indication image that says "BONUS!") will be executed (see Figures 102(e) to (g), etc.).
Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a jackpot win and the jackpot symbols X2 are determined, a variation performance will be executed using either a non-development reach variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "0CH" (20-second variation)) or a development-enabled reach variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "0DH" (60-second variation)). As the final result of this variation performance, the stop display of the performance symbols 50 according to the winning pattern and the suggestion to execute a special game will be executed (see Figures 102(f) to (g), etc.). In this case, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will not be set, so the suggestion to determine LJT2 will not be executed.

Furthermore, during the special gameplay sequence triggered by the jackpot win, special gameplay effects are implemented, such as prompts for right-hand play and the display of special gameplay images to enhance the experience (see Figures 103(a), 103(i), etc.).

Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a win for the time-saving bonus, the variation animation will be executed according to the normal non-winning variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "05H" (13-second variation)), and the stop display of the animation symbol 50 will be shown according to the non-winning pattern.

Thus, in a normal game state, excluding the display of the second special symbol related to the second remaining reserve, if the player wins the time-saving bonus through the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol's random number, the variation animation is executed using the normal non-winning variation pattern that can be executed if the result is a loss. In either case, the stopping display pattern of the animation symbol 50 will be the non-winning pattern. Therefore, in this normal game state, the player can understand from the variation animation pattern and the stopping display pattern of the animation symbol 50 that the result of the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol's random number is not a jackpot, but they cannot determine whether they won or lost the time-saving bonus.

In addition, in (1), the symbols 50 that are displayed when a jackpot is won may be set to be different depending on the type of jackpot symbol that has been determined.
Specifically, when a winning symbol X1 that triggers the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is determined, all performance symbols 50 (for example, all number symbols from "1" to "9") may be displayed. However, when a winning symbol X2 that triggers the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is determined, performance symbols 50 other than a specific performance symbol 50 (for example, the number symbol "7") may be displayed. In other words, when a winning symbol X1 is determined, a specific performance symbol 50 that is not displayed when a winning symbol X2 is determined may be displayed.
In this configuration, when a specific symbol 50 stops and is displayed, the player can understand that a winning symbol X1, which triggers the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, has been determined, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, the selection ratio of the display symbols 50 that stop and are shown when a jackpot is won may be set to differ depending on the type of jackpot symbol determined.
Specifically, when a winning symbol X1 that triggers the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is determined, the second performance symbol 50 (for example, an odd-numbered symbol) is more likely to be selected than the first performance symbol 50 (for example, an even-numbered symbol). However, when a winning symbol X2 that triggers the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is determined, the first performance symbol 50 may be more likely to be selected than the second performance symbol 50.
In this case, for example, when a reach is displayed using the first performance symbol 50, the expectation of determining the jackpot symbol X1, which triggers the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, increases, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, in (1), if the time reduction is awarded, the stopping display pattern of the performance symbols 50 may be a special pattern different from the winning and non-winning patterns (for example, a pattern in which only the third stopping symbol is a special symbol other than "1" to "9" (for example, the number symbol "0")).

Furthermore, in (1), the order in which the LJT2 determination indication, the stopping display of the performance symbols 50 according to the winning pattern, and the special game execution indication are executed as the final result of the variation performance when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined is not particularly limited. For example, they may be executed in the order of LJT2 determination indication → stopping display of the performance symbols 50 according to the winning pattern → special game execution indication, or stopping display of the performance symbols 50 according to the winning pattern → special game execution indication → LJT2 determination indication, etc.
Furthermore, the aforementioned LJT2 decision suggestion may be executed at any point during the special game, from the start to the end, rather than being executed as the final result of the variation animation.

(2) Low probability time-saving game state LJT1
For example, if a jackpot symbol X2 is determined during normal gameplay, and a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set after the special game based on that determination ends, the display unit 21a will display a second background image corresponding to that game state (see Figures 103(b) to (d), 104(a) to (c), etc.), and will also display suggestions for left-handed play, suggestions for setting LJT1 to indicate that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 has been set (for example, displaying an LJT1 setting suggestion image that says "High probability zone start!"), and suggestions for being in a chance zone to indicate that the player is in a chance zone where the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is high (for example, displaying a chance zone stay suggestion image with the words "RUSH entry probability increasing!!" scrolling horizontally) (see Figures 103(b), 104(a), etc.). Furthermore, the game now also displays an indication of the number of spins remaining until the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends (see Figures 103(b) to (d), 104(a) to (c), etc.).

Then, in conjunction with the display of the special symbols, a variation effect is executed in the display unit 21a.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a loss, a variation performance will be executed using either the normal non-winning variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "10H" (10-second variation)) or the development-enabled reach variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "14H" (45-second variation)), and the stop display of the performance symbol 50 will be shown according to the non-winning pattern.

Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a jackpot win and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a variation performance will be executed according to the development-enabled reach variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "1AH" (45-second variation)) (see Figures 103(c) to (e), etc.), and as the final result of the variation performance, an indication of LJT2 determination, a display of the stop of the performance symbol 50 according to the winning pattern, and an indication of special game execution will be performed (see Figures 103(f) to (h), etc.).
Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a jackpot win and the jackpot symbols X2 are determined, a variation performance will be executed according to the development-enabled reach variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command of "1CH" (45-second variation)), and as the final result of the variation performance, the stopping display of the performance symbols 50 according to the winning pattern and the suggestion to execute a special game will be executed (see Figures 103(g) to (h), etc.). In this case, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 will not be set, so the suggestion to determine LJT2 will not be executed.

Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is a win for the time-saving bonus, a variation animation will be executed using a development-enabled reach variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "15H" (45-second variation)) (see Figures 104(b) to (d), etc.). As the final result of this variation animation, an LJT2 determination indication and the stopping display of the animation symbol 50 in the special manner described above will be executed (see Figures 104(e) to (f)). In this case, since no special game is played, the indication for playing a special game is not executed.

Thus, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, if a jackpot is won based on the random number generation of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and if time-saving mode is awarded (when time-saving symbol J1 is determined), the LJT2 determination indication is executed in both cases. This ensures that in either case, the player is reliably informed that the setting for the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 has been determined.

In addition, in (2) as described above in (1), the symbols 50 that stop and are displayed when a jackpot is won may be set to be different depending on the type of jackpot symbol determined. Furthermore, the selection ratio of the symbols 50 that stop and are displayed when a jackpot is won may be set to be different depending on the type of jackpot symbol determined.
Furthermore, in (2), if the time reduction is awarded, the stopping display pattern of the performance symbols 50 may be set to either a non-winning pattern or a winning pattern.
Furthermore, in (2) as described above in (1), if a big win or a time-saving bonus is awarded, it may be possible to execute a variation animation using a reach variation pattern without development.

Furthermore, in (2) as well, the order in which the LJT2 determination indication, the display of the performance symbols 50 depending on the winning pattern, and the special game execution indication, which are executed as the final result of the variation performance when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, are not particularly limited. For example, they may be executed in the order listed in (1) above.
Furthermore, in (2), the order in which the LJT2 decision indication and the stop display of the special performance symbols 50 are executed as the final result of the variation performance when the time reduction is awarded is not particularly limited. For example, they may be executed in the order of LJT2 decision indication → stop display of the special performance symbols 50, or stop display of the special performance symbols 50 → LJT2 decision indication.
Furthermore, the indication of LJT2 determination when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined may be performed at any point between the start and end of the special game, rather than being performed as the final result of the variation animation, as in (1).

Furthermore, in (2), if the player wins the time reduction bonus, only the LJT2 determination indication may be executed, and the stopping display of the performance symbols 50 may not be explicitly shown, and various performances that are performed in accordance with the setting of the low probability time reduction game state LJT2, as described later, may be executed.
In addition, during the period between the end of the previous variation performance and the start of the next variation performance, the stop display of the performance symbol 50 in the manner of the stop display of the previous variation performance continues. However, if the stop display of the performance symbol 50 is not explicitly shown as described above, after the various performances that are performed in accordance with the setting of the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 are executed, and until the start of the next variation performance, the stop display of the performance symbol 50 in the manner of the stop display that would have been displayed in the previous variation performance may continue.

Furthermore, the left-handed shooting suggestion may be run continuously during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, or it may be terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start (for example, 10 seconds). Similarly, the chance zone stay suggestion may be run continuously during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, or it may not be run during a predetermined animation (for example, a reach development animation with a high probability of winning a jackpot or granting time-saving mode). Additionally, the number of spins suggestion may not be displayed during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

(3) Low probability time-saving game state LJT2
For example, when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined during normal gameplay or during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, or when time-saving is granted during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, and a low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 is set after the special gameplay based on these events has ended, the display unit 21a will display a third background image corresponding to the gameplay state (see Figures 103(j), 104(g) to (h), etc.), and will also display a suggestion to shoot to the right and an LJT2 setting suggestion that the low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 has been set (for example, displaying an LJT2 setting suggestion image that says "RUSH Start!") (see Figures 103(j), 104(g), etc.). Furthermore, a count suggestion will also be displayed indicating the number of remaining spins until the low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2 ends (see Figures 103(j), 104(g) to (h), etc.).

Then, in conjunction with the display of the special symbols, a variation effect is executed in the display unit 21a.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is a loss, a variation performance will be executed using either the normal non-winning variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "20H" (3-second variation)) or the special variation pattern (the variation pattern "24H" (8-second variation)), and the stop display of the performance symbol 50 will be shown according to the non-winning pattern.
Here, although not specifically illustrated, the special variation pattern is such that the variation display of all the performance symbols 50 begins, and once the variation time has elapsed, the variation display of all the performance symbols 50 ends simultaneously (all the performance symbols 50 stop and are displayed at the same time).

Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second special random number is a jackpot win and the jackpot symbols X3 are determined, although not specifically shown in the diagram, a special variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "2AH" (8-second variation)) will be executed, and as the final result of this variation, an indication of LJT2 determination, a display of the stopped effect symbols 50 according to the winning pattern (see Figure 105(a)), and an indication of special game execution will be executed.
Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second special random number is a jackpot win and the jackpot symbols X4 are determined, although not specifically shown in the diagram, a special variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "2CH" (8-second variation)) will be executed, and as the final result of this variation, the stopping display of the effect symbols 50 according to the winning pattern and the suggestion to execute a special game will be executed. In this case, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 will not be set, so the suggestion to determine LJT2 will not be executed.

Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second special random number is a minor win and the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, although not specifically shown in the diagram, a special variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "2EH" (8-second variation)) will be executed, and as the final result of this variation, an indication of LJT2 determination, a display of the stop of the effect symbol 50 according to the winning pattern, and an indication of execution of a special game will be executed.
Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is a minor win and the minor win symbol Y4 is determined, although not specifically shown in the diagram, a special variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern command "2FH" (8-second variation)) will be executed, and as the final result of the variation execution, the stopping display of the effect symbol 50 according to the winning pattern and the suggestion to execute a special game will be executed. In this case, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 will not be set, so the suggestion to determine LJT2 will not be executed.

During the mini-win game, which is executed based on a mini-win win, special effects are displayed to encourage the balls to shoot to the right or to enter the special area (for example, an image saying "Aim for V!" is displayed during the mini-win game). If a predetermined number of balls enter the special area during the mini-win game, special game effects are executed during the special game based on that entry (see Figures 105(b) to (c), etc.).

In addition, in (3) as in (1) and (2) above, the symbols 50 that stop and are displayed when a big win or a small win is achieved may be set to differ depending on the type of big win or small win symbol determined. Furthermore, the selection ratio of the symbols 50 that stop and are displayed when a big win or a small win is achieved may be set to differ depending on the type of big win or small win symbol determined.
Furthermore, in (3) as in (1) and (2) above, if a big win or a small win is achieved, it may be possible to execute a variation animation using a reach variation pattern without development, a variation animation using a reach variation pattern with development, etc.

Furthermore, in (3) as well, the order in which the LJT2 determination indication, the display of the performance symbols 50 depending on the winning pattern, and the special game execution indication are executed as the final result of the variation performance when the big win symbols X3 or the small win symbols Y1 are determined is not particularly limited, and for example, they may be executed in the order listed in (1) above.
Furthermore, the indication of LJT2 determination when the big win symbols X3 or the small win symbols Y1 are determined may be executed at any point between the start and end of the special game, rather than being executed as the final result of the variation animation, similar to (1) and (2).
Furthermore, the indication to execute a special game when minor winning symbols Y1 or Y2 are determined may be executed not as the final result of the variation animation, but when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor winning game.

Furthermore, the suggestion to shoot to the right may be continuously executed during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, or it may be terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start (for example, 5 seconds). Also, the suggestion for the number of spins may not be displayed during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2.

(4) Normal gameplay state (while the second special symbol related to the second remaining reserve is being displayed)
After the special game ends, which is determined based on the selection of a jackpot symbol X4 or a minor jackpot symbol Y2 during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the normal game state is set. If a second reserved ball exists at this time, the display unit 21a displays a special background image (see Figure 105(d)) that is different from the first, second, and third background images.

Then, in conjunction with the display of the special symbols based on the second remaining reserved symbols, a variation effect is executed in the display unit 21a.
If the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second remaining reserve (second special symbol random number) is a loss, a big win, or a small win, a special variation pattern (corresponding to the variation pattern commands "34H", "3AH", "3CH", "3EH", or "3FH" (15-second variation)) will be performed, and a button press operation will be performed during this variation performance.
Specifically, this button-press animation displays an image indicating that the button-press animation will be performed (for example, an image with the text "☆☆Revival Chance☆☆"), and an image explaining the content of the button-press animation (for example, an image with the text "Press the button!!") (see Figure 105(d)). Subsequently, an image prompting the user to press the operation button 9b (not specifically shown) is displayed. Then, if the operation button 9b is pressed before the effective time for pressing the operation button 9b (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, or if the effective time for pressing the operation button 9b has elapsed without the operation button 9b being pressed, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second remaining reserve is a win of the jackpot or a small win, the performance symbols 50 will stop according to the winning pattern, and a second remaining reserve win indication will be displayed to suggest that a win of the jackpot or a small win has been achieved (for example, a second remaining reserve win indication image such as "Revival!!" will be displayed). If it is a loss, the performance symbols 50 will stop according to the non-winning pattern, and a second remaining reserve loss indication will be displayed to suggest that a loss has been achieved (for example, a second remaining reserve win indication image such as "No revival..." will be displayed) (see Figures 105(e) to (f)).
This allows players to understand the result of the draw based on the second remaining reserved ball (i.e., whether or not the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set).

As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this form, in the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, if a jackpot is won by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and if time-saving is awarded (time-saving symbol J1 is determined), the LJT2 determination suggestion is executed in both cases. In contrast, in the normal game state, if a jackpot is won by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the LJT2 determination suggestion is executed, but if time-saving is awarded (time-saving symbol J1 is determined), the LJT2 determination suggestion is not executed in both cases.
This makes it possible to appropriately indicate whether the processing performed based on the decision result is the same or different, depending on the game state during the setting, when different decision results are derived (determination of the jackpot symbol X1, winning of the time-saving bonus (determination of the time-saving symbol J1)).

(Modified version of the pachinko machine P according to this form)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, the only jackpot symbols that trigger the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) are the jackpot symbols X2 that can be determined based on the first special symbol random number, but this is not limited to this, and multiple types of jackpot symbols may be provided. Furthermore, the number of time-saving rounds in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 may differ depending on the type of jackpot symbol.
For example, a jackpot symbol X2A and a jackpot symbol X2B may be provided as jackpot symbols that can be determined based on a first special random number and serve as triggers for setting a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 based on the determination of jackpot symbol X2A, the number of time-saving rounds may be set to 20, and in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 based on the determination of jackpot symbol X2B, the number of time-saving rounds may be set to 35.
In this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this form are achieved, and the variety of time-saving rounds set in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 becomes richer, further enhancing the player's enjoyment.

In the pachinko machine P according to this form, the number of time-saving rounds set in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 was the same whether the jackpot symbol X2 was determined during the normal game state or during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. However, this is not limited to this, and different numbers of time-saving rounds may be set.
For example, if a jackpot symbol X2 is determined during normal gameplay, the number of time-saving rounds set in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 based on that determination may be greater or less than if the jackpot symbol X2 were determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
In this configuration, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P in this form can be achieved, and it is also possible to further enhance the enjoyment of the players.

In the pachinko machine P according to this form, only the time-saving symbol J1, which triggers the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2), was provided as a time-saving symbol determined based on the first special symbol random number, but it is not limited to this, and multiple types of time-saving symbols may be provided. Furthermore, the type of time-saving game state and the number of time-saving rounds may differ depending on the type of time-saving symbol.
For example, time-saving symbols J1A, J1B, and J1C may be provided as time-saving symbols that can be determined based on the first special symbol random number, and in the low probability time-saving game state LJ1, if time-saving symbol J1A is determined, a low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) with 200 time-saving rounds may be set, if time-saving symbol J1B is determined, a low probability time-saving game state LJT2 with 50 time-saving rounds may be set, and if time-saving symbol J1C is determined, a low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) with 30 time-saving rounds may be set.
In this case, the same effects and advantages as the pachinko machine P of this form are achieved, and the variety of time-saving game states and the number of time-saving rounds set when a time-saving symbol is determined becomes richer, further enhancing the player's enjoyment.

In the pachinko machine P according to this form, if a jackpot is won by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, the game state set after the end of the special game differs depending on the type of jackpot symbol determined (if jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set, and if jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set). However, it is not limited to this, and the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 may be set after the end of the special game based on the determination of any jackpot symbol.
Furthermore, in this case, the LJT2 determination suggestion may be executed whenever a jackpot is won and either the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, so that the LJT2 determination suggestion is executed in common when a jackpot is won and when a time-saving bonus is awarded.
In this case, the same effects and advantages as the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment can be achieved, and the enjoyment of the players can be further enhanced.

In the pachinko machine P according to this form, it was possible to win a minor prize only in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, but it is not limited to this, and it may also be possible to win a minor prize in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number. Furthermore, after the special game executed through the winning of the minor prize is completed, the game state may be set according to the type of minor prize symbol determined based on the winning of the minor prize.
In this case, the same effects and advantages as the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment can be achieved, and the enjoyment of the players can be further enhanced.

In the pachinko machine P of this form, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the LJT2 determination indication is performed in common as the final result of the variation performance whether the jackpot symbol X1 is determined or the time-saving bonus is awarded (when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined), but the performances that are performed in common are not limited to these.
For example, in a pre-read animation that is performed on the first special random number from which the above-mentioned decision result is derived, and which can be started before the start of the variation animation based on the first special random number, a predetermined type of animation may be commonly performed.
Specifically, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, if the winning symbol X1 is determined by the acquired first special symbol random number, a hold image corresponding to the first special symbol random number is displayed in a specific manner that suggests the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. Furthermore, the above-mentioned hold image pre-reading effect may also be executed when the acquisition of the first special symbol random number determines whether time-saving is granted. As a result, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the above-mentioned hold image pre-reading effect is executed in common whether the winning symbol X1 is determined or whether time-saving is granted.
In this case, the same effects and advantages as the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment can be achieved, and the enjoyment of the players can be further enhanced.
Furthermore, for example, if, in the normal game state, the same time-saving game state is set when a predetermined jackpot symbol is determined and when a predetermined time-saving symbol is determined, then a predetermined animation indicating that the same time-saving game state is set may be performed in both cases.

(Fifth form)
The fifth form will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this description, components similar to those in the first, second, third, and fourth forms described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.
The pachinko machine P in this form is a pachinko machine (a so-called type 2 pachinko machine) in which the only trigger for the execution of the special game is the winning of a minor prize. Specifically, in the win/loss lottery, it is possible to win a minor prize but not a big prize, and the special game is executed when a game ball enters a special area during a minor prize game based on the winning of a minor prize.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P in this embodiment, as well as the devices and components installed on the game board 11, are the same as those in the second, third, and fourth embodiments.
Furthermore, similar to the second, third, and fourth forms, during special gameplay or during minor win gameplay based on a minor win, the large prize opening 18 opens, allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening 18. During special gameplay, the distribution member 59 is stationary in the first position, and game balls that enter the large prize opening 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. In contrast, during minor win gameplay based on the determination of a minor win symbol, the distribution member 59 is stationary in the second position, and game balls that enter the large prize opening 18 do not enter the general area 58, but all enter the special area.
In other words, game balls can only enter the special area during a minor win game based on the determination of a minor win symbol. As a result, a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this form) enter the special area during a minor win game. Then, based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special area during a minor win game, the special game is executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, similar to the second, third, and fourth forms, the game state after the special game, which is executed based on the determination of the minor win symbol, is set according to the minor win symbol determined when a minor win is achieved.
Furthermore, similar to the second, third, and fourth forms, the following game states can be set: a normal game state which combines a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state; a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 which combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state JT1; and a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 which combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2. The game proceeds with one of these game states set.
Furthermore, as with the second, third, and fourth forms, a low-probability game state is always set in all game states. Therefore, regardless of the game state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the draw remains constant and is always the same (1/300) (see Figure 106(a)).

Furthermore, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting prize entry point 16 in the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1, and time-saving game state JT2 is the same as in the second, third, and fourth forms. That is, in the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1, and time-saving game state JT2, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol variation time, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b are all set in the same way as in the second, third, and fourth forms (see Figures 14-16, 87(c), 94(c), and 106(c)).

Furthermore, in the initial state immediately after factory shipment or after a RAM reset (initialization process in case of abnormality, initialization process in normal operation), the normal gameplay state is set.

During normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT1, players are instructed to shoot (left-handed) the game balls towards the first game area 12a so that they enter the first starting prize entry point 15. During low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT2, special gameplay, and minor win gameplay, players are instructed to shoot (right-handed) the game balls towards the second game area 12b so that they enter the large prize entry point 18, or pass through the gate 20 and enter the second starting prize entry point 16.
In other words, during normal gameplay and low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, players are primarily instructed to play in the first game area 12a, and as long as gameplay is taking place in the first game area 12a, game balls can enter the first starting prize entry point 15. Furthermore, during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2, players are primarily instructed to play in the second game area 12b, and as long as gameplay is taking place in the second game area 12b, game balls can pass through gate 20 and enter the second starting prize entry point 16.
Then, a draw is performed to determine whether a player wins or loses based on the number of game balls that enter the first starting prize slot 15 and the number of game balls that enter the second starting prize slot 16.

In this embodiment, the reserved memory area of the main RAM 103 is composed of a first reserved memory area for storing the first special symbol random number and a second reserved memory area for storing the second special symbol random number, similar to the first and third embodiments. These reserved memory areas are each composed of a total of four memory units, from the first to the fourth memory unit, and are capable of storing a total of four sets of the first special symbol random number and a total of four sets of the second special symbol random number. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, the first special symbol random number is stored sequentially from the first memory unit of the first reserved memory area, and when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, the second special symbol random number is stored sequentially from the first memory unit of the second reserved memory area.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, similar to the first, second, and third forms, if both the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are stored, the second special symbol random number is processed in priority over the first special symbol random number. For example, when both the first and second special symbol random numbers are stored when the display of the special symbols starts, the win/loss lottery and the display of the special symbols are performed first based on the second special symbol random number, and once that display is finished, the win/loss lottery and the display of the special symbols are then performed based on the first special symbol random number.
In this embodiment as well, the configuration of the reserved memory area may be the same as in the second embodiment, and if both the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are stored, they may be processed in the order in which they were stored in the reserved memory area.

As shown in Figure 106(a), in the draw for winning or losing when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15 during a non-time-saving game state, one of the following results is derived: winning a minor prize or winning a time-saving bonus. That is, in the draw for winning or losing based on the first special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state, if a minor prize is not won, a time-saving bonus is always won, and it is not a loss. When a minor prize is won, the minor prize symbol Y1, Y2, or Y3 is determined, and when a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined.
Furthermore, the probability of winning a minor prize is set to 1/300, and when a minor prize is won, the probability of determining minor prize symbol Y1 is set to 40/100 (40%), the probability of determining minor prize symbol Y2 is set to 40/100 (40%), and the probability of determining minor prize symbol Y3 is set to 20/100 (20%). The probability of winning a time-saving bonus is set to 299/300, and when a time-saving bonus is won, the probability of determining time-saving bonus symbol J1 is set to 15/100 (15%), and the probability of determining time-saving bonus symbol J2 is set to 85/100 (85%).

As shown in Figure 106(a), in the draw for winning or losing when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15 during the time-saving game state, one of two results is obtained: a win for a minor prize or a loss. That is, in the win/loss draw based on the first special symbol random number during the time-saving game state, if a minor prize is not won, it is always a loss, and the time-saving bonus is not awarded. If a minor prize is won, the minor prize symbol Y1, Y2, or Y3 is determined, and if it is a loss, the losing symbol Z1 is determined.
Furthermore, the probability of winning a minor prize is set to 1/300, and when a minor prize is won, the probability of determining minor prize symbol Y1 is set to 40/100 (40%), the probability of determining minor prize symbol Y2 is set to 40/100 (40%), and the probability of determining minor prize symbol Y3 is set to 20/100 (20%).

As shown in Figure 106(a), in the draw for winning or losing when a game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16 during a non-time-saving game state, and in the draw for winning or losing when a game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16 during a time-saving game state, either a minor win or a loss is derived. That is, in the draw for winning or losing based on the second special symbol random number, regardless of the set game state, if a minor win is not won, it is always a loss, and time-saving is not granted. If a minor win is won, the minor win symbol Y4 or Y5 is determined, and if it is a loss, the losing symbol Z2 is determined.
Furthermore, the probability of winning a minor prize is set at 7/300, and the probability of determining minor prize symbols Y4 and Y5 when a minor prize is won is set at 50/100 (50%).

Furthermore, in the lottery for winning or losing in this form, first, a determination is made as to whether or not a minor win is achieved. If the result is that a minor win is not achieved, then a determination is made as to whether or not a time-saving bonus is granted. If the result is that a time-saving bonus is not granted, then it is a loss.
Furthermore, once a special symbol is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern is determined based on the result of that determination, which includes the variation time and variation performance of the special symbol.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, as with the third and fourth forms, the stop display time (symbol confirmation time), which is the time it takes for the special symbol to stop displaying after the variable display of the special symbol has finished, is the same (0.5 seconds) regardless of the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery or the type of special symbol determined. The stop display time may also be determined based on the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery or the type of special symbol determined, as with the first and second forms.

Furthermore, similar to the third and fourth forms, the mini-win game, which is executed when a mini-win is won and the mini-win symbols Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, or Y5 are determined, is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: the large prize opening 18 is opened for 0.45 seconds four times, or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open (see Figure 106(b)). In addition, the closing time (interval time) of the large prize opening 18 between the end of one opening and the start of the next is set to 0.6 seconds (see Figure 106(b)). Moreover, while the large prize opening 18 is open, the distribution member 59 remains in the second position (see Figure 106(b)).
In other words, if a minor win is achieved, regardless of which minor win symbol is determined, the large prize opening 18 is open for a total of 1.8 seconds during the minor win game. Therefore, if the player is shooting to the right during this minor win game, the game ball can be sent into the large prize opening 18. Also, since the distribution member 59 remains in the second position during this minor win game, any game ball that enters the large prize opening 18 will always enter the special area.
Therefore, if a minor win is achieved, and the player is shooting to the right, a predetermined number of game balls (1 ball) will enter the special area during the minor win game based on that win, and a special game will be executed based on that entry.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, when a minor winning symbol Y1, Y2, or Y3 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this embodiment) enter the special area during the minor winning game based on that determination, a round game is set to be executed a total of three times, ending when either the large prize opening 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18. In addition, the large prize opening 18 is opened only once in each round game (opening for 29.0 seconds is performed once), and the interval time between each round game is set to 2.0 seconds. Moreover, the distribution member 59 remains stationary in the first position during each round game.
Furthermore, if a minor win symbol Y4 or Y5 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, a special game is executed in which a round game in the same manner as described above is played a total of 10 times. The opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door 18b, the operating mode of the distribution member 59, and the interval time during the round game are also set to be the same as those of the special game described above.

(Summary of the game state to be set)
In the pachinko machine P according to this form, a minor win game is executed based on the determination of a minor win symbol (winning a minor win), and if a predetermined number (1 ball) of game balls enter a special area during the minor win game and a special game is executed, the game state after the special game ends is set according to the type of minor win symbol determined and the game state at a predetermined reference point (hereinafter also referred to as the game state at the reference point).
Furthermore, if, for reasons such as not performing a right-handed shot, the predetermined number of game balls do not enter the special area during a minor win game, the special game will not be executed and the game state described above will not be set. For example, if a minor win is achieved during a non-time-saving game state and the minor win game is executed, the game will return to the non-time-saving game state it was in before the minor win game after the minor win game ends.

In this form of pachinko machine P, the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2) ends when either of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (1) the number of special symbol variations (number of win/loss draws) reaches a predetermined number of time-saving rounds, or (2) the number of minor wins reaches a predetermined number of rounds to determine termination, and the non-time-saving game state is set.
Furthermore, during the time-saving game state, the special symbol variation stop process, which is executed when the special symbol variation display ends, updates the remaining number of special symbol variations until the time-saving round is reached. If a minor win is achieved, the special symbol variation stop process described above updates the remaining number of minor wins until the round of termination is reached.
Then, if the main CPU 101 determines that the number of special symbol variations has reached the time-saving limit based on the update of the remaining number of special symbol variations, or if it determines that the number of minor wins has reached the time-ending limit based on the update of the remaining number of minor wins, it terminates the time-saving game state and sets a non-time-saving game state. If it determines that neither of these conditions has been reached, it maintains the time-saving game state (i.e., does nothing with respect to the time-saving game state).
In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, the point in time when the process is completed is defined as the reference point mentioned above. When a minor win is achieved, the game state at that point in time (game state at the time of reference) is referenced to set the game state after the special game ends.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this configuration, if the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery is a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), and a time-saving bonus is awarded and a time-saving symbol is determined, the game state after the time-saving symbol stops (after the display of the time-saving symbol's variation ends) is set according to the type of time-saving symbol.

The following provides a more detailed explanation of how to set the game state.
(A) When the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, as shown in Figure 107(a), regardless of whether the reference game state is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 (time-saving game state), if a minor win is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on said determination, the game state after the end of the special game based on said entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2).

Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 set in the above cases, the number of time-saving rounds (the number of special symbol variations that will end the time-saving game state) is set to 10,000, and the number of times the end is determined (the number of times a minor win will end the time-saving game state) is set to 2.
In the following, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, in which the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000 and the number of times the game ends is determined to 2, will also be referred to as the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A.

The low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A ends when either of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (1) the number of special symbol variations reaches 10,000 without any special game being performed (i.e., the win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number and the win/loss lottery using the second special symbol random number are performed a total of 10,000 times), or (2) the number of minor wins reaches the termination determination number of 2.

In this configuration of the pachinko machine P, the main RAM 103 is equipped with a time-saving count memory area, which stores the remaining number of spins (the remaining number of special symbol spins until the time-saving count is reached). Furthermore, the main RAM 103 is equipped with an termination decision count memory area, which stores the remaining number of minor wins (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining minor win count) until the termination decision count reaches zero.

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, when a special symbol variation is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15 or the second starting prize slot 16, the remaining number of variations stored in the time-saving count memory area is decremented by 1 during the special symbol variation stop process executed when the special symbol variation display ends. Also, when a minor win is achieved, the remaining number of minor wins stored in the termination determination count memory area is decremented by 1 during the special symbol variation stop process described above.
Then, as a result of updating the remaining number of spins and remaining number of small wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, if any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (1) to (2) are met, the time-saving game state JT2 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (2) are met, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A.

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. Since the number of time-saving rounds is 10,000 and the probability of winning a minor prize is 7/300 (see Figure 106(a)), the time-saving termination condition in (1) is not actually met, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A continues until a minor prize is won.
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, the number of times the termination is determined is set to 2. Therefore, if a minor win is achieved in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, depending on the result of updating the remaining number of minor wins performed in the special symbol variation stop processing, the time-saving termination condition in (2) will not be met, and the game state will remain in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A at the time the remaining number of minor wins is updated. In other words, the reference time game state (the game state at the time the special symbol variation stop processing is completed) will be the time-saving game state.
Therefore, if a minor win occurs in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, the game state at the time of reference is assumed to be the time-saving game state, and the game state after the end of the special game based on the minor win is set.

(B) When the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, as shown in Figure 107(a), regardless of whether the reference game state is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 (time-saving game state), if a minor win is achieved by the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on said determination, the game state after the end of the special game based on said entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2).

Furthermore, when the reference game state is the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 (time-saving game state), and the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set to 30 rounds and the number of rounds to determine the end is set to 1.
In the following, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, in which the number of time-saving rounds is set to 30 and the number of times the game ends is determined to 1, will also be referred to as the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C.
In contrast, when the reference game state is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) and the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set to have 10,000 time-saving rounds and 2 termination rounds. In other words, this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is the same as the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A described above.

The details regarding the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A are the same as those in (A) above, so the explanation will be omitted.
The low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C ends when either of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (1) the number of special symbol variations reaches 30 time-saving rounds without any special game being performed (a total of 30 win/loss draws are performed using the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number); or (2) the number of minor wins reaches 1, which is the number of times the game ends.

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, when a special symbol variation is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15 or the second starting prize slot 16, the remaining number of variations stored in the time-saving count memory area is decremented by 1 during the special symbol variation stop process executed when the special symbol variation display ends. Also, when a minor win is achieved, the remaining number of minor wins stored in the termination determination count memory area is decremented by 1 during the special symbol variation stop process described above.
Then, as a result of updating the remaining number of spins and remaining number of small wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, if any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (1) to (2) are met, the time-saving game state JT2 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state. On the other hand, if neither of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (2) are met, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C.

Furthermore, even during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, the win/loss lottery is performed in principle based on the second special symbol random number, and the number of time-saving rounds is 30, and the probability of winning a minor win is 7/300 (see Figure 106(a)), so a minor win is not guaranteed before the number of special symbol variations reaches 30. Therefore, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C continues until the time-saving termination conditions of (1) or (2) are met.
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, the number of times the termination is determined is set to 1. Therefore, if a minor win is achieved in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, the time-saving termination condition (2) is met as a result of updating the remaining number of minor wins performed in the special symbol variation stop processing, and the game state returns to the normal game state at the time this remaining number of minor wins is updated. In other words, the game state at the time of reference (the game state at the time the special symbol variation stop processing is completed) is the non-time-saving game state.
Therefore, if a minor win occurs in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, the game state at the time of reference is assumed to be a non-time-saving game state, and the game state after the end of the special game based on the minor win is set accordingly.

(C) When the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, as shown in Figure 107(a), regardless of whether the reference game state is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 (time-saving game state), if a minor win is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on said determination, the game state after the end of the special game based on said entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1).

Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, which is set when the reference game state is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) and the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000 and the number of times the game ends is determined to 1.
In contrast, when the reference game state is the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 (time-saving game state), and the small win symbol Y3 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set to have 10,000 time-saving rounds and 2 rounds to determine the end of the game.
In the following, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 in which the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000 and the number of times the game ends is determined to 2 will also be referred to as low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A, and a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 in which the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000 and the number of times the game ends to 1 will also be referred to as low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B.

The low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A ends when either of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (1) the number of special symbol variations reaches 10,000 time-saving rounds without any special game being performed (i.e., the win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number and the win/loss lottery using the second special symbol random number are performed a total of 10,000 times); or (2) the number of minor wins reaches 2, the number of times the termination is determined.
On the other hand, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B ends when either of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (1) the number of special symbol variations reaches 10,000 time-saving rounds without any special game being played (i.e., the win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number and the win/loss lottery using the second special symbol random number are performed a total of 10,000 times), or (2) the number of minor wins reaches the termination determination number of 1.

Furthermore, during both the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, when a special symbol variation is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15 or the second starting prize slot 16, the remaining number of variations stored in the time-saving count memory area is decremented by 1 during the special symbol variation stop process, which is executed when the special symbol variation display ends. Also, when a minor win is achieved, the remaining number of minor wins stored in the termination determination count memory area is decremented by 1 during the special symbol variation stop process described above.
Then, as a result of updating the remaining number of spins and remaining number of small wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, if any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (1) to (2) are met, the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (2) are met, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B.

Furthermore, during both the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, game balls are launched toward the first game area 12a, and a win/loss lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number. Since the number of time-saving rounds is 10,000 and the probability of winning a minor prize is 1/300 (see Figure 106(a)), the time-saving termination condition in (1) is practically never met, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A or LJT1-B continues until a minor prize is won.

In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A, the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 2. Therefore, if a minor win occurs in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A, depending on the result of updating the remaining number of minor wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process, the time-saving termination condition in (2) will not be met, and the game state will remain in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A at the time the remaining number of minor wins is updated. In other words, the game state at the time of reference (the game state at the time the special symbol variation stop process is completed) will be the time-saving game state.
Therefore, if a minor win occurs in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A, the game state at the time of reference is assumed to be the time-saving game state, and the game state after the end of the special game based on the minor win is set.

In contrast, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, the number of times the termination is determined is set to 1. Therefore, if a minor win is achieved in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, the time-saving termination condition (2) is met as a result of updating the remaining number of minor wins performed in the special symbol variation stop processing, and the game state returns to the normal game state at the time this remaining number of minor wins is updated. In other words, the game state at the time of reference (the game state at the time the special symbol variation stop processing is completed) is the non-time-saving game state.
Therefore, if a minor win occurs in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, the game state at the time of reference is assumed to be a non-time-saving game state, and the game state after the end of the special game based on the minor win is set accordingly.

(D) When the minor win symbol Y4 is determined, as shown in Figure 107(a), regardless of whether the reference game state is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 (time-saving game state), if a minor win is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the minor win symbol Y4 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on said determination, the game state after the end of the special game based on said entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2).

Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which is set when the reference game state is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) and the minor win symbol Y4 is determined, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 30 and the number of times the game ends is determined to 1. In other words, this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 becomes the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C described above.
In contrast, when the reference game state is the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 (time-saving game state), and the small win symbol Y4 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set to have 70 time-saving rounds and 2 rounds to determine the end of the game.
In the following, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, in which the number of time-saving rounds is set to 70 and the number of times the game ends is determined to 2, will also be referred to as the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B.

The details regarding the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C are the same as those in (2) above, so the explanation will be omitted.
The low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B ends when either of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (1) the number of special symbol variations reaches 70 time-saving rounds without any special game being performed (i.e., a total of 70 win/loss draws are performed using the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number); or (2) the number of minor wins reaches 2, the number of times the termination is determined.

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, when a special symbol variation is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15 or the second starting prize slot 16, the remaining number of variations stored in the time-saving count memory area is decremented by 1 during the special symbol variation stop process executed when the special symbol variation display ends. Also, when a minor win is achieved, the remaining number of minor wins stored in the termination determination count memory area is decremented by 1 during the special symbol variation stop process described above.
Then, as a result of updating the remaining number of spins and remaining number of small wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, if any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (1) to (2) are met, the time-saving game state JT2 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (2) are met, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B.

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. However, since the probability of winning a minor win is 7/300 (see Figure 106(a)), a minor win is not guaranteed before the number of special symbol variations reaches 70. Therefore, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B continues until the time-saving termination conditions of (1) or (2) are met.
Furthermore, if a minor win occurs in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, depending on the result of updating the remaining number of minor wins performed in the special symbol variation stop processing, the time-saving termination condition in (2) will not be met, and the game state will remain in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B at the time the remaining number of minor wins is updated. In other words, the reference time game state (the game state at the time the special symbol variation stop processing is completed) will be the time-saving game state.
Therefore, if a minor win occurs in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, the game state at the time of reference is assumed to be the time-saving game state, and the game state after the end of the special game based on the minor win is set.

(E) When the minor win symbol Y5 is determined, as shown in Figure 107(a), regardless of whether the reference game state is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 (time-saving game state), if a minor win is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the minor win symbol Y5 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on said determination, the game state after the end of the special game based on said entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2).

Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 set in the above cases, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 30 and the number of rounds to determine the end is set to 1. In other words, this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 becomes the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C described above.
The details regarding the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C are the same as those in (2) above, so the explanation will be omitted.

(F) When the time-saving symbol J1 is determined As shown in Figure 107(b), if the game state at the time of the win/fail lottery is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), and the time-saving bonus is awarded by the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined and the time-saving symbol J1 is displayed, then at the time of the display, the non-time-saving game state is changed to the time-saving game state JT2, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set.
In this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000, and the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 2. In other words, this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is equivalent to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A described above.
The details regarding the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A are the same as those in (A) above, so the explanation will be omitted.

(G) When the time-saving symbol J2 is determined As shown in Figure 107(b), if the game state at the time of the win/fail lottery is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), and the time-saving bonus is awarded by the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined and the time-saving symbol J2 is displayed, then at the time of the display, the non-time-saving game state is changed to the time-saving game state JT1, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set.
In this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000, and the number of rounds to determine the end is set to 1. In other words, this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 becomes the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B described above.
The details regarding the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B are the same as those in (C) above, so the explanation will be omitted.

(Summary of variation pattern table 114)
The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment also has multiple types of variation pattern tables 114. Here, as shown in Figures 108(a) to (c), we will explain table MP61 which is referenced when a win/loss lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay, table MP62 which is referenced when a win/loss lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, and table MP63 which is referenced when a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number during low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2. We will omit the explanation of the other variation pattern tables 114.

As shown in Figure 108(a), according to table MP61, when a minor win symbol Y1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "04H" (selection rate 100%) associated with the "45-second variation" variation pattern is determined. When a minor win symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "05H" (selection rate 100%) associated with the "45-second variation" variation pattern is determined. When a minor win symbol Y3 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "06H" (selection rate 100%) associated with the "45-second variation" variation pattern is determined.
If the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "07H" (selection rate 100%), which is associated with the variation pattern "45-second variation" (variation time 45 seconds), will be determined. If the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "08H" (selection rate 100%), which is associated with the variation pattern "45-second variation", will be determined.

As shown in Figure 108(b), according to table MP62, if a losing symbol Z1 is determined, and the current number of reserved symbols (first reserved symbol) is less than 2, one of the following will be determined: variation pattern command "10H" (selection rate 85%), which is associated with a variation pattern of "13-second variation" (variation time 13 seconds); variation pattern command "12H" (selection rate 10%), which is associated with a variation pattern of "20-second variation" (variation time 20 seconds); or variation pattern command "13H" (selection rate 5%), which is associated with a variation pattern of "60-second variation" (variation time 60 seconds). Furthermore, when the current number of pending items (first pending item) is 2 or more, one of the following fluctuation pattern commands will be selected: "11H" (85% selection rate) which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "5 seconds fluctuation" (fluctuation time is 5 seconds), "12H" (10% selection rate) which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds fluctuation", or "13H" (5% selection rate) which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation".
If the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "14H" (selection rate 100%) associated with the "60-second variation" variation pattern will be determined. If the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "15H" (selection rate 100%) associated with the "60-second variation" variation pattern will be determined. If the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "16H" (selection rate 100%) associated with the "60-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.

As shown in Figure 108(c), according to table MP63, if a losing symbol Z2 is determined, and the current number of reserved symbols (second reserved symbol) is less than 2, then either the variation pattern command "20H" (selection rate 85%), which is associated with a variation pattern of "10 seconds variation" (variation time 10 seconds), or the variation pattern command "23H" (selection rate 15%), which is associated with a variation pattern of "30 seconds variation" (variation time 30 seconds), will be determined. Also, if the current number of reserved symbols (second reserved symbol) is 2 or more, then either the variation pattern command "21H" (selection rate 85%), which is associated with a variation pattern of "3 seconds variation" (variation time 3 seconds), or the variation pattern command "23H" (selection rate 15%), which is associated with a variation pattern of "30 seconds variation," will be determined.
If the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "24H" (selection rate 100%) associated with the "30-second variation" variation pattern will be determined. If the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "25H" (selection rate 100%) associated with the "30-second variation" variation pattern will be determined. If the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved balls, the variation pattern command "26H" (selection rate 100%) associated with the "30-second variation" variation pattern will be determined.

(Gameplay of the pachinko machine P in this form)
In the pachinko machine P according to this form, as described above, the game proceeds with one of the following game states set: normal game state (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state), low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT1), or low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2).
Furthermore, as mentioned above, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set to either LJT1-A, where the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000 and the number of times the game ends is determined to 2, or LJT1-B, where the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000 and the number of times the game ends to 1.
The low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 can be set to one of the following: LJT2-A, where the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000 and the number of times the game ends is decided to 2; LJT2-B, where the number of time-saving rounds is set to 70 and the number of times the game ends is decided to 2; or LJT2-C, where the number of time-saving rounds is set to 30 and the number of times the game ends is decided to 1.

After a RAM clear (initialization process in case of abnormality, initialization process in normal mode), or after the number of special symbol variations reaches the number of time-saving spins during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B or LJT2-C, the normal game state is set.
In this normal game state, the player is instructed to launch the game ball towards the first game area 12a, and even if the game ball is launched towards the second game area 12b, the game ball will not enter the second starting prize entry point 16. Therefore, during normal game state, when the game ball is launched towards the first game area 12a, the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15, and a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is performed.
As described above, in the normal game state, the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number always results in either a minor win or a time-saving bonus, and it never results in a loss (see Figure 106(a)). If a minor win is won, the minor win symbol Y1, Y2, or Y3 is determined, and if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined (see Figure 106(a)).
If a minor win symbol Y1, Y2, or Y3 is determined, a special game consisting of three rounds is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination. Since the win/loss lottery was performed during a non-time-saving game state, the reference game state is a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, if minor win symbol Y1 is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A is set after the special game ends; if minor win symbol Y2 is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C is set after the special game ends; and if minor win symbol Y3 is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B is set after the special game ends (see Figures 107(a) and 109).
Furthermore, if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A is set after the special symbol stops and is displayed, and if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B is set after the special symbol stops and is displayed (see Figures 107(b) and 109).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, when a win/loss lottery is held based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay, if a minor win is achieved, the player will proceed through the execution of a special game that is performed as a result of the win and transition to one of the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-A, LJT2-C, or LJT1-B. If a time-saving bonus is awarded, the player will proceed through that win and transition to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B (see Figure 109).
Here, in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay, the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is set to be extremely high compared to a minor win, and the probability of determining the time-saving symbol J2 is set to be extremely high compared to the time-saving symbol J1 (see Figure 106(a)). Therefore, when this win/loss lottery is performed, there is a very high possibility that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B will be set. Furthermore, as mentioned above, this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B will continue until a minor win is effectively achieved. Consequently, during gameplay of the pachinko machine P according to this form, the player will generally remain in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B.

In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1), players are instructed to shoot game balls toward the first game area 12a, just as in the normal game state. Even if a game ball is shot toward the second game area 12b, that game ball will not enter the second starting prize entry point 16. Therefore, even in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, shooting game balls toward the first game area 12a causes the game ball to enter the first starting prize entry point 15, which in turn triggers a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number.
As described above, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number does not result in winning the time-saving bonus, but there is a possibility of winning a minor win, and the probability of winning such a minor win is the same as in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) (see Figure 106(a)). If a minor win is won, the minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined (see Figure 106(a)).
As in normal gameplay, if a minor win symbol Y1, Y2, or Y3 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, a special game consisting of three rounds will be executed.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 1. When a minor win occurs (when minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined), the remaining number of minor wins is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, and the remaining number of minor wins becomes 0 (reaching the number of times the game ends). As a result, the time-saving end condition in (2) above is met, and the game state returns to the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) when this remaining number of minor wins is updated. Therefore, since the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state, if the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A is set after the special game ends, just as in the normal game state, if the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C is set after the special game ends, and if the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B is set after the special game ends (see Figures 107(a) and 109).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the player follows the instructions and shoots to the left during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, a minor win will occur in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number. Through the execution of a special game conducted via that win, the player will transition to either the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, or the low probability time-saving game state LJT1-B (see Figure 109).

In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2), the player is instructed to shoot game balls toward the second game area 12b. When game balls are shot toward the second game area 12b, there is a high frequency at which the game balls can enter the second starting prize entry point 16. During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, when game balls are shot toward the second game area 12b and enter the second starting prize entry point 16, a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is performed.
As mentioned above, in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, it is not possible to win a time-saving bonus, but there is a possibility of winning a minor win, and the probability of winning a minor win in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is set higher than the probability of winning a minor win in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number (see Figure 106(a)). If a minor win is won, the minor win symbol Y4 or Y5 is determined (see Figure 106(a)).
If either the minor win symbol Y4 or Y5 is determined, a special game will be played in which 10 rounds of gameplay will be performed if a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination.
In this case, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 2. In that case, when the above-mentioned minor win is achieved (when the minor win symbol Y4 or Y5 is determined), the remaining number of minor wins is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, but the remaining number of minor wins becomes 1 (the number of times the game ends is not reached), so the time-saving termination condition in (2) above is not met, and the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A (time-saving game state) when this remaining number of minor wins is updated. Therefore, the reference game state is the time-saving game state, so if the minor win symbol Y4 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B is set after the special game ends, and if the minor win symbol Y5 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C is set after the special game ends (see Figures 107(a) and 109).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the player follows the instructions and shoots to the right during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, a minor win will occur in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and after executing a special game that is performed as a result of that win, the player will transition to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C (see Figure 109).
As mentioned above, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000. Therefore, in practice, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A continues until a minor win is achieved, and after achieving that minor win, the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B or LJT2-C. In other words, once the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, after achieving a minor win, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set again.

In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2), similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, when a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16, and a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is performed, making it possible to win a minor prize. If a minor prize is won, the minor prize symbol Y4 or Y5 is determined, and if a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor prize game based on that determination, a special game consisting of 10 rounds of gameplay is performed.
Here, just like with the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 2 in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B. In that case, when the above-mentioned minor win is achieved (when the minor win symbol Y4 or Y5 is determined), the remaining number of minor wins is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, but the remaining number of minor wins becomes 1 (the number of times the game ends is not reached), so the time-saving termination condition in (2) above is not met, and the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B (time-saving game state) when this remaining number of minor wins is updated. Therefore, the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state. If the minor win symbol Y4 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B is set after the special game ends. If the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B is set after the special game ends. If the minor win symbol Y5 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C is set after the special game ends (see Figures 107(a) and 109).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the player is shooting to the right in accordance with the instructions during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, a minor win will occur in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and after the execution of a special game that is performed through that win, the player will transition to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C (see Figure 109).
As mentioned above, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 70, so it is not guaranteed that a minor win will occur during this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B. In other words, when transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, if a minor win occurs before the number of special symbol spins reaches 70, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set again after the minor win.

In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2), similar to the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-A and LJT2-B, when a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16, and a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is performed, making it possible to win a minor prize. If a minor prize is won, the minor prize symbol Y4 or Y5 is determined, and if a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor prize game based on that determination, a special game consisting of 10 rounds of gameplay is performed.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, the number of times the game ends is determined is set to 1. When a minor win occurs (when the minor win symbol Y4 or Y5 is determined), the remaining number of minor wins is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, and the remaining number of minor wins becomes 0 (reaching the number of times the game ends). As a result, the time-saving termination condition in (2) above is met, and the game state returns to the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) when this remaining number of minor wins is updated. Therefore, the game state at the time of reference is the non-time-saving game state, and in either case, when the minor win symbol Y4 or Y5 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C is set after the special game ends (see Figures 107(a) and 109).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the player follows the instructions and shoots to the right during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, a minor win will occur in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and after the execution of the special game that is performed through that win, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-C will be set again (see Figure 109).
As mentioned above, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 30, so it is not guaranteed that a minor win will occur during this low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C. In other words, when transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, if a minor win occurs before the number of special symbol spins reaches 30, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set again after the minor win.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (LJT2-A, LJT2-B, LJT2-C), the decrease in game balls as the game progresses can be suppressed compared to the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, due to the prize balls awarded based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize entry point 16. Furthermore, in the special game that can be executed when a minor win is achieved in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, it is possible to execute a greater number of rounds of gameplay than in the special game that can be executed when a minor win is achieved in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number. In other words, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, it is possible to transition to any of the following states: LJT2-A, LJT2-B, or LJT2-C. In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000, so a small win is almost guaranteed. In contrast, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 70, and in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 30. Therefore, although a small win is not guaranteed, the number of time-saving rounds set is higher in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B than in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, so there is a higher possibility of winning a small win in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B before the number of special symbol changes reaches the number of time-saving rounds than in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C.
Furthermore, if the minor win symbol Y4 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B will be set after the special game based on that determination ends. However, if the minor win symbol Y4 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C will be set after the special game based on that determination ends. In other words, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B is more likely to set than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, as it offers a higher chance of winning a minor win before the number of special symbol variations reaches the time-saving limit when a minor win is achieved.
Based on the above, among the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2, LJT2-A is the most advantageous game state, followed by LJT2-B and then LJT2-C, in decreasing order of advantage.

In the pachinko machine P of this form, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, which is generally the state the player stays in during gameplay, if a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, the player can transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B. If the player transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, they can almost certainly win a minor win based on the second special symbol random number, and can also expect to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, which is more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C. In contrast, when transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, it is not guaranteed that a minor win based on the second special symbol random number will be obtained. Even if a minor win is obtained, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, which is less advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B, will be set again.
Thus, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, which can be transitioned from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, where the player is generally in a state during gameplay, have significantly different levels of advantage. Therefore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, the game is designed to progress while making the player anticipate transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A.

Furthermore, in the normal game state, which is set after a RAM clear or after the number of special symbol variations reaches the time-saving count during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-B or LJT2-C, it is possible to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-C, or low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B based on the winning of a minor prize. In addition, it is possible to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B based on the winning of a time-saving bonus. In other words, during the normal game state, the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A is higher than that of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B. This allows for a novel gameplay experience where the normal game state becomes a chance zone with a high probability of transitioning to the advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A, thereby enhancing player interest.

(Regarding the processing when the minor win symbol Y3 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, or during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B)
As described above, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, the number of times the game ends is determined is set to one, and in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B, the number of times the game ends is determined is set to two. If a minor win is achieved during these game states, the remaining number of minor wins is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, and then the game state is processed based on the result of this update. The game state at the time the process is completed is then referenced to set the game state after the special game, which was executed via the minor win, has ended.
Then, if a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B and the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, the remaining number of minor wins is updated to 0, thus fulfilling the time-saving termination condition in (2). At the moment this remaining number of minor wins is updated, the game state returns to the normal game state. In other words, since the reference game state becomes a non-time-saving game state, the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y3 becomes the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B (see Figure 107(a)).
In contrast, if a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B, and the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, the remaining number of minor wins is updated to 1, so the time-saving termination condition in (2) is not met, and the game state remains unchanged, remaining in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B. That is, the game state at the time of reference becomes the time-saving game state, so the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y3 becomes the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A (time-saving count 10,000 times, termination count 2 times) (see Figure 107(a)).

Thus, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the time-saving game state can be terminated based on the number of minor wins, and the number of minor wins required to terminate the time-saving game state differs for each of the multiple types of time-saving game states. This controls the game state at the aforementioned reference point to be either a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state. As a result, the game state after the termination of the special game based on the minor win symbol Y3 can be different depending on whether the minor win symbol Y3 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B, or during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B.

For example, when a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B is set, before a game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16 and the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is started, a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, which was acquired and stored before the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B, is executed. In such cases, although the probability is low, a minor win may be achieved through this win/loss lottery, and the minor win symbol Y3 may be determined.
In pachinko machines, when setting a time-saving game state after the special game ends based on the determination of a special symbol, the content must be in accordance with the type of special symbol determined, and the same time-saving game state must be set when the same special symbol is determined. However, if the game state at the reference point is different (either a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state), it is possible to set the number of time-saving rounds and the number of times the game ends will be determined to differ depending on the game state at the reference point, even when the same special symbol is determined.
Here, for example, suppose it is stipulated that when a minor win symbol Y3 is determined, a time-saving game state JT1 will be set after the special game based on that determination ends. In this case, if a minor win symbol Y3 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, or if a minor win symbol Y3 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B, in either case, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) will be set after the special game based on that determination ends. In the above case, even though the advantageous low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-A or LJT2-B have been set, the less advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be set after the special game ends, which may cause the player to feel a great sense of loss.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, if the small win symbol Y3 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, the reference game state becomes a non-time-saving game state. After the special game based on that determination ends, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B is set again. However, as in the case described above, if the small win symbol Y3 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B, the reference game state becomes a time-saving game state, and after the special game based on that determination ends, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A is set.

In this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000, so in effect, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A continues until a minor win is achieved. Also, since the number of times the termination is determined is set to 2, if a minor win is achieved through the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, the remaining number of minor wins is updated to 1, so the time-saving termination condition in (2) is not met, and the game state remains unchanged, remaining in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A. In other words, since the game state at the time of reference is a time-saving game state, if a minor win symbol Y1 is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A is set after the special game based on that determination ends. Similarly, if a minor win symbol Y2 is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A is set after the special game based on that determination ends. If a minor win symbol Y3 is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A is set again after the special game based on that determination ends (see Figure 107(a)).
In other words, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A, if a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game based on that win is completed (i.e., if the minor win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined), the most advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A is always set. In contrast, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, if a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game based on that win is completed, either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A or LJT2-B is set.
Thus, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A has a higher probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-A than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, making it a more advantageous game state than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B.

Therefore, even if the above-mentioned scenario unfortunately occurs, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A, which is more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B, will be set, thus reducing the sense of loss experienced by the player.

(Regarding processing in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the processing performed by the main control board 100 in accordance with the progress of the special symbol game, regular symbol game, minor win game, and special game described above is almost identical to that of the third embodiment, except for the processing related to winning a jackpot. A person skilled in the art will be able to understand the implementation method (how to apply to this embodiment) in this embodiment based on the processing in the third embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, the so-called left-handed shooting is performed in a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. This state is set to either LJT1-A or LJT1-B, which are different game states referenced when a minor win occurs (referenced game state). The game state set based on the minor win symbol Y3 differs depending on whether it is determined during low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-A or low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-B. Therefore, a wide variety of game state settings are possible, enhancing the player's enjoyment.

(Modified version of the pachinko machine P according to this form)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment (fifth embodiment) will be described.
(Variation 1)
In the pachinko machine P according to this form, in a predetermined game state where so-called right-hand play is performed (low probability time-saving game state LJT2-B or LJT2-C), it is not necessarily the case that a small win will be achieved before the number of special symbol spins reaches the time-saving count. If the number of special symbol spins reaches the time-saving count without a small win, the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) is set. However, it is not limited to this, and the above game state may be set to continue until a small win is achieved, and the above game state may be set to end when a predetermined small win symbol is determined.
The following will explain Modification 1 with specific examples. Note that the same content as in the fifth form described above will be omitted, and only the differences will be detailed.

(Specific example of variation 1)
(a) Overview of the Win/Loss Draw As shown in Figure 110, in the modified example 1, when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry 15 during a non-time-saving game state, the draw for win or loss is determined to result in either a minor win or a time-saving bonus. If a minor win is won, minor win symbol Y1 (probability of determination is 25/100), minor win symbol Y2 (probability of determination is 50/100), or minor win symbol Y3 (probability of determination is 25/100) is determined. If a time-saving bonus is won, time-saving symbol J1 (probability of determination is 20/100) or time-saving symbol J2 (probability of determination is 80/100) is determined.
In the lottery for winning or losing when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15 during the shortened play state, one of the following results is determined: a win in the minor prize category or a loss. If a minor prize is won, the minor prize symbol Y1 (probability of determination is 25/100), minor prize symbol Y2 (probability of determination is 50/100), or minor prize symbol Y3 (probability of determination is 25/100) is determined. If the result is a loss, the losing symbol Z1 is determined.
In the lottery for winning or losing when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16 during a non-time-saving game state, and in the lottery for winning or losing when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16 during a time-saving game state, either a minor win or a loss is determined. If a minor win is achieved, the minor win symbol Y4 (probability of determination is 10/100), minor win symbol Y5 (probability of determination is 71/100), minor win symbol Y6 (probability of determination is 9/100), or minor win symbol Y7 (probability of determination is 10/100) is determined. If the result is a loss, the losing symbol Z2 is determined.

(i) Overview of the game states to be set In the modified example 1, similar to the fifth form, one of the following is set: normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), low probability time-saving game state LJT1, or low probability time-saving game state LJT2. In addition, one of the following is set for low probability time-saving game state LJT1: low probability time-saving game state LJT1-X (time-saving rounds set to 30, end-decision rounds set to 2), or low probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y (time-saving rounds set to 10,000, end-decision rounds set to 1). In addition, one of the following is set for low probability time-saving game state LJT2: low probability time-saving game state LJT2-X (time-saving rounds set to 10,000, end-decision rounds set to 2), or low probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y (time-saving rounds set to 10,000, end-decision rounds set to 1).

Furthermore, the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-X, LJT1-Y, LJT2-X, and LJT2-Y all end when either of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (1) the number of special symbol variations reaches the time-saving limit without any special game being performed, or (2) the number of minor wins reaches the termination limit.

Here, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X, game balls are launched toward the first game area 12a, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number. Since the number of time-saving rounds is 30 and the probability of winning a minor prize is 1/300 (see Figure 110), a minor prize is not guaranteed to be won before the number of special symbol variations reaches the time-saving round. Furthermore, if the number of special symbol variations reaches the time-saving round (30 rounds) without the special game being performed, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X ends and the game transitions to the normal game state. Furthermore, since the number of times the game ends is determined is two, if a minor win occurs before the number of special symbol variations reaches the number of times the game ends, the remaining number of minor wins will be updated during the special symbol variation stop process, resulting in a remaining number of minor wins of 1 (not reaching the number of times the game ends). Therefore, the time-saving termination condition in (2) above is not met, and at the moment this remaining number of minor wins is updated, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X (time-saving game state). Consequently, the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state.

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y, game balls are launched toward the first game area 12a, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number. Since the number of time-saving spins is 10,000 and the probability of winning a minor win is 1/300 (see Figure 110), the time-saving termination condition described in (1) above is practically never met, and the game state continues until a minor win is achieved. Since the termination determination count is 1, when a minor win is achieved, the remaining minor win count is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, resulting in 0 remaining minor wins (reaching the termination determination count). Therefore, the time-saving termination condition described in (2) above is met, and at the moment this remaining minor win count is updated, the game state returns to the normal game state (non-time-saving game state). Consequently, the reference game state is the non-time-saving game state.

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X, game balls are launched towards the second game area 12b, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. Since the number of time-saving spins is 10,000 and the probability of winning a minor win is 7/300 (see Figure 110), the time-saving termination condition described in (1) above is practically never met, and the game state continues until a minor win is achieved. Since the termination determination count is 2, when a minor win is achieved, the remaining minor win count is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, resulting in 1 remaining minor win (not reaching the termination determination count). Therefore, the time-saving termination condition described in (2) above is not met, and at the moment this remaining minor win count is updated, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X (time-saving game state). Therefore, the reference game state is the time-saving game state.

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, game balls are launched towards the second game area 12b, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. Since the number of time-saving spins is 10,000 and the probability of winning a minor win is 7/300 (see Figure 110), the time-saving termination condition described in (1) above is practically never met, and the game state continues until a minor win is achieved. Since the termination determination count is 1, when a minor win is achieved, the remaining minor win count is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, resulting in 0 remaining minor wins (reaching the termination determination count). Therefore, the time-saving termination condition described in (2) above is met, and at the moment this remaining minor win count is updated, the game state returns to the normal game state (non-time-saving game state). Consequently, the reference game state is the non-time-saving game state.

(c) Overview of game states set according to the type of minor win symbol or time-saving symbol As shown in Figure 111(a), in Modification 1, if the reference game state is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and a minor win symbol Y1 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry is set to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X. Also, if the reference game state is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry is set to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X.

If the referenced game state is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y. Furthermore, if the referenced game state is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X.

If the referenced game state is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y. Furthermore, if the referenced game state is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X.

If the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y4 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X. Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y4 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will also be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X.

If the referenced game state is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y5 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y. Furthermore, if the referenced game state is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y5 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X.

If the referenced game state is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y6 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y. Furthermore, if the referenced game state is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y6 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will also be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y.

If the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y7 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X. Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y7 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y.

As shown in Figure 111(b), if the game state at the time of the win/fail lottery is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), and the time-saving bonus is awarded through the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined and displayed as stopped, then the game state after the display is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X. If the time-saving bonus is awarded through the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined and displayed as stopped, then the game state after the display is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X.

(E) Gameplay of Modified Example 1 After RAM clear (initialization process in case of abnormality, initialization process in normal state) or after the number of special symbol variations reaches the number of time reductions during the low probability time reduction game state LJT1-X, the normal game state is set. During the normal game state, when a game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a and enters the first starting prize entry 15, a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is performed.
Then, when a win/loss lottery is held based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay, if a minor win is achieved, the game proceeds through the execution of a special game triggered by that win, transitioning to one of the following states: low probability time-saving game state LJT2-X (when minor win symbol Y1 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)), low probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y (when minor win symbol Y2 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)), or low probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y (when minor win symbol Y3 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)). If a time-saving bonus is awarded, the game proceeds through that win to either the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-X (when time-saving symbol J1 is determined) or the low probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y (see Figures 111(a) to (b) and 112).
Here, similar to the fifth form, in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay, the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is set to be extremely high compared to a minor win, and the probability of determining the time-saving symbol J2 is set to be extremely high compared to the time-saving symbol J1 (see Figure 110(a)). Therefore, when the win/loss lottery is performed, there is a very high possibility that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y will be set. Furthermore, this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y will continue until a minor win is effectively achieved. Consequently, during gameplay in the modified example 1, the player will generally remain in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y.

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y, just like in the normal game state, when a game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a, the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15, and a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is performed.
Then, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y, if a win/loss lottery is held based on the first special symbol random number, and a minor win is achieved, the game proceeds through the execution of a special game that is performed in connection with that win, and transitions to one of the following states: low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X (when minor win symbol Y1 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)), low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y (when minor win symbol Y2 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)), or low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y (when minor win symbol Y3 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)) (see Figures 111(a) and 112).

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X, when a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16, and a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is performed.
Then, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X, if a win/loss lottery is held based on the second special symbol random number, and a minor win is achieved, the game proceeds through the execution of a special game that is performed in connection with that win, and transitions to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X (when minor win symbols Y4 or Y5 are determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)) or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y (when minor win symbols Y6 or Y7 are determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)) (see Figures 111(a) and 112).

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, when a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16, and a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is performed.
Then, when a win/loss lottery is held based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, if a minor win is achieved, the game proceeds through the execution of a special game triggered by that win, and transitions to one of the following states: low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X (when minor win symbol Y4 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)), low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y (when minor win symbol Y5 or Y6 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)), or low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X (when minor win symbol Y7 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)) (see Figures 111(a) and 112).

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X, when a game ball is launched toward the first game area 12b, the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15, and a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is performed.
Then, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X, if a win/loss lottery is held based on the first special symbol random number, and a minor win is achieved, the game proceeds through the execution of a special game that is performed in connection with that win, and transitions to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X (when minor win symbols Y1 or Y2 are determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)) or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X (when minor win symbols Y3 are determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)) (see Figures 111(a) and 112).
As mentioned above, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 30, so it is not guaranteed that a minor win will occur during this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X. In other words, when transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X, if a minor win is achieved before the number of special symbol spins reaches 30, then after that minor win, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X will be set. If a minor win is not achieved before the number of special symbol spins reaches 30, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X ends and the normal game state is set (see Figure 112).

As described above, in Modification 1, similar to the fifth form, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Furthermore, while the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 can transition to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X or LJT2-Y, from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X, it does not transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X where so-called left-handed play is performed (a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the first special symbol random number), but rather transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X or LJT2-Y where so-called right-handed play is performed (a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number), although from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, there is a possibility of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X. As stated above, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X or LJT2-Y (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) is a more advantageous game state than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1). Therefore, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X, which does not transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X, is a more advantageous game state than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, which has the potential to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X.

In the modified example 1, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y, which is generally the state the player stays in during gameplay, if a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, the player can transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y. If the player transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X, they are almost guaranteed to win a minor win based on the second special symbol random number, and even after the special game performed through that minor win ends, they are guaranteed to remain in the highly advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (LJT2-X, LJT2-Y). In contrast, when transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, a small win based on the second special symbol random number is almost guaranteed. However, after the special game executed through this small win ends, there is a possibility of remaining in the highly advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (LJT2-X, LJT2-Y), while there is also a possibility of transitioning to the less advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (LJT1-X).
Therefore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y, the game is designed to encourage the player to expect a transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X rather than LJT2-Y, thus providing a gameplay experience that encourages the player to continue playing.

Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X, as described above, even after the special game executed via winning a minor prize ends, it is confirmed that the player will remain in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. However, if the player transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, there is a possibility that the player will then transition to the relatively less advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X.
Therefore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X, the game is designed to encourage players to expect to remain in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X rather than transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, thus enhancing the gameplay experience.

Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, after the special game that is performed via winning a minor prize ends, there is a possibility of transitioning to the highly advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X, remaining in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, or transitioning to the less advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X.
Therefore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, the game is designed to encourage players to expect a transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X or to remain in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, rather than transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X.

Furthermore, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X, which can be transitioned from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, is less advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (LJT2-X, LJT2-Y). However, if a minor win is achieved during this game state, the player will either transition to the most advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X, or remain in this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X again. In addition, the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X is higher in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X than in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y.
This adds a novel gameplay element: the transition from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X becomes a chance zone with a high probability of transitioning to the player-favorable low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X.

Furthermore, in the normal game state, which is set after a RAM clear or after the number of special symbol variations reaches the time-saving count during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y, it is possible to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y, and low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y based on the winning of a minor prize. In addition, it is possible to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X and low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y based on the winning of a time-saving bonus. In other words, during the normal game state, the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X is higher than that of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Y. This gives the normal game state a novel gameplay feature where the probability of transitioning to the advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X is high for the player.

As described above, Modification 1, like the fifth form, allows for a wide variety of game state settings, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.
In Modification 1, the reference game state was a time-saving game state, and a minor win was determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y7 was determined. If a predetermined number of game balls entered the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry was set to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Y. However, it is not limited to this, and the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry may be set to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X.
In this case, there is a possibility of transitioning from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-X, which can give players a thrilling impression while in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-X.

(Variation 2)
In the pachinko machine P according to this form, the low probability time-saving game states LJT1-A and LJT1-B, which can be set as low probability time-saving game states LJT1, are set to have different numbers of small wins (number of times to end) that cause the time-saving game state JT1 to end, thereby setting the game state referenced when a small win is achieved to be different. However, the method for making the reference game state different is not limited to this, and the time-saving game state JT1 may be set to end when a predetermined number of times a predetermined number of small win symbols are determined, and then the number of times the small win symbols are determined that cause the time-saving game state JT1 to end may be set to be different, thereby setting the game state referenced when a small win is achieved to be different.
The following will explain Modification 2 with specific examples. Note that the same content as in the fifth form will be omitted from the explanation below, and only the differences will be described in detail.

(Specific example of variation 2)
(a) Overview of the win/loss lottery and minor win game As shown in Figure 113, in the modified example 2, when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry 15 during a non-time-saving game state, the lottery for win/loss is performed, and either a minor win or a time-saving bonus is awarded, and if a minor win is awarded, minor win symbol Y1 (probability of determination is 70/100), minor win symbol Y2 (probability of determination is 10/100), minor win symbol Y3 (probability of determination is 10/100), or minor win symbol Y4 (probability of determination is 10/100) is determined, and if a time-saving bonus is awarded, a time-saving symbol J1 (probability of determination is 20/100), time-saving symbol J2 (probability of determination is 40/100), or time-saving symbol J3 (probability of determination is 40/100) is determined.
In the lottery for winning or losing when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15 during the shortened play state, one of the following results is determined: either a minor win or a loss. If a minor win is achieved, one of the following symbols is determined: minor win symbol Y1 (probability of determination: 70/100), minor win symbol Y2 (probability of determination: 10/100), minor win symbol Y3 (probability of determination: 10/100), or minor win symbol Y4 (probability of determination: 10/100). If the result is a loss, one of the following symbols is determined: loss symbol Z1.
In the lottery for winning or losing when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16 during a non-time-saving game state, and in the lottery for winning or losing when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16 during a time-saving game state, either a minor win or a loss is determined. If a minor win is achieved, the minor win symbol Y5 (probability of determination is 75/100), minor win symbol Y6 (probability of determination is 15/100), minor win symbol Y7 (probability of determination is 5/100), or minor win symbol Y8 (probability of determination is 5/100) is determined. If the result is a loss, the losing symbol Z2 is determined.

Furthermore, in the modified example 2, when a minor winning symbol Y1, Y2, Y3, Y5, Y6, Y7, or Y8 is determined, similar to the fifth embodiment described above, during the minor winning game based on the determination of the minor winning symbol, the distribution member 59 remains in the second position, and all game balls that enter the major prize opening 18 enter the special area. Based on the fact that a predetermined number (1 ball) of game balls enter the special area during the minor winning game, a special game is executed.
In contrast, when a minor win symbol Y4 is determined, during the minor win game based on the determination of that minor win symbol, the distribution member 59 remains in the first position, and all game balls that enter the major prize opening 18 enter the general area. Therefore, no predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game, and the special game is not performed.
In other words, in modified example 2, the determination of minor winning symbols Y1, Y2, Y3, Y5, Y6, Y7, or Y8 triggers the execution of a special game, but the determination of minor winning symbol Y4 does not trigger the execution of a special game.

(i) Overview of the game state to be set In the modified example 2, similar to the fifth form, one of the following is set: normal game state (non-time-saving game state), low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), or low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2).
The low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 can be set to one of the following: low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1, low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2, low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1, or low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2.
The low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q.
Furthermore, similar to the fifth form, in the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (LJT1-P1, LJT1-P2, LJT1-Q1, LJT1-Q2), the game balls are launched toward the first game area 12a, and in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (LJT2-P, LJT2-Q), the game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b.

Furthermore, in the modified example 2, the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-P and LJT2-Q end when either of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (1) the number of times the special symbols change reaches the time-saving number without the special game being executed, or (2) the number of times symbols other than the minor win symbol Y4 (i.e., minor win symbols Y1, Y2, Y3, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, in other words, the minor win symbols that trigger the execution of the special game) is determined reaches a predetermined first termination determination number.
As shown in Figure 114, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000 and the number of first termination decisions is set to 1. Also, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000 and the number of first termination decisions is set to 2.

Furthermore, the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-P1, LJT1-P2, LJT1-Q1, and LJT1-Q2 are set to terminate when any of the following time-saving termination conditions are met: (1) the number of special symbol variations reaches the time-saving limit without the special game being executed, (2) the number of determinations for symbols other than the minor win symbol Y4 reaches a predetermined first termination determination number, or (3) the number of determinations for the minor win symbol Y4 (i.e., minor win symbols that do not trigger the execution of the special game) reaches a predetermined second termination determination number.
As shown in Figure 114, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000, the number of first termination decisions is set to 1, and the number of second termination decisions is set to 1,000. In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000, the number of first termination decisions is set to 1, and the number of second termination decisions is set to 1. In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000, the number of first termination decisions is set to 2, and the number of second termination decisions is set to 1,000. In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000, the number of first termination decisions is set to 2, and the number of second termination decisions is set to 1.

In the modified example 2, the main RAM 103 is provided with a first termination decision count storage area and a second termination decision count storage area. The first termination decision count storage area stores the remaining number of decisions for minor winning symbols other than Y4 until the above-mentioned first termination decision count is reached (hereinafter also referred to as the first remaining minor winning count), and the second termination decision count storage area stores the remaining number of decisions for minor winning symbols Y4 until the above-mentioned second termination decision count is reached (hereinafter also referred to as the second remaining minor winning count).
Similar to the fifth form, during the time-saving game state, the remaining number of spins is updated in the special symbol spin stop processing described above. Furthermore, in the modified form 2, in the special symbol spin stop processing described above, if a symbol other than the minor win symbol Y4 is determined, the first remaining minor win count stored in the first termination determination count storage area is updated (decremented by 1), and if the minor win symbol Y4 is determined, the second remaining minor win count stored in the second termination determination count storage area is updated (decremented by 1).
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-P1, LJT1-P2, LJT1-Q1, and LJT1-Q2, if any of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (3) above are met as a result of the above update, the time-saving game state JT1 will end and the non-time-saving game state will be set, changing the game state to the normal game state. Also, in the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-P and LJT2-Q, if any of the time-saving termination conditions (1) to (2) above are met as a result of the above update, the time-saving game state JT2 will end and the non-time-saving game state will be set, changing the game state to the normal game state.

Here, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1, game balls are launched toward the first game area 12a, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number. Since the number of time-saving rounds is 10,000 and the probability of winning a minor prize is 1/300 (see Figure 113), the time-saving termination condition in (1) is practically never met.
Furthermore, the number of times the second termination is determined is 1000, and the probability of the minor win symbol Y4 being determined when a minor win is achieved is 10/100 (see Figure 113), so in practice, the time-saving termination condition in (3) is never met.
On the other hand, since the first termination determination count is 1, if a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined, the first remaining minor win count will be updated during the special symbol variation stop process, and the first remaining minor win count will become 0 (reaching the first termination determination count), thus fulfilling the time-saving termination condition in (2). At this point, when the first remaining minor win count is updated, the game state becomes the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), and the reference game state becomes the non-time-saving game state. After the special game, which is executed through the determination of minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3, the reference game state becomes the non-time-saving game state, and a game state corresponding to the type of minor win symbol determined is set (see Figure 114(a)).

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2, game balls are launched toward the first game area 12a, similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1, and a win/loss lottery is performed in principle based on the first special symbol random number, and the number of time-saving rounds is 10,000, and the probability of winning a minor prize is 1/300 (see Figure 113), so in practice the time-saving termination condition in (1) is never met.
On the other hand, since the first termination determination count is 1, if a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined, the first remaining minor win count will be updated during the special symbol variation stop process, and the first remaining minor win count will become 0 (reaching the first termination determination count), thus fulfilling the time-saving termination condition in (2). At this point, when the first remaining minor win count is updated, the game state becomes the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), and the reference game state becomes the non-time-saving game state. After the special game, which is executed through the determination of minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3, the reference game state becomes the non-time-saving game state, and a game state corresponding to the type of minor win symbol determined is set (see Figure 114(a)).
Furthermore, since the second termination determination count is 1, if a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y4 is determined, the second remaining minor win count will become 0 (reaching the second termination determination count) when the special symbol variation stop process updates, thus fulfilling the time-saving termination condition in (3). At this point, the game state becomes the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) when this second remaining minor win count is updated. Note that, as described above, special games are not executed through the determination of minor win symbol Y4, so the game state at the time of reference and the game state according to the type of minor win symbol are not set, as in the case when minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined.

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1, game balls are launched toward the first game area 12a, similar to the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-P1 and LJT2-P2, and in principle a win/loss lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number. However, the number of time-saving rounds is 10,000, and the probability of winning a minor prize is 1/300 (see Figure 113), so in practice, the time-saving termination condition in (1) is never met.
Furthermore, the number of times the second termination is determined is 1000, and the probability of the minor win symbol Y4 being determined when a minor win is achieved is 10/100 (see Figure 113), so in practice, the time-saving termination condition in (3) is never met.
On the other hand, since the first number of termination decisions is 2, if a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined, the second remaining number of minor wins will be updated during the special symbol variation stop process, resulting in the second remaining number of minor wins becoming 1 (not reaching the first termination decision count), and thus the time-saving termination condition in (2) is not met. As a result, when this second remaining number of minor wins is updated, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1 (time-saving game state), and the reference time game state becomes the time-saving game state. After the special game, which is executed through the determination of minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3, is completed, the reference time game state becomes the time-saving game state, and a game state corresponding to the type of minor win symbol determined is set (see Figure 114(a)).

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2, game balls are launched toward the first game area 12a, similar to the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-P1, LJT2-P2, and LJT1-Q1, and in principle a win/loss lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number. However, the number of time-saving rounds is 10,000, and the probability of winning a minor prize is 1/300 (see Figure 113), so in practice the time-saving termination condition in (1) is never met.
On the other hand, since the first number of termination decisions is 2, if a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined, the first remaining number of minor wins will be updated during the special symbol variation stop process, resulting in the first remaining number of minor wins becoming 1 (not reaching the first termination decision count), and thus the time-saving termination condition in (2) is not met. Then, when this second remaining number of minor wins is updated, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2 (time-saving game state), and the reference time game state becomes the time-saving game state. After the special game, which is executed through the determination of minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3, is completed, the reference time game state becomes the time-saving game state, and a game state corresponding to the type of minor win symbol determined is set (see Figure 114(a)).
Furthermore, since the second termination determination count is 1, if a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y4 is determined, the second remaining minor win count will be updated during the special symbol variation stop process, resulting in the second remaining minor win count becoming 0 (reaching the second termination determination count), thus fulfilling the time-saving termination condition in (3). At this point, the game state becomes the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) when this second remaining minor win count is updated. Note that, as mentioned above, since no special game is performed, the game state at the time of reference and the game state according to the type of minor win symbol are not set.

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P, game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. However, the number of time-saving rounds is 10,000, and the probability of winning a minor prize is 7/300 (see Figure 113), so in practice, the time-saving termination condition in (1) is never met.
On the other hand, since the first termination determination count is 1, if a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, or Y8 are determined, the first remaining minor win count will be updated during the special symbol variation stop process, resulting in the first remaining minor win count becoming 0 (reaching the first termination determination count), thus fulfilling the time-saving termination condition in (2). At this point, when the first remaining minor win count is updated, the game state becomes the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), and the reference game state becomes the non-time-saving game state. After the special game, which is executed via the determination of minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, or Y8, the reference game state becomes the non-time-saving game state, and a game state corresponding to the type of minor win symbol determined is set (see Figure 114(a)).

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q, game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b, similar to LJT2-P, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. However, the number of time-saving rounds is 10,000, and the probability of winning a minor prize is 7/300 (see Figure 113), so in practice, the time-saving termination condition in (1) is never met.
On the other hand, since the first number of termination decisions is 2, if a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, or Y8 are determined, the first remaining number of minor wins will be updated during the special symbol variation stop process, resulting in the first remaining number of minor wins becoming 1 (not reaching the first termination decision count), and thus the time-saving termination condition in (2) is not met. Then, when this second remaining number of minor wins is updated, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2 (time-saving game state), and the reference time game state becomes the time-saving game state. After the special game, which is executed via the determination of minor win symbols Y5, Y6, Y7, or Y8, is completed, the reference time game state becomes the time-saving game state, and a game state corresponding to the type of minor win symbol determined is set (see Figure 114(a)).

(c) Overview of game states set according to the type of minor win symbol or time-saving symbol As shown in Figure 114(a), in Modification 2, if the reference game state is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry is set to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P. Also, if the reference game state is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry is set to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q.

If the referenced game state is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1. Furthermore, if the referenced game state is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1.

If the referenced game state is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2. Furthermore, if the referenced game state is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2.

If the referenced game state is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y5 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P. Furthermore, if the referenced game state is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y5 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q.

If the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y6 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2. Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y6 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will be set to a non-time-saving game state.

If the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y7 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1. Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y7 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will also be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1.

If the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y8 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2. Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference is a time-saving game state, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y8 is determined, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, then the game state after the end of the special game based on that entry will also be set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2.

As shown in Figure 114(b), if the game state at the time of the win/fail lottery is the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), and the time-saving bonus is awarded through the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined and displayed as a stop, then the game state after the display is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q. If the time-saving bonus is awarded through the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined and displayed as a stop, then the game state after the display is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1. If the time-saving bonus is awarded through the win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the time-saving symbol J3 is determined and displayed as a stop, then the game state after the display is set to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2.

(e) Gameplay of Modified Example 2 After RAM clear (initialization process in case of abnormality, initialization process in normal state), if the small win symbol Y4 is determined during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2 or LJT1-Q2, then if the small win symbol Y6 is determined during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q, and after the special game executed through that determination is completed, the normal game state is set. During the normal game state, if the game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15 by shooting the game ball toward the first game area 12a, a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is performed.
Then, during normal gameplay, if a win/loss lottery is held based on the first special symbol random number, and a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined, a special game is executed based on that determination, resulting in a low probability time-saving game state LJT2-P (when minor win symbol Y1 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is not a time-saving game state)), a low probability time-saving game state LJT2-P1 (when minor win symbol Y2 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is not a time-saving game state)), or a low probability time-saving game state If the game transitions to one of the following states LJT1-P2 (when the minor win symbol Y3 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)), and a time-saving bonus is awarded, the game transitions to one of the following states after the award: low probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q (when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined), low probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1 (when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined), or low probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2 (when the time-saving symbol J3 is determined) (see Figures 114(a) to (b) and 115).
Here, similar to the fifth form, in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay, the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is set to be extremely high compared to a minor win, and the probability of determining time-saving symbols J2 and J3 is set to be higher than that of time-saving symbol J1 (see Figure 113(a)). Therefore, when the win/loss lottery is performed, there is a high probability that the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-Q1 and LJT1-Q2 will be set. Furthermore, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1 will continue until a minor win symbol Y1, Y2, or Y3 is determined, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2 will continue until a minor win symbol Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4 is determined. Therefore, during gameplay in the modified example 2, there is a high probability of remaining in the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-Q1 or LJT-Q2.

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1, just like in the normal game state, when a game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a, the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15, and a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is performed.
Then, if a win/loss lottery is held based on the first special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1, and a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined, the game proceeds through the execution of a special game based on that determination to transition to one of the following states: low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q (when minor win symbol Y1 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)), low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1 (when minor win symbol Y2 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)), or low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2 (when minor win symbol Y3 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)) (see Figures 114(a) and 115).

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2, just like in the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1, when a game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a, the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15, and a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is performed.
Then, if a win/loss lottery is held based on the first special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2, and a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined, the game proceeds through the execution of a special game triggered by the win, transitioning to one of the following states: low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q (if minor win symbol Y1 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)), low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1 (if minor win symbol Y2 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)), or low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2 (if minor win symbol Y3 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)). If a minor win is achieved and minor win symbol Y4 is determined, the game proceeds to the normal game state (see Figures 114(a) and 115).

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q, when a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16, and a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is performed.
Then, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q, if a win/loss lottery is held based on the second special symbol random number, and a minor win is achieved, the game proceeds through the execution of a special game triggered by that win, and transitions to one of the following states: low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q (when minor win symbol Y5 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)), low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1 (when minor win symbol Y7 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)), low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2 (when minor win symbol Y8 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)), or normal game state (when minor win symbol Y6 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state)) (see Figures 114(a) and 115).

Furthermore, as described above, if a minor win is achieved during normal gameplay and the minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined, the game will transition to one of the following low-probability time-saving game states: LJT1-P1, LJT1-P2, or LJT2-P.
During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1, similar to the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-Q1 and LJT1-Q2, when a game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a, the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15, and a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is performed.
Then, if a win/loss lottery is held based on the first special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1, and a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined, the game proceeds through the execution of a special game conducted via that determination to transition to one of the following states: low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P (if minor win symbol Y1 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)), low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1 (if minor win symbol Y2 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)), or low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2 (if minor win symbol Y3 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)) (see Figures 114(a) and 115).

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2, similar to the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-Q1, LJT1-Q2, and LJT1-P1, when a game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a, the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15, and a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is performed.
Then, if a win/loss lottery is held based on the first special symbol random number during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2, and a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined, the game proceeds through the execution of a special game triggered by the win, transitioning to one of the following states: low probability time-saving game state LJT2-P (if minor win symbol Y1 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is not a time-saving game state)), low probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1 (if minor win symbol Y2 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is not a time-saving game state)), or low probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2 (if minor win symbol Y3 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is not a time-saving game state)). If a minor win is achieved and minor win symbol Y4 is determined, the game proceeds to the normal game state (if minor win symbol Y4 is determined) (see Figures 114(a) and 115).

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P, when a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16, and a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is performed.
Then, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P, if a win/loss lottery is held based on the second special symbol random number, and a minor win is achieved, the game proceeds through the execution of a special game triggered by that win, and transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P (when minor win symbol Y5 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)), the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1 (when minor win symbol Y7 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)), or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2 (when minor win symbol Y6 or Y8 is determined (the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state)) (see Figures 114(a) and 115).

As described above, in Modification 2, similar to the fifth form, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, in which the win/loss lottery is mainly based on the second special symbol random number, and 10 rounds of gameplay are performed during the special game that is executed when a minor win is achieved in the win/loss lottery.
Furthermore, as a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, it is possible to transition to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P or LJT2-Q. While the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P does not transition to the normal game state, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q has the potential to transition to the normal game state. As mentioned above, in the normal game state, the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is extremely high compared to a minor win, and it is possible to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) through winning a time-saving bonus. Therefore, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q, which has the potential to transition to the normal game state, is a more advantageous game state than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P, which does not transition to the normal game state.

Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, where so-called left-handed play is performed (a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the first special symbol random number), the player transitions to one of the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-P1, LJT1-P2, LJT1-Q1, or LJT1-Q2. However, from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1 or LJT1-P2, the player may not transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q, but rather to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P, which is less advantageous than the current game state. On the other hand, from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1 or LJT1-Q2, the player may not transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P, but rather to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q, which is more advantageous than the current game state. Therefore, among the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1 where left-handed play is performed, low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-Q1 and LJT1-Q2 are more advantageous game states than low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-P1 and LJT1-P2.

Furthermore, while the game does not transition to the normal game state from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1, there is a possibility of transitioning to the normal game state from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2. Similarly, while the game does not transition to the normal game state from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1, there is a possibility of transitioning to the normal game state from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2.
Therefore, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P2, which has the potential to transition to the normal game state, is a more advantageous game state than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P1, which does not transition to the normal game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q2, which has the potential to transition to the normal game state, is a more advantageous game state than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q1, which does not transition to the normal game state.

In other words, in the modified example 2, the game state during so-called left-handed play is set to gradually increase in advantage in the following order: low probability time-saving game state LJT1-P1 → low probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2 → low probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q1 → low probability time-saving game state LJT1-Q2 → normal game state.
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-Q1 and LJT1-Q2, which are likely to be experienced during gameplay, the goal is to transition to the more advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q based on the winning of a minor prize. After transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q, the gameplay is enhanced so that the goal is to return to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q through the execution of a special game based on the determination of the minor prize symbol Y5, or to transition to the more advantageous normal game state through the execution of a special game based on the determination of the minor prize symbol Y6. Furthermore, if the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2 or LJT1-P1 based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y7 or Y8 during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q, the game will aim to transition to the more advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P based on the minor win, while also transitioning to the normal game state based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y4 in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1-P2. From this normal game state, the game will then aim to transition to the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-Q1, LJT1-Q2, or LJT2-Q, which are more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1-P1 or LJT1-P2.

As described above, Modification 2, like the fifth form, allows for a wide variety of game state settings, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.
In the modified example 2, the number of times the small win symbol Y4 that causes the time-saving game state to end is determined is different in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, thereby setting the reference time game state to be different. However, the same control may be performed in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 as well.
Specifically, for example, four types of low-probability time-saving game states LJT2 are provided: LJT2-P1, LJT2-P2, LJT2-Q1, and LJT2-Q2. In addition, as minor win symbols determined when a minor win occurs in the second special symbol random number draw, both minor win symbols that trigger the execution of special symbols and minor win symbols that do not trigger the execution of special symbols are provided. Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P1, the number of first termination decisions (the number of times a minor winning symbol that triggers the execution of a special symbol is determined) may be set to 1, and the number of second termination decisions (the number of times a minor winning symbol that does not trigger the execution of a special symbol is determined) may be set to 1000; in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-P2, the number of first termination decisions may be set to 1, and the number of second termination decisions may be set to 1; in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q1, the number of first termination decisions may be set to 2, and the number of second termination decisions may be set to 1000; and in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2-Q2, the number of first termination decisions may be set to 2, and the number of second termination decisions may be set to 1.
In this way, multiple game states with effectively different levels of advantage can be established as the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, resulting in a rich variety of game state settings and increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, the LJT1-P1, LJT1-P2, LJT1-Q1, and LJT1-Q2, which are set as low-probability time-saving game states LJT1, may be distinguishable by the player by, for example, different background images or performance symbols 50 displayed in each state, or they may be made indistinguishable by the player by making the background images or performance symbols 50 displayed in all of them the same. In other words, the game may be set so that the player can distinguish or cannot distinguish each game state depending on the performance that is performed.
Similarly, the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2-P and LJT2-Q may be set so that the player can be identified or not identified depending on the performance being executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this form, the conditions for ending the time-saving mode were defined as the number of times the special symbols changed reaching the number of time-saving mode rounds, and the number of times a minor win occurred reaching the number of rounds that determined the end of the time-saving mode; however, the conditions for ending the time-saving mode are not limited to these.
For example, conditions may be set such as the number of times the special symbols change based on the first special symbol random number (the number of win/loss draws based on the first special symbol random number) reaches a predetermined number of times, the number of times the special symbols change based on the second special symbol random number (the number of win/loss draws based on the second special symbol random number) reaches a predetermined number of times, or winning a minor prize.
Even in the manner described above, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, it is possible to win only minor wins through the win/fail lottery, and a special game is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter a special area during the minor win game based on the win/fail lottery. However, the lottery results derived from the win/fail lottery and the triggers for the execution of the special game are not limited to these.
For example, the draw may allow players to win not only small prizes but also big prizes, and a special game may be played based on the outcome of the big prize draw.
Even in the manner described above, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(6th form)
The sixth form will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this description, components similar to those in the first to fifth forms described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.
The pachinko machine P in this form, like the fifth form, is a pachinko machine in which the trigger for the execution of a special game is the winning of a minor prize. Specifically, in the win/loss lottery, it is possible to win a minor prize even if a big prize is not won, and the special game is executed when a game ball enters a special area during a minor prize game based on the winning of a minor prize.

Furthermore, as will be described later, the pachinko machine P in this form aims to win a minor prize through a win/loss lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize pocket 15 when the game state is one in which the player is encouraged to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a, and aims to derive a lottery result that allows the game ball to enter the second starting prize pocket 16 through a lottery of ordinary symbols based on the game ball passing through the gate 20.
Furthermore, in a game state in which the player is encouraged to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a, a variation performance is executed that notifies the result of the draw based on the game ball entering the first starting prize pocket 15, along with the display of a special symbol variation. On the other hand, in a game state in which the player is encouraged to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b, a variation performance is executed that notifies the result of the draw based on the draw for the normal symbol that results from the game ball passing through the gate 20 (whether or not the draw result allows the game ball to enter the second starting prize pocket 16), along with the display of a normal symbol variation (hereinafter also referred to as normal symbol variation).
In other words, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment differs from the pachinko machines P according to the first to fifth embodiments, which, in a variation performance performed during a game state in which the launching of game balls toward the second game area 12b is encouraged, in that the result of the lottery based on the lottery of ordinary symbols is announced in the variation performance performed during a game state in which the launching of game balls toward the second game area 12b is encouraged, in that the result of the win or loss lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize entry 16 is announced in the variation performance performed during a game state in which the launching of game balls toward the second game area 12b is encouraged.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P in this embodiment, as well as the devices and components installed on the game board 11, are the same as those of the second to fifth embodiments.
Furthermore, during special gameplay and during minor win gameplay based on the determination of minor win symbols (winning a minor win), the large prize opening 18 opens, allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening 18. During special gameplay, the distribution member 59 is stationary in the first position, and game balls that enter the large prize opening 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. In contrast, during minor win gameplay based on the determination of minor win symbols, the distribution member 59 is stationary in the second position, and game balls that enter the large prize opening 18 do not enter the general area 58, but all enter the special area.
In other words, game balls can only enter the special area during a minor win game based on the determination of a minor win symbol. As a result, a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this form) enter the special area during a minor win game. Then, based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special area during a minor win game, the special game is executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, the game state after the special game, which is executed based on the determination of the minor win symbol, is set according to the minor win symbol determined when a minor win is achieved.
Furthermore, the following game states can be set: a normal game state which combines a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state; a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 which combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state JT1; and a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 which combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2. The game proceeds with one of these game states set.

Furthermore, the difficulty of getting the game ball into the second starting prize entry point 16 in the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1, and time-saving game state JT2 (the frequency of the display of the changing normal symbols), specifically the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, the time of the normal symbol change, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b are each set to predetermined values (see Figure 117).

Furthermore, in the initial state immediately after factory shipment or after a RAM reset (initialization process in case of abnormality, initialization process in normal operation), the normal gameplay state is set.

During normal gameplay, the player is instructed to play primarily in the first game area 12a so that the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15 (the player is instructed to shoot the game ball towards the first game area 12a (left-handed)). As long as the game is being played in the first game area 12a, the game ball can enter the first starting prize entry point 15. Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, special gameplay, and minor win gameplay, the player is instructed to play mainly in the second game area 12b so that the game ball enters the large prize opening 18, or passes through the gate 20 and enters the second starting prize opening 16 (the player is instructed to shoot to the right so that the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b). As long as the game is being played in the second game area 12b, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the large prize opening 18, and enter the second starting prize opening 16.
Then, a draw is performed to determine whether a player wins or loses based on the number of game balls that enter the first starting prize slot 15 and the number of game balls that enter the second starting prize slot 16.

In this configuration of the pachinko machine P, up to four of the first special symbol random numbers can be stored as reserves, but the second special symbol random numbers are set so that they cannot be stored as reserves.
Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting prize slot 15 while the special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as the first special symbol) is being displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15, if there are three or fewer first special symbol random numbers stored as reserves, the first special symbol random number acquired based on that entry will be stored as reserves. However, if there are four or more first special symbol random numbers stored as reserves, the first special symbol random number acquired based on that entry will not be stored as reserves. If a first special symbol random number is stored as a reserve, after the display of the first special symbol's variation ends, the first special symbol random number stored as a reserve is read out, and a win/loss lottery and a display of the first special symbol's variation based on that first special symbol random number are executed.
In contrast, if a game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16 while the special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as the second special symbol) is being displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16, the random number for the second special symbol obtained based on that entry is not stored as a reserve. Therefore, the win/loss lottery and the display of the second special symbol based on the random number for the second special symbol obtained by that entry are executed only when a game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16 while the display of the second special symbol is not being performed.
Furthermore, it may be possible to store the second special random number as a pending value.

As shown in Figure 116(a), in the draw for winning or losing when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, it is possible to win a minor prize, and if a minor prize is won, the minor prize symbol Y1 is determined. In other words, during normal gameplay, which is mainly played in the first game area 12a, a special game may be executed based on the winning of a minor prize (determination of the minor prize symbol Y1).
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 116(a), the probability of winning a minor prize in the above-mentioned draw is set to 1/200, and the probability of determining the minor prize symbol Y1 when a minor prize is won is set to 100/100 (100%). In addition, if the above-mentioned draw results in a loss, the losing symbol Z1 is determined.
Thus, in the lottery based on the first special random number, one of two results is derived: either a win of a minor prize or a loss. If a minor prize is not won, the result is always a loss.

As shown in Figure 116(a), in the draw for winning or losing when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16, it is possible to win a minor prize, and if a minor prize is won, the minor prize symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined. That is, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2, in which the game is mainly played in the second game area 12b, a special game may be executed via a minor prize game that is executed based on the winning of a minor prize (determination of the minor prize symbol Y2 or Y3).
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 116(a), the probability of winning a minor prize in the above-mentioned draw is set to 200/200, and the probability of determining minor prize symbol Y2 when a minor prize is won is set to 60/100 (60%), and the probability of determining minor prize symbol Y3 is set to 40/100 (40%).
Thus, when a game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16, the probability of winning a minor prize is 200/200. Therefore, when a game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16, the draw will always result in a minor prize win. In other words, if a game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16, it will always result in a minor prize win and will never be a loss.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, as in the first to fifth forms, once a special symbol is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern is determined based on the result of that determination, which includes the variation time and variation performance of the special symbol.
The pachinko machine P in this form is equipped with multiple variation pattern tables 114 that store variation pattern commands associated with the above-mentioned variation patterns. Here, we will explain table MP71, which is referenced when determining a variation pattern command (variation pattern) based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay (non-time-saving gameplay), table MP72, which is referenced when determining a variation pattern command based on the second special symbol random number during low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT1 (time-saving gameplay JT1), and table MP73, which is referenced when determining a variation pattern command based on the second special symbol random number during low-probability time-saving gameplay LJT2 (time-saving gameplay JT2). Explanations of the other variation pattern tables 114 will be omitted.
Then, as with the first to fifth forms, once the win/loss lottery and the determination of the special symbols are performed, the type of special symbol random number used in the win/loss lottery (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number) and one of the variation pattern tables 114 corresponding to the game state at the time of setting are referenced to determine the variation pattern command.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 117(a), according to table MP71, if the draw based on the first special symbol random number results in a loss and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, and the first number of reserved symbols at that time is less than 2, then one of the following is determined: variation pattern command "00H" (with a 90% probability of determination) associated with the variation pattern "13-second variation (special symbol variation time is 13 seconds)", variation pattern command "02H" (with a 8% probability of determination) associated with the variation pattern "20-second variation (special symbol variation time is 20 seconds)", or variation pattern command "03H" (with a 2% probability of determination) associated with the variation pattern "60-second variation (special symbol variation time is 60 seconds)". If the number of reserved symbols at the above point is 2 or more, one of the following will be selected: variation pattern command "01H" (with a 90% probability of selection) associated with the variation pattern "6-second variation (special symbol variation time is 6 seconds)", variation pattern command "02H" (with a 8% probability of selection) associated with the variation pattern "20-second variation", or variation pattern command "03H" (with a 2% probability of selection) associated with the variation pattern "60-second variation".
If a minor win is determined by a random draw based on the first special symbol and the minor win symbol Y1 is selected, either the variation pattern command "0AH" (with a 10% probability of selection) associated with the "20-second variation" variation pattern, or the variation pattern command "0BH" (with a 90% probability of selection) associated with the "60-second variation" variation pattern will be selected.

As shown in Figure 117(b), according to table MP72, if a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the variation pattern command "0AH" (with a probability of determination of 100%), which is associated with the variation pattern "0.5 second variation (the variation time of the special symbol is 0.5 seconds)", is determined.
If a minor win is determined by a random draw based on the second special symbol and the minor win symbol Y3 is selected, either the variation pattern command "0BH" (with an 85% probability of selection) which is associated with the variation pattern "60-second variation", or the variation pattern command "0CH" (with a 15% probability of selection) which is associated with the variation pattern "120-second variation (special symbol variation time is 120 seconds)", will be selected.

As shown in Figure 117(c), according to Table MP73, if a minor win is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special random number and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the variation pattern command "0DH" (with a determination probability of 100%), which is associated with the variation pattern "0.5 seconds variation", is determined.
If a minor win is determined by a random draw based on the second special symbol and the minor win symbol Y3 is selected, the variation pattern command "0EH" (with a 100% probability of selection) associated with the variation pattern "1 second variation" is selected.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this configuration, similar to the third to fifth configurations, the stop display time (so-called symbol confirmation time), which is the time it takes for the special symbol to stop displaying after the special symbol's variation display has finished, is the same (0.5 seconds in this configuration) regardless of the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery or the type of special symbol determined. This stop display time may also be determined based on the game state at the time of the win/loss lottery and the type of special symbol determined.

The mini-win game, which is executed when a mini-win is won and the mini-win symbols Y1, Y2, or Y3 are determined, is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: the large prize opening 18 is opened for 0.45 seconds four times, or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open (see Figure 116(b)). The closing time (interval time) of the large prize opening 18 between the end of one opening and the start of the next is set to 0.6 seconds. Furthermore, while the large prize opening 18 is open, the distribution member 59 remains in the second position.
Thus, when a minor win is achieved, regardless of which minor win symbol is determined, the large prize opening 18 is opened for a total of 1.8 seconds during the minor win game. As a result, if the player is shooting to the right during this minor win game, the game ball can be sent into the large prize opening 18. Furthermore, since the distribution member 59 remains in the second position during this minor win game, any game ball that enters the large prize opening 18 will always enter the special area.
Therefore, if a minor win is achieved, and the player is shooting to the right, a predetermined number of game balls (1 ball) will enter the special area during the minor win game based on that win, and a special game will be executed based on that entry.
Furthermore, the manner in which the large prize opening 18 is opened during a minor win game is not limited to the above, and various manners can be adopted. For example, the large prize opening 18 may be opened for 0.15 seconds 12 times. By doing so, the number of times the large prize opening 18 is opened while the game ball is flowing down the game area (second game area 12b in this embodiment) into which the game ball can enter the large prize opening 18 increases, thereby increasing the possibility of 10 or more game balls entering during a minor win game (the possibility of so-called over-entry).

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, if a minor win symbol Y1 is determined and a predetermined number (1 ball) of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, a total of two round games are executed, which end when either the large prize opening 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 after the minor win game has ended (in Figure 116(a), the minor win game and the two round games are collectively referred to as 3R). In addition, the large prize opening 18 is opened only once in each round game (opening for 29.0 seconds is performed once), and the interval time between each round game is set to 2.0 seconds. Furthermore, the distribution member 59 remains stationary in the first position during each round game.
Furthermore, if a minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, a special game is executed in which the aforementioned round game is played a total of nine times (in Figure 116(a), the minor win game and the nine round games are combined and referred to as 10R). The opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door 18b, the operation mode of the distribution member 59, and the interval time during the round game are all set to be the same as those of the special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y1 described above.

(Overview of the general game)
Next, we will explain the general gameplay performed on the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, a normal symbol determination process is performed to determine the normal symbol based on the result of the lottery, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination process is performed to determine the variation pattern of the determined normal symbol. The operation mode of the movable piece 16b is determined according to the type of normal symbol determined by the normal symbol determination process, and when the movable piece 16b operates in the predetermined operation mode, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry opening 16.

The drawing of ordinary symbols is performed in much the same manner as in the first form, specifically by the main CPU 101 based on a winning determination random number acquired when a game ball passes through gate 20, and a winning determination random number judgment table (not specifically shown) which is provided for each game state and associates the drawing result (win or loss) with the winning determination random number.
The normal symbol determination process is performed by the main CPU 101 based on a normal symbol determination random number obtained when a game ball passes through gate 20, and a normal symbol determination table (not specifically shown) which is provided for each game state and associates the type of normal symbol with the normal symbol determination random number and the result of the normal symbol lottery.
The normal symbol variation pattern determination process is performed by the main CPU 101 based on a normal symbol variation pattern determination random number acquired when a game ball passes through gate 20, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table (not specifically shown in the diagram) which is provided for each game state and associates the normal symbol variation pattern (hereinafter also referred to as normal symbol variation pattern) with the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number, game state, and type of normal symbol.

Furthermore, the random numbers for determining the winning combination, the random numbers for determining the normal symbol combination, and the random numbers for determining the normal symbol variation pattern (hereinafter collectively referred to as "normal symbol random numbers") obtained when the game ball passes through gate 20 are stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area, up to a maximum of four, similar to the first to fifth forms.

In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, as shown in Figure 118, regardless of whether the game is in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), or a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2), the probability of winning in the lottery for ordinary symbols that takes place when the game ball passes through gate 20 is set to 100/100. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, there is no chance of losing in the lottery for ordinary symbols; a winning result is always obtained.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, there are two types of winning symbols (regular symbols) that are determined when a win is achieved through the drawing of regular symbols: winning symbols N1 and N2.
As shown in Figure 118, during normal gameplay, if a win occurs through the drawing of ordinary symbols, the winning symbol N1 is determined, and the probability of determining the winning symbol N1 is set to 100/100 (100%). In addition, during the low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1, if a win occurs through the drawing of ordinary symbols, either the winning symbol N1 or N2 is determined, and the probability of determining the winning symbol N1 is set to 86/87 (approximately 98.9%), and the probability of determining the winning symbol N2 is set to 1/87 (approximately 1.1%). In addition, during the low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT2, if a win occurs through the drawing of ordinary symbols, either the winning symbol N1 or N2 is determined, and the probability of determining the winning symbol N1 is set to 82/83 (approximately 98.8%), and the probability of determining the winning symbol N2 is set to 1/83 (approximately 1.2%).
In this embodiment, the winning symbols N1 and N2 do not refer to a single symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 32, but rather to one or more symbols displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 32 that trigger the control shown in Figure 118 in each game state. For example, if the display device 32 is set to display symbols A, B, and C, and when symbol A or B is determined in the time-saving game state JT1, the control of the normal symbols and normal symbols game is performed with a normal symbol stop display time of 0.2 seconds, an opening time of 0.1 seconds, an operating time of the movable piece 16b of 0.02 seconds, and an ending time of 0.2 seconds, and when symbol C is displayed in the time-saving game state JT1, the control of the normal symbols and normal symbols game is performed with a normal symbol stop display time of 0.2 seconds, an opening time of 6 seconds, an operating time of the movable piece 16b of 5.8 seconds, and an ending time of 0.2 seconds, then symbols A and B will be considered winning symbols N1, and symbol C will be considered winning symbols N2.
Furthermore, in this configuration, even if a symbol corresponds to the winning symbol N1 in a given game state, it may correspond to the winning symbol N2 instead of the winning symbol N1 in other game states. Although the probability of determining each symbol that can be displayed by the normal symbol display device 32 does not change according to the game state, by making the symbols that correspond to the winning symbols N1 and N2 different depending on the game state, a difference in the probability of determining the winning symbols N1 and N2 (see Figure 118) is created.

Once the winning symbol N1 or N2 is determined, a regular symbol variation pattern is determined to execute the variation display of the determined winning symbol (or the variation display of the regular symbol).
Specifically, as shown in Figure 118, when a winning symbol N1 is determined during normal gameplay (non-time-saving gameplay), the normal symbol variation pattern command "50H" (with a 100% probability of determination) is determined, which is associated with a normal symbol variation pattern of "10-second variation (the variation time of the normal symbols is 10 seconds)".
During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), if a winning symbol N1 is determined, either the normal symbol variation pattern command "51H" (with a probability of determination of 85%), which is associated with a normal symbol variation pattern of "0.2 seconds variation (normal symbol variation time is 0.2 seconds)", or the normal symbol variation pattern command "52H" (with a probability of determination of 15%), which is associated with a normal symbol variation pattern of "3 seconds variation (normal symbol variation time is 3 seconds)", will be determined. If a winning symbol N2 is determined, either the normal symbol variation pattern command "54H" (with a probability of determination of 80%), which is associated with a normal symbol variation pattern of "3 seconds variation", or the normal symbol variation pattern command "55H" (with a probability of determination of 20%), which is associated with a normal symbol variation pattern of "6 seconds variation", will be determined.
During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (during the time-saving game state JT2), if a winning symbol N1 is determined, the normal symbol variation pattern command "57H" (with a 100% probability of determination) is assigned to a normal symbol variation pattern of "0.5 seconds variation (normal symbol variation time is 0.5 seconds)". If a winning symbol N2 is determined, the normal symbol variation pattern command "58H" (with a 100% probability of determination) is assigned to a normal symbol variation pattern of "0.5 seconds variation".

In the pachinko machine P according to this form, the same regular symbol variation pattern is determined at the same rate regardless of the number of regular symbol reserves, but it is not limited to this, and different variation patterns may be determined depending on the number of regular symbol reserves, or the same variation pattern may be determined at different rates.
For example, if the number of reserved regular symbols is a predetermined number (for example, 2), the system may be designed so that a regular symbol variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is more likely to be determined than a regular symbol variation pattern with a relatively long variation time. On the other hand, if the number of reserved regular symbols is less than a predetermined number, the system may be designed so that a regular symbol variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is more likely to be determined than a regular symbol variation pattern with a relatively short variation time.

Once the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 starts displaying the variation of the winning symbol (flashing display of the normal symbol display device 32). After the variation time set for the normal symbol variation pattern has elapsed, the display of the variation of the winning symbol ends, and the winning symbol remains displayed in a stopped state until the normal symbol stop display time, which is the time for the winning symbol to be displayed in a stopped state, has elapsed.
As shown in Figure 118, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the display time for stopping the display is set to 0.2 seconds, regardless of whether a winning symbol N1 or a winning symbol N2 is determined.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine P in this embodiment, like the first to fifth embodiments, is equipped with a second start-up prize-winning slot opening control table (not specifically shown) that defines the control content for the operation (opening and closing) of the movable piece 16b. When the normal stop display time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 refers to the second start-up prize-winning slot opening control table and executes control to operate the movable piece 16b.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 118, when a winning symbol N1 is determined, the opening time, which is the time from when the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed until the movable piece 16b starts to operate, is set to 0.1 seconds. After this opening time has elapsed, the movable piece 16b is set to operate in a manner in which it protrudes for 0.02 seconds (hereinafter also referred to as the short operation mode). In addition, the ending time, which is the time from when the operation of the movable piece 16b ends until the next normal symbol lottery is performed (when the variation display of the next normal symbol begins), is set to 0.2 seconds.
In other words, when a winning symbol N1 is determined, after the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed, the movable piece 16b is activated (movable piece 16b protrudes) after the opening time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, and 0.02 seconds after this activation, the operation of the movable piece 16b ends (movable piece 16b retracts). Then, after 0.2 seconds have elapsed from the end of this operation, the drawing for the next normal symbol is performed.

In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, a winning symbol N1 can be determined if, during normal gameplay, a game ball launched towards the second game area 12b passes through gate 20 due to an operational error, or if a game ball launched towards the second game area 12b passes through gate 20 during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2. However, when a winning symbol N1 is determined, the time (0.02 seconds) during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the activated state is extremely short, making it impossible for a game ball that has entered the second game area 12b to enter the second starting prize entry point 16.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 118, when the winning symbol N2 is determined, the opening time is set to 6 seconds. After this opening time has elapsed, the movable piece 16b is set to operate in a manner that causes it to protrude for 5.8 seconds (hereinafter also referred to as the long operation mode). The ending time is set to 0.2 seconds.
In other words, when a winning symbol N2 is determined, the movable piece 16b is activated after the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed and the opening time of 6 seconds has elapsed. The operation of the movable piece 16b ends 5.8 seconds after this activation. Then, after the ending time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed from the end of this operation, the drawing for the next normal symbol is performed.

In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, a winning symbol N2 can be determined when a game ball launched towards the second game area 12b passes through the gate 20 during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2. When this winning symbol N2 is determined, the movable piece 16b remains activated for a longer period (5.8 seconds), allowing the game ball that enters the second game area 12b to enter the second starting prize entry point 16.

Furthermore, if a game ball passes through gate 20 during low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the winning symbol N2 is determined with a probability of 1/87. Similarly, if a game ball passes through gate 20 during low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the winning symbol N2 is determined with a probability of 1/83. Therefore, when the winning symbol N2 is determined with these probabilities, the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode. In other words, during low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, when a game ball passes through gate 20 and the winning symbol N2 is determined with a probability of 1/87, the game ball can be entered into the second starting prize entry opening 16. Also, during low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, when a game ball passes through gate 20 and the winning symbol N2 is determined with a probability of 1/83, the game ball can be entered into the second starting prize entry opening 16. Then, when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16, a minor prize is awarded through a lottery based on that entry, and a special game based on that minor prize becomes playable.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, in all of the normal game state, low probability time-saving game state LJT1, and low probability time-saving game state LJT2, a win is always achieved by drawing ordinary symbols and a winning symbol N1 or N2 is determined. However, the probability of determining each winning symbol is made different, and the operation mode of the movable piece 16b is made different depending on the type of winning symbol determined, thereby changing the difficulty of getting the game ball into the second starting prize entry opening 16.
In other words, as described above, in the normal game state, the movable piece 16b always operates in a short-acting mode when a game ball passes through the gate 20, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode with a probability of 1/87 when a game ball passes through the gate 20, and in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode with a probability of 1/83 when a game ball passes through the gate 20. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the difficulty of getting a game ball into the second starting prize entry 16 is highest in the normal game state (difficult to get the ball in), and decreases in the order of low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 → low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (easier to get the ball in).

(Summary of the game state to be set)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, when a minor win game is executed based on the determination of a minor win symbol (winning a minor win), and a special game is executed based on the fact that a predetermined number (1 ball) of game balls enter a special area during the minor win game, the game state after the special game ends is set according to the game state at a predetermined reference point (hereinafter also referred to as the reference game state), the type of minor win symbol determined, etc., as described later.
Specifically, as described later, when a minor win symbol Y1 is determined, and the game state at the time of reference was a non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) is set after the special game ends. Also, when a minor win symbol Y2 is determined, and the game state at the time of reference was a time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT1 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) is set after the special game ends, and when the game state at the time of reference was a non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) is set after the special game ends. Furthermore, if the minor winning symbol Y3 is determined, and the game state at the time of reference was a time-saving game state, then time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1) will be set after the special game ends. If the game state at the time of reference was not a time-saving game state, then time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2) will be set after the special game ends.
Conversely, if, for reasons such as not shooting to the right and failing to enter the large prize pocket 18, a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the special area during a minor win game, the special game will not be performed, and the game state corresponding to the type of minor win symbol will not be set. After the minor win game ends, the game state that was set at the end of the minor win game will continue.

In this pachinko machine P, the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2) ends when any of the following time-saving termination conditions are met: (1) the number of times the normal symbols change reaches a predetermined number of normal symbol time-saving times; (2) the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times special 2 ends; (3) the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in the long-operation mode (i.e., the number of times the winning symbol N2 is determined) reaches a predetermined number of times long-operation ends; or (4) the number of times the first special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times special 1 ends. At this point, the non-time-saving game state (normal game state) is set.

During the time-saving game mode, each time a normal symbol change occurs, the remaining number of normal symbol changes until the normal symbol time-saving count is reached (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining normal symbol changes) is updated at the time the normal symbol stop display period has elapsed. If the main CPU 101 determines, based on the update of the remaining normal symbol changes, that the normal symbol changes have reached the normal symbol time-saving count, it terminates the time-saving game mode at that point.

Furthermore, during the time-saving game state, when the movable piece 16b is activated in the long-operation mode based on the determination of the winning symbol N2, the remaining number of activations of the movable piece 16b in the long-operation mode until the long-operation completion count is reached (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining activation count) is updated. If the main CPU 101 determines, based on the update of the remaining activation count, that the number of activations of the movable piece 16b in the long-operation mode has reached the long-operation completion count, it terminates the time-saving game state at that point.

Furthermore, during the time-saving game state, in the special symbol variation stop process executed when the variation display of special symbols ends, the remaining number of variations of the first special symbol until the number of special symbol 1 ends (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining number of special symbol 1 variations) or the remaining number of variations of the second special symbol until the number of special symbol 2 ends (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining number of special symbol 2 variations) is updated according to the type of special symbol whose variation display has ended (first special symbol, second special symbol). If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of variations of the first special symbol has reached the number of special symbol 1 ends due to the update of the remaining number of special symbol 1 variations, or that the number of variations of the second special symbol has reached the number of special symbol 2 ends due to the update of the remaining number of special symbol 2 variations, the time-saving game state that was set will end at this point.

In the pachinko machine P of this configuration, the point in time before the update of the remaining special symbol variation count (1 or 2) is performed during the special symbol variation stop processing described above is defined as the reference point. Then, as described above, when a minor win symbol is determined, the game state at that reference point (game state at the time of reference) is referenced, and depending on the type of minor win symbol determined and the game state at the time of reference, the game state after the end of the special game is set to either the time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1) or the time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this configuration, the main RAM 103 is equipped with a normal time-saving count storage area, where the remaining normal time-saving counts are stored (set). In addition, the main RAM 103 is equipped with a special 1 completion count storage area and a special 2 completion count storage area instead of the time-saving count storage area of the fifth configuration, etc. The remaining special 1 counts are stored in the special 1 completion count storage area, and the remaining special 2 counts are stored in the special 2 completion count storage area. Furthermore, the main RAM 103 is equipped with a long operation completion count storage area, where the remaining operation counts are stored.

Specifically, when a time-saving game state is set, the initial value of the remaining number of normal symbol spins corresponding to the set time-saving game state (100 spins for time-saving game state JT1, and 120 spins for time-saving game state JT2) is stored in the normal symbol time-saving spin count memory area. Then, each time the normal symbol spinning display is executed, the value stored in the normal symbol time-saving spin count memory area is updated (decremented by 1). As a result, the value stored in the normal symbol time-saving spin count memory area becomes the remaining number of normal symbol spins (the number of normal symbol spins remaining until the set time-saving game state ends).
Furthermore, when a time-saving game state is set, the initial value for the remaining special 1 spin count is stored in the special 1 spin count storage area, which corresponds to the type of time-saving game state set (7 spins for time-saving game state JT1, and 10,000 spins for time-saving game state JT2). The initial value for the remaining special 2 spin count is stored in the special 2 spin count storage area, which corresponds to the type of time-saving game state set (1 spin for either time-saving game state JT1 or JT2). Then, each time the first special symbol spinning display is executed, the value stored in the special 1 spin count storage area is updated (decremented by 1), and each time the second special symbol spinning display is executed, the value stored in the special 2 spin count storage area is updated (decremented by 1). As a result, the value stored in the Special 1 End Count Storage Area becomes the remaining Special 1 Variation Count (the remaining number of variations of the 1st Special Symbol until the current time-saving game state ends), and the value stored in the Special 2 End Count Storage Area becomes the remaining Special 2 Variation Count (the remaining number of variations of the 2nd Special Symbol until the current time-saving game state ends).
Furthermore, when a time-saving game state is set, the initial value of the remaining number of operations is stored in the long operation completion count memory area, which corresponds to the type of time-saving game state set (2 times for time-saving game state JT1, and 1 time for time-saving game state JT2). Then, each time a winning symbol N2 is determined and the movable piece 16b operates according to the long operation mode, the value stored in the long operation completion count memory area is updated (decremented by 1). As a result, the value stored in the long operation completion count memory area becomes the remaining number of operations (the remaining number of operations of the movable piece 16 according to the long operation mode until the set time-saving game state ends).

In this embodiment, the time-saving game state ends when the number of times the normal symbols change reaches the normal symbol time-saving count, but this is not the only way to do so. In this embodiment, the probability of winning through the normal symbol lottery is 1/1, so for example, the time-saving game state may be terminated when the number of times the movable piece 16b is activated based on that win reaches the normal symbol time-saving count. Furthermore, the termination of the time-saving game state may be performed at either the start or end of the normal symbol change (or the start or end of the movable piece 16b's operation), as long as the playability of this embodiment is ensured.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-saving game state is terminated when the number of times the movable piece 16b is operated in the long-acting mode reaches the number of times the long-acting mode ends, but it is not limited to this. In this embodiment, the movable piece 16b is operated in the long-acting mode when the winning symbol N2 is displayed in a stopped position, so the time-saving game state may be terminated when the number of times the winning symbol N2 has been determined reaches the number corresponding to the number of times the long-acting mode ends, at the time the winning symbol N2 is displayed in a stopped position.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-saving game state is terminated when the number of rotations of the second special symbol reaches the number of times special 2 ends (as described later, both time-saving game states JT1 and JT2 are 1 time each), but it is not limited to this. In this embodiment, during the time-saving game state, if the game balls are launched into the second game area 12b as instructed, the game balls can enter the second starting prize slot 16. Also, since the probability of winning a minor prize through the win/fail lottery based on the random number of the second special symbol is 1/1, if a game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16 and the rotation display of the second special symbol is performed, the minor prize game will always be executed, and the special game will also be executed in effect. Therefore, instead of terminating the time-saving game state based on the number of rotations of the second special symbol, the time-saving game state may be terminated when the number of executions of the minor prize game (number of times the special electric mechanism is operated) reaches the number corresponding to the number of times special 2 ends. In this way, even if a game ball is launched into the first game area 12a while in the time-saving game state, and the game ball enters the first starting prize entry 15, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, the time-saving game state can be terminated by the execution of the minor win game, which effectively leads to the execution of a special game. In other words, the process for terminating the time-saving game state can be made common whether a win/fail lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number or when a minor win is achieved in a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, thereby reducing the processing load on hardware resources such as the CPU and RAM.

The following provides a more detailed explanation of how to set the game state.
(1) When a minor win is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) and the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, in this case the game state when the display of the minor win symbol Y1 stops is a non-time-saving game state, and therefore the reference time game state (the game state at the time before the remaining special 1 spin count or remaining special 2 spin count is updated in the special symbol spin stop processing) is also a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, when the minor win symbol Y1 is determined and the reference time game state is a non-time-saving game state (1-S1 in Figure 119(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area and a special game is executed during the minor win game based on the said determination, the game state after the end of the special game is set to time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1) (see Figure 119(b)).
In this configuration, if, in the time-saving game states JT1 and JT2 described later, an irregular situation occurs in which, despite instructions to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b, the game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a, the game ball enters the first starting prize entry 15, and a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, resulting in the determination of the minor win symbol Y1, the game state is set to the same state as when the minor win symbol Y1 is determined during the non-time-saving game state described above.

(2) When a minor win is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1), and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, when the time-saving game state JT1 is set, the number of normal time-saving rounds (100 rounds) is stored in the normal time-saving rounds memory area, the number of special 1 rounds (7 rounds) is stored in the special 1 rounds completion rounds memory area, the number of special 2 rounds (1 round) is stored in the special 2 rounds completion rounds memory area, and the number of long rounds (2 rounds) is stored in the long rounds completion rounds memory area. Then, as shown in Figure 119(a), the time-saving game state JT1 ends when any of the following time-saving termination conditions are met: (1-F1) the number of times the normal symbols change reaches the normal symbol time-saving number (100 times) mentioned above; (1-F2) the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches the special 2 termination number (1 time) mentioned above; (1-F3) the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in the long operation mode reaches the long operation termination number (2 times) mentioned above; or (1-F4) the number of times the first special symbol changes reaches the special 1 termination number (7 times) mentioned above. When the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, the game state is changed to the normal game state.
In addition, in the shortened play state JT1, the player is instructed to launch the game ball towards the second game area 12b. If the player launches the game ball towards the second game area 12b in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will not enter the first starting prize entry point 15. Therefore, the shortened play end condition (1-F4) will basically not be met. In the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that the shortened play end condition (1-F4) is not met in the shortened play state JT1.

During the shortened play state JT1, if the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b according to the above instructions, the game ball will pass through gate 20 and a draw for a regular symbol will be performed. As described above, a win is always guaranteed in the draw for a regular symbol, and if the winning symbol N2 is determined during the shortened play state JT1, the movable piece 16b will operate in a long-acting mode, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry opening 16 (see Figure 118). When the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode, if the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball will always enter the second starting prize entry opening 16 and a win/loss draw based on the second special symbol random number will be performed. In this win/loss draw, a minor win is always guaranteed, and the minor win symbol Y2 may be determined (see Figure 116(a)). When the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined, a 0.5-second variation pattern is determined (see Figure 117(b)). Therefore, the variation display of the minor winning symbol Y2 (second special symbol) is shown for the duration of the 0.5-second variation.

Here, before the number of regular symbol variations reaches the number of regular symbol time-saving rounds (when the time-saving termination condition (1-F1) has not been met), the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode upon the determination of the first winning symbol N2, and at this time, if the game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16 and the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined, the special symbol game (win/loss lottery, display of special symbol variation) and the regular symbol game (regular symbol lottery, display of regular symbol variation, operation of movable piece 16b) are performed separately and independently. Therefore, even while the variation of the minor winning symbol Y2 is being displayed, if the game ball passes through the gate 20, the lottery for the regular symbol will be performed.
However, while the variation time of the minor win symbol Y2 (the variation pattern of "0AH") is 0.5 seconds, at least 0.6 seconds are required from the time the movable piece 16b operates in a long-running mode, the time when the game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16 and the variation display of the second special symbol begins, until the operation of the movable piece 16b ends and the ending time begins, until the next drawing for the regular symbol takes place and the time for the regular symbol to stop display elapses (see Figure 118). Therefore, no new triggers occur that update the various counts of the time-saving termination conditions related to the regular symbols before the variation display of the minor win symbol Y2 stops. Furthermore, it is highly unlikely that the winning symbol N2 will be determined again based on the lottery of the regular symbols and the movable piece 16b will operate in a long-acting mode (because the minimum variation time for the winning symbol N2 is 3 seconds, and the termination condition regarding the number of variations of the special symbol is met during the variation display of the regular symbols, resulting in a non-time-saving game state, the determined winning symbol N2 is treated as the winning symbol N1 during the non-time-saving game state).
In this case, when the display of the minor winning symbol Y2 stops, unless the winning symbol N2 is determined at the timing when the number of normal symbol spins reaches the normal symbol time-saving spin count (100 spins), the number of normal symbol spins will not reach the normal symbol time-saving spin count (100 spins), and the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in the long-operation mode will be 1, and the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in the long-operation mode will not reach the long-operation end count (2 spins). Therefore, at the reference point mentioned above (the point in time before the remaining special 1 spin count or remaining special 2 spin count is updated in the special symbol spin stop processing), neither of the time-saving end conditions (1-F1) and (1-F3) are met.

Based on the above, in the above case, the display of the minor winning symbol Y2 stops, and at the reference point before the remaining 2 special symbol variations are updated in the special symbol variation stop processing, none of the time-saving termination conditions (1-F1) to (1-F4) are met, and the game state at the time of reference becomes the time-saving game state (time-saving game state JT1).
Therefore, when a minor win symbol Y2 is determined and the game state at the time of reference becomes a time-saving game state (1-S2 in Figure 119(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination and a special game is executed, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1) (see Figure 119(b)).
In the above case, although the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state, the remaining number of special 2 spins is updated immediately after the reference, causing the number of spins in the second special symbol to reach the number of special 2 completions (1), and the time-saving termination condition (1-F2) is met. As a result, the game state is set to the non-time-saving game state at that point. In other words, the non-time-saving game state is maintained from the time the remaining number of special 2 spins is updated until the special game based on the execution of the minor win game ends.

In rare cases, for example, if the number of spins for the regular symbols reaches 100 (with 1 spin remaining), and the winning symbol N2 is determined by the regular symbol lottery, and the game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16, determining the minor winning symbol Y2, then when the spinning display of the minor winning symbol Y2 stops, the number of spins for the regular symbols reaches the number of spins for the regular symbol time-saving mode (100 spins). As a result, the time-saving mode termination condition (1-F1) is met, the time-saving mode game state JT1 ends, and the non-time-saving mode game state is set, so the reference time game state becomes the non-time-saving mode game state.
Therefore, when a minor win symbol Y2 is determined and the reference game state is a non-time-saving game state (2-S1 in Figure 119(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination and a special game is executed, the game state after the end of the special game is set to time-saving game state JT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2).

Furthermore, if the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode upon the determination of the first winning symbol N2, but the game ball does not enter the second starting prize slot 16 at this time, and before the number of normal symbol changes reaches the normal time-saving count, the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode upon the determination of the second winning symbol N2, and the game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16 at this time, determining the minor winning symbol Y2, then when the display of the minor winning symbol Y2 stops, the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in the long-acting mode becomes 2, and the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in the long-acting mode reaches the long-acting end count (2). As a result, the time-saving end condition (1-F3) is met, the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, so the reference time game state becomes the non-time-saving game state.
Therefore, when a minor win symbol Y2 is determined and the reference game state is a non-time-saving game state (2-S1 in Figure 119(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination and a special game is executed, the game state after the end of the special game is set to time-saving game state JT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2).
Furthermore, in order to prevent the game from being played in a way that attempts to intentionally avoid entering the second starting prize slot 16 with the game ball when the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode due to the determination of the first winning symbol N2, and instead aims for the second winning symbol N2, thereby setting the game state after the end of the special game to the shortened game state JT2, the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode, which is the shortened game end condition (1-F3), may be set to three or more. Doing so makes it difficult to execute the aforementioned strategy.

Furthermore, in the lottery for regular symbols conducted when the game ball passes through gate 20, either winning symbol N1 or N2 is determined. However, since the probability of determining winning symbol N2, which corresponds to the long operation mode that allows the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry point 16 during the time-saving game state JT1, is 1/87 (see Figure 118), it is not guaranteed that winning symbol N2 will be determined before the number of regular symbol variations reaches the normal time-saving number (100 times). If the number of regular symbol variations reaches the normal time-saving number without a winning symbol N2 being determined, the time-saving termination condition (1-F1) is met, the time-saving game state JT1 ends, and the non-time-saving game state is set.

(3) When a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1) and the minor win symbol Y3 is determined As described above, when the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode based on the determination of the winning symbol N2 during the time-saving game state JT1, if the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball will always enter the second starting prize entry 16 and a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number will be held. In this win/fail lottery, a minor win is always determined and the minor win symbol Y3 may be determined (see Figure 116(a)). When the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, a variation pattern of 60 seconds or 120 seconds is determined (see Figure 117(b)), and the variation display of the minor win symbol Y3 (second special symbol) is shown for the duration of the variation time of 60 seconds or 120 seconds.

Here, since the variation time of the minor winning symbol Y3 is 60 seconds or 120 seconds, multiple variation displays and stops of the regular symbols may occur before the variation display of the minor winning symbol Y3 stops, and the time-saving termination condition (1-F1) for the number of variation counts of the regular symbols may be met by the reference point before the remaining 2 variation counts are updated in the special symbol variation stop processing. Also, if the winning symbol N2 is determined again during the 60-second or 120-second variation display of the minor winning symbol Y3, the second operation of the movable piece 16b in a long-operation mode may occur, and the time-saving termination condition (1-F3) for the number of operation counts of the movable piece 16 may be met.
In that case, depending on the number of times the regular symbols have been displayed and stopped before the display of the small winning symbol Y3 stops, the number of times the regular symbols have been displayed may have reached the number of regular symbol time-saving rounds (100 rounds) at the time the display of the small winning symbol Y3 stops. In this case, the time-saving round termination condition (1-F1) is met, the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, so the reference time game state becomes the non-time-saving game state.
Therefore, when a minor win symbol Y3 is determined and the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state (2-S2 in Figure 119(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area and a special game is executed during the minor win game based on the determination, the game state after the end of the special game is set to time-saving game state JT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) (see Figure 119(b)).

Furthermore, if the winning symbol N2 is determined and the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode before the fluctuation display of the minor winning symbol Y3 stops, and the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode reaches the number of times the long-acting mode ends (2 times) at the time the fluctuation display of the minor winning symbol Y3 stops, the time-saving termination condition (1-F3) is met, the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, so the reference time game state becomes the non-time-saving game state.
Therefore, when a minor win symbol Y3 is determined and the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state (2-S2 in Figure 119(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area and a special game is executed during the minor win game based on the determination, the game state after the end of the special game is set to time-saving game state JT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) (see Figure 119(b)).

In contrast, if, at the time the display of the small winning symbol Y3 stops, the number of times the normal symbols have changed has not reached the normal symbol time-saving round (100 rounds), and the number of times the movable piece 16b has operated in the long-operation mode has not reached the long-operation end round (2 rounds), then none of the time-saving end conditions (1-F1) to (1-F4) are met, and the reference game state becomes the time-saving game state (time-saving game state JT1).
Therefore, when a minor win symbol Y3 is determined and the game state at the time of reference becomes a time-saving game state (1-S3 in Figure 119(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination and a special game is executed, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1) (see Figure 119(b)).
In the above case, although the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state, the remaining number of special 2 spins is updated immediately after the reference, causing the number of spins in the second special symbol to reach the number of special 2 completions (1), and the time-saving termination condition (1-F2) is met. As a result, the game state is set to the non-time-saving game state at that point. In other words, the non-time-saving game state is maintained from the time the remaining number of special 2 spins is updated until the special game based on the execution of the minor win game ends.

Furthermore, if the movable piece 16b operates in a long-duration mode upon the determination of the first winning symbol N2, but the game ball does not enter the second starting prize slot 16 at this time, and before the number of normal symbol changes reaches the normal time-saving count, then the movable piece 16b operates in a long-duration mode upon the determination of the second winning symbol N2, and the game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16 at this time, determining the minor winning symbol Y3, then, similar to the case where the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined as described above, the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in long-duration mode reaches the long-duration termination count (2 times) when the display of the minor winning symbol Y3 stops changing. As a result, the time-saving termination condition (1-F3) is met, the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, so the reference time game state becomes the non-time-saving game state.
Therefore, when a minor win symbol Y3 is determined and the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state (2-S2 in Figure 119(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area and a special game is executed during the minor win game based on the determination, the game state after the end of the special game is set to time-saving game state JT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2).

(4) If a minor win is achieved by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2) and the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, when the time-saving game state JT2 is set, the number of normal time-saving rounds (120 rounds) is stored in the normal time-saving rounds memory area, the number of special 1 rounds (10,000 rounds) is stored in the special 1 rounds completion rounds memory area, the number of special 2 rounds (1 round) is stored in the special 2 rounds completion rounds memory area, and the number of long rounds (1 round) is stored in the long rounds completion rounds memory area. Then, as shown in Figure 119(a), the time-saving game state JT2 ends when any of the following time-saving termination conditions are met: (2-F1) the number of times the normal symbols change reaches the above-mentioned normal symbol time-saving number (120 times); (2-F2) the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches the above-mentioned special 2 termination number (1 time); (2-F3) the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in the long operation mode reaches the above-mentioned long operation termination number (1 time); or (2-F4) the number of times the first special symbol changes reaches the above-mentioned special 1 termination number (10,000 times). When the time-saving game state JT2 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, the game state is changed to the normal game state.
Furthermore, even in the shortened play state JT2, the player is instructed to launch the game ball towards the second game area 12b. If the player launches the game ball towards the second game area 12b in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will not enter the first starting prize entry point 15. Therefore, the shortened play end condition (2-F4) will basically not be met. In the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that the shortened play end condition (2-F4) is not met in the shortened play state JT2.

During the shortened play state JT2, if the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b according to the instructions above, the game ball will pass through gate 20 and a draw for a regular symbol will be performed. As described above, a win is always guaranteed in the draw for a regular symbol, and if the winning symbol N2 is determined during the shortened play state JT2, the movable piece 16b will operate in a long-acting mode, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry opening 16 (see Figure 118). When the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode, if the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball will always enter the second starting prize entry opening 16 and a win/loss draw based on the second special symbol random number will be performed. In this win/loss draw, a minor win is always guaranteed, and either the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined (see Figure 116(a)), and the variation display of the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is executed.

Here, before the number of normal symbol variations reaches the normal symbol time reduction count (when the time reduction termination condition (2-F1) is not met), the movable piece 16b operates in long-acting mode when the first winning symbol N2 is determined, and at this time the game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16 and the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined, the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in long-acting mode becomes 1, and the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in long-acting mode reaches the long-acting termination count (1). As a result the time reduction termination condition (2-F3) is met, the time reduction game state JT2 ends and the non-time reduction game state is set, so the reference time game state becomes the non-time reduction game state.
Therefore, when a minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, and the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state ((2-S1) or (2-S2) in Figure 119(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination and a special game is executed, the game state after the end of the special game is set to time-saving game state JT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) (see Figure 119(b)).

Furthermore, in the lottery for regular symbols conducted when the game ball passes through gate 20, either winning symbol N1 or N2 is determined. However, since the probability of determining winning symbol N2, which corresponds to the long operation mode that allows the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry point 16 during the time-saving game state JT2, is 1/83 (see Figure 118), it is not guaranteed that winning symbol N2 will be determined before the number of regular symbol variations reaches the normal time-saving number (120 times). If the number of regular symbol variations reaches the normal time-saving number without a winning symbol N2 being determined, the time-saving termination condition (2-F1) is met, the time-saving game state JT2 ends, and the non-time-saving game state is set.

(Gameplay of the pachinko machine P in this form)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, as described above, the game progresses with one of the following states set: normal game state (non-time-saving game state), low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), or low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2).

When a player starts playing, the game is usually set to the normal game state. During the normal game state, as described above, the game ball is launched towards the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed shooting). Also, as long as left-handed shooting is being performed, the game ball has the potential to enter only the first starting prize entry point 15, so during the normal game state, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize entry point 15. In this win/loss lottery, there is a possibility of winning a minor prize (see Figure 116(a)).
When a minor win is achieved, the minor win symbol Y1 is determined (see Figure 116(a)). During the minor win game based on this determination, if a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area, a special game is executed. In this special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y1, two round games are executed (three times in total including the minor win game), and approximately 450 prize balls can be won. After the special game ends, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) is set (see Figures 119(b) and 120).

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, as described above, the game balls are launched (shot to the right) towards the second game area 12b. As long as the balls are shot to the right, they pass through gate 20 with a high probability, and based on this passage, a lottery for normal symbols is held to determine either the winning symbol N1 or N2 (see Figure 118). If the winning symbol N1 is determined, the movable piece 16b operates in a short-acting mode, and the game ball does not enter the second starting prize entry point 16. However, if the winning symbol N2 is determined, the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry point 16.

Furthermore, if the number of spins for the regular symbols reaches the number of spins for the regular symbol time-saving mode (100 spins) without the winning symbol N2 (with a probability of being determined at 1/87) being determined in the regular symbol lottery, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends, and the subsequent game state is set to the normal game state.

In contrast, if the winning symbol N2 is determined before the number of normal symbol variations reaches the normal symbol time reduction count, the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode. During this operation, a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, triggering a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number. In this lottery based on the second special symbol random number, a minor win is guaranteed, and either the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined (see Figure 116(a)).

As described above, when a minor winning symbol Y2 is determined, the display of the variation of the minor winning symbol Y2 is executed. Since the variation time of this minor winning symbol Y2 is 0.5 seconds (see Figure 117(b)), except when the winning symbol N2 is determined based on the lottery of the normal symbols when the number of normal symbol variations is 100, it is almost impossible for the number of normal symbol variations to reach the normal time-saving number (100 times) (i.e., the time-saving termination condition (1-F1) to be met) before the display of the variation of the minor winning symbol Y2 stops. Furthermore, it is almost impossible for the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in the long operation mode to reach the long operation termination number (2 times) (i.e., the time-saving termination condition (1-F3) to be met). Therefore, when the display of the minor winning symbol Y2 stops and the remaining number of special symbol variations is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, none of the time-saving termination conditions (1-F1) to (1-F4) are met, and the game state at the time of reference becomes the time-saving game state (time-saving game state JT1).
Then, during the mini-win game based on the determination of the mini-win symbol Y2, if a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area, a special game is executed. In this special game, round games are played 9 times (10 times in total including the mini-win game), and approximately 1500 prize balls can be won. Also, since the reference game state is a time-saving game state, after the special game ends, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) is set again (see Figures 119(b) and 120).

On the other hand, if a minor winning symbol Y3 is determined, the variation display of the minor winning symbol Y3 is executed. Since the variation time of this minor winning symbol Y3 is 60 seconds or 120 seconds (see Figure 117(b)), there is a possibility that the number of times the normal symbols have varied will reach the normal time-saving limit (100 times) before the variation display of the minor winning symbol Y3 stops, and there is also a possibility that the number of times the movable piece 16b has been operated in the long operation mode will reach the long operation end count (2 times). Then, when the variation display of the minor winning symbol Y3 stops and before the remaining 2 special variation counts are updated in the special symbol variation stop processing, if the time-saving end condition of (1-F1) or (1-F3) is met at the reference point, the game state at the time of reference will be a non-time-saving game state, and if none of the time-saving end conditions of (1-F1) to (1-F4) are met, the game state at the time of reference will be a time-saving game state (time-saving game state JT1).
Then, during the mini-win game based on the determination of the mini-win symbol Y3, if a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area, a special game is executed. In this special game, round games are played 9 times (10 times in total including the mini-win game), and approximately 1500 prize balls can be won. Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference was a time-saving game state, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) is set again after the special game ends. If the game state at the time of reference was not a time-saving game state, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) is set after the special game ends (see Figures 119(b) and 120).

Furthermore, when the winning symbol N2 is determined based on the lottery of the regular symbols, and the minor winning symbol Y3 is determined based on the win/loss lottery using the second special symbol random number, the number of remaining regular symbol spins is more likely to reach the normal symbol time reduction count before the display of the minor winning symbol Y3 stops, and consequently, the low probability time reduction game state LJT2 (time reduction game state JT2) is more likely to be set after the special game ends.

Thus, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the player shoots to the right, passing the game ball through the gate 20 to perform a lottery for normal symbols. The goal is to determine the winning symbol N2, which will cause the movable piece 16b to operate in a long-acting mode that allows the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry 16 before the number of normal symbol variations reaches the normal time-saving mode. At the same time, the goal is to determine the minor winning symbol Y2 or Y3 by entering the game ball into the second starting prize entry 16 while the movable piece 16b is operating in the long-acting mode. If the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined, the game returns to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 after executing a special game that awards approximately 1500 prize balls. However, if the minor winning symbol Y3 is determined, the game either returns to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 after executing a special game that awards approximately 1500 prize balls (if the number of spins for the regular symbols does not reach the normal time-saving spin count before the minor winning symbol Y3's spinning display stops), or transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (if the number of spins for the regular symbols reaches the normal time-saving spin count before the minor winning symbol Y3's spinning display stops).

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the game balls are launched (shot to the right) toward the second game area 12b, similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. As long as the balls are shot to the right, they pass through gate 20 with a high probability, and based on this passage, a lottery for normal symbols is held to determine either the winning symbol N1 or N2 (see Figure 118). If the winning symbol N1 is determined, the movable piece 16b operates in a short-acting mode, and the game ball does not enter the second starting prize entry point 16. However, if the winning symbol N2 is determined, the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry point 16.

Furthermore, if the number of spins for the regular symbols reaches the number of spins for the regular symbol time-saving mode (120 spins) without the winning symbol N2 (with a probability of being determined at 1/83) being determined in the regular symbol lottery, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 ends, and the subsequent game state is set to the normal game state.

In contrast, if the winning symbol N2 is determined before the number of normal symbol variations reaches the normal symbol time reduction count, the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode. During this operation, a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, triggering a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number. In this lottery based on the second special symbol random number, a minor win is guaranteed, and either the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined (see Figure 116(a)).

As described above, when either the minor winning symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, the movable piece 16b operates in a long-run mode due to the determination of the winning symbol N2, and the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in the long-run mode reaches the number of times the long-run mode ends (1 time). Therefore, the display of the minor winning symbol Y2 or Y3 stops, and at the reference point before the remaining number of special 2 variations is updated in the special symbol variation stop processing, the time-saving termination condition (1-F3) is met and the game state at the time of reference becomes a non-time-saving game state.
Then, during the mini-win game based on the determination of the mini-win symbol Y2 or Y3, if a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area, a special game is executed. In this special game, round games are played 9 times (10 times in total including the mini-win game), and approximately 1500 prize balls can be won. Also, since the reference game state is a non-time-saving game state, after the special game ends, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) is set again (see Figures 119(b) and 120).

Thus, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the game is played by shooting to the right and passing the game ball through gate 20 to perform a lottery for normal symbols. The goal is to determine the winning symbol N2, which will be activated by the movable piece 16b in a long-acting mode that allows the game ball to enter the second starting prize slot 16 before the number of normal symbol variations reaches the normal symbol time-saving number. If the game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16 while the movable piece 16b is operating in the long-acting mode, either the minor winning symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined. In either case, the player returns to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 after executing a special game in which approximately 1500 prize balls can be won.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this form, the player mainly stays in the normal game state during gameplay. In this normal game state, the player aims to win a minor prize (winning probability: 1/200) through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number. If a minor prize is won, the player transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 via a special game that is executed based on the win.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, if the winning symbol N2 is determined by the lottery of the normal symbols before the number of normal symbol variations reaches the normal symbol time-saving number (100 times) (probability of determination: 1/87), the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode, and during the operation of this movable piece 16b, the game ball can be reliably entered into the second starting prize entry opening 16. When the game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number, and a minor win is guaranteed, determining either the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3. If the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set again through the execution of a special game in which approximately 1500 prize balls can be won. Furthermore, if a minor winning symbol Y3 is determined and the display of the minor winning symbol Y3 stops, and the number of normal symbol spins has not reached the normal symbol time-saving spin count, and the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 is maintained, the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be set again through the execution of a special game in which approximately 1500 prize balls can be won. If the number of normal symbol spins has reached the normal symbol time-saving spin count and the normal game state is set when the display of the minor winning symbol Y3 stops, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set through the execution of a special game in which approximately 1500 prize balls can be won.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, if the winning symbol N2 is determined by the lottery of the normal symbols before the number of normal symbol variations reaches the normal symbol time-saving number (120 times) (probability of determination: 1/83), the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode, and during the operation of this movable piece 16b, the game ball can be reliably entered into the second starting prize entry opening 16. When the game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number, and a minor win is guaranteed, determining either the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3. In either case, if the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set again after executing a special game in which approximately 1500 prize balls can be won.

In other words, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the probability of determining the winning symbol N2 associated with the operation of the movable piece 16b by the long-acting mode is higher than during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and the number of times the normal symbol variation ends is also higher, so there is a high possibility that the movable piece 16b will be operated by the long-acting mode.
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, if a game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16 while the movable piece 16b is operating in a long-acting mode and a minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 is set via the execution of a special game. However, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, if a game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16 while the movable piece 16b is operating in a long-acting mode and a minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is always set via the execution of a special game.
Based on the above, it can be said that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is a more advantageous game state than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Furthermore, during normal gameplay, even if a game ball passes through gate 20, the movable piece 16b will not activate due to its long-acting mode. Also, if a minor win is achieved through the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay, a special game is playable that awards approximately 450 prize balls. In contrast, if a minor win is achieved through the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a special game is playable that awards approximately 1500 prize balls. Therefore, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 can be said to be a more advantageous game state than the normal gameplay state.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, the advantage gradually increases in the order of normal game state → low probability time-saving game state LJT1 → low probability time-saving game state LJT2.

In this configuration of the pachinko machine P, the aim is to transition from the normal game state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and then to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. Furthermore, after transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the game progresses with the aim of executing a special game in which approximately 1500 prize balls can be won, and determining the winning symbol N2, which will trigger a return to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2.
Then, after transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, if the winning symbol N2 is determined repeatedly, the execution of a special game that allows players to win approximately 1500 prize balls, combined with the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, makes it possible to win a large number of prize balls in a short period of time, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this configuration, in order to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, it is necessary that the small win symbol Y3 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and that the number of normal symbol spins reaches the normal symbol end count during the display of the small win symbol Y3, thereby setting the non-time-saving game state. In other words, the display of the small win symbol Y3 during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 becomes a chance zone where the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 are potentially met, thus providing a novel gameplay experience and enhancing player interest.

Furthermore, when the number of normal symbol variations reaches the normal symbol completion count, the time-saving mode ends and a non-time-saving mode is set. In a typical pachinko machine, this would cause a sense of loss for the player. However, in this type of pachinko machine P, the non-time-saving mode is set during the variation display of the small win symbol Y3. Therefore, after the special game based on the determination of the small win symbol Y3 ends, the machine transitions to a favorable low-probability time-saving mode LJT2. This provides a novel and unique gameplay experience different from typical pachinko machines, enhancing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the fewer the remaining number of normal symbol spins when the winning symbol N2 and the minor winning symbol Y3 are determined, the more likely it is that the number of normal symbol spins will reach the normal symbol end count when the minor winning symbol Y3 stops spinning (making it easier to set a non-time-saving game state), and consequently, the more likely it is that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set after the special game ends.
In other words, the more times the regular symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the closer the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 gets to end, the higher the expectation of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 when the minor winning symbol Y3 is determined. This provides a novel gameplay experience and enhances the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the conditions for ending the time-saving mode for normal symbol games are not only (1-F1) when the number of times the normal symbols change reaches 100, which is the number of normal symbol time-saving times, but also (1-F3) when the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in the long-operation mode based on the determination of the winning symbol N2 reaches 2, which is the number of times the long operation ends.
As a result, when the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, and the movable piece 16b is operated in its first long-acting mode, a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, and a win/loss lottery is performed using the second special symbol random number to determine the minor win symbol Y3, then while the minor win symbol Y3 is being displayed, a lottery for the normal symbols is performed to determine the winning symbol N2 again, and the movable piece 16b is operated in its second long-acting mode, at this point the time-saving termination condition (1-F3) is met and the non-time-saving game state is set. Therefore, even if the number of normal symbol variations does not reach the normal symbol time-saving count while the minor win symbol Y3 is being displayed, the most advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game performed via the determination of the minor win symbol Y3 ends.
In other words, because there are multiple conditions for setting the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the expectation of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 increases, thus enhancing the player's interest. Furthermore, if the winning symbol N2 is determined while the minor winning symbol Y3 is being displayed, unlike when the number of spins of the normal symbols reaches the normal time-saving spin count, it can give the player the impression that the conditions for setting the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 have been met abruptly (the impression that the conditions have been forcibly met), thus enhancing the player's interest.

(Outline of processing in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
Next, we will explain the general outline of the processes executed by the main control board 100 in accordance with the progress of the special game, regular game, minor win game, and special game, using a flowchart, focusing on the differences from the first to fifth forms. In particular, we will describe in detail the control related to setting the game state and the control related to the regular game.
Furthermore, for processes that are the same as those in the first to fifth forms, or processes that are substantially the same as those in the first to fifth forms, and for which a person skilled in the art can understand the method of implementation in this form (how to apply it to this form), the same step numbers as in the first to fifth forms will be assigned, and explanations will be omitted in principle.

First, the process of stopping the special symbol variation, which is executed when the special symbol variation display ends, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 121.
The processing in steps 1000 to 1003 is the same as the processing in steps 1000 to 1003 of the special symbol variation stop processing in the first form (see Figure 37), so the explanation is omitted here.
In step 1003-31, which follows the execution of step 1003 described above, the main CPU 101 stores the game state at that time as the reference game state in a predetermined memory area of the main RAM 103. For example, if the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) is set at that time, that fact is stored in the predetermined memory area, and if the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) is set at that time, that fact is stored in the predetermined memory area. Also, if the time-saving termination conditions for normal gameplay ((1-F1), (1-F3), (2-F1), (2-F3)) are met and the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) is set at that time, that fact is stored in the predetermined memory area. Then, the process proceeds to step 1003-32.

In step 1003-32, the main CPU 101 executes a remaining variation count update process to update the remaining special variation counts for 1 and 2. Then, the process proceeds to step 1003-33.
In step 1003-33, game state control processing related to setting the game state is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 1004, which is executed to set the stop display time.

The processing in steps 1004 to 1005 is identical to the processing in steps 1004 to 1005 of the special symbol variation stop processing in the first form (see Figure 37), therefore, the explanation is omitted here.

Next, the remaining number of spins update process in step 1003-32 of the special symbol variation stop process described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 122.
In step 1010, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2), that is, whether a time-saving game state is being set. If it determines that the game is not in a time-saving game state (i.e., it is in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state)), it terminates the remaining spin count update process. On the other hand, if it determines that the game is in a time-saving game state, it proceeds to step 1011.
In step 1010-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped special symbol is the first special symbol or not. If the stopped special symbol is not the first special symbol (i.e., it is the second special symbol), the process proceeds to step 1011-2. On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol is the first special symbol, the process proceeds to step 1011-1.

In step 1011-1, the main CPU 101 decrements (updates) the remaining number of special fluctuations by 1. Then, it terminates the remaining fluctuation count update process.
Furthermore, in step 1011-2, which is followed if the special symbol displayed in step 1010-1 above was not the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 decrements (updates) the remaining number of special spins by 1. Then, the remaining spin count update process is terminated.

Next, the game state control process in step 1003-33 of the special symbol variation stop process described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 123.
In step 1030, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state or not. If it determines that it is not a time-saving game state, it terminates the game state control process. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a time-saving game state, it proceeds to step 1031-2.
In step 1031-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time-saving termination conditions related to special symbols have been met. Specifically, if the current state is low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, it determines whether the time-saving termination conditions (1-F2) or (1-F4) have been met. If the current state is low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, it determines whether the time-saving termination conditions (2-F2) or (2-F4) have been met. If it determines that the time-saving termination conditions related to special symbols have not been met, it terminates the game state control process. On the other hand, if it determines that the time-saving termination conditions related to special symbols have been met, it proceeds to step 1032.

In step 1032, the main CPU 101 executes a normal game state setting process to terminate the currently set time-saving game state and set the game to a normal game state (non-time-saving game state). Specifically, it turns off both the first time-saving game flag, which indicates that time-saving game state JT1 is set, and the second time-saving game flag, which indicates that time-saving game state JT2 is set, and clears the normal time-saving count storage area, the special 1 end count storage area, the special 2 end count storage area, and the long operation end count storage area. As a result, the currently set low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 ends, and the game state (non-time-saving game state) is set. Then, the game state control process ends.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a special game termination process (step 706 of the special symbol-related control process (see Figure 27)) is executed after the special game ends. However, since this process is almost identical to the special game termination process in the third embodiment (see Figure 93), an explanation is omitted here.
In this special game termination process, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time-saving game flag if the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state and the special symbol displayed after stopping is the minor win symbol Y1, or if the game state at the time of reference is a time-saving game state and the special symbol displayed after stopping is the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3. In both cases, it sets the normal time-saving game count to "100" (initial value of remaining normal symbol fluctuation counts), sets the special 1 termination count to "7" (initial value of remaining special 1 fluctuation counts) in the special 1 termination count storage area, sets the special 2 termination count to "1" (initial value of remaining special 2 fluctuation counts) in the special 2 termination count storage area, and sets the long operation termination count to "2" (initial value of remaining operation counts) in the long operation termination count storage area. This sets the low probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state and the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a minor win symbol Y2 or Y3, the main CPU 101 turns on the second time-saving game flag, sets the normal time-saving game count to "120" (initial value of remaining normal symbol fluctuation counts) in the normal time-saving game count memory area, sets the special 1 end count to "10000" (initial value of remaining special 1 fluctuation counts) in the special 1 end count memory area, sets the special 2 end count to "1" (initial value of remaining special 2 fluctuation counts) in the special 2 end count memory area, and sets the long operation end count to "1" (initial value of remaining operation counts) in the long operation end count memory area. This sets the low probability time-saving game state LJT2.

Next, the normal symbol variation start process (step 1401 of the normal symbol-related control process (see Figure 41)), which is executed when the normal symbol variation display starts, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 124.
The processing in steps 1500 to 1503 is the same as the processing in steps 1500 to 1503 of the normal symbol variation start processing in the first form (see Figure 42), so the explanation is omitted here.
In step 1504, which follows the execution of step 1503 described above, the main CPU 101 executes a winning determination process to derive the result of the normal symbol lottery. This process is almost the same as the process in step 1504 of the normal symbol variation start process in the first form, so an explanation is omitted here. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, a losing lottery result is never derived in this winning determination process, and a winning lottery result is always derived. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1504-1.

In step 1504-1, the main CPU 101 executes a normal symbol determination process to determine the type of normal symbol based on the normal symbol determination table (not shown in the diagram), the normal symbol determination random number stored in the processing area in step 1503, and the lottery result (in this case, a win) derived in step 1504. Since a win lottery result is derived in step 1504, either the winning symbol N1 or N2 is determined in this normal symbol determination process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1504-2.
In step 1504-2, the main CPU 101 stores a normal symbol determination command, which indicates the type of normal symbol determined in step 1504-1, in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, information related to the determined type of normal symbol is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 when the normal symbol variation begins. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1504-3.

In step 1504-3, the main CPU 101 executes a normal symbol variation pattern determination process to determine a normal symbol variation pattern (normal symbol variation pattern command) based on the normal symbol variation pattern determination table (not shown in particular), the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number stored in the processing area in step 1503, and the type of normal symbol determined in step 1504-1. The main CPU 101 also stores the determined normal symbol variation pattern command in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, information related to the determined normal symbol variation pattern is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 when the normal symbol variation starts. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1505.
Since the processing in steps 1505 to 1508 is the same as the processing in steps 1505 to 1508 of the normal symbol variation start processing in the first form (see Figure 42), the explanation is omitted here.

Next, the post-stop processing for normal symbols (step 1403 of the normal symbol-related control processing (see Figure 41)), which is the processing after the display of the normal symbols stops, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 125.
The processing in steps 1700 to 1701 is the same as the processing in steps 1700 to 1701 of the normal symbol variation start processing in the first form (see Figure 45), so the explanation is omitted here.
In step 1701-1, which follows the execution of step 1701 described above, the main CPU 101 decrements (updates) the remaining number of normal rotation changes stored in the normal rotation time reduction count memory area by 1. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1701-2.

In step 1701-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state and whether the time-saving termination conditions ((1-F1), (2-F3)) related to the number of normal symbol variations have been met because the remaining normal symbol variation count was decremented by 1 in step 1701-1. If it determines that the current game state is not a time-saving game state (i.e., it is a non-time-saving game state) or that the time-saving termination conditions related to the number of normal symbol variations have not been met, it proceeds to step 1701-4. On the other hand, if it determines that the current game state is a time-saving game state and that the time-saving termination conditions related to the number of normal symbol variations have been met, it proceeds to the next step 1701-3.
In step 1701-3, the main CPU 101 executes the normal game state setting process. This normal game state setting process is the same as in step 1032 described above, so its explanation is omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1701-4.

In step 1701-4, the main CPU 101 checks the game state at the start of the variation of the regular symbols. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1701-5.
In step 1701-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped display of the normal symbol is a winning symbol N1 or N2. If it determines that it is neither a winning symbol N1 nor N2, it terminates the normal symbol stop processing. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a winning symbol N1 or N2, it proceeds to the next step 1701-6. In this pachinko machine P, a winning symbol N1 or N2 is always determined when a game ball passes through gate 20, so the process proceeds to step 1701-6.

In step 1701-6, the main CPU 101 refers to the second start prize entry opening control table and obtains control data (opening time, operation mode (long operation mode or short operation mode), operation time, ending time) related to the operation of the movable piece 16b according to the game state confirmed in step 1701-4 above and the type of normal symbol that has stopped and been displayed. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1701-7.
In step 1701-7, the main CPU 101 executes a movable piece control process to activate the movable piece 16b based on the control data acquired in step 1701-6 described above. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1701-8.

In step 1701-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped displaying normal symbol is a winning symbol N2. If it determines that it is not a winning symbol N2 (i.e., it is a winning symbol N1, in other words, the movable piece 16b was activated by a short action), it terminates the normal symbol stop processing. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a winning symbol N2 (i.e., the movable piece 16b was activated by a long action), it proceeds to the next step 1701-9.
In step 1701-9, the main CPU 101 decrements (updates) the remaining number of operations stored in the long operation completion count memory area by 1. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1701-10.

In step 1701-10, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state and whether the time-saving termination conditions for the long operation mode ((1-F3), (2-F3)) have been met because the remaining number of operations was decremented by 1 in step 1701-9. If it determines that the current game state is not a time-saving game state, or that the time-saving termination conditions for the long operation mode have not been met, it terminates the normal symbol stop processing. On the other hand, if it determines that the current game state is a time-saving game state and that the time-saving termination conditions for the long operation mode have been met, it proceeds to the next step 1701-11.
In step 1701-11, the main CPU 101 executes the normal game state setting process. This normal game state setting process is the same as in step 1032 described above, so its explanation is omitted. Then, the normal symbol stop processing is completed. Once the normal symbol stop processing is completed (when the operation of the movable piece 16b is completed), the normal symbol variation start processing described above becomes available.

In this embodiment, the game state at the start of the variation is stored in step 1507 of the normal symbol variation start processing, which is executed when the variation display of the normal symbols begins. This stored game state is then confirmed in step 1701-4 of the normal symbol stop processing, which is executed when the variation display of the normal symbols stops. Based on the confirmed game state, control is then performed regarding the operation of the movable piece 16b. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, instead of confirming the game state at the start of the variation stored in step 1507, step 1701-4 may confirm the game state at the time of step 1701-4 and perform control regarding the operation of the movable piece 16b based on the confirmed game state.
In this configuration, the game state during special gameplay is set to a non-time-saving game state. Here, if the game state stored in step 1507 is checked in step 1701-4 and the operation of the movable piece 16b is controlled based on the checked game state, when the display of the regular symbols that started during special gameplay stops after the special game has ended and the time-saving game state has been set, the game state checked in step 1701-4 will be a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, even if a winning symbol N2 has been determined, it will be treated as a winning symbol N1 in a non-time-saving game state, and the movable piece 16b will operate in a short-operation mode. On the other hand, if the game state at that time is checked in step 1701-4 and the operation of the movable piece 16b is controlled based on the checked game state, when the display of the regular symbols that started during the special game stops after the special game has ended and the time-saving game state has been set, the game state checked in step 1701-4 will be the time-saving game state, and if the winning symbol N2 has been determined, the movable piece 16b will operate in the long-operation mode. This prevents a situation where the winning symbol N2 that has been determined is wasted.

(Overview of various effects in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
Next, we will explain the various effects performed in the pachinko machine P according to this form, focusing on the variable effects that can notify the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number or the result of the lottery for the regular symbols, and the various effects that are performed when each game state is set.

(Overview of the variable animation)
In the pachinko machine P according to this form, as described above, in the normal game state, the game aims to win a minor prize through a win/loss lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize entry 15, and a variation performance (hereinafter also referred to as the normal variation performance) is executed in which the result of the win/loss lottery is announced by the display mode of the performance symbol 50 during the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol) based on the first special symbol random number. In contrast, in the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2, the game aims to determine the winning symbol N2 (a winning symbol in which the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode, making it possible for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry 16) based on the passage of game balls through the gate 20, and a variation performance (hereinafter also referred to as the time-saving variation performance) is executed in which the result of the determination of the winning symbol is announced by the display mode of the performance symbol 50 during the variation display of the normal symbol.
As mentioned above, when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16, a minor win is always determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and either the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined. In the pachinko machine P according to this form, the above-mentioned variation effects are not executed during the variation display of the minor win symbol Y2 in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and during the variation display of the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. In contrast, during the variation display of the minor win symbol Y3 in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a variation effect (hereinafter also referred to as the Y3 variation variation effect) in the same manner as the time-saving variation effect described above is executed in conjunction with the variation display of the normal symbols that is executed during this variation display.

In all of the normal, time-saving, and Y3 variation effects, the variation of the effect symbols 50 (dummy symbols) is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a, superimposed on the background image displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21. The result of the win/loss lottery and the determination of the winning symbols can be notified to the player based on the combination of effect symbols 50 that are displayed when the variation display ends and the symbols stop (stop display pattern) (see Figures 126(c) to (d), etc.).
Specifically, in the normal game state where the normal mid-game variation effect is performed, the variation display of all effect symbols 50 begins from a state where all effect symbols 50 are stopped, coinciding with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol. Also, in the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 where the mid-time variation effect is performed, the variation display of all effect symbols 50 begins from a state where all effect symbols 50 are stopped, coinciding with the start of the variation display of the normal symbols. Furthermore, even during the variation display of the small win symbol Y3 in the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 where the Y3 variation effect is performed, the variation display of all effect symbols 50 begins from a state where all effect symbols 50 are stopped, coinciding with the start of the variation display of the normal symbols.
Subsequently, the symbols 50 located on the left (hereinafter also referred to as the first stop symbol) stop in the following order: the symbol 50 located on the right (hereinafter also referred to as the second stop symbol), and the symbol 50 located in the center (hereinafter also referred to as the third stop symbol).

Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay is a minor win, the first, second, and third stop symbols will all be displayed as the same symbol (for example, 222, 555, etc.). This indicates that the result of the win/loss lottery mentioned above is a minor win. In the following, this stop display pattern will also be referred to as the "winning pattern."
Similarly, if a winning symbol N2 is determined based on the game ball passing through gate 20 in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2, the performance symbol 50 will stop and display according to the winning pattern (see Figures 126(d) and 127(a)). This suggests that a winning symbol N2 has been determined that allows the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry 16 based on the game ball passing through gate 20 (i.e., the game ball can be entered into the second starting prize entry 16).

Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay is a loss, at least one of the first, second, and third stop symbols will be displayed as a different symbol from the others (for example, 312, 558, 282, etc.). This indicates that the result of the win/loss lottery mentioned above is a loss. In the following, this type of stop display will also be referred to as the "non-winning pattern".
Similarly, if a winning symbol N1 is determined based on the game ball passing through gate 20 in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2, the performance symbol 50 will stop and display in a non-winning manner (not specifically shown). This suggests that, based on the game ball passing through gate 20, a winning symbol N1 has been determined that prevents the game ball from entering the second starting prize entry 16 (i.e., the game ball cannot be entered into the second starting prize entry 16).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, if the display of the regular symbols is executed during normal gameplay, or if the display of the first special symbol is executed during the low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1 or LJT2, the display of the special symbol 50 in the center of the display unit 21a will not be executed.
Therefore, for example, in normal gameplay, even if a game ball passes through gate 20 and the display of a normal symbol starts while the special effect symbol 50 is stopped, the special effect symbol 50 will remain stopped. Similarly, in low-probability time-saving gameplay state LJT1 or LJT2, even if a game ball enters the first starting entry point 15 and the display of the first special symbol starts while the special effect symbol 50 is stopped, the special effect symbol 50 will remain stopped.

Furthermore, the following are provided as performance patterns for the normal mid-game variation: a normal non-winning variation pattern where the first and second stop symbols are different (i.e., without a reach display), and the symbols stop in a non-winning configuration; a reach variation pattern where the first and second stop symbols are the same, followed by a reach development animation displaying a predetermined development animation image (not specifically shown), and then the symbols stop in either a winning or non-winning configuration; and a reach variation pattern where, after a reach display, the symbols stop in either a winning or non-winning configuration without a reach development animation.

Furthermore, each of the aforementioned performance patterns has multiple variations.
For example, each of the above-mentioned performance patterns includes a mode in which a predetermined予告 (preview) image is displayed in conjunction with the display of the changing performance symbols 50 (a mode in which a preview performance is executed), a mode in which a predetermined suggestion or notification is made when the operation button 9b is pressed (a mode in which a button operation performance is executed), and a mode in which the special effect device operates in a predetermined manner (a mode in which a special effect operation performance is executed).
Furthermore, for example, in the reach variation patterns with development and reach variation patterns without development, all of the performance symbols 50 are temporarily stopped in a predetermined stop display manner (for example, the first and second stop symbols are symbols with numbers differing by 1 and the third stop symbol is a temporary stop symbol that suggests a temporary stop) and then the variation display is resumed a predetermined number of times, after which the reach display is performed (a manner in which a pseudo-consecutive performance is executed).
Furthermore, for example, in the reach variation pattern with development, there is a mode in which, after executing a reach development sequence in which a predetermined development sequence image is displayed, the sequence switches to a reach development sequence in which a high-expectation development sequence image is displayed, which suggests that there is a higher probability of the image stopping in a winning position than the predetermined development sequence image (a mode in which a chance-up sequence is executed).
Furthermore, the aforementioned preview images, the operation patterns of the special effects devices, the number of times temporary stops are performed, and the high-probability development effects images are provided in multiple variations, each with a different probability of winning a minor prize based on the win/fail lottery using the first special symbol random number.
Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned effects, in addition to displaying images and outputting sound, the lighting device 23 (lamp) may be made to emit light in a predetermined lighting pattern or color.

Furthermore, as a performance pattern for the time-saving variation effect and the Y3 variation variation effect, a special variation pattern is provided in which the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol finish their variation display almost simultaneously and are displayed in either a winning or non-winning configuration.
Furthermore, the performance patterns for the time-saving variation effect and the Y3 variation variation effect are not limited to the special variation patterns described above, and may include multiple types of performance patterns, similar to the normal variation effect.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, although not specifically shown in the diagram, the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 is provided with a variation performance determination table that stores the corresponding modes of each performance pattern for each possible variation pattern command. Based on this variation performance determination table, the mode of the performance pattern for the variation performance is determined.
For example, when the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 receives a variation pattern command at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol during normal gameplay, it acquires a predetermined random number for the performance, and then determines the form of the performance pattern for the normal variation performance based on the acquired random number for the performance, the received variation pattern command, and the variation performance determination table described above. Then, the normal variation performance is executed according to the form of the determined performance pattern.

(Overview of background image display)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 is provided with a normal background image corresponding to the normal game state (not specifically shown), a low probability time-saving game state LJT1 corresponding to a low probability time-saving game state A (see Figures 126(b) to (h), 127(a) to (h), and 128(a) to (h)), and a low probability time-saving game state LJT2 corresponding to a low probability time-saving game state B (see Figure 127(j)). The corresponding background image is displayed on the display unit 21a during each game state.

(Overview of various effects performed when each game state is set)
Next, we will explain the general overview of the various effects that occur when the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 is set.

(1) Low probability time-saving game state LJT1
In the normal game state, if a minor win is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, a special game is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination. During this special game, special game effects are executed to enhance the special game (see Figure 126(a)). When the special game ends, a low probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, and various effects based on this setting are executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 126(b), a low probability time-saving background image A is displayed, and a low probability time-saving LJT1 setting suggestion performance is performed to indicate the setting of the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (for example, the display of a low probability time-saving LJT1 setting suggestion image that says "Entering the Chance Zone!!"), and a right-hand shooting suggestion is performed to prompt the player to shoot the game ball towards the second game area 12b (for example, the display of a right-hand shooting suggestion image that says "Shoot to the right →→→").
Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LTJ1, a countdown display of the remaining number of normal symbol variations is executed. When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, the countdown display of the remaining number of normal symbol variations is first shown (i.e., a display of "100" indicating 100 normal symbol time-saving variations corresponding to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) (see Figure 126(b)), and thereafter, each time a normal symbol variation is displayed, the above number is counted down by 1.

After that, when the game ball passes through gate 20, a time-saving variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 50) is executed (see Figure 126(c)). Also, when the winning symbol N2 is determined by the lottery of normal symbols based on this passage, the effect symbol 50 is displayed in a stopped state according to the winning pattern (see Figure 126(d)). Then, after the normal symbol stopped display time has elapsed and the opening time (6 seconds), which is the time until the movable piece 16b operates in the long-acting mode, a normal symbol winning indication effect (for example, display of a normal symbol winning indication image that says "V Chance Get!") is executed, indicating that the winning symbol N2 has been determined and the movable piece 16b has operated in the long-acting mode, making it possible for the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry 16. At the same time, an entry instruction effect (for example, display of an entry instruction image that says "Aim for the electric chute!!") is executed to encourage the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry 16 (see Figure 126(e)). The general prize winning indication and ball entry instruction effects end when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, or when the operating time of the movable piece 16b (5.8 seconds) has elapsed.
Furthermore, the regular ball winning indication and ball entry instruction effects may be executed before the opening time has elapsed (for example, when the regular ball stop display time has elapsed, or when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, etc.) has elapsed after the regular ball stop display time has elapsed).

Then, when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16 while the movable piece 16b is in operation, a win/loss lottery is performed using a second special random number based on that ball entry.
If the player wins a minor prize in this draw and the minor prize symbol Y2 is determined, after the above-mentioned regular prize winning indication and ball entry instruction indication have ended, a first special game execution indication (for example, the display of a first special game execution indication image that says "BONUS!!") will be executed, indicating that a special game consisting of 10 rounds of play in addition to the minor prize game has been decided (see Figure 126(f)). This allows the player to understand that a special game consisting of 10 rounds of play in addition to the minor prize game has been decided.
Subsequently, in conjunction with the mini-win game based on the determination of the mini-win symbol Y2, a special area entry instruction animation is performed to encourage the game balls to enter the special area (for example, displaying a special area entry instruction image that says "Aim for V!!") (see Figure 126(g)). When a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area, the special area entry instruction animation ends, and a special area entry suggestion animation is performed that indicates that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special area (for example, displaying a special area entry suggestion image that says "V!!") (see Figure 126(h)). After the mini-win game ends and the special game is performed, the special area entry suggestion animation ends, and a special game in progress animation is performed (see Figure 126(i)).
Then, once the special game ends, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set. When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, the low-probability time-saving background image A is displayed, a low-probability time-saving LJT1 setting indication effect is performed, and a right-hand shooting indication is given (see Figure 126(j)). In addition, along with the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the remaining normal number of spins countdown display is also executed (see Figure 126(j)).

On the other hand, if a minor win is achieved through the draw based on the second special random number mentioned above and the minor win symbol Y3 is determined, after the regular symbol win indication and ball entry instruction indications have finished, a chance zone entry indication indication (for example, displaying a chance zone entry indication image called "RUSH Acquisition Challenge") is executed, which suggests that a low probability time-saving game state LJT2 may be set depending on the result of the regular symbol game execution during the display of the minor win symbol Y3 (whether the number of regular symbol spins reaches the number of regular symbol time-saving spins and a non-time-saving game state is set). In other words, it suggests that the player has entered a chance zone where the conditions for setting the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 may be met (see Figure 127(c)). Accordingly, a setting condition indication演出 (performance/presentation) is executed that suggests the conditions for setting the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (for example, if the variation time of the minor win symbol Y3 is 60 seconds, an image explaining the condition "If the remaining number of variations becomes 0 within 60 seconds, RUSH will be acquired" is displayed) (see Figures 127(c) and 128(a)). This allows the player to understand that the minor win symbol Y3 has been determined and that there is a possibility of setting the advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2.

Furthermore, while the minor win symbol Y3 is being displayed, the aforementioned countdown display of the number of remaining normal symbol variations is executed. In this countdown display of the number of remaining normal symbol variations, when the minor win symbol Y3 is displayed, first a number indicating the number of remaining normal symbol variations at that time is displayed (for example, if the number of remaining normal symbol variations when the minor win symbol Y3 is displayed is 50, then "50" indicating that the number of remaining normal symbol variations is 50 is displayed; if the number of remaining normal symbol variations when the minor win symbol Y3 is displayed is 83, then "83" indicating that the number of remaining normal symbol variations is 83 is displayed) (see Figures 127(d) and 128(b)). After that, each time the normal symbol is displayed, the Y3 variation animation is executed, and the aforementioned number is displayed as counting down by 1.
Furthermore, while the minor win symbol Y3 is being displayed, a remaining spin time countdown display is also executed, which counts down the remaining spin time for the minor win symbol Y3. In this remaining spin time countdown display, when the display of the minor win symbol Y3 starts, a numerical value indicating the spin time is first displayed (for example, if the spin time is 60 seconds, "60"00" is displayed to indicate that a 60-second countdown is being performed) (see Figures 127(d) and 128(b)), and then the above numerical value is displayed as it counts down as time passes.

Then, before the display of the small win symbol Y3 stops, if the remaining number of normal symbol spins becomes 0 (when the number of normal symbol spins reaches the normal symbol time-saving spin count), the conditions for setting the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 are met, and an LJT2 determination indication演出 (for example, displaying an LJT2 determination indication image that says "RUSH acquired!!") is executed to indicate that the setting of the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 has been decided. At the same time, a preparation演出 (for example, displaying a preparation image that says "BONUS in preparation") is executed to indicate that a special game will be executed after the display of the small win symbol Y3 stops spinning (see Figures 127(e) to (f)). The LJT2 determination indication演出 and preparation演出 continue until the display of the small win symbol Y3 stops spinning.
On the other hand, if the display of the small win symbol Y3 stops before the remaining number of regular symbol fluctuations reaches zero, an LJT2 non-determined indication effect is executed, indicating that the conditions for setting the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 were not met and the setting of the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 was not determined (for example, displaying an LJT2 non-determined indication image such as "RUSH acquisition failed..."). In conjunction with this, a preparation effect is executed (see Figures 128(c) to (d)). The LJT2 non-determined indication effect and the preparation effect continue until the display of the small win symbol Y3 stops fluctuating.

Although not specifically illustrated, if, during the display of the minor winning symbol Y3, a win is determined by the lottery of the regular symbols, and the winning symbol N2, which is determined to be activated by the long-acting movable piece 16b, is selected, then the time-saving termination condition (1-F3) is met, and the conditions for setting the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 are met. In this case as well, the LJT2 determination indication effect and the preparation effect are executed, as described above, and these effects continue until the display of the minor winning symbol Y3 stops.

Subsequently, the display of the minor win symbol Y3 stops, and a special area entry instruction animation is executed in conjunction with the minor win game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y3 (see Figures 127(g) and 128(e)). Then, when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area, the special area entry instruction animation ends, and a special area entry suggestion animation is executed (see Figures 127(h) and 128(f)). After the minor win game ends and the special game is executed, the special area entry suggestion animation ends, and a special game in progress animation is executed (see Figures 127(i) and 128(g)).

If the remaining number of normal symbol spins reaches zero before the display of the small win symbol Y3 stops, the special game ends and the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set. When the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set, as shown in Figure 127(j), the low probability time-saving background image B is displayed, and a low probability time-saving LJT2 setting suggestion effect is performed (for example, the display of a low probability time-saving LJT2 setting suggestion image that says "RUSH entry!!"), and a right-hand shooting suggestion is given. In addition, a countdown display of the remaining number of normal symbol spins is also performed in conjunction with the setting of the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 127(j)).
On the other hand, if the display of the small winning symbol Y3 stops before the remaining number of normal symbol fluctuations reaches zero, the special game ends and the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set. When the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, as shown in Figure 128(h), the low probability time-saving background image A is displayed, a low probability time-saving LJT1 setting indication effect is performed, and a right-hand shooting indication is given. In addition, along with the setting of the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, the remaining number of normal symbol fluctuations countdown display is also executed (see Figure 128(h)).

Furthermore, if the number of remaining normal symbol variations becomes 0 without determining the winning symbol N2, the normal game state is set after the normal symbol variation display ends. Although not specifically illustrated, when the normal game state is set, the displayed low-probability time-saving background image A switches to the normal background image, and a low-probability time-saving LJT1 termination indication (for example, displaying a low-probability time-saving LJT1 termination indication image such as "Chance Zone Ended") is performed to suggest that the low-probability time-saving LJT1 has ended and the normal game state has been set. A left-hand shooting indication (for example, displaying a left-hand shooting indication image such as "←←← Left Shoot") is also performed to prompt the player to shoot the game ball towards the first game area 12a.

(2) Low probability time-saving game state LJT2
Although not specifically illustrated, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, just like during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, when a game ball passes through gate 20, a time-saving variation effect is executed. If a winning symbol N2 is determined by a lottery of normal symbols based on this passage, the effect symbol 50 is displayed in a stopped state depending on the winning pattern. After the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed and the opening time has elapsed, the normal symbol winning indication effect and the ball entry instruction effect are executed. The normal symbol winning indication effect and the ball entry instruction effect end when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16 or when the operating time of the movable piece 16b has elapsed.
If a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16 while the movable piece 16b is in operation, a win/loss lottery is performed using a second special symbol random number based on that ball entry. If a minor win is achieved in this lottery and the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, the first special game execution suggestion is performed after the above-mentioned regular symbol win suggestion performance and ball entry instruction performance have ended.
Subsequently, a special area entry instruction animation is performed in conjunction with the mini-win game based on the determination of the mini-win symbol Y2 or Y3. When a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area, the special area entry instruction animation ends and a special area entry suggestion animation is performed. After the mini-win game ends and the special game is performed, the special area entry suggestion animation ends and a special game in progress animation is performed.
When the special game ends, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set. When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set, the low-probability time-saving background image B is displayed, a low-probability time-saving LJT2 setting indication effect is performed, and a right-side shooting indication is given. In addition, along with the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the remaining number of normal symbol changes countdown display is also executed.

Furthermore, if the winning symbol N2 is not determined and the number of remaining normal symbol variations reaches 0, the normal game state will be set after the normal symbol variation display ends. When the normal game state is set, the low probability time-saving background image A will switch to the normal background image, and an indication of the end of the low probability time-saving LJT1 and a left-hand play suggestion will be displayed.

(Modified version of the pachinko machine P according to this form)
(1) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, when the game ball passes through gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol is held, but it is not limited to this.
For example, instead of the gate 20, a regular symbol starting prize slot may be provided, which dispenses a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one) based on the number of game balls that enter it, and a regular symbol lottery may be held when a game ball enters the regular symbol starting prize slot. Alternatively, both the gate 20 and the regular symbol starting prize slot may be provided.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(2) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, in the lottery for winning or losing based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize entry opening 15 or the second starting prize entry opening 16, it was possible to win only minor prizes, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the system may be set up so that a different lottery result from a minor win is possible, and a big win that triggers a special game can also be won. Furthermore, even when a big win is achieved, it may be possible to perform control over the setting of the time-saving game state in the same manner as in this form.
Specifically, in the draw for winning or losing based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize entry point 16, a loss is never determined, and either a minor win or a major win is determined. If a major win is determined, either the major win symbol X2 or X3 is determined. Furthermore, if the major win symbol X2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the variation time for the major win symbol X2 is set to 1 second, and if the major win symbol X3 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the variation time for the major win symbol X3 is set to 60 seconds or 120 seconds. Furthermore, the reference point and time-saving termination conditions are set in the same way as in this form. When the game state at the reference point is a non-time-saving game state and a jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game based on the jackpot win ends. When the game state at the reference point is a time-saving game state and a jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set after the special game based on the jackpot win ends.
When the settings are configured as described above, if the winning symbol N2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and a game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16 while the movable piece 16b is operating in the long-acting mode, and a jackpot is won by the draw based on the ball's entry, and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, if the number of normal symbol spins reaches the normal time-saving spin count and the non-time-saving game state is set when the display of the jackpot symbol X3 stops spinning, the most advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game based on the jackpot win ends. If the number of normal symbol spins does not reach the normal time-saving spin count and the non-time-saving game state is not set when the display of the jackpot symbol X3 stops spinning (if the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is maintained), the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set after the special game based on the jackpot win ends. In other words, in this configuration, just as when the minor win symbol Y3 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the period during which the big win symbol X3 is displayed becomes a chance zone where the conditions for setting the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 may be met.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(3) In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the draw for winning or losing based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize entry opening 16 is always such that a minor win is determined and a loss is never determined. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be set so that a loss is determined with a predetermined probability.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(4) In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a winning result is always derived in the lottery of ordinary symbols regardless of the game state, and the probability of determining a winning symbol N1 in which the movable piece 16b is activated by a short operation mode and a winning symbol N2 in which the movable piece 16b is activated by a long operation mode is set to be different depending on the game state, so that the probability of determining whether or not a game ball can enter the second starting prize entry opening 16 is different for each game state, but the method of setting is not limited to this.
For example, the system may be set so that a winning or losing result is derived in the drawing of ordinary symbols, and if a winning result is derived, the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode so that a game ball can enter the second starting prize entry opening 16, and if a losing result is derived, the movable piece 16b does not operate or operates in a short-acting mode so that a game ball cannot enter the second starting prize entry opening 16, and furthermore, the probability of a winning result being derived in the drawing of ordinary symbols may be set to differ depending on the game state.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(5) In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the number of normal time-saving rounds is greater during the low probability time-saving round LJT2 (time-saving round JT2) than during the low probability time-saving round LJT1 (time-saving round JT1), and the probability of determining the winning symbol N2, which is determined by the operation of the movable piece 16b in a long operation mode, is set to be higher. As a result, the low probability time-saving round LJT2 is more advantageous than the low probability time-saving round LJT1, but the settings for differentiating the degree of advantage of the time-saving round are not limited to this.
For example, the number of normal time-saving rounds set may be the same in all time-saving game states, and the probability of determining the winning symbol N2 may be set to be higher in low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 than in low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. Alternatively, the probability of determining the winning symbol N2 may be the same in all time-saving game states, and the number of normal time-saving rounds set may be greater in low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 than in low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. Furthermore, although the number of normal symbol time-saving rounds set is greater in low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 than in low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the probability of determining the winning symbol N2 may be set to be significantly higher in low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 than in low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, so that the probability of determining the winning symbol N2 before the number of normal symbol variations reaches the normal symbol time-saving rounds is effectively higher in low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 than in low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(6) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, when a small win symbol Y3 is determined during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2, the variation time of the small win symbol Y3 can be set to 60 seconds or 120 seconds, but is not limited to this.
For example, the variation time for the minor win symbol Y3 may be determined so that the variation display of the regular symbols for the set number of regular symbol time-saving rounds (100 rounds) is completely finished.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(7) In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, an opening time was set, which is the time from when the normal stop display time has elapsed until the movable piece 16b starts to operate. However, it is not limited to this, and an opening time does not need to be set. That is, the movable piece 16b may start to operate when the normal stop display time has elapsed.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, an ending time was set, which is the time from when the movable piece 16b finishes operating until the next regular symbol lottery can be started. However, it is not limited to this, and an ending time does not have to be set. In other words, the lottery for the next regular symbol may be started as soon as the movable piece 16b finishes operating.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the stop display time for the normal symbols is set to less than 0.5 seconds (0.2 seconds). Therefore, even if at least one of the opening time or ending time is not set, it is preferable to ensure that the sum of the stop display time for the normal symbols and the operating time of the movable piece 16b exceeds 0.5 seconds in order to guarantee the visibility of the results of the normal symbol lottery in the normal symbol display device 32.

(8) In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol is displayed in the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2, the variation effect (display of the effect symbol 50) associated with the display of the second special symbol is not performed. However, it is not limited to this, and the variation effect may be performed in conjunction with the display of the second special symbol.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(9) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the remaining number of special 1 spins and the remaining number of special 2 spins are updated in the special symbol variation stop processing, and the time before the update is set to be the reference time, and the game state at that time is set to the reference time game state, but the reference time is not limited to this.
For example, the reference point may be set to be the point in time after the number of remaining special bonus rounds 1 and 2 have been updated, but before the process of setting the game state based on the update (i.e., the process of ending the time-saving game state that is currently set and setting a non-time-saving game state due to the fulfillment of the time-saving end condition) is executed, and the game state at that point in time may be set to be the reference point game state.
Furthermore, the remaining number of special symbol 1 spins and remaining special symbol 2 spins may be updated at any point between the start of the special symbol variation display and the end of the variation display and the expiration of the stop display time (e.g., the start of the special symbol variation display, any point during the special symbol variation display, or the expiration of the stop display time). In this case, the reference point may be set to be the point before the update of the remaining special symbol 1 spins and remaining special symbol 2 spins, and the game state at that point may be set to be the reference game state. Alternatively, the reference point may be set to be the point after the update of the remaining special symbol 1 spins and remaining special symbol 2 spins, but before the processing to set the game state based on the update is executed, and the game state at that point may be set to be the reference game state.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(10) The conditions for shortening the time are not limited to those described above, and conditions such as when the sum of the number of times the win/loss lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number and the number of times the win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number (the sum of the number of changes in the first special symbol and the number of changes in the second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number of times may be set.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(11) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, when a minor win is achieved by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, and after the special game executed through said determination is completed, a low probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set. However, the game state set based on the win of a minor win is not limited to this.
For example, the system may be configured so that multiple types of winning symbols can be determined when a winning symbol is selected through the lottery described above. If a predetermined winning symbol is selected, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 may be set after the special game executed via that selection ends. If a different winning symbol is selected, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 may be set after the special game executed via that selection ends. Alternatively, if a predetermined winning symbol is selected, a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) may be set instead of a time-saving game state.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(12) In the pachinko machine P according to this form, if a win/loss lottery is held based on the second special symbol random number during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, a minor win is achieved and a minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined. After the special game executed via the determination of the minor win symbol Y2 is completed, the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set. After the special game executed via the determination of the minor win symbol Y3 is completed, the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2 is set according to the result of the normal game during the display of the variation of the minor win symbol Y3, but the machine is not limited to this.
For example, in addition to the minor win symbols Y2 and Y3, a minor win symbol Y4 may be provided as a minor win symbol determined when a minor win is achieved by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, which has a short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds, 3 seconds, etc.) like minor win symbol Y2. If minor win symbol Y4 is determined during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 may be set after the special game executed via that determination ends. In other words, a minor win symbol may be provided whose determination confirms the setting of the low probability time-saving game state LJT2.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(13) In the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 in this embodiment, the time-saving termination condition for the normal symbol game is not only that the number of normal symbol variations reaches 100, which is the normal symbol time-saving number, but also that the number of times the movable piece 16b operates in the long operation mode reaches 2, which is the long operation termination number. Furthermore, if the reference time game state is a non-time-saving game state and a small winning symbol Y2 is determined based on a win/loss lottery by the second special symbol random number, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game executed via that determination ends. If the reference time game state is a non-time-saving game state and a small winning symbol Y3 is determined based on a win/loss lottery by the second special symbol random number, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game executed via that determination ends.
Therefore, if a game ball does not enter the second starting prize slot 16 during the first long-duration operation of the movable piece 16b after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, and then a winning symbol N2 is determined based on the lottery of ordinary symbols and the movable piece 16b is operated for the second long-duration operation, the time-saving termination condition (1-F3) is met and the non-time-saving game state is set. If a game ball is entered into the second starting prize slot 16 during this operation, a minor win is guaranteed in the win/fail lottery by the second special symbol random number and a minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, and after the special game executed through this determination is completed, the most advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is always set.

Thus, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, when the reference game state was a non-time-saving game state, regardless of whether the small winning symbol Y2 or Y3 was determined based on the win/loss lottery by the second special symbol random number, the most advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 was set after the special game executed through that determination ended, but it is not limited to this.
For example, if the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor winning symbol Y2 is determined based on a win/loss lottery using a second special symbol random number, then a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 may be set after the special game executed via that determination has finished.
In this case, if a game ball does not enter the second starting prize slot 16 during the first long-duration operation of the movable piece 16b after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, and a winning symbol N2 is then determined based on the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the movable piece 16b is operated in a second long-duration mode, and a game ball enters the second starting prize slot 16 during this operation, if a minor winning symbol Y2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be set after the special game executed via that determination has finished.
In a pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set regardless of whether the minor winning symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, there is a possibility that a strategy will be employed in which a player intentionally refrains from entering the second starting prize slot 16 during the first long-acting operation of the movable piece 16b, aims to activate the movable piece 16b a second time, and then enters the game ball into the second starting prize slot 16 during this operation in order to aim for the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. However, if the machine is set as described above, even if a game ball is entered into the second starting prize slot 16 during the second long-acting operation of the movable piece 16b, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be set when the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined. Therefore, there is little benefit in executing the above strategy, and it is possible to deter the execution of such a strategy.

Furthermore, as described above, provided that the setting is such that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 ends when the number of times the movable piece 16b is operated in the long-operation mode reaches 2, which is the number of times the long operation ends, the player may be given the option to choose whether or not to put a game ball into the second starting prize entry opening 16 during the first operation of the movable piece 16b in the long-operation mode after the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 has been set.
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, when the winning symbol N2 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 and the movable piece 16b is operated in a second long-operation mode, if a game ball is entered into the second starting prize entry 16 during this operation, a minor win is guaranteed in the win/fail lottery by the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined. Regardless of which minor win symbol is determined, the most advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game executed through this determination is completed. Therefore, although not specifically shown in the diagram, when the movable piece 16b is operated in a first long-operation mode, a selection presentation is performed to allow the player to choose whether or not to enter the game ball into the second starting prize entry 16 during the operation of the movable piece 16b (for example, displaying a selection image such as "Choose whether or not to enter the ball into the electric chute! If you do not enter the ball into the electric chute this time and hit the next win, you will win RUSH!!").
This allows for a novel gameplay experience where the player can choose between aiming to determine the small winning symbol Y3, which has the potential to trigger the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, by inserting a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16 while the movable piece 16b is in operation, or aiming to determine the next winning symbol N2, which will definitely trigger the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, by not inserting a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16 while the movable piece 16b is in operation. This enhances the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, if the reference game state is a non-time-saving game state, and a minor win symbol Y2 is determined based on a win/loss lottery using the second special symbol random number, then a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set after the special game executed via that determination ends. If a minor win symbol Y3 is determined based on a win/loss lottery using the second special symbol random number, then a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game executed via that determination ends. In this case, as described above, even if a game ball is entered into the second starting prize entry opening 16 during the operation of the movable piece 16b in the second long-operation mode, it is not necessarily guaranteed that the advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set.
For example, if the probability of determining the minor win symbol Y2 when a minor win is achieved is set to 20% and the probability of determining the minor win symbol Y3 is set to 80%, then the probability of setting the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 when a game ball is entered into the second starting prize entry opening 16 during the operation of the movable piece 16b in the second long-acting mode is 80%. In this case, the selection animation described above may display the probability of setting the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, such as "...If you hit the next win, you have an 80% chance of winning RUSH!!"

(14) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the game transitions to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 based on the determination of a minor win symbol Y1 during normal gameplay (winning a minor win), and transitions to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 based on the determination of a minor win symbol Y3 during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. However, the transitions between game states are not limited to these.
For example, based on the determination of the small win symbol Y1 during normal gameplay, the game may transition to the most advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and depending on the type of small win symbol determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 and the result of the normal gameplay, it may be possible to transition to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, which is less advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2.
Specifically, when a minor win symbol Y1 is determined during normal gameplay, the system is set to transition to the most advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, when a winning symbol N2 is determined and the movable piece 16b is operated in a long-acting mode, if a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16 during this operation, a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and either a minor win symbol Y2 with a relatively short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds, etc.) during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, or a minor win symbol Y3 with a relatively long fluctuation time (60 seconds, 120 seconds, etc.) during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is determined. Furthermore, the reference point is set in the same way as in this form, the time-saving termination conditions for the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 are set in the same way as for the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 in this form, and the time-saving termination conditions for the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 are set in the same way as for the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 in this form. In addition, when the game state at the reference point is a non-time-saving game state and a small win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game executed via that determination is completed, and when the game state at the reference point is a time-saving game state and a small win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set after the special game executed via that determination is completed.
When set in this way, if a small win symbol Y3 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and the display of the small win symbol Y3 stops moving, and the number of normal symbol movements has reached the normal time-saving count, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) has ended and the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) has been set, then the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set after the special game executed via the determination of the small win symbol Y3 has ended. In other words, in this case, the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, which is less advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, will be avoided.
On the other hand, when the display of the minor winning symbol Y3 stops, if the number of spins of the regular symbols has not reached the number of regular symbol time-saving spins and the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) is set, then the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set after the special game executed through the determination of the minor winning symbol Y3 ends. In other words, at this time, the game will transition to the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, which is less advantageous than the low probability time-saving game state LJT2.
During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a winning symbol N2 is determined, and the movable piece 16 is operated in a long-acting mode. If a game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16 during this operation, a minor win is achieved, and either the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined. Additionally, the movable piece 16b is operated in a long-acting mode, and the number of operations of the movable piece 16b in the long-acting mode reaches the completion number, setting the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, regardless of whether the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game executed through that determination ends. In other words, when a winning symbol N2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 and a game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16, the game always transitions to the most advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT2.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(15) Furthermore, a gameplay experience similar to this form can be achieved by making the pachinko machine P have the following specifications. These will be explained in detail below.
The pachinko machine P is set to simultaneously perform changes in special symbols based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize entry point 15 and changes in special symbols based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize entry point 16 (so-called simultaneous rotation control).
In the draw for winning or losing based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15, the draw result is set to be either a win for a minor prize (winning probability: 1/200) or a win for a time-saving bonus (winning probability: 199/200), and a losing result is not derived. Furthermore, if a minor prize is won, the minor prize symbol Y1 (determination probability: 100%) is determined, and if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 (determination probability: 70%) or J2 (determination probability: 30%) is determined. Also, similar to the pachinko machine P in this form, in the draw for winning or losing based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16, the draw result is set to be a win for a minor prize (winning probability: 200/200), and a losing result is not derived. Furthermore, if a minor prize is won, the minor prize symbol Y2 (determination probability: 100%) is determined.

Possible game states include the same non-time-saving game state (normal game state), time-saving game state JT1 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1), and time-saving game state JT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) as in this form, as well as time-saving game state JT3 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT3) and time-saving game state JT4 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT4).
In this pachinko machine P, the game state after the special game, which is executed via the determination of the small win symbol, is set according to the reference time game state and the type of special symbol (small win symbol) that has been determined. However, the reference time for this pachinko machine P is set to the point when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the small win game based on the determination of the small win symbol. Therefore, the game state that was set at the point when a predetermined number of game balls entered the special area during the small win game becomes the reference time game state.

The time-saving game state JT1 is a more advantageous game state than the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game states JT3 and JT4 described later. This time-saving game state JT1 is set after the special game executed via the decision is completed, based on the reference game state being either the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state and the determined special symbol being the minor win symbol Y1, or based on the reference game state being the time-saving game state and the determined special symbol being the minor win symbol Y2. The performance of the normal symbol game in time-saving game state JT1 is the same as in the time-saving game state JT1 of this form. Furthermore, time-saving game state JT1 ends when the number of normal symbol variations reaches the normal symbol time-saving number (100 times), or when the number of times the minor win symbol Y2 variation display starts reaches 1 (i.e., the start of the first variation display of minor win symbol Y2), and the non-time-saving game state is set. Furthermore, during the shortened game state JT1, if the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined, a relatively longer variation time (30 seconds in this modified example) is determined.

The time-saving game state JT2 is a more advantageous game state (the most advantageous game state) than the time-saving game state JT1. This time-saving game state JT2 is set after the special game executed via the determination is completed, based on the reference game state being the time-saving game state and the determined special symbol being the minor win symbol Y2. The performance of the normal symbol game during time-saving game state JT2 is the same as in the time-saving game state JT2 of this embodiment. Furthermore, time-saving game state JT2 ends when the number of normal symbol variations reaches the normal symbol time-saving number (120 times), and when the number of times the minor win symbol Y2 variation display starts reaches 2 (i.e., the start of the second variation display of the minor win symbol Y2), and the non-time-saving game state is set. Note that if the minor win symbol Y2 is determined during time-saving game state JT2, a relatively short variation time (1 second in this modified example) is determined.

The time-saving game states JT3 and JT4 are slightly more advantageous than the non-time-saving game state. Time-saving game state JT3 is set after the display of the time-saving symbol J1 stops, based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 during the non-time-saving game state. Time-saving game state JT4 is set after the display of the time-saving symbol J2 stops, based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2 during the non-time-saving game state. In both time-saving game states JT3 and JT4, a win is guaranteed by the lottery of normal symbols, and the winning symbol N1 is determined, just as in the non-time-saving game state. However, the operating time of the movable piece 16b at this time is 0.025 seconds, which is slightly longer than the operating time of the movable piece 16b when the winning symbol N1 is determined during the non-time-saving game state, making it slightly more advantageous than the non-time-saving game state. Furthermore, the time-saving game state JT3 ends when the number of normal symbol spins reaches the normal time-saving spin count (10,000 spins) and the number of times the small win symbol's spinning display stops reaches 1 (i.e., the first stop of the small win symbol's spinning display). The time-saving game state JT4 ends when the number of normal symbol spins reaches the normal time-saving spin count (10,000 spins) and the number of times the small win symbol's spinning display stops reaches 2 (i.e., the second stop of the small win symbol's spinning display), and the non-time-saving game state is set. Note that during both time-saving game states JT3 and JT4, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball towards the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed shooting), similar to the non-time-saving game state.

In a pachinko machine P configured as described above, when a game ball enters the first starting entry point 15 during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) and a win/loss lottery is conducted using the first special symbol random number, there is a very high probability of winning a time-saving bonus. If the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the game transitions to time-saving game state JT3 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT3), and if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the game transitions to time-saving game state JT4 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT4). During both time-saving game states JT3 and JT4, game balls are launched towards the first game area 12a. Furthermore, even if a time-saving bonus is won in the win/loss lottery using the first special symbol random number, a new time-saving game state is not set. Therefore, the game remains in time-saving game state JT3 or JT4 until a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y1 is determined.

Then, when the minor win symbol Y1 is determined in the time-saving game state JT3 or JT4, the time-saving game state JT1 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) is set after the special game executed via that determination ends.

During the shortened play state JT1, similar to this configuration, the game balls are launched towards the second play area 12b (so-called right-hand shots), and the lottery and display of regular symbols are performed based on the game balls passing through the gate 20. If the number of regular symbol spins reaches the normal time-saving spin count without a winning symbol N2 being determined, the shortened play state JT1 ends and the game transitions to the non-shortened play state. On the other hand, if a winning symbol N2 is determined before the number of regular symbol spins reaches the normal time-saving spin count, the movable piece 16b operates in a long-acting mode. If a game ball enters the second starting prize entry point 16 during this operation, a win/loss lottery is conducted using the second special symbol random number, resulting in a minor win and determining the minor win symbol Y2.

When the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined, the condition for ending the time-saving game state JT1 is met at the start of the variation display of this minor winning symbol Y2, which is that the number of times the variation display of minor winning symbol Y2 has started has reached 1. Therefore, at this point, the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set.
In this modified version, while the small win symbol Y2 is being displayed, the player is instructed to insert a game ball into the first starting entry point 15. As described above, the pachinko machine P in this modified version is set to perform simultaneous rotation control, so even while the small win symbol Y2 is being displayed, when a game ball enters the first starting entry point 15, a win/loss lottery is performed using the first special symbol random number. In this win/loss lottery, there is a very high probability of winning a time-saving bonus, and if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the time-saving game state JT3 is set, and if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the time-saving game state JT4 is set.
When the time-saving game state JT3 is set, the condition for ending the time-saving game state JT3 is met when the display of the small win symbol Y2 stops, which means that the number of times the display of the small win symbol stops has reached one. At this point, the time-saving game state JT3 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set. Therefore, the reference time-saving game state becomes the non-time-saving game state, and after the special game executed through the determination of the small win symbol Y2 ends, the time-saving game state JT1 is set again.
In contrast, if the time-saving game state JT4 is set, at the point when the display of the small win symbol Y2 stops, the number of times the display of the small win symbol stops has not reached two, and the number of times the normal symbols change cannot reach the normal time-saving number (10,000 times). Therefore, the conditions for ending the time-saving game state JT4 are not met, and the time-saving game state JT4 remains set at this point. Consequently, the reference time-saving game state becomes the time-saving game state, and after the special game executed via the determination of the small win symbol Y2 ends, the time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2) is set.

During the shortened play state JT2, the game ball is launched (shot to the right) toward the second game area 12b, similar to the present form, and the lottery and display of the regular symbols are performed based on the game ball passing through the gate 20. If the number of regular symbol variations reaches the normal symbol shortened play time count without a winning symbol N2 being determined, the shortened play state JT2 ends and the game transitions to the non-shortened play state. On the other hand, if a winning symbol N2 is determined before the number of regular symbol variations reaches the normal symbol shortened play time count, the movable piece 16b is activated in a long-acting mode, and if a game ball enters the second starting prize entry 16 during this activation, a win/loss lottery is performed using the second special symbol random number, a minor win is achieved, and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined.
When a minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the minor win symbol is displayed in a relatively short variation time. However, at the point when the variation display stops, the number of times the minor win symbol Y2 has been displayed has not reached two, and it is also highly unlikely that the number of times the regular symbols have been displayed will reach the number of times the regular symbols have been shortened (120 times). Therefore, the conditions for ending the shortened time game state JT2 are not met, and the shortened time game state JT2 remains set at this point.
Therefore, the game state at the time of reference becomes the time-saving game state, and after the special game, which is executed through the determination of the minor win symbol Y2, ends, the time-saving game state JT2 is set again.

In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this modified example, if a small win symbol Y2 is determined during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, and based on the win/loss lottery by the first special symbol random number, if a time-saving symbol J1 is determined and the time-saving game state JT3 is set, the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set again after the special game executed via the determination of the small win symbol Y2 is completed. If a time-saving symbol J2 is determined and the time-saving game state JT4 is set, the most advantageous low probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the special game executed via the determination of the small win symbol Y2 is completed. Furthermore, if a small win symbol Y2 is determined during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2, the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set again after the special game executed via that determination is completed.
Therefore, by adopting the specifications described above, it is possible to provide gameplay similar to that of the pachinko machine P related to this form, thereby increasing the interest of the players.

(16) In the pachinko machine P according to this form, when the small winning symbol Y3 is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the display of the small winning symbol's variation begins, the chance zone entry suggestion effect and the setting condition suggestion effect are executed, and thereafter the remaining normal symbol variation countdown display and the remaining variation time countdown display are executed (see Figures 127(c) to (d), Figures 128(a) to (b)). However, it is not limited to this, and the remaining normal symbol variation countdown display and the remaining variation time countdown display may be executed while the chance zone entry suggestion effect and the setting condition suggestion effect are being executed.
Furthermore, if a winning symbol N2 is determined by a lottery of regular symbols, an icon image representing the condition explanation image in the setting condition suggestion演出 and the chance zone entry suggestion image in the chance zone entry suggestion演出 (icon image that suggests the determination of a minor winning symbol Y3) and an icon image representing the decision to execute a special game (for example, an image that says "BONUS") (icon image that suggests the determination of a minor winning symbol Y2) may be displayed during the display of the variation of the winning symbol N2 or during the opening time of the regular game based on the determination. Then, when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, an effect may be executed in which an icon image corresponding to the determined minor winning symbol is selectively selected, thereby suggesting the determined minor winning symbol. In this case, when the display of the minor winning symbols starts to change, the above-mentioned setting condition suggestion effect (display of the condition explanation image) may not be executed, or a simplified setting condition suggestion effect may be executed so as not to interfere with the above-mentioned time-saving change effect (for example, displaying the condition explanation image for only a very short time, or displaying a small-sized condition explanation image in a position that does not overlap with the time-saving change effect).

(7th form)
The seventh form will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this description, components similar to those in the first to sixth forms described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.
The pachinko machine P in this form, like the fifth and sixth forms, is a pachinko machine in which the trigger for the execution of a special game is the winning of a minor prize. Specifically, in the win/loss lottery, it is possible to win a minor prize even if a big prize is not won, and the special game is executed when a game ball enters a special area during a minor prize game based on the winning of a minor prize.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P in this embodiment, as well as the devices and components installed on the game board 11, are the same as those of the second to sixth embodiments.
Furthermore, similar to the fifth and sixth forms, during special gameplay or during minor win gameplay based on a minor win, the large prize opening 18 opens, allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening 18. During special gameplay, the distribution member 59 is stationary in the first position, and game balls that enter the large prize opening 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. In contrast, during minor win gameplay based on the determination of a minor win symbol, the distribution member 59 is stationary in the second position, and game balls that enter the large prize opening 18 do not enter the general area 58, but all enter the special area.
In other words, game balls can only enter the special area during a minor win game based on the determination of a minor win symbol. As a result, a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this form) enter the special area during a minor win game. Then, based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special area during a minor win game, the special game is executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, similar to the fifth form, the game state after the special game, which is executed based on the determination of the minor win symbol, is set according to the minor win symbol determined when a minor win is achieved.
Furthermore, the play states that can be set include: a normal play state which combines a low probability play state and a non-time-saving play state; a low probability time-saving play state LJT1 which combines a low probability play state and a time-saving play state JT1 (a low probability time-saving play state (time-saving play state) set after the end of a special game); and a low probability time-saving play state LJT2 which combines a low probability play state and a time-saving play state JT2 (a low probability time-saving state set based on the stop display of the time-saving symbol upon determination of the time-saving symbol (winning the granting of time-saving)). The game features several game states: a short game state (time-saving game state), a low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 (a low-probability time-saving game state set after the end of a special game) which combines the low-probability game state and time-saving game state JT3, and a low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 (a low-probability time-saving game state set after the end of a special game) which combines the low-probability game state and time-saving game state JT4. The game proceeds with one of these game states set.

Furthermore, in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the lottery for regular symbols is set to 99/100, the variation time for regular symbols is 10 seconds, and the operation time of the movable piece 16b is set to 0.05 seconds (see Figure 129(c)). In contrast, in time-saving game states JT1, JT2, JT3, and JT4, the probability of winning in the lottery for regular symbols is set to 99/100, the variation time for regular symbols is 1 second, and the operation time of the movable piece 16b is set to 3 seconds (see Figure 129(c)). In other words, the difficulty of getting the game ball into the second starting prize entry point 16 is the same in time-saving game states JT1, JT2, JT3, and JT4, and is lower than in the non-time-saving game state. Furthermore, while it is virtually impossible for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point 16 during non-time-saving game states, during time-saving game states JT1, JT2, JT3, and JT4, it becomes possible to enter the second starting prize entry point 16 with a high frequency.

Furthermore, in the initial state immediately after factory shipment or after a RAM reset (initialization process in case of abnormality, initialization process in normal operation), the normal gameplay state is set.

During normal gameplay, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball towards the first game area 12a (left-handed) so that the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15. During low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, special gameplay, and minor win gameplay, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball towards the second game area 12b (right-handed) so that the game ball enters the large prize entry point 18, or passes through gate 20 and enters the second starting prize entry point 16.
In other words, during normal gameplay, the player is primarily instructed to play in the first game area 12a, and as long as gameplay is taking place in the first game area 12a, the game balls can enter the first starting prize entry point 15. Furthermore, during low-probability time-saving game states LJT1, LJT2, LJT3, and LJT4, the player is primarily instructed to play in the second game area 12b, and as long as gameplay is taking place in the second game area 12b, the game balls can pass through the gate 20 and enter the second starting prize entry point 16.
Then, a draw is performed to determine whether a player wins or loses based on the number of game balls that enter the first starting prize entry point 15 and the number of game balls that enter the second starting prize entry point 16.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this configuration, similar to the third configuration, up to four of each of the first and second special symbol random numbers can be stored as reserves. If both the first and second special symbol random numbers are stored as reserves, the second special symbol random number is processed before the first special symbol random number.

As shown in Figure 129(a), when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, a draw for winning or losing (a draw based on the first special symbol random number) is performed, resulting in either a minor win or a loss. If a minor win is achieved, the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, and if a loss is achieved, the losing symbol Z1 is determined.
Furthermore, the probability of winning a minor prize is set to 1/300, and the probability of determining the minor prize symbol Y1 when a minor prize is won is set to 100/100 (100%).

As shown in Figure 129(a), when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, the draw for winning or losing (a draw based on the second special symbol random number) yields one of the following results: winning a minor prize, winning a time-saving bonus, or losing. If a minor prize is won, the minor prize symbol Y2 is determined; if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving bonus symbol J1 is determined; and if it is a loss, the losing symbol Z2 is determined.
Furthermore, the probability of winning a minor prize is set to 2/300, and the probability of determining the minor prize symbol Y2 when a minor prize is won is set to 100/100 (100%). The probability of winning a time-saving bonus is set to 3/300, and the probability of determining the time-saving bonus symbol J1 when a time-saving bonus is won is set to 100/100 (100%).

Furthermore, once a special symbol is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern is determined based on the result of that determination, specifying the variation time and variation performance of the special symbol. The pachinko machine P in this form has multiple variation pattern tables (not specifically shown in the diagram) that store variation pattern commands associated with the aforementioned variation patterns. Once the win/loss lottery and the determination of the special symbol are performed, the variation pattern command is determined by referring to one of the variation pattern tables corresponding to the type of special symbol random number used in the win/loss lottery (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number) and the game state currently set.
Although not specifically illustrated, for example, when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay, the following variation patterns are available when a losing symbol Z1 is determined (resulting in a loss): a 13-second variation with a set variation time of 13 seconds, a 20-second variation with a set variation time of 20 seconds, a 60-second variation with a set variation time of 60 seconds, and so on. The following variation patterns are available when a minor win symbol Y1 is determined (resulting in a minor win): the aforementioned 20-second variation, 60-second variation, etc.
Furthermore, when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the following variation patterns are provided for when the losing symbol Z2 is determined (resulting in a loss): a 3-second variation with a set variation time of 3 seconds, a 30-second variation with a set variation time of 30 seconds, etc. The following variation patterns are provided for when the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined (a minor win is achieved): the aforementioned 30-second variation, etc. The following variation patterns are provided for when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined (a time-saving bonus is awarded): the aforementioned 30-second variation, etc.
Furthermore, when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the following variation patterns are provided for when the losing symbol Z2 is determined: a 1-second variation with a set variation time of 1 second, the aforementioned 30-second variation, etc. The following variation patterns are provided for when the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined: the aforementioned 30-second variation, etc. The following variation patterns are provided for when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined: the aforementioned 30-second variation, etc.
Furthermore, when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, the following variation patterns are provided as the variation patterns to be determined when the losing symbol Z2 is determined: a 0.5-second variation with a variation time of 0.5 seconds, the aforementioned 0.5-second variation, the aforementioned variation patterns to be determined when the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined, and the aforementioned 0.5-second variation, the aforementioned variation patterns to be determined when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined.
Furthermore, when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, the following variation patterns are provided as options when the losing symbol Z2 is determined: the aforementioned 3-second variation, 30-second variation, etc.; when the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined: the aforementioned 30-second variation, etc.; and when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined: the aforementioned 3-second variation, etc.
Furthermore, the variation time specified for each variation pattern in each game state is not limited to the above, and variation patterns with extremely short variation times (for example, 0.5 seconds, etc.) may be provided even in game states other than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3.
Furthermore, multiple variation pattern tables for storing variation patterns may be provided, and in a predetermined game state, the variation pattern table referenced to determine the variation pattern may be switched according to the number of variations since the start of that game state. For example, a variation pattern table that stores dedicated variation patterns may be provided, and during a period in a time-saving game state where a specific number of variations (1 to 10, etc.) occur, or during the final variation, the system may refer to the variation pattern table and select one or more variation patterns stored in the variation pattern table.
Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, when the result of the win/loss lottery is favorable to the player (for example, winning a minor prize), the machine is set to be more likely to select a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than when the result is unfavorable to the player (for example, losing). (The average variation time tends to be longer.)

Furthermore, the stop display time (the so-called symbol confirmation time), which is the time it takes for the special symbol to remain stopped after the variable display of the special symbol has finished, is the same (0.5 seconds in this configuration) regardless of the game state at the time of the win/loss draw or the type of special symbol determined. This stop display time may be determined based on the game state at the time of the win/loss draw and the type of special symbol determined.

The mini-win game, which is executed when a mini-win is won and either the mini-win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: the large prize opening 18 is opened for 0.45 seconds four times, or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open (see Figure 129(b)). The closing time (interval time) of the large prize opening 18 between the end of one opening and the start of the next is set to 0.6 seconds. Furthermore, while the large prize opening 18 is open, the distribution member 59 remains in the second position.
Thus, when a minor win is achieved, regardless of which minor win symbol is determined, the large prize opening 18 is opened for a total of 1.8 seconds during the minor win game. As a result, if the player is shooting to the right during this minor win game, the game ball can be sent into the large prize opening 18. Furthermore, since the distribution member 59 remains in the second position during this minor win game, any game ball that enters the large prize opening 18 will always enter the special area.
Therefore, if a minor win is achieved, and the player is shooting to the right, a predetermined number of game balls (1 ball) will enter the special area during the minor win game based on that win, and a special game will be executed based on that entry.
Furthermore, the manner in which the large prize opening 18 is opened during a minor win game is not limited to the above, and various manners can be adopted. For example, the large prize opening 18 may be opened for 0.15 seconds 12 times. By doing so, the number of times the large prize opening 18 is opened while the game ball is flowing down the game area (second game area 12b in this embodiment) into which the game ball can enter the large prize opening 18 increases, thereby increasing the possibility of 10 or more game balls entering during a minor win game (the possibility of so-called over-entry).

Furthermore, when a minor win symbol Y1 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this form) enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, a round game is set to be executed a total of two times, which ends when either the large prize opening 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 (in Figure 129(a), the minor win game and the two round games are collectively referred to as 3R). In addition, the large prize opening 18 is opened only once in each round game (opened for 29.0 seconds once), and the interval time between each round game is set to 2.0 seconds. Furthermore, the distribution member 59 remains stationary in the first position during each round game.
Furthermore, if a minor win symbol Y2 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, a special game is executed in which a total of nine round games in the same manner as described above are played (in Figure 129(a), the minor win game and the nine round games are collectively referred to as 3R). The opening and closing patterns of the opening and closing doors 18b, the operation of the distribution member 59, and the interval time during the round games are also set to be the same as those of the special game described above.

(Summary of the game state to be set)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, when a minor win game is executed based on the determination of a minor win symbol (winning a minor win), and a special game is executed based on the fact that a predetermined number (1 ball) of game balls enter a special area during the minor win game, the game state after the special game ends is set according to the game state at a predetermined reference point (hereinafter also referred to as the reference game state) and the type of minor win symbol determined, as described later.
Specifically, as will be described later, when a minor winning symbol Y1 is determined, and the game state at the time of reference was a non-time-saving game state, the time-saving game state JT1 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) is set after the special game ends. Furthermore, if the minor winning symbol Y2 is determined, and the reference game state was a non-time-saving game state, then time-saving game state JT1 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) will be set after the special game ends. If the reference game state was time-saving game state JT2 (a time-saving game state set after the special game ends), then time-saving game state JT3 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT3) will be set after the special game ends. If the reference game state was time-saving game state JT3 or JT4 (both time-saving game states set based on the determination of a time-saving symbol (winning the granting of time-saving) and the stop display of the said time-saving symbol), then time-saving game state JT4 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT4) will be set after the special game ends. In principle, in pachinko machines P relating to this form, the reference game state will never be time-saving game state JT1.
Conversely, if, for reasons such as not shooting to the right and failing to enter the large prize pocket 18, a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the special area during a minor win game, the special game will not be performed, and the game state corresponding to the type of minor win symbol will not be set. After the minor win game ends, the game state that was set at the end of the minor win game will continue.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, if a time-saving bonus is awarded and a time-saving symbol is determined, the game state after the time-saving symbol stops (after the display of the time-saving symbol's movement ends) is set according to the reference game state and the type of time-saving symbol determined. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, as described above, it is possible to win a time-saving bonus through a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and if a time-saving bonus is awarded, the time-saving symbol J1 is always determined (see Figure 129(a)).
Specifically, as described later, when a time-saving symbol J1 is determined, if the reference game state was time-saving game state JT2, time-saving game state JT1 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) is set after the time-saving symbol is displayed to stop. If the reference game state was not a time-saving game state, time-saving game state JT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) is set after the time-saving symbol is displayed to stop. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, when a time-saving symbol J1 is determined, if the reference game state was time-saving game state JT3 or JT4, no new time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol (the setting of a time-saving game state based on the determination of the time-saving symbol becomes invalid), and time-saving game state JT3 or JT4 continues.
Thus, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, when a time-saving symbol J1 is determined, if the game state is a non-time-saving game state, or a time-saving game state (time-saving game state JT2) set based on the stop display of the time-saving symbol J1, the time-saving game state is set based on the determined time-saving symbol J1. On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving game state (time-saving game states JT1, JT3, JT4) set after the end of a special game, the time-saving game state is not set based on the determined time-saving symbol J1. Furthermore, in time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1), as will be described later, when the number of times time-saving is awarded reaches the number of times time-saving is awarded until the time-saving is finished, a non-time-saving game state is set when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined. Therefore, when time-saving game state JT1 is set, no decision is made as to whether or not to set a time-saving game state based on the time-saving symbol J1.

In this form of pachinko machine P, the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1, LJT2, LJT3, or LJT4) ends when any of the following time-saving termination conditions are met: (1) the number of times the special symbol (second special symbol) changes reaches a predetermined number of time-saving times, (2) the number of times a minor win is achieved reaches a predetermined number of times when a minor win is achieved, or (3) the number of times time-saving is granted reaches a predetermined number of times when time-saving is achieved. At this point, the non-time-saving game state (normal game state) is set.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this form, time-saving termination conditions are also set based on the number of times the first special symbol is rotated and the sum of the number of times the first and second special symbols are rotated. However, since these time-saving termination conditions may be met in irregular situations such as when game balls are launched toward the first game area 12a despite being in a time-saving game state, the explanation will be omitted. Furthermore, in the following explanation of this form, "number of time-saving rounds" refers to the number of times the second special symbol is rotated.

During the time-saving game state, the special symbol variation stop process, which is executed when the special symbol variation display ends, updates the remaining number of special symbol variations until the time-saving count is reached (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining special symbol variation count). Also, if a minor win is achieved, the special symbol variation stop process updates the remaining number of minor wins until the number of minor wins until the end of the minor win count is reached (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining minor win count). Also, if a time-saving bonus is awarded, the special symbol variation stop process updates the remaining number of time-saving bonus awards until the number of time-saving bonus awards until the end of the end of the time-saving bonus count is reached (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining time-saving bonus award count). The main CPU 101 determines, based on an update of the remaining special symbol variation count, that the number of variation counts for special symbols has reached the number of time-saving mode rounds; based on an update of the remaining minor win count, that the number of minor wins has reached the number of minor wins that have ended; or based on an update of the remaining time-saving mode win count, that the number of time-saving mode bonuses has reached the number of wins that have ended; in this case, it terminates the time-saving mode game state currently set and sets a non-time-saving mode game state. If it determines that none of these conditions have been met, it maintains the time-saving mode game state currently set (i.e., does nothing with respect to the time-saving mode game state currently set).
In the pachinko machine P of this form, the point in time when the process is completed is defined as the reference point mentioned above. If a minor win is achieved, the game state after the special game ends is set by referring to the game state at that point in time (game state at the time of reference). If a time-saving bonus is awarded, the game state after the time-saving symbol stops is set by referring to the game state at that point in time.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this configuration, the main RAM 103 is equipped with a time-saving mode count memory area, a minor win completion count memory area, and a time-saving mode completion count memory area. The time-saving mode count memory area stores the remaining number of special symbol variations, the minor win completion count memory area stores the remaining number of minor wins, and the time-saving mode completion count memory area stores the remaining number of time-saving mode wins.

Specifically, when a time-saving game state is set, the initial value of the remaining special symbol variation count is stored in the time-saving game state memory area, corresponding to the type of time-saving game state set (100 times for time-saving game state JT1, 10,000 times for time-saving game state JT2, 10,000 times for time-saving game state JT3, and 200 times for time-saving game state JT4). Then, each time the variation display of the special symbols is executed, the value stored in the time-saving game state memory area is updated (decremented by 1). As a result, the value stored in the time-saving game state memory area becomes the remaining special symbol variation count (the number of remaining special symbol variations until the set time-saving game state ends).
Furthermore, when a time-saving game state is set, the initial value of the remaining number of minor wins is stored in the minor win count memory area, corresponding to the type of time-saving game state set (1 time for time-saving game state JT1, and 2 times for time-saving game states JT2, JT3, and JT4). Then, each time a minor win is achieved through the win/fail lottery, the value stored in the minor win count memory area is updated (decremented by 1). As a result, the value stored in the minor win count memory area becomes the remaining number of minor wins (the number of minor wins remaining until the set time-saving game state ends).
Furthermore, when a time-saving game state is set, the initial value of the remaining time-saving win count is stored in the time-saving win count memory area, corresponding to the type of time-saving game state set (1 time for time-saving game state JT1, 2 times for time-saving game state JT2, 10,000 times for time-saving game state JT3, and 200 times for time-saving game state JT4). Then, each time a time-saving bonus is awarded through a win/fail lottery, the value stored in the time-saving win count memory area is updated (decremented by 1). As a result, the value stored in the time-saving win count memory area becomes the remaining time-saving win count (the number of remaining time-saving bonus awards until the currently set time-saving game state ends).

The following provides a more detailed explanation of how to set the game state.
(1) When a minor win is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) and the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, in this case the game state when the display of the minor win symbol Y1 stops is a non-time-saving game state, and therefore the reference time game state (the game state at the time when various number updates are performed in the special symbol change stop processing and the processing to terminate or maintain the set time-saving game state is performed based on the results of said updates) is also a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, when the minor win symbol Y1 is determined and the reference time game state is a non-time-saving game state (1-S1 in Figure 130(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area and a special game is executed during the minor win game based on said determination, the game state after the end of the special game is set to time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1) (see Figure 130(b)).

(2) When a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1), when the time-saving game state JT1 is set, the time-saving count memory area stores the initial value of the remaining special symbol variation count as the time-saving count (100 times), the minor win completion count memory area stores the initial value of the remaining minor win count as the minor win completion count as the minor win completion count as the minor win completion count as the minor win completion count as the minor win completion count as the minor win completion count as the minor win completion count. Then, as shown in Figure 130(a), the time-saving game state JT1 ends when any of the following time-saving termination conditions are met: (1-F1) the number of special symbol variations reaches the aforementioned time-saving number (100 times), (1-F2) the number of minor wins reaches the aforementioned number of minor wins ending (1 time), or (1-F3) the number of time-saving bonus wins reaches the aforementioned number of time-saving bonuses ending (1 time). When the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, the game state changes to the normal game state.
In other words, as a result of updating the remaining number of special symbol variations, the remaining number of minor wins, and the remaining number of time-saving wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, if any of the time-saving termination conditions (1-F1) to (1-F3) described above are met, the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state is changed to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (1-F1) to (1-F3) are met, the game state remains in the time-saving game state JT1.
As mentioned above, during the shortened time game state JT1, the game balls are launched towards the second game area 12b, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. Also, the number of shortened time rounds is 100, the probability of winning a minor win is 2/300, and the probability of winning a shortened time bonus is 3/300 (see Figure 129(a)), so it is not guaranteed that a minor win or a shortened time bonus will be won before the number of special symbol variations reaches the shortened time round (100). In other words, it is possible that the shortened time termination condition (1-F1) will be met without winning a minor win or a shortened time bonus.

Here, if a minor win is achieved during the time-saving game state JT1 through a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the update of the remaining minor win count (1 decrement) performed in the special symbol variation stop processing described above will satisfy the time-saving termination condition (1-F2). As a result, the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, so the reference game state becomes the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the above case, the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, and the reference game state becomes the non-time-saving game state (Figure 130(a), (1-S2)). When a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area and a special game is executed during the minor win game based on this determination, the game state after the end of the special game is set again to the time-saving game state JT1 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) (see Figure 130(b)).

Furthermore, if the number of special symbol variations reaches the number of time-saving rounds (100) without winning a minor prize or a time-saving bonus, and the time-saving bonus termination condition (1-F1) is met, the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, up to four second special symbol random numbers may be stored in reserve. The second special symbol random numbers that were stored in reserve when the time-saving game state ended (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining special 2 reserves) are processed with priority over the first special symbol random numbers acquired based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize entry 15. However, since the game state at the time the win/loss lottery based on the remaining special 2 reserves is conducted is the non-time-saving game state, the reference game state is also the non-time-saving game state.
If a minor win is determined by the lottery based on the remaining reserves of Special 2 and the minor win symbol Y2 is selected, the game state after the special game executed via that selection is set to the time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1) (Figure 130(a), (1-S2)). Also, if a time-saving bonus is awarded by the lottery based on the remaining reserves of Special 2 and the time-saving symbol J1 is selected, the game state after the time-saving symbol J1 is displayed is set to the time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2) (Figure 130(a), (2-S1)).

(3) When the bonus time is awarded and the bonus time symbol J1 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the bonus time game state JT1 (low probability bonus time game state LJT1) If the bonus time is awarded and the bonus time symbol J1 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the bonus time game state JT1, the bonus time termination condition (1-F3) is met as a result of the update of the remaining bonus time award count (1 decrement) performed in the special symbol variation stop processing described above. As a result the bonus time game state JT1 ends and the non-bonus time game state is set, the reference time game state becomes the non-bonus time game state. Therefore, in the above case, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, and the game state at the time of reference becomes a non-time-saving game state (2-S1 in Figure 130(a)), and the game state after the time-saving symbol J1 stops is set to the time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2) (see Figure 130(c)).

(4) When a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2), when the time-saving game state JT2 is set, the time-saving count memory area is set to store the initial value of the remaining special symbol variation count as time-saving (10,000 times), the minor win completion count memory area is set to store the minor win completion count as the initial value of the remaining minor win count as Then, as shown in Figure 130(a), the time-saving game state JT2 ends when any of the following time-saving termination conditions are met: (2-F1) the number of special symbol variations reaches the aforementioned time-saving number (10,000 times), (2-F2) the number of minor wins reaches the aforementioned number of minor wins ending (2 times), or (2-F3) the number of time-saving bonuses reaches the aforementioned number of time-saving bonuses ending (2 times). When the time-saving game state JT2 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, the game state changes to the normal game state.
In other words, as a result of updating the remaining number of special symbol variations, remaining number of minor wins, and remaining number of time-saving wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, if any of the time-saving termination conditions (2-F1) to (2-F3) described above are met, the time-saving game state JT2 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state is changed to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (2-F1) to (2-F3) are met, the game state remains in the time-saving game state JT2.
As mentioned above, even during the shortened play state JT2, game balls are launched towards the second play area 12b, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. Also, since the number of shortened play rounds is 10,000, the probability of winning a minor win is 2/300, and the probability of winning a shortened play round is 3/300 (see Figure 129(a)), the shortened play round termination condition (2-F1) is practically never met.

Here, if a minor win is achieved during the shortened play state JT2 through a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined (when the first minor win symbol Y2 is determined in the shortened play state JT2), the number of minor wins is 2. Therefore, the shortened play state (2-F2) is not met by the update of the remaining minor win count (1 decrement) performed in the special symbol variation stop processing described above, and the shortened play state JT2 does not end. In other words, at the time the remaining minor win count is updated, the play state remains the shortened play state JT2, and the play state at the time of reference is the shortened play state JT2. Therefore, in the above case, when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined and the reference game state becomes the time-saving game state JT2 (3-S1 in Figure 130(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on this determination and the special game is executed, the game state after the completion of the special game is set to the time-saving game state JT3 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT3) (see Figure 130(b)).

(5) When the bonus is awarded and the bonus symbol J1 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the bonus time game state JT2 (low probability bonus time game state LJT2) When the bonus is awarded and the bonus symbol J1 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the bonus time game state JT2 (when the first bonus symbol J1 is determined in the bonus time game state JT2), the number of bonus wins is 2, and therefore the bonus time termination condition (2-F3) is not met by the update of the remaining bonus win count (1 decrement) performed in the special symbol variation stop processing described above, and the bonus time game state JT2 does not end. In other words, at the time the remaining bonus win count is updated, the game state remains in the bonus time game state JT2, so the reference game state is the bonus time game state JT2. Therefore, in the above case, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, and the game state at the time of reference becomes the time-saving game state JT2 (1-S3 in Figure 130(a)), and the game state after the time-saving symbol J1 stops is set to the time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1) (see Figure 130(c)).

(6) When a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state JT3 (low probability time-saving game state LJT3), when the time-saving game state JT3 is set, the time-saving count memory area is stored with the initial value of the remaining special symbol variation count as time-saving (10,000 times), the minor win completion count memory area is stored with the initial value of the remaining minor win count as minor wins (2 times), and the time-saving win completion count memory area is stored with the initial value of the remaining time-saving win count as time-saving wins (10,000 times). Then, as shown in Figure 130(a), the time-saving game state JT3 ends when any of the following time-saving termination conditions are met: (3-F1) the number of special symbol variations reaches the aforementioned time-saving number (10,000 times), (3-F2) the number of minor wins reaches the aforementioned number of minor wins ending (2 times), or (3-F3) the number of time-saving bonus wins reaches the aforementioned number of time-saving bonuses ending (10,000 times). When the time-saving game state JT3 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, the game state changes to the normal game state.
In other words, as a result of updating the remaining number of special symbol variations, the remaining number of minor wins, and the remaining number of time-saving wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, if any of the time-saving termination conditions (3-F1) to (3-F3) described above are met, the time-saving game state JT3 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (3-F1) to (3-F3) are met, the game state remains in the time-saving game state JT3.
As mentioned above, even during the shortened time game state JT3, game balls are launched towards the second game area 12b, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. Also, the number of shortened time rounds is 10,000, the probability of winning a minor win is 2/300, and the probability of winning a shortened time bonus is 3/300 (see Figure 129(a)), so in practice the shortened time termination condition (3-F1) is never met. Furthermore, since the number of shortened time bonus wins that ends is 10,000, in practice the shortened time termination condition (3-F3) is never met either.

Here, if a minor win is achieved during the time-saving game state JT3 through a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined (when the first minor win symbol Y2 is determined in the time-saving game state JT3), the number of minor wins is 2. Therefore, the update of the remaining minor win count (1 decrement) performed in the special symbol variation stop processing described above does not satisfy the time-saving termination condition (3-F2), and the time-saving game state JT3 does not end. In other words, at the time the remaining minor win count is updated, the game state remains the time-saving game state JT3, and the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT3. Therefore, in the above case, when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined and the reference game state becomes the time-saving game state JT3 (4-S1 in Figure 130(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on this determination and the special game is executed, the game state after the completion of the special game is set to the time-saving game state JT4 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT4) (see Figure 130(b)).

(7) When the bonus is awarded and the bonus symbol J1 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the bonus time game state JT3 (low probability bonus time game state LJT3), since the number of bonus wins in the bonus time game state JT3 is 10,000, even if the bonus is awarded and the bonus symbol J1 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the bonus time game state JT3, the bonus time termination condition (3-F3) is not actually met. In that case, when the remaining number of bonus wins is updated in the special symbol variation stop processing described above, the game state remains in the bonus time game state JT3, so the reference game state is the bonus time game state JT3. As described above, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, and the reference game state was time-saving game state JT3, no new time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol (the setting of the time-saving game state based on the determination of the time-saving symbol becomes invalid). Therefore, even after the time-saving symbol J1 stops, the time-saving game state JT3 (low probability time-saving game state LJT3) continues (see Figure 130(c)).

(8) When a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state JT4 (low probability time-saving game state LJT4), when the time-saving game state JT4 is set, the time-saving count memory area stores the initial value of the remaining special symbol variation count as the time-saving count (200 times), the minor win completion count memory area stores the initial value of the remaining minor win count as the minor win completion count as the minor win completion count as the minor win completion count as the minor win completion count as the minor win completion count as the minor win completion count. Then, as shown in Figure 130(a), the time-saving game state JT4 ends when any of the following time-saving termination conditions are met: (4-F1) the number of times the special symbols change reaches the aforementioned time-saving number (200 times), (4-F2) the number of times a minor win is achieved reaches the aforementioned number of times the minor win ends (2 times), or (4-F3) the number of times the time-saving bonus is granted reaches the aforementioned number of times the time-saving bonus ends (200 times). When the time-saving game state JT4 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, the game state changes to the normal game state.
In other words, as a result of updating the remaining number of special symbol variations, the remaining number of minor wins, and the remaining number of time-saving wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, if any of the time-saving termination conditions (4-F1) to (4-F3) described above are met, the time-saving game state JT4 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state is changed to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (4-F1) to (4-F3) are met, the game state remains in the time-saving game state JT4.
As mentioned above, even during the shortened time game state JT4, game balls are launched towards the second game area 12b, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. Also, the number of shortened time rounds is 200, the probability of winning a minor win is 2/300, and the probability of winning a shortened time bonus is 3/300 (see Figure 129(a)), so it is not guaranteed that a minor win or a shortened time bonus will be won before the number of special symbol variations reaches the shortened time round (200). In other words, it is possible that the shortened time termination condition (4-F1) will be met without winning a minor win or a shortened time bonus.

Here, if a minor win is achieved during the shortened play state JT4 by a win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined (when the first minor win symbol Y2 is determined in the shortened play state JT4), the number of minor wins is 2. Therefore, the shortened play state (4-F2) is not met by the update of the remaining minor win count (1 decrement) performed in the special symbol variation stop processing described above, and the shortened play state JT4 does not end. In other words, at the time the remaining minor win count is updated, the play state remains the shortened play state JT4, and the play state at the time of reference is the shortened play state JT4. Therefore, in the above case, when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined and the reference game state becomes the time-saving game state JT4 (4-S2 in Figure 130(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on this determination, and the special game is executed, the game state after the completion of the special game is set again to the time-saving game state JT4 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT4) (see Figure 130(b)).

(9) When the bonus time is awarded and the bonus time symbol J1 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the bonus time game state JT4 (low probability bonus time game state LJT4), since the number of bonus time awards in the bonus time game state JT4 is 200, even if the bonus time is awarded and the bonus time symbol J1 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the bonus time game state JT4, the bonus time termination condition (4-F2) is not actually met. In that case, when the remaining number of bonus time awards is updated in the special symbol variation stop processing described above, the game state remains in the bonus time game state JT4, so the reference game state is the bonus time game state JT4. As described above, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, and the reference game state was time-saving game state JT4, no new time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol (the setting of the time-saving game state based on the determination of the time-saving symbol becomes invalid). Therefore, even after the time-saving symbol J1 stops, the time-saving game state JT4 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT4) continues (see Figure 130(c)).

Furthermore, if the number of special symbol variations reaches the number of time-saving rounds (200) without winning a minor win or a time-saving bonus, and the time-saving bonus termination condition (4-F1) is met, resulting in the end of time-saving game state JT2 and the setting of a non-time-saving game state, then, as with the end of time-saving game state JT1, up to four remaining special 2 reserves may be stored in reserve. As mentioned above, the game state at the time the win/loss lottery based on the remaining special 2 reserves is conducted is a non-time-saving game state, so the game state at the time of reference is also a non-time-saving game state.
In that case, if a minor win is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the remaining reserves of Special 2 and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the game state after the end of the special game executed via that determination is set to the shortened time game state JT1 (low probability shortened time game state LJT1) (Figure 130(a), (1-S2)). Also, if a shortened time is awarded by the win/fail lottery based on the remaining reserves of Special 2 and the shortened time symbol J1 is determined, the game state after the display of the shortened time symbol J1 is set to the shortened time game state JT2 (low probability shortened time game state LJT2) (Figure 130(a), (2-S1)).

(Gameplay of the pachinko machine P in this form)
In the pachinko machine P according to this form, as described above, the game proceeds with one of the following states set: normal game state (non-time-saving game state), low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2), low probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3), or low probability time-saving game state LJT4 (time-saving game state JT4).

When a player starts playing, the game is usually set to the normal game state. As mentioned above, during the normal game state, the game ball is launched towards the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed shooting). Also, as long as left-handed shooting is being performed, the game ball has the potential to enter only the first starting prize entry point 15, so during the normal game state, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize entry point 15. In this lottery, there is a possibility of winning a minor prize (see Figure 129(a)).
When a minor win is achieved, the minor win symbol Y1 is determined (see Figure 129(a)). During the minor win game based on this determination, if a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area, a special game is executed. In this special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y1, two round games are executed (three times in total including the minor win game), and approximately 450 prize balls can be won. After the special game ends, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) is set (see Figures 130(b) and 131).

In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, if the player follows the instructions and shoots to the left during normal gameplay, they will win a minor prize in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number. This will trigger a special game, and after the execution of that special game, the player will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) (see Figure 131).

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, as described above, the game balls are launched (shot to the right) towards the second game area 12b. Furthermore, as long as the shots are to the right, the game balls can only potentially enter the second starting prize entry point 16. Therefore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting prize entry point 16. In this lottery, there is a possibility of winning a minor win or a time-saving bonus. If a minor win is won, the minor win symbol Y2 is determined; if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined (see Figure 129(a)).

When a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, a special game is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination. In this special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y2, the round game is executed 9 times (10 times in total including the minor win game), and approximately 1500 prize balls can be won.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the number of times a minor win is completed is set to 1. When a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the remaining number of minor wins is updated during the special symbol variation stop process. The remaining number of minor wins becomes 0 (reaching the number of times the minor win is completed), thus fulfilling the time-saving end condition (1-F2) described above. At the moment this remaining number of minor wins is updated, the game state returns to the normal game state (non-time-saving game state). Therefore, the reference game state is the non-time-saving game state, and when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set again after the special game ends (see Figures 130(b) and 131).

In response to this, if the time reduction is awarded and the time reduction symbol J1 is determined, the display of the time reduction symbol J1 will be executed.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the number of times the time-saving bonus ends is set to 1. When the above time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the remaining number of time-saving bonuses is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, and the remaining number of time-saving bonuses becomes 0 (reaching the number of times the time-saving bonus ends). As a result, the time-saving bonus termination condition (1-F3) described above is met, and the game state becomes the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) when this remaining number of time-saving bonuses is updated. Therefore, the reference game state becomes the non-time-saving game state, and when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the stop display of the time-saving symbol J1 (see Figures 130(c) and 131).

In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the player performs right-hand play according to the instructions during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a minor win will occur in the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number. This will trigger a special game, after which the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) will be reset, or a time-saving bonus will be awarded in the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number. This will trigger a change in the time-saving symbol J1, and the player will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) (see Figure 131).

As mentioned above, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 100. Therefore, it is not guaranteed that a minor win or time-saving bonus will be awarded during this low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. In other words, upon transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, if a minor win or time-saving bonus is awarded before the number of special symbol spins reaches 100, then, after winning that minor win or time-saving bonus, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be reset or the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will occur.

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, as described above, the game balls are launched (shot to the right) towards the second game area 12b. Furthermore, as long as the shots are to the right, the game balls can only potentially enter the second starting prize entry point 16. Therefore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting prize entry point 16. In this lottery, there is a possibility of winning a minor win or a time-saving bonus. If a minor win is won, the minor win symbol Y2 is determined; if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined (see Figure 129(a)).

When a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, a special game is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination. In this special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y2, the round game is executed 9 times (10 times in total including the minor win game), and approximately 1500 prize balls can be won.
In this case, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the number of times a minor win can be completed is set to 2. When a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the remaining number of minor wins is updated during the special symbol variation stop process. However, the remaining number of minor wins becomes 1 (it does not reach the number of times a minor win can be completed), so the time-saving completion condition (2-F2) described above is not met. At the moment this remaining number of minor wins is updated, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2). Therefore, the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT2, and when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 is set after the special game ends (see Figures 130(b) and 131).

In response to this, if the time reduction is awarded and the time reduction symbol J1 is determined, the display of the time reduction symbol J1 will be executed.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the number of times the time-saving bonus ends is set to 2. When the above time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the remaining number of time-saving bonuses is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, but the remaining number of time-saving bonuses becomes 1 (it does not reach the number of times the time-saving bonus ends). Therefore, the time-saving bonus termination condition (2-F3) described above is not met, and the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) when this remaining number of time-saving bonuses is updated. Consequently, the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT2, so when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set after the time-saving symbol J1 is displayed (see Figures 130(b) and 131).

In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the player performs right-hand play according to the instructions during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, a minor win will occur in the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number. This will lead to the execution of a special game via that win, setting the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3), or, if the player wins a time-saving bonus in the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, the player will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) via the display of the time-saving symbol J1 (see Figure 131).

As mentioned above, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000. Therefore, in practice, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 continues until a minor win or time-saving round is awarded. After winning a minor win or time-saving round, the game transitions to either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 or the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, as described above, the game balls are launched (shot to the right) towards the second game area 12b. Furthermore, as long as the shots are to the right, the game balls can only potentially enter the second starting prize entry point 16. Therefore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting prize entry point 16. In this lottery, there is a possibility of winning a minor win or a time-saving bonus. If a minor win is won, the minor win symbol Y2 is determined; if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined (see Figure 129(a)).

When a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, a special game is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination. In this special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y2, the round game is executed 9 times (10 times in total including the minor win game), and approximately 1500 prize balls can be won.
In this case, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, the number of times a minor win can be completed is set to 2. When a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the remaining number of minor wins is updated during the special symbol variation stop process. However, the remaining number of minor wins becomes 1 (it does not reach the number of times a minor win can be completed), so the time-saving termination condition (3-F2) described above is not met. At the moment this remaining number of minor wins is updated, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3). Therefore, the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT3, and when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 is set after the special game ends (see Figures 130(b) and 131).

In response to this, if the time reduction is awarded and the time reduction symbol J1 is determined, the display of the time reduction symbol J1 will be executed.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, the number of times the time-saving bonus ends is set to 10,000. Therefore, in practice, the number of times the time-saving bonus is awarded will never reach the number of times the time-saving bonus ends. In other words, when the above time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving bonus symbol J1 is determined, the remaining number of time-saving bonus wins is updated during the special symbol variation stop process. However, the remaining number of time-saving bonus wins will never become 0 (it will not reach the number of times the time-saving bonus ends). As a result, the time-saving bonus termination condition (3-F3) described above is not met, and the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3) when this remaining number of time-saving bonus wins is updated. Therefore, the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT3, and when the time-saving bonus symbol J1 is determined, no new time-saving game state is set after the stop display of the time-saving bonus symbol J1.

In other words, in the pachinko machine P of this form, if the player follows the instructions and plays to the right during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, a minor win will occur in the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number. This will trigger a special game, after which the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 (time-saving game state JT4) will be set. On the other hand, if the player wins a time-saving bonus in the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, no transition to another time-saving game state will occur, and the currently set low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3) will continue.

As mentioned above, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 10,000. Therefore, in practice, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 continues until a minor win is achieved, after which the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4. In other words, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, it is guaranteed that a special game will be played based on a minor win, after which the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4.

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, as described above, the game balls are launched (shot to the right) towards the second game area 12b. Furthermore, as long as the shots are to the right, the game balls can only potentially enter the second starting prize entry point 16. Therefore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting prize entry point 16. In this lottery, there is a possibility of winning a minor win or a time-saving bonus. If a minor win is won, the minor win symbol Y2 is determined; if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined (see Figure 129(a)).

When a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, a special game is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination. In this special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y2, the round game is executed 9 times (10 times in total including the minor win game), and approximately 1500 prize balls can be won.
In this case, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, the number of times a minor win can be completed is set to 2. When a minor win is achieved and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the remaining number of minor wins is updated during the special symbol variation stop process. However, the remaining number of minor wins becomes 1 (it does not reach the number of times a minor win can be completed), so the time-saving completion condition (4-F2) described above is not met. At the moment this remaining number of minor wins is updated, the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 (time-saving game state JT4). Therefore, the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT4, and when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 is set again after the special game ends (see Figures 130(b) and 131).

In response to this, if the time reduction is awarded and the time reduction symbol J1 is determined, the display of the time reduction symbol J1 will be executed.
In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, the number of times time-saving bonuses are awarded is set to 200, so in practice, the number of times time-saving bonuses are awarded will never reach the number of times time-saving bonuses are awarded. That is, when the above time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving bonus symbol J1 is determined, the remaining number of time-saving bonuses is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, but the remaining number of time-saving bonuses will never become 0 (it will not reach the number of times time-saving bonuses are awarded), so the time-saving bonus termination condition (4-F3) described above is not met, and the game state remains in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 (time-saving game state JT4) when this remaining number of time-saving bonuses is updated. Therefore, the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT4, so when the time-saving bonus symbol J1 is determined, no new time-saving game state is set after the stop display of the time-saving bonus symbol J1.

In other words, in the pachinko machine P of this form, if the player follows the instructions and shoots to the right during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, a minor win will occur in the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number. After executing the special game triggered by this win, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 (time-saving game state JT4) will be set again. On the other hand, if a time-saving bonus is awarded in the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, there will be no transition to another time-saving game state, and the currently set low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 (time-saving game state JT4) will continue.

As mentioned above, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, the number of time-saving spins is set to 200. Therefore, it is not guaranteed that a minor win will occur during this low-probability time-saving game state LJT4. In other words, when transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, if a minor win occurs before the number of special symbol spins reaches 200, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 will be reset after that minor win.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, during the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) and LJT4 (time-saving game state JT4), the decrease in game balls as the game progresses can be suppressed compared to the normal game state due to the prize balls awarded based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize entry 16. Furthermore, in the special game that can be played when a minor win is achieved in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number (win/loss lottery held during the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1 and LJT4), it is possible to play a greater number of rounds than in the special game that can be played when a minor win is achieved in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number (win/loss lottery held during the normal game state). In other words, the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1 and LJT4 are more advantageous game states than the normal game state.
Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, more time-saving rounds are set than in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. Therefore, the probability of winning a small prize is higher in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 than in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. In other words, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 is a more advantageous game state than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

Here, in order to transition the game state from the normal game state, which is the most likely state to be in at the start of the game, to the advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, first, in the normal game state, a minor win is obtained through a win/fail lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the game state is transitioned to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 through a special game based on that win. In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, before the number of special symbol variations reaches 100 time-saving rounds, a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number is obtained to grant time-saving, and the game state is transitioned to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, although it is practically impossible to transition to the normal game state by reaching the time-saving count through the special symbol spin count, if you win the time-saving grant through the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number, you will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. Therefore, you should win a small win before winning the time-saving grant through the said win/fail lottery, and transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 through the special game based on that win. Once you have transitioned to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, you will not transition to any other game state by winning the time-saving grant, and it is also practically impossible to transition to the normal game state by reaching the time-saving count through the special symbol spin count. Therefore, you can reliably win a small win, and transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 through the special game based on that win. In other words, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, if a minor win is obtained before the time-saving bonus is awarded, approximately 3000 prize balls are awarded through the execution of a special game based on that minor win, and then another special game based on a minor win that is guaranteed to be obtained in the subsequent low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 (a total of two special game executions), before transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4.

Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, since winning a time-saving bonus does not transition to other game states, if small wins are repeatedly achieved before the number of special symbol spins reaches 200 time-saving spins, the execution of a special game that can award approximately 1500 prize balls, combined with the advantageous setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, results in the acquisition of a large number of prize balls, increasing the player's enjoyment.

Thus, in this form of pachinko machine P, before transitioning from the normal game state to the most advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, the player stays in two time-saving game states: one where the goal is to win a time-saving bonus before the number of special symbol spins reaches the time-saving bonus count (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1), and another where the goal is to win a small bonus before winning a time-saving bonus (the advantage of the time-saving game state to which the player transitions differs depending on whether they win a time-saving bonus or a small bonus). In other words, by staying in time-saving game states with different gameplay characteristics before transitioning from the normal game state to the most advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, a novel gameplay experience can be provided to the player, increasing their interest.

(Overview of processing in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
Next, we will explain the overview of the processes executed by the main control board 100 in accordance with the progress of the special game, minor win game, and special game as described above, using a flowchart, focusing on the differences from the first to sixth forms. In particular, we will describe in detail the control related to setting the game state.
Furthermore, for processes that are the same as those in the first to sixth forms, or processes that are substantially the same as those in the first to sixth forms, and for which a person skilled in the art can understand the method of implementation in this form (how to apply it to this form), the same step numbers as in the first to sixth forms will be assigned, and explanations will be omitted in principle.

First, the process of stopping the special symbol variation, which is executed when the special symbol variation display ends, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 132.
The processing in steps 1000 to 1003 is the same as the processing in steps 1000 to 1003 of the special symbol variation stop processing in the first form (see Figure 37), so the explanation is omitted here.
In step 1003-41, which follows the execution of step 1003 described above, the main CPU 101 executes a remaining special pattern variation count update process to update the remaining special pattern variation count. Then, the process proceeds to step 1003-42.

In step 1003-42, the main CPU 101 executes a remaining small win count update process to update the remaining small win count. Then, the process proceeds to step 1003-43.
In step 1003-43, the main CPU 101 executes a remaining time-saving bonus win count update process to update the remaining number of bonus wins. Then, the process proceeds to step 1003-44.

In steps 1003-44, the main CPU 101 executes game state control processing related to setting the game state. Then, it proceeds to step 1004, which executes the process of setting the stop display time.
The processing in steps 1004 to 1005 is the same as the processing in steps 1004 to 1005 of the special symbol variation stop processing in the first form (see Figure 37), so the explanation is omitted here.

Next, the process of updating the remaining number of special symbol variations in step 1003-41 of the special symbol variation stop process described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 133.
In step 1010-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state LJT1, low probability time-saving game state LJT2, low probability time-saving game state LJT3, low probability time-saving game state LJT4), that is, whether a time-saving game state is being set. If it determines that the game is not in a time-saving game state (i.e., it is in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state)), it terminates the remaining special symbol variation count update process. On the other hand, if it determines that the game is in a time-saving game state, it proceeds to step 1011-4.
In step 1011-4, the main CPU 101 decrements (updates) the remaining special pattern variation count by 1. Here, different processing (such as the type of count to be updated) is performed depending on whether the stopped display is for the first or second special pattern, but a detailed explanation is omitted. As mentioned above, the remaining special pattern variation count to be updated is for the second special pattern. Then, the remaining special pattern variation count update process is terminated.

Next, the process of updating the number of remaining small wins in step 1003-42 of the special symbol variation stop process described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 134.
In step 1020-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped symbol is a minor win symbol or not. If it determines that it is not a minor win symbol (i.e., it is a time-saving symbol or a losing symbol), it terminates the process of updating the remaining number of minor wins. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a minor win symbol, it proceeds to step 1021-4.
In step 1021-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state or not. If it determines that it is not a time-saving game state, it terminates the process of updating the remaining number of small wins. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a time-saving game state, it proceeds to step 1022-4.
In step 1022-4, the main CPU 101 decrements (updates) the remaining number of small wins by 1. Then, it terminates the process of updating the remaining number of small wins.

Next, the process of updating the remaining number of bonus round wins in step 1003-43 of the special symbol variation stop process described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 135.
In step 1026-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped symbol is a time-saving symbol. If it determines that it is not a time-saving symbol (i.e., it is a minor win symbol or a losing symbol), it terminates the process of updating the remaining number of time-saving wins. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a time-saving symbol, it proceeds to step 1027-4.
In step 1027-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state or not. If it determines that it is not a time-saving game state, it terminates the process of updating the remaining number of time-saving wins. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a time-saving game state, it proceeds to step 1028-4.
In step 1028-4, the main CPU 101 decrements (updates) the remaining number of bonus round wins by 1. Then, it terminates the process of updating the remaining number of bonus round wins.

Next, the game state control process in step 1003-44 of the special symbol variation stop process described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 136.
In step 1030-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state. If it determines that it is not a time-saving game state, it terminates the game state control process. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a time-saving game state, it proceeds to step 1031-4.
In step 1031-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (i.e., time-saving termination conditions related to the number of time-saving rounds, the number of times a minor win ends, and the number of times a time-saving win ends) have been met. If it determines that none of them have been met, it proceeds to step 1033-4. On the other hand, if it determines that they have been met, it proceeds to the next step 1032-4.

In step 1032-4, the main CPU 101 executes a normal game state setting process, which sets the normal game state by ending the currently set time-saving game state and setting a non-time-saving game state. Specifically, it turns off the first time-saving game flag indicating that time-saving game state JT1 is set, the second time-saving game flag indicating that time-saving game state JT2 is set, the third time-saving game flag indicating that time-saving game state JT3 is set, and the fourth time-saving game flag indicating that time-saving game state JT4 is set, and clears the time-saving count memory area, the small win end count memory area, and the time-saving win end count memory area. As a result, the currently set low-probability time-saving game states LJT1, LJT2, LJT3, or LJT4 are ended, and the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 1033-4.
In step 1033-4, the main CPU 101 stores the game state at that time as the reference game state in a predetermined memory area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, if it is determined in step 1031-4 that any of the time-saving termination conditions have been met, and the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) is set in step 1032-4, the non-time-saving game state is stored as the reference game state. Also, if it is determined in step 1031-4 that none of the time-saving termination conditions have been met, the currently set time-saving game state is stored as the reference game state. Then, the process proceeds to step 1034-4.

In step 1034-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped symbol is a time-saving symbol or not. If it determines that it is not a time-saving symbol, the game state control process ends. On the other hand, if it determines that it is a time-saving symbol, the process proceeds to step 1035-4.
In step 1035-4, the main CPU 101 performs the process of setting or not setting the time-saving game state based on the determination of the time-saving symbols, according to the stored reference game state. Then, it terminates the game state control process.
Specifically, if the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state JT2, and the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is the time-saving symbol J1, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time-saving flag, sets the time-saving count to "100" (initial value of remaining special symbol fluctuation counts) in the time-saving count memory area, sets the number of minor wins to "1" (initial value of remaining minor wins) in the minor win end count memory area, and sets the number of time-saving wins to "1" (initial value of remaining time-saving wins) in the time-saving win end count memory area. This sets the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1).
Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state and the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is the time-saving symbol J1, the main CPU 101 turns on the second time-saving flag, sets the time-saving count to "10000" (initial value of remaining special symbol fluctuation counts) in the time-saving count memory area, sets the number of minor wins to "2" (initial value of remaining minor wins) in the minor win end count memory area, and sets the number of time-saving wins to "2" (initial value of remaining time-saving wins) in the time-saving win end count memory area. This sets the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2).
Furthermore, if the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT3 or JT4, and the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is the time-saving symbol J1, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing related to setting the time-saving game state. As a result, no new time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 or LJT4 (time-saving game state JT3 or JT4) that is currently set continues.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a special game termination process (step 706 of the special symbol-related control process (see Figure 27)) is executed after the special game ends. However, since this process is almost identical to the special game termination process in the third embodiment (see Figure 93), an explanation is omitted here.
In this special game termination process, if the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state and the special symbol that was stopped and displayed was a minor win symbol Y1 or Y2, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time-saving game flag, sets the time-saving count to "100" (initial value of remaining special symbol fluctuation counts) in the time-saving count memory area, sets the minor win end count to "1" (initial value of remaining minor win counts) in the minor win end count memory area, and sets the time-saving win end count to "1" (initial value of remaining time-saving win counts) in the time-saving win end count memory area. This sets the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state JT2 and the special symbol that has stopped and been displayed is the minor win symbol Y2, the main CPU 101 turns on the third time-saving game flag, sets the time-saving count to "10000" (initial value of remaining special symbol fluctuation count) in the time-saving count memory area, sets the minor win end count to "2" (initial value of remaining minor win count) in the minor win end count memory area, and sets the time-saving win end count to "10000" (initial value of remaining time-saving win count) in the time-saving win end count memory area. This sets the low probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3).
Furthermore, if the game state at the time of reference is the time-saving game state JT3 or JT4, and the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is the minor win symbol Y2, the main CPU 101 turns on the fourth time-saving game flag, sets the time-saving count to "200" (initial value of remaining special symbol fluctuation counts) in the time-saving count memory area, sets the minor win end count to "2" (initial value of remaining minor win counts) in the minor win end count memory area, and sets the time-saving win end count to "200" (initial value of remaining time-saving win counts) in the time-saving win end count memory area. This sets the low probability time-saving game state LJT4 (time-saving game state JT4).

(Overview of various effects in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
Next, an overview of the various effects performed by the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 137 to 141. Note that these figures only show the components necessary for explaining the effects in this embodiment, and other components (such as hold images and mini symbols) are omitted. Furthermore, components similar to those in the first to sixth embodiments will generally not be explained.

(1) Normal gameplay state (excluding the display of the second special symbol related to the remaining special symbol 2)
During normal gameplay, except when the second special symbol related to the remaining special symbol is being displayed, the display unit 21a displays a normal background image corresponding to the normal gameplay state (see Figures 137(a) to (e), etc.).

Furthermore, during normal gameplay, excluding the period when the second special symbol related to the remaining special symbol is being displayed, a variation effect is performed on the display unit 21a that notifies the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol.
Although not specifically illustrated, if the result of the draw is a loss, the variation animation will be executed using the same normal non-winning variation pattern, no-development reach variation pattern, or development reach variation pattern as in the first and sixth forms, and the stop display of the animation symbol 50 will be shown according to the non-winning pattern.
Furthermore, if the result of the draw is a minor win (minor win symbol Y1 is determined), a variation animation is performed either with a reach variation that does not develop or a reach variation that does develop. After the animation symbol 50 is stopped according to the winning pattern, a special game execution indication is performed to indicate that the execution of a special game has been decided (for example, the display of a special game execution indication image that says "BONUS!!") (see Figures 137(a) to (f)). After that, similar to the sixth form, various animations are performed in conjunction with the execution of the minor win game or special game (special area entry instruction animation, special area entry indication animation, special game in-game animation, right-hand shooting indication, etc.).

(2) Low probability time-saving game state LJT1
When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, the display unit 21a displays a low-probability time-saving background image A corresponding to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (see Figures 138(a) to (e), etc.), and also displays a low-probability time-saving LJT1 setting suggestion effect (for example, displaying a low-probability time-saving LJT1 setting suggestion image that says "Chance Zone Start!"), and a right-hand shooting suggestion (see Figure 138(a), etc.). Furthermore, a game explanation image showing the game content of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (for example, a text image that says "Get Battle Mode for a chance to win RUSH!!") is also displayed (see Figure 138(a), etc.).
Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LTJ1, a countdown display of the remaining number of special symbol variations is executed. When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, the countdown display of the remaining number of special symbol variations is first shown, indicating the initial value of the remaining number of special symbol variations (i.e., "100" indicating 100 time-saving variations corresponding to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1). After that, each time a special symbol variation is displayed, the aforementioned number is counted down by 1 (see Figures 138(a) to (e)).

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a variation effect is performed on the display unit 21a that notifies the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbols.
Although not specifically illustrated, if the result of the draw is a loss, the variation animation will be executed using the same normal non-winning variation pattern or development-enabled reach variation pattern as in the first and sixth forms, and the stop display of the animation symbol 50 will be shown according to the non-winning pattern.
Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, if the result of the draw is a minor win (minor win symbol Y2 is determined), a variation animation is performed due to a development-enabled reach variation, and after the stopping display of the animation symbol 50, which is composed of numbers etc., depending on the winning pattern, an indication to execute a special game is performed. After that, as in (1), various animations (special area entry instruction animation, special area entry indication animation, special game in-game animation, right-hand shooting indication, etc.) are performed in conjunction with the execution of the minor win game or special game.
Furthermore, if the result of the lottery is a win of the time-saving bonus (time-saving symbol J1 is determined), a variation animation is performed by a reach variation without development, and the first stop symbol, second stop symbol, and third stop symbol are all displayed as specific animation symbols 50 that suggest a transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (for example, an animation symbol 50 with the letter "B" that does not suggest a win of a minor prize, etc.) (see Figures 138(c) to (e)).

(3) Low probability time-saving game state LJT2
As mentioned above, if you win a time-saving bonus during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 and the time-saving symbol J1 stops and is displayed, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set.
When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set, the display unit 21a displays the low-probability time-saving background image B (see Figure 138(f)) corresponding to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and also displays a low-probability time-saving LJT2 setting suggestion effect (for example, displaying a low-probability time-saving LJT2 setting suggestion image that says "Battle Mode!") and a right-hand shooting suggestion (see Figure 138(f)). Furthermore, a game explanation image showing the game content of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (for example, a text image that says "Win the battle and get RUSH!!") is also displayed (see Figure 138(f)). Note that during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the number of special symbol variations does not actually reach the number of time-saving rounds, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 continues until a small win or time-saving round is awarded, so the remaining special symbol variation countdown display is not executed.

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, just like during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a variation effect is performed on the display unit 21a that notifies the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbols. In addition, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, in order to draw attention to the display of the opponent search image and the battle effect, which will be described later, a variation effect is performed on the display unit 21a using an extremely small effect symbol 50 in a predetermined location (for example, the upper right corner).
Although not specifically illustrated, if the result of the draw is a loss, a special variation pattern is executed in which the first, second, and third stop symbols terminate their variation display almost simultaneously, and the variation symbol 50 is displayed in a non-winning manner.
Furthermore, if the result of the draw is a minor win (minor win symbol Y2 is determined), the special variation pattern described above will be executed, and the stop display of the effect symbol 50 will be shown depending on the winning pattern (see Figures 139(c) to (d)).
Furthermore, if the result of the lottery is a win for the time reduction (the time reduction symbol J1 is determined), the special variation pattern described above will be executed, and the stop display of the effect symbol 50 will be shown in the non-winning pattern (see Figure 140(c)).

Here, each time a win/loss lottery is performed and a special symbol variation display is executed, a variation performance is performed in conjunction with the variation display. However, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, until the result of the win/loss lottery described above is a win of a minor prize or a time-saving bonus and the variation performance based on that win is started (i.e., while the win/loss lottery described above continues to determine a loss), the display unit 21a displays an opponent search image indicating that it is searching for an opponent for the battle performance described later (see Figure 141(a)).
Then, if the result of the aforementioned draw is a minor win or a time-saving bonus, a battle sequence is executed on the display unit 21a while the special variation pattern is running (see Figures 139(b) to (c) and 140(b) to (c)). In this battle sequence, a battle takes place against a predetermined enemy character, and a battle image is displayed that indicates victory or defeat against the enemy character as a result of the battle. If the result of the aforementioned draw is a minor win, the battle sequence displays a battle result indicating victory against the enemy character (see Figures 139(b) to (c)), and if the result of the aforementioned draw is a time-saving bonus, the battle sequence displays a battle result indicating defeat against the enemy character (see Figures 140(b) to (c)). In other words, the display of a battle result indicating victory against the enemy character notifies the player of a minor win, and the display of a battle result indicating defeat against the enemy character notifies the player of a time-saving bonus.

In this form of pachinko machine P, the battle sequence is executed only when the result of the aforementioned win/loss lottery is a minor win or a time-saving bonus, and the result of the battle sequence makes it possible to determine whether a minor win or a time-saving bonus has been won. However, this is not the only option, and the battle sequence may also be executed with a predetermined probability when the result of the aforementioned win/loss lottery is a loss. For example, in the battle sequence executed when the result is a loss, the result of the battle with the enemy character may be displayed to indicate that the result of the win/loss lottery was neither a minor win nor a time-saving bonus (i.e., a loss).

Furthermore, if a minor win is achieved through the aforementioned draw, and the minor win is announced through a battle sequence, then the execution of two special games based on the minor win, and the minor win that is guaranteed to be obtained in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 after the completion of the special game executed through that win, as well as the execution of a special game and an indication of transition to a favorable state (for example, the display of a special game indication image that says "3000 BONUS" and a low-probability time-saving LJT4 transition indication image that says "RUSH acquired!") will be performed (see Figure 139(d)).
On the other hand, if the player wins the bonus time grant through the aforementioned lottery and the win is announced through the battle sequence, an indication of not transitioning to a favorable state is performed, suggesting that the player will not transition to the low-probability bonus time game state LJT4 (for example, an image indicating not transitioning to the low-probability bonus time LJT4, such as "RUSH acquisition failed," is displayed) (see Figure 140(c)). Then, when the bonus time symbol J1 stops and is displayed, the low-probability bonus time game state LJT1 is set, and thereafter the same sequence as in (2) is performed (see Figure 140(d)).

(4) Low probability time-saving game state LJT3
As mentioned above, if a minor win is achieved during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 is set after the special game performed as a result of that win ends.
During this low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, a special special game image is displayed that gives the impression that the special game executed via the win of a small prize in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is continuing to run until a small prize is won and the special game based on that win ends (see Figure 139(e)). This makes it possible to give the impression that the period from when the special game executed via the win of a small prize in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 starts, through the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 set after the end of the special game, until the special game executed via the win of a small prize in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 ends, is a series of prize-increasing periods in which approximately 3,000 prize balls are won (i.e., one special game in which approximately 3,000 prize balls can be won is being played), thereby increasing the player's interest.
Although not specifically illustrated, when a minor win is achieved and the minor win game based on that win is executed, various effects associated with the execution of the minor win game (such as special area entry instruction effects and special area entry suggestion effects) are performed along with the display of the special game image mentioned above.

(5) Low probability time-saving game state LJT4
As mentioned above, if a minor win is achieved during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 is set after the special game performed as a result of that win ends.
When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 is set, the display unit 21a displays a low-probability time-saving background image C (see Figure 139(f)) corresponding to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, and a low-probability time-saving LJT4 setting suggestion effect (for example, displaying a low-probability time-saving LJT4 setting suggestion image that says "RUSH entry!") and a right-hand shooting suggestion are performed (see Figure 139(f)). Also, during the low-probability time-saving game state LTJ4, the remaining special symbol variation countdown display is performed, similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (see Figure 139(f)).
Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, just like during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a variation effect is performed on the display unit 21a that notifies the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbols. Note that this variation effect is the same as in (2), so the explanation is omitted.

(6) When the number of special symbols remaining in Special 2 that were stored is displayed when the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT4 ends due to reaching the number of time-saving rounds As described above, when the number of times the special symbols have changed in the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT4 reaches the number of time-saving rounds, the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT4 ends and the normal game state is set.
In this case, if a Special 2 remaining reserve is stored, the win/loss lottery and the display of the special symbol variation based on the Special 2 remaining reserve will be executed in priority to the first special symbol random number, and a final chance effect will be executed to announce the result of the win/loss lottery for the stored Special 2 remaining reserve (see Figure 141).

The Final Chance sequence begins when the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT4 ends due to reaching the limit of the time-saving rounds. If there are any remaining Special 2 reserves that result in a minor win or a time-saving bonus, the sequence continues until the special symbol display based on the earliest stored Special 2 reserve is complete. Alternatively, if only remaining Special 2 reserves that result in a loss are stored, the sequence continues until the special symbol display based on all remaining Special 2 reserves is complete.

In this Final Chance sequence, when the number of time-saving rounds is reached and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT4 ends, an FC (Final Chance) sequence indication (for example, an FC sequence indication image saying "Final Chance!") is displayed, along with an image explaining the content of the Final Chance sequence (for example, a text image saying "Character A appears for BONUS + Chance Zone, Character B appears for Battle Mode") (see Figures 141(a) to (c)).

After that, although not specifically illustrated, a dramatic build-up sequence is performed to heighten anticipation for the character's appearance.
Then, if a special 2 remaining reserve that results in a minor win is stored in the lottery, an appearance animation (not specifically shown in the diagram) indicating the appearance of Character A will be performed along with the display of the special symbols based on the first stored special 2 remaining reserve, and an FC minor win indication animation (for example, the display of an FC minor win indication image that says "Character A appears! BONUS! Chance Zone revived") will be performed (see Figure 141(d)).

Furthermore, when a special 2 remaining reserve that results in a time-saving bonus is stored through a lottery, an appearance animation (not specifically illustrated) indicating the appearance of Character B is executed in conjunction with the display of the special symbol based on the first stored special 2 remaining reserve, and an FC time-saving bonus winning indication animation (for example, the display of an FC time-saving bonus winning indication image such as "Character B Appears! Battle Mode Revived") is executed (see Figure 141(e)).

Furthermore, if only the remaining special 2 reserves that result in a loss in the win/loss lottery are stored, the following will be executed in conjunction with the display of the special symbols based on the last stored special 2 reserve: a non-appearance animation indicating that no character will appear (not specifically illustrated), an FC loss indication animation suggesting that all special 2 reserves are losses (for example, the display of an FC loss indication image that says "Does not appear..."), and an end indication animation suggesting that the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT4 has ended (for example, the display of an end indication image that says "Chance Zone Ended" when the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 has ended, or the display of an end indication image that says "RUSH Ended" when the low probability time-saving game state LJT4 has ended) (see Figure 141(f)).
Subsequently, the display unit 21a displays a normal background image corresponding to the normal game state (see Figure 141(g)), and a suggestion to play to the left is made (see Figure 141(g)).
Furthermore, before the normal background image is displayed, a result display animation may be executed that suggests the number of special games played and the total number of prize balls won during the transition from the normal game state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, and then back to the normal game state.

(Modified version of the pachinko machine P according to this form)
(1) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, in the lottery for winning or losing based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize entry opening 15 or the second starting prize entry opening 16, it was possible to win only minor prizes, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the system may be set up so that a different lottery result from a minor win is possible, and a big win that triggers a special game can also be won. Furthermore, even when a big win is achieved, it may be possible to perform control over the setting of the time-saving game state in the same manner as in this form.
Specifically, for example, the system is set so that a jackpot can be won in the draw based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15, and a jackpot symbol X1 is determined when a jackpot is determined. When a jackpot symbol X1 is determined, it may be possible to perform control regarding the setting of a time-saving game state in the same way as when a minor prize symbol Y1 is determined in this embodiment. Alternatively, when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined, it may be possible to perform control regarding the setting of a time-saving game state different from when a minor prize symbol Y1 is determined. For example, if a jackpot symbol X1 is determined during normal gameplay, it may be possible to set a low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 after the special game based on that determination ends, without going through the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1, LJT2, and LJT3.
Furthermore, for example, the system may be set so that a jackpot can be won in the draw for winning or losing based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16, and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined when a jackpot is determined. When the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, it may be possible to perform control regarding the setting of the time-saving game state in the same way as when the minor prize symbol Y2 is determined in this embodiment. Also, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, it may be possible to perform control regarding the setting of the time-saving game state different from when the minor prize symbol Y2 is determined. For example, if the jackpot symbol X2 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 may be set after the end of the special game based on that determination, without going through the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2 and LJT3.
Furthermore, there may be multiple types of winning symbols that are determined when a jackpot is won, and control may be performed to set different time-saving game states for each type of winning symbol.
Even in the manner described above, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(2) In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, there is only one type of small win symbol that is determined when a small win is achieved, and only one type of time-saving symbol that is determined when a time-saving bonus is awarded. However, this is not limited to this, and multiple types of small win symbols and time-saving symbols may be provided. Furthermore, control is performed regarding the setting of the time-saving game state according to the determined small win symbol or time-saving symbol (for example, different control is performed regarding the setting of the time-saving game state depending on the type of small win symbol or time-saving symbol that is determined).
For example, the system may be configured such that when a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on a first special random number, multiple types of minor win symbols can be determined. If a predetermined minor win symbol is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set after the special game executed via that determination ends. If a minor win symbol other than the predetermined minor win symbol is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 is set after the special game executed via that determination ends.

(3) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the remaining number of special symbol variations, the remaining number of minor wins, and the remaining number of time-saving wins are updated during the special symbol variation stop processing, and the time at which the processing to set the game state based on said update is executed is set to be the reference time, and the game state at that time is set to be the reference time game state, but the reference time is not limited to this.
For example, the remaining number of special symbol variations, remaining number of minor wins, and remaining number of time-saving wins may be updated at any point between the start of the special symbol variation display and the end of the variation display and the expiration of the stop display time (e.g., the start of the special symbol variation display, any point during the special symbol variation display, or the expiration of the stop display time). The point in time when the game state setting process based on the update is executed may be designated as the reference point, and the game state at that point may be designated as the reference point game state.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(4) The conditions for shortened play are not limited to those described above, and other conditions may be set, such as when the number of times the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number is performed (number of changes in the first special symbol) reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of times the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number is performed (number of changes in the second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number of times.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the number of times a small win is achieved and the number of times a time-saving bonus is granted are set to 2 in order to prevent these time-saving conditions from being easily met due to the occurrence of irregular circumstances, but they may be set to 3 or more.
Furthermore, special values such as "0" may be set for these counts. And, based on the condition that special values are set, the update process for the remaining number of minor wins and the remaining number of time-saving wins, as well as the determination process for when the time-saving end condition is met, may be prevented from being performed, thereby controlling the system so that the time-saving end condition related to the number of minor wins and the number of time-saving grants is not met.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(5) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, if a minor win is achieved during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the machine is set to transition to the advantageous low probability time-saving game state LJT4 via the low probability time-saving game state LJT3, but it is not limited to this.
For example, if a minor win is achieved during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the system may be configured to transition directly from the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 without going through the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3.
Furthermore, if a minor win is achieved during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined, the game may be configured to proceed through the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, and then through another low-probability time-saving game state (for example, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT5, which has the same time-saving termination conditions as the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 and is configured to guarantee a minor win) before transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(6) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, if the player wins a time-saving bonus during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the player will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, but this is not limited to this.
For example, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT5 may be established that is more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, but less advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 (for example, a setting of 120 time-saving rounds, which is more than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, but less than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4). If a time-saving bonus is awarded during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the system may be set to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT5 instead of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
In this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this form will be achieved, and the sense of loss felt by the player due to the termination of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which has the potential to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4.

(7) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, if the player wins a time-saving bonus during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, and the player transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 based on that determination, but the machine is not limited to this.
For example, in addition to the time-saving symbol J1, a time-saving symbol J2 may be provided as a time-saving symbol to be determined when a time-saving bonus is awarded. When the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, instead of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the system may be set to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, or to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4.
In this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P in this form will be achieved, and since there will be more opportunities to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4, it will be possible to further enhance the player's enjoyment.

(8) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, when a small win symbol Y2 that triggers the execution of a special game is determined in the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), low probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3), or low probability time-saving game state LJT4 (time-saving game state JT4), which are time-saving game states set after the end of a special game (including both a special game that is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter a special area during a small win game based on the winning of a small win, and a special game that is executed based on the winning of a big win different from a small win (so-called big win game)), the reference time (special symbol change stop In the stopping process, various update counts are performed, and based on the results of said updates, it is determined whether the game state at the time the process to terminate or maintain the currently set time-saving game state is in a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state. The game state after the end of the special game based on the small win symbol Y2 is set to low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (when the small win symbol Y2 is determined in low probability time-saving game state LJT1) or low probability time-saving game state LJT4 (when the small win symbol Y2 is determined in low probability time-saving game state LJT3 or LJT4). However, the process for setting the time-saving game state is not limited to this.
For example, if a time-saving game state is set in the game state at the time of reference, the system may refer to the type of the time-saving game state and perform a process to set a time-saving game state corresponding to the type of game state and the minor win symbol (or major win symbol) determined based on the win, after the special game based on the minor win (or major win) has finished.
More specifically, when the above-described processing is adopted for a pachinko machine P relating to this embodiment, for example, after the special game based on the determination of the small win symbol Y2 is completed, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (when the small win symbol Y2 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1), a low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 (when the small win symbol Y2 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3), and a low-probability time-saving game state LJT6 (when the small win symbol Y2 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 or LJT6) may be set. Here, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT6 is a time-saving game state with a different degree of advantage compared to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4. For example, it could be a time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving rounds is set to be greater than the number of time-saving rounds in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 (220 rounds), or a time-saving game state in which the content of other time-saving termination conditions is set to be different.
Furthermore, the same processing as described above may be applied to pachinko machines with specifications different from those of the pachinko machine P relating to this embodiment. For example, in a pachinko machine that employs a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state in which the variation of ordinary symbols is the main component) in which the number of times the ordinary symbols vary is defined as the condition for ending the time-saving game, as in the sixth embodiment, depending on the type of time-saving game state set after the end of the special game, even if the same small win symbol or big win symbol is determined, the time-saving game state may be set in which the variation time of the ordinary symbols, the probability of winning in the lottery of ordinary symbols, the probability of determining a symbol in which the movable piece 16b (ordinary electric mechanism) is set in a relatively advantageous manner, etc. may differ, or one or more of the time-saving termination conditions (conditions relating to the number of times the ordinary symbols are drawn (number of variations of ordinary symbols), the number of times the movable piece 16b operates, etc.) may differ.

(9) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the settings for the game state that are set when a time-saving bonus is awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined are set differently depending on whether the time-saving symbol J1 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, which is a time-saving game state set after the end of the special game, or in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which is a time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 (see Figure 130(c)), but are not limited to this.
For example, similar to (8) above, the type of time-saving game state (settings) set based on the decision may be made different depending on the type of time-saving symbol that is determined and the type of time-saving game state (reference time game state) at the time the decision is made.
More specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, only the time-saving symbol J1 was determined when a time-saving bonus was awarded. However, the setting is changed so that in addition to the time-saving symbol J1, the time-saving symbol J2 is also determined. If the time-saving symbol J2 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the control is set so that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT7 (time-saving game state JT7) is set based on that determination. Here, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT7 has the same time-saving termination conditions as the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (see Figure 130(a)), but the control of setting the time-saving game state differs depending on whether the small-win symbol Y2 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT7 or whether the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined. For example, the following controls (A) to (D) are performed. The following will explain (A) to (D), but the control similar to that of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be omitted.
(A) If the time-saving symbol J2 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the reference time game state becomes a non-time-saving game state, similar to the pachinko machine P relating to this form, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT7 is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2.
(B) If the time-saving symbol J2 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the reference time game state becomes the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and since the determination of the time-saving symbol is effective in the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set again based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2.
(C) If the small win symbol Y2 is determined in the low probability time-saving game state LJT7, the reference game state becomes the low probability time-saving game state LJT7, and after the special game ends, the low probability time-saving game state LJT3 is set.
(D) If the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT7, the reference time game state becomes the low-probability time-saving game state LJT7, and since the determination of the time-saving symbol is effective in the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state LJT7) set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT7 is set again based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 or J2.
In this way, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT7, which is transitioned to based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2, unlike the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the transition to the relatively unfavorable low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 is eliminated, and the state effectively continues until the small win symbol Y2 is determined. In other words, it is possible to create a game state that has the same gameplay as the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, but is more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. Furthermore, since the low-probability time-saving game state LJT7 is more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, it is preferable to set the determination rate of the time-saving symbol J2 lower than the determination rate of the time-saving symbol J1.
In the above specific example, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT7, which is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 or J2, the same low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 is set after the special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y2 ends. However, if the same minor win symbol (or big win symbol) is determined in the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2 and LJT7, different time-saving game states may be set. For example, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the low probability time-saving game state LJT3 continues until a minor win Y2 is determined, and since it is a game state in which the execution of a special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y2 and the transition to the highly advantageous low probability time-saving game state LJT4 are confirmed, in both cases when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined in the low probability time-saving game states LJT2 and LJT7, the low probability time-saving game state LJT3 is set after the end of the special game based on the determination. However, for example, if the low probability time-saving game state LJT3 is set in such a way that the transition to the low probability time-saving game state LJT4 is not confirmed, then when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined in the low probability time-saving game state LJT7, unlike when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined in the low probability time-saving game state LJT2, a highly advantageous low probability time-saving game state may be set.
Furthermore, the same control as described above can be applied to the time-saving game state set after the special game has ended based on the determination of a minor win symbol (or major win symbol). That is, by providing multiple minor win symbols (or major win symbols), the time-saving game state set after the special game has ended based on the determination of a minor win symbol (or major win symbol) may be made different depending on the type of minor win symbol (or major win symbol) and the type of time-saving game state (reference game state) at the time the determination was made (the type of time-saving game state set based on the determination of a time-saving symbol, and the type of time-saving game state set after the special game has ended). Also, when the same minor win symbol is determined, different time-saving game states may be set depending on the type of time-saving game state (reference game state) at the time the determination was made (the type of time-saving game state set based on the determination of a time-saving symbol, and the type of time-saving game state set after the special game has ended).
Furthermore, the same processing as described above may be applied to pachinko machines with specifications different from those of the pachinko machine P relating to this embodiment. For example, in a pachinko machine that employs a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state in which the variation of ordinary symbols is the main component) in which the number of times the ordinary symbols vary is defined as the condition for ending the time-saving game state, as in the sixth embodiment, depending on the type of time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbols, even if the same small winning symbol (or big winning symbol) or time-saving symbol is determined, the time-saving game state may be set in which the variation time of the ordinary symbols, the probability of winning in the lottery of ordinary symbols, the probability of determining a symbol in which the movable piece 16b (ordinary electric mechanism) is defined to operate in a relatively advantageous manner, etc. may differ, or one or more of the time-saving termination conditions (conditions relating to the number of times the ordinary symbols are drawn (number of variations of ordinary symbols), the number of times the movable piece 16b operates, etc.) may differ.

(8th form)
The eighth form will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this description, components similar to those in the first to seventh forms described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.
The pachinko machine P in this form is a pachinko machine in which the trigger for the execution of a special game is the winning of a minor prize, similar to the fifth to seventh forms. Specifically, in the win/loss lottery, it is possible to win a minor prize even if a big prize is not won, and the special game is executed when a game ball enters a special area during a minor prize game based on the winning of a minor prize.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P in this embodiment, as well as the devices and components installed on the game board 11, are the same as those of the second to seventh embodiments.
Furthermore, similar to the fifth to seventh forms, during special gameplay or during minor win gameplay based on a minor win, the large prize opening 18 opens, allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening 18. During special gameplay, the distribution member 59 is stationary in the first position, and game balls that enter the large prize opening 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. In contrast, during minor win gameplay based on the determination of a minor win symbol, the distribution member 59 is stationary in the second position, and game balls that enter the large prize opening 18 do not enter the general area 58, but all enter the special area.
In other words, game balls can only enter the special area during a minor win game based on the determination of a minor win symbol. As a result, a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this form) enter the special area during a minor win game. Then, based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special area during a minor win game, the special game is executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this form, similar to the fifth and seventh forms, the game state after the special game, which is executed based on the determination of the minor win symbol, is set according to the minor win symbol determined when a minor win is achieved.
Furthermore, the following game states can be set: a normal game state which combines a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state; a low probability time-saving game state LJT1 which combines a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT1 (a low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state) set after the end of a special game); a low probability time-saving game state LJT2 which combines a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT2 (a low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state) set based on the stop display of the time-saving symbol upon determination of the time-saving symbol (winning the granting of time-saving)); and a low probability time-saving game state LJT3 which combines a low probability game state and a time-saving game state JT3 (a low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state) set based on the stop display of the time-saving symbol upon determination of the time-saving symbol (winning the granting of time-saving)). The game proceeds with one of these game states set.

Furthermore, in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the lottery for regular symbols is set to 99/100, the variation time for regular symbols is 10 seconds, and the operation time of the movable piece 16b is set to 0.05 seconds (see Figure 142(c)). In contrast, in time-saving game states JT1, JT2, and JT3, the probability of winning in the lottery for regular symbols is set to 99/100, the variation time for regular symbols is 1 second, and the operation time of the movable piece 16b is set to 3 seconds (see Figure 142(c)). In other words, the difficulty of getting the game ball into the second starting prize entry point 16 is the same in time-saving game states JT1, JT2, and JT3, and is lower than in the non-time-saving game state. Furthermore, while it is virtually impossible for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point 16 during non-time-saving game states, during time-saving game states JT1, JT2, and JT3, it becomes possible to enter the second starting prize entry point 16 with a high frequency.

Furthermore, in the initial state immediately after factory shipment or after a RAM reset (initialization process in case of abnormality, initialization process in normal operation), the normal gameplay state is set.

During normal gameplay, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball towards the first game area 12a (left-handed) so that the game ball enters the first starting prize entry point 15. During low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, special gameplay, and minor win gameplay, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball towards the second game area 12b (right-handed) so that the game ball enters the large prize entry point 18, or passes through gate 20 and enters the second starting prize entry point 16.
In other words, during normal gameplay, the player is primarily instructed to play in the first game area 12a, and as long as gameplay is taking place in the first game area 12a, the game balls can enter the first starting prize entry point 15. Furthermore, during low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, the player is primarily instructed to play in the second game area 12b, and as long as gameplay is taking place in the second game area 12b, the game balls can pass through gate 20 and enter the second starting prize entry point 16.
Then, a draw is performed to determine whether a player wins or loses based on the number of game balls that enter the first starting prize slot 15 and the number of game balls that enter the second starting prize slot 16.

Furthermore, in this form of pachinko machine P, similar to the third and seventh forms, up to four of each of the first and second special symbol random numbers can be stored as reserves. If both the first and second special symbol random numbers are stored as reserves, the second special symbol random number is processed before the first special symbol random number.

As shown in Figure 142(a), when a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening 15, a draw for winning or losing (a draw based on the first special symbol random number) is performed, resulting in either a minor win or a loss. If a minor win is achieved, the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, and if a loss is achieved, the losing symbol Z1 is determined.
Furthermore, the probability of winning a minor prize is set to 1/200, and the probability of determining the minor prize symbol Y1 when a minor prize is won is set to 100/100 (100%).

As shown in Figure 142(a), when a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening 16, the draw for winning or losing (a draw based on the second special symbol random number) yields one of the following results: winning a minor prize, winning a time-saving bonus, or losing. If a minor prize is won, the minor prize symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined; if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving bonus symbols J1 or J2 are determined; and if it is a loss, the losing symbol Z2 is determined.
Furthermore, the probability of winning a minor prize is set to 4/200, and when a minor prize is won, the probability of determining the minor prize symbol Y2 is set to 50/100 (50%), the probability of determining the minor prize symbol Y3 is set to 25/100 (25%), and the probability of determining the minor prize symbol Y4 is set to 25/100 (25%). The probability of winning a time-saving bonus is set to 10/200, and when a time-saving bonus is won, the probability of determining the time-saving bonus symbol J1 is set to 65/100 (65%), and the probability of determining the time-saving bonus symbol J2 is set to 35/100 (35%).

Furthermore, once a special symbol is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern, which defines the variation time and variation animation of the special symbol, is determined based on the result of that determination. The pachinko machine P in this configuration has multiple variation pattern tables (not specifically shown in the diagram) that store variation pattern commands associated with the aforementioned variation patterns. Once the win/loss lottery and the determination of the special symbol are performed, the variation pattern command is determined by referring to one of the variation pattern tables corresponding to the type of special symbol random number used in the win/loss lottery (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number) and the current game state.

Although not specifically illustrated, for example, when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the first special symbol random number during normal gameplay, the following variation patterns are available when a losing symbol Z1 is determined (resulting in a loss): a 13-second variation with a set variation time of 13 seconds, a 20-second variation with a set variation time of 20 seconds, a 60-second variation with a set variation time of 60 seconds, and so on. The following variation patterns are available when a minor win symbol Y1 is determined (resulting in a minor win): the aforementioned 20-second variation, 60-second variation, etc.
Furthermore, when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the following variation patterns are provided for when the losing symbol Z2 is determined (resulting in a loss): a 2-second variation with a set variation time of 2 seconds; when the minor winning symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined (a minor win is achieved): the aforementioned 2-second variation; and when the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined (a time-saving bonus is awarded): the aforementioned 2-second variation.
Furthermore, when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3, the following variation patterns are provided as the result when the losing symbol Z2 is determined: the aforementioned 2-second variation, the 30-second variation with a set variation time of 30 seconds, etc. The following variation patterns are provided as the result when the minor winning symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined: the aforementioned 30-second variation, etc. The following variation patterns are provided as the result when the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined: the aforementioned 2-second variation, etc.

Furthermore, the stop display time (the so-called symbol confirmation time), which is the time it takes for the special symbol to remain stopped after the variable display of the special symbol has finished, is the same (0.5 seconds in this configuration) regardless of the game state at the time of the win/loss draw or the type of special symbol determined. This stop display time may be determined based on the game state at the time of the win/loss draw and the type of special symbol determined.

The mini-win game, which is executed when a mini-win symbol Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4 is determined, is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: the large prize opening 18 is opened for 0.45 seconds four times, or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open (see Figure 142(b)). The closing time (interval time) of the large prize opening 18 between the end of one opening and the start of the next is set to 0.6 seconds. Furthermore, while the large prize opening 18 is open, the distribution member 59 remains in the second position.
Thus, when a minor win is achieved, regardless of which minor win symbol is determined, the large prize opening 18 is opened for a total of 1.8 seconds during the minor win game. As a result, if the player is shooting to the right during this minor win game, the game ball can be sent into the large prize opening 18. Furthermore, since the distribution member 59 remains in the second position during this minor win game, any game ball that enters the large prize opening 18 will always enter the special area.
Therefore, if a minor win is achieved, and the player is shooting to the right, a predetermined number of game balls (1 ball) will enter the special area during the minor win game based on that win, and a special game will be executed based on that entry.

Furthermore, when a minor win symbol Y1 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this form) enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, a round game is set to be executed a total of two times, which ends when either the large prize opening 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 (in Figure 142(a), the minor win game and the two round games are collectively referred to as 3R). In addition, the large prize opening 18 is opened only once in each round game (opening for 29.0 seconds is performed once), and the interval time between each round game is set to 2.0 seconds. Furthermore, the distribution member 59 remains stationary in the first position during each round game.
Furthermore, if a minor win symbol Y2, Y3, or Y4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination, a special game is executed in which a total of nine round games in the same manner as described above are played (in Figure 142(a), the minor win game and the nine round games are combined and referred to as 10R). The opening and closing patterns of the opening and closing doors 18b, the operation of the distribution member 59, and the interval time during the round games are also set to be the same as those of the special game described above.

(Summary of the game state to be set)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, when a minor win game is executed based on the determination of a minor win symbol (winning a minor win), and a special game is executed based on the fact that a predetermined number (1 ball) of game balls enter a special area during the minor win game, the game state after the special game ends is set according to the game state at a predetermined reference point (hereinafter also referred to as the reference game state) and the type of minor win symbol determined, as described later.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 143(a), if a minor win symbol Y1 is determined and the game state at the time of reference is not a time-saving game state (case (1-S1)), if a minor win symbol Y2 is determined and the game state at the time of reference is not a time-saving game state, a time-saving game state JT1 or JT2 (cases (1-S2), (1-S5), (1-S7)), if a minor win symbol Y3 is determined and the game state at the time of reference is a time-saving game state JT1 or JT2 (cases (1-S3), (1-S6)), or if a minor win symbol Y4 is determined and the game state at the time of reference is a time-saving game state JT1 (case (1-S4)), then in all cases, a time-saving game state JT1 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) is set after the special game ends.
Furthermore, if the minor win symbol Y3 is determined and the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state (in the case of (1-S9)), or if the minor win symbol Y4 is determined and the game state at the time of reference is a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state (in the cases of (1-S8) and (1-S10)), the non-time-saving game state will be set after the special game ends.

Conversely, if, for reasons such as not shooting to the right and failing to enter the large prize slot 18, the predetermined number of game balls do not enter the special area during a minor win game, the special game will not be executed, and the game state corresponding to the type of minor win symbol will not be set. After the minor win game ends, the game state that was set at the end of that minor win game will continue.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, if a time-saving bonus is awarded and a time-saving symbol is determined, the game state after the time-saving symbol stops (after the display of the time-saving symbol's movement ends) is set according to the reference game state and the type of time-saving symbol determined.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 143(a), if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined and the reference game state is time-saving game state JT1, JT2, or JT3 (in the cases of (2-S1), (2-S2), and (2-S3)), time-saving game state JT2 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) is set after the time-saving symbol is displayed to stop. Also, if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined and the reference game state is time-saving game state JT1, JT2, or JT3 (in the cases of (3-S1), (3-S2), and (3-S3)), time-saving game state JT3 (low-probability time-saving game state LJT3) is set after the time-saving symbol is displayed to stop. In principle, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, when the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined during a time-saving game state, the reference game state will not become a non-time-saving game state.
Although not specifically illustrated, in the pachinko machine P of this configuration, if, after a non-time-saving game state is set, a time-saving bonus is awarded through a win/loss lottery based on the reserved second special symbol random numbers (special 2 remaining reserved) stored before the non-time-saving game state was set, and time-saving symbols J1 or J2 are determined, then time-saving game states JT2 or JT3 are not set.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P of this form, if a time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J1, J2) is determined in a non-time-saving game state, the determination is invalid (equivalent to a miss), and the time-saving game state is not set based on that determination. On the other hand, if a time-saving symbol is determined in a time-saving game state (time-saving game state JT1) set after the end of a special game, or in a time-saving game state (time-saving game state JT2, JT3) set based on the stop display of a time-saving symbol upon winning a time-saving bonus, the determination becomes valid, and the time-saving game state is set based on that determination.

In this configuration of pachinko machine P, the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, LJT2, or LJT3) ends when either of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (1) the number of variations of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number of time-saving periods, or (2) the number of minor wins reaches a predetermined number of minor wins. At this point, the non-time-saving game state (normal game state) is set.

During the time-saving game state, the remaining number of special symbol variations until the time-saving round is reached (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining special symbol variations) is updated during the special symbol variation stop process, which is executed when the special symbol variation display ends. Also, when a minor win is achieved, the remaining number of minor wins until the number of minor wins until the number of minor wins has ended (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining minor wins) is updated during the special symbol variation stop process. If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of special symbol variations has reached the time-saving round due to the update of the remaining special symbol variations, or that the number of minor wins has reached the number of minor wins until the number of minor wins has ended due to the update of the remaining minor wins, it terminates the time-saving game state at this point and sets a non-time-saving game state. If it determines that neither has been reached, it maintains the time-saving game state (i.e., does nothing with respect to the time-saving game state).
In the pachinko machine P of this form, the point in time when the process is completed is defined as the reference point mentioned above. If a minor win is achieved, the game state after the special game ends is set by referring to the game state at that point in time (game state at the time of reference). If a time-saving bonus is awarded, the game state after the time-saving symbol stops is set by referring to the game state at that point in time.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this configuration, the main RAM 103 is equipped with a time-saving mode count memory area and a minor win completion count memory area. The time-saving mode count memory area stores the remaining number of special symbol variations, and the minor win completion count memory area stores the remaining number of minor wins.

Specifically, when a time-saving game state is set, the initial value of the remaining special symbol variation count is stored in the time-saving game state memory area, corresponding to the type of time-saving game state set (10,000 times for time-saving game state JT1, 10,000 times for time-saving game state JT2, and 10,000 times for time-saving game state JT3). Then, each time the variation display of the special symbols is executed, the value stored in the time-saving game state memory area is updated (decremented by 1). As a result, the value stored in the time-saving game state memory area becomes the remaining special symbol variation count (the number of remaining special symbol variations until the set time-saving game state ends).
Furthermore, when a time-saving game state is set, the initial value of the remaining number of minor wins is stored in the minor win count memory area, corresponding to the type of time-saving game state set (255 times for time-saving game state JT1, 255 times for time-saving game state JT2, and 1 time for time-saving game state JT3). Then, each time a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery, the value stored in the minor win count memory area is updated (decremented by 1). As a result, the value stored in the minor win count memory area becomes the remaining number of minor wins (the number of minor wins remaining until the current time-saving game state ends).

The following provides a more detailed explanation of how to set the game state.
(1) When a minor win is determined by a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) and the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, in this case the game state when the display of the minor win symbol Y1 stops is a non-time-saving game state, and therefore the reference time game state (the game state at the time when various number updates are performed in the special symbol change stop processing and the processing to terminate or maintain the set time-saving game state is performed based on the results of said updates) is also a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, when the minor win symbol Y1 is determined and the reference time game state is a non-time-saving game state (1-S1 in Figure 143(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area and a special game is executed during the minor win game based on said determination, the game state after the end of the special game is set to time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1) (see Figure 143(b)).

Here, in the time-saving game state JT1 set based on the fulfillment of (1-S1) above, at the time of setting, the time-saving count memory area stores the initial value of the remaining special symbol variation count as the time-saving count (10,000 times), and the number of remaining small wins is stored in the small win end count memory area as the initial value of the remaining small wins (255 times). Then, as shown in Figure 143(a), this time-saving game state JT1 ends when either of the time-saving termination conditions is met: (1-F1-1) the number of special symbol variation counts reaches the aforementioned time-saving count (10,000 times), or (1-F2-1) the number of small wins reaches the aforementioned small win end count (255 times). Then, when the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, the game state is changed to the normal game state.
In other words, if, as a result of the remaining number of special symbol variations and the remaining number of minor wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (1-F1-1) to (1-F2-1) are met, the time-saving game state JT1 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (1-F1-1) to (1-F2-1) are met, the game state remains in the time-saving game state JT1.
As mentioned above, during the shortened play state JT1, the game balls are launched toward the second play area 12b, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. Also, the number of shortened play rounds is 10,000, the probability of winning a minor win is 4/200, and the probability of winning a shortened play round is 10/200 (see Figure 142(a)), so in practice, the shortened play round termination condition (1-F1-1) will not be met before a minor win or a shortened play round is won.

(2) When a minor win is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state JT1, and minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined, if minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined during the time-saving game state JT1 (when the first determination of minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 is made in the time-saving game state JT1), the number of minor wins until the end is 255, and the update of the remaining number of minor wins (1 decrement) performed in the special symbol variation stop processing described above does not satisfy the time-saving termination condition (1-F2-1), and the time-saving game state JT1 does not end. In other words, at the time the remaining number of minor wins is updated, the game state remains the time-saving game state JT1, and the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT1. Therefore, in the above case, a minor win symbol Y2, Y3, or Y4 is determined, and the reference game state becomes the time-saving game state JT1 ((1-S2), (1-S3), or (1-S4) in Figure 143(a)). If a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area and a special game is executed during the minor win game based on the determination, the game state after the end of the special game is set again to the time-saving game state JT1 based on the establishment of (1-S1) above (see Figure 143(b)).

(3) When the shortened time is awarded and the shortened time symbol J1 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the shortened time game state JT1, If the shortened time symbol J1 is determined during the shortened time game state JT1 (when the shortened time symbol J1 is determined for the first time in the shortened time game state JT1), the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations is updated (decremented by 1) in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing described above, but as described above, the shortened time termination condition (1-F1-1) is not met. In that case, the game state remains the shortened time game state JT1 at the time the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations is updated in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing described above, so the reference game state is the shortened time game state JT1. Therefore, in the above case, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, and the game state at the time of reference becomes the time-saving game state JT1 (2-S1 in Figure 143(a)), and the game state after the time-saving symbol J1 stops is set to the time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2) (see Figure 143(c)).

When the time-saving game state JT2 is set, the time-saving count memory area stores the initial value of the remaining special symbol variation count as the time-saving count (10,000 times), and the minor win completion count memory area stores the initial value of the remaining minor win completion count as the minor win completion count (255 times). As shown in Figure 143(a), this time-saving game state JT2 ends when either of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (2-F1) the number of special symbol variation counts reaches the aforementioned time-saving count (10,000 times), or (2-F2) the number of minor wins reaches the aforementioned minor win completion count (255 times). When the time-saving game state JT2 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, the game state changes to the normal game state.
In other words, if, as a result of the remaining number of special symbol variations and the remaining number of minor wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (2-F1) to (2-F2) are met, the time-saving game state JT2 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (2-F1) to (2-F2) are met, the game state remains in the time-saving game state JT2.
As mentioned above, during the shortened play state JT2, game balls are launched toward the second play area 12b, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. Also, the number of shortened play rounds is 10,000, the probability of winning a minor win is 4/200, and the probability of winning a shortened play round is 10/200 (see Figure 142(a)), so in practice, the shortened play round termination condition (2-F1) will not be met before a minor win or a shortened play round is won.

(4) When the shortened time is awarded and the shortened time symbol J2 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the shortened time game state JT1, if the shortened time symbol J2 is determined during the shortened time game state JT1 (when the shortened time symbol J2 is determined for the first time in the shortened time game state JT1), as in the case of (3), the game state remains the shortened time game state JT1 when the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations is updated in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing described above, so the reference game state is the shortened time game state JT1. Therefore, in the above case, the shortened time symbol J2 is determined and the reference game state is the shortened time game state JT1 (3-S1 in Figure 143(a)), and the game state after the display of the shortened time symbol J1 is set to the shortened time game state JT3 (low probability shortened time game state LJT3) (see Figure 143(c)).

When the time-saving game state JT3 is set, the time-saving count memory area stores the initial value of the remaining special symbol variation count as time-saving count (10,000 times), and the minor win completion count memory area stores the initial value of the remaining minor win completion count as minor win completion count (1 time). Then, as shown in Figure 143(a), this time-saving game state JT3 ends when either of the following time-saving termination conditions is met: (3-F1) the number of special symbol variation counts reaches the aforementioned time-saving count (10,000 times), or (3-F2) the number of minor wins reaches the aforementioned minor win completion count (1 time). Then, when the time-saving game state JT3 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, the game state changes to the normal game state.
In other words, if, as a result of the remaining number of special symbol variations and the remaining number of minor wins performed in the special symbol variation stop process described above, any of the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions (3-F1) to (3-F2) are met, the time-saving game state JT3 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, and the game state changes to the normal game state. On the other hand, if none of the time-saving termination conditions (3-F1) to (3-F2) are met, the game state remains in the time-saving game state JT3.
As mentioned above, during the shortened play state JT3, game balls are launched toward the second play area 12b, and in principle, a win/loss lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number. Also, the number of shortened play rounds is 10,000, the probability of winning a minor win is 4/200, and the probability of winning a shortened play round is 10/200 (see Figure 142(a)), so in practice, the shortened play round termination condition (3-F1) will not be met before a minor win or a shortened play round is won.

(5) When a minor win is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state JT2, and the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, If the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined during the time-saving game state JT2 (when the first minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined in the time-saving game state JT1), the number of minor wins that will end is 255, and the update of the remaining number of minor wins (1 decrement) performed in the special symbol variation stop processing described above does not satisfy the time-saving termination condition (2-F2), and the time-saving game state JT2 does not end. In other words, at the time the remaining number of minor wins is updated, the game state remains the time-saving game state JT2, and the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT2. Therefore, in the above case, if a minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined, and the reference game state becomes the time-saving game state JT2 ((1-S5) or (1-S6) in Figure 143(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area and a special game is executed during the minor win game based on the said determination, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the time-saving game state JT1 based on the establishment of (1-S1) above (see Figure 143(b)).

(6) When a minor win is determined by a win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state JT2 and the minor win symbol Y4 is determined When the minor win symbol Y4 is determined during the time-saving game state JT2 (when the first minor win symbol Y4 is determined in the time-saving game state JT1), as in the case of (5), the game state remains in the time-saving game state JT2 when the remaining number of minor wins is updated, so the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT2. Therefore, in the above case, the minor win symbol Y4 is determined and the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT2 (1-S8 in Figure 143(a)), and when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area and a special game is executed during the minor win game based on the said determination, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the non-time-saving game state (see Figure 143(b)).

(7) When the shortened time is awarded and the shortened time symbol J1 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the shortened time game state JT2, If the shortened time symbol J1 is determined during the shortened time game state JT2 (when the shortened time symbol J1 is determined for the first time in the shortened time game state JT2), the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations is updated (decremented by 1) in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing described above, but as described above, the shortened time termination condition (2-F1) is not met. In that case, the game state remains the shortened time game state JT2 at the time the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations is updated in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing described above, so the reference game state is the shortened time game state JT2. Therefore, in the above case, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, and the game state at the time of reference becomes the time-saving game state JT2 (2-S2 in Figure 143(a)), and the game state after the time-saving symbol J1 stops is set again to the time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2) (see Figure 143(b)).

(8) When the shortened time is awarded and the shortened time symbol J2 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the shortened time game state JT2, when the shortened time symbol J2 is determined during the shortened time game state JT2 (when the shortened time symbol J2 is determined for the first time in the shortened time game state JT2), as in the case of (7), when the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations is updated in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing described above, the game state remains the shortened time game state JT2, and the reference game state becomes the shortened time game state JT2. Therefore, in the above case, the shortened time symbol J2 is determined and the reference game state becomes the shortened time game state JT2 (3-S2 in Figure 143(a)), and the game state after the display of the shortened time symbol J2 is set to the shortened time game state JT3 (low probability shortened time game state LJT3) (see Figure 143(c)).

(9) When a minor win is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state JT3 and the minor win symbol Y2 is determined When the minor win symbol Y2 is determined during the time-saving game state JT3 (when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined for the first time in the time-saving game state JT3), the number of minor wins is 1, and as a result of updating the remaining number of minor wins (decrementing by 1) performed in the special symbol variation stop processing described above, the time-saving end condition (3-F2) is met. As a result, the time-saving game state JT3 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, so the reference time game state becomes the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the above case, when the minor win symbol Y2 is determined and the reference game state becomes a non-time-saving game state (1-S7 in Figure 143(a)), and a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area and a special game is executed during the minor win game based on the said determination, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the time-saving game state JT1 based on the establishment of (1-S1) above (see Figure 143(b)).

(10) If a minor win is achieved by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the time-saving game state JT3 and minor win symbol Y3 or Y4 is determined, If minor win symbol Y3 or Y4 is determined during the time-saving game state JT3 (if the first minor win symbol Y3 or Y4 is determined in the time-saving game state JT3), as in the case of (9), the update of the remaining number of minor wins (decremented by 1) performed in the special symbol variation stop processing described above will satisfy the time-saving end condition of (3-F2). As a result, the time-saving game state JT3 ends and the non-time-saving game state is set, so the reference time game state becomes the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the above case, a minor win symbol Y3 or Y4 is determined, and the reference game state becomes a non-time-saving game state (Figure 143(a) (1-S9), (1-S10)), and as in case (6), if a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area and a special game is executed during the minor win game based on the determination, the non-time-saving game state is set.

(11) When the shortened time is awarded and the shortened time symbol J1 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the shortened time game state JT3, If the shortened time symbol J1 is determined during the shortened time game state JT3 (when the shortened time symbol J1 is determined for the first time in the shortened time game state JT3), the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations is updated (decremented by 1) in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing described above, but as described above, the shortened time termination condition (3-F1) is not met. In that case, the game state remains the shortened time game state JT3 at the time the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations is updated in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing described above, so the reference game state is the shortened time game state JT3. Therefore, in the above case, the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, and the game state at the time of reference becomes the time-saving game state JT3 (2-S3 in Figure 143(a)), and the game state after the time-saving symbol J1 stops is set to the time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2) (see Figure 143(c)).

(12) When the shortened time is awarded and the shortened time symbol J2 is determined by the win/fail lottery based on the second special symbol random number during the shortened time game state JT3, if the shortened time symbol J2 is determined during the shortened time game state JT3 (when the shortened time symbol J2 is determined for the first time in the shortened time game state JT3), as in the case of (11), the game state remains the shortened time game state JT3 when the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations is updated in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing described above, so the reference game state is the shortened time game state JT3. Therefore, in the above case, the shortened time symbol J2 is determined and the reference game state is the shortened time game state JT3 (3-S3 in Figure 143(a)), and the game state after the display of the shortened time symbol J2 is set again to the shortened time game state JT3 (low probability shortened time game state LJT3) (see Figure 143(c)).

(Gameplay of the pachinko machine P in this form)
In the pachinko machine P of this form, as described above, the game progresses with one of the following states set: normal game state (non-time-saving game state), low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2), or low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3).

When a player starts playing, the game is usually set to the normal game state. As mentioned above, during the normal game state, the game ball is launched towards the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed shooting). Also, as long as left-handed shooting is being performed, the game ball has the potential to enter only the first starting prize entry point 15, so during the normal game state, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize entry point 15. In this win/loss lottery, there is a possibility of winning a minor prize (see Figure 142(a)).
When a minor win is achieved, the minor win symbol Y1 is determined (see Figure 142(a)). During the minor win game based on this determination, if a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area, a special game is executed. In this special game based on the determination of the minor win symbol Y1, two round games are executed (three times in total including the minor win game), and approximately 450 prize balls can be won. After the special game ends, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) is set (see Figures 143(b) and 144).

In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, if the player follows the instructions and shoots to the left during normal gameplay, a minor win will occur in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number. This win will trigger a special game, after which the player will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) (see Figure 144).

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, as described above, the game balls are launched (shot to the right) towards the second game area 12b. Furthermore, as long as the shots are to the right, the game balls can only potentially enter the second starting prize entry point 16. Therefore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting prize entry point 16. In this lottery, there is a possibility of winning a minor win or a time-saving bonus. If a minor win is won, the minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined; if a time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined (see Figure 142(a)).

When a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined, a special game is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination. In this special game based on the determination of minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4, round games are executed 9 times (10 times in total including the minor win game), and approximately 1500 prize balls can be won.
As described above, if a minor winning symbol Y2, Y3, or Y4 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT1, and therefore, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set again after the special game ends (see Figure 143(b)).

Furthermore, if a time-saving bonus is awarded, the reference game state is time-saving game state JT1. Therefore, when time-saving symbol J1 is determined, low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) is set after the display of the time-saving symbol J1. When time-saving symbol J2 is determined, low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3) is set after the display of the time-saving symbol J2 (see Figure 143(c)).

In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, if the player follows the instructions and shoots to the right during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, if a small win is achieved, the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) will always be reset after the execution of a special game that is performed through that win, and if a time-saving bonus is awarded, the player will transition to the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) or the low probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3) after the display of the time-saving symbols changes (see Figure 144).
Furthermore, if you win a time-saving bonus, the probability of determining the time-saving symbol J1 is 65%, and the probability of determining the time-saving symbol J2 is 35% (see Figure 142(a)). Therefore, the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is 65%, and the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 is 35%. This means that it is easier to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 than to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3.

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the game balls are launched (right-handed) towards the second game area 12b, similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. As long as right-handed shooting is performed, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting prize entry point 16. If a minor win is achieved, the minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined. If a time-saving bonus is awarded, the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined (see Figure 142(a)).

When a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined, a special game is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination. In this special game based on the determination of minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4, round games are executed 9 times (10 times in total including the minor win game), and approximately 1500 prize balls can be won.
Here, as described above, if a minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT2, and therefore the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set after the special game ends (see Figure 143(b)).
On the other hand, if the small win symbol Y4 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the reference game state is the time-saving game state JT2, and therefore the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) is set after the special game ends (see Figure 143(b)).

Furthermore, if a time-saving bonus is awarded, the reference game state is time-saving game state JT2. Therefore, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, after the display of the time-saving symbol J1, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set again. When the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, after the display of the time-saving symbol J2, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 is set (see Figure 143(c)).

In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, if the player shoots to the right in accordance with the instructions during the low probability time-saving game state LJT2, if a small win is achieved, the player will transition to the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) or the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) after executing a special game that is performed through that win. If a time-saving bonus is awarded, the player will transition to the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) or the low probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3) after the time-saving symbols are displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 144).
Furthermore, if a minor win is achieved, the probability of determining minor win symbol Y2 is 50%, the probability of determining minor win symbol Y3 is 25%, and the probability of determining minor win symbol Y4 is 25% (see Figure 142(a)). Therefore, the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is 75% (if minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined), and the probability of transitioning to the non-time-saving game state is 25% (if minor win symbol Y4 is determined).
Furthermore, if you win a time-saving bonus, similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, there is a 65% chance that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be reset, and a 35% chance that you will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3. Therefore, it is more likely that the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be reset than that you will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3.

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, the game balls are launched (to the right) towards the second game area 12b, similar to the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1 and LJT2. As long as the balls are being launched to the right, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting prize entry point 16. If a minor win is achieved, the minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined. If a time-saving bonus is awarded, the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined (see Figure 142(a)).

When a minor win is achieved and minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined, a special game is executed when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the minor win game based on that determination. In this special game based on the determination of minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4, round games are executed 9 times (10 times in total including the minor win game), and approximately 1500 prize balls can be won.
Here, as described above, if the small winning symbol Y2 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, the reference time game state is a non-time-saving game state, so the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set after the special game ends (see Figure 143(b)).
On the other hand, if a minor win symbol Y3 or Y4 is determined in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the reference game state is a non-time-saving game state, and therefore the normal game state is set after the special game ends (see Figure 143(b)).

Furthermore, if a time-saving bonus is awarded, the reference game state is time-saving game state JT3. Therefore, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the display of the time-saving symbol J1. When the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 is set again after the display of the time-saving symbol J2 (see Figure 143(c)).

In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, if the player shoots to the right in accordance with the instructions during the low probability time-saving game state LJT3, if a small win is achieved, the player will transition to the low probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1) or the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) after executing a special game that is performed through that win, and if a time-saving bonus is awarded, the player will transition to the low probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2) or the low probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3) after the time-saving symbols are displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 144).
Furthermore, if a minor win is achieved, the probability of determining minor win symbol Y2 is 50%, the probability of determining minor win symbol Y3 is 25%, and the probability of determining minor win symbol Y4 is 25% (see Figure 142(a)). Therefore, the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is 50% (minor win symbol Y2), and the probability of transitioning to the non-time-saving game state is 50% (if minor win symbol Y3 or Y4 is determined).
Furthermore, if you win a time-saving bonus, there is a 65% chance of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, similar to the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1 and LJT2, and a 35% chance of resetting the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3. This means that transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is more likely than resetting the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3.

In this pachinko machine P, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (time-saving game state JT1), the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 (time-saving game state JT2), and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 (time-saving game state JT3), the decrease in game balls as the game progresses can be suppressed compared to the normal game state, due to the prize balls awarded based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize entry 16. Furthermore, in the special game that can be executed when a minor win is achieved in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number (win/loss lottery conducted during the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1, LJT2, and LJT3), it is possible to execute a larger number of rounds of gameplay than in the special game that can be executed when a minor win is achieved in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number (win/loss lottery conducted during the normal game state). Therefore, the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1, LJT2, and LJT3 are more advantageous game states than the normal game state.

Furthermore, if a minor win is achieved in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will be reset (with 100% probability) after the special game based on that win ends. In other words, if minor wins continue to be achieved in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the player will repeatedly stay in the highly advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
In contrast, if a minor win is achieved in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3, after the special game based on that win ends, there is a possibility of transitioning not only to the more advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, but also to the less advantageous normal game state. Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 after the special game based on a minor win ends is 75% (the probability of transitioning to the normal game state is 25%), and in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 after the special game based on a minor win ends is 50% (the probability of transitioning to the normal game state is 50%). In other words, if a minor win is achieved in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3, the player does not necessarily transition to the more advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, but may transition to the less advantageous normal game state, and the probability of transitioning to this normal game state is higher in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 than in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. Thus, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1, LJT2 and LJT3 are set so that the probability of transitioning to the less advantageous normal game state (the probability of transitioning to the more advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) when a minor win is achieved is different for each state, and among the low-probability time-saving game states LJT1, LJT2 and LJT3, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is the most advantageous game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 is the least advantageous game state.

Furthermore, if you win a time-saving bonus in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, LJT2, or LJT3, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3 will be set after the time-saving symbols stop. That is, if you win a time-saving bonus in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, you will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3. Once you transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3, you will not transition back to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 unless you win a minor prize. Until you win a minor prize, you will repeatedly stay in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3 based on the time-saving bonus wins.

Therefore, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, where there is no possibility of transitioning to the less advantageous normal game state upon winning a minor prize, the gameplay is designed to aim for the acquisition of a large number of prize balls by repeatedly winning minor prizes before winning the time-saving bonus, and by looping the execution of a special game that allows for the acquisition of approximately 1500 prize balls based on such wins with the setting of the advantageous low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. On the other hand, in the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2 and LJT3, where there is a possibility of transitioning to the normal game state upon winning a minor prize, the gameplay is designed to aim for not transitioning to the normal game state (transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) upon winning a minor prize, and to aim for winning a minor prize in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which is less likely to transition to the normal game state than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3.

Thus, in the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, after transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (a game state in which game is played in the second game area 12b), which is more advantageous than the normal game state (a game state in which game is played in the first game area 12a), the machine switches between staying in either the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3, which have different probabilities of transitioning back to the normal game state (to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1), depending on the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the winning of the time-saving bonus. This provides a novel gameplay experience where the ease of transitioning back to the normal game state differs depending on the current game state while gameplay is being played in the second game state 12b, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.

(Outline of processing in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, various processes are executed on the main control board 100 in accordance with the progress of the special symbol game, minor win game, and special game as described above. However, in this embodiment, there are no conditions for ending the time-saving bonus related to the winning of the time-saving bonus, and no processing related to the number of times the time-saving bonus is won is performed. Except for this, the same processes as in the sixth embodiment described above (see Figures 132 to 136, etc.) are executed. Therefore, the explanation of the processes in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be omitted.

(Overview of various effects in the pachinko machine P related to this form)
Next, an overview of the various effects performed by the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 145 to 149. Note that these figures only show the components necessary for explaining the effects in this embodiment, and other components (such as hold images and mini symbols) are omitted. Furthermore, components similar to those in the first to seventh embodiments will generally not be explained.

(1) Normal game state During the normal game state, the display unit 21a displays a normal background image corresponding to the normal game state (see Figures 145(a) to (c), etc.).

During normal gameplay, a variation effect is performed on the display unit 21a that notifies the result of the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbols.
Although not specifically illustrated, if the result of the draw is a loss, the variation animation will be executed using the same normal non-winning variation pattern, no-development reach variation pattern, or development reach variation pattern as in the first, sixth, and seventh forms, and the stop display of the animation symbol 50 will be shown according to the non-winning pattern.
Furthermore, if the result of the draw is a minor win (minor win symbol Y1 is determined), a variation performance is executed by either a reach variation without development or a reach variation with development, and after the performance symbol 50 is stopped according to the winning pattern, a special game execution indication is executed (for example, displaying a special game execution indication image that says "BONUS!!"), and a low probability time-saving LJT1 transition determination indication is executed (for example, displaying a low probability time-saving LJT1 transition determination image that says "RUSH acquired") (see Figures 145(d) to (f), etc.). After that, as with the 6th and 7th forms, various performances are performed in conjunction with the execution of the minor win game or special game (special area entry instruction performance, special area entry indication performance, special game performance, right-hand shooting indication, etc.).

(2) Low probability time-saving game state LJT1
When the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set, the display unit 21a displays a low-probability time-saving background image corresponding to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (see Figures 146(a) to (c), etc.), and a low-probability time-saving LJT1 setting suggestion effect is performed (for example, displaying a low-probability time-saving LJT1 setting suggestion image that says "RUSH Start!"), and a right-hand shooting suggestion is performed (see Figure 146(a), etc.).
Furthermore, if a minor win is achieved, an indication of the likelihood of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is displayed after the special game based on that win ends. In the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, as an indication of the likelihood of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a high transition indication image (for example, an image with the words "Safe Zone") is displayed (see Figures 146(a) to (c), etc.).

Furthermore, the display of the low-probability time-saving background image and the indication of the possibility of transitioning to LJT1, as described above, are performed not only during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, but also during the low-probability time-saving game states LJT2 and LJT3. In other words, during any game state in which game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b, the low-probability time-saving background image is displayed and the indication of the possibility of transitioning to LJT1 is performed. As will be described later, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, a medium transition suggestion image (for example, an image with the words "Advantage Zone") is displayed to indicate that there is a moderate possibility of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (see Figures 147(c) to (d), etc.), and in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, a low transition suggestion image (for example, an image with the words "Disadvantage Zone") is displayed to indicate that there is a low possibility of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 (see Figures 149(c) to (e), etc.).
As a result, during gameplay where game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b, depending on the displayed background image, it becomes difficult to determine whether the player is in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, LJT2, or LJT3. However, since the possibility of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 based on winning a small prize in each game state is announced, it is possible to give the impression that the player remains in game state 1 while only the possibility of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 changes.

During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a variation effect is performed on the display unit 21a that notifies the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbols.
Although not specifically illustrated, if the result of the lottery is a loss, a special variation pattern similar to that of the 7th form, etc., will be executed, and the stop display of the effect symbol 50 will be shown in a non-winning manner.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, if the result of the draw is a minor win and minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined, a special variation pattern will be executed, and after the stop display of the effect symbol 50 according to the winning pattern, an indication of execution of a special game and an indication of transition to the low probability time reduction LJT1 will be executed (for example, the display of a continuation indication image that says "RUSH continues") (see Figures 146(b) to (d), etc.). After that, as in (1), various effects associated with the execution of the minor win game or special game (special area entry instruction effect, special area entry indication effect, special game in-game effect, right-hand shooting indication, etc.) will be performed.
In the pachinko machine P according to this configuration, when a winning symbol that will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is determined, the first, second, and third stop symbols are all displayed as odd-numbered performance symbols 50 (see Figure 146(c), etc.), and when a winning symbol that will transition to the normal game state is determined, the first, second, and third stop symbols are all displayed as even-numbered performance symbols 50 (see Figures 148(g), 149(g), etc.). As a result, the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 can be identified by the display of odd-numbered performance symbols 50 for the first, second, and third stop symbols, and the transition to the normal game state can be identified by the display of even-numbered performance symbols 50 for the first, second, and third stop symbols.
If a minor win is achieved during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, regardless of whether the minor win symbol Y2, Y3, or Y4 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set after the special game based on that determination, and the stop display will show an odd-numbered performance symbol 50 (see Figure 146(c), etc.).

Furthermore, if the result of the lottery is a win for a time-saving bonus and either the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, a special variation pattern will be executed, the stop display of the effect symbol 50 will be shown in the non-winning pattern (see Figures 147(a)-(b), 148(a)-(b), etc.), and an indication of the possibility of transitioning to LJT1 will be displayed. If the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 will be set after the stop display of the time-saving symbol J1, and the aforementioned medium transition indication image will be displayed as an indication of the possibility of transitioning to LJT1 (see Figures 147(c), 148(c), etc.). If the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 will be set after the stop display of the time-saving symbol J2, and the aforementioned low transition indication image will be displayed as an indication of the possibility of transitioning to LJT1 (see Figure 149(c), etc.).

(3) Low probability time-saving game state LJT2
During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the display unit 21a displays a low-probability time-saving background image (see Figures 147(c) to (e), etc.), similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1. In addition, an image suggesting a transition to LJT1 is displayed as an indication of the possibility of transitioning to LJT1 (see Figures 147(c) to (e), etc.).

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, just like during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a variation effect is performed on the display unit 21a that notifies the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbols.
Although not specifically illustrated, if the result of the draw is a loss, the variation animation will be executed using a normal non-winning variation pattern or a development-enabled reach variation pattern, similar to the 7th form, and the stop display of the animation symbol 50 will be shown according to the non-winning pattern.

Furthermore, if the result of the draw is a minor win, and the minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 (the minor win symbol that leads to the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) is determined, a variation performance will be executed according to the development-enabled reach variation pattern, and after the odd-numbered performance symbols 50 are displayed to stop depending on the winning pattern (see Figures 147(d) to (g)), a special game execution indication and a transition to the low-probability time-saving LJT1 decision indication (display of a continuation indication image that says "RUSH continues") will be executed (see Figure 147(h), etc.). After that, various performances (special area entry instruction performance, special area entry indication performance, special game performance, right-hand shooting indication, etc.) will be performed in the same way as in (1) and (2).
Furthermore, if the result of the draw is a minor win and the minor win symbol Y4 (the minor win symbol that leads to the normal game state) is determined, a variation performance will be executed according to the development-enabled reach variation pattern, and after the even-numbered performance symbols 50 are displayed to stop depending on the winning pattern (see Figures 148(e) to (g), etc.), an indication of execution of a special game and an indication of a decision to transition to the normal game state (for example, the display of an image indicating a decision to transition to the normal game state that says "RUSH Ended") will be executed (see Figure 148(h), etc.). After that, various performances (special area entry instruction performance, special area entry indication performance, special game performance, right-hand shooting indication, etc.) will be performed in the same manner as in (1) and (2). Furthermore, at the end of the special game described above, after transitioning from the normal game state to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a result display (see Figure 148(i), etc.) is executed that suggests the number of special games played and the total number of prize balls won during the period before transitioning back to the normal game state. When the special game ends and the normal game state is set, the display unit 21a displays the normal background image (see Figure 148(j), etc.) and suggests left-handed play (see Figure 148(j), etc.).

Furthermore, if the result of the lottery is a win for a time-saving bonus and either the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, the variation animation will be executed according to the normal non-winning variation pattern, and the stop display of the animation symbol 50 will be shown according to the non-winning pattern. If the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the same low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 as before the stop display will be set after the stop display of the time-saving symbol J1. Therefore, the display of the aforementioned medium transition suggestion image will continue as an indication of the possibility of transitioning to LJT1. If the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 will be set after the stop display of the time-saving symbol J2. Therefore, the display of the aforementioned low transition suggestion image will continue as an indication of the possibility of transitioning to LJT1 (see Figures 149(a) to (c), etc.).

(4) Low probability time-saving game state LJT3
During the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, the display unit 21a displays a low-probability time-saving background image (see Figures 149(c) to (e), etc.), similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2. In addition, a low transition suggestion image is displayed to indicate the possibility of transitioning to LJT1 (see Figures 149(c) to (e), etc.).

Furthermore, during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, just like during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 or LJT2, a variation effect is performed on the display unit 21a that notifies the result of the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbols.
The animation for when the result of the lottery is a loss is the same as the animation for when the result is a loss during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, so the explanation will be omitted.

Furthermore, if the result of the draw is a minor win and minor win symbol Y2 (the minor win symbol that transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) is determined, the variation animation is the same as the variation animation when minor win symbol Y2 or Y3 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. Similarly, if minor win symbol Y3 or Y4 (the minor win symbol that transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) is determined (see Figures 149(f) to (h), etc.), the variation animation is the same as the variation animation when minor win symbol Y4 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2; therefore, the explanation is omitted.

Furthermore, similar to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, if the result of the draw is a win for time-saving and time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, the variation animation will be executed according to the normal non-winning variation pattern, and the stop display of the animation symbol 50 will be shown according to the non-winning pattern. If time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 is set after the stop display of time-saving symbol J1, and the above-mentioned transition suggestion image is displayed as an indication of the possibility of transitioning to LJT1. If time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the same low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 as before the stop display is set after the stop display of time-saving symbol J2, and the above-mentioned low transition suggestion image continues to be displayed as an indication of the possibility of transitioning to LJT1.

(Modified version of the pachinko machine P according to this form)
(1) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, in the lottery for winning or losing based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize entry opening 15 or the second starting prize entry opening 16, it was possible to win only minor prizes, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the system may be set up so that a different lottery result from a minor win is possible, and a big win that triggers a special game can also be won. Furthermore, even when a big win is achieved, it may be possible to perform control over the setting of the time-saving game state in the same manner as in this form.
Specifically, for example, the system is set so that a jackpot can be won in the draw based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot 15, and a jackpot symbol X1 is determined when a jackpot is determined. When a jackpot symbol X1 is determined, it may be possible to perform control regarding the setting of a time-saving game state in the same way as when a minor prize symbol Y1 is determined in this embodiment. Alternatively, when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined, it may be possible to perform control regarding the setting of a time-saving game state different from when a minor prize symbol Y1 is determined. For example, if a jackpot symbol X1 is determined during normal gameplay, instead of transitioning to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3 may be set after the special game based on that determination ends.
Furthermore, for example, the system may be set so that a jackpot can be won in the draw based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot 16, and if a jackpot is determined, a jackpot symbol X2, X3, or X4 is determined. When a jackpot symbol X2 is determined, control regarding the setting of the time-saving game state can be performed in the same way as when a minor prize symbol Y2 is determined in this embodiment. When a jackpot symbol X3 is determined, control regarding the setting of the time-saving game state can be performed in the same way as when a minor prize symbol Y3 is determined in this embodiment. When a jackpot symbol X4 is determined, control regarding the setting of the time-saving game state can be performed in the same way as when a minor prize symbol Y4 is determined in this embodiment. Alternatively, instead of controlling the setting of the same time-saving game state, it may be possible to control the setting of different time-saving game states. For example, if a jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the normal game state may be set after the special game based on that determination ends. If a jackpot symbol X4 is determined during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 may be set after the special game based on that determination ends.
Furthermore, there may be multiple types of winning symbols that are determined when a jackpot is won, and control may be performed to set different time-saving game states for each type of winning symbol.
Even in the manner described above, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(2) In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, there was only one type of small win symbol that was determined when a small win was achieved in the win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, but this is not limited to this, and multiple types of small win symbols may be provided. Furthermore, control may be performed regarding the setting of the time-saving game state according to the determined small win symbol (for example, different control may be performed regarding the setting of the time-saving game state depending on the type of small win symbol determined).
For example, the system may be configured so that when a minor win is achieved through a win/loss lottery based on the first special symbol random number, multiple types of minor win symbols can be determined. If a predetermined minor win symbol is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 is set after the special game executed via that determination ends. If a minor win symbol different from the predetermined minor win symbol is determined, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT3 is set after the special game executed via that determination ends. Alternatively, minor win symbols may be provided that result in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) being set after the special game ends. Furthermore, similar to (1) above, the same types of symbols can be adopted for the big win symbols.
Even in the manner described above, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(3) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the remaining number of special symbol variations and the remaining number of minor wins are updated in the special symbol variation stop processing, and the time when the processing to set the game state based on said update is executed is set to be the reference time, and the game state at that time is set to be the reference time game state, but the reference time is not limited to this.
For example, the remaining number of special symbol variations and the remaining number of minor wins may be updated at any point between the start of the special symbol variation display and the end of the variation display and the expiration of the stop display time (e.g., the start of the special symbol variation display, any point during the variation display, or the expiration of the stop display time), and the point in time when the game state setting process based on the update is executed may be set as the reference point, and the game state at that point may be set as the reference point game state.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(4) In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the game states in which game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b include a low probability time-saving game state LJT1 in which the game does not transition to the normal game state based on the determination of the winning symbols, a low probability time-saving game state LJT2 in which there is a possibility of transitioning to the normal game state based on the determination of the winning symbols, but the possibility is relatively low, and a low probability time-saving game state LJT3 in which there is a possibility of transitioning to the normal game state based on the determination of the winning symbols, but the game states are not limited to these.
For example, a low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 may be provided, which always transitions to the normal game state based on the determination of the minor win symbols. Specifically, if a minor win is achieved in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 and minor win symbols Y2, Y3, or Y4 are determined, the system may be set to transition to the normal game state after the special game based on that determination ends. Alternatively, the system may be set so that a predetermined time-saving symbol (such as the time-saving symbol J3 that leads to the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4) is determined when a time-saving bonus is awarded, and the system may be set to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT4 when the predetermined time-saving symbol is determined.
Furthermore, as a control method to ensure a transition to the normal game state based on the determination of a minor win symbol, for example, a special minor win symbol (a so-called "fall-down minor win") may be provided that transitions to the normal game state after the special game ends, regardless of the game state (the game state at the time of reference). When such a special minor win symbol is provided, it is preferable to set a condition for the end of the time-saving feature that, in addition to the condition that the number of minor wins reaches the number of minor wins that end (255 times), the number of times the special minor win symbol is determined reaches the number of times the special feature ends (1 time). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the execution of a strategy that prevents a transition to the normal game state by not allowing a predetermined number of game balls to enter the special area during the minor win game based on the determination of the special minor win symbol.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(5) In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a minor win is achieved during normal gameplay and the minor win symbol Y1 is determined, the machine is set to transition to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 after the special game based on that determination has ended. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the machine may transition to a low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P relating to this form, if a time-saving bonus is awarded in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3 (when the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined), the machine transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3 and does not transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, but it is not limited to this. For example, the machine may be set so that when a time-saving bonus is awarded, a predetermined time-saving symbol (such as the time-saving symbol J3 which will transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1) is determined, and if the predetermined time-saving symbol is determined, the machine may be set to transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(6) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, when a time-saving bonus is awarded in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the machine transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the machine transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, but it is not limited to this.
For example, in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, which is set after the end of a special game, the system may be configured so that when either the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. This means that if a time-saving bonus is awarded in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the game will not transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, which is less advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2. Conversely, the system may be configured so that when either the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3. This means that if a time-saving bonus is awarded in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the game will not transition to the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, which is more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(7) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, LJT2, or LJT3, it is possible to determine the same variation pattern (2-second variation) in both cases: when it is a loss and when it is a win that grants time-saving.
For example, if, after the display of the time-saving symbols, a time-saving symbol is determined that results in the same time-saving game state as the one set before the display, the same variation pattern as when it was a miss will be determined. However, if, after the display of the time-saving symbols, a time-saving symbol is determined that results in a time-saving game state different from the one set before the display, a different variation pattern than when it was a miss (for example, a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern determined when it was a miss) may be determined.
Specifically, for example, when a win/loss lottery is held based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, if it is a loss, a 2-second variation pattern may be determined; if time-saving is awarded and time-saving symbol J1 (the time-saving symbol that triggers the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) is determined, a 2-second variation pattern may be determined; and if time-saving is awarded and time-saving symbol J2 (the time-saving symbol that triggers the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3) is determined, a 10-second variation pattern may be determined.
Furthermore, for example, if a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, the following settings may be made: if it is a loss, a 2-second variation pattern is determined; if time-saving is awarded and time-saving symbol J1 (the time-saving symbol that triggers the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2) is determined, a 10-second variation pattern is determined; and if time-saving is awarded and time-saving symbol J2 (the time-saving symbol that triggers the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3) is determined, a 2-second variation pattern may be determined.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as the pachinko machine P relating to this form will be achieved. Furthermore, if a time-saving game state different from the currently set time-saving game state is set based on the winning of the time-saving bonus, the variation time will be made longer than when there is a miss, so that the notification that the time-saving game state has been set can be reliably grasped. On the other hand, if the same time-saving game state as the currently set time-saving game state is set based on the winning of the time-saving bonus, the above notification will not be necessary, and the variation time will be made the same as when there is a miss, so the game can be made to progress more smoothly.

Furthermore, if a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT2, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the performance symbol 50 may be stopped in the same manner as when it is a loss, and if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the first, second, and third stop symbols may all be stopped and displayed with a special performance symbol 50 (for example, a blue "J" symbol) indicating that the time-saving bonus has been awarded and the time-saving symbol J2 has been determined.
Furthermore, if a win/loss lottery is conducted based on the second special symbol random number during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT3, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the performance symbol 50 may be stopped in the same manner as when it is a loss, and if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the first stop symbol, second stop symbol, and third stop symbol may all be stopped and displayed with a special performance symbol 50 (for example, a red "J" symbol) indicating that the time-saving bonus has been awarded and the time-saving symbol J1 has been determined.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this form, since there is a difference in the degree of advantage for the player between the low probability time-saving game states LJT2 and LJT3, special display symbols 50 may be provided, which are symbols that can identify the winning of time-saving symbols J1 or J2 (for example, symbols with words such as "advantageous" or "chance" that suggest the winning of time-saving symbol J1 (that it is advantageous for the player), and symbols with words such as "dangerous" or "pinch" that suggest the winning of time-saving symbol J2 (that it is disadvantageous for the player), and the machine may be configured to stop displaying the symbols 50.

(8) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, if a minor win is achieved during the low probability time-saving game state LJT1, an indication will be given that a special game will be performed each time, but this is not limited to this.
If a small win is won repeatedly during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, the execution of the special game based on the win and the setting of the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will combine to increase the total number of prize balls acquired. For example, in order to give the impression that the period from when the special game starts based on a small win in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 until the time-saving bonus is awarded is a series of periods in which the number of prize balls increases (i.e., the period in which the special game 1 is continuing), a special image indicating that the special game is being executed may be continuously displayed during the period in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 when the special symbols can be displayed to change, or an animation showing the acquisition of prize balls being added each time a small win is won may be performed to give the impression that the prize balls acquired during the special game 1 are being added on top of each other.
In this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved, and it will be possible to further enhance the player's interest in the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1.

(9) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, when a low probability time-saving game state LJT2 or LJT3 ends based on the winning of a minor prize and the normal game state is set, if the same special 2 remaining reserves as in the seventh form are stored, when a minor prize is won or time-saving is awarded based on the special 2 remaining reserves, the processing is performed in the same way as when the reference time game state is a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), and the determination of the time-saving symbols is invalidated, but this is not limited to this. For example, the determination of time-saving symbols may be set to be effective even when the reference time game state is a non-time-saving game state, and when a special 2 remaining reserve is stored when the normal game state is set and time-saving is awarded in the win/loss lottery based on the special 2 remaining reserves, one of the low probability time-saving game states LJT1, LJT2 or LJT3 may be set depending on the type of time-saving symbol determined.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

(10) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the probability of winning a minor win was set to be lower than the probability of winning a time-saving bonus in the win/loss lottery based on the second special symbol random number, but it is not limited to this, and it may also be set to be higher than the probability of winning a minor win.
In this case, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P in this form will be achieved, and the probability of winning a small prize during the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1 will increase, thereby further enhancing the player's enjoyment.

(11) In the pachinko machine P relating to this form, the condition for ending the time-saving game state LJT1, LJT2, or LJT3 is that the number of times the special symbols change reaches the number of time-saving game states, but the condition for ending the time-saving game is not limited to this.
For example, the time-saving mode may be terminated when the number of times the normal symbols change reaches a predetermined number of times. Then, by setting the predetermined number to a number that is almost never reached in consideration of the probability of winning a minor prize (for example, 10,000 times), the low-probability time-saving game state LJT1, LJT2, or LJT3 may be set to continue in effect until a minor prize is won.
Even in this case, the same effects and advantages as those of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment will be achieved.

Furthermore, the various settings and controls for each of the above-described forms and modifications may be combined with each other to the extent that they do not create contradictions.
Furthermore, the various controls described above may also be adopted in a managed gaming machine. Here, a managed gaming machine is configured such that (A) the player plays by launching game balls onto the game board of the managed gaming machine, (B) there are no upper or lower trays, and the player cannot directly touch the game balls, (C) the minimum number of balls required for launching are circulated within the gaming machine, (D) the number of game balls and acquired game balls are managed and displayed as numerical data in the managed gaming machine, and (E) at the end of the game, the number of game balls managed in the managed gaming machine can be transferred to a dedicated unit for management by pressing a counting switch.

Furthermore, the second starting prize entry opening 16 in the seventh form corresponds to a predetermined starting area of the present invention. The movable piece 16b in the seventh form corresponds to a variable means of the present invention. The state in which the movable piece 16b is operating in the seventh form corresponds to the first operating state of the present invention. The state in which the movable piece 16b is not operating in the seventh form corresponds to the second operating state of the present invention. The small win game in the seventh form corresponds to the large prize entry opening game of the present invention. The determination of the small win symbol Y2 in the seventh form corresponds to the first determination result of the present invention. The determination of the time-saving symbol J1 in the seventh form corresponds to the second determination result of the present invention. The main CPU 101 that performs the win/fail lottery and the determination of the special symbol in the seventh form corresponds to the determination means of the present invention. The non-time-saving game state in the seventh form corresponds to the normal state of the present invention. The main CPU 101 that sets the time-saving game state in the seventh form corresponds to the setting means of the present invention. The time-saving game state JT1 (low probability time-saving game state LJT1) in the seventh form corresponds to the first easy prize entry state of the present invention. In the seventh form, the time-saving game state JT4 (low probability time-saving game state LJT4) corresponds to the second easy-to-win state of the present invention. In the seventh form, the time-saving game state JT2 (low probability time-saving game state LJT2) corresponds to the third easy-to-win state of the present invention. In the seventh form, the pachinko machine P corresponds to the game machine of the present invention.

P Pachinko machine 100 Main control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
300 Sub-control board 301 Sub-CPU
302 Sub-ROM
303 Sub-RAM

Claims (1)

A variable means that can be displaced to a first operating state in which the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting area is relatively easy, or to a second operating state in which the entry of a game ball into the predetermined starting area is relatively difficult,
A determination means capable of deriving either a first determination result associated with the execution of a game in which a predetermined prize-winning opening is performed, based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting area, or a second determination result associated with the non-execution of the game in which the prize-winning opening is performed.
Based on the derivation of the first decision result, an execution means is provided to execute the game of opening the grand prize winning slot,
The system includes setting means capable of performing a setting related to a prize-winning-friendly state in which the variable means is more likely to enter a first operating state than a predetermined normal state,
The easy-to-win state ends when the number of derivations by the determination means reaches the number of time reductions determined for each easy-to-win state.
The easy-to-win state includes a first easy-to-win state, a second easy-to-win state which is more advantageous than the first easy-to-win state because it is determined that there are more time-saving rounds than in the first easy-to-win state, a third easy-to-win state in which the conditions for becoming the second easy-to-win state can be met, and a fourth easy-to-win state.
The fourth state of ease of winning a prize is, in effect, a state of ease of winning a prize that can continue until the first decision result is derived by the decision-making means.
The setting method is,
If the second determination result is derived in the first easy-to-win state, then a third easy-to-win state can be set.
If the second decision result is derived in the third easy-to-win state, the first easy-to-win state can be set.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the first determination result is derived in the third easy-to-win state, the second easy-to-win state can be set via the fourth easy-to-win state based on the execution of the big prize opening game.